v^^y/wv. 
 
 
 ■•X.v, 
 
 ilVv^v 
 
 Wm 
 
 /M 
 
 ^ *? 
 
 
 f?,Vwww*vvyv 
 
 M 
 
 -f^ 
 
 *«*i^ 
 
 
 i?^-#^ 
 
 
 'f *yVǤ>^f i^'^;j,^5>^S^te|yS'' 
 
 ^j^SSS^«^5 
 
 -^^-w^^w"^''"'^"^^' 
 
 
 <-' 
 
 •'4.-^-:/ 
 
 
 ^w, 
 
 W.tfw'vV 
 
 ?%#i^ 
 
 , l:'-'C;ai£.'^'-1?«i3- .1 i 'f^-ir^ 
 
 -^. .,4 ^.^^^ ^- J^^^wVg^^^^^ 
 
 
 ,Vv 
 
 ■,iM, 
 
 V'^ 
 
 K^aȣ 
 
 |.i?5^- 
 
 ^f 
 
 ^vvv:::,. 
 
 ©*^ys>Vy ,■: ;-yWWWV\jjVV«i.vV*;; 
 
 
 ^M 
 
 n^y^-^,^. 
 
 ^%^iil.
 
 mm 
 
 1
 
 ./^^ 
 
 5'
 
 ^f
 
 1817" Wade (Th. Fr.)The Hsin-ChiDg-Lu, 
 or Book of Experiments, "ith the 
 Peking Syllabary, 7 parts, foUo. Jiong 
 Kong, 1859 ^^ ^"^
 
 
 
 THE 
 
 HSIN CHING LU, 
 
 BOOK OF EXPEEIMENTS ; 
 
 BEINQ 
 
 THE FIRST OF A SERIES 
 
 OP 
 
 CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE STUDY OF CHINESE. 
 
 BY 
 
 THOMAS nUNCIS WADE 
 
 CHINESE SECRETARY. "*" 
 
 mr^ 'M ± z^ m 
 
 it&u, B.C. 231. 
 
 HONGKONG. 
 
 MDCCCLIX.
 
 PRINTED AT THE OFFICE OF THE "Cfl/-V^ iT^TL,'
 
 f>tl-^ 
 
 5 
 
 
 TO 
 
 IN GRATEFUL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF HIS GUIDANCE AND ASSISTANCE, 
 
 THIS VOLUME 
 
 OF EXPERIMENTS UPON THE STUDY 
 
 OP 
 
 THE PEKING DIALECT, 
 
 BY HIS OBLIGED FRIEND 
 
 THE WRITER. 

 
 ll(iMiK<j.\(i, \:i//i Mfij, \iit)\). 
 
 Tlie HsiN CiiiN(i LiJ, or Wrifhui of one in /search of a Furd, as its name will shew, is not so mucli 
 ii g'uide-book as the composition of a iiiiiu still in quest of the rij^-lit way. 
 
 The student of the Pekinf;- Dialect who may make use of the book, is recommended to bind sepa- 
 rately the Eni^-lish text in one volunu^, the Chinese text in a second, and the Peking- Syllabary in a 
 third; and, b(^fore all things, to correct both English and Chinese texts by the tables of Errata, the amount 
 of which will be exi!used by those who have had experience of printing- works in the two languages in this 
 country. 
 
 The writer has, besides, many shortcomings for which he alone is responsible, to apologise for ; so 
 many that did time and circumstances admit of it, no page of this edition should see the light. 
 
 The idea of venturing on such a ])iece of authorship was suggested by the wants of the Student 
 Interpreters in the service of the British Government. A few of these gentlemen were at Hongkong- 
 when the writer entered on the duties of Chinese Secretary in 1855. For want of a better text-book Ik^ 
 i-ecommended the study of the Sacred Edict, a translation of the first chapter of which with a commen- 
 tary is given in Part II. Subsequently some rough material, more or less in a state of preparation, was 
 worked up into Part I. This chapter, entitled the Category of T'ien, was the foundation-experiment of 
 a projected vocabulary of the Peking language. Excellent matter for such a book is su[>plied by various 
 native vocabularies, arranged, though with far less elaborateness than that excellent woi-k, somewhat 
 on the plan of Roget's Thesaunis, that is to say in groups of words and phrases under classes of ideas. 
 The first of the Chinese categories in such encyclopaedias is always t^ien, heaven. A good native scholar, 
 boi-n and bred in the capital, was directed to examine this categoiy, to exclude and exchange all words 
 notpurely colloquial, and to compose under every one he retained or acce])ted, a sentence in pure colloquial, 
 illustrative of its use. This with much pain, for, used only to write a book-language, a lettered Chinese is 
 sore troubled to put talk, as it is spoken, upon paper, he at last accomplished; and the chapter, as well as the 
 Peking Syllabary, was in a state of forwardness at the end of 1856. The undertaking- was then brought 
 to a standstill by events which must have interfered with many others, of possibly g-raver importance ; 
 and now, in dread of farther delay, the writer, availing himself (jf a i&w weeks breathing-time on which 
 he has happily fallen, has hurried through the press a third Part, which, from the nature of its subject, 
 demands a far more delicate treatment than it has been in his power to bestow upon it. This will 
 account not only for the blunders in the Chinese text, but, to scholars old enough to criticise, and thev 
 begin betimes, for the crudit}' and incompleteness of the remarks upon the Tones and Pronunciation in 
 the 3d Section of Part III. These, it is hoped, may be in some sort redeemed in Part IV., which will 
 illustrate all the discrepancies, or varieties, tabled in the Appendix to the Syllabary. Whatever its 
 defects, however, the English of the Hsin ChingLu will be found an idiomatic version of the Chinese text, 
 the first and second Parts of which contain some 400 examples oi bond fide Pekinese. These subdivided 
 will give the student nearly' two thousand short sentences, by constant exercise in the like of which our 
 best interpreters have best succeeded. Witli the dictionary of Morrison, or Medhurst, he will easily spell 
 his way through these where the commentary fails him ; but, above all, let him be unwearied in liis 
 attention to those illustrating- Tones, in the third chapter. 
 
 The Dialect of Peking is to China what the Parisian of the salons is to France. It is forty years 
 since Dr. Morrison piedicted that it would corrupt the general language of the Empire, and we make 
 bold to say that this prediction has been to a great extent fulfilled. The officials born at a distance 
 from Peking strive generallj'' to catch the Peking accent ; it is the tashion to acquire it. In the distant 
 province of Kuang Tung, in 1844, Mr. Meadows tells us from the Red Book, 74 of the 231 civilians of 
 the establishment, were natives of Peking, and 15, provincials of Chili Li. The latest work published at 
 Canton to teach the Cantonese to speak mandarin, has entireh' remodelled the old orthograjihy in several 
 syllables, in which the Peking sounds are fairly approximated. There can be no doubt therefore which 
 is the dialect an official interj.ireter should learn. 
 
 It is his foremost duty to learn the spoken language ; for all our respect for the labours of 
 Morrison, Gon(;alves, and others, will not prevent our turning- with despair from their dictionaries to our 
 patient living lexii-ons, our ill-paid Chinese teachers, so recklessly disparaged by Mr. Wingrove Cooke. 
 From these men, some of whom, though poor and mean -looking-, are perfect mines of literary wealth, to 
 extract such portion of their store as we require, we must talk, and talk well. To do this, we must 
 apply earnestly to the sjjoken language ; we shall labour best while our zeal is fi-esii, but we must expect 
 to labour long. There is no such fallacy as the notion that a student may rest on his oars as soon as he 
 finds that " he and his teacher undei-stand each other perfectlj^ well." The plain English of this is that 
 his teacher is now sufficiently used to his bad Chinese to comprehend one third of it, and has ceased to 
 cori-ect him. The pupil receives answers to his queries accordinglj', and arrives at conclusions of which 
 it takes years to disabuse him. It is precisely because, over eager in his assault upon the written 
 language, and confident in the facility of Ins ear, he fell into the snare he is exposing, that the writer, as, 
 "descending into his conscience," he is constrained to admit is the lact, has never spoken Chinese either 
 readily or extensively. 
 
 To the desired end our elementary means are few. The best is perhaps Gon(;alves's Arte China, but 
 it is written in Portuguese, a tongue few Englishmen under age have cared to cultivate. If the writer's 
 health and strength be spared him it is his purpose one day to produce a Student's Manual somewhat in 
 the style of the Arte. Meanwhile, _/«M^f' de mie^ix, he commends to the student a cheerfid investigation 
 of the following pages, ]iersuaded that his labour will not be wholly unremunerative ; and with all humi- 
 lity reminding him, should the aid the}' afibrd fall short of the exjiectations their folio stature and pomp 
 of tj'pe may have awakened, that, in a campaign so arduous as that before him, no honest auxiliary, be 
 his guise what it may, is beneath his notice. To render freely the words of the ancient statesman quoted 
 on the title page, — 
 
 Tlie hill doth not (Iceliiie its clod of earth, 
 
 Nor dotli tlio flood elect wliat stream shall t'eoil it. 
 
 T. F. W.
 
 ERKOilfS AND 0M1ISSI0N8 in mi: ENGLISH TEXT. 
 TART I. T'im Lei. 
 
 I 1, S 1", ohs. 3, ; 
 
 >'or 
 
 sun, iiioiiii, iiinl utlicr 
 
 2,h 24, 
 
 J) 
 
 tVoiii thu Heaven 
 
 Z,S M,obii.l, 
 
 11 
 
 hid 
 
 h 3(5, uhs. 4, 
 
 JT 
 
 3 to 5 P.M. 
 
 § 41, 
 
 »? 
 
 ChHh Nil 
 
 5, § 53, ohs. 2, 
 
 17 
 
 see 56 
 
 h 01, obs. 1, 
 
 
 cli'^ang 
 
 § 03, 
 
 11 
 
 too liot or 
 
 G,h 08, 
 
 11 
 
 it will seen 
 
 § 72, ohs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 'huo 
 
 7, § 78, 
 
 11 
 
 noon when 
 
 
 11 
 
 meridian tliat 
 
 ohs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 neutralise 
 
 § 85, ohs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 eh'ii 
 
 8, § 97, obs. 4, 
 
 11 
 
 verb ,<thih 
 
 9, § 104, 
 
 11 
 
 yiian the moon 
 
 oh.'i. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 c^hi .?hi/i 
 
 10, § 121, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 hsinij suit 
 
 11, § 126, obs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 ■pen 
 
 § 127, ofe. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 sa<;ittarius 
 
 % 132, 
 
 11 
 
 T^h 
 
 12, § 140, ohs. 
 
 11 
 
 ta-tmg 
 
 S 143, obs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 color nor 
 
 14, h 100, «i.?. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 see 184 
 
 ^ lOfi, 0&.S. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 ch'en-chen-ti 
 
 15, h 107, oJ.s. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 c'ka 
 
 § 108, ohs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 c'hi 
 
 § 170, obs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 pi'eA 
 
 S 170, obs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 c'hang 
 
 16, % 180, 
 
 » 
 
 if it strike, &c. 
 
 obs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 it is also, &c. 
 
 16, § 184, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 t'ien 
 
 17, § 188, obs. 7, 
 
 ,, 
 
 besides its nse 
 
 § 191, oJ*\ 1, 
 
 ,, 
 
 clvien 
 
 18, 5, J 90, obs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 sheny 
 
 § 197, obs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 hsi'a 
 
 obs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 do hard 
 
 5, 198, ohs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 hao 
 
 19, S 204, 
 
 .1 
 
 or though it be a 
 
 
 11 
 
 bear 
 
 § 208, obs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 decomes 
 
 § 210, oh.s. 4, 
 
 11 
 
 para. 13 
 
 20, § 211, ohs. 3, 
 
 It 
 
 yu-yii-cho 
 
 §212, 
 
 11 
 
 food or clothing- 
 
 21, § 217, ohs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 hung 
 
 § 218, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 t sting 
 
 22, § 220, 
 
 11 
 
 come come on 
 
 § 228, obs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 shih-fun-ti 
 
 § 229, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 miao miao vr/t 
 
 oJ«. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 yiln 
 
 § 230, obs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 ch'eng-tsan 
 
 obs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 t2u-Uung 
 
 >i 
 
 11 
 
 ti-'hou 
 
 ofo. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 hsiang-ju 
 
 23, § 231, oh.?. 2, 
 
 , 
 
 time an expression 
 
 § 232, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 chsng shih 
 
 ^ 234, obs. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 [no] 
 
 24, § 238, ohs. 7, 
 
 11 
 
 na-h'ua [-VA-Z«] 
 
 25, § 244, ohs. 3, 
 
 11 
 
 tien-shang 
 
 
 11 
 
 see 120, ofc. 3 
 
 26, § 253, obs. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 ch'cnig 
 
 % 255, ofe. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 chien teng 
 
 27, § 258, obs. 5, 
 
 11 
 
 pai t'ui 
 
 § 260, ohs. 3, 
 
 • 11 
 
 see 203, obs. 3 
 
 %261, 
 
 11 
 
 fi-ee away 
 
 28, § 202, oZ/«. 3, 
 
 t 11 
 
 tz'ii 
 
 § 203, ohs. 3, 
 
 ' 11 
 
 here broke out 
 
 
 11 
 
 the yellow insect 
 
 h 264, <?/!»«. 1, 
 
 11 
 
 idomatic 
 
 o6«. 2, 
 
 11 
 
 see 259, ohs. 4 
 
 ^ 266, o6.?. 1, 
 
 
 ch'mg 
 
 §267, 
 
 ,, 
 
 Jhig 
 
 29, h 275, «fe. 4, 
 
 ,, 
 
 Ive wai 
 
 30, !. 270. obs. 3, 
 
 ., 
 
 p'icn ch'ii 
 
 bodies, (fee, read sun, nioon, and stuis 
 „ from Heaven 
 ,, 'hei 
 
 „ A.M. 
 
 „ CMh Nil 
 
 „ see 65 
 
 „ chang 
 
 ,, too hot nor 
 
 „ it will seem 
 
 „ 'ho 
 
 „ noon, when 
 
 ,, meridian, that 
 
 ,, confirm 
 
 ,, ch'-ii 
 
 „ substantive verb shih 
 
 „ yiian, the moon 
 
 ,, ch'i shih 
 
 „ hsing hsii 
 
 11 pen 
 
 „ Sag-ittarius 
 
 „ T6 
 
 ,, ta teng 
 
 ,, colour or 
 
 „ see 221, obs. 1 : 272, ohs. 1. 
 
 „ ch'en-ch'cn-ti 
 
 „ ch'a 
 
 11 ch'i 
 
 ,, p'ien 
 
 „ ch'ang 
 
 „ any one standing' by may also be 
 
 killed by the shock 
 
 „ he also can be, or may be, chen 
 
 szu, dinned to death 
 
 „ tien 
 
 ,, besides ; its tise 
 
 „ chien 
 
 „ sheng 
 
 „ hsia 
 
 „ veril}- to do hard 
 
 ,, 'hao 
 
 „ or, though it be, a 
 
 ,, hear 
 
 ,, becomes 
 
 ,, para. 12 
 
 „ yu yii-cho 
 
 „ food nor clothing- 
 
 „ 'hung 
 
 11 f-'^'^ng 
 
 ,, come on 
 
 ,, shih-fin-ti 
 
 „ mai miao nrh 
 
 11 j«« 
 
 ,, ch'eng-t.mn 
 
 ,, tzii-ts'nng 
 
 „ chih-'hoii, 
 
 „ lisiang-jui 
 
 ,, time ; an expression 
 
 „ cheng shih 
 
 11 [no-] 
 
 ,, Tui-k'uai- rh-lai 
 
 „ t'ien shang 
 
 „ see 172, ohs. 5 
 
 „ chang 
 
 „ chien leng 
 
 „ pai tui. 
 
 „ see 202, obs. 3 
 
 „ free way 
 
 11 ''" 
 
 „ there broke out 
 
 „ the imperial insect 
 
 „ idiomatic 
 
 „ 259, ohs. 3 
 
 „ ch'e.ng 
 
 11 .feng ' 
 ,, he wai 
 ., picH ch'u .
 
 ERRORS A.ND OMISSIONS,- 
 
 Page 
 
 30, § 2f 8, oii'. 
 
 2, for 
 
 /i't* .shi'h 
 
 
 §279, 
 
 yy 
 
 numninj^- 
 
 7} 
 
 31, § 286, 
 
 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 f, „ 
 
 
 
 § 288, oh. 
 
 <^ >) 
 
 pirn >/i'n-ti 
 
 •>f 
 
 3-2, § 289, ohs. 
 
 1, ,. 
 
 niiiy 
 
 
 § 290, «/«. 
 
 
 tsii-jnii 
 
 tj 
 
 33, § 29(), ubs. 
 
 3, „ 
 
 chvKj chi 
 
 ,, 
 
 34, S 303, 
 
 )y 
 
 Imq-to'ih-fenq 
 
 
 § 304, oi.s. 
 
 o 
 
 157 oi*'. 4 
 
 
 § 30G, obs. 
 
 4, „ 
 
 blew t(j thnt 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 3, „ 
 
 j9a as elsewhere indicating- 
 
 7> 
 
 35, § 310, obs. 
 
 1, „ 
 
 tang levy 
 
 
 )J 
 
 n 
 
 witliin, or the like 
 
 
 §311, 
 
 5> 
 
 l)iick to the north 
 
 J? 
 
 36, § 314, obs. 
 
 1, ,. 
 
 hit, to come simply 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 
 367, obs. 3 
 
 
 S 315, ob-'i. 
 
 h „ 
 
 ' {ti) 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 
 me yu 
 
 7J 
 
 38, § 326, obs. 
 
 3, „ 
 
 •Mobs. 2 
 
 
 § 327, (yJ.s. 
 
 3, „ 
 
 jiiin-'/nuin 
 
 ;? 
 
 40. § 338, obs. 
 
 
 tan-chi 
 
 
 k 340, obs. 
 
 ^7 » 
 
 chiang wo 
 
 '> 
 
 41, § 347, 
 
 »» 
 
 jen wet 
 
 
 
 J» 
 
 shen Tvei 
 
 
 
 7» 
 
 t'ien mei 
 
 
 ci.?. 
 
 1, „ 
 
 lis — able 
 
 
 /^i*-. 
 
 -^J ». 
 
 see 27, obs. 3 
 
 
 § 350, o6*'. 
 
 
 p'ei &hen 
 
 
 PART II. SMng Yii. 
 
 11 
 
 51, § 1, obs. 
 
 3,./'" 
 
 ■■ and remaining eight 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 0, „ 
 
 A'^M 
 
 1) 
 
 52, § 0, ofe. 
 
 
 
 ex 306, obs. 6 
 
 
 di.S'. 
 
 5, „ 
 
 (■7;/;, 
 
 
 ofe. 
 
 8, „ 
 
 chin 
 
 
 § 10, obs. 
 
 .'3, „ 
 
 ni'ng-ho 
 yours parents 
 
 ,, 
 
 53, line 3, 
 
 ,, 
 
 chin 
 
 
 ^ 15, obs. 
 
 ^1 ,, 
 
 cho shih 
 
 Ti 
 
 54, § 24, obs. 
 
 .8, „ 
 
 338 obs. 1 
 
 
 h 25, oJs. 
 
 
 cko-shih 
 
 
 § 26, ohs. 
 
 3, ,, 
 
 
 ?T 
 
 55, § 28, obs. 
 
 ■ 5, „ 
 
 31 ofe. 3 
 
 
 S 33, o/as. 
 
 • ", „ 
 
 ch'i-chi-ii 
 
 jj 
 
 56, § 38, ob.i. 
 
 o 
 
 T'angjen 
 
 
 § 40, ob.% 
 
 ■ 3, ,, 
 
 so-'hu 
 
 
 obs. 
 
 .4, „ 
 
 ksiao-ck'u-urh 
 .•<o 
 
 
 h i2,obs 
 
 . 3, '! 
 
 17 obs. 6 
 
 
 LITERAL 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 7? 
 
 57, § 2, 
 
 H 
 
 anythinn- other 
 
 J) 
 
 59, lino 2, 
 
 JJ 
 
 Tliat 
 
 
 § 42, 
 
 J7 
 
 choose to bear 
 
 
 PART 
 
 III. 
 
 The Tone Exercises. 
 
 63, § 1, obs. \,J'or unpopular, minister 
 § 5, ,, privates apartments 
 
 64, § 10, ,, soon boiled alive 
 
 obs. 1, ,, a soon stew-ed pereon 
 
 60,^ 
 
 § 
 
 § 
 
 66, § 
 
 § 
 
 69, § 
 
 70, § 
 
 § 
 
 § 
 
 19, obs. 3, „ 
 oo 
 
 27' 
 
 28; obs. 2, ;; 
 
 29,0^^.2, „ 
 
 34, obs. ,, 
 
 35, Lit. ,, 
 80, obs. 2, „ 
 84, ob.^. 1, „ 
 
 S9, 
 
 95, ,, 
 obs. 3, ,, 
 
 96, obs. 6, ,, 
 97, 
 
 from when connected 
 
 higher salary 
 
 ruined utterly 
 
 history five 
 
 v'hi 
 
 ti for te 
 
 stall or rack ! 
 
 stricty 
 
 by much ch'ii-i 
 
 and 
 
 chosing 
 
 k'o which 
 
 Wang Mangis 
 
 f^ni, 
 
 fmaeH, 
 
 read k''o fikih 
 
 i) 
 
 run n inl- 
 
 omit 
 
 and all tiieir leave? Inll 
 
 11 
 
 the l(»!ives all fell. 
 
 read 
 
 chan~yen~t'i 
 
 TJ 
 
 may 
 
 79 
 
 tzii jan 
 
 M 
 
 ch'hu/ rhih 
 
 J» 
 
 t'ma Vou feng 
 
 IJ 
 
 \moU.\ 
 
 JJ 
 
 blew so that 
 
 )) 
 
 ■pa^ as elsewhere, indicating 
 
 •>y 
 
 tang ling 
 
 77 
 
 within, or u like preposition 
 
 J7 
 
 back to tlie south 
 
 7f 
 
 laij to come, simnlv 
 
 1? 
 
 207, oh^. :i 
 
 
 ^'s {U) 
 
 11 
 
 me yii. 
 
 ,, 
 
 352, <//m. 2 
 
 11 
 
 p'an '/man 
 
 11 
 
 tan ch''( 
 
 11 
 
 chiang 'hno 
 
 ?? 
 
 meijen 
 
 J» 
 
 wei shen 
 
 71 
 
 tvei t'ien 
 
 1J 
 
 use— able 
 
 5J 
 
 see 26, obs. 3 
 
 77 
 
 p'ei ch'en 
 
 read and the i-eiriaimu^- t'lj^'liT 
 
 ?j 
 
 szu 
 
 jj 
 
 ex. 300, obs. 6 
 
 ?? 
 
 ch'i'i. 
 
 TJ 
 
 cMng 
 
 11 
 
 neng-k'o 
 
 77 
 
 youi' parents 
 
 J? 
 
 citing 
 
 JJ 
 
 c/mo-shih 
 
 JJ 
 
 338 ob.s. 2 
 
 77 
 
 chao-shih 
 
 
 [in consequence ot'the short coming] 
 
 JJ 
 
 31 obs. 2 
 
 >J 
 
 ch'in-ch'in-ti 
 
 
 T'ang jen 
 
 IT 
 
 ■w-'ku 
 
 11 
 
 hsiao-ti-Ja"3-'rh 
 
 jl 
 
 .s« 
 
 ?7 
 
 22 obs. 4 
 
 ?? 
 
 any other 
 
 ij 
 
 30. That 
 
 ?? 
 
 choose to liear 
 
 read unpopular minister 
 
 77 
 
 private apartments 
 
 boiled outright 
 
 ,, a strangely stew-ed person ; huai, 
 strange, supernatural, is of the 
 intensive force of the word de- 
 vilish, as vulgarly used in our 
 language. 
 
 ,, from, when connected 
 
 „ high salary 
 
 „ utterly ruined 
 
 „ history, five 
 
 ,, ch'i 
 
 „ ti for te 
 
 „ stall, or what rack I 
 
 „ strictly 
 
 „ by much; ch'ii-i 
 
 „ and 
 
 ,, choosing 
 
 „ k'o, which 
 
 ,, Wang- Mang is 
 omit with her hair turnetl uii
 
 
 
 EliliOliS 
 
 ANU 
 
 OMISSJ 
 
 PARI 
 
 ' I. 
 
 THen Lei. 
 
 
 § 20, 
 
 for 
 
 # 
 
 clieiij^- 
 
 read 
 
 chSng 
 
 40, 
 
 5) 
 
 '/^ 
 
 meng- 
 
 y> 
 
 ^ 
 
 45, 
 
 J» 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'i 
 
 }} 
 
 a 
 
 53, 
 
 7> 
 
 Bi 
 
 ch'iiig' 
 
 i> 
 
 Hi 
 
 54, 
 
 ^, 
 
 do. 
 
 
 jj 
 
 do. 
 
 62, 
 
 T> 
 
 do. 
 
 
 JT 
 
 do. 
 
 67, 
 
 »? 
 
 ^ 
 
 fang- 
 
 yy 
 
 ^ 
 
 69, 
 
 }J 
 
 5IJ 
 
 tao 
 
 » 
 
 m 
 
 125, 
 
 yy 
 
 m 
 
 s\ii 
 
 >y 
 
 Si 
 
 132, 
 
 yy 
 
 M 
 
 ch'ui 
 
 )> 
 
 chui 
 
 148, 
 
 yy 
 
 T 
 
 t'ien 
 
 ,> 
 
 % 
 
 156, 
 
 y? 
 
 (5f 
 
 chen 
 
 ,) 
 
 chen 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 feng- 
 
 yy 
 
 feng- 
 
 16G, 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 tih 
 
 » 
 
 ti 
 
 171, 
 
 ^' 
 
 % 
 
 tien 
 
 j> 
 
 t'ien 
 
 175, 
 
 yy 
 
 l# 
 
 Yang -'Hi 
 
 yy 
 
 Yang- urh 
 
 184, 
 
 ,, 
 
 do. 
 
 
 » 
 
 do. 
 
 192, 
 
 ?? 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 
 JJ£ ch'en 
 
 193, 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 yy 
 
 
 196, 
 
 .. 
 
 ^j^ 
 
 
 yy 
 
 /J^ shao 
 
 200, 
 
 J} 
 
 ji$ 
 
 
 .••y 
 
 ^p'l 
 
 .. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 yy 
 
 Igfkou 
 
 211, 
 
 ,< 
 
 m 
 
 foil 
 
 )> 
 
 t'ao 
 
 216, 
 
 '' 
 
 n 
 
 
 J) 
 
 §6, P'i"" 
 
 218, 
 
 
 ii 
 
 k'eng 
 
 n 
 
 k'eng- 
 
 ,, 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 p'en 
 
 >? 
 
 p'en 
 
 ooo 
 
 ,, 
 
 '^ 
 
 k'uai 
 
 7) 
 
 kuai 
 
 225, 
 
 
 It 
 
 
 
 ^ hsi 
 
 226, 
 
 
 SiJ 
 
 son 
 
 
 ^k«a 
 
 234, 
 
 ,• 
 
 is 
 
 foil 
 
 •■ 
 
 'hai 
 
 278, 
 
 ,. 
 
 ± 
 
 
 •• 
 
 52. urh 
 
 )» 
 
 ?5 
 
 5a 
 
 
 
 Y shang- 
 
 286, 
 
 •. 
 
 5 
 
 clip 
 
 ?? 
 
 she 
 
 290, 
 
 ■*y 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 ^ mai 
 
 >j 
 
 -y 
 
 w 
 
 
 » 
 
 B ^'i' 
 
 308, 
 
 »> 
 
 #r 
 
 clie 
 
 .) 
 
 she 
 
 336, 
 
 ,, 
 
 ^ 
 
 pai 
 
 
 #pai 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 t(' 
 
 -> 
 
 &^ti 
 
 362, 
 
 
 
 I'^u 
 
 7J 
 
 3^ kuci 
 ^& ehii 
 
 OMlSSiO:NS IN iiiK CHINESE TEX'l'. 
 PART II. Tke Shmg Yii. 
 
 pai-a. 11, ^ read ts'u 
 
 ., 3.-), :ffl „ 'ho 
 
 PART 
 
 III. 
 
 The Tom; Exercisas. 
 
 ^x. 3, 
 
 M 
 
 2 -cho 
 
 read 
 
 iche 
 
 10, 
 
 i^ 
 
 2 shui 
 
 ,, 
 
 3 shui 
 
 ,, 
 
 \% 
 
 ■1 k'uai 
 
 „ 
 
 '^ ■' kuai 
 
 14, 
 
 m 
 
 yeh 
 
 ,, 
 
 Yeh 
 
 16, 
 
 M 
 
 1 che- 
 
 7, 
 
 1 che 
 
 25, 
 
 U 
 
 3 WU 
 
 „ 
 
 2 WU 
 
 
 
 3 WU 
 
 ,, 
 
 2wu 
 
 J? 
 
 PJS 
 
 « ni 
 
 „ 
 
 J ni 
 
 30, 
 
 lU^ 
 
 2 ma- 
 
 J'' 
 
 '^ 3 ma- 
 
 35, 
 
 1M 
 
 pai 
 
 yy 
 
 3 pai 
 
 39, 
 
 n^ 
 
 3 shih 
 
 yy 
 
 2 shih 
 
 41, 
 
 m 
 
 •• chiao 
 
 »i 
 
 3 chiao 
 
 48, 
 
 % 
 
 2 te 
 
 ?> 
 
 3 tei 
 
 52, 
 
 ^ 
 
 4 mo 
 
 T» 
 
 3 mo 
 
 54, 
 
 yc 
 
 'hno 
 
 yy 
 
 3 'huo 
 
 55, 
 
 ifr 
 
 1 ku 
 
 yy 
 
 3ku 
 
 59, 
 
 # 
 
 1 c-Jie 
 
 yy 
 
 2 chao 
 
 60, 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 tZll 
 
 yy 
 
 iXzn 
 
 ') 
 
 #^ 
 
 3 tzii 
 
 ■!■> 
 
 4 tea 
 
 62, 
 
 
 3 i 
 
 ,, 
 
 ■li 
 
 76, 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 ma 
 
 
 1 ma 
 
 78, 
 
 j^ 
 
 3 ch'u 
 
 
 ■1 ch'u 
 
 97, 
 
 M. 
 
 3 v.'ll 
 
 yy 
 
 I \vu 
 
 98, 
 
 ¥ 
 
 2 shih 
 
 yy 
 
 i shih 
 
 100, 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 tsuan 
 
 yj 
 
 •1 tsuan 
 
 104, 
 
 
 2 clle- 
 
 yy 
 
 1 che 
 
 105, 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 Shang- 
 
 yy 
 
 1 Shuang- 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 3 k'uai 
 
 'y 
 
 4 k'uai 
 
 ■*y 
 
 X 
 
 3 yu 
 
 •' 
 
 4yu 
 
 107, 
 
 w 
 
 •* shua 
 
 ?» 
 
 3 shua 
 
 108, 
 
 m 
 
 2 k'uei 
 
 yy 
 
 3 k'uei 
 
 109, 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 ch'eng- 
 
 yy 
 
 2 eh'eng- 
 
 111, 
 
 m 
 
 2 'luien 
 
 yy 
 
 3 'huen 
 
 120, 
 
 w 
 
 3 neng 
 
 yy 
 
 4 neng 
 
 N.T?. — pasxini fur ^^, k'o, mid l;i;
 
 PART I. 
 
 HSIN CHING LU. 
 
 T'lEN LEI; 
 
 OB, 
 
 THE CATEGORY OF T'lEN, 
 
 HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c.
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF THE CATEGORY OF T'lEl^T. 
 
 yrhc order of the fernn and ideas included in the Category of T'ien in the original Chinese worlc, which,, as 
 explained in /he Introduction, sugr/exted, the collection of sentences translnted, has not always been exactly 
 observed. The table below will somewhat facilitate reference to particular 'phrases or illustrations.^ 
 
 1. T'IEN; its cliief meanings. 
 
 2. t'ien, in the sense of epirit. 
 
 3. t'ien, God. 
 t. t'ien, God. 
 
 5. ts'anij t'ien, Heavens ! 
 
 6. cli'iii'i t'ien, God's abode. 
 
 7. lau t'ien yeh. Providence. 
 
 8. 'liUiing t'ien I Heaven ! 
 
 9. ^10 t'ien i/eh (see 7.) 
 10. t'ien, material heaven. 
 
 11-18. t'ien, a Day, days. 
 13. fian t'ien, a certain time. 
 20-2:!. ('it'll, a day, days, 
 
 24. he.aven overliead ; God. 
 
 25. ascend tlie skies. 
 
 2b'. heaven's infinite distance. 
 
 27. bright blue sky. 
 
 28. broad day. 
 
 29. sky brightening. 
 
 30. the lihie-mantled one, (God.) 
 
 31. iao t'ien yeh, God. 
 cJ^'uv ^'■^- •A'ffft ('ten, autumn. 
 
 33. after cock-crow. 
 
 34. to morrow ; day-break. 
 
 35. morning lights the windows. 
 
 36. four o'clock to-morrow morning. 
 
 37. early, — light. 
 
 38. light in the east. 
 
 39. dav-brcaking. 
 
 40. morning grey. 
 
 41. lidi.iiJii of Capricorn and Lyra, 
 
 (Milky Way.) 
 
 42. roused at sunrise 
 
 43. broad day, (morning.) 
 
 44. twilight, (evening.) 
 
 45. too dark to see, (evening.) 
 
 46. too late to get out. 
 
 47. too late now. 
 
 48. from morning to night-fall. 
 4!). wait till dark. 
 
 50. morning and evening vapour. 
 
 51. the Milkv Way. 
 
 52. the Milky Way. 
 
 53. clearing up ; airing things. 
 
 54. clear sky, and bright aun. 
 
 55. standing in the sun. 
 
 56. Horizon. 
 
 57. the Sun. 
 
 58. the 6UU shining down one's tbro&t. 
 
 59. no .sun in tlie sky ; (nonsense.) 
 
 60. borrow lustre. 
 
 61. light on a lieight ; (proverb.) 
 
 62. ringing clear day. 
 
 63. mild sunny day. 
 
 64. sun in the west. 
 
 65. sun's heat scorching. 
 
 66. e.'tst red. 
 
 67. waterman laying dust. 
 
 68. phenomenon on T'ai Shan. 
 « 69. sunset gleam. 
 
 70. terrible sun. 
 
 7i. walking in the snn. 
 
 72-74. back-shade. 
 
 75. sun about to set. 
 
 76. shade of the willow ; (proverb.) 
 
 77. pocket sun-dial. 
 
 78. sun on meridian. 
 
 79. sun never reaches. 
 
 80. snn up three rods. 
 
 81. set clocks at noon. 
 
 82. forenoon and afternoon. 
 
 83. past meridian. 
 
 84. well past nonn. 
 8.5. sun getting low. 
 
 86. sun down on the hills. 
 
 87. sun mounts the wall ; (setting.) 
 83. sky stormy, sun dark. 
 
 89. sun's ears. 
 
 90. solar eclipse. 
 
 91. do ; sun's rescae. 
 
 92. halo round the sun, 
 
 9:i. the Moon. 
 94. fine moonlight. 
 
 (pre- 
 
 ss, moon in the zenith. 
 
 96. cloudless moonlight. 
 
 97. heart oflered to the moon ; 
 
 verb.) 
 
 98. stroll by moonlight. 
 
 99. moon high in the sky. 
 
 100. moon (lull ; light enough. 
 
 101. moon waning, stars few. 
 I0'2. Bvin overbearing the moon. 
 ] 03. moon's crescent. 
 
 104-."). the full moon ; mid-autumn day. 
 
 106. moon dim and sad. 
 
 107. wiuii-circle round the sun. 
 
 108. lunar eclipse. 
 
 109. Stars ; every stiir out. 
 
 ] 10. stars twinkling incessantly. 
 
 111. .stars dim. 
 
 112. stars in clusters. 
 
 1 1 3. after cock-crow ; stars few. 
 
 114. horoscope. 
 
 115. propitious stars. 
 
 1 1 6. North and South Stars. 
 
 1 1 7. the .Seven .Stars. 
 113. Orion and Shang. 
 
 1 19. Hesperus and Lucifer, 
 rjo. the star ch'en, or 5/ie«, 
 
 121. Venus. 
 
 122. the moon's satellite. 
 
 123. the morning star, 
 rjf. the .Star of Longevity. 
 
 125. the Ruler Star. 
 
 126. a Comet. 
 
 127. .Sagittarius, Hyades. 
 
 128. a Meteor ; 
 
 129. meteor's rapid flight. 
 
 130. spell against meteors. 
 
 131. sound of a meteor. 
 
 132. an Aerolite. 
 
 1 33. stars thick. 
 
 134. Cloud ; nature and origin. 
 13.5. streak of cloud. 
 
 1 36. clouds forming, 
 1 36a. clouds rising. 
 
 137. cloud-like gathering. 
 
 1 38. clouds of odd appearance. 
 
 1 39. clouds overspread the sky. 
 
 140. cloudy moon in mid-autumn day. 
 
 141. clouds cover the moon. 
 
 142. clouds in dense mass. 
 
 143. mottled sky. 
 
 144. clouds in patches. 
 
 145. little appearance of cloud. 
 
 146. not a elnud to he seen. 
 
 147. sky dark. 
 
 148. bad weather lasting. 
 
 149. make-believe rainy day. 
 
 150. light clouds hurried along. 
 
 151. passing cloud {Jlj.) 
 
 152. all chtuds gone. 
 
 153. pretty clouds soon pass ; (pro- 
 
 verb.) 
 
 154. clouds gone, and mist cleared off. 
 
 155. vague outline in the sky. 
 
 156. horizon clear. 
 
 157. clouds high. 
 
 158. cloud and red mist. 
 
 159. cloudy sky in time of drought. 
 
 1 60. clouds cleared away. 
 
 161. moaning in the clouds. 
 
 162. clouds in patches ; mackerel sky. 
 
 163. heavy clouds boding rain. 
 
 164. .Mist, formed of the Tin. 
 
 165. fog too thick to travel. 
 
 166. mist ; surprise the enemy. 
 
 167. mist collecting at a point. 
 
 168. mist at a certain height. 
 
 1 69. mists packed together. 
 
 1 70. fog too thick to steer. 
 
 171. column of mist. 
 
 1 72. gossamer in autumn. 
 
 173. bright mist at sunset. 
 
 17i. Thunder, concretion of the Yin 
 and Yang, 
 
 17S. 
 
 176. 
 
 177. 
 178. 
 179. 
 180. 
 181. 
 182. 
 183. 
 
 thunder, by collision of the Yin 
 
 and Yang. 
 thunder-clap alarms the unduti- 
 
 ful child, 
 fame as the roar of thunder, 
 incessant thundering, 
 sharp clap of thund(_'r. 
 thunder ilinning to death, 
 thuniler striking the innocent, 
 thunder striking the disobedient, 
 thunder in the 8th moon ; au 
 
 omen. 
 
 184. Lightning ; collision of l^i» and 
 
 Yang. 
 
 185. sky still flashing. 
 
 1 86. white and red fl.ash. 
 
 187. a friend goni! like a flash. 
 
 188. ta skan, to Hash light ; (in hair 
 
 dressing.) 
 
 1 89. flash of lightning ; clap of thunder. 
 
 190. flash on the bauk of the Yellow 
 
 River. 
 
 1 91. flash sec the child crying. 
 
 192. lightning over yonder. 
 
 193. dew-lightning. 
 
 194. succession of flashes. 
 
 195. lightening a httle. 
 
 196. 
 197. 
 198. 
 199. 
 200. 
 201. 
 202. 
 203. 
 204. 
 205. 
 206. 
 207. 
 208. 
 209. 
 210. 
 211. 
 21 '2. 
 213. 
 214. 
 215. 
 216. 
 217. 
 21.S. 
 219. 
 220. 
 221. 
 222. 
 223. 
 224. 
 225. 
 226. 
 227. 
 228. 
 
 229. 
 230. 
 231. 
 232. 
 233. 
 234. 
 235. 
 236. 
 
 Rain. 
 
 rain and no rain. 
 
 soaking rain. 
 
 shower of blows. 
 
 loud thunder but little rain. 
 
 rain spattering all over. 
 
 it ouglit to have rained. 
 
 rain drippiugall night. 
 
 Scotch mist. 
 
 fine rain. 
 
 light shower ; come on heavier. 
 
 dull drizzling day. 
 
 raining much ; incessant .showerg. 
 
 tliorough wetting in a storm. 
 
 rain fine as hair. 
 
 spring riiin. 
 
 thick fine rain. 
 
 rain dripping ; flute sounding. 
 
 i-ed sky ; token. 
 
 raining bubbles. 
 
 pouring rain. 
 
 pr.aying for rain. 
 
 rail in basins' full. 
 
 incessant down-pour. 
 
 rain of many days' duration. 
 
 more rain than enough. 
 
 rain flooding the Three Kiang. 
 
 rain spoiling the roads. 
 
 rain uninterrupted. 
 
 weather damp. 
 
 storm of wind and r<iin. 
 
 as much rain as is wanted. 
 
 rain thoroughly saturating the 
 
 ground, 
 moistened by a fall of rain. 
 sweet raiu, {fg.) 
 rain going to stop ? 
 rain has stopped, 
 mass of cloud blown aside, 
 rain gently splashing, 
 many days' bad weather. 
 sky too thick to clear. 
 
 237. Rainbow, liow produced. 
 
 238. pointirig at a rainbnw. 
 
 239. rainbow's variety of hues. 
 
 240. rainbow's disappearance. 
 
 24 1. rainbow, kang or chiang. 
 
 242. Hail, rain congealed. 
 
 243. large bail. 
 
 244. hail damaging fruit-trees. 
 
 245. hail damaging crops. 
 
 246. refuge from a hail-storm. 
 
 247. Dew formed of night vapours. 
 
 248. heavy fall of dew. 
 
 249. dew heaviest in autumn.
 
 260. glitter of morninj; dew. 
 251, (liw-ilrops ill tlie lily's leaf. 
 2fi2. dow of heaven ; God's Dew. 
 
 253. profiine attempt to catch God's 
 
 1)< w. 
 
 254. \\4liite Dew ; an annual terra. 
 25j. Cold Dew ; do do. 
 
 256. Frost. • 
 
 257. frost's chilling influence. 
 
 258. Frost's Descent ; an annual term. 
 
 25.9. Snow. 
 
 260. snow's importance to the wheat 
 
 crop. 
 
 261. snow in time of epidemics. 
 
 262. 6no« and jollity. 
 
 262. snow to destroy locusts. 
 264, to miss the way in snow. 
 2G5. snow, tufts, flakes. 
 
 266. snow-flaUes lil;e feathers. 
 
 267. snow with wind. 
 
 268. rice-core snow. 
 
 269. snow caking and frozen. 
 
 270. snow frozen into masses. 
 
 271. snow and sua. 
 
 272. Sleet. 
 
 27.'5. Icicles 
 
 274. do. 
 
 275. icicles like mirroM. 
 
 276. snow frozen on grass. 
 267. superKcies of ice on snow, 
 
 278. thin coat of ice on snow. 
 
 279. official skating at Peking. 
 
 280. snow melting. 
 
 281. snow completely thawed. 
 
 282. breaking up of cold. 
 
 285. Wind, if produced by the Yang. 
 281. whirlwind. 
 
 283. clatter of a gale. 
 
 286. northwest gale. 
 
 287. stormy look of the sky. 
 
 288. chances of storms at sea. 
 
 289. blowing outside. 
 
 290. wind and rain against trade ; (pro- 
 
 verb.) 
 
 291. wind making dust fly. 
 
 292. blast of snow and sand. 
 
 293. dust blown into a nook. 
 
 294. corpse found in a wind nook. 
 
 295. ugh ! the north wind. 
 
 296. gentle breeze in spring. 
 
 297. slight breeze refreshing. 
 
 298. mild breezes dissipating the cold. 
 
 299. wsMn wind bringing out the pe»ch- 
 
 blosBora. 
 
 300. cool spot in summer. 
 
 301. cool rustling breeze. 
 
 302. breeze cooling the atmosplicre. 
 
 303. a foul wind. 
 
 304. wind deachagainst one ; (proverb.j^ft- 
 
 305. dead beat to windward. 
 30G. wind all round the compass, 
 
 307. head wind in the desert. 
 
 308. wind on the bow. 
 
 3U9. wind fair from Canton to Hongkong. 
 
 310. southerly monsoon. 
 
 311. north wind blowing hard. 
 
 312. a gusty wind. 
 
 313. an eddying whirlwind, (ram's horn.) 
 
 314. whirlwind sweepiug round the dust. 
 
 315. roaring gale ; gentle breeze. 
 
 316. gale darkening the sky with dust. 
 
 317. wind has gone down. 
 
 318. counter-current of wind. 
 
 319. wind went down in the Yang-tzu 
 
 Chiang. 
 
 320. blowing once in five days ; (pro- 
 
 verb.) 
 321.362. T'ien, Shen, Shang Ti, as 
 terms for the Deity.
 
 THE CATEGORY OF T'lEN, 
 
 HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 
 
 1. The character t'ien lias three siojnifications. It is used as the chief of tlie shen (gods or spirits) ; 
 as the sky (or tinnameiit) ; aiul as tlie day. 
 
 Obs. 1. Hi., to Pkn Ihat character helon;; three modes of explanation ; one (Vim) is [that which] acts 
 as, sc. means, the most illustrious amon»- the shen; one is that meaninfr [die region] containing- thi: 
 snn, moon, [and stars, that is] the three li^jhts; one is that representing the day. 2. It will be 
 simplest to understand I'ien at the end of each of the three last clauses. 
 
 2. Under tlie character t'ien in tlie sense of shm (divine, heaven, spirit) we find {lit. there is) 
 tHen, heaven, or god ; heaven above ; dark [blue] heaven ; azure heaven ; imperial heaven ; 
 old heaven ; the old lord of heaven, [and other piirases.] 
 
 Obs. 1. The two latter, tlionn;h familiar in form, are in no way irreverent. 2. These are by no 
 means all the combinations in which fieii (inures. SEE CLOSE OF THE CATEGORY. 
 
 3. You cannot deceive Heaven ; you can do nothing that will blind Heaven. 
 
 Obs. 1. deceive; man, to obscure or hinder the sif,'ht of, as by the hand or any scrfien placed before the 
 eyes of a person: huo, therefore, while grammatically acting as the verb can, adds force, in its pro- 
 per sense of to pass over, elymologically to 7nan. 2. ch'ii, to go, is also auxiliary to the action of 
 the verb man. 
 
 4. God above knows for certain the merits of every man. 
 
 Lil. Man's good and evil. Heaven above is able to see true. 
 
 5. Heavens ! what have I done to be so served ? 
 
 Obs. 1. lit.. Dark heaven ! dark heaven! why cause me to undergo (^tV. receive) tliis sort of oppression ? 
 2. wei-c/i'ii, lit., means a bending, and is figuratively used for affliction unmerited. Compare our 
 iormeDt from <o?queo. 
 
 6. Do nothing against your conscience ; the azure heaven is over head; (there is a God above.) 
 
 Obs. 1. pieh is a corruption for^M j/ao, choose not, noli. 2. k'uei hsin, break or diminish the integrity 
 of your heart or conscience, your liang hsin, heart of virtue ; with which every man is assumed to 
 be naturally endowed. 
 
 7. Providence will never fail (desert, or abandon) man. 
 
 Lit. The old lord of heaven iu any wise will not [jm k'in, non-vult,) is unwilling to h'uei (see 6) fail,/;/, turn 
 the back on, man. 
 
 8. Heaven help me ! 
 
 Obs. 1. lit., Il] supplicate imperial heaven to protect and succour rae! 2. huang fieri is not common: 
 shen t'len is more iu use. 
 
 9. Every mortal is dependent on divine providence for his subsistence. 
 
 Lit. [ Whoso] is man, every man, — is tao-cho, dependent, leaning on, the old lord of heaven to eat his rice, — 
 for the rice he eats. 
 
 10. The lighter matter which floated upwards when the world was created became tHen. It 
 contains the sun, moon, and stars; it causes the procession of the four seasons; it produces 
 every thing; it is in fact the master-director of creation. 
 
 Obs. I. Created, lit., at the time P'an-hu, (the Chinese Adam) struck apart (i'o!'-p'2 or jo'z-A'oi) heaven 
 
 and the earth, (till then in a chaotic state 7h«j-Z«?j.) 2. The light matter {ch'litg cfi'i) up float-iiig /_ 
 
 (it), then (chin) was t'ien. 3. contains the sun, &c., lit., the sun, moon, and [o ther b odioi) which ,yt^ 
 
 ■with these are called] the three lights {san-kuan/j), all are therein (na-li.) 4. causes the proces- 
 sion ; lit., it is able to carry on {i/iiu-hsing) the four seasons. 5, produces ; 'hua properly to pro- 
 duce out of nothing, siting to bear as a parent,. — the myriad things. 6. in fact, &c. lit, truly it is 
 of creating {tsao-lma-ti) the master-manager, or the creating master, &c. 
 
 11. There is a daily difference (for better or for worse.) 
 
 lAt. One day compared with another [is] not the same. 
 
 12. His teacher will be here in a few days. 
 
 Lit. — [in] these some days can arrive. 
 
 13. It has been raining hard the last faw days. 
 
 14. He [or I] will be here in a few days. 
 
 Obs. Both these sentences may be so rendered; but the second may also mean I shall be tlterc (arrive .it 
 my destination): the Ini renders it necessary ihat the speaker should be then at the place indicated ; 
 the tao ujay or may not. The latter sentence may also mean, a few days afterwards he arrived. 
 
 15. How many days will it take to get there ? 
 
 Obs. 1. lit., to arrive there will take (obtain, accomplish) how many days' occupation. 2. tci=te; 
 the pronunciation is a Peking peculiarity, in certain contexts. 3. kung-fu, work, hence, the Uuie 
 required lor it ; also leisure. 
 
 <1) A
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 16-30. 
 
 16. — Will not be more than a day or two ^oing ; or arrived after a day or two's journey. (See 14.) 
 
 17. Tlie long montlis [in the Chinese Calendar] are of thirty days ; the short of twenty-nine. 
 
 Obs. I. in., [In] every moon the great build [is of] 30 days, &c. 2. chien (pronounced lierc chin) to 
 found or establish. The rule referred to is of the highest antiquity. 
 
 18. He knew the day before that he had something' to do the day after, or, the next day. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. He, the head-one, foremost, dav, then knew [that on] the number two day there wa.s busi- 
 ness for him to yo and do. 2. rhiu ifives emphasis to the words markin;,' of the time ulien, he 
 knew the day befiire, Hic. 3. c/i'ti, to go, merely assists the action of the verb, to do, to set about 
 
 doing ; it does not here necessarily imply motion to any place. 
 
 19. I waited (or have been waiting) for you ever so long, but you did not come. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. I waited for you a pood half day, &c. 2. toit, all, altogether, has nearly the force of 
 nevertheless: with pu it is a disjunctive; all not, but you never, &c. 
 
 20. It rained the whole day until night-fall. It rained, or has been raining, the whole day long. 
 
 Obs, 1. i, or y(, I'ien, the one the entire day, ton entirely, sbib is it, or it has been, bsia yii, raining ; there 
 has been a raining. 2. clidig to make, to complete, ching i'ien the whole day ; /i adverbialises 
 both combinations to which it is affixed, 
 
 21. '') The fire continued all day and all night without stopping. C--* There has been a fire. 
 
 Ohs. 1. lit. *'> There has been running [to fetch water]; or, according to some teachers, the water has 
 been running sc. away from the fire. 2. a whole day and a whole night has it burned without 
 extinction. '-' [We or they] have encountered 'liui-tu, [a certain demon, or spirit, of lire.] 
 
 22. They two fight together every day. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit., that and this day by day fight. 2. ta-chang is a stronger expression than ta-chia. The 
 former is an act of war, or at least committed with weapons. 
 
 23. The day's fortunes are no more to be foretold than the weather. 
 
 Lit. The heavens (or the sky) have their not-to-be divined {tit, fathomed) wind and clouds; man has bis 
 
 morning's and evening's woe and weal. 
 
 24. Be a man's habit of mind good or evil, he cannot conceal it from iii^ Heaven above : sooner 
 or later he will have his deserts. 
 
 Obs. I. habit of mind ; lit. [whether] man keep heart [of] good [or] evil, still (tsai,) he cannot obscure 
 [the sight ot] overhead heaven. 2. deserts; lit., late [or] early — finally (?««Hg) tbere-will-be (y«), 
 that which recompenses. S. /)«o and v!n<7, both mean generally, to respond to ; li may be construed 
 as the relative pronoun ; or, if thing or circumstance be understood after it, as the possessive particle ; 
 a matter or case of recompense. 4. observe the power of tsai, again, here construed still ; and 
 tsuiig, finally, which gives force to the sooner or later. 
 
 25. You have your plan for mounting the clouds, I have my ladder for ascending the skies. 
 
 Obs. A Rowland for an Oliver ; if you have your scheme, I have mine. 
 
 23. Don't you know that your parent's goodness is what can no more be fully repaid than the sky 
 can be reached ; — is too infinite ever to be repaid in full. 
 
 Lit., Do not you know, (or, reprovingly, you do not know), that your father and mother's goodness is 
 [as] the august heaven « itbout extreme-bound, utterly cannot be repaid in full (recompensed not 
 completely.) 
 
 Ohs. I. august, 'hao t'ien ; 'hao is an epithet solely applied to heaven. 2. ti at the close: \{ thing nr 
 matter be understood after it, we have the predic^ite of sbili is; and all the words between sbi/i and 
 ti are then formed into an attributive of thing, bj' ti, which, of course, may with equal propriety be 
 construed as the relative. 3. to be ever repaid; tsiing-pu; (compare tou in 19;) utterly, ever not, 
 i^never : it would be equally correct to say tsuny pu pao tc china. 4. without extreme-bound, 
 inlinite, (wang-chi), is one of those combinations which are classical rather than colloquial, and are 
 rarely used except in certain set phrases. 
 
 27. The clouds and mists have cleared away, and there is a bright blue sky. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. the clouds have melted away, the mists are dispersed; [there is] a bright, bright, blue sky. 
 2. This is said figuratively of changes for the better; especially where a good officer succeeds a 
 corrupt one. 
 
 2S. What, robbing in broad day ? out of the question ! 
 
 Obs, I. broad day, lit. sreAt blue, white day, to act tlie robber, how is there tliis (i. e. such) philosophy ? 
 morally, or naturally, how is it possible •' 2. the first four words united by fi make, as it were, an 
 adverb. 3. li is the rule of nature, hence the phrase may be rendered, — Is it in the nature of 
 things ? Is it reasonable ? 
 
 29. It is brightening up ; I think it is going to be fine. 
 
 • Ob.i. 1. lit. The sky has put forth whiteness; it is only to be apprehended th.it it is about to be fine, or 
 clear. 2. the second liao, read lo, is merely expletive. 3. chih p'a, lit. only fear, is here a 
 simple expression of duubt. 4. shih [the day] is gao, desiring, or about, to be fine. 
 
 30. T don't care how much he oppresses, (or what he does to) me ; I shall put up with it all ; God 
 
 knows the ri^lit. 
 
 Obs, \,lm'i-fu, to wrong, bully, by words or deeds. 2. wo tou shou-cho, I all receive ; cho here merely 
 completes the sense oi' .•ihoii. 3. (iod knows, &c ; tzu, certainly, vU there is, (understand shtii a 
 spirit or any similar word after ti,) a spirit, or one, clothed in the blue-mantle [of heaven ;] k'an-ti-chen 
 [he] is able to see true ; or, it is a fact, that the blue-mantled one can see the truth. 
 
 (2)
 
 TIEN. HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 31.41. 
 
 31. Tlicre never was a man wlio had all liis life done no act to benefit liimself at tlie expense of 
 another, tliat was uiicared for by Providence. 
 
 J,it. [Wliero those wlio] ar(; men, one, i. c. a whole, generation (or life time), (li> not hiirtinfj-man, — bene- 
 tilinjr-seU' — 's thiii;;s, th(! old lord of heaven is not [one] that does not lake care foftliein.] 
 
 Ohs. pan i/ii, to help to ifood and protect from harm ; ti makes it a participle, or it may he construed as a 
 relative : non at non cur.m.-i, or, mm est non curat qni. 
 
 32. It is a mehancholy sig'ht, is it not? to see all things in nature decaying' as they do in antiirnri. 
 
 Lit. Antumn day, *c. time's, appearance (or circumstances,) the myriad things all falling, cause a man 
 
 lookin;f on to be very sad. Is it not so? 
 Obs. I. </ao, as in decay to shed, trees their leaves, animals their hair; here componndcd with /i'n^ to 
 
 fall. 2. 'lino, very, pu, not, is it not f The interrogation is marked by the tone ol the voice and 
 
 (lie final particle. 
 
 .33. 'Hei ku-lnng is the time after cock-crow, but before it is light enough to tell a man's eyes 
 from his eye-brows; (to distinguish a man's features.) 
 
 Lit. The fowls-cry after, — the heaven still not of a f^reat brightness, — beholding a man there is no dis- 
 tinguishing eye-hrow and eye — 's time, — then, or accordingly, is it 'hii hi tiniij. 
 Obs. 1. By the influence of ti, all the words preceding it are grouped into attributives ol shih-'hou. time- 
 2. '/i(H" also read 'hiiiin. 3. Uanjin looking ataman [you] yi'H-;)!/-c/;'«, divide not out; liirtlier 
 reinforced by lai to come, which follows mci yen, eye-brows and eyes, the ol>ject oifcn, to distinguish. 
 i. '/lei black, dark ; ku tuti'^ appears to be almost a vulgarism. 
 
 34. There is business of importance at office to-morrow, and as one must be there as soon as it is 
 light, we will be up just before day-break, and then we shall get there in time. 
 
 Obs. I. to-morrow ; pron. mi-itrh-ho, or mi"--r/i-ko ; the ko is redundant ; in the yamin there is iraport.int 
 public business; it must be obtained [obs. tei as in id) [that] once light, [one should] then arrive; 
 Ave at theViti-kii-luiig time (see 33) will rise, then {ts'ai), we shall overtake, {/tan, pursue — 1£, accom- 
 plish, shang rising np to, coming up with.) 2. ts'ai as chiu in many foregoing examples. 
 
 35. The windows [lit. the window-paper) are all light, and as you have to be at office to take your 
 tour of duty, you should be up and off betimes. 
 
 Lit. you must (or are obliged to) ascend to the ya-men, {chieh) to take in turn [the duty devolving on 
 you as one of the] p&n, set or company of employes; {chiu,) in that case, accordingly, early a little 
 rise and go. 
 
 Obs. I. tkn-urh pronounced t'ic-rli ; pa, a final particle, something like the English, and there's an end of 
 it, that's all about it. 2. window-paper; paper tided to the window frame instead of glass. 
 
 36. We have to attend a funeral to-morrow morning, and they say the cpffin is to be moved 
 about four o'clock, so if we get up just when it is day-break, we shall be in good time. 
 
 Obs. I. kei, for, jen-chia, a person : kci, to give, often the sign of the dative case. 2. sung, to escort, 
 
 pin, a funeral. 3. t'iny chien [we] hear, sliuo, [men] say, shih that it is or will be. 4. yin s'lili, . ^^ 
 one of the 12 two-hour periods into which the Chinese day is divided ; say from 3 to 5 iMh .4 pro- CI '/rX 
 pitious period has to be chosen fur lifting or stirring the ciffin, (c/i'!C« Aaart.) 5. 'hei ch'ii c/i'ii, 
 much the same as 'hei-ku-tung (33.) Some write ch'ii, c/ri, lacquer. 
 
 37. He had something to attend to early, and left home the moment it was light. 
 
 Obs. I. isao ch'i, in the morning, the rising time, — not, he early rose. 2. fien [in] the sky, lang yiit, 
 [one] chien, saw the light. 
 
 38. Come ! there 's light in the east, get up and dress yourself and be off to scliool with you. 
 You won't find the master satisfied, if you are late. 
 
 Obs. 1. */io«-s/i?'A, ^(7. to gather in .ind pick up, to prepare. 2. /isiao, hy some pron. Iisiieh. S.sfi'oitj 
 as in s/iang t/amen 34, 35, to go up to, as to place or person entitled to respect : ch'ii assists the atjioa 
 of sfianff pa, as in 35. 4. wan-liao. in English put conditionally, should you be late; in Chinese, 
 
 your fact of being late completed [liao), you will see {k'an) the master willnot be according to you 
 {pu i ni) ; his views will not accord with your proceeding, he will be dissatisfied. 
 
 o9. See! it's day-break. Now there is no time to lose, it's nearly light: we have got a long 
 day's journey before us, and don't let us manage so badly as not to arrive at our deistinatioii 
 until after the lamps are lit. 
 
 Obs. 1. The sky is //?niH(7, darkness bri;;htened; pu tsao, it is not early [our undertaking considered ;] 
 ch'a-pu-to'rh, ditt'erin^ not much, almost, ^«o, there is about to be light. 2. chin-urh (read chi-rU) 
 to-day, eld clian, this journey, {citan, lit. a post station) is very great. 3. pie niing {i\\>i0 read /««</) 
 
 do not handle the matter, manage; ti:, to accomplish, so that it shall be that — do not make us to be 
 so that, [at the time of] 'liei teng, dark lamps, hsia 'htio, and blind tire, so. before the l.inips are, lit, — 'hai 
 (also read '/ii«j«) still, we shall be unable to have arrived. 4. understand shih-'huu after /i, at the 
 time of. 
 
 40. What, still at your books ? The sky is all grey with light. Take a nap, do; you have other 
 business to-morrow, and you won't have strength for it. 
 
 Obs. 1. ming-meng liang-urh, (pronounced /fa«-rA), indistinctly light. 2. i-'liui-urh {pron. 'hu-mli') a 
 turn, a space. 3. cli'ai-shih, an errand; ch'ai to commission, send, shih, business — mostly, if 
 not always, of officials and their employes. 4. k'an to see, here scarcely translateable, you will 
 see, it « ill be seen, it will be, that. 5. ta-pu-ch'i [you will] strike not up, cliiny-shcji animal spirits, 
 lai to come ; ch'i to rise or to raise, lai auxiliary. 6. ching-shen, the object of the verb, interposed 
 between fai and the rest of the verb. /«/?'/ -'■.\r 
 
 41 . The two stars Capricorn, {Niu-Lang,) and Lyra, [Gf ^ih -Nii) are the patrons [lit. progenitors) 
 of agriculture and weaving. The ancients say they were once man and wife, but in process 
 
 (3)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 42-52. 
 
 of time were separated by the River of Heaven (the Milky Way.) On one night in tlie 
 vear only, tlie 7tli of the 7th moon, the niajifiiies make a liricige of tiieir bodies over wjjich 
 they briiiu- them toj^ellier. Hence tlie saying- that, on tiie 7tb of the 7tli moon, NiuLatig 
 has an interview with C/i^ih-Nii. 
 
 Obs. 1. chick-clKj tlicii' <,'ai>ie as a partition, — i-tao, one road, not translated, pxcopt by our article; 
 nioi« |)ro|i('r'ly « river ol heaven. 2. tu mi\y, — lit. In the one, sc. H'liole, year only is there the 
 iii;jlit ('liei hshi) of tlie 7th of the 7tli moon, — c/iunt/ all, (the ninllitiide, plnrality) majfpies — ua-s/icit 
 tzu, take their bodies, (ease of the instrument, with their bodies) la-clfi, — lay one on the other, 
 c.^. liUe tiles, [and so,] c/i'i ereet, i-tso, one buildinj; ch'iao huA'^e ; (as above i-/«o ;) a bridge, [over 
 which they] tit t'a /ia, pass the two as by a ferry : — lia, a colloquial form of liaiiff, two, a pair. 
 
 42. What is the meaning of this ? Because I liappen to be asked out to breakfast, you rouse me 
 up at sun-iise ! 
 
 Lit. [The meal] to which a person (Jin-chid) invited nie is the early meal : the sky being just in the five 
 parts (N.E.VV.S. and centre) bright, then you call me to rise : |jou] do what? 
 
 43. It is broad day and tlie second signal-gun has been fired, [sc. to summon the candidates for 
 degree to the Examination Hall,] and you are still funihliiig here. Why ! you would miss 
 your drill even if you were at the flag-staff, [lit. under the flug-staft", that is on the parade 
 ground ) 
 
 Obs. 1. funiblinj; »no-/i'enf7, feelinp; and rubbin<j. 2. Wliy — even, &r ; /.'o, possible, r/i('«, then, accord- 
 ingly, an idiom scarcely to be exactly rendi'red ; its value must vary with the context. 3. The 
 rendezvous of troops to be e.xercised is round a tbtff planted on ihe drill-i;ronnd. The expression 
 is used in derision of men, who in their desire to be punctual, come so early that they fall asleep 
 on th(! ground wliile waiting for the assembly; hence applied ti^uratively to any bungler who fails 
 to make use of his opportunities ; e. g. as we say that a man cannot see a thing under his nose, 
 &c., &c. 
 
 44. It was ill the twilight, when the sun was setting, and people were all away home to rest, and 
 there were not many in the streets. 
 
 Lit. [It was] the sun-descending yellon-dim 's {ti) time, every man altogether returning (or haviue: re- 
 turned) to his house resting had gone: the strcets-iipon, those that walked the way, then were few. 
 
 45. It is too dark to see already, and I have not had my dinner. Wliat time will it be before I 
 get to bed ? 
 
 Obs. I. too dark ; lit. the sky is all [so that] yen fa-la-rh, ihe sight is confused. 2. '^az, still, is com- 
 pensated by ' already ' in the first clause. 3. nao, lit. noise, worry, — my worry will last till what 
 time, then I shall sleep, eh ? But nao is often used simply to mark an occurrence, as it were break- 
 ing a period of uon-activity, and has olten, as here, to be merged in translation (see 201, o6s. 5.) 
 4. yen Ja-la-rh ; or, chianrj 'hei about to be dark; or, k'uai 'hei, soou to be dark. 
 
 46. It is too late for you to get out of the city, so you must just make the best of it and spend 
 the night at my house. 
 
 Obs. 1. too late, lit. the day is late — go out you cannot of the city — accordingly in my house — con- 
 venionily, or making a shift — diiell one night — and there is and end of it. 2. chinng-chiu-cho , 
 having uo otheijalternalive, this being under the circumstances the readiest means at hand. 
 
 47. You did not pay attention to your work in the first instance, and now you are sorry for it, 
 but It is too late. 
 
 Obs. I. first instance; lit. you at the beginning did business not small heart (careful), this time (now) you 
 after-repent, possibly then late. 2. but, &c., ko-chia, (see 43, obs. 2, also 184, obs. 5.) 
 
 48. When the damp comes out again in spring, the roads are so muddy that though one is up 
 betimes ia the morning and travelling till night-fall, one does not get over more than half 
 
 • one's ground in a journey of 70 or SO H. 
 
 Lit. [In] the spring days (or weather), when one encounters (fin) the damp, the roads are truly muddy ; 
 at {/it. from,) blue morning raising-the-body, sc being aloot, and to move beginning (tsou c/i'i), until 
 evening twilight — 's time, — [of] 70 or 80 li of ground, [one] only walks one half. 
 Obs. led to come liao com-pleted, one will have only walked. 
 
 49. You can't wait till dark ! you must let oflF the squib behind the door. 
 
 Obs. I. ti-ti chin-vrh, a squib, lit. drops, as it were, scintillations, of gold. 2. iHny-pu-te, wait-not-ran, 
 7isi-/iflO. darkness completed ; — darkness in the perfect tense, — until it is dark. 3. This is said, 
 figuratively, of or to an impatient person. 
 
 50. Before the sun is up in the morning, and after he sets in the evening, you may see a slight 
 vapoury appearance in the sky, like steam. 
 
 Obs. I. Ueforc the sun, &e., lit., early [or] late at the no sun's time, [one] sees in the sky slightly a 
 particle of vapoury matter, resembling tlie being (yu) a body {i-kti) of steam belike. 2. mark the 
 
 double diminutive. 3. fang-fu, resembling, szu-ti, or yn-szu-ti, the being lik§. |V 
 
 .51. The Milky Way has shifted, lit. dropped, its point, sc. in the heavens; one must put on one's 
 winter clothing. \ 
 
 Obs. i. The Milky Way, says the teacher, in spring runs from north-east to south-west, and in au^mn from 
 north-west to south-east. 2. mien ao ; lit. a cotton [wadded] jacket, or doublet. 3. j£-ch'i, sJ 
 steam, hot vapour. ^ l.. 1^ 
 
 .52, The Milky Way is a body of mist (or vapour) that has ascended from the earth to the skies. 
 Its light shines brightly on the earth, and it looks like a river in the heavens. 
 
 (4)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 53-65, 
 
 Obs. I. Its lislit, &p., t'a na-i-tii-rh, &c., lit. its that some radiance, its quantum of light. The i-tic-rh is 
 
 here usi'd, niiicli as we use some, e. ij. he has some ability. It can scarce he rendered idiomatieaily, 
 
 2, li^'lit shines, &c.; chao-i/ao isthe verh to which chiuij-'huiiK the nominative; to throw lifiht on, 
 
 to shine on. 3. it looks ; lit. [to one] beholding it (cA'iao-cAo), it resembles (hsiang) a heaven-river. 
 
 53. It lias cleared up (or, it is fine,) and tiie sun is out ; if you have anything that wants airing, 
 
 bring it out and put it in the sun. 
 
 Obs. I. Wants, ftai, that deserves, that ought, to he. 2. the proper word for airing is liang, (see OSiJ 
 shai is the action of the sun, or to expose to it. (See 55.) 
 
 54, Why do you take an umbrella with you on a fine day like this ? Are you afraid it will rain ? 
 
 Obs. I. ti ; understand jih-tzi, after ti, — on a day when there is clear sky, and great sun, (tnjili-fou.) 
 2. pasan for i-pa san, an umbrella. 3. '/man, 'han, or, 'hai, nevertheless, notwithstanding 
 [these favorable appearances,] do you fear, &c. 
 
 66. Don't stand (or go) in the sun for fear it should make you ill. 
 
 Obs. 1. In the sun, lit., in the great (or strong) sun's ground, — do not sun yourself, or expose yourselt 
 to the sun, fear illness. 2. p'a, to fear, might be k'an, to see, with equal propriety; (see Qj.) 
 
 56. When a man has left home to escape calamity, he has no fixed place on the face of the earth. 
 
 Obs. I. Left home; lit., a-going-out-of-his-door-to-escape-difficulty — 's {ti) man, [from the] sea's rim to the 
 heaven's verge, (from horizon to horizon,) has no certain place. 2. face of the earth; cliHcn slum 
 wan shui, on the thousand hills and the myriad waters, is more common that the 'hai chiao ticn 
 yai. The latter is also read, 'hai ho t'ien ya. 
 
 57. Jih-t^ou is f-ai-yang, (the sun) ; he goes forth from the east every morning; at evening he 
 
 descends in the west, and the sky is then soon dark. 
 
 Obs. 1. t'ien-t'ien, daily ; tsao-ch'i, in the morning. 2. tuo hsia-wan-'rh, on rcacliing the lower evening, 
 lit., evening lateness. (Cf. Portug. a tarde.) 3. soon, &c.; chiu, then, i-'hui-rh, i-'hui-rh, a short 
 time and a short time; shortly, presently. 
 
 58. With the sun shining down one's throat, who would venture to lie ? (Do you think I would 
 lie face to face with God ?) 
 
 Obs. 1. sang-lzu yen-rh, the eye of the throat, the gullet. 2. 'Ajmn, or 7iai, still, notwithstanding ; its 
 force is given in English by making the lirst clause pendent. 
 
 59. Follow your own coimsel ; don't put faith in what he says. Why, he would tell you any non- 
 sense. 
 
 Obs. 1 . your own counsel ; lit,, you yourself strike, sc. make, your opinion (chu-i, guiding, or ruling, ide.a.) 
 
 2. don't trust his talk. 3. any nonsense; W. his is there-is-a-sky-vvithout-a-sun-'s (ti) incoher- 
 ent speaking, {'hun-shuo), or rigmarole ; he would tell you that there is no sun in the heavens. 
 
 60. The bald man follows the moon's light to borrow some of her rays. 
 
 Obs. 1 . follows, lit., following the moon goes. 2. htang, light, rays ; huang t'oii, a bald head : the play is 
 on the word huaiiff. 3. Tlie expression means that the person is beholden, or wishes to be, to 'the 
 superior talents, wealth, &c., of another. 
 
 61. A light on a lamp-post eighteen feet high sheds its light to a great distance, but does not 
 illumine wha^s close to it. ^A 
 
 Obs. 1. fSs^^lO feet; lit., a «Ate«^^d eight [feet]— a one cj/ang eight 's lamp-post, or stand, shines 
 on [what is] far, not shines on [what is] near. 3. Fig^dratively used in various ways ; of censo- 
 rious people ; of people neglecting their own interests or families, and attending to those of others. 
 
 62. This is a fine ringing clear day. The roads are quite dry, and the sun shines brightly into 
 one's room. 
 
 Obs. 1. ringing translates hsiang, sounding; but, the teachers can assign no good reason for the employ- 
 ment of the word. 2. ton, all, altogether, quite. 8. kan shitang, dry and elastic, not sticky. 
 4. shines brightly, &c., lit., the sun is able to shine (=shines) the rooiii-within very brightly. 
 
 63. In spring-time when there is a bright sun shining, when it does not feel in the least cold, and 
 a gentle_ breezy air is blowing, people say, ' This is neither too hotter too cold, this is a 
 really mild sunny day' : or, ' this is indeed' ; or, 'this is,' &c. 
 
 Obs. 1. 5/u ^M, &c., also is there— that wavy, (ft'«-?TO, the ripple of a running-stream,) wind. 2. 'peo- 
 ple say,' is not in the text, but chiu shih, then it is, introduces the remark made, viz. ' to-day is,' .S:c. 
 
 3. ti after pu-leng-pu-je, and after jih-nuan-fmg-'ho, influences all the \vords in each of those 
 phrases, which thus become attributive oi t'ien included in chin-urA, in the tirst clause, and express- 
 ed at the end of the second. 
 
 64. The sun is well down in the west; he is darting his rays {lit. his shadows) through the 
 
 chinks in the door. 
 
 Obs. 1. p'ien, to slope, incline to a side— has inclined west. 2. men-Jeng-rh It, in (through) the door 
 seams. _ 3. tou, an intensive particle, immediately applying to the mcn-Jtiig, all the seams ; but 
 acting in. fact on p'zt;n;he is well down; he must be, says the teacher, to light them all. 
 
 65. Wheii you air the fur dresses in the inner court, don't let the sun get at them, or it will scorch 
 the hide. 
 
 Obs. 
 
 1. inner court, yiian-tzU, the uncovered hall or court enclosed in the building ; the Roman impluvium. 
 2. Construction ; the hall-within being-aired— 's (?!UHg-((,)— fur-clothes, do not cause=permit the 
 
 SUD to suu, lest (Ji'an) it sun to burning the p'i-pan, sc. the cuticle on which the fur grows. 
 (5) B
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 66-76. 
 
 * 
 
 66. Tlie east is all red : watch, and you will see the sun rise. 
 
 Obs. \. fu, here neuter, (here lias issued forth. 2. i/eu-ch'ou-c/io, your eyes looking; — cho appears to 
 have a douljle |)OH'er, partly iiidicatin<f the mood of th<> verb, partly the relation of the verb, and its 
 object. So elsewhere. 3. the suu-then-issues-forth-coiacs-completed ; will rise or have risen. 
 Mark the three divisions of time ; the east is red, has become red ; you are in the act of looking; the 
 sun [will have] appeared : chiu marks the transition. 
 
 67. When I was out to-day, I. came across a waterman watering the streets; he did not mind 
 what he was about, and he sphished me all over. 
 
 Obs. I. Out to-day, lit., I to-day iiaving-ii;one-out-of-doors, une.\pectedly — met a bearing-water [man) 
 sprinkling; the streets. 2. mind what he was about; leng, cold, pu-fang, not protecting, off one's 
 
 guard; [the waterman] not-minding, — [the water thrown], splashed up (ch'ien /iao,) [off the ground, — 
 luaUing] me one body, ray whole body, water-drops. 2. The teachers offer no satisfactory expla- 
 nation of ling pu-fany ; ling may mean indifferent. 
 
 68. If you are at the top of the T'ai Mountain, in the prefecture of T'ai-an in the province of 
 
 Shan Tung, about day-light, and look at the sun, it will seeiifi at the spot where lie rises 
 from the sea, as if, under his influence, its waters were boiling up in great commotion and 
 throwing off a quantity of spray. 
 
 Lit, [At] the sky becoming-light — 's time, having-arrived-at Shan TuDg['s] T'ai-an Prefecture[s] T'ai, 
 
 mountain's top-upon, [if one] looks at the sun, it seems as if {hsiang szu-ti) from the sea-withiii 
 
 proceeding forth, [he] had succeeded in boiling np (c/i<'ng-l£) the sea-water [to a] disturbed efferves- 
 cing [state, so that it] throws up, splashes up (ch'ien-ch'i), more or less (to shao) water-drops. 
 
 69. When it happens, as it often does, that, a short time before the sun sets, his light is seen on 
 a western wall [after having been hid for a certain period] ; he is then said to be ^hui- 
 kuang fcm-chao, restoring his light, bringing back his rays. 
 
 Obs. 1. wang-wang consi.ax\\\y; o6s. also its place in the sentence. 2. tao cMen, you notwithstanding 
 see, i. e. although he has been long hid ; yu, that there is : obs. also the adverbs of time and place 
 preceding the main proposition. 3. na-c/iiu, that then is. 
 
 70. Don't walk in that terrible sun ! You would find it no child's play if you were to be sun- 
 struck. Beware of a covp-de-soleil. 
 
 Lit. Do not that venomous fiery sun — 's ground-within go, lest [k'an, see 65,) you be heated, i. e. struck, 
 (jo-cho); k'o-p7i-shih, can it not be, it would surely be, ?c««-;/r/!-?j, (pron. wa-'r/i-<i,)a playing, a jok- 
 ing [matter] ; understand shih, a matter, after ti. Beware {Itsiao-hsin) of the sun's sunning you {ihai) 
 blind or dizzy, {mi-'hu.') 
 
 71. I have been about in the sun all this time, and I am so hot. What I want now is to 
 find a cool spot under the trees with a nice breeze. 
 
 Lit. I in the sun's ground have been walking this half day, and am burned, or sunned, (shai-te), very not 
 hot exceedingly.'' 
 
 Obs. I. hao, very, te-linang also, very ; the latter is an intensive applied to heat, cold, and other things ; 
 — pu, not, is interrogatively put ; also an intensive, but it might be omitted with equal propriety ; as it 
 stands, the sense is, • I have been walking until 1 am hot, am I not hot indeed ?' 2. what I want 
 now, &c., lit., I must succeed in finding (pi-ie) a tree's shady-coolness (i/in-liang-urh), {and there) 
 refresh myi>i'\t' (liing-k'uai linng-k'uai); Hang is cool, A'iia;, lively ; cool and pleasant. 3. I'sai-'hao, 
 then will it be well, reinforces the ' I want to find,' &r. 
 
 72. A place is said to be pei-yin (in a back shade), where the back-wall of a house that fronts the 
 south {lit. a right, or straight, house, chmg-fang) , or where mountains in front, or a large 
 building with high walls, intercept the sun so that he cannot be seen, or is never seen, there. 
 
 Obs. 1. 'kou yen ch'ianff, lit., hinder e^es' wall opposed to lin chieh ch'iang,X\\e wall that comes down to 
 the street. '2. 'Aaz, properly 'Am? with; here, or. 3. The construction is — a hinder wall, or a 
 place having hills before it, or a house with high walls, obstructing [one's view so that one] cannot 
 see the sun — {ti, as a possessive or relative particle, influences the whole of the foregoing ; understand 
 place, or circumstances, as the nominative to the verb s/ii/i, to be, immediately following, — is, or are, 
 pei-yin-rh, a back shade. 
 
 73. The ham and salt duck that some one brought yesterday are things that are likely to be spoil- 
 ed by the heat. They should be hung up in a back shade. 
 
 Obs. \. The duck is salted in winter; la properly means tallow; la-yiieh is the last month in the year, 
 so put for winter. 2. p'a-jo-ti, fearing heat — will suffer from heat. 3. ts'ai-'hao, then it will 
 
 he well, not translated; (see 71.) The sense of it is included in should, or must (yao). 
 
 74. Why ! the place you live at is as it were in the back-shade of the hills. The sun is never 
 seen there, (see 7-3. The position of the house is here intended to be disparaged.) 
 
 Obs. Iao, lit., old, a long time, he it ever so long, chien-pu-chao, see will one not, — the sun. 
 
 75. The sun is said to be pHng-hsi (level with the west, setting) when he has reached the west in 
 his course, but has not yet set. 
 
 Lit. The afternoon (Jisia-wu) sun — [having] in revolution [clmnn'\ reached the west region, — yet {'huan 
 
 or 'hai) not yet set — "s (Ji) time, is called ' the sun {jih) is level with the west,' sc. sun-set. 
 Obs. All the words preceding ti form the attributive of shih-'hou. 
 
 7G. Nan-king has her Shen Wan-san, Pe-king has her old (lit. decayed) willow tree. [The 
 thing is as well known as] the name of the man [at one, or] the shade of the tree [at the 
 other.] Who is there that does not know it ? 
 
 Obs. Shcn was a millionaire, a benefactor of Nan-king under the Ming Dynasty. The willow is of history ; 
 it no longer exists. . 
 
 (&)
 
 VIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 77-89. 
 
 77. Turn your pocket-dial to the south and see what time it is ; or, See what time it is by your 
 
 pocket-dial. 
 
 Lit. Take {sc. with) the day-dial, compare one comparison (tiii-i-lid.) 
 
 Obs. I. jih-Iiuci, tlie small vvoodoii dial, crossed by a silken thread. 2. tut, opposite, to bring opposite 
 to, so to produce a correct result. A correct result is said tut, to agree. 
 
 78. There is a place beliind my house that the sun's rays do not reach. It is only at noon^when 
 
 he is on the meridian .that there is a gleam of sunshine there ; or, there never is a gleam of 
 sun-shine there except at noon, when^jc. 
 
 Obs. I, c/i'M excluding, and /<;( not, uimimiitk each other's negative power. 2. tang t'ien, stands before 
 heaven correctly, equally, in the midst. 
 
 79. Why, the place you live at is neither more nor less than in the infernal regions ; the sun 
 never shines on it. 
 
 Obs. I. chih, straightly, simply, just is. 2. ti-i/ii, the eartb-prison ; prison below the earth; hell. 
 
 3. 1/ung, eternal, yiian, distant ; for ever and aye — the sun shines-not-upon-it. 
 
 80. The sun is up three rods, and you are still snoozing in the bed-clothes : really this is some- 
 thing more than comfortable. 
 
 Obs. 1. sail kan, three rods; the han is not a measure; the height indicated is some 40 to 50 feet; the 
 hour, say 8 o'clock. 2. pei-wo-urh, the coverlid, (or, generally, bed-clothes) — ' nest 3. ae/- 
 mien. not to escape, not to be other than, hence; really, truly. a, t'ai-shu-J'u, too comfortable — 
 comt'ort in e.xcess, i. e. here, self-indulgence. 
 
 81. All the clocks and watches are wrong; wait till noon and set them right; or, at noon they 
 shall be set right. 
 
 Obs. I. so-yu, whatsoever these be, followed by ti, becomes attributive of cluing, clocks, and piao, 
 watches, 2. iou, all, follows the substantive ; pu-chun do not [accord with the] standard or 
 rule. 3. sJiang-wu, see 82. 
 
 82. The day is divided [lit, a day within-side there is division,) into forenoon and afternoon [lit. 
 the early ]id\i shang and the late half shang. Noon [sliang-wu] is when the sun is exactly 
 south. 
 
 Obs. 1. shang-wu ; shang is not explained in K'ang Hsi/s lexicon otherwise than as shang in shang-wu. 
 2. The latter character is the 6th of the 12 proper to the system of Chinese horary calculations. 
 
 83. When the sun has passed the meridian, his shadow begins to fall obliquely. 
 
 Lit. When the meridian is at an angle, (wai) the sun's shadows all a little trifle are aslant. 
 Obs. 1. meridian=noon ; not used in a geometrical sense. 2. wai is properly deflection from the 
 perpendicular; but the teachers maintain that the expression could not be used of the sua before noon. 
 
 84. The sun is dipping to the west ; it is well past noon. Lit. the meridian is greatly deviating 
 
 [from the perpendicular.] 
 
 85. The sun is getting low ; don't loiter away all your time outside the city, or perhaps you may 
 
 be shut out. 
 
 Obs. 1. c/(Hj-<iS, a whole [of time], exhaustively, all the time you haye ; do-not-to-the-exhaustion-of-alU 
 your-time the walls without loiter. 2. /i'a«, lest, (as above, see-^GojTO.) 3. Ao«, pursuing, ;i/«- 
 
 ■ • chill, you do not enter, — you enter not in time — ch'ing the waUs--3(/i'«, go, auxiliary of chin, indi- 
 
 cating motion from the speaker, who is manifestly outside himself, or he would use lai to come, 
 instead of ch'U. 
 
 86. I suppose there was a good deal to do to-day ? Why, the sun is down on [lit, pressing) the hills, 
 and the court has not broken up yet, eh ? 
 
 Obs, 1. I suppose; lit. to-day public business, ta-Icai, in general terms, or probably; as we say, 'I should 
 think or say ;' 'h£n-to, very many, sc. much. 2. 'hai, a disjunctive conjunction : tou, for all that the 
 sun has pressed the hills, has even pressed, &c., — 'hai, yet, for all that. 3. broken up, san, dis- 
 persed, that is, the employes not resident iu the yameii, the official abode and bureau of a mandarin, 
 have not left it to go home yet. 
 
 87. The [setting] sun's rays are mounting the wall, and the little children are looking for their 
 mammies. A common expression of the women at Peking. 
 
 Obs. 'hai-urh-min, pron. 'hai-rh-mcn, a dissyllable. The saying is in rhyme. 2. k'ou-l'ou a mouth's 
 end,^M, saying, — a common expression. 
 
 88. See what a stormy appearance the whole sky has, and how sad and sombre the sun looks. 
 
 Lit. See the whole sky's wind-matter (windiness), together with (lien) the sun's hue, all, or both (tou) 
 
 thus {cht-mo) dark and dismal. 
 Obs. Notwithstanding this construction, the teachers concur in referring the adjectives at the close to the 
 
 sun only, and reserving the Je/ig-ch'i as the cause of the sun's appearance; nearly as W lien were the 
 
 objective particle pa (on which see 92.) 
 
 89. The sun is growing a pair of ears : — when two semicircular bodies of liglit appear, one on either 
 side of tiie sun, as if they were closing upon him, misfortune will befal tlie reigning family 
 before long. 
 
 Obs. 1. jih-hua, the sun letting hang, sc. letting fall. 2. Hans, pan-ko, two half-ones, sc. half suns — 
 of white radiance=brilliant light. 8. chia-cho, closing on, as of a thing between the hands. 
 4. ere \o\\^, pu-ch'iu, ; not long the [one] governing the state-family [will have] pu-li, uot-luck, 
 =mi5fortune.
 
 TIEN. HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 90-100. 
 
 90. The sun and moon revolve in the heavens ; when the sun is out and the moon is in, we have 
 
 day-lii^ht; wlien the moon is out and the sun, is in, there is darkness; when suti and moon 
 coincide, and the moon obscures the sun, we have a solar eclipse [lit. a sun-eating.] 
 
 Obs. 1. 'hei-chia or '/lei-ksia, ilaiKiiess, night, (see 93.) 2. /tsiang-p'inff, mutuMy conjoin, combine. 
 
 3. sun-eating, viz. by the dragon. 
 
 91. When the moon in her course obscures the sun, it is owing to the ascendancy of the Yin 
 (female), and impuissance of the Yang (male principle, of Nature.) Whenever a solar 
 eclipse occurs, therefore, all persons of every degree from the Emperor down have, one and 
 all, to beat gongs and drums, to dispel the shadow of the moon and rescue the sun. 
 
 Obs. 1. sfiuai, ruin, decay, at the point of dissolution. 2. mei-feng, every time of meeting, whenever 
 there occurs. 3. every degree, lit. from the son of heaven above, down to the hundred surnames 
 — the people, tou yao, all must, all have to. 4. the sun, chi-ko' jih-Pou ; the, lit. this. 
 
 92. When the sun was in mid-heaven to-day, the clouds suddenly rose and formed a circle about 
 him. This is said to be ajih-yiin, a halo, and in two or three days at the farthest there will 
 be rain. 
 
 Obs. 1. tang-hung, is opposite [the centre of] the vaciinm ; is in mid-heaven. 2. pa t'ai-yang ; pa, to 
 take, marks the object : took the sun and, t'uan-Pnon-ti, ring-like, in a circle, wei-chu, encompassed 
 fast: the chu, to stop, does little more than confirm the action of uei. 3. 7ia for «a-io, that. 
 
 4. pu-clfiii, &c., not long, two or throe days time, then (^chiu), it will rain, lit. it will be able, 
 competent to {'hui) ; possibly, and more than probably. This use of 'hut as a future is very common. 
 
 93. The moon is the essential brightness of the Yin, (the female principle of nature.) As the 
 light of the night, she illumines every place, and all the world looks up to her with admiration. 
 
 Obs. I . The moon is subtle {rh'ing), or essential, brightness. 2. p'u, ubiquitously, chao, she illumines, 
 
 wan-fanq, all, lit. a myriad places. 3. t'ien-hsia, in heaven's beneath, viz. the whole world. 
 
 4. mci-yu, there is none, pu, [who does] not, yang-ivang, look up to her, as the inferior to the 
 
 superior, rnei is properly mo, not ; these two words :ire pronounced as here, or, mi-yu, or simply mii. 
 
 b. understand _;e!i, man, after ti at the close. There is uot-a-not-admir-ing [ti) — [her one.] 
 
 94. I can go home by myself; I don't want any companion (or escort.) Is one to be afraid of the 
 dark with a fine moon-light like this ? 
 
 Obs. 1. hy Tay%e\f ; tzu-cM-Ttovrh ; W. self individually (/f-o), or separately, ^o-?/7"^ pron. ^o-rA. 2. pu- 
 yung, there is no occasion, it is useless th-At—jin-sung, a person should accompany me. 3. see the 
 force of the disjunctive 'hai; this, or, such a, {chi-mo), great moon light, still {-hai) fear dark, eh ? 
 
 95. [Live while you may !] Take everything on earth, there is nothing to compare to the cup 
 in the hand ; in one's whole existence how often is the moon seen in the zenith ? 
 
 Obs. a proverb in rhyme, meaning. Enjoy the hour, you don't get such a chance every day. 
 Lit. of the myriad things none is as the cup iu hand: In man's life how often does he see the moon 
 exactly over [his head.] 
 
 96. Look ! as far as the eye can reach, {lit. for a myriad U,) there is not a cloud [to be seen] ; it 
 is a beautiful moon-light night ; why not go out for a walk ? 
 
 97. When I offered her my heart, who could have told me that so bright a moon would rather 
 shed her light on the gutter ? The purport of which is, that my heart was inclined towards 
 another person, but that that person had no inclination for me. 
 
 Obs. 1 . The proverb means, I placed myself at another's disposal, or took a fancy to him, vi'hich he did not 
 reciprocite. 2. pen, originally, I for ray part ; chiang, like pa in 92, sign of the objective of the 
 verb t'o, to tender : — ming-yiieli bright moon; elsewhere meaning next month. 3. hsiang-t'a, facing 
 another, directed towards another; yu-hsin, I had a feeling, lit. a heart, towards him ; t'a-ivu-hsin, he . / <> 
 had none towards me. 4. che-mo-ko i-szu, such and such a meaning, is the predicate of the^erb ^•t*' 
 s/ii/i, is ; the words, ivo yu-hsin • -- - hsiang-ico, being attributive of i-szu, purport or meaning. Lit. 
 This is I-fancy-hira-but-"he-does-not-fancy-nie some such a meaning. 
 
 98. It is a very pleasant thing to take a stroll with one's companions, when the wind is still and 
 the moon is bright. 
 
 Obs. 1. ia-chia, idiom, for a plurality; two or more ; both or all ; — 'hno, a companion ; — ta-chia-'hvo-'rh, 
 a whole set of people, a company. 2 yu, to stroll, wan, to play, recreate oneself. 3. c/iien, for 
 i-chien, the numeral rouu, or classifier,=an article ; one, or, a, thing. 
 
 N.B, — where there is an adjective, it will follow the numeral, or classifier, as in English it does our article. 
 
 99. If one starts for a walk with a bright moon like this high in the sky, when the night is still 
 and cooljone can get over a good deal of ground. 
 
 Lit. [A person] availing himself of [ch'en-cho'\ this glowing-bright-moon-being-in-the-middle-of-thc- 
 vacuum (see 92) — 's (rt) — night (wan-shang') ; [when it is] both clean-still, viz., free of people 
 and the noise they make, — and cool ; — if he want (y«o) to walk the road, then (ts'ai) he can 
 pursue out the road. Obs. tao-rh the object of the verb, kan, interposed between the verb and its 
 auxiliary lai. The ch'u converts kan, 'to pursue,' into, 'to overtake ;' compare han-tc-shang, in 34,36. 
 
 100. Although the moon is dull, she gives light enough to shew the road. One can dispense 
 with a lantern. 
 
 04s. 1 . yiieh-shi, lit. moon colour : (compare yiin-she, 134.) 2. 'huan Tor 'hai) chao, still she shines [so 
 that one,] te-chien, is enabled to sec. 3. k'o-i, it is possible, allowable, licet, to not use, teng-lung, a 
 lantern. 
 
 (8) 
 
 IH-
 
 TTEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 101-111. 
 
 101. It is near tlie end of the 5th watch; the moon is waning and the stars are few. There will 
 be light in tlic east shortly. 
 
 Obs. loii-chincj, tlie fifth u-atcli ; five («•/() used instead of the ordinal; ro witli all the rest but the 
 iirst, which is S|)()li<'n of as ck'i-rhmg, or tiiirj-chinrj, when the watchi^s hcjjin, {c/i'i,) or are bet, {tinij);— 
 k'uai-wan, quickly to end. (For an ordinal=the cardinal, see 138). 
 
 102. Wlion the sun is fairly up, {lit. nt the time that there is light in the five places,) and his 
 radiance overbears the moon, her light will darken, or wane. 
 
 Obs. 1. wufang, the five places, N.E.S.VV. and centre. 2. yanrj-kuami, the male, viz., the sun's hriijht- 
 ness. 3. cki-chu; ch'i to o])|ncss, as the stronger the weaker; chu gives an obstructive force to 
 the verb, as in Uoirj-cliu (I4l), and other cases. 4. an, dark, to he growing dark, may he_/a-"?an, is 
 putting forth darkness. Obs. the nasal jtretix to the simple sound, an, when iii ccjunexion with 
 other syllables. 
 
 103. [Moon's crescent.] On the 3d of the month it will be perceived that the larger portion of 
 the moon is dark, and her lesser portion light. The light ])ortion is called the crescent (lit. 
 moon-bud, or moon-sprout) ; [the idea being that] it resembles the first appearance of vcre- 
 tation in plants. 
 
 Obi. 1. mei-yiieJi, eyery [lunar] month, on the 3d day, then you see, &c. 2. to-pan-urh {\tron. pa-rh) 
 the more half. 3. li<i?ig-nrh-li, that which (^j,) is bright; or understand the word, pan-w/i a(tcr 
 ti. 4. yiieh-ya-urh, the moon's sprout ; compare crescent, I'roni the latin crcsco, to grow. 3. fang- 
 fu, like, grass or trees (<s'ao-)?m=plants) just putting forth buds, or sprouts — looking {szu-ti.) 
 
 104. " When one says yiieh-urh yiian, the moon is full, one alludes specially to the 15th of the 8th 
 moon." This is a mere fwvn de parler, for, in fact the moon of the iSth of every month is 
 a full moon. N.B. — yiieh-urh, pron. yue-'-rh, 
 
 Obs. I. " [That] ' the moon is round ' is specially pointing to the 8th moon's IStli [day] said." 2^ That 
 {na.) does not exceed being {pu-kuo-Mh,) a sentence [of] common talk. 3. The true {^ki-sldh,) 
 [is that], every month, alw.iys [tow] there is [this thing, namely,] it having come to the I jth, the 
 moon is then round. 4. In the last clause take shih as the verb substantive impersonal, there is ; 
 and the sentence following it, as if the Greek « preceded it ; there is the fact that, &c. 
 
 105. [Full Moon ; special ; somewhat as we say Harvest moon]. This is the 15th of the 8th moon, 
 mid-autumn day ! One sehlom has such fine weather as this [for it]. Tell them to get in 
 some fruit and wine and to have it ready ; and to-night when the moon is round and full, 
 our circle shall be as full as hers. 
 
 Obs. 1. chia-chieh, goodly period; chieh, joint of bamboo, section of time. 2. nan-ti,\t is hard to 
 obtain this [sort of] fine weather [at, tins date.] 3. to get in, lit. buy down, buy and bring home. 
 
 4. yii-pei-cho, preparing [it], ting, await [the] by-night-the-moon-becoming-routid — 's {ti) time. 
 
 5. we, {ta-chia, see 9S), yiian-lio-yiii-rli, will round a moon, will be a circle as round. 
 
 106. When the watch was set there was a very fine moon, but in a little time the whole sky was 
 overspread with clouds, which hid the moon and made her all dim and sad, as you see her. 
 
 Obs. 1. man-t'ien tou cliang, &c., [throughout] the whole sky there universally spread, or grew [c//(r«cr 1 
 2. pa, sign of the objective case preceding its verb. [The clouds] took the moon's light, and 
 , .- screening, [made it] thus turbid, [and, the beholder,] melancholy; ^hun most commonly of waterdisturbed ; 
 
 ts'an is properly the feeling experienced at witnessing that which causes sorrow, &c. 4. cM-mo 
 this, sc. fashion, or degree, understood after ti, — making licr this dim and, ts'an, sad- - like [fashion.] 
 The verb t& marks the process ; clii, obscuring her, ti obtained, obscured her till she was 'hun. The 
 sense of ts'an allows us to supply the second object, man. 
 
 107. I observed just now that a wind-circle had formed itself round the moon. There will most 
 likely be a gale in the course of the next three days. 
 
 Obs. 1. I just now saw [that] the moon-light round there had risen a wind-circle. 2. [one can] only 
 fear (chih-p'a,=^\X. is probable that,) three days within, then there will be a great wind ; ctnu, then 
 or, accordingly, consequently. 
 
 108. When the motions of the earth's globe bring it so exactly opposite the moon, that the light 
 of the moon is hidden by the shadow of the earth, there is said to be a lunar eclipse. 
 
 Obs. I. When the earth's globe, in its turning-movement {chtian-timg.) exactly (iang-ltnng-wh, pron. 
 kang-ka" -7'h) with (7ioi, otherwise Vio,) the moon, is mutually in opposition (Jisiaiig-tni.) 2. chiao, 
 lit. causes, very conimonly=caused by ; preposition of the instrument before a passive verb, by the 
 earth's shade is obscured. 3. na, that, chiu, accordingly, is a raoou-eatiug, sc. lunar eclipse, (see 90.) 
 
 109. We have had bad weather for several days running, but to-night every star in the heavens 
 is out. We shall probably have a fine day to-morrow. 
 
 Obs. I. lien-yin, &c. There has been a succession of darkness for some days, (see I4S.) 2. i-l'ien 
 &c., the whole sky's stars have all come out. 
 
 110. There is no sight so beautiful as those stars up there, twinkling incessantly. 
 
 Lit. The stars' light flashing without cessation, in yonder [place,] moving with irregular (or uncertain) 
 motion [luan lung], [is a sight] fair to see, a fair sight, — that has reached the extreme, (i-clii.) 
 
 111. The night is well on, the moon is fairly set, and you see the stars are dim; it will be day- 
 lijjht before lona:. 
 
 Obs. 1. fairly set, all down, tou lao-liao. 2. tan, (see 149). 3. pu ta 'hui-urh, (pron. 'hu-'rh,) not a 
 great while. 
 
 (9) 
 
 c
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 112-123. 
 
 112. Tills is a fine night indeed; tiie wliole sky is covered tiiick witli clusters of stars. 
 
 Obs. 1. rcan-shitwi, the nij^lit To (day's] iiiylit truly is there fine wciilher, (t'ien-r/i'i, heaven's air or 
 matter) ; densely, or, closely, {mi-mi), and proniibcuoiisly, or, iutersjiersedly, {tsa-tsa), the wliole, lit. 
 full, sUy is all stars. 
 
 113. The time that they (the thieves) broke in was after cock-crow, and a little hefore day-light: 
 there were still a few stars left in the sky, scattered here and there at long intervals. 
 
 Obs. 1. ta-chin-lai, forcibly {la,) entered. 2. <i, understand (.s/i(A-'//o!() time after it: " Their forcible 
 entry — 's (/(') [time] was cocU-croH' {chi-rhiao,) tliercat'ter, — the sky soon to be light — 's [ti) time." 
 
 3. hsi-hsi, thinly scattered, la-hi, han;;inu one to another like a strinj^ of beads ; which they «ould 
 not seera to do if they were i\\\c\<. [mi-mi tsa-tsa, iee 112): the whole clause stands adverbially; 
 
 rthin-and-string like, there remained {sheng-liao,) some stars. 
 
 114. The duration or Ijrevity of the life of every man that is born into the world, his poverty or 
 his comfort, are all [told] in his horoscope. His lot is decided as soon as he is out of his 
 mother's womb. 
 
 Obs. 1. Man born into the world — 's longevity, or shortness of life. 2. poverty; cZ/'iim?, ill-fortune as 
 opposed to fiDKj, passing freely on, success. 3. horoscope, shauj-ch'tn, birth-tiuie — 's pa-tzu-urh, 
 eight characters, viz., for year, month, day, hour; each of which will be represented by two cha- 
 racters taken from the ten stems and twelve branches of the horary system. 4. i-ch'u, once out of 
 {nianij) his dam's {t'ai-puo) womb, [his lot] is fixed, {ting-chun,) settled exactly ; with the certainty 
 of anything thai is decided by a gauge or standard, {chun.) 
 
 115. When the state is in the enjoyment of peace, its ruler upright, his ministers virtuous, and 
 the people happy and industrious, harmony so perfect becomes known to heaven, and the ap- 
 pearance of propitious stars and plueaomena of good omen is a natural consequence. 
 
 Obs. 1. enjoy peace, (ch'cng-p'ing), lit. receive [Heaven's blessing of] peace. 2. happy and indus- 
 
 trious, {to-ych,) rejoicing in their callings. 3. so perfect [i-t'uan-'ho-ch'i), lit. that unity (i-t'uan) of 
 concord; i-t'uan stands as the attributive of '/io-c/i'/, concord-temper, q. d. isla integra concordia. 
 
 4. becomes known, (t'ung,) communicates with. 3. a natural conse()uence, lit. spontaneously, 
 or, absolutely, (izii-jan,) then, or, accordingly, there are, (chiu yu). 6. there appear, (ch'u-haien,) 
 come out into visibility. 
 
 1 16. The [spirit of the] South Star keeps the record of life, that of the North Star that of death ; 
 the object of the worship of the North Star is therefore, in most cases, long life. 
 
 Obs. 1. The two constellations referred to are supposed to be inhabited by two spirits, one of whom 
 keeps the book of life, the other that of death. 2. nan-tou, the south corn-measure, /jei-^o«, the 
 northern; Charles's Wain. (See 117.) 3. chu, to enter in a book or on a document. 4. so-i, 
 
 which because of,=therefore, the men that adore {pai) the pei-tou, almost (cA'a-/JK-fo-r/i-<i,) all are 
 praying-for longevity — 's {ti), [men]. 
 
 117. The Seven Stars, Charles's Wain, [is a constellation consisting of] four in the fore part [and] 
 three behind ; like a ladle with a handle to it. That is the pei-iou. 
 
 Obs. I. k'o, the numeral noun of stars, beads, &c. 2. hsiang, resembling, a having a handle's ladle, 
 {ho yu-pa-'rh-ti sJiou-tzu,) a ladle with a handle; yu, having=with. 
 
 118. Orion is a constellation that rises at sunset and sets before day-break, so that it and the con- 
 stellation Shang never see each other. 
 
 Obs. 1. shin, in this sense also pron. ch'en and ts'an. 2. ti, at the end ; understand star, or constella- 
 tion, after it, and the three clauses following shili, is, take as attributive of this noun :— Oiion is a sun- 
 set's time coming out, — sky not light then setting, — with {'hai, see 108) the sliang-hsing never meet- 
 ing - - 's {ti) constellation. 3. chien-mien to see the face, to meet, have an interview with. 
 
 119. As soon as you two meet you are certain to fall out; in short you are Hesperus and Lucifer. 
 (See 1-20.) 
 
 Obs. 1. lia, colloqui.il use of Hang, two, under certain circumstances. 2. fall out, pan-tsui, to mix 
 lips, have an altercition. 3. in short, clnen-chih-ti, concise-and-straight-ly, speaking to the point. 
 4. you are certain, {ch'eng,) you are so made, it is in your nature. 
 
 120. The star which rises just at day- break and is called ch'en, is the same as the star shen. They 
 are two names of the same star. 
 
 Obs. 1. the same with that shen star one fashion. 2. one star two names. 
 
 1*21. Compared with any other, Venus is a star of extraordinary brightness. 
 
 Lit. compared with other stars is beyond a due proportion {fen) bright. 
 U ' U " Obs. 1. /lUiiia (iii/i^ commonly a constellation. 2. _/««, a due share, 2«cw' beyond. 3. Venus, CAw flim^, 
 '***'^ ^^ tlie Gold Star. 
 
 1-22. There is a small bright star to^e seen every evening by the side of the moon; it is called the 
 Lin Hsing. The popular saying is that the Lin Hsing is in chase of the moon. 
 Obs. su-yii-'rh shuo-ii, that which the conunou expression says, shi/i is, &c. 
 
 123. The Liang Hsing (bright star) is called Ming Hsing, as well, and also Ch'en Hsing. It is 
 visible every morning at day-break. 
 
 Obs. 1. viei-feng, (see 91,) every time [one] meets, wheneTer [it] occurs, whenever is met day-light's time. 
 2. then it is visible Onieii). 
 
 ( 10 )
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 124-133. 
 
 124. [The Star of Longevity]. Vox as old as you ai-e, you are soutuler than we youngsters are. 
 You will live to a hundred for certain. You seem to be a Lao-shou Hsing, quite a Star of 
 Longevity. 
 
 Obs. I. ni-na, nr, ni-ni, you, is more respectful tlian ni alone. 2. a^e; jn'en-c/n', years' record, — this so- 
 great aye having conipletud. 3. pi, compared with us years-light, sc. yiiiin^, men. 4. 'hai. yet, 
 t'ollo\vin"-/J2, streiij,'tluMis the comparison or contrast; are yet, or, for all your fjreat ago. 5. ying- 
 lati", ft." hard and clear, or hrij^ht, (see \2.'>). 6. c/iiraig-lrii, for tlie time to come, [I, the speak- 
 er,]^ c/«i7i, measure for certain, (sec 114,) confidently predict that you, 'huo-te-tao, living-will-succecd- 
 in-reachin^' — 100 years. 
 
 125. Thouo-h there is rebellion in every direction at the present moment, it is so far lucky, as I 
 hear the astronomers observe, that the 77 Ilsiiic/ is bright. [So long as that is the case,] no 
 danger is to be apprehended to the state. 
 
 Obs. 1. rebellion, faii-liirni, topsy-turvy, ijreat confusion, 2. the astronomers ; t'd-men, them, the liwm 
 hsincj-ti. hehoidiurr star prople; not so depreciating .1 term as star-i;azers with us, 3. cliiani) cliin 
 
 remark, observe, eitlier directly, or tbroni;h a third party. 4. so far liicUy — 'liao isai, lit. there is 
 good in the brightness {ndnij-'huig) of the star. 5. Tiie state, ta-ski/i, lit. the great estate, the 
 great interest. 
 
 126. A comet {lit. a broom star) has a head and a tail; the tail pointing (or facing) upwards, the 
 head pointing or facing downwards. Its tail consists of a number of small stars, the radiance 
 of which is shot out to a distance of several feet, like [the train of] a rocket. When this 
 star makes its appearance, disorder in the empire is sure to follow. 
 
 Obs. 1. tail, tuci, so pron. when alone ; when joined to pn, pron. i; fou-wet, head and tail, both ends, of 
 many things ; i-pa an animal's tail. 2. points, ch'oo, to be in the direction of. 3. a num- 
 ber of, '/iao-/jw/i-;to, a good few — stars. 4. huang-mang, brightness-points; mrHig, the tip of a 
 blade of grass, &c. 5. ruiAiel, p'eh-'huo-t'ung, puiiing-fire tube. 6. disorder, j/ao-/!ia« ov jao- 
 luan, to stir up, or round, confusedly. 
 
 127. Sagittarius rules the wind, and the Hyades the rain. 
 
 Obs. 1. Ch'i, S,igittarius, and Pi, the Hyades, are two of the 28 constellations under which the Chinese 
 month is arranged, and on the day on which each appears, certain consequences are supposed to 
 follow. (Compare our St Swithin.) 2. rules; c/««, rules or controls. 
 
 128. When a star flits suddenly across the heavens, it is called a Uu-hsing (falling star or meteor), 
 also a tsei-hsing, (a thief star) ; it is considered to be to a certain extent ominous, but not to 
 influence matters of importance. The terms, Uu-hsing andjei-hsing, (flying-star,) are synony- 
 mous. 
 
 Obs. 1. considered, sua7i, reckoned, — to be, shao-wei, a little, /)i<-ft',not-lnck — 's (ti) presage, chan-l'ou-'ih. 
 
 2. induence, chu; (see 127, obs. 2.) 3. synonymous; «//iA, are, pi>;g-/is!H(7, together going, 
 pari passu, — t'ung-yung, in-common-used — 's {ti) designations, {ming-nm, name and class.) 
 
 129. A meteor passes the meridian with more than ordinary rapidity : for instance, in the twinkling 
 of an eye it will move from the hundredth meridian to the hundred and tenth, sc. ten degrees 
 in a moment. 
 
 Obs. more than ordinary, {ftn-ivai, see 121.) 
 
 130. If a person lose no time in tying knots in his waist-band, when he sees a shooting star 
 (thief star, sc. meteor,) fall, he will neutralize its evil eflect. 
 
 Obs. 1. If, ?/ao, otherwise^o : — a man if it be that he, seeing a thief star fly past. 2. lose no tirae;^a«, 
 to pursue, kan-cho, participle or adverb, 3. pa, sign of object, yao-tai, his girdle, waist-girdle. 
 
 4. ta-ch'eng, strikes complete, makes- 5. s:u ho-ta, dead knots, knots that will not 
 run. 6, then can he neutralize, (chich-ch'u,') loosen and put an end to. 7. pu-hsiang, the not 
 lucky, the evil. 
 
 131. It constantly happens, when you see a meteor falling, that you seem to bear a whiz in the 
 sky, and then it disappears. 
 
 Obs. 1. constantly, {ivang-wang,) one sees a meteor. 2. in the sky above, falling {ch'ui,) below. 
 
 3. lai, au.\iliary of ch'ui. 4. you seem to hear; 'hao-hsiang, it much resembles, is much as if, 
 shua-te, there brushed, i-shtng, a sound ; and then [you] do not see it; it disappears. 
 
 132. At Peking, some years ago a star fell from the north-west; it dropped inside the Tejjf Sheng 
 Gate, and was deposited in a temple, where it has remained ever since. It is longer than it 
 is broad ; of a very black colour, and its whole surface is in large cavities. 
 
 Obs. 1. some years ago. There was one year [the circumstance that] in, lit. on, the north-west, there 
 fell {ch'ui-lisia - - lai,) a star, {i-k'o lising-hsing) ; 2. drop, {tiao) properly to hang down. 3. ever 
 
 since, {tao-ju-chiii,) up to now, still in the temple is it {fang-clio,) properly, placed. 4. very black ; 
 — c/t'« commonly pron. ch'i, varnished; each of the colours has a distinctive prefix of this kind. 
 
 5. surface, lit, the whole body all is holes. If these were small the expression would be h'li- 
 lung-yen-rh, eyes of, or eye-like, cavities, 
 
 133. Last night the stars were so thick ! One took its place by another till there was not a'clear 
 spot in the whole sky. 
 
 Obs. 1. one took its place, &c. One shouldering another (ai-cho, or '^ai-cho,) came out until {ch'u-ti) 
 the full, whole, sky had pot a vacaut-superfluous (kung-yii) [place] ; uo room to spare. 
 
 (11)
 
 TIE'S, HEAVEN, TflE HEAVENS, &c. 134-144. 
 
 134. Cloud is in fact a vapor (or mist.) It is continually being emitted from the tops of the 
 hiuhest hills. The moment it feels the wind it disperses itself (or is dispersed; in mid air, 
 oliscuring the light of the sun or the moon. That is cloud, [lit. cloud-hue.) I have also 
 heard it said that there is a tiger that puffs out cloud, but I can't say I ever saw him. 
 
 Ohs. I. Emitted, more propoily omits itsplf; mrto indicates spontaneous action. 2. In mid-air, pan- 
 hsiian-U, in tlie lialf viiciium, half way in the vacuum hclvveen licaven and earth, as it were where a 
 tiling suspended would be lian^'in;;, {/isiiati.) .'3. c/te-le, in shadini; succeeds, shades, the sun and 
 moon, [and causes them] icu-kuaiuj , not to have li-^ht, olisi:ures thcni. _ 4. I can't say, &<;.; h'o 
 modifies the positiveness of the statement ; it is scarcely possible to do justice to it in trauslatiou. 
 
 135. See ! There is a very long streak of cloud, like a dragon, in the south-west. 
 
 Ohs. t'iao in the hrst clause, a streak or strip ; in the second, the numeral prefix, or classifier, of dragon. 
 
 136. See there are clouds rising (or forming) over yonder. 
 
 Obs. shiag, to be generated, cki to rise, lai auxiliary of action, or motion. 
 
 136 a. [Sometimes] on a dry clear day there will a sudden puflF of wind, and the clouds rise at 
 
 all points. 
 
 Obn. 1. dry, clear, lit. loud ringing, (see 62, and compare our word, crisp.) 2. suddenly, 'hu-jan-chien, 
 wiihin suddenness [tiicre coniesj. 3. i-c/ienfciir/, a blast or put}' of wind : chin can hardlv be 
 
 considered a numeral noun w'nh/eiiy; it must be translated as iu the text. 4. at all points, 
 lit., szu-hsia-Ii, the four directions, or places, within. 
 
 137. In time of war, infantry and cavalry crowd to one spot, in thousands and tens of thou- 
 sands, like the gathering of the clouds and the meeting of the mists. 
 
 Lit. at the time of sending forth troops, the thousand army and the ten thousand horse crowd to (cAj 
 
 tao) one spot, {lit. one piece or clod,) as if it were clouds conglomerating {t-un,) mists assembling. 
 Obs. t'un-jiiui/, means military colonists. 
 
 138 In the second and eighth moons you may see clouds of singular appearance, piled one on top 
 of another, and of every possible form, 
 
 Obs. I. !«7i-/)«-j/«e/i, two [and] eight moon. 2. c/«')ao, curious, possessing properties or characteristics 
 out of the common. 3. c/i'uiii/, dmibled, or, in layers ; tie/t, reduplicated. 4. shih-mo, (pron. 
 she-mo,) what=whatever, form, all, or every one, there is (_tou yu). 5. two and eight, see 101. 
 
 139. The sun was shining bright one moment, and the ne.\t the clouds had overspread the whole 
 sky. 
 
 Lit. Just now the sun was still (7m!) letting appear (lou-cho) brightness; a moment's interval, (lit. 
 
 leisure,) cloud then [was] spread to tilling. 
 Oi5. 1. 7/a(, disjunctive; its force is felt in the second clause. 2. the verb ;/!/-7nori, is to spread to 
 
 filling, to spread completely over; fien, the sky, may be understood as the object after p'u-mari. 
 
 140 If clouds cover the moon on the 15th of the 8th moon, the snow will put out the lamps on 
 tlie loth of the 1st moon [of the new year.] 
 Obs. taftiiu/, will strike the lamps. 
 
 1 41. It was a fine moon-light night when all of a sudden the clouds covered the moon. 
 Obs. covered {tanfj-chu), lit. obstructed, hindered the way of, blocked up. (See 102, obs. 3.) 
 
 142. The sky over here is dark and watery looking, while over there there is a clear sky. 
 The clouds have separated and are quite dense on one side, while there are hardly any on 
 the other. 
 
 Obs. 1. /i>ii7-to/i^, is a metal bell or globule; a horse's neck-bells. Lit. This side darkness attains to 
 be water-i'lobule looking (ici2-<!.) 2. '/j«a?i, disjunctive ; here thus, while there, on the contrary, 
 &c. 3. lo, before chHng-t'ien, redundant. 4. san-te, have separated, one side dense {'hou), one 
 side sparse (pao,) lit. thin. 
 
 143. [A mottled sky.] When the clouds rise all of a sudden on a fine clear day, a cloud from 
 the east, and a cloud from the west, and [in short] from all four quarters of the heavens, 
 without however quite over-spreading the sky, people say the clouds are 'hua-ta (chequered.) 
 
 Obs. 1. tung-i-h'uai, &c., east one piece, west one piece, (viz. of cloud), in the four quarters there rise 
 clouds. 2. A'o-tox, possibly all, yet, or nevertheless, (7i«e or 7ii/a?i,) not overspreading. S.'hua- 
 ta, lit. flower-patch like, an expression applied to any surface on which there are spots of color or 
 dirt, lying regularly or irregularly, but oftener the latter. It may be said of an ill-washed face. Its 
 duplicate, 'hua-'hua ta-ta, may be used, or, 'hua-li 'hua-ta. (See 264, obs. 4.) 
 
 144. The clouds to-day are some of them in patches, like the waves of the sea, and some in 
 
 streaks and flecks, like a pheasant's plumage. 
 
 Obs. 1. yt(, there are [some], i-p'ien-ih i-p'ien-rh-ti ; nouns doubled in this way are a very common equi- 
 valent for what we term the adverb ; (/.d. a-piece-a-piece-like, or a-piece-a-piece-wise. If i/ang- 
 tzu, fashion, way, (= -wise,) be understood, which would quite cousist with Chinese idiom, we 
 might regard it as the 'modal case : so, in Latin, tessfllalim=iesiclturum modo, chequered, or, in dice : 
 — p'ien-xirh, pron. p'ii'-'?h. 2. hsianp, kc, like water waves looking (szu-li). 3. yxi, there 
 
 are [others], pan-pan, streak, i!e;i-//e«, spot — like. 5. yeh-chi, lit. wild fowl, the pheasant, as op- 
 posed to chia-chi, the domestic fowl. 
 
 (12)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 145-157. 
 
 145. Tliore lias boon iui excess of dry wcfitlior. Were tliere ever so little an appearance of 
 cluud, we should all be on the qui virc for rain. 
 
 Obs. I. han, Ary, of anytliinj; ; '//«n, piiri-lieil, s|ipci;illy of tlip cartli : dry days liavp Iipcn (/o) many: h(>rc, 
 too many. '2. cliih-yao, it is only needful tliat in tlip sl<y {t'ieii-s/iuvf/), tliere should sli;.'htly Ix' a 
 
 partieki of eloiid. .'!. ta-chia-'hno-i-h (see 98) we, all of us, every one, then, {cliiii), would be 
 looking for {jian-cho), the rain falling. 
 
 146. It lins not raiiiod for a month and more; llie crops in tlie c^round are tlioroiij^ldy burned np, 
 and here we arc without a cloud to be seen. Wiien are we to have a dark day again, I 
 wonder ! 
 
 Obs. 1. chuanri-chia, lit. tlic ijrai'n on unenclosed lands; rlnianr) is land outside a city; clmang-clna, 
 a general expression for all i;i'ain growing'. 2. ton han-tou-liud, all dried thron;;h and through. 
 
 3. h.'iinn'^ chCino wii-iiiin-tt, is an exclamation, ^ ' and sucli-a-niyriad-/i-aiid-not-a-cloud [sky] ' ! 
 
 4. io-tsan, purely colloquial, when ? 
 
 147. The sky is dark; look out for rain, and if there is anything outside that it is likely to spoil, 
 brins: it in in time. 
 
 Obs. 1. ivai-t'ou ; [ If ] outside there be any rain-fearing thing. 2. ^sao-//SieA-)7i, early somewhat, ^ in 
 time. 3. slmti-clnn-lai, in-gathering it entering come; s/ion, to collei:t, taUe, or put, away a thing; 
 chin and lai are auxiliaries of motion and direction. 
 
 148. We have not seen the sun for more than a fortnight; with bad weather like this, lasting so 
 many days, every thing will be spoiled. 
 
 Obs. 1. lien yin-t'ien, a succession of dark days, certainly implies continuation of rain, bad weather: yin- 
 t'ien, a dull day, may be with or without rain. (See 14(i, 149.) 2. t'sai shili, then it will be [that 
 it, the weather,] tsao-Pa, will injure, &c. 
 
 149. Overcast as the sky is, the sun is still faintly visible ; a day like this is only a make-believe 
 rainy day ; it is certain not to rain. 
 
 Obs. I. chih-chien, lit. to mind, or see, only, f/.d. for all the exclusive attention bestowed on the fact, or, 
 for all the exclusiveness of the fact; that there is a full sUy's mistiness. 2. cltiieh, nevertheless, 
 there is a little faint or weak {tan-tan) sun. 3. na, that; such [a day] accordingly is a false yin- 
 fien. (See 148.) 4. i-«i«</, it is entirely fixed, quite certain, that. 5. /)«-7mi, it will not. (See 
 92, oJi. 4.) 
 
 150. The sky is full of light clouds that are being hurried along with the wind. 
 
 Lit. The clouds that are floating on the face of the whole sky, following (or, accompanying,) the wind 
 blowing them, gallop along. 
 
 151. Oh ! you are far too slovenly a fellow ! you are the passing cloud and the running stream 
 in every thing, no matter what. You get through it any how, and then you have done 
 with it, (or there 's an end of it ) 
 
 Obs. 1. «/ c/je'-fo^'eft, you this man ; you, now. 2. /nn-son, ftV. dishevelled, uncombed hair. 3. i-kuo 
 t'sao-'rh, as if it were, i--hui. one time, ktio, you pass, ts'ao-ts'ao, carelessly ; a figure taken from grass, 
 &c., growing wild. 4. chiu wan-liao, then [you] have finished it. 
 
 152. The rain is over, and the sky is clear : where are all the clouds gone ? 
 
 153. " Pretty clouds soon pass away " ; an expression intimating that man's good fortune seldom 
 lasts any length of time. 
 
 Obs. 1. Pretty clouds, ts'ai-yiin, coloured clouds, easily disperse. 2. pi-fanri, [expressing,] by com- 
 parison, " man's-good-things-with-dilficulty-obtain-length — "s {ti)" meaning {i-szu). 3. chHtt, 
 long in time, ch'ang, long in extent; the compound, ch'iu-ch'ang, applies only to time. 
 
 154. " The clouds are gone and the mist has cleared off," is said when the clear sky and bright 
 sun become visible after a puff of wind on a cloudy day. 
 
 Obs. 1. The clouds are {shou) in-gathered, taken in, put away, (see 147), and the mists dissipated. 
 
 2. Constr. shih, is, [when] on a rainy day a puff of wind has by blowing effected that (kua-te) 
 
 there visibly comes forth, appears, (Jou-ch'u • ■ lai,) the clear sky and bright day. 3. It would be 
 
 equally correct to place ck'infj t'ien pai jih, between lou-ch'u and lai-liao. 4. faa-<e, by blowing 
 
 has attained — all that follows; loii is a neuter verb. 
 
 155. There is a vague outline of something in motion up in the sky : why ! it looks as if a dragon 
 were sucking up the water over there. 
 
 Obs. I. vague outline, &c. ; ^i«g, shadow, c/i'«o, indefinite extent, room to move in, free to move, movin?. 
 2. why I ; tao, is an objective particle, on the contrary, &c., supply here " [it can't be] but, (tao,) 
 it looks as if, &c.," or some such words. 3. sucking up; hsi, to play with, or sport in, might be 
 used instead. 
 
 156. The horizon is clear all round ; there are only those few light clouds that will be blown away 
 by the first puff of wind. 
 
 Obs. I. the horizon, lit., in the four [parts of the] circumference (chon-iaei,) there is no root or foot, viz., 
 to the clouds. 2. lii;ht clouds, &c., lit. all are some few {lisieh-lw) lloating clouds. 3, one puff 
 of wind, and it will {chiu, then) blowing disperse them. 
 
 157. The clouds are high ; the wind will continue to blow. 
 
 Obs. 1. will continue, ch'ui pu tuan, will blow un-interruptedJy, 
 
 (13) p
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 158-106. 
 
 158, At first the clouds and red mist were mingled together; the wind has blown them asunder, and 
 cloud is now cloud, and red mist, red mist. 
 
 Obs. 1. at first, cli'i-ch'n, coinmencins first, it was cloud with {'luii) red mist (hnn, the misty ^'lare of the 
 siiiv, risiiij; or setting,) joined (&H)in one Innij). 2. chiao, (sec 108,) by llie wiini blowing cut, or, 
 divided {luan,) viz., asunder. (Compare /la tuan, not sundered, 157.) 
 
 169. From being without rain for so many days, the crops are all dried up, and after looking oiH 
 so lono- for a cloudy sky, it is too [)ad that [just as we have got one] this wind should make 
 a point of blowing away all our clouds again. 
 
 Obs. I. Tliese lew days there has not fallen rain; the vrri\iii,{c/iuang-chia, see 14C.) 2. too bad ; '//ao- 
 limig-i, stands interrogatively, " it was yery easy [cji ?j to be looUing out, iSrc. 3. make a point of, 
 'lit. specially, {jMcn-p'icn-urh), that this in-opportune wind {ch'iao-j'cmi) should a^ain taking the 
 douds utterly by blowing disperse thcra. 4. p'len, is to lean in a particular direction; here, 
 specially ; as it were, on purpose, b. r.h'iao, clever, competent to appear in the nici; of time, 
 for good or evil ; hence, opportune, or, inopportune. 
 
 160. The day was overcast, (or gloomy,) but the clouds have been completely cleared away by the 
 steady breeze. *^ 
 
 Obs. 1. \\&s,pi'n-lai, in the first instance, (see <•#♦). 2. by, {chiao, see 108, but here either it, or pa, 
 the sign of the object, must be merged iu construing; by the steady breeze the whole sky — -'s clouds 
 have been blowu away ; or, the stciuly breeze has blown away, &c.) 3. steady breeze, (Jiu-liu, 
 
 36!. You hear that moaning sound in the clouds, it will rain hard in all probability. 
 
 Obs. 1. '/ill la-lm lu-tl, an expression without other purpose than to convey the idea of such a sound as 
 that of lushing wind, water, &c. 2. yiin-mo hsiang, a noise .of stone-grinding in the clouds. 
 
 3. cldli-p'a, {tiKK 107.) 
 
 162. What a beautiful sight the sky is when the clouds are in patches clearly defined like a 
 fish's scales; or, What a beautiful sight a mackerel sky is ! 
 
 Obs. lit. In the sky, flake [fashion] distinct, fish.scale-like, clouds are truly fair to see. 
 
 163. Clouds are rising dark and heavy on every side ; there can be no longer any doubt about its 
 
 got 
 
 ng to ram. 
 
 Obs. I. every side, /iV, on the four faces, (sza-mjen-wr/i.) 2. heavy, ch'en-ch'en, q.d. heavy enough to 
 sink. As a surname read this character shcn. 3. doubt; lit. [does any one] still {'hai,) fear that it 
 will not rain ? — on p'a, fear == doubt, see 29. 
 
 164. When a great accretion of the YiN has dissolved itself, it becomes tvu-chH, mist, which, as it 
 ascends, darkens the earth and obscures the sky. 
 
 Obs. 1. accretion, lit. the Yis matter having assembled until it has attained, [ch'ti te,) excessive fullness, 
 (i'ai s/jcHu), and then, — 2. san c/i'« /ai having dispersed ; c/<'!<-/ai, auxiliary of the action. S.ti 
 inlluences all the words between it and i/m ch'i, and is best taken as tlie relative, — t/in ch'i that has 
 assembled, &c.* 4. becomes, {chin,) then is, wu ch'i. 3. ascends; t'en'j^-Ping-ti, risiug-ly, it by 
 screening attains a heaven-obscuve,-earlh-dark, — 's {ti) — [state of things,] understood. 
 
 165. The carriage is ready, but there is such a fog outside that there is no seeing an arm's-length; 
 you could not tell a man if you were face to face with him. How the carriage is to travel 
 unless we can see the road, I don't know ; I think we had better stop a little and take a snack, 
 and if it is fair about noon, we can make another start. 
 
 Obs. 1. ready, but, &c. The conjunction, but, is needed to give full force to the ^'o, possible, and the 
 • particle iii, whch produces a pause after hsia loii. It may not be incorrect to say that k'o puts the 
 
 verb of the first clause in the subjunctive mood, q. il., The carriage, be it, is ready ; outside, [however], 
 mist is descending, {ni!) — aye, so that one cannot see, 8.C., &iC.;—t'ao a halter, I'ao-shang io harness, 
 Jisieh I'ao, chai t'ao, to unharness. 2. arm's-length ; lit., stretch out straight your arm, you uot see 
 your palm. 3. tell a man; lit, face to face you do not see a man. 4. ti here influences both the 
 
 clauses, shen shou, iic, and 'tui mien, &c. ; both become attributive oi wu, the fog, and, as they stand, 
 enforce its intensity ; lit , outside descends a fog, arm's length not see hand — face to face not see 
 
 man 's {ti) [fog,] understood. 3. chHao-pu-chin, see not true, — when you cannot see which is the 
 
 road, the carriage can how go? 6. in my opinion, i wo shuo, as I s,iy, let us (tsa-iiicn) rest a while 
 lit., a half day. 7. snack, lit., strike sitting a point ; ta ch'ien, to eat a nicil while travelling ; ta tso 
 ch'ien, to eat before you begin your day's journey. 8. wait till noon, [the day] having become fair, 
 — we will again rise, sc, recommence our journey, 
 
 166. On a dark misty day like this the enemy over there can't see anything, and are by no 
 means sure to be on the look out; why should'nt we send a few hundred men and seize their 
 camp while we can ? 
 
 Obs- 1. ch'en cho, (see 99,) having the opportunity of, falling in with, — this mist-descending day of thick 
 darkness; {•hun-'hiin ch'eii-cmn-ti) ; the attributive following its snlistaiitive ; or, as in IGo, obs. 4, 
 preceding a substantive, understood, of kindred meaning to the first one. 2. the enemy, tsei, 
 
 thieves, robbers; any one opposing the Chinese Goveinment in arms is so termed in their articles of 
 ^var — ijch tcci pi, also not certainly, are not for certain ; pi pu, would be, are certain not to be. 3. a 
 few hundred men, lit., soldiers and militia tr-oops; we why not detach some hundred troops. 
 4. while we can, r//2«.s.^(7i, .iccoi-ding to the existent circumstances. N.B. (7«« s//(/i, r-esponds 
 as it were to c/i'en-cho, which afl'ects all the sentence down tofangpci, on the look-out ; — with the 
 Inck to have things so, why not according to that status, &c. ? 3. seize, ch'iaug, possess oneself of 
 by violence, lob. N.15. cli'iann could jwt, as here placed, mean rob, that is pillage, the camp. 
 
 ( 14 )
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 1G7-170. 
 
 167. Observe, all llie the mist in tlie sky is collecting togetlier in a body at that point; it will 
 begin to descend presently. 
 
 Ohs. I. coWacMig, niiiij cli a, lit., is oongealinn'. 2. presently, ^/«-p!<-/o'/7<<j, understand s/i;7t-'/iO!<, time; 
 — in time not much dificriiig, not fur distant. 3. yuo, it will or must, will have to, &c. 
 
 168. When the mist has risen to a certain height, and though it is not very dark below, still, if you 
 look up, you can't see tliroujih it, in such a case it will rain before long. 
 
 Obs. 1. certain height, kuo //« chit, hijrh risiiio; goes. 2. ch'iieh and tao, both objective, elviieh, to 
 
 the first proposition, tao, to the second: — [thou^jh] the mist has risen, ^e< (ch'iieh) it is not very dark 
 below, =[thout;h] it is not very dark below, yet, (lao,) looking;, it is too thick to see through. 3. op, 
 (^tvaiKj sha/tg) up-wards. 4. that, (».a,)^in such a case, theu i^chiu,) there will quickly, soon, be rain, 
 
 169. On the other hand, it will not rain when the sky is clear overhead, and the mists are packed 
 together below. 
 
 Obs. I. ning-chii {^ee IG7.) 2. on tbe other hand, {tao,); a disjunctive particle; observe how its posi- 
 tion in the last clause, and preceded by na, emphasises the contrast ; q.d., that agaiu. In view of the 
 relation between this sentence and IGS, 1 have rendered it as here. 
 
 170. There is such a fog all over the sky, that one can't tell one point of the compass from ano- 
 ther. How is one to know where the ship is going? 
 
 Obs. 1. point of the compass ; ft/., there is no disjiu^i^uishing- oast, south, west, or north. 2. mark these 
 four words, the object, bi'tween the verb, ;4fn-/«<-c//'«, and the auxiliary /at. 3. the ship (f//e-/(o 
 
 ch'uanj this ship, shews that the speaker is on board of her, also that be is speakinj; in the present 
 tense. 4. The uumeral of ships is cAi'A, which seems to be preferred with na, that, while with 
 chc, this, ko is preferred, as here. 
 
 171. In the spring, a column 'of mist will rise to the sky of a morning, without any rain however ; 
 this is caused by the breath, or essence, of the earth reascending, 
 
 Obs. 1. column, &c. ; lit., the smoke-mist (yen-wu,) supportiujj, or proppin;j up, (chanrf,) the sky. 
 
 2. Understand thing;, or circumstance after ii, in construction and translate chang-ti -Ji^i a \)An\- 
 ciple ; — a spring morning, then (chiu) there is mist propping heaven's [circumstance.] 3. however; 
 lit., and still (yii,) tliere is not a rain-falling; or, yu may be rendered by although in the first clause- - 
 when, although there is mist - - there is no rain. 4. «a, that then is the earth-essence reascend- 
 ing; — the theory being that iu autumn the ii-ch'i, earth-matter, is absorbed. 
 
 172. About the end of autumn, you may often see in the sky a faint outline as it were of threads 
 of silk, in appearance resembling a spider's web; in the twinkling of an eye it vanishes. 
 This is the yu-szii (gossamer ?) descending from the sky. 
 
 Obs. J. in the sky, It'iinri clning ; the vacuum within. 2. outline, yhvj-ying ch'ao-ch'ao; (see 1.55.) 
 
 3. as it were ; /e'^, outline-wise — {li^ — there is one line silk, resembling a spider's (c/iiA-c/ii^,) net 
 (tcang). 4. in a twinkling ; lit... one turn of the eye, and again (j/i'„) it is not seen. 5. from 
 the sky, t'ien-shang, lit. up iu the sky; — that is the iip-in-the-sky-comnig-down — 's (ti) wandering 
 silk (yu-szu.) 
 
 173. When the sun is down on the hills, and the clouds are gilt bright by his rays, there is said to 
 be a wan-hsia, (an evening glory, or radiance,) which is more or less a sign of fine weather; 
 familiarly, the evening is said ' to burn fair.' 
 
 Obs. 1. the sun, — lao-yeh-rh,, lit. the old gentleman ; presses the hills ; ya, to press from above. 2. chiao, 
 by, .IS in 108 : — gilt by his rays, chm-'huang-'hiianri-ti,Ut.,'\\\ a gold glitter's [condition.] 3. more or 
 less: k'o chiu modifies the probability : lit., once it is seen, the sky, it is then possible, will be fair. 
 
 4. familiarly; lit., that which is said in the common saying is, ' The evening burns fair ' : 
 
 understand 'hua, talk, after ti, as the noun best corresponding to the verb shuo, to speak, or say. 
 
 174.. Thunder is a concretion of the Yin and Yang, formed in the course of the winter; in the 
 second moon of spring it emits sound and agitates the earth's [conceptive] essence, th« 
 consequence of which is, that all things are ]iroduced. In auttmin, in the eighth moon, when 
 all these productions have attained maturity and are gathered in, the thunder, of course, will 
 likewise gather in=cease its sound. 
 
 Obs. I. i tuny t'ien, onc-and-lhe-same winter's weather, the whole winter through, throughout the winter. 
 2. concretion ; the-yin-and-yang (male and female principles of nature) — congealed-together — 's 
 essence; (niuif-chii, see 167.) 3. c/u'n-tung, causes to vibrate by its rumbling sound. 4. con- 
 
 ceptive; the earth is female, (5(iK,) heaven, male, (yaHj). 5. conserjnence; io-i, which-by, where- 
 f'or, — the myriad things=all creation, cume forth into life, or are sent into life. 5. shou-ctaig 
 (see shou, 147, obs. 2 ;) — [man] gathers them, the myriad things, in ripe ; more pai'ticularlv said of irrain; 
 shou-ckcng, hen(^e ripeness, harvest, whether;the thing be yet ingathered or not. 7. "cease ; lit. the 
 thunder also, (yeh,) in that case, (chiu,) ought to, will naturally, {yao,) — gather in, put away, [shou,) 
 =:cease, its din. 
 
 175. Thunder is the noise produced by the collision of the Yin with the Yang in the air. 
 
 , Obs. I. in the air; pan-hsii-k'ung-li, ia the half (hemispheric) vacuum; (compare 134.) 2. construe 
 
 lei, thunder, shilt, is, hsiang, a sound; by the action of ti the whole sentence from shih down be- 
 comes attributive oi' hsiang. 3. lit. Thunder is the Yin-iind-Yang-two-essences, — the-mid-vacuum- 
 within, — cross-attacking, {chiao-hmg,)—t\ih-[n\lh]lhAt-colM'mg,(pei-tz'ii-chuang,)—'s (/i) sound. 
 
 176. When a clap of thunder is heard by an undutiful son, or by a woman who is not dutiful to 
 her husband's parents, it is pretty certain to startle them. 
 
 Obs. 1. undutiful son, lit. a constantly not dutiful to his father and mother — 's — (/i,) male. 2. or by a 
 
 woman; or.'hai, (see 72;) lit. or that not dutiful to her husband's father, {hing,) and mother 
 
 (p'o')—'s (ti,) female. 3. hearing it strike thunder (ta-ki). 4. pretty certain, ho-chiu, lit. 
 
 possibly then are startled, terrilied {'huany-Uao). o. constantly, su-(j{ang, in the habit of. 
 
 G. that; na, such and such, any, (see 177.) 
 
 (16 )
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 177-187. 
 
 177. I have long lieard of your (rrcat fame, it has pierced my ears like the roar of thunder. This 
 is an expression of compliment to the person you are addressing, on his far-exteiidiii);^ 
 reputation. 
 
 Ohs. I. pierced, huan, lit. has strung my ears, as one strinns ^tearls, cash, &c. 2, this is a-praising-that 
 (na=tho)-person's-repute-as-f'ar-and-wide — 's (<i) talk ('/lua). 
 
 178. Listen to that incessant thundering ! (or, how it keeps on thundering.) I am afraid it will 
 be shattering something. 
 
 Obs. I. thi3-lhuiidei--iiot-interrHpted — 's (ti') noise. I only fear it is seeking {ch'ao-cho), what it may 
 break, 3. ch'ao is an active verb, to seek for; p'i to split open, to rive. 
 
 179. When a sharp clap of thunder comes on one, one can't help feeling a shock at the noise, 
 whether one will or no. 
 
 Obs. 1. comes on one, lit. [when] suddenly there has struck; rniiig indicates fierceness, abruptness; kw- 
 ling, means a solitary nail, or it may be written, ting, an individual : say, suddenly and sinyiy. The 
 fi^'ure is most likely taken from one sudden blow of a hammer. 2. clap of thunder, chiao-lei ■ — 
 cliiao, well burnt, burned black; here, the sound of a thing so burned, as compared with the dull 
 sound of a thine^ that is damp. 3. shock; {ieu 'huang \n ITG, ohs. 4.) 4. one can't help, y>«yu 
 is short tor pu-chin-pu-yu, neither restraining nor permitting; sponianeous_, iuvoliintarv 
 
 n-pu-yu, neitner restraining nor permitting; sponianeous_p luvoliintar'^ y . 
 
 Chuf five stA^MHgt»f yy^A^ aUp it fcdUA (m fKL MuftK, 
 
 2S a wicked man or a-ricidus monster, rf it itn4:e i> T i iyuw i nlLi ' a.< u ' li I . 
 
 180. When thunder strikes a wicked man or a 
 one says he has been chen-szu, dinned to death 
 
 Obs. strikes ; chi is a literary word, but may be here used ; p'i (178) is more colloquial. 2. wicked 
 man, tsij-'So-tijen, au evil-doer; vicious monster, leuai-ioii, an out-of-the-way animal, ch'ing c/iing, 
 which has been formed intelligent, sc. too intelligent, uncanny. 3. bystanders ; lit. if it be that / f jl, 
 by the side, (p'ang-pie-'rh,) there be any one (Jen), [struck,] :* :- "'-^ '•" ^-..-v pininii nnn ii n l m niMf' 
 
 «aiBfiatiyit>^7/«ikj£i«li^U^aaJl UIIU clicn ££$; of [the thunder's] noise dead. 
 
 181. I hear it said that the person who was struck yesterdaj^ by the thunder had never done any 
 harm; which proves that the cause [of his being struck was] no act of his in this state of exist- 
 ence. No wonder that people say, thunder will strike through three lives [of the same person.] 
 
 Obs. I. Yesterday hy {chiao, I OS) the thunder struck (//i, 178.) that,=the, man. 2. ting-chien shuv, 
 
 1 hear it said, stands parentlietically ; shih, was. 3. The following five words should be taken to- 
 gether as attributive of man, understood; — was a-not-having-doue-injurious (7«uoi)-things-rraan]. 
 4. which proves ; tsu chicn-tc, sufficiently can it be seen. 5. this state, {chin shing) as op- 
 
 posed to the past, already gone through ; — there was no present life's matter [to cause his death]. 
 6. three lives, — the theory being that a man dying becomes a brute, and then a man again ; or 
 he may figure as man in all three existences. 
 
 182. What, so disobedient even to your father and mother ! Are you not afraid of being struck by 
 heaven's thunder ? 
 
 Obs. I. even, tou, enforces the position. 2. to your father ,&c. ; lit. even, (tou,) in their presence, 
 
 (ken-ch'ien,) before them. 3. chi-mo, thus, so, icu-ni, disobedient, specially of filial disobedience. 
 4. nantao, it is hard to say, you don't mean to say; a purely interrogative expression responded 
 to, as here, hy pu-ch'eng, not ended, completed, at the close of the sentence. Each is, however, used 
 independently, nan tao without pit ch'eng, and vice-versa. 5. struck; you don't mean to say 
 
 you don't fear heaven will strike [you with] a thunder-stroke, eh ? 
 
 183. If it does not cease thundering in the 8th moon, the whole country will be overrun. 
 
 Obs. 1. cease; sJwu, ingather; (see 174.) 2. overrun, lit. the whole country round (p'ien ti) all (tvu) 
 
 will be robbers, (tsei,) or outlaws. 
 
 *64. Tien, lightning is the flash emitted on collision between the Yin and Yang ; [such collision] 
 with a sound is thunder ; but without a sound it is lightning. 
 
 Obs. 1. emitted on collision ; lit., Aen is the two essences, Yin and Yang, one with the other forcing 
 out — 's (fi) fire-flash. 2. two essences, nrh ch'i, need not be translated; it simply connects the 
 Yin and Yang in the same plurality. 3. force out, chi ch'ii, is properly applied to the effect pro- 
 duced on a rapid stream by obstructing its way. 4. i^u stieng urh ti, understand 'huo kuang, flash, 
 after ti ; or circumstance, collision, &c. 5. h'o chiu ; a good teacher says that the k'o is introduced 
 to emphasise the contrast, and to recal the subject, q.d. that is fien, and not lei. Compare 1S5. 
 
 185. It does rain a little less, but the sky is still flashing with lightning, (it is still lightening;) it 
 has not done yet in all probability. 
 
 Obs. 1. k'o with 'huan, marking distinction or contrast, but not as in 184"; — lit., the rain, be it, (A'o,) has 
 trifliiigly {liieh, also read liao, Ho,) lessened a particle. 2. [but] the sky still ('huan,) flashes. 3. 
 chihjj'a, see 107. 
 
 186. A white flash falls on the heart of man, a red flash on the heart of the devil. 
 
 Obs. 1. The saying means that there is mischief in the red, but none in the white. 2. yao, impish ; 
 
 supernatural in a bad sense. 
 
 187. A friend that is like a flash of lightning. He meets one, and the next moment there is not a 
 sign of him to be seen. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. a lightning-like friend; shan-tien, it is lightning. 2. fereg chien mien, we just see each 
 
 other's faces. 3. and the ne.xt moment; vu, in the second instance, there is no sign, lit. shadow, 
 of him. 4. liao; the first may be looked on as the auxiliary of mei; the second, read as lo, an 
 expletive, or euphonic particle. 
 
 (16)
 
 T'JEN, HRAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 188-194. 
 
 188. The expression tnshan, [commonly applied to tiie flasliin£r of lightning,] is also employed, 
 when women dressing their hair before one glass, use another smaller glass to throw the re- 
 flection of the queue on that before them. Vou may say, Look at her yonder, la-shan, (dress- 
 ing her back liair.) 
 
 Lit. [VVlicii] women employing tlie mirror, comliin;; tlic bead, also faking' a small niirror coritrari«-ise 
 i-clli'i:t tiiat hiiiiicr svv:cllo\v tail, |tliat] is also called ta shaii. Obs. I. ihi/t,tn employ, liere = a jire- 
 
 posilioii uliirli we render at, or, beloie. 2. also take, {j/u na,) one face small ylass; j/h acts (like 
 
 *////() as a preposition of tlie iusliunient employed. .'S. to throw tlie retiection, /«i iliaii, opposiii;;ly 
 
 to rellect. 4. one f;lass - -another smaller, &c., — !/«, besides, /(.9(«o, small. 5. swallow-tailed queue, 
 (i/cn-i-tzti,) worn by Chinese women. 6. one face sm.ill jjlass ; jiiicn, face is the classilii>r, or nume- 
 ral noun, of mirror. 7. also CdWedi, yeh-chiao ; also, = besideiyits use in the foregoing examples. 
 
 189. The flash of lightning certainly made me start; and when this was followed by a clap of thun- 
 der, I was frightened beyond measure. 
 
 Obs. 1. hang-ts'in does not necessarily mean that the fl.ash had just note been seen, but is ralher, just at 
 the moment, viz : that the flash had frightened the speaker, — by a second occ'urrence {yn,) he was more 
 ffi;;htened. 2. certainly, (S.-C. I, in the first instance {pin lai), then (c/iiu), was starlli'd (hsia liao; 
 
 hsia properly an a(^tive verb) — a shudder (i to so.) 3. when this was followed, .Vc. ; lit., followinjf 
 (ken f/io,) in addition (yii,) there was a thunder-clap. 4. fri;,'htened, &c. : ^'« is pro|)ei'ly a neuter 
 
 verb, here active; /<e/i(/ p^a-tt wo, more frightened me. 5. beyond measure, ^iaoy^u ie in-tinite-ly. 
 6. the Hash ; lit., there flashed lightning a flash. 
 
 190. The year I went up from 'Hang Chou to Peking, I travelled in a carriage and pair. I had 
 got as far as the Yellow River, and was on the dyke, with no house or village within reach, 
 before or behind, when it came on to rain so heavily that I was obliged to feel my way in the 
 dark, and, before I was aware of it, we were on the edge of the dyke. If it had not been for 
 the bright light of a fortunate flash, a moment more and we should have been down in the 
 Yellow River, carriage and all ; and then it would have been one wash of the waves, and no 
 more would have been seen of us. 
 
 Obs. 1. went up, chin, to enter especially of the metropolis; a place of hinher from a place of lower de- 
 gree. 2. caiiiage and pair; lit., sitting in a carriage of two halters, = two animals |^s//e«/7 h'ou.) 
 3. t% the earth embankments of a river. 4. on the dyke, (shang;) lit., going reached tlie 
 Yellow River's dyke upon. 3. with no house, S:c. ; lit., before, not touching, or finding, a village, 
 
 behind, not a house : — house, ticn, for h'o-tien, a guest-house, an inn. 6. the last two 
 
 clauses from cliien to litn-urh, by the action of <?, become altriluitives of the word place understood; 
 at the place so described, it came on to rain. 7. obliired, lit. there began to descend ;;reat rain- 
 [such that] all I could do {cliih 'Iiao, my only resource, lit. KOnd, was) feeling {mo cho,) the dark, to 
 go. 8. aware of it, &c. ; lit., not providing against it {pu fang). I had reached the embank- 
 
 ment's edge: — obs. shatig, was on the edoe; scarcely translateable with the rest of the clause rendered 
 as here. 9. If it had not been, &c. : til., unless luckily (h'uci,) a bright flash had shone (chao,) 
 
 [enabling me] to see {chien). 10. a moment more ; /isieu-hsieh-iir/i, danger within a little, a narrow 
 
 escape: but it will not do to say. Had it not been for the flash we should have had a narrow escape; 
 the translator must humour the idiom somewhat as I have done; this and the j/ao pu support, do 
 not neutralize each other. 11. down, Slc., lit., both carriage and man {lien - -tai - -) would have 
 
 fallen {tiao - - ■ - ch'ii,) a.t the river's inside {tsai--li); q.d. would f.iUing have gone to [the place] 
 within the river. 12. one wash, &c. ; lit., one wave, and then not a shadow or sio-n. 
 
 191. When it was raining yesterday evening, all of a sudden there came a flash of lightnino- that 
 set the child crying, and then late at night it became feverish. If its illness should prove seri- 
 ous, it will be said that this brought it on ; or., where illness under such circumstances proves 
 serious, it is said to have availed itself of an occasion. 
 
 Obs. I . sudden (meng-jan-chien) ; mcng, lit. fierce, abrupt ; (see 1 79, obs. l.);j'in, adverbial, abrupt-Iy ; c/JcJ{, 
 within, in the course of; the three words stand .is an adverb. 2. the flash, (see 189.) :!■ pc^ 
 sign of the object preceding its verb, (see 130.) 4. set crying, /(.sk frightened, startled, k'u to cry. 
 5. late, pan ych li, about midnight, in the half night. 6. became feverish ; lit., then [chiu) there 
 came forth (j'a,) inceptively {ch'i,) or issuing arose, a burning (s/tao.). 7. If its illness - - brou"-ht 
 
 it on; ftl., If it should be that illness should have (liao.) become severe, this would then be caUed 
 " a borrowing of occasion or origin :"— the theory being that all sickness requires some onenin^'- or 
 introduction. " 
 
 192 The sky is dark though not very dark, but it keeps lightening over there in the distance. 
 I suppose there has been rain somewhere or other. 
 
 Obs. I. to (compare 124, 176, 185,) is partly modificatory of yin, dark, and partly disjunctive; 
 
 lit. the sky, it may he admitted (k-o,) is dark (yin.) not attaining a depth of darkness (chc'n,) but - - 
 
 2. over there, &c.; afar ofl' in that (wn) place. 3. I suppose, &c.; {cliih p'a, compare 107, 
 
 obs. 6.) I a^tprehend that |tbe factj is (shih) Lthat] elsewhere it has rained, or, has beeu rainiu", or', 
 
 has begun to rain. °' 
 
 193. In the third watch about midnight when the sky is full of stars, if a ievf slight flashes are seen 
 in the horizon, they are oidy lu-shui shati, rfew-Iightning, and by no means portend rain. 
 
 Obs. I. stars, hsing-tou, lit., star measures, bushels; see 116, obs. 2.) 2. understand time after ti; at 
 the lime that. 3. after slicjht Slashes Jvc, lit., suddenly on the sky's verge, slii,'blly ( loei-irci-ti), there 
 have struck three or two flashes, that then is, &c. 4. portends. Id., not at all 'is it imping pu s/ii/i,) 
 
 [the factJ that there must be (yao,) dark, sc. bad, weather. 
 
 194. When you see a succession of flashes of lightning, followed by thunder, it is most likely about 
 to strike snmelhing. 
 
 Obs. I. i//'7)j may precede the &« litn pu tuan. Seethe clause appended. 2. followed ; /i<., behind- 
 side following, ithere isj thunder. 3. about to strike ; seeking, (sec 178.) 
 ( 17 ) E
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. 195-202. 
 
 195. Tliough tlic rain does not come down, it still keeps on lightening a little over tliere; it is not 
 likely to hold up. 
 
 Obs. 1 . still {'han, 'hai, or '/m«n), slifjhtly, it still over there flashes. 2. likely, p'a, I apprehend fsee 107 ) ; 
 lit., [Ill] the sky, I apprehend, the clear, or fair, cannot rise or commence ; the sky or weather » ill 
 pot become clear. 
 
 196. The vapour that ascends from the ground is cloud, [yiin); that which comes down from the 
 sky is rain (yu) ; it is also called f-itn-lo shut, the water that falls from lieayen. It enriches the 
 earth with its moisture [enabling it] to produce all things, and is indispensable to the 
 world. 
 
 Obs. 1. enriches, (<zS-7«n); both words mean to moisten, and so to fecundate. 2 enabling it, &c.; cause 
 implied without .-iny word to express it; fecundates the earth (ti-t'u,) [making itj to brin? forth, &c. 
 
 3. to produce (shetirj-c/iaui/) to bear and rear, to fjrow, ac<. 4. indispensable; /?/., it is the 
 world's-bounds-upon not can ije minus — 's [thing] : world's-bounds-upon, ivhat is in the world, 
 = the world, cannot be without them. 
 
 197. When there is no ruin, then you keep looking out for rain ; when it comes down, 
 without stopping day or night, tlien you say that there is too much for the ground, and that 
 the crops will be probably ruined by it. Providence itself has a hard task to please you. 
 
 Obs, 1 . then - - then - - (yu - - yu - - .) 2. when it comes down {hsin) ; all the words from 'hei-chin, 
 nio-ht, to tien-urh (pron, tii'-'rh,) form an adverb of time or manner under the influence of the second 
 ti; the tirst ^i adverbialishiy^ the words immediately preceding- it; thus, [When] day-and-night-ly-not- 
 stopping-a-drop-like, /i.fffi, it descends. 3. too much, (Jiuo t'ou); it has over-penetrated [the ground.] 
 
 4. crops, {chnaii;/ chia, sec 146;) ruined, lit., by choking or drowning ruined, {i/en 'huiti.) 
 _, b. Providence itself; lit., you cause Heaven even a great difficulty to accomplish, ('Aao weinan,) 
 
 VCvtiu It do hard. 
 
 198. Rain coming like this, just as the crops are above the ground, is as it ought to be ; every drop 
 of it gfoing into the ground too. 
 
 Obs. 1. as it ought to be ; Qiao yii) good, seasonable rain. 2. Every drop; lit., truly, truly, is it every 
 drop info the ground. 4. chtiiq, right, exact, in the first clause, marks the precise time; chin, true, 
 in the last, we render by an emphasis. 1 have added too to express this. 
 
 199. When a criminal is undergoing examination before an official, and they come to the use of 
 instruments of punishment, as a shower of blows from the rattan descends on his back, you 
 will see one wale after another rise upon rt; if he won't speak the truth then, he is a fellow 
 with a rubber's constitution indeed. 
 
 Obs. 1. before an official ; lit., when a questioning officer is examining a tsei (see 166) - [who is so dumb 
 that.] 2. it is come to [tao liao] the time of moving tlie [lawful] instruments of puuislnnent, (tung 
 hsinq). 3. shower of blows; lit., [as] that rattan strip is rain-drop-wise-down-wards-f' ican^-Asio^ 
 beating. 4. you \\\\\ see, &c. ; lit., whilst with your eyes you are beholding, [there will be] on 
 his back, one blood-ridge after another: — tao, a path, here as the numeral, or classifier, of /jS!eA-Xn?ig- 
 <2U, blood-ridge, wale. 3. speak the truth; lit., if he be able (7/«i) to refuse (/j« A'tn,) to truly 
 
 speak. 6. constitution ; lit., verily he is a robber-skin-robber's-bone [one] ; ti, as usual, collecting 
 tsei p'i, &c., into an attributive of a substantive understood. 
 
 200. Loud thunder and little rain. This may also be said when a man's temper is passionate ; he 
 will explode like thunder about nothing at all, lie on his back and kick for rage, and no one 
 can tell how to set matters right. Then, when he has been angry for a moment, most unex- 
 pectedly his burst of passion is over, and there is an end of it. 
 
 Obs. 1. about nothing at all ; lit , things which cannot be valued ( pu chih-tt-ti) 2. explodes, /)ao-fano; 
 pao, explosive, as a cracker; tsao, tierce, as of flame. 3. lies on his back, &c. ; is angry to the 
 extent of horse-on-his-back-(»n«-i!/«)if/), raan-turned-over, (jV«-yan.) 4. no can tell; /zV., [one] does 
 not know what having done, be, [the doer] will then be able to complete the operation, [chieh-chii () 
 cliieh, to fasten, knit ; cltii, a trame, a board : cliieh-chii, most commonly used in its borrovved sense 
 of bringing a thin? to an end. 5. ning-kou, a Peking colloquialism ; hoji properly means enongh. 
 
 6. unexpectedly ; lit., who would think it, he has been angry a moment [i--hui-tzu,) that particle 
 of rage entirely dispersed, (ihsiao,) then {chiu,) there is no-thing. 
 
 201. I was but a short way from my own door when it came on to rain, and the drops that fell in 
 the few paces [that I'had to go] spattered me all over. 
 
 Obs. 1. short way ;W., I [should have] soon (/i'wrti) arrived at.. 2. my own door ; c/iiff, house, not preceded 
 by a pronoun, the house of the speaker. 3. it came on to rain ; {hsia ch'i,) to descend there began 
 
 rain to come ; obs. the verb, then the subject, then the verb's auxiliaries. 4. the drops that fell ; 
 lit., it dripped, some paces, and in consequence [c/i»/J — 3. spotted, me all over; /;/., occasioned me a 
 whole person's water-drops ; nao indicates the sudden occurrence of what is improper or inconvenient ; 
 it is here, as elsewhere, not conveniently translateable, and must be taken as causing the inconve- 
 nience stated in the context. 
 
 202. By the look of the sky we ought to have liad rain to-day; after a shower of large drops, 
 however, that did not even wet the surface of the ground, it all passed away. 
 
 Obs. 1. by the look ;/;■/., beholding M« sky, ^ the sky to-day. 2. however; W, who could have known 
 that {shui chill tao); these words have no greater power than such a disjunctive as but, however, &c. 
 3. after a shower ; lit., there having fallen a shower of large drops, still (7iai) not having wet 
 {shih hto,) the earth's skin. 4. passed away; lit., then again {yu) it passed away. 3. 'haianA yu 
 support each other, as althovnh and yet; yu also marks a subsequent period of time; it did not even 
 wet, and, without even wetting, then, ( ««,) it was gone. 
 
 (18)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &f. 20n.2IO. 
 
 203. Wlien one hears tlie water drip, drip, from tiie eaves of the roof a wiiole iii<i;ht long witlioiit 
 stopping-, althougli it be not a very heavy rain, there is a prospect of its continuing for many 
 days. 
 
 Obs. 1. Ut., In flic ninflit altlioiif;h there be not any [shi'n-mo, read s/u'mo, or sliiiiimo) <xxp:i\ rain. 2. if 
 one] hears that (Hf( = the) hous('-eav('s-ii|)on-'s H'ater. .3. <lri|(, tlti|), (7i-/«) /; to (hip ; /a is added 
 
 for the sound's sake ; its proper meaning; j;ives it no place in tlic coiiihiiiation : — h'o ran, shews that the 
 speaker is statin"- a case hypotlietioally ; this authorises our (UpnMneMcin;^ tlie text with Wlien, or, If. 
 4. a prospect; lit., looking at the rircunistances l^huani^-cliiiii/), £ono infers that] ttiere must occur 
 {yao nao, see 201,) a sucoi^ssiou of dark = rainy days; (on yin, sec 148.) 
 
 204. They may call it, or/thotigli it be^a Scotch mist, I am happy to say I could i^ejir it dripping 
 the whole night long without intermission. 
 
 Obs. 1 The speaker is anxious for heavy rain. 2. Scotch mist, (j/ii'n^j-svnjr-?/;/^ ; ?«('h^ faint, indistinct ; 
 sun(], wispy, like hair, or silk, not pressed down : — Itt., thou;;h it he said that it he a, &<:., y. '//no 
 
 tsai, (see 12o,) there is f;ood in the fact that 4.1 (-ould hear it ; lit., there was (s/i///,)a-droppin;:- 
 
 all-nif!ht-lonf;-not-pausinif sound. 3. lou supports ! z/eA, but also acts upon tlie negative as in 19; 
 it never stopped all night. 
 
 205. It is seldom one gets a fine rain like this; not at all heavy either. Why should not we put 
 out those flower-pots and let [the flowers] get a little of it to refresh them. 
 
 Obs. 1. seldom ;&., it is hard to obtain this delicate, or subtle, rain. 2. not -- either; ftV., also it is not 
 {Treat or heavy. 3. those flower-pots ; pa, index of the object preceding its verb ; not to be translated. 
 tsa men, we.our; a peculiarity (1 heiieve)ol northern mandarin ; lit., why not our those some ilower-pots 
 move out [pan c/i'u); lai is purely auxiliary of action or motion. 4. let them j;et a little ; liin i liitt 
 (properly liii, to wet or diick,)o-et a ducking. 5 refresh them, lit. cause them to increase (chaiiij- 
 c/iang,) their animal spirits, {chinfi-shen). C. tou 'hao and it will all, or also, be well, not translated; 
 it merely completes the seutence, as an expletive. We should probably add. Eh ? 
 
 206. Take a turn up the street now while this light shower lasts, and buy what things we shall 
 want this evening before it comes on heavier. Yon won't be able to go out at ail then. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. Availing- yourself of this light shower, (cAt cheii meng-meng-ti hsiyii ; see 204, obs. 2.) 2. take 
 a turn, lit., ascend one turn, or tour, (i-t'ani/,) the street. 3. want this evening; pa, index of 
 
 the object, see 205. obs. 3 : — in the evening to be used things all buy ; — liao lai, completes the actiou 
 of buying, and throws the verb into the future tense of the conditional mood ; fjiia- cum empseris -- you 
 will have avoided (s/k'iio ti,) being late a little. 4. at all then; lit., if there falls a great rain, 
 iu that case, {yu,) out you cannot go; or, you will be even more {yu) unable to go than now. 
 
 207. On a dull drizzling day, let a man who has wherewithal, invite a couple of congenial spirits 
 [to his house,] and np in his snuggery they will have their game of chess and their chat; 
 and they will take their bite or sup of something, as they feel inclined, without care or anxi- 
 ety. There is some comfort and enjoyment in such a state of things as that. 
 
 Obs, 1. The whole sentence from yin-yin-ti , down to wu-yu-rru-lii-ti, is pendent: where a rich man asks 
 two friends, Sic, then, in that case, {ts'ai,) there is {shih), comfort [shu-fu,) and enjoyment of hap- 
 piness. 2. drizzling day; lit., on a dull day, when there is a drizzling rain. 3. "wherewithal; 
 lit., a possessing cash man, (yu-clfieii). 4. two congenial; lia for Hang, two ; tui-chin-vrh-ti, of corres- 
 ponding nerve friends ; read it tui-chi-'rh-ti. 5. snuggery ; in his little upstairs-room (lou). 6. chess; 
 set down a chess [man], (AiM-cA'j,) play chess. 7. as they feel inclined; at pleasure, {sui-pien,) 
 eat a little something, drink a little n ine, no sorrow, no apprehension. 
 
 208. It is raining too much; I wish it would stop and have done with it. These incessant, 
 showers quite dispirit one. 
 
 Obs. 1. I wish; chu-Uao pa! The jm, in fact, gives rather an imperative than an optative tone to the 
 verb; qd. Let it stop, now. 2. dispirited; lit, [with this] constant, or uniform, (?,) shower- 
 shower falling, [one is] very sorrowful of heart, 3. observe the power of ti on the words pre- 
 ceding ; the whole clause iicoraes pendent ; lisiao being rendered as a participle. 
 
 209. I was walking in the street, when a storm came on and made me so wet I looked like a 
 soused chicken. 
 
 Obs. 1. storm, ?zt, a (i-c/it'H, see 205, oi.s. 3,) coarse wind and fierce rain. 2. made me wet ; ca marks the 
 object preceding the verb ; lit., nie ducked {liin, see 205,) a water chicken belike, 3. shui-chi-urh 
 
 does not mean water-fowl, but is elliptically put for shui-lao-cli'u-lai-ti-chi, a fowl dragged out of the 
 water. Water-fowl in their wild state arc simi-ch'in. 
 
 210. Rain like this, fine as hair, will do no good though it fall for ten days. There is nothing after 
 all like a regular down-pour, followed by fine weather. That is of some use to the'^crops. 
 For hsi yiiJH mm, you may also say niu-mao yii, cow's-hair rain, or, niu-muo hsi yii, rain as 
 fine as cow-hair. 
 
 Obs. I. like this, /wangi ; understand_yK, rain, before it; rain like this one sort, {i-tsimrj, proper! v chung,) of 
 fine rain, sc. rain fine as hair. 2. ti, to be taki'n with jii-mno, lieinp, or trfiich is iine as \\a.\r. 
 
 3. though it fall ; I'xt., then, in that case, {chin,) falling ten days, still (yell,) it does not hit utility. 
 
 4. after all, {tao,) a disjunctive = our. Well ! afler all, &c. It is used colloijuially in common 
 -with (too,) to upset, to turn the reverse way. See Premare, Art. 2, para. 1^^ 5. 5. down-pour; 
 lit., very greatly, {obs. the action of ti, adverbialising the adjective repeated, =ya«, in the uriiteii 
 style,)— veiy greatly a shower, [and] following it then to he fair. 6. that is of use ; lit., then {ts'ai) 
 to [yii,] the crops there is advantage. 7. yeh, also, even, emphasises the hsia shih fitn, fallin" 
 even ten days. " 
 
 (19)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c. il 1-217. 
 
 211. In sprint"' time the peach l)lossoiiis are red, and tlie willows f^reen enoiiji^h of t'lemselves ^ 
 and it tliey just get wei by agood shower of line rain, their colours come out even more deli- 
 cately than before. 
 
 Obs. I. spriiifr timi,' ; comp.tro 32. 2. enou;;li of themselves ; /i/,, the spring' fide in fact, or of itself, 
 (^peii.y is the |«'ach reil and H-illovv frreeii — 's (/») time. 3. and if they just, &c.; lif., if ill addilJDii 
 
 there fia|i|ieu [iiiJyii-cho) or, if in addition thi'y encounter, this, (c//e =aj thickly falling (J'cn-Jen-ti,) 
 fine rain. 4 colours come out. Hi., one du( l<in;.', and more are they enabled to show, [lisien-U,^ 
 colours delicate: after one ducliing, niorc is it apparent that their colours are delicate. 5. /iao, the 
 teachers say, is merely euphonic. 
 
 212. A Baiinermaii, with his rice from the Government Store and liis pay from tlie Treasury, 
 wants neither foodj|or clothing. If there conies one of these days of thick fine rain, he 
 will put on his waterproof clothes and hat, and be off to the river side with his rod ; 
 and when he lias taken two or three fish, he will carry them home and eat them with his 
 wine. With such independence of the weather as this, why, the gods are not better off. 
 
 Obs. I. Banner-iivin, ch'i-jcn, one enrolled under one of the Eight Banners; obs. ti, collecting both the 
 forej;oin^ clauses into attributives of cA'?;/(;/i. 2. wants neither, &c.; not deficient in food, not 
 minus elothin;.'. 3, there conies on ; lit., meetinn; a [ko] thick tine rain (211, obs. .'J). 4. puts on ; 
 /)■«', rather of clothes which do not button, a cloak, &c.; tai, specially of what >;i)es on the head, 
 cfe. «Aa/iy, fullowinj; both = our on. i>. waterproof, soz, clothes of palmetto ; ts'au-mao-urh, his 
 
 mat-hat, hat of rushes ; obs, chien, nameraX oi so-i ; tinp , o\i mao. 6. oB-with ; /(V., taking a (z-Aen) 
 iish-rod goes the river side upon {shanij, .see 190). 7. when he has taken, &c., tt-shang; shanr/ 
 
 indicating attainment of an object pursued, see 34-30; having taken two or three, {obs. Viao numeral 
 of fish,) live fish, he returns home, and taking, (na =pa, 191, obs. 3.) them, mates, or associates, them 
 with his wine, {p'ei-cbiu). 8. independence of the weather; lit., beholding = if one behold that 
 rain-condition, which is (?!,) without sorrow or care, then is it {shih,) that the spirits, or fairies, are 
 not past [such a state] as this; are no better ott. 
 
 213. La,st night there was a light rain falling. I could not sleep, and in the distance I could hear 
 the sound of a flute, accompanying the dripping of the rain. It made me quite melancholy 
 to listen to its notes as they rose and fell. 
 
 Obs. 1. accomp.nnying, tiii-cho; corresponding with, answering to. 2. It made me melancholy, &c. ; 
 ffi., as being blown it attained (c/i'«z-«e.) ^ as it was blown — [now] plaintively, [and now] loudly, 
 [yii-pi-yanij-yami-ti,) — hearing it [I felt] sad (c/ye-fezH^,) e.fceediugly {te-hin). 3. flute, /i-ijii; of 
 bamboo. 4. the dripping; lit., that siuall rain's sound. 3. exceedingly, {ti-hin) attaining 
 
 excess. 
 
 214. A red sky, in the morning, betokens rain ; in the evening, fair weather. 
 
 Oba. 1. red sky, &c., lit., in the morning [if the sky] burns [it will be] dark; (jjin, see 148); in the 
 evening if it burns, it will be clear. 2. hsia, the red glow of the sky, (see 158,) may he used 
 
 instead of shao. 
 
 215. The expression hsia yil mao p'ao-^rh, it is raining so as to bring out the bubbles, is employed 
 when the water comes down faster than it can run off, and wherever there is any lying, bub- 
 bles break out all over it. When this happens there is sure to be rain for several days toge- 
 ther, it is certain not to hold up for a time. 
 
 Obs. I. bring out the bubbles : mno, indicates abrupt, precipitate action; lit. there falls rain, there burst 
 out bubbles. 2, is employed, &c., shih, is, the foregoing is — the state of things described in the 
 words following, down to ch'i-liao p'ao-rh, which form the predicate of shih. 3. fa-ster - - run off, 
 &c. ; the comijarison is effected by a contrast, lit. the rain falls much, the water runs with not 
 [enough] speed, (pu-chi,) not hastily ; or, suggests a teacher, pu-chi, not reaching, does not succeed 
 in running otF. 4. wherever - - is lying ; lit. every-place fs] liept-stay-ing {ts'un-ckii-ti,) water ['s) 
 face-on. 3. all over it, &c. ; all, (to«,) the water's face-on all, = all over its face, — individually, or 
 here one there one, {i-ko-ko-ti,} there ari,se hubbies. 6. when this, &c. ; na, that is — all that follows,, 
 collected bv ii at the close into an attributive of kuang-cking, a state of things, or other like word, 
 understood ; that is [a] must-be-successive-days'-rain, — one-while-assuredly-eanBOt-l)e-fair — 's (<i) state 
 of things. 
 
 216. There is no duty of any great importance to be done in the Yamen (see 86, obs. 3,) to-day. 
 Any business there is may just as well lie over. Out of doors, you see, it is pouring rain. 
 We won't say that a man can't walk; if one were in a carriage, the animals woulil get so wet 
 that they would find some trouble in getting along. You may otherwise say that it raius 
 pHao-p^o, in bucketsful. 
 
 Obs. 1 . duty, eh'ai-shih, see 40, obs^ 3. 2. as well lie over ; lit. [what business there be,] it is only well to 
 put it down, (or by, ho- hsia,) and that is all about it, (pa.) 3. out of doors, &c.; tit., do you look, 
 outside tliere is heavy ruin, p'ang-fo-Vike; the ti adverbialises //a'ij'-^o, which is a classical term, 
 found first in the Book of Odes, the commentary on which intiniales that it means a dropping of 
 water as from a net that is raised. 4. even if, Ac; chiii-shih, thus it is, is made disjunctive by the 
 eoute.\t : — Do not say a man can't walk ; [it is yet worse ;] thus it is, [that were one] silting in a 
 carria'ie, &C. 5. the animals would get so wet; lit. those beasts, bedrenched {liin-cho, see 205, obs, 4,) 
 would aho he (yeh-shi/i) with difficulty going. 6. huckets-ful ; /j'i'ao, is i calabash, of which one 
 
 h ilf is used as a water-scoop ; p'o is to throw water. 
 
 217. Yesterday there was some idea of praying for rain, whereupon to day, contrary to all expec- 
 tation, it kk-i l>egun to rain. If the crops are suffering from drought, a fine rain like this will 
 set them up again. It is certainly a grand piece of good fortune both for the Emperor and 
 the people 
 
 Obs 1. some idea &c.; lit , inst as there was yesterday a praying-for-rain-'s murmur, or whisper, (sheng- 
 c/i'!,^ a sound, of ci nsultation particul.trly; hardly applied to what falls from sini;le individuals, unless 
 officials. 2. whereupon, &c.; the actiou of ts'ai lu the foregoing clause is felt in this; chiii, accord- 
 
 (20>
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c.. 218-224. 
 
 ingly, responds to it ; that fact was just established, when, in relation to it, came another. In the 
 Chinese here the latti-ris in the present tense, Hhieli embarrasses the translation. 3. contrary to 
 
 exppclation, iSfc ; c/iii-jan-ti.a combination not to b(! analysc^d, but ex|)lained to in<licate or emphasise a 
 consnmniation disappointinf; anticipations implied in a cbmse imnjediately preceding. 4. suftiring 
 
 from droiij.'ht; /it., tiie crops possibly are (/I'u sliili,) perceiving;, sensible of, droii;,'lit, {chiao-clto Arm) ; 
 the fact of, (yii, there bein;;.) this kind of good rain is ivell alile (tsu Ic'o-i,) to redeem or recover 
 them. Ill this, yti is almost redundant, obs. particularly how the three auxiliari<-s cornplclo the 
 action of the verb chin, to save ; ij.d. succeed (/c,) in brinyiji^' them in safety past (/£«o)thelr danger; 
 the sense of lai, to come, uill be included in biinijimi. 5. certaUly - - jjood fortun(', &o.; Id., this 
 
 indeed, or positively, {yiian,) is the Emperor's inhnite felicity («!<;i/jr/«) ; the people's yood luck ; 
 pin-lisinij, or po-lisiiuj, the hundred surnames, the people's — l.suo-'/iuri, id. creation; = when the two 
 influences combined to create the people, their liability to this good fortuue was implauted in them. 
 
 218. Never was there such a rain as this seen before ; [it comes down] as if a basin had been upset. 
 It can't j^et through the kennels fast enough. Before long all the level ground will have 
 three feet of water upon it. 
 
 Obs 1 . Never before ; tsung, from [the past] lai, to [the present], mei cJiien [one] has not seen. 2. basin, 
 &c.; lit., same as overset basin one fashion. 3. kennels, &c.; lit., each place's <;iitter'8 eyes all leak 
 not fast [euouiih ;] (li.sieh-pu-chi; see 215,4.) 4. before long, &c. (see 13, oii.S.); uotagreat while, 
 
 then the level ground [will be] deep three feet. 
 
 219. For more than a fortnight there has not been a day without an incessant down-pour. With 
 such continued excess of rain as this, there is no drying anything. Everything will be spoiled. 
 
 Obs. I. incessant down-pour, &c.; there has not been a day on which there was not water continuous as a 
 cord with a strain on it, {ta-la-ti) ; la is to pull. 2. w ith such a continued excess, &c.; lU., such as 
 this fashion's continued {lien) dark rain {yiii yii ;) yin as in 148. 3. no drying - - - spoiled, Vcj, lit., 
 be a thing what it may, {slien-mo, pron. s/iem-rno,) still can not one expose it to the sun, (sAai;) 
 consequently {ts'ai) there is a spoiling of things: — tsao-t' a, to spoil or injure persons or things. 
 
 220. It is hard work for a poor wretch to live when he comes in for a heavy rain of several days* 
 duration ; add to this that he has no fuel on his hearth, no rice in his pot, and not a cash 
 about him ! 
 
 Obs. I. The whole order is transposed in the translation, in which, moreover, the proposition is made 
 hypothetical ; this is justified by the meaning of the text considered in its integrity, but the sentence 
 in fact consists of three co/egoriV«? propositions: — The wretch meets rain; besides he has no fuel, 
 rice, or money; that is a life hard to live. 2. wretch; 'han-k'ii, cold and suSerm^, jbu-chia-urh 
 person. 3. comes in for, &c. ; lit., comes np with {kan-shnny) successive and excessive ram 
 (^lie)i-yin- t/ii ;) the character yin here used, it will be seeii is compounded of yii, rain, and yin, lust; 
 (See 'J24, obs. 3.) 4. add to this; lit., farther {tsai,) add on top, super-add, (c/h« shanrj,) that in 
 his stove there is no fuel; in his pot, (^kuo, specially a rice-pot,) no rice ; in his hand, no money 
 (cA'ie/i, copper cash :^ money in i;eneral.) 5. hard woik, SiC. ; Id., that theu (ho is'ui) is hard 
 to pass, or endure: not — iuojih-lzu, to pass one's days' == to get a living. 
 
 221. There really has been more rain than enough these last few days. If it clears up soon, there 
 may be still some hope for the harvest; but if we have any more drenching rain such as this, 
 it will probal)ly ruin it beyond redemption. 
 
 Obs. I. really; pin-lai, lit., originally; pen, the original simple fact, without addition; compare kta^.-, 
 a.rix.i^s. 2. soon ; lit., if there be speedily (han-cliin-ti. with thespeed of a hot pursuit^ a clearing up. 
 3. harvest, ni<;«-c'i'e«_r7-((r/j. the year's completion; (see •245,obs. 1,3;) — the harvest still has some fractions 
 hope, (chi-fen cliih-ivunr/.) 4. hut if; lit., if again [there be] such rain drenching-ly, (liin-liin-li 
 see 203, oAs. 4.,) not stopping, — 3 it will probably, 5ic. ; W., that probably then (A'o f/n«, see 
 
 43 ois. 2,) [will be a] there-is-no-rescue [case.] — 6. The liao, in both casts seems little more 
 than euphonic; the urh makes a substantive of the verb c/tiu, to rescue. 
 
 222. With the vast quantity of rain that fell at the commencement of the year, the three Kiang 
 (pron. cliinng,) Provinces were flooded of course. No wonder food is so dear. 
 
 Obs. 1. Take the first clause containing the cause as pendent; — [there being a rain-water-over-much — 'g 
 year-<M)mmenceuient, /i/., year-head. 2. the three Kiang, viz., Kiang Si, An Hwui. and Kiang Su; 
 the first is washed by the Yang-Tsz' Kiang; the two last, which once formed the single province of 
 Kiang Nan, are both traversed by the same river. The three together are known as the government- 
 general of the Liang Kiang. 3. of course, S;c. ; lit., the three-Kiang country was necessarily and 
 for certain. — 4. no wonder, &c ; lit., wonder [one] can not that food (/ian<7-Vii/i, grain-food, much as 
 we should speak of bread,) [should be] thus dear. 
 
 223. The heavy rain has made the roads very bad for the last two days, and the price of every- 
 thing, fuel, rice, and vegetaliles, has gone up. No one supposed the rain would last so long. 
 Had I tiiought so, I should have made my purchases before hand, and then I should have 
 saved my money. Eh ? 
 
 Obs. 1. roads bad; lit., not good to travel on. 2. price of every thing; lit., fuel, rice, vegetables, {Is'ai 
 
 shu ; ts'ai, alone, includes all eatables ;) — all have lengthened their price. 3. No one supposed, ike,.; 
 
 lit., thinking, [one] did not reach [the tact that there would] be {yu,) this long-time's rain. 4. Had 
 
 I thought so ; /iV., if [I had] known, [and] early a little bought in, lit., down, (see 103, obs. 3.) 
 
 3. saved - - - eh .'' lit., [should I] not have spared several (7iay hsielt-lco, lit., a good iew) cash, eh ? 
 
 224. A rain is held to be lien yin yii, incessant, when, after having once made a beginning, it 
 takes a breath and then you have anotiier shower, (or fail,) and so on, without any interrup- 
 tion for any length of time. You will also find such an expression as this, 'Last month it 
 poured without intermission; — lit., there was yin yii pu tiian. N.B. — The ^i/i in the first 
 example is a different character from that in the second; see obs. 3. 
 
 Obs. 1. All that we make conditional by prefixing the word " when," is a series of categorical proposi- 
 tions in the Chinese: — Rain has begun to fall, lit., has fallen a beginning, (Ji'ai-l'ou-urh, a head 
 (21) F
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., -225-230. 
 
 oppiiins;) — it pauses a pause, or breallies a l)ipafl), {hsieh hsiehurh); — ajrain is there a fall 
 
 (c.hi'n-urli pron. f/i(;-'/7i, a bout of hIikI, niiii, &<•.); — it ni'vcr slops a lialf d^iy, ^ any length of 
 tinio ; — -this n\\\ be rockoiicd to \n\ obtains to be ('oiisidcred, (siian-ti' sliili,) — a ('<>iitiniii)us dark raia 
 (m'(> 148, ohs.) ;aiid tbcre is an end of it (pa, see 100, obs. 3). 2. you will also (if 'I, &e.; lit., also is 
 tlieie - - Ibis expression (cliii cidi •fnia. Ibis sentence ot lulk, viz.j--last month it pii.n ed « ilbout inter- 
 mission (p}i tiKin). 3. Tbe cbaiaeter yin, used in this clause, is composed o( yi', lain, and t/in, luBt. 
 Tlie hitter, it is suggested, supplies the idea of excessive violence; puuiiiirj rain; (so in "iSO, obs. 3.) 
 
 1225. The weather is so damp that everything one lays liold of is wet, and there is no airing (or 
 drying) one's clothes either. 
 
 Obs. 1 . weather - - damp &c.; lit.. The sky, or weather, (Hen,) has got foul of, has contracted, (fan,) damp- 
 ness : — - fan, properly, to run against ; used with/nm/, sickness, disease, somewliat as here. 2. lay 
 hold of, &c. ; lit., [Be it] what, := any tbiii^, take it, or bring ir, out. — in every ca-e (Ion,) is it damp. 
 3. airing- - - either, kc; lit., one's clothes also (i/c/i,) air not to dryness (Hani/ pii /inn.) 4. were 
 it intended to say. Even with airing, tbe clothes ci)uld not be dried, ihe i/i:/i would cirnie between liany 
 and/J«. 5. Hang, to air, indicates the process, /«/n, dry, tbe result ; kiin-pu-shiinii (see 'M, obf. I, 
 
 fSj, i)hs. 2,) is another instance of this very coininon construction, by which ci>nsui>ination is ailiinied 
 hy the introduction i>i tc, or denied by tliat of pn, between two woids similarly re aied to each other. 
 Sometimes tbe latter word is svnouvnuius with the first, as in tson-piitnng, cannot walk or move; 
 sometimes it limits, or qualifies, the first, as in hujiu clii, (see 215, obs. 3,) does not run off fast enough. 
 
 226. It has come come on to blow pretty fresli, and with the weather as thick as it is, we shall 
 certainly have a storm of wind and rain presently. Now, our lioiise looks to the south, and as 
 the wind is south, no time should be lost in sliiiitiiig the shutters of the front windows; 
 otiierwise they stand a chance of being blown to pieces. 
 
 Obs. 1. This bout of wind has come till it is (lai te.) not small ; the sky has also become dark to this 
 
 [degree of] denseness (cli'en lit., to sink deep) ; wait a while, == shortly, there must be a shao-fing yii, 
 
 storm of wind and ram : — sliao is proi)erly the action of water-drops impelled by tbe wind, or , 
 
 hy the hand, but not hy other means. 2 our house. Sic.; //'/., that «l.ich we inhabit 
 
 K A ehenrj fang (see 72); that which is now blowing is a south wind. 3 bise no time, &c., 
 
 lit., pursuing liaste, (hail k'nai, with the haste of pursuit,) block up tbe front windows; lit., take the 
 
 front wiudows, (pa, see lOU, ubs. •!), and blocking- (tane/,) raise ('h'i,) sc. the shutters, or some like 
 
 screen; — lai, auxiliary of the action of tbe verb /o?«/; indeed c//'i is little more. 4. otherwise 
 
 &c. ; lit., [if] not so Cj):! Jon,) possibly then (Ic'o chiit, see 173. ohs. 3, 1 76, obs. 4,) by the wiud (chiao, 
 
 see IS, obs. 2) they will be shao, (see above,) till they break (Ian, J = to pieces. 
 
 227. VVe have had as much rain as we want now ; the crops in the ground are recovered ; there 
 is water both in the rivers and wells, and so every one's mind is at rest on the subject. 
 
 Obs. I. as much as we want, enough for use; <! makes an adjective of Asa-/(OM-y«ny. 2. recovered, 
 'hunn liiio iai,(s,ee •l\'i,obs. i.) 3. both, Xc. ; i/^, rivers-in, wells-iu, all is there water. 4. aod so 
 every one, &c. ; lit., men's minds also accordingly are fixed or settled. 
 
 228. The rain has thoroughly saturated the ground, and now, as soon as the sky has fairly cleared 
 up and they get the sun, all the crops will come on so as to leave no doubt about the year's 
 supply being sufficient. Eh ? 
 
 Obs. 1. saturated, &c. ; lit., the rain is [in the condition of] having fallen and penetrated [the gfround. 
 2. and now, (chin, marking the transition of time,) as soon as (teng-cho, waiting, for,) the sky's clear- 
 ness to be really-i;reat (ta-tati.) 3. they get the son, &c., lit., tbe snn once suns [the cropsj. 4. all 
 the crops, &c. ; lit , [all] that there be (so-i/u-li) — 's crop, all will grow to plcntv, (iliang tsu.) 5. no 
 doubt -- eh ? &c.; lit., food (Ijiuuj-sliih, see \12-2,obs. 4,) one does not fear it will not reach a ten-ten th-ly (s/iih' 
 f^-li, = couiplete) year-state (ninn-chinii.) eh ? 6. It will be best to regard Vai-yany i sliai as the 
 object of tatij-clio, and t'ien-ch'inii la-ta ti as an absolute clause containinir the conditions of the act in 
 ttie following one. Categorically taken, the whole trau:^lates thus: — Kain has fallen till the earth 
 is saturated; next, (cliiu,) one is waiting till, the sky being perfectly clear, the sua shall have once 
 sunned, &c. 
 
 229. The wheat crop this year is very fine. It was a little dry, and when it liad been well 
 moistened as it was by this fall of rain, it rose an inch or two in four or five days and became 
 one sheet of deep green ; a, beautiful sight indeed ! 
 
 Obs. 1. wheat-crop (jBMWWiiwo-urA ,■ — miao is strictly the early blade.) 2. It !c(7s--but when, iVc.; 
 was is put in italics to give due force to c/iitt, which is here a disjunctive, nearly = althoiiwh ; 
 lit., although it was dry a trifle, [yet,] obtaining this course or act .(/•/»" c/i'nni/) of rain, thus moisten- 
 ing it. 3. had been so well moistened, chi-mo, thus, so, ; in ! fSfS^tbe 2 afierts the tense of ^wa 
 to moisten. It might be more corrrect to translate, — It u-as a little dry til! it got this rain, and as 
 soon as it was moistened, then, (chiu) .\ c ; 4. became a sheet, &c. There is no word to be trans- 
 lated became; its introduction is simply authorised by the position of the clause : — one sheet or 
 slice (ip'ien.) uniformly as a surface ; deep green, lit., varnish gr»en ; obs. how the ti affects the four 
 words preceding it ; sheet-of-green-like. 5. beautiful, &c. ; /«7., truly fair to see. 
 
 230. \Jinn Yii, sweet or gentle rain appears to be only used figuratively, as in the followinof illus- 
 tration :] When a clean-handed mandarin is found to do his work well at his post, the 
 people will compliment him by saying. Since the arrival of his honor, Mr So-and-So, be has 
 proved a perfect blessing to the place. 
 
 Obs. at his post; lit., if there be a case where (vxC) a pure official, having come to his post, in administer- 
 ing affairs, administers them well. 2. tbe people^ iHc'n, a plural particle, much commoner with ^^ 
 pronomis than nouns ; — complimanting, praising, (c/i'en(7-?s«H,) him, say.iC S. since ; W., forth from i f 'i 
 {tcu-tsun;/) so-and-so (mint) coming-to-liis post (tnojcn) - 's after ((Sfhoii.) 4. his bnnar, ta-'aoi/eh, ^ftifl^" 
 desi:;natiou of maiularins from tbe lower division of the 4th grade down to tbe 6th grade inclusive 
 holding appointments out of Peking. Here, the Prefect is most likely meant. 5. proved a perfect 
 blessing, &c. ; a very free version of the text; lit., since his comini;, even-breezes,.sweet-rain,-lucky, 
 star8,.propitious-clouds,-like («!,)♦[ have things been] ; at, lit., on, the place [there have been] exceed- 
 ingly (•hen,) blessings, (hsiany-juf^ or prosperity, 
 
 (22) 
 
 lev*
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, TIIR HEAVENS, &c., 231-237. 
 
 231. When is this rain going to stop ? It ceases for a moment, and tlien comes down as hard as 
 ever. 
 
 Obs. 1. this r;iin, this style of rain, {tanng, otliprn-ise cluing, a sort or Uinil.) 2. when - - stop, &c.; to- 
 t.san, uliciiV in past or future time'an expression peculiar to iiorllierii mandarin ; when will there be 
 a stoppini;, (.i7«7/ /io c/;«.) 3. It 'ceases, &c., ft., not more than for a little halting (<'(Hy,) a while, 
 4. as hard as ever; lit., according- to the.old, {chao-chiu,) still will it, or must it, fall. 
 
 232. Tlie rain lias stopped ; tliat's well. It is harvest time, and all the grainthat has been threshed 
 is lying" there vvaidiig for the sun to dry it. 
 
 Obs. I. It is harvest-time; c/if^nr/ s/ii/i, it exactly is the "fettinsj-in-erops — 'time, 2. all the ^rain, 
 
 &c. ; lit; that beaten jfraiu-food all [is] there awaitin^j tiie sun's sunning'. 3. tllre^hcd, fa- 
 
 liao, is properly an active form : strictly, perhaps, it should be the jfraiu that [they, or men, have] 
 threshed is all lying there : the relative, that, = ti. 
 
 233. Toll me if what I saw just now was not a eiiriniis sight; the sky was very heavy, when a gentle 
 puff of wind bk'W aside the mass of tliick dark clouds that had overspread it, and shewed the 
 sky bright and clear. 
 
 Obs. I. Tell me, &c. ; the first and last clauses are thrown together to do jnstiee to ts'ai ; lit., I just now 
 saw — all that follows, down to m shiio; you say, tell me, [was the sight] hard to get, or not hard to 
 get {nan ti, &c.) ? 2. The intermediate clauses are very freely translated; lit., I just now saw, — 
 the sky's darkness having become very deep, — suddenly there came a puff of gentle (see 03, ofc. !) 
 wind, = a puff, &c. that suddenly came. 3. pu {see lOG. o/«. 2); taking this whole sky's tlose 
 (mi-mi,) and mingled {tsa-tsa,) thick, or heavy, cloud {nuiirj yiiii,) then in due course, (cliiu,) blew it 
 away {ch'vi-k'ai) ; = blew away the dense cloud that had covered the whole sky. uhs. nnng, also 
 read KtV/, is properly the discharge from a sore. 4 shewed the sky, &c. ; lit., there appeared the 
 ringing (see 62; 1 30.) clear sky. 
 
 234. I was awake for a short time at the beginning of the fifth watch, and I could hear the rain 
 gently sphishiiiLr in the coin-t. When daylii^ht came, however, I found the rain over and the 
 weather fair, with a broad, blue sky that it did one good to look upon. 
 
 Obs. I. I was awake, &c.; ?/<; at the head of [noj five watch, (see 101; 1:38.,) I was awake a while. 2.1 
 could hear. &c., lit., I heard that the court (see 03, olis. I.) within, still (-liai) splashing-ly {shita-slnia- 
 ti) there was falling a little rain. obs. shua, properly, to hrnsli ; the sound of a heavier fall is describ- 
 ed by wii-wa-fi. 3. when however, Jic; lit., when I came up to ( kan, to pursue ), the dawn's 
 commencement (cli'i lai,) then (c/ii/i.) I saw the rain past, tlie sky clear; obs. rjiiu marks the 
 transition of time, hut is also disjunctive, ^ but, however &c., the introduction of which is farther 
 authorised bv the 'hai or '/man in the upper clause. 4. broad blue, Ian ivaiii/-wnng-iirli-ti, blue ex- 
 panse-like ; waiifl is used of an expanse of imter, and conveys an idea of stillness as well as great ex- 
 tent, but rather of the latter. 5. did one good &.K.; lit., beholding [it, oue was] truly shuang k'uui, 
 in spirits. 
 
 235. No one could have supposed it would have cleared up in a moment as it has done, after 
 so many days' had weather: be as quick as you can now, and bring out the things that 
 were washed the day before yesterday to dry. 
 
 Obs. I. as it has done, is not in the Chinese, but some such phrase is authorised by the context : lit., 
 
 one could not think, not did thinking reach, what follows, viz , [after | these some days' continuous 
 
 , bad weather, — witliin one time, or, in one time's \u\er\<\\,{i-sbih-chien,) then it was able [cimt 
 
 'hiii] = that it would have 2. quick as you can, &c.; lit., those some pieces clothes that were 
 
 the day before yesterday (ck'ien-ur/i-ko, pron. ch'ie-rh-ko,) washed, hasten-ing, (Jian-cho, see 234,) 
 brin^ forth and air an airing. 
 
 236. One would have asstimed that, without a strong north wind, such a sky as there was would 
 never have cleared ; and yet, without any sign of wind whatever, there is the sun shining 
 through the clouds, and the weather is becoming serene and beautiful ! 
 
 I 
 Obs. I. assumed, lit., while one was calculating [snan-chi-cho ) 2. sky as there urns; che-ho t'ifn 
 cannot be translated //;/* sky, the sky that is; hut the close of sentence must be in the present tense; 
 — lit., this sky, without (fei-li, not apart from, followed by another negative below ; compare cli'ti-fci 
 in 78, obs. I.;) — -a strong north wind, — was (sbi//,) [one whose clouds were certainly not to be blown 
 aaunder, (f nan liua-pii-h'oi-tc ) 3. and, without, tkc; lit., who would have said — what follows, 
 viz., a particle of wind-silk at all there is not, and then — (cbiu, see 229, 234.) 4. shining 
 through; lit., thus the clouds open, [one] sees the sun. 5, serene, &c. ; ft'j,, an excellent = fair 
 {sha7i-slian,) and still [ching-cliing,) clearness begins. 
 
 237. A rainbow in the sky is prodticed by the appearance of the sun, when rain has been falling. 
 As he darts fortii his brightness against the gloom, he brings oyt a bow, in which all the 
 colours are perfectly represented, and which appears directly opposite the sun. If it is 
 seen in the west of a morning, it indicates rain; if in the east of an evening, fair weather. 
 
 Obs. 1. hang, otherwise chianq, is properly an insect, or reptile, fabnlouslv said to produce the rain-bow 
 by its breath. 2. lit , the liaiig's coming forth in the sky is (sliiU) — [all that follows]. 3. bright- 
 ness, j/c(«v-/'»a«/7 ; gloom, lit., gloom-matter, yin-clvi; with his brightness shooting the gloom, he 
 creates, (inia-ch'ii - - - lai,) — the object interposed between -kica, ( as in 40, ob.t, ; 99 ; 1 70, ubs. 2,) 
 and lai, its auxiliary, viz., a bow of all colours; lit., the-tive-colonrs-all-cumplete — wise one ia'ig. 
 Obs. t'ian, a stem, or rod, the classifier of trees, columns, lines, S;c. ; obs. also that here the attri- 
 butive precedes the classifier, (see 98, N. B.). The combination may however be rendered adverbially 
 rather th.in adjectively ; q.d , 'with the live colours all complete.' 4. which appears; /nien, it li 
 Tisible opposite the sun. 
 
 (23)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 238-243. 
 
 238. There is <t tradition, that any hofly who points at a rainbow when it appears in the sky, is 
 certain to have ;i sore on his hiifrer; and thougli this is several thousand years ohi, no one 
 can say whence the idea proceeded; or, Tlie tiaditioii (here given) has been handed down for 
 several thousand years, and yet no one can say, &c. 
 
 Obs. I. appears in the sky; lit., on, or up in, the sky there has come out arain bon- ; — ifa man point, oa 
 his tinnier, in all certainty, [i-linij,') villi j;ro\v a sure (7/!<i, see 9J.) 2. The uords, « lion it appears, 
 !kr., aie ri'diiii'laiit ; it tlic iniiineiit of appearance was meant, the clause would be precedeil by chiiig- 
 tsai. (see 2y2, oOs. I,) or, iniig-ls'ai, (see 189, obs. I.) 3. ifa man point; o5s. yao, if, between the subject 
 aud the veil). 4. ■^tnw a sore ; s/ieiit/ is impersonal ; it is not, he, the man, uho will ^row a sore. 
 
 3. tra-dition ; /miaixj-c/iiian-liao, inntnally transmitted ; the object of the verb is the whole bentence 
 preceding it ; I he fact that ifa man |)oint, &c., - - - one man has told to another several thousand years. 
 
 6. and though this is, &c. ; lit.. This reasonino-, the assumption that this is liio-li, something 
 ratnrally right, — after all, (cliiu-c/iinrj,) = notwithstandin;; its antifpiity, — no [one] kni^ws to say 
 is wheni-e come. 7. whence, na-k'uai-rh, lit., from what Ivtnp «=i what spot; — come, lui-ti; it is 
 
 bett to understand tao-ti alter ti, which then makes na-k'ucJ-' i h-laj^iuto au attributive of tbe pre- 
 dicate : — none can say this idea is a whence-come idea. 
 
 239. I was looking at a rainbow just now, as it came out opposite the sun in all its variety of hues, 
 and was cotiiuing on the certain prospect of fine weather, when, to my surprise, the clouds 
 came back and hid it completely. 
 
 OLs. 1. ts'ai, here as in 233. 2. i-t'iao hanrj, see 237, obs. 3, 3. all its variety of hues, lit., red-of- 
 flowers-ureen-of-w'illows-like. 4. Mark tbe order of words ; — Just now I was lookin;; at a rainbow, 
 rcd-andi;reen-like, at the sun's opposite, out-coniinj, or having; out-come. 5. count, ta-suan, to 
 reckon ; (compare si/anc/ii,2:Wi ;) — tii, to strike, very commonly used to verbalise combinallons active. 
 See o9, obs. 1 ; al>o Freuiare's Notitia, cap. 2, art. 1, par. 3. 6. when, to my surprise; /io-V/i-fAj'A- 
 iao, tit., H hence should one have kiiOH n. Compare 235. 7. clouds - - - again ; W., again, by [cliiao, 
 see 108, obs. 2.,) the clouds [was the rainbow ] screened effectually : — clouds, lit., cloud-hue ; compare 
 100, 134:) — screened ett'ectnally (see 92, o/«. 2.) on the power of c/iii) ; — again, {yu,) refers the 
 heaier to a foriuer condition of things, and reinforces the disjunctive na-rh-chji-tuo. 
 
 240. The raiidjow disappeared before it had been out any length of time ; the reason being, as I 
 take it for granted, that the rays of the sun, the male influence, being in full force, compelled 
 the small body of female matter opposed to it to disperse ; but 1 am not positive on the 
 point. 
 
 Obs. I. The foregoin<r version is very free; lit., thus : This rainbow came out; in no long time, then it 
 melted away. [I] presume that it must be that, the sun's male [yanij] brightness being in its ple- 
 nitude, taking (po) that little of female(yt)i) matter, forced it to disperse; also not can f I] Hx, or decide 
 it. 2. this = the, the rain-how under discussion. 3. take b)r granted ; //Si««^//i'i/i;^, think it 
 must be — as follows. 4. The sun here prevails because his ynng-kiiany is in its fullness, (sheng,) 
 and the female influence, or matter, {yin-ch'i) is only na-tic-'rh, (see ti'l, obs. I,) — that small (]uantity, 
 the small f|naTility over there, it found there ; which is freely rendered, the quantity opposed to it. 
 5. The Yang by no means always prevails over the Yin in the operations of nature; in 
 some the two influences co-operate evenly; in some the Yin is dominant. 6. but'- not positive; 
 ye/i wci.] also not; (compare 19, obs. 2; 2<i, obs. 3,) — positive, k'o ting, can 1 decide or can it be 
 decided, bee k'o, otherwise used in 241, obs. 5. 
 
 241. The word kaitg, rain-bow, is in fact pronounced in two ways; some read it with the sound 
 kang, and some with that of chiavg. It is not so certain which of the two is the commoner 
 pronunciation. 
 
 Obs. !. in fact, pen-loi, (see 221;) it need not here be translated at all. 2. two nays; yu-liang 
 
 shiio, has two [nays of being] spoken. 3. some - - and some, &c.; lit., there are who read it hang- 
 sound-wise, and aaain there aie,{ye/ij/u.) 4. the commoner, Sic; /zV., according to what mode it 
 
 is spoken [shno-ti:.] the more. 6. not so certain, k'o-pu-ting ; k'o qualifies the assertion (compare 
 k'o-chiu, 221, obs. o.) 
 
 242. As to the formation of hail, it is simply rain congealed into pellets of ice oval in shape ; the 
 larirer, the size of a rice-bowl, the smaller, of a gourd-seed, with a small cavity or two on the 
 the surface of each. It will fall with the rain on any very stormy day. 
 
 Obs. 1. as to the formation ; /(<, Hail ishow.or whence(«^e''-njo)transform-ed [thing ?]—pira is properly 
 to create out of something else, 7;!/a, to create out of nothing; (^ee 10, obs. 5. ) 2. simply; cfiiu shih, 
 it just is, or, well ! it is — lain matter frozen [niiig-chieh,) to making = into (ch^eng,) one-p<4let-and- 
 ani>ther-pellet-like ice (on k'o, see 1 1 7, o6s. 1.) 3. oval, /iV., long-shaped and also (<(«,) round. 
 
 4. the lar"er, &c ; ti, like die in the language of books, isolates a word or proposition at the 
 beginning of a clause where qualification or explanation is to follow. At the end of ihe second 
 clause it would be perfectly correct to use Asiao, for ta, thus; — as to the larger, there are some as a 
 rice-bowl large ; as to the smaller, there are some as a gourd-setd small. 5. small cavity, see 
 
 132, ofti-.S; on each, ?i;., every one, Ito-ho-rh, has, &c. 6. It falls &c.; in strictness the verb here 
 should be rendered as a participle. Hail is the subject, ski/i, is, is the copula, and pellet-like ice, the 
 predicate; the clauses succeeding which, one and all, describe its properties, or processes. 7. very 
 stormy day, lit., coarse wind and fierce rain-'s day. 8. with tbe rain; lit., — following, in the 
 suite of (sHi) rain, it dropping down comes. 
 
 24.3. No wonder the rain that fell just now made such a noise. It was hailing, and there are some 
 of the hail-stones tliat have not melted still to be seen, as big as walnuts every one of them; 
 which I don't consider so small either. 
 
 Obs. I. lit., just now that bout of rain wonder one cannot was so noisy, or caused that noise, (7ia-mo- 
 hsirnig.) 2. to be seen yet, &c.; lit., at present still are there some not yet rai-lted, all having 
 a walnut's (7(e-tao) size. 3. so small either ; lit., even, (j/eh,) then, in that case, ((■/««,) one cannot 
 reckon them small: e]\her, (i/eh pii, see -20, nbs, 3 ,) — or,afterall, — is used to give due prominence 
 to Ihe fact intended to be implied, viz., that bigger hailstones bad fallen ; yeh-jni cooperates to this 
 eud with 'hai or 'Uuan iu the previous clause, — still are there some, uot the largest, ^e/ not snail. 
 
 (24)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 244-250. 
 
 244. This liail-storm has broken a numliGr of tliG tiles on the roof, and of the fla2;9 on the ground : 
 that I (Icin't care so miicli about ; but in tlie f^arden, there are one or two thousand fruit 
 trees wliich were beariuq; an unusiuil crop tliis year, and it is really distressing to see that the 
 half of it has been knocked oiY the tree by the hail. 
 
 Obs. 1. h^il-storm, clt'niii^, sec. '22(», obs. 2. 2. broken, ta bin; a numlicr 'liao-hsich, or 'hao-hsieh-ko, 
 (see 22.3, o6s. 5.) Mark the itDustructioii ; — taking; {/la) the tiles, &e., broke many. 3. on the ground, 
 ti-hsia •, accorfUni' to \\\g i-onirnon construction ot Asia, below the (ground: compare <;<;n-.s7ion//, up ia 
 the sky, (see \i%,<iiis. jT) lit., on or iibove the sky. 4. care fo much ; 1 tor all that [tuu,) do not [re-jard 
 it as] important (yao-cliin.) .i. but in the garden &c.; c'tiu, here very disjunctive, responding iQ 
 some sort to <0K in the last clause, therefore translated, — TJat \ don't mind, but (c/««) what 1 do, 
 is, kc, 6. bearing &c., ht., that one [or] two thousi-nd individual (i urh ch'ieit k'oj fruit trees 
 fkuo mu-shii,) this year li;id Cornied (cliieli-te.) I'rnit beyond the due share (sec 12l,ofc. 2) many. 
 7. distressing to see &c.; lit,, by (cldao) this hail is bealoudowu the ouc-half; belioldiag it, truly 
 the heart is pained. 
 
 245. The ear of the millet and the paddy was just fillinor, and now, after this hailstorm, I don't 
 suppose there is much more than lialf the crop remaining'. 
 
 Obs, I. lit.. The millet and the rice, were just at the time when the grain {tzu-li-nrh) is stron", or well 
 grown, [cluinng,) — all by the liail were struck; — of the teiiib-tenths' harvest — I only fear = I fear 
 that only — there have remained si.\-tenths. 2. Were it not, for \\w jfa, to fear, = do not suppose, 
 
 much doubt, — the whole sentence might be taken generally or conditionally ; — When such a crop is 
 hailed on, such are the results. 3. millet, Irio Hang, tall or Barbadocs millet; paddy, lao tzii, rice 
 on the plant; (Williams.) 4. grain, tzu-li-urh ; also the small seeds in the pod, of trees, pulse, 
 &c.; but, says the teacher, not of fruit. 6. harvest ; s/iou-c/i't'«y, the in-gathering, is said of the crop, 
 standing or cut, as with us. 
 
 246. I was in the street when the hail came on, and when I saw how threatening the sky looked, 
 I ran as fast I could to some one or other's door, and took. refuge inside the porch; so I got 
 none of it, which I think was great luck. 
 
 Obs. \. sky looked threatening; lit., seeing the sky [look] not well. 2. fast as I could, kan-chin, with 
 the urgency of pursuit, (compare 130, obs. 2.) 3. some one or other, &c. ; Id., running till I reached 
 [some] person's, {jcn-c/iia,) one door passage within going 1 evaded [the hail.] 4. porch, intatung- 
 urh, approach to a door with Hanks to it ; also applied to a passage through a thick wall such as the 
 wall of a city, 5. The possessive ^Vn-c/iza precedes the article or classifying noun, z'-^o; compare 
 98. 6. took refuge, <'o cho ; I'o implies movement to avoid ; the cho after it, and after ta at the 
 end of the next clause are not to be considered necessarifi/ as having a participial influence on those 
 verbs; the sentence might end after either c/io. 7. The verb ck'ii, to go, as it stands here, besides 
 assisting the action, completes the specific meaning of the foregoing verb; — p'ao, would be sirapiv to 
 run; p'ao ch'ii, with nothing between the two verbs, to run .sn ay. 8. great luck, kc; lit., all (tou, 
 the sum of what 1 have described) I reckon ten thousand fold good fortune {waii-hsiiig.) 
 
 247. Dew is water formed by the melting of the vapours of the night; it has the property of en- 
 riching all creation with its moisture. The dews are heaviest (or, very heavy) in autumn; 
 and the water then forms itself into dew-drops ; some time before the winter sets in, it con- 
 geals and becomes frost. 
 
 Obs. 1. Lu, subject, sMh, copula, shui, predicate; water from the melted vapors of the night: — the 
 auxiliaries ch'ii, and lai mark the process. 2. has the property, k'o-i, is able to, enrich with moisture 
 (fei/^««,) all creation, /(/,, the myriad things. 3. heaviest; chung, superlative from its position — 
 (see 249, and compare to, much = too much in 145, obs. I.) 4. the water; lit., that water then be- 
 comes pearls (cliu-urh.') 5. some time before winter sets in ; lit., having come to the time autumn 
 hands over to winter before which ; to a time before [autumn] hands over [its office ?] to winter. 
 6. before; the tin i-chi'en, before, and i-'/ioii, after, appears to possess the power of an objective 
 sign, as in certain cases in the written language: g.d. the [time] preceding, or following. But I 
 am not sure of this. 
 
 248. There has been a heavy fall of dew in the night ; look at these pots, there are dew drops on 
 the flowers in them not dried up yet. 
 
 Lit., To-day's night, there fell dew heavily; look these so many pots flowers upon, still are there 
 undried dew-drops. 
 
 249. The dew is heaviest in the niglits of autumn. It often happens, if it has fallen on any- 
 thing that will hold it, that the dew-drops will retain their consistency all the morning. 
 
 Obs. 1. heaviest, compare 247, oAs. 3. 2. happens, &c., ?iV., constantly it falls. 3. on anything, &c.; 
 tsai, preceding the object, shang, on, following it : we must be guided by the verb in translating this 
 double preposition, which might be here, into. 4. thing that will hold, lit., a competent-to-keep- 
 
 fast, (/s'iH!-^t-c/»/) — 's thing. (On c/«/, see 92, oJs. 2.) 5. retain consistency; the pearls, (247, 
 obs. 4,) ning-clvcng, congealed into form, or formed as if by the action of cold; for steam drops could 
 be so described. 6. all the morning, pan-t'ien ; (see 19, obs, J.) 
 
 250. The glitter of the dew in the morning sun is so dazzling that it blinds one to look at it. 
 
 Obs. I. In English we should certainly not think the greater part of the first clause necessary ; viz. 
 The drops of dew that has fallen in the night. 2. morning sun; ^lY., in the morning [being] by 
 {chiao,) the sun once illumined, (cliao), 3. It blinds one ; lit,, [to the person] beholding, {ch'iao-cho) 
 there is (ski/i,) gold-gleam-ing ti brightness-that-steals-the-sigbt-'s [appearance.] Understand huang- 
 ching, circumstances, or a like word, after the last ti. 4. glitter; see the use oi ti'ai in other com- 
 binations, (153, obs. 1.), here rendered glitter in consideration of its attribute 'huang-'kuang-ii ; this, 
 'huang is the unsteady flashing of tire, light on water, &c 
 
 ( 25 ) G
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 251-256. 
 
 251. Tlie (lew-drops left in the water-lily's leaf yonder, have been set flashing by a pufF of wind ; 
 and their unsteady, vibratory, motion, makes them look like pearls rolling in a basin. 
 
 Obs. I. yonder, over fliere, iiiiplicd in na.tliat M-atnr-lily leaf {'!io-yeh.) 2. flashing, &c.; lit , by the wind 
 [ai-« caiiscdl one, or a, llasli, are stirred to llasliiiii,' — arc i'Tc;;ularly, (/oh or limn,) and rollingly, {hiii/i 
 or lum,) ajjitati'd, (timg.) The 'set llashii);^ by a pnfl' is intended to {five the notion oi suddenness, 
 implied by i'hvnnij. 3. All this gives rise to the following comparison, in which 'makes them' 
 
 is introduced by the transUitor, merely to connect the result uilh its cause :- W., same as if [they] 
 were moving; over a basin {tsou p'aiiy'si pearls {clien-cltu,) one, or the same, fashion, {i pan.) 
 
 252. They tell one that the dew of heaven is not only pleasanter to the taste of the drinker than 
 our mortal water of earth, but that it is efficacious against disease and to the prolongation of 
 life. [On certain occasions,] the ancients used accordingly to say, " the dew of Heaven 
 (God's dew) is descending on the earth." This it surely will when there is an Emperor 
 who does his duty. 
 
 Obs. 1. tell one; lit., [one] hears[menjsay ; -devvofheavpn;.<tAa»2^--^sea-., see244,oZ>«. 3. 2. not only, &c., 
 construe thus: — Heaven's dew — nhen a [man] drinkin;^ ('ho-c/to) lays it by the side of {pi,) earth's 
 mortal water — is not only in taste sweet (i'j'an,) -also can it, &c. 3. mortal, Jan, of the inhabitants of 
 earth as opposed to hsien, faiiies, &c. 4. taste, wei-urh, pron. tvf-rli ; sweet, by position = sweet- 
 
 er; [see 247, 248.] 5. but tliat, &c., phi(i ch'ieh, a conjunction made disjunctive by pM tan, not only, 
 
 in the forejjoing clause. G. ai^.-iinst disease, Ac. ; it is able to put away or keep back sickness, {ch'Heh 
 ping,) and protract years, [ytu meri\. 7. dew of heaven, lit., sweet dew. 8. The last clause is 
 
 the speaker's ap|dication of the proverb ; lit.. When the Emperor has reason, acts justly, lit., has the 
 path, (compare, proceeds as he oujjht, or in the riijht direction ;) - - certainly can there be, will there 
 be [see 'liui, 9'2] " sweet dew descending ;" one of the pbeuomeua which shew the sympathy and 
 approbation of Heaven. 
 
 253. Wu Ti, of the 'Han Dynasty, made a bronze statue of a man at Ch'ang-an, two hundred cubits 
 in height, and holding ii\ its hands a golden bowl, in which it was his profane intention to 
 catch the dew of heaven, in order that he migiit prolong his life by drinking it. The bowl 
 was called the ch'eng-lu chin p^aii, the dew-containing bowl of gold. 
 
 Obs. Wu Ti reigned from B. C. 135 to 81 ; Ch'an?-an Fu, in modern Slian Si, Avas then the metropolis. 
 2. cubits: lit., made a-tvventy-e/jjBH(7-biifh — 's bronze man. The c/iutiff = 10 Chinese feet, 
 or covids; the covid, cA'iA= 13.125 inches English; (iiridgman.) 3, holding in its hands, 
 
 p'eng, to hold in both hands, the back of the hand being down; classically, and thenread _/£«</, it 
 is to hold with i\v,; bands so turned, but not lower than the waist. 4. profane intention ; wang- 
 hsiang, wrongly thinking or intending; tcang must be translated differently in different contexts; it 
 implies a course contrary to what is right ; wang-hsiang may mean ambitious. 5. in order that ; lit., 
 having drunk it, he might lengthen his life; to catch, (chieh,) the dew, and lengthen (chang) his 
 life; both verbs dependent on the lisiang. 6. The bowl was called, lit., by name ItbcyJ called, 
 it ch'eng-hi chin-p'an, Wu Ti is not the nominative case of chiao to call, nor is there any indi- 
 cation in the text, grammatically speaking, of the change of this case required by the sense. Remark 
 ming-tzu, the name letters, character, writing ; a different Ui, from tzu, a son, so commonly added to 
 form the substantive. 
 
 25-1. Pai Lu, White Dew, is a term beginning in the earlier part of the 8th moon. Every year 
 after the P.ii-Lu term has commenced, the waters from all parts betake themselves to the sea. 
 
 Obs. 1. a term, c/jieA-cA'2, ft'*., periodical season ; cAi'eA, (see 105, ofe. 1.) ajoint or section, ch'i, apparently 
 =z weather : there are 24 ch'i, changes of the weather, or terms, in the lunar year, two to each 
 moon. Their procession is not disturbed by the intercalary moon. 2. after -- commenced ; 
 on chiao, to hand over, see 247, obs. 5. 3. waters - - betake, &c. ; lit., each place's water 
 then, by slow degrees, (tnon-ma-7h-ti,) returning to within the sea goes. 4. betake themselves; 
 kuei, commonly, to return, but also meaning motion towards, and especially a concurrent motion 
 twvards a common point. 
 
 255. 'Han Lu, Cold Dew, is a term beginning in the earlier part of the 9th moon. It is so 
 called because [at the time to which it is applied] the air is growing chilly, and the dew 
 before long will be congealed into frost. 
 
 Obs. 1. It is so called, &c. ; in the Chinese the reason is stated first, ' because the air, &c.,' - - - therefore 
 
 Jit called (chiao-tso,) 'Han Lu. 2. the air, t'ien-ch'i; also weather; is growing cold, chien- 
 
 >i7, gradually cold, is beginning to be cold. 8. before long, &c. ; the dew soon (Is'tuii,) will have 
 been, congealed into frost [s/inang.) The final particle liao, indicating past or perfect time, seems to 
 make the accomplishment of the fact the condition of the act in the last clause; g.d., this effected, 
 the term is consequently called, &c. 
 
 256. Skuang, Frost, is dew congealed by the excessive coldness of the atmosphere. When 
 autumn is over, it makes the houses and the ground all one sheet of white. It melts and 
 disappears, however, as soon as the sun touches it. 
 
 Obs. 1. congealed, &c. ; lit., by reason of (t/in,) the cold air being too heavy, or serious, (fai-chunp,) 
 congealed ; or, by an e.xcess of cold in the atmosphere ; or, by the excessive cold, - - 2. aud makes ; 
 lit., in the nights after autumn, it falls on houses and ground ; — all are one sheet white. (Compare 
 229, obs. 4.) 3. sun touches it ; lit., once it sees = feels the sun ; in the written style ckien, 
 to see, is often used as the index of Vixepassive verb. 4. disappears, however, &c.; see ko-rhiu, i 92, 
 ohs. 1. it seems to modify the foregoing assertions which treat of the congelation; chiu not 
 only marking the time, but acting disjunctively ; but, when the sun comes, then the probabilitj/ is 
 Mai melting it becomes, or, it melts till it is Qhua-te,) ia-visible, (/>M-c/««n;)tt., what one cannot 
 see. 5. liao, till it has become iovisible. 
 
 (26)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c.. 257-261. 
 
 257 Such is the chilllni^ influence of frost, that it will kill both plants and trees. With the excep- 
 tion of the itiw kinds that can stand the cold, the fir, the yew, the plum, chrysanthemum, and 
 others of the same class, there is hardly any flower, plant, or tree, that docs not begin to 
 shed its leaves, as soon as it feels the frost. 
 
 Obs. 1. coiistiue tliiis : — Frost has a power of cold ; it is alile to slay plants and trees ; Twhen one| has 
 exceplcil the fii-, — tlie yen-, — the plum, — the clirysanthenniin — 's (chili) — class — 's (//,) — these-feiv- 
 kinds-lHMiif;-al)le-to-boar-cohl — 's [trees]; the re^l, tloivers, plants, dees, luost-ly, once tliey feel frost, 
 then shed [leaves a[id hciMjnie] hare. 2. chillin^j iiifluBiice ; loe?, is said of what inspires respect if 
 not awe; ot dignity in otlieials, huan-wei ; of martial character in troops, /xng-MJCi, awein^ the hearer, 
 or ap))earaiice, striking; the beholder; of the ti^'cr's nature, '/ii.-wei, terrible, or formidable : 'haii-wei, 
 nii^'ht here be seventy. 3. will kill, W., can kill; iicng rnijjht be '//m', (see 92, o/;.«. 4.) 5. of 
 the same class ; those enumerated — 's {chili) class — 's {li) — trees understood at tlie end of the follow- 
 in^' clause, which is connected with the foregoiiifj by the illative force of cAJ; — these being the iev/ 
 kinds that can bear cold. The Chinese order has been transposed, as it seemed more idiomatic 
 English to put the first clause of the Chinese in opposition to the second, than to make the latter 
 resumptive of the first. 5. The use of chih as a possessive partlcde is comparatively rare in col- 
 loquiai mandarin; but there are occasions, as here, where euphony appears to reijuire it. 6. These 
 
 two clauses are made, by the li at the end of each, attributive of the noun understood after the 
 second <i. 7. shed leaves ; ftao, see 32, obs.l.; /w^, solitary, desolate, forlorn. 
 
 258. Shuang Chiang, Frost's Descent, is a term beginning between the 10th and 20tli of the 9th 
 moon. The day before its commencement, the officers of the army, in full dress, parade 
 their men, and march to the drill-ground to welcome the Frost on its descent. It has been 
 said that the spirit of the Frost's Descent is a naked female. It is not known whence tais 
 saying dates. 
 
 Obs. 1. tenth to twentieth, lit., 9th moon's middle, = middle decade. 2. day before, &c., t'ou i t'ie,n 
 the first day counting back; (see J8.) 3. commencement, chiao (see 247, ois. 5.) 4. full- 
 
 dress; /(V., tlie military oiBcials [in] public clothes, or official costume, {ktirtgfu.') 5. parade; pat 
 fill, dispose in due order the ranks, and go to the instruction-ground to meet the descent; yinij, to 
 meet, or receive, hospitably, or ceremoniously; here the latter. 6. spirit, cliii(?ir/-shtn, the 
 
 descending spirit. 7. whence this d.ates ; lit., this saying it is not known came forth iu what 
 dynasty, (^ch'ao-tai, dynastic geueration.) 
 
 259. Snow is rain frozen into flakes, of the shape of small flowers, and which, if minutely in- 
 inspected, will be found to have each one six [projections like] petals. It falls in the winter, 
 making houses and trees one mass of white. 
 
 Obs. 1. The subject here is undoubtedly snow, and would in English precede its definition ; in th4 Chi- 
 nese the definition is put first, and though pendently, or conditionally, the resumptive particle 
 tia, reinforced by chiii, then, is needed to introduce the subject. 2. frozen, lit., by the cold 
 consolidated into (cA'c/w.till forming,) flakes, {p'ie-rh.') 3. small flowers ; lit., resembling wee-wee- 
 one-like, (Jisiao-hsiao-urli-ti,) one flower ; to, the classifier or numeral of 'hua, flower, compare, 237, 
 obs. 3, where a clause similarly adjectival or adverbial, precedes the numeral; compare 98. 4. minute- 
 ly inspected; lit., [if youj minutely look, each has six pan-urh, (prou. pa-rA,) petals. 5. The 
 ti influences all words between it and yii, rain, making the first clause, ending with p'ien-urh, depen- 
 dent o\\ yii, rain, made flakes; and the two following, on p'ien-vrk, the flakes in them described : — 
 either understand yii after ti, in which case it will construe ram, that is rain frozen into flakes 
 shaped, &c.; the latter yu being in apposition to the first ; — or, consider it to turn the verb in each of 
 the three clauses into a participle, rain froz-en, resembl-ing flakes, hav-ing petals, — in which case 
 the whole is a conditional-hypothetical proposition: — If rain be thus, that [rainj is snow. C. It 
 falls in the winter, &c. The punctuation is Chinese, and the translation is strictly, — Houses and 
 trees on which it tails in the winter, [at which time it will lie,] are uniformly .all white; — uniformly, 
 i p'ai; the word p'ai is properly a br.^nchiug stream, hence obtains a sense of general distribution. 
 
 260. In the five northern provinces, they sow more wheat than any thing else, and most of that in 
 autumn. The whole hopes of the crop rest on the snow of winter; if that lie thick till it is 
 melted by the warmth of spring, the soil will have been saturated with moisture just at the 
 time the blade was above ground, and the crop is sure to be a fine one. 
 
 N,B. — The five northern provinces are here stated to mean, Shan Tung, Shan Si, Ho Nan, Shen 
 Si, and Kan Suh, which form one government-general, and Chih Li. 
 
 06s. 1. and that in autumn, &c. ; there is a crop sown in spring, but — 'men's sowing autumn-wheat'— 
 [custom or circumstance,] == the sowing of autumn-wheat, is fieijuent (to,) = more frequent (see 
 247, obs. 3.) than any other sowing. The fact of the spring-crop obliges us to extend the influence 
 of to, more frequent, to the season as well as the grain; more wheat thaa any grain, and more in 
 autumn than in spring. 2. whole hopes, &c. ; the nominative is still the sowers, who — entirely 
 rely on the winter-we.ather's snow — piled in heaps on the earth's surface; — when [one] has reached 
 spring's warmth the snow melts-- the water finds its way into the soil — it is just the lime when 
 the early blade is issuing from the ground. By inflection and copulatives we connect all these clauses 
 which are in fact the object, or objects, of ch'ung-cho, relying on : — then, as in 2j:i, without 
 notice of the change of subject, follows, illatively, the final clause, — for certain [the crop] will be fine. 
 3. earth's surface, {ti p'i-urh, see 20Jt obs. 3). 4. soil saturated; lit,, the water slowly 
 penetrates {chin,') into {ju,) the earth. 
 
 261. In a sickly winter season, when there are a number of people suffering from the epidemic, 
 one becomes anxious for a couple of falls of snow, to come one after the other ; as soon as the 
 earth's influence gets free Ivvay, the epidemic will break up, and the cases diminish daily. 
 
 Obs. I. sickly season; wen, or wen-z", (;' also read yi, or yo, is an epidemic disease;) lit., in wintertime 
 when the epidemic influence {ch'i,) is serious, and sick men numerous. 2. anxious; one is looking- 
 out {p'an-cho) for the successive fall of two bouts of snow, (see ch'ung, 229, obs. 2.) 8. free way ; 
 /){., the earth's matter, or iuflueuce, {chH) having once way or circulation, {i tmig). This is still 
 
 (27)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 262--267. 
 
 subordinate to the t'orcffoiiifr, tlic (all of snoiv ; but, tlie conditions Ijein;^ now fulfilled, the commeDce- 
 nieiit of the main proposition is marked hy cliiu. then; the disease then, or in conseijucnee, disperses; 
 — and its subordinate conseqiu'nee, the diminution of eases, hy ye/i cAm, also then, = as a farther 
 aousequence ; — sick men are also then day hy day comparatively fewer. 
 
 262. On a clay that it is snovvinof, wlieii of course it will be colfi, let a set of fellows ^et round the 
 fire and warm a ))ot of wine, lielpiiif^ tlieniseives, and grilling- and eating mutton cut in 
 thin slices; and with snow like tiiat to look upon, they may drive care away well enough. 
 
 Obs. 1. Translation very (ree. The two first chinses hold the primary conditions of time or circum- 
 stance, hut it will he best to understand t'icii after/?; — a sno»in» day is of course a cold [day;] 
 then — a party suiroundiiiif a stove, »arni a pot [of] wine ; themselves (= unattended,) pouring, thetn- 
 selves drinUing; taUinif sheeps-flesh rut into very-thin slices, themselves grill, themselves eat; 
 beholding; that state of .snow ( lisiich dibuj-urli ; ) truly can they dissipate and expel [sorrow or 
 care.] . 2. warm; nan or nuan, rarely verbal. 3. without ceremony, is made to translate the 
 word IzK, themselves, 4, thin slices, &c.; /)«, sign of the object precedin;^ its verbs, A'rto, to roast 
 or "rill, and ch'ih, to eat; — mutton cut into {ch'ieh-ti) cut till it is thin - - thin slices; not cut hy 
 the party, observes a teacher, who says ch'ieli-ti = cli'ieh-ch'eng, cut till it niahes. 5. drive care 
 away, lisino to melt, chicn, to send on an errand. One teacher objects to the use of the phrase as not 
 colloquial. The commoner expression is c/iieh mtn-rh, or, chieh-chieh mcii-rh, pron. mi-'rh. 
 
 263. The first six months of the year, down in our part of the country, we were troubled with 
 locusts. Our crops were a good dt-al damaged by them, and after all the pains we took to 
 catch them and get rid of them, I dare say they have left eggs in the ground, and when 
 these come to be hatched in the spring, the plague will be as great as ever it was. Our only 
 safety is in its snowing in earnest during the winter. For every inch of snow that lies, the eggs 
 move an inch into the ground, and if they get down three or four inches, there is some chance 
 of their not coming out again. 
 
 Obs. I. first six months, the earlier half year. 2. our ^9xt; ti-fang shang, in Ihe locality, may be a 
 province, a department, or district ; und^r the circumstances the tract would not be small. 3. troubled 
 with locusts; lit., »ao, here broke out, 'hnanrj cA'!/«^, the yellow insect; on wao, see 201, obs. b. 
 4. dama;.'ed hy, lit,, they gravely injured (^shang-'ltai) the crops. 5. after all the pain.s; (see 
 'hao ;/uiir/-i I J9, obs. 2 ;) lit., it was rij;hl easy wasn't it .''] chasing and catching them utterly (Jian-ching, 
 clean, (see 28 1, obs. 3). 6. I daresay; lit., [and after all] they possibly then [h'o chin] still {yu) left 
 deposited {liti hsia) their young {an-(zu,) the insect's egg with the young in it, in the ground, 
 7. come to he hatched ; ///., in the number two, =next, year, once, [the tenants of] the an-tzU, 
 come into the world. 8. the plague ; /if., as of old there will be the calamity ('hiio-'huan); a 
 strong expression for any great affliclion. 9. only .safety; chih yao, we only need, all we want; 
 ' Lut translated as above because of the context : it does not so much mean, we want no more, as, to be 
 
 safe, that we must have; as if, says the teacher, it was preceded hy me yu ho 'hao fa-t:u, there is no 
 remedy that will avail, but this. 10. in earnest, chin hsia hsUth, [that] industriously it should 
 snow. 1 1, for every inch, fyc. ; lit., t'.ie locust-young are (shih,=ire in this wise, viz :) — one inch of 
 snow, they then enter the earth {ju t'u,) one inch; having arrived at 3 or 4 inches depth, they 
 possibly then cannot come forth. 
 
 264. It is easy enough for a man to miss the road on a snowy day when the wind gets up, and 
 
 after whirling the drift about the sky, flings it down here and there in different depths. 
 
 Obs. 1. pa, according to usage, should make hsileh-'hua urh, snow, the object preceding its verb ch'ui, to 
 blow; but chiao, as the instrumental preposition, would require hsiieh to be the subject of the verb, 
 (See a similar use of pa and chiao in \(iO,obs. 2). \Wxii,fvng, is manifestly theagent throughout; it 
 rises, takes the snow up, blows it, and throHs it ; I have therefore treated it as the subject and chiao Jeng 
 as an idoniatic redundancy. Construe as follows; 2. On a snow falling day, to blow begins the 
 wind — taking that snow (hsiieli-'hua-urh, lit., snow-flowers ; see 259, obs. i,) blows it until (Jit., by 
 the wind blowing it attains to being) [it be] in the vault (pan h'ung chung,) tossing-and-unsteady- 
 wise (^p'iao-p'iao-taiig-tang-ti.) I do not think ti does more than adverhialise the four words preced- 
 ing it. 3. Hings it down on the ground ; sha, as water is flung, or sprinkled hy the hand. 4. here 
 and there, ('hua-li 'hua-ta-ti, see 143, ois. 3;) higgledy-piggledy. 5. in different depths, /)?( /j'i'n^ 
 not equal, or even. 6. it is easy when walking to blunder (me,) or be bhud, as to the 
 
 road. 
 
 265. At first, all the snow there was to be seen wds, a few tufts flying about the court, but after 
 a while, large flakes began to fall. 
 
 Lit. At the commencement's besinning [one] only saw that in the inner court were flying some (koi) 
 snow-flowers ; having paused a half-day, to descend there began large flakes. 
 
 266. Look at the snow to day ! The flakes are veritable goose feathers, and as for quantity, the 
 sky looks as if it was full of falling willow-down ! 
 
 Lit, Look at this snow to day, [its flakes] may he entitled goose feathers; but, or well !, (foo) it seems as 
 if, from the full == whole sky above, downwards there was flying willow-down; or, [in] the whole sky 
 above was downward flying willow-down. Obs. 1. veritable, ch'eng-tt-ch'i, have a right to be called; 
 ch'i has an auxiliary power ; have no right, are not worthy to be called, ch'eiig-pu-ch'i. 2. as 
 for quantity, &c. ; tao has a disjunctive power; and seems here to turn attention from the size of each 
 to the guantifi/ of a.l\, 3. willow-down, /«i-/M«. 
 
 267. A day that there is heavy snow, with a wind that rises howling, catching up the snow and 
 driving it wildly about the sky, people call a feng-chiao-hsiieh-ti tHen, a day of snow with 
 wind, and wind with snow. There is trouble enough to get out on such a day. 
 
 Obs, 1. heavy snow; /ch^cw-/;, large quantitj', or great number, in disorder. 2. at the same time; ^u 
 also, there begins to blow wind; the wind is of a howling {'ha-'hu-ti) sound. 3. catches up, chiian, 
 properly to roll up, also to brush, or sweep, from side to side; ti makes the process, (see 106, obs. 4 ;) 
 catches up and makes that, = the, snow, throughout the sky, irregularly or disorderly, to fly. 
 4. fcng-chiao hsuehyw'mi intermingled with snow. 5. to get out; lit,, to go out of the door is very 
 difficult. 
 
 (28)
 
 T^IEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 2G8-275. 
 
 268. Wlien tlie season clianges, but before there is .cold enoufrli to form tlie snow into flakes, it m 
 like small g^rains of rice, and is called accordingly mi-IistH hsuf:h, rice-core Hnow. 
 
 Ofo. I. season chaii<;es ; /i/., tlic sUy, := weatlicr, just, [bccurtiiiiy] cold — 'n X\me; elm, =: knng-knng-urh, 
 just iiou'. '2 tdlil <miun;;1i ; lit., the siiovv as yet i.ot hy freezing formed into flakes, [is] exactly 
 like small rice grains in a|)|iearance. 3. tliat accordinjjly, na c/iiu, &c. 
 
 269. When it clears up after a fall of snow, the surface snow will melt to a certain depth ; then if 
 it blows cold in tlie night, the water that has been melted freezes again, and in the morning 
 if you take a look at it, you will see the snow on the top frozen so compactly as to be all 
 but ice. 
 
 Obs. 1. clears up, &c. ; lit., after snow the weather heinpf fine, has taken the surface snow, and melted 
 it one layer. 2. blow cold; lit., by nii;ht there blows wind ai;ain a [period of] cold, = it blows 
 cold as^ain ; (yu), there is ?«o?e cold, owinw to the wind. 3. it, (the cold of tlie wind,) takes the 
 melted watei-, and again fieezes it, or freezes it back, to consistency, (tung chu ; sec 92, obs. 2.); pa, 
 sign of the object. 4. in the morning one look, [and you will] see the snow on its face 
 
 frozen to solidity {chieh-sliih). 5. so as; differing little, (ch'a-i-tie-'rh,) a. ViUle more and theo 
 
 (it would] form into ice. 6. surface snow, m;t'-V/i-s//««p-<( //s«c/i; snovv on the top, /isti'e/i m"'-''/*- 
 shang; the snow, on its top, has frozen solid; a little more and then it would be ice. 
 
 270. After that fitll of snow the other day, there was a north-west wind, and the cold was so in- 
 tense, that all the snow remaining on the buildings or on the ground was frozen into solid 
 masses. 
 
 Obs. 1. Lit., that one day the falling of snow after there blew a bout (x ch'ang, see 229, obs. 2.) of north-west 
 wind. 2. the cold so intense; the atmosphere {t'itn-ch'i) being extremely cold, tool, {pa.) the 
 snow retained (ts'un,) up on houses and down on the ground, and in every case, {tou,) froze it into 
 {tung ch'ing,) one piece ; froze it hard. 
 
 271. When the clouds part a little on a snowy day, but, though the sun shines out, the snow con- 
 tinues to fall, there is said to be tai-cho jih-f-ou hsia hsiiefi, snow and sun together. 
 
 Obs. I. dark day, see 148, obs. I. 2. part a little; lit., suddenly the clouds open, or have opened, a bit; 
 i k'nai, a bit or piece, here modifies the assertion, as in our almost vulgar colloquial. 2. but 
 though, in the second clause, is borrowed from the disjunctive 'hai, or '/man, in the third; — there 
 appears the sun, the snow for all does not stop. 3. there is said, 8;c. ; that then is — with (tai-cho,) 
 the sun there falls snow ; (see 242, obs. 3.) 
 
 272 [Sleet.] On a day that it is in effect snowing, and although the clouds are blown aside by a 
 steady breeze and let the sun out, snow still continues to fall, as it is whirled about the 
 sky, under the action of the sun's rays on the one hand, and the scattering influence of the 
 wind on the other, it becomes half rain. That is what is called sleet; but there may be sleet 
 without sun. 
 
 Obs. 1. ineffect, pera-foi, to begin at the beginning; our premises ; (see 221, oAs. I.) 2. Mark the simpli- 
 city of the construction ; a series of events is simply stated in order of time: — First, it is a snowy 
 day; — next (j/u,) a steady breezeblows the clouds apart; the snii peers out ; — continuing ns before 
 (jin-clnu,) it falls; that suow whirling reaches the middle of the sky, — is by {chiao,) the 
 sun, [on] one [side,] shone on, by the wind [on] one [side] scattered ; — consequently, there i.s a half 
 solniion into rain, or, it is [in the condition of snow] half melted into rain; — that is rain intermin"led 
 with snow {yii-hsiieh-chiao-chia-ti) ; — but, it being that there is no sun, also is there this sort of thiiic. 
 
 3. steady breeze, (see 63, obs. 1.) 4. the sky, h.iit k'lDig li, (see 134, obs. 2, 173, obs. I.) 
 5. one hand, other hand ; the i chao, i sou, authorise this rendering ; i/u ^= subsequently, of the wind, 
 but also = ?ein rc-constitute; first the sun's rays are melting it, the wind t/ieyt scatters it, and the wind's 
 cold re-forms it, or produces re-action, so that it does not dissolve completely, Compare the 
 Greek ir!, of increase, or surplusage, and iuai, of repetition, when combined, as in 'iTaixfii/iyirxa, to 
 remind, a per.son of something. 6. becomes half rain ; acccordingly is a half melted into rain. 
 
 273. [Icicles.] You see the snow left on the house was thoroughly melted by the heat of the 
 sun, and was running off the eaves, when the cold of the night froze it again into those icicles 
 that are hanging down. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit. You see that snow that was retained on the house ; the na, that, is certainly demonstrative, 
 and makes the scene present ; the last words are therefore translated that are hamnng down. 
 2. thoroughly melted ; lit., by the sun sunned, (shai,) melted into {'/lua c/i'ent/,) water, flowed to 
 the house-eaves-tile-mouth beyond, (fang-yen iva k'ou icai.) 3. cold of the night; lit , by nJo-ht 
 
 the weather's cold again {yu, see 272, ohs. 3. ) froze it \nto ping-ling-mh, icicles; — one teacher sui^- 
 gests ih-At ling should be written as /en;/, in /tii^c/izao, a sharp corner; — Aowii-WM&s {wang hsia,) 
 depend-ing (ch'ui-cho.) 
 
 274. You may say it is cold to-day; you see wherever water drips, it is frozen into icicles. 
 
 274. You may say, chcn suan, you may truly reckon; the present one = to-day, (chiii-urh-ho. pron. chi- 
 'rh-ho;) you see, ni-k'an, belongs to the second clause in the English ; you see each place's drip down 
 coming water, all is frozen till it has become icicles; ping-cJmi, lit., an aivl of ice. 
 
 275. A heavy rain or snow may occasionally freeze as it fails; the water will be running off the roof 
 or the crest of the wall as fast as it can, when the cold will increase to so extraordinary 
 a degree as to freeze it into sheets of ice, which hang down looking like mirrors. 
 
 Obi. I. occisionally, yu shih-'hou-urh, there are times [when] rain or snow being great,— , 2. freeze 
 as it falls, std hsia sni tung; &c. ; the word sui meaning to accompany as secondary or subordinate : 
 when repeated, as here, to be compared with the Greek a^' tVos a^' 'ifyiv, no sooner .said than done; 
 also with the Latin simid repeated; thoui;li both these indicate a somewhat nearer approach to 
 parity of time than S!ui. 3. crest of wall, ch'iang t'ou vrh, this is olten protected by a single 
 ridn-e of tiles, o(f which water might easily be said liu te chi, running to obtain haste, to run as fast as 
 possible ; (see 218 o6s. 3.) 4. cold increases, S.c. ; lit., beyond limit, (A'c Jon«,) the weather or air 
 {t'ien), additionally cold (yxi leng,) freezes it sheet-wise into ice, := a sheet of ice, downwards hanging, 
 the same as a mirror in appearance. 
 
 (29) H
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 27G-281. 
 
 ^76. Tile grass is all covcrod with frozen snow. Snow has fallen on the g'rass-land, and has been 
 frozen so stiff by the cold, that it neither melts, nor moves to the wind. As far as the eye 
 can reach, on every side, one Sees here a patch of green and there a patch of white; or, the 
 whole landscape is in patches of green and white. 
 
 Ohs. 1 . Tlic 1,'iass, lit., tlic grass above everyivliere lias there been, = there is, frozen snow. 2, so stiff — 
 neither luilts — nor moves ; lit,, by tbe cold has been frozen to not meltinf; ; the wind also blowing does 
 not stir it. 3. As far as eye can reach ; lit., afar afar beholdiiij,', the places all around [p'icii chu urh') 
 are all j;rcen-a-patcli-»vhite-a-patcli — liUe, (/('with yamj-tzU understood;) are all in, or according 
 to, that fasliion. 
 
 277. When the snow collected in the different places has had its surface thawed to a certain depth 
 by the heat of the sun, and then frozen afresh by the return of the cold, there is said to be 
 a hsiieh shang tung, a superficies of ice on the snow. 
 
 Ohs, 1. diii'ereiit places, ho ch'ii urh, each individual place's accumulated snow, {clii hsiieh.) 2. has 
 had ils surface layer thawed, &c.; lit. by (chiao) the sun [has had] sunned to meltinij the layer (or 
 story ; i ts'e/tg, see '2C9, ohs. 1.) on its surface. Observe the verb s/iai 'hua, to sun to nieltini;, made 
 passive by chiao. 3. construe, — the snow collected being melted one layer, by the sun, and frozen 
 again by the cold, under such circumstances {chiu,) men say, &c. 4. t'ien i Idig ; see '209 obs. 2. 
 5. afresh; ch'ung, additionally, hsin, ane\v,i/u, again, (see 272, obs. 5.) 6. superficies; lit., on 
 the snow there is superficial freezing ;/«, properly, to float; hence, of almost any thing, fu mien, the 
 the floating face =^ sur-face. 
 
 278. It constantly happens that after a fall of snow in spring, the cold, without being by any 
 means severe, will be sufficient to form a thin coating of ice on its surface. 
 
 Obs. I. constantly, see 69, obs. 1. 2. without being by any means severe; Kt.,\t\s possible that 
 
 slightly there exists a particle {yu-tien-urh^ of cold : a teacher suggests that ko shi'h, it may be, is a 
 corruption of '^'/o i//i^, supposing that there be, or, /d/o «Ai7(, if indeed there be. 3. sufficient to 
 
 form, &c., lit., there-by, («o-!,) on the snow's surface tliin-thin-ly is there frozen one layer [of] ice. 
 
 279. When winter comes on at Peking, certain of the Banner-men are under an official obligation 
 to skate. For this purpose they put on a flat ]iiece of wood with a strip of steel let into the 
 bottom of it, strapping it tight over the instep with a thong ; [and, thus equipped,] they move 
 glibly over the ice, waving their arms and gliding along at a great pace. This apparatus of 
 
 - theirs for runnning over the ice is accordingly caWqA ping-hsieh, an ice shoe. 
 
 Obs. 1. The first clause is adverbial of time and place, — in the capital, having come to winter; — the 
 second contains the subject, viz., those who = those individuals, understood after the second ti ; — 
 those who among the Banner-men have the skating office or duty, {ch'ai-shih, see 40, ois. 3;) — 
 then comes the verb shili, are; — and then a string of clauses, predicating of the subject : — the iiidi- 
 Tidnals specified are [in the following condition, viz.] using a piece of board, having below it inserted 
 (lisinnij cho,) a steel strip, they thrust it on the top of the foot and using, = with, a hide string {p'i-shing.) 
 or thong, bind it fast (shuan chu); — on the ice's top glibly {liu-cho) they go, waving (t/ao-cho) their 
 two flanks, here = arms, gliding they attain to gliding very rapidly. 2. inserted ; hsiaiiff, to inlav ; 
 observe the action of cAo in this and two places below: alter hsiang, it may be said to iiiflect that 
 verb participially, producing what in Greek and Latin would bean absolute case, and what we should 
 express by an absolute construction, or by the use of the relative; 'there being inserted below it,' or, 
 ' below which is inserted a strip of steel'. This is I think generally the construction of c/(0 when it fol- 
 lows the object. With the neuter verb it = the English adverb, liu-cho tsoii, glid-ing =glib-ly they 
 go, and is then often doubled, liu-cho, liu-cho, tsou. '■Vith the transitive verb, it may be, as here, a 
 participle, wav-ing; or it may be simply an untranslateable auxiliary; " following verbs", says Dr 
 Morrison, "it shews their action or taking eflfect." 3. put on, ch'uan, of any article of dress 
 except the hat or rap : the object of this verb, i k'uai mu-pan, a bit of board, is preceded by yung, to 
 use ; jou, as elsewhere; the yunrj below is the preposition of the instrument, tcith the thong 
 bind It fast; on chu, see 9'2, obs. 2. 4. This apparatus, lit., that apparatus; but Ji/J is little if 
 anything more here than the prepositive article; the apparatus {chic,) referred to. It would be 
 equally correct to saj' che ho ; if the skates were present the latter would be preferred. The pronouu 
 t'a-mcn could ««/ be introduced between na-ho and cAm. 5. running over ice, ^'ao 7/in^ ; />'ao is 
 both currere and/?«'currere. 
 
 280." The sun is powerful to-day, and as there is no wind, all the snow that is lying in different 
 places will be melted ; cr, will be melted wherever it is lying. Take notice of the above 
 phrase, gentlemen; it is quite as correct to say, hsiieh hsiao, as hsiieh '■hua, the phrase employ- 
 ed here ; both express the disapjiearance of snow. 
 
 Obs. I. sun powerful, &c. ; lit., to day the very good sun, there being also no wind, taking the snow kept 
 in different places, all is able to, == will, thaw it. The sun must be the subject of shai-'hua, to 
 
 sun to melting, and snow, its object; pa, as usual preceding it, as its index. The clause on 
 the absence of wind is causal; as containing the expression of a contemporary fact, accounting in part 
 for the main statement, it must be introduced parenthetically by means of the participle, as I have 
 translated it, or by some such construction as, 'Forasmuch as there is not either any wind.' The 
 yu, = and at the same time. 2. Take notice, &c., lit., you gentlemen, chtiuy, = in plurality, uti, 
 = person, where a superior addressed or spoken of; (cf. Ital. vossignoria) ; you, sirs, — must remark, 
 pay attention to, (li-'hui,) this one sentence. 3. It is as correct, &c. ; ts'o, properly error, confusion, 
 here rather, discrepancy ; lit., hsiieh 'hua with ('hai = from) that, = the, other [expression,] hsiieh- 
 hsiao, one particle not different; there is no discrepancy between, &c. 4. both signify; lit., the 
 two phrases all. = both, are [phrases] stating that the snow is able, or about, to non-exist; on 'hiti 
 see 92, obs. 4 ; non-exist mei, or me-yu ; Lat. deesse. 
 
 281. That great fall of snow we Lad the other day has been completely thawed by these two days' 
 sun-shinS. 
 
 Obs. 1. That great fall, he, lit., that day (na t'ien,) that great snow. 2. thawed by; the cause is thrust 
 in between the subject and the verlj, their grammatical connection being resumed by the aid of chiu : 
 the snow, [owing to] the sun's sunning, has acrccordingly melted. 3. completely, kan-kan-ching- 
 ching-urh-ti, dry-dry-clean-clean-ly ; has thawed, hsiao, dissolving, ti, has attained the state so quali- 
 lied. 
 
 (30)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEX, THE HEAVENS, &c, 28-2'2S8. 
 
 282. In spring in the second or third moon, after the ching-diC term of the year, when the earth's 
 breath, or essence [that has been pent np all winter] ascends, the rivers everywhere rise ; 
 and as it is at this time that the peach-tree is in full blow, the river floods are called ' peach- 
 blossom water.' 
 
 Ohs. I. The term chi)i{]-chc, tliird of the 21 tpnns of the year, tlie reveille, or resuscitation of insects; che 
 is a verb, to l)0 torpiil ; the insects are sii|)])osi>d to be roused {c/uui/,) hy the thmider. 2. rivers rise; 
 c/iiiii/f is special of the ris\ug or snelliii;^ of the \\ ater. 3. full hlooMi ; ///., [the foreffoiii;:] just is the 
 pe.ich-llouer fully or abuudaiitly opeiiiu;^ {sliciiij-h'ai)->i time, — wliicli because-of, 40-4,= where- 
 fore, lie. 
 
 283. The action of wind if produced by the Male principle of nature, is necessary as the source of 
 life to ail the objects of creation. It is another thiiifj' wliich is indisiiensable to the world. 
 
 Obs. 1. Wind if produced, ttc. : the construction is the same as \( yao, or Jo, if, preceded .^liili- ; were the 
 wind produced by the Female principle ils effects would be totally different. Construe, Wind, [ifj it 
 b(^ by the Vang-|ninciple-put-forth — 's [wind,] blonini; a£;itates all thinL's ; then 'ts'ai) arc they able to 
 put forth life. That is, — ^wind, so qualilied, must stir them before they can he born, or, as I have, 
 freely translated it, is necessary, &c. 2. It is another thin;.'-, &c. ; !i/., also is it those in the world 
 (shih-s/tanr/, men and things,) = the world, not can be wanting in (cli'ueli,) — s [thin;;] understood. 
 3. another, makes the sentence an allusion to 196; otherwiseye/i might be simply, moreover. 
 
 281'. When a sudden gust of wind catches up the dust, whirlino^ it round and round for a while 
 before it lets it disperse, tlie phenomenon is called a hsilan-filng, a whirlwind. 
 
 Obs. 1. This may seem an unnecessarily laborious translation ; but the subject is without doubt chiao, to 
 call, here == name or dcsig-nation ; the copula, skill, is; and the predicate, hsilan-fhvr, whirl-wind. 
 The circumstances of the phenomenon described in the upper clauses, collected by ^!, form a re;^i- 
 men of the subject; q.d. the name of (wind and dust in such relations) is wliirlwind. 2. Tho 
 difficulty in translating the whole accurately and idiomatically lies in the fact that the subject in the 
 second clause, dust, is the object in the lirst, and that the subject in the first, wind, maintains a 
 causative inlluence on the verbs in the second, of which, as elsewhere, no grammatical indication is 
 given, and which, from the nature of the action declared by those two verbs, has to be differently 
 supplied in the case of each. Thus: — Suddenly a bout of wind succeeds in blowing, = blows, the 
 dust that is on the ground, {ti-shang -ti ch'en-tn): — [the dust blown by the wind] rouud-and-round- 
 wise (3()G, obs. 5, 313, obs. 3 ;) turn-ing {cliunn-cho,) half a day, then [when the wind ceases,] disperses, 
 is whirled about some time before the wind lets it disperse, (for sun cannot be ap|died to wind itself,) == 
 the wind blows n|) the dust; by the wind the dust is made to whirl, and allowed to disperse. 
 3. before it lets it disperse ;_/ang san, lit., it the dust, then disperses ; compare isai iu 283, obs. I. 
 
 285. It was quite awful to hear the clatter the gale made among the tiles last night. 
 
 Obs I . the gale, &c. ; lit., in the darkness, {'hei-hsia,) == by night, that bout of great wind. 2. clatter ; 
 lit., blowing attained =» blew till the tiles on the house made a skan hsiang, sound of the wind 
 amongst hills. 3. quite awful; lit., [one] hearing it (fin(/-c/io,) was sui)ernatiirally {k'nai.) alarmed 
 {'liai-p'a-ti.) The word k'uai is employed to intensify the expression of other affections of the mind ; 
 much as we use devilish, infernally, &c., but without any parallel impropriety. 
 
 286. There came on a strong northwester, which blew the dust about the sky, whisked the tiles of 
 the roof lip and down till they clattered again, and shook the trees till their branches were 
 snapped off, and all their leaves fell. 
 
 Obs. 1. In every clause here the first verb is properly a transitive verb, but by the addition of i'*, the 
 nature of its action is changed. In strictness, perhaps, we should construe thus: — the wind, by 
 blowing effected (hua-lC) [what follows next, viz.] the dust flew into the vacuum = sky, (fei k'tim; ;) 
 a construction which we render by particles denoting progress of time, or change of place, according- 
 to the Cliinese verb of the action caused by the verb tc: and its associate : so, blew the dust into or 
 about the sky; lifted the iiles till they rang, or roared. 2. whisked, /(*•;>?;, to lift np suddenly, 
 e.g. in reading, the leaf of a book. 3. Shook the trees, &c., /ij., taking (pa.) the trees shook = "it 
 shook the trees until [this followed ; viz.] the branches all [it] snapped, (chc, an active verb ;) the 
 leaves all fell. 
 
 287. It is a fine sunshiny day, but there is such a stormy look both about land and sky, that 
 the wind is certain to be up directly ; or you may say, It will blow. 
 
 Obs. 1. fine -- but; /(/., although there is a clear sky and great sun — 's [day, or sky, or appearance.] 
 2. stormy look, &c., lit., by (chiao) this body [chc ku) of wind-matter {ftiig-cll'l;) [it, the day or 
 sky] being obscured attains a sky-thick-Iand-dark-like [appeai-ance.] 3. body, Im, a large 
 
 number, or quantity, of men or things. 4. being obscured; che, is passive after chiao.hy ; by 
 this storm-matter, or wind-matter, is sci-eened until it is of a look described by t'ien 'hun, ti "^a)t-ti ; 
 with which compare 104, obs. 5. o. lit., while the eye is looking, or glancing, (i/en ck'ou-clw), 
 then must there be [this fact, that] the wind has risen, or there has risen a wind. 6. or you 
 may say, kc, 'hiio, sbih := 'huo, or it is, or, may be, that one s.iys it will {'/mi,) be that there 
 is a blowing of wind. N.B. In this analysis of mine, the two ))lirases cli'i fiiig and tma fcng, 
 are translated with so much apparent periphrasis because, iu fact, both the verbs arc impersonal, 
 ij.d. yao, there must be [a case of] c'hi fing-liao ; or, 'hui there is going to be [a case of] hua-fing- 
 liao. 
 
 288. When you are on a voyage, in-land or at sea, you must not look on any weatlier as fair 
 weather. There need be but a patch of cloud seen, and the wind will be up in the twiidiling 
 of an eye : or. Let but a patch of cloud shew itself. 
 
 Obs. I. onayoyage; lit., within rivers or on seas {chiang 'hai li) travelling-hy ship, {hsi-ig c/i'tian.), 
 2. look upon; /rt., looking [one] does not obtain [this, viz.] there are, ^ that there should be 
 siTiooth wind and still waves. 3. patch of cloud; there is only needed one piece cloud-hue, 
 
 (see 13J,) [and in] a twinkling the-eye's time (pien-tjen-ti hung-fa-urh), there must be, &c. 
 
 (31)
 
 T'lEN, HFAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 289--203. 
 
 289. Wlien you see the tips of the trees waving with an irrefjjiilar motion, and their leaves fallinj^ 
 one after the otiier to the jrroiiiid, you may be sure it is blowing outside. 
 
 Obs. 1. tiix, s/i!( sliao-urh ; shao, niny be applied to the main 8tera, or to any branch; the expression 
 here iiu Iniles biitli. "2. irregular motion ; Ian, irregular, ,>«(, to wave, active ami ueurer. 3. Calling 
 oiw al'ti'i- tlie ollwr; chili, fi:i;,'ly, here means rapid uninterrupted succession; lit,, contiuuou.sly down- 
 wards tall; one teacher writes chih, straight. 
 
 290. "When it blows, we lose half, when it rains we make nothing at all," is a saying of the 
 tradespeople at Peking. It originates in the fact that, in blowing or rainy weather, no one 
 that can help it will go out, and business, of course, is slack in consequence. 
 
 Obs, 1. lit.. There blows .1 wind, and there is diminution of half; there falls rain, and there is absolutely 
 nothinff; — this is, the cajiital within, bu)inij-and-sellini;-men — 's saying, (/i'ott-t'uu ^ii-urh, see 
 87, obs. i.) 2. It originates ; yiii-ivei, [it, the proverb,] is because of — all that is detailed below. 
 Prcc^eded by a proposition as here, ijin-wei, cannot be taken as otherwi^e than in relation to it: — 
 * Such words are a proverb ; the proverb is because o/'[this, viz., that,] on a day that it blows or rains, 
 the all liut poor men, accordingly, (^chiit.) do not choose to go up tlic street; buying and selling, of 
 course, {tsii-jiin,) or naturally, is, accordingly, (c/iiu,) small, (or less).' But, did no such clause precede 
 yin-wei, the sentence would be a good and complete Chinese sentence ; only, the action of yHi-jcet 
 would be much circumscribed, and the nieanmg of the whole would be, Because of the weather, few 
 persons go out, and trade is bad. It would be, in the present case, perfectly Chinese to detach yin-wei 
 from its grammatical dependence on the first proposition, by appending, after shao liao, ' Therefore is 
 this saying said,' or the like; in which case, however its relation as a preposition to its regimen 
 would still remain as it is. 3. no one that can help it ; lit., on a bad day, the cli'n-pv-to-urh-ti 
 Jen, all-hut [obliged to go] men, chiu, accordingly do not choose, shanp-chieh, to go up the street, ==, 
 here, to leave the house : ch'a-pu-to, removed-not-rauch [from absolute necessity.] whether arising from 
 poverty, pressing business, or other cause. 4. of course - - in consequence; lit., buying and selling, 
 = trade, is less ; or, naturally or, of course, (tzu-jan, I Id, obs. b;) accordingly, in that case, {chiu,) 
 diminishes. The tzu-jan seems inserted to reinforce the second chin, as indicative of the conse- 
 quence of a consequence. N.B. supposing the value of chiti, &c., to have been rightly estimated here 
 and in foregoing observations, it may be remarked that a great part of the functions of this word and its 
 like is discharged in other tongues, by the stops, by modulation of the voice, and emphasis laid on 
 words not otherwise logically significant ; on a bad day, people won't go out, and trade falls ofi'of course. 
 
 291. " Tafeng yang ch'm," (the wind is making the dust fly,) is an expression used when the 
 dust, at any place where the soil lies light, is driven up into the sky on a windy day; but if 
 the wind is very high, you say it isjei-sha-tsou-shih-ii, (a wind that makes the grit fly and 
 the stones walk.) 
 
 Obs. I. constrne, At a light soil place, on a day that there is wind; it blows the dust flying-into-the- 
 sky-wise; men then say there is, &c. 2. soil light, t'u hsiian ; the latter character is possibly 
 corrupt ; if not, its meaning here seems forced upon its regular meaning of to promnlge, spread 
 abroad ; q.d. soil could not be so scattered abroad unless it were light. 3. windy d.iy ; yii, to be, or, 
 to have, agrees w\\\\Jtng, not \v\\hjih-tzii ; this latter noun is in the case marking time or occasion, 
 and, in English, must have the preposition, on, or the like, before it; on a day qualified, or de- 
 scribed, by the ^.v-ytHg- - ft', shaving-wind — 's, or, there bein;;-wind — 's, day, := on a day with 
 wind, or, a windy day. 4. making the dust fly, lit., if indeed {ju huo,) it, the wind, be ten-tenths 
 
 (shih-Jen,) severe {li-'hai); the last dissyllable, lit., sharp as a knife and injurious, is a superlative 
 used in speaking not only of evil acts or qualities, but of great vigour, energy, S:c, 6. grit, sAa, 
 sand, and often dust, hut here something heavier and coarser than ch'en t'u, with which it is con- 
 trasted. 7. stones walk ; lit,, if [the wind be] indeed violent, then [men] say [it is a] lij ing-sand 
 walking-stone — 's [wind.] 
 
 292. When snov? that has been left on a sandy place is being blown away and the wind mi.'ces 
 the sand up with it and drives them about together pell-mell, the blinding effect on the eyes 
 of any one that may be out in the blast is exceedingly painful. 
 
 Obs. 1. Our idiom, it will be seen, here requires many words not necessary in the Chinese. 2. Construe 
 thus : on a sandy-soil place there is, = let there be, = if there be, snow that has been retained, 
 {ts'un /isia-ti hsiieh ;) — that wind, = the wind, (on cluao, see obs. 3.) taking the snow blows, or, 
 has blown, it away, {kua k'ni liao ;) and at the same time stirred up with it the sand; — [and caused 
 the sand and the snow] undistinguishabl-y, {pien-pu-ch'ing-ti,) in confusion to fly {Ian or luanjei); — 
 [so doing, makes them] blind [one, causing] in the eyes extreme pain. 3. If the last clause be held to 
 contain the main proposition, it might seem not necessary to merge chiao, hut right to construe it as 
 usual, hy, viz., by the action of the wind, as described, the eyes are blinded ; but as the sentence could 
 with all grammatical correctness end at hinfci, excluding the result of the action of the wind altoge- 
 ther, 1 have thought it best to merge chiao, as above ; (see 100 obs. 2.) It would be quite correct to say 
 chiao sha-t'u mi-lino yen-ching, hut, if mi followed the noun, pa would be introduced, chiao sha-i'u 
 pa i/en-ching mi-liao; which is in fact the construction here. 4. The statement of the events in 
 their own order, as elsewhere, implies the process «hich we introduce verbs causative to declare. 
 The wind blows the sand, thus and thus, making it to blind the eyes, making the eyes sore. 
 5, blinding effect; mi, is also to blind by strong light, here, manifestly, by the sand, SiC, enter- 
 ing the eye, I have therefore added ' of any one that may be out, &c.' 
 
 293. When the dust has been blown from all quarters into some nook out of the wind's way, and 
 there gathered together in a low mound, people say, [speaking of the wind as if it were 
 water,] that it has made its mud-heap of the dust. 
 
 Obs. 1. dust,/« «/ia, surface sand. 2. all quarters, ho ch'ii, every place; lit., let there be a gust of 
 wind, that taking every place's surface sand, blows it all. 8. into a nook, wo-feng-ti ti-fang-urh, 
 a phice that makes a nest, or resting place for the wind ; a place under, or not reached by the 
 wind. 4. gathered together ; chii-cli'i, collecting to raise. The wind is still the subject of 
 
 the proposition ; the wind blows the dust to the nook, and gathers it into a small sand-heap. 
 5. Mark the use of /ai which continues the action of the wind, being anxiliar.y both oi kua-tao, 
 and chii ch'i. 6. mud-heap; yii, is properly to deposit, as water does mud; chu confirms the 
 notion of persistence in the state established by }/ii. Compare our expressions, waves of sand, 
 showers of dust, &o. 
 
 (32)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 294-299. 
 
 294. His life had been taken by rol)l)ers, aiifi search iiiul hecii inade for liis body for several clays 
 without success, when it was discovered in a wind-nook, under a hcaj) of dust. 
 
 Obs. 1. As it stands in Cliinesc, this scntciirc iii!:;Iit refer to an event ri'latej historically, as I have 
 rendered it, or to a very roeent evejit; in the latter cMse, \yk should re(|iiire in Eii|;lisli a change in 
 the tenses; his lite was taUeii. search has heen made, his hody has now been discovered. Tlie na-ko 
 may or may not be denionsltalive ; a heap, or, that heap yonder. 2. lite talten, lit., be, by 
 
 robbers, was, or, had been, liiirt to death, ('hai-szu.) '.i, search withont success; lit., some 
 
 d.iys seehinu I they] foniiil not {c/iao-pn-c/iKo ; on the latter chuo or c/io, see 279, ohs. 2;) the 
 corpse, (shili-shoii-urh,) lit., corpse and head, bnt nsed as eorpve only. One may say, tor instance 
 ruci-l'ou-ti sliili-shiin-iirh, a headless corpse. 4. discovered ; this uord appears to me to couvey suffi- 
 
 ciently tlie ideaot'iinexpei'tedness by itself; I have tlieri'fiirc used it in free translation of the Chinese, 
 which is, lit., who could have Unowii, = who would have thought, it was buried, or concealed, 
 (mai-c/io.) under that heap of dust deposited by the wind as water deposits mud; that by-the-wind- 
 -settled {yii-chu-ti, see 293, obs. C,) — 's dust lieap — 's below concealed. 
 
 295. The cold of winter comes all from the north, and all people mean therefore by saying, when 
 it blows cold, "A0-/'n/7 ling lirifi,'' (Ujrh ! the north wind!) is simply that it is infoh'rahly 
 cold. Sometimes you say '■'■ fmg chHu-tt '■Jmn-shn lan-clian" (sliivering- from top to toe. 
 with the cold,) and this is a more common expression than the other. 
 
 Obs. I. so is applied more particularly to the sandy rcr;ions north and north-west of China Pioper ; 
 
 linn-ling is fpiakinir, shiverin^r with cold. 2. cold of winler; lit., the winter.weather's cold breath, 
 matter, or essence, ('/lan-ch'i,) all is by way-of (y,) the north side comiui; — 's fcold.] 3. all people 
 mean; lit., therefore, (hit tz'ti,) when there blows wind, in every instance (tou,) they say there 
 is (shi/i,) a so-Jcntj Inig-lintj, [their meaning'] even then (i/eh chiu,) is [that there is] cold-not-to-he- 
 borne — 's meauingf [i szu;) or, In sayiiiif therefore, whenever it hlows, oh! that so fUnri'. p'-ople's 
 meaning is not that it is a sojeng, bnt that it is intolerably cold : — the ;/eh chiu is rendered in the 
 translation by 'all people mean is simply ; q.d. when they say, specifically, so fi'nf/, even then their 
 meaning- is, generally, intense cold. 4. top to toe, &c. ; lit., the wind is blowing until the whole 
 body {'hun s/ien) irregularly shivers. 5, common expression; /i/., scmielimes, = it niav be that, 
 {'huo-shih,) one says feng, &c, compared with (jji,) that (hb, = the lorCigoiuif,) seuteuce of talk more 
 common. 
 
 29G. How pleasant everything looks after spring has come in, when all nature is bursting into 
 life, and the green boughs and leaves are waving in the gentle breeze ! 
 
 Obs. 1. spring come in, &c., chiao ch'un, (see 247, obs. 5.) 2. all nature, wan wit, the myriad things 
 of creation: — bursting into life, /a shdng, issuing, or being sent, into life. 3. and the o-reen 
 
 boughs, lit., also, or, at the same time, (y/,) there is that slowly-moving-even-like breeze [iju-yu-ti 
 Jcng-urh,) waving (t/aotung,) those green bianches {ching c//(,)and green leaves (Hi yeh.) 4. looks 
 , pleasant ; beholding (tan-c/io,) sc. what is above detailed, all is pleasurable, or delightful, {kao-hsing-ti.) 
 The term hao-hsing meaus elevation of spirits ; hsing.pai, depression, prostration. 
 
 297. It is very refreshing of an afternoon in the hot weather, when one is sitting cooling one's self 
 with one's clothes off in tlie court of the house, of a sudden to feel a slight breeze blowing 
 on one, and to see it just stirring the boughs of the trees. 
 
 Obs. 1- hot weather, &c. ; lit.. In the hot time, or circumstances, = heat's weather or days, (jo-ching 
 t'ien-rh,) a man has arrived at the late half of the day, (see 82, obs. I ;) — suddenly he feels there 
 is a put}' of slight wind, = a gentle current, \ c. ; — that hlows to his body upon, =; blowing against 
 him; — be sees those tree-boughs, no more than slightly waved a wave; truly is it the extreme of 
 what is refreshing, (shiang-h'uai chih chi ; see 2o7, obs. 5.) 2. shuang-k'uai refers both to the sight 
 
 ' and the feeling; q.d. refreshing to the latter, enlivening to the former. See 71, obs. 2; 234, obs. 5, 
 
 298. In the winter, not only does the water in the rivers freeze into ice, the earth, as well, is 
 frozen hard by the frost and the snow, until the arrival of spring, wlien under the influence of 
 its mild breezes the cold gradually gives way : — or, nor will the cold begin to give way 
 until it feels the influence of the mild winds on the arrival of spring. 
 
 Obs. 1. water iu the rivers ; lit., river water freezes into ice (lung ping.) 2. the earth as well; (lien 
 
 ti tou chiao,) with it the earth as well all by the frost and snow is frozen to consistencv; ton, all 
 reinforces ?(e«, as well; so elsewhere ; compare the relation between our a//, here used, and also. 
 3. influence; sJiou-cho, receiving passively, acted on by, those mild, or temperate, breezes; 
 wen-WCT-<( is explained to mean neither too cold nor too hot. 4. until spring --when under, &c.; 
 
 lit., having reached spring weather, {tao liao ch'un t'ien,) then by slow degrees {tsai man-in/in-ti,) has 
 there opened the congelation, does the frost thaw, or, is the cold loosened. o. 1 he second translation 
 given of the sentence from tan liao to the end, is not so well justified by the text as the first. To 
 ensure the force of the second it would be better to insert, between tiing chu liao, and tao liao, some 
 such clause as tsung pu 'hui k'ai, it will on no account give nay, — until spring, — and then, <Scc. 
 
 299. In the second or third moon, if there comes a breath of warm wind just as the buds of tlie 
 peach and apricot blossoms are formed, in two or three days the trees will be one mass of 
 red. 
 
 Obs. 1. buds formed ; /zV., the peach and apricot blossom having hard knit or joined hard, (kang-chieb,) 
 its ku-tu-nrh, a colloquial form corrupted from kti, a hone, and to, a bud; the dissyllable ku-to, if not 
 then introduced, was most in fashion, in the Yuen Dynasty, as the bail on the lop of a pole, one of 
 the insignia of office. The word Xo-to, aknot (see 130, obs. b.) is said to be formed from the same. 
 2. if there comes, chiu yii-cho, then encountering, viz, the blossom »hich is the subject of the 
 whole sentence: — In the second or third moon, the blossom just formed, if it encounter a soft 
 wind's one blow, in two or three days.will have by opening attained a man shu t' ung-'hung-ti [con- 
 dition or status ;] ^= will have opened so as to make the entire tree thoroughly red. 
 
 (33) I
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 300-306. 
 
 300. During- tlie intoleralile lieats of tlie fiftli or sixtli moon, when it blows notliinjf but, hot winrls, 
 and you can't tind a cool s|)ot look wlit-n; you will, it may cool you lor a moment to drink 
 a cup of iced water ; but tiieii perha[)b you catch a cold inside, and in that case your remedy 
 is worse than your disorder. 
 
 Obs. I. intolerable heat; lit, the heat {shu-jo,) being hard to bear up against (nan tang,') — 's time. 
 
 liOtliiiifr but liot winds ; lit., the [wind] blouii hither, or, to one {kuu-liao-lai-ti -fing nndcrstoud,) 
 
 is all lii)t vviiid. 3. look wlii'ie yuii h ill, iVc. ; lit., you thinlc to find a cool place, but no! withstanding', 
 01-, alter all, (fltiiif/,) there is none [mr t/it ni.) 4. (ool yon for the niouuMil ; lit-, drinking a bowl 
 or cup of ice water, tenipoiarily (cliaii,) you dissipate (di ie/i-c/iit/i ,) the heat-matter (s/iu-ch'i.) 
 5. bnt then; lit., it is only to be t'eared, = probable, (see '2'J. ubs. 3 ) you will receive, = be 
 subjected to, catch, \lii- i/in-'/uin-piiirj, secret cold, = cold within disease. 6. remedy worse tlian 
 disorder; lit., then will there be (r/j/« i/ji/;,) a scooping out [sound] flesh (wajuii,) to fill np a sore 
 (pii ch'uaiit/,) — 's policy (luo /i,) =:: right rule of action, or, the rule of action believed by the agent 
 to be right; theory ; system. 
 
 301. WJien a sliort rain in autumn is followed by something of a cool breeze coming rustling 
 along', you must put on your warm clothing ;ind keep the cold out. 
 
 Obs. 1. something of a cool breeze; /(/., following (sui-c/io,) then there is a one particle cool wind ; the 
 diminutive attVcts, not cool, but its substantive. -2. rustling along, (sou-sou ti.) -am expression properly 
 having reference to sound only, bnt here through the sound adding to the feeling of coolness experi- 
 enced. 3. keep cold out, lit., then {Is'ai,) will you succeed in barring out, or preventing the entry 
 [of cold.] For c/fi as an auxiliary, see '2CU, obs. 1. See also 217, obs. 4, and '1-25, obs. 5. 
 
 30'2. VVitliout these refreshing breezes to cool the atmosphere, how would people endure such 
 hot weather as this ? 
 
 Obs. 1. lit., This sort of hot weather, were it not that such a bout of refreshing wind, — so dispersed the 
 hot matter somewhat (»a« i san, dispeised it one dispersing), man could how receive = endure? 
 '2. The first clause contains the object governed by the verb thou at the end. 3. without 
 these breezes: lit., wire it not {yao pu skill,) that there is, or are (yn,) such (cht-mo = this sort of 
 &c.^: — 1/cio prefers the addition of the shi/i, and pu shih, which in our idiom are almost redundant; 
 — the cjii-mo and i ctiin, one, or, a, bout or putf, seem to modify and generalise the proposition, much 
 as when we add ' once in a way ', ' every now and then,' &c. 
 
 303. If the wind is from the south, when one is going soutliward, it is said to be a ying mien 
 fiiig, (a wind in your face;) another name for it is a ting-to'' ufing, (a foul wind.) A steamer 
 
 will go straight, although the wind be in her teeth. 
 
 Obs. 1. lit , wind from the south coming, man to the south going, that wind, people call a wind meeting 
 
 you face to face : — the pause after finij marked by chiu, throws the emphasis on na that, 
 
 2. another name ; lit., they also call it a butt-head wind, q.d. bead butting head wind, foul wind, 
 
 dead against one. 3. a steamer; lit., a fire-wheel ship, although there be a meet-ing (yiii(/-cho,) 
 
 wind, — still is able uniforra-straight-wise (i-chih-ti,) to go. 
 
 304. The house leaks, so it rains for several nights together; one goes on the water, and the wind 
 makes a point of being dead against one. This is a common saying to the effect that nothing 
 is going right. 
 
 Obs. I. so it rains, &c.; [It is not enough that it should rain, but] in addition to rain per se, {hcng,) one, 
 encounters, or is subjected to (tsoo.) several nights rain. The kt'iig throws an emphasis on lieu, 
 several togther. 2. on the water, lit., going in a vessel {hsiny ch'uan, see 288, ohs. \.) anu .specially 
 one falls in with [p'ien yii ; see 157, obs. 4.) a foul wind, (see 303. ubs. 2.) 3. nothing goes right; 
 lit., tills is a doing-business-not-following-the clue — 's commou saying. 
 
 305. Since the day we set sail we have never had a fair wind ; it has been a dead beat the whole 
 time, and when we shall arrive I don't know : — or, — It is impossible to say when we shall 
 get to port, for since the day, &c. 
 
 Obs. I. since the day ; lit., forth from (tzu-ts'uno,) that day of [cuir] loosing the ship (k'ai ch'uan = weigh- 
 ing anchor,) beginning {ch'i,} to the present day, we have not fallen in with a fi'-od wind. 2. dead 
 beat; lit., through, ut (tsiniij,) it has been (shih,) au oblirjue wind passage {ckiuiKjJeiiij.) On ch'iang 
 written as here, see 3US, obs. 4; but some teachers insist on the use of the character, cA'z'ang, to steal, 
 urging that a bafiiiug wind of this kind is also called tseifing, a thief wind. 
 
 306. The wind was first from the east bank of the river, and then coming hard against the west 
 bank it blew back towards the east; in short it blew here and was thrown back there, all 
 round the compass, with such tincertainty, that it became impossible to say what point it was 
 from, and in the end the boat was so spun about by it that she was seriously damaged. 
 
 Obs., 1. Was first; lit., in the first instance ( yiian-tai,) it was that the wind proceeding from the east 
 bank-upon, began; bloviing to the west bank-upon it had a C(dlision [«ith the bank (/7't'«r7.) and] 
 returning went, and conlraji«ise [to its ori;;iual direction, — !/«,] east-wards fuang tuny) blew. 
 2. round the compass; lit., from the lour quarters, [szu miefi tirh fnn. m;V-'///) irregularly it 
 came against [obstacles which drove it back;] at last ftao-ti, lit., having got to the bottom; see 
 obs., 4.) distinguish one could not that it was trom-wliat-quarter-coming . — 's wind. 3. in the end, 
 mo-'bouurh, the end-finality, at last, but often used as no more than afterwards, subsequently. 
 4 tao li, rendered in the translation, in short, has quite a difl^erent force, from mo 'hoii, which 
 connects and concludes the narrative; tao li h more or less objective, and marks that pause in the 
 sense which we distinguish by short expletive sentences: — 'it blew so that, really and truly, or, I 
 declare, i~\ c ; — in short it blew to that, &c.'; 5 spun her about; lit., [the iviiid] taking (pa 191, 
 obs. 3 ) that boat, so treated or maltreated (lung, or nung ; see 39, obs. 3.) [tier] rouiid-and-round- 
 whirling-wise, (see 284, obs. 2,) [as to cause herl ten-tenths = entirely, to receive ^ suffer 
 punishment, {shou tsui.) 6. Mark /ja as elsewhere indicating the object pi'eceding its verb, and 
 the construction of tc in connection with it : — taking the boat, it, the wind, by maltreatment [lung,) 
 obtained, or acconiplished (Ic) a result upon the object of pa, = ca?/sed its shih-Ji'n shou-lsui, utter 
 damage. The adverbial change t'uan-fuan-c/iuan-li, defines the method of the treatment, (lung,) and 
 might with equal currectaess immediately precede the verb lung. 
 
 (34)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 307-313. 
 
 307. It will often happen in the desert beyond the Great Wiill, tliat travellers meet with a head- 
 wind wliicli brinirs tliein to a starid-stiil, niial)le to t^ct one foot before the otiier ; or, tliat 
 travellers attempting to proceed aj^aiust a gale that is right against them, are fairly slopped, 
 and unable to make any way whatever. 
 
 Obi. 1. in the desert; lit., in the desert, or barren, s.ind country ('htinng-sha ti.) outside the lonjf wall. 
 2. travellers; lit., there, (w«-V/(,) [if persons] meeting { ijimj-cliD,) (jreat wind, go the road, (fooa- 
 tiio-rh,) =: travel ; or, we should say attempt to travel. . a. constantly (mnwj-wnng, see G!) ubs. 1 ;) 
 then hy the wind are they hotted and stopped {tiiuj-chu, see 30.'), obs. 'J; 92, iths. 2; 102, (jhs. 3), = 
 brought lip [so, that] they cannot mai pit, budge a pace; mai is to lift one loot before another, to 
 walk ; pit is a pace or stride. 
 
 308. Are yon abusing the ship for lying over ? The wind is not right a liead to be sure, still 't 
 is impossible to make a fair wind of it. With the wind as foul as it is, the ship must keep 
 tacking, and how should she have an even keel ? 
 
 Obs. 1. abusing, or, finding fault with, hitai, is to wonder at, to express one's wonder at, hence to scold, 
 iVc, more or less: — loai-cho, see 83. 2. to be sure; lit., although there is not a loul 
 
 wind {tinci-Jcnri, see 303, obs. 2.;) on the other hand, (j/u,) obtaining it does not obtain [tc-pii-chao 
 = /t-pu-<«o, reach, attain to, being) a fair wind. 3. wind as \\.\>,; hsianfj chi tsung (i\U,ubs. 1. 
 
 p'anij-fcwj, [while the wind] resembles this sort [viz. a] side wind. 4. must keep tackin;; ; /i<., 
 
 the ship must breaking-and-piercini; [c/ic-ch'iany,) ^o; clit, is to snap, as, for instance a twig; ckiang, 
 is to wound by a thrust. It is miicli disputed what diameter is correct for clvianij in this sense. 
 The authority for that used in the text is the Wii-pei Chih, History of the Art of War, quoted in 
 the 'Hai-kwofi Tu Chih, Illustrated Notice of Fcjreign States, in reference to Japanese vessels. The 
 word is used of the prop of somethinn- inclined, as distinct from lintj to prop, or uphold, what is 
 directly over-head; hence, says one teacher, is obtained the idea of obliquity, which it combines with 
 chc to convey. The expression here refers only to the obliquity of the ship's course, however, not to 
 her declining from the perpendicular, (see chHangfiiig, 305, ubs. 2.) 
 
 309. With a north-west wind, vessels on their way from Canton to Hongkong will run down with 
 every sail set. 
 
 Obs. 1. north-west: lit, west-north; on a west-north wind's d.iy. 2. will run, &c. ; lit., from the 
 provincial city {sheng,) going to Hongkong — 's vessels, all are able to{'hni) = will, have (i/ii) — wliiit 
 follows ; or, taking //;/ as a substantive verb, there is to all such vessels,— the following, viz. a hoist- 
 ing full sails, and running along there {tsai na-'rii,) fair-wind-wise : — hoist chi-ch'i, to pull and raise, 
 
 pull up ; full sails, ht., mats ; full, man, = all, as in 106, obs. I. run down,p'no, to run or gallop; 
 
 sneaking of the speed, not the course; — fair wind, sbunfeng, a complying or obedient wind ; a wind 
 with one. 3. The speaker is at the city or somewhere else; not at Hongkong, or, instead of 
 saying wang chiang, he would say lai chiang. 4. Chiang is short for Hsiang Chiang = Hongkong. 
 
 310. In spring and summer, during the prevalence of the southerly monsoon, you may sail from 
 Canton to Peking, carrying a fair wind with you all the way. 
 
 Obs, I. southerly monsoon ; lit, [In] spring and summer season j's], south wind should be commanding— 's 
 time; at such time in spring and summer as the south wind ought to prevail (laug-le'iw,) by right 
 rules, or commands. The limitation of its prevalence is however, rather due to our knowledge of 
 the fact that the monsoon does not blow all spring, than to the construction. To leave no doubt that 
 part of the time only is spoken of, li-t'cit, viifhin, or the like, should follow t-ien: that the whole 
 time is meant could be variously shewn, by a collective, such as t'nng-clio preceding ch'un, or 
 toil shih before nan. 2. carrying a fair wind ; lit., from (yii,) Kwang Tung, sitting ina sea vessel 
 [one] enters, = goes up to {chin 190, obs. I,) the capital, — the entire way, {i In-i/rh^) throughout is 
 there a fair wind escorting-wise, {hsiaiuj-sung-ti.) 3. hsiang, in strictness, mutual, is coustantly 
 used in combinations as the Latin co« or c«?n, or the Greek ,ri;»: suw;;, is to bear company in move- 
 ment, and especially to speed, as a host his guest. 
 
 ^U. It's blowing hard, this north wind ! Get you over there behind that house with its back to 
 the north, and in front of those hills to tl)e northward, where you will be under the wind ; 
 you can wait there a while till it goes down, and then continue your journey. 
 
 Obs. 1. The first clause is exclam.itory. So great {chi-mo ta-^i) a north wind! 2. all that follows is 
 imperative, and has reference to the scene before the speaker; nn, that, is demonstrative of a place 
 behind the nan fang, south house, = house looking north, — and in front of uoi th hills, = hills north 
 of the speaker. 3. where -- under the wind; lit., that then, or just, {chiu.) is a place which shelters 
 from, gives its back to the wind, [pei fmg ti.) 4. wait ; {hsieh-i-hsieh.) rest a rest, wait till, {taig,) 
 the wind has stopped, then again {tsai, compare lUo, obs. 8, and ytt in 312,) go, and there is an end of 
 it, {pa.) 
 
 312. Now observe this wind ; first comes a great gust, then a gentle puff; then it lulls, and then 
 it blows again, each blow being harder than the preceding; a gusty wind as violent as this is 
 will not go down in a moment. 
 
 Obs. 1. great gust; lit., you see this wind hasty (chin,) one bout, slack {man,) one bout. 2. butts ; it 
 halts a while, (ting i 'hiii-tzu,) and again (i/u. see 272, obs. 5,) blows a bout. 3. each - - harder - - 
 
 preceding; lit, one bout compared with one bout great [er], 4. gusty; lit., a wind of bouts or 
 gusts {chcn-chinfeng,) thus violent {lt--hai, sharp-edged and hurtful, but'also used as intensive of 
 many things not necessarily hurtful ; t: g. talents, medicine, &c.) 5. go down in a moment ; lit, in 
 one time, in one moment, cannot then, or forthwith, {chiu.) stop. N.B. If it were i shiti chiu pu 
 ning, &c., it would be 'once it begins then it will not, = never, stop.' 
 
 313. A yang-chiao feng (ram's horn wind,) is a whirlwind. A similar whirling in the water is 
 called a hsuan-wo, (eddy or whirlpool.) When the wind rises off the ground, and whirls 
 irregularly upwards without keeping to any point, it is then said to to be a ram's-horu wind; 
 the meaning being, that it extends upward sjiirally like a ram's horn. 
 
 Obs. I. see hsiianftng in 284. 2. similar whirling. &c. ; lit, in the water it is also (y»/,) 
 
 called, = water similarly moved is a hsiian-wo, a whirling nest, or uook. It does not mean that 
 
 (35)
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 314-319. 
 
 that wind so moviiiff on water is so called. 3. That, = the, wind from (he ground below to hlow 
 
 beifiiis, or liluwinn rises, np-wards (irmig-s/irinff.) rourid-and-rouiiil-wise eonfiiseilly uliirls.C'.ee 284, o/jii. 
 2), not having tixeil rule (mt-i/ii-tinii-clnin-ti z= ir-re^'ular-ly.) Observe the adverb so liirined folb>vviii(^ 
 the verb. 4. the nieaninir beui|^'; — -the sentence prccediiifj is coni|dete as a conclusion; then 
 
 is it {c/iiii s!iih,) a rain's horn wind; the supplementary sentence which tolbiws is not cotniected with 
 it by any sifjn and niiisl be construed soniewhat in this way ; — [The nieaninj;. (i-szu.) of its beinjf 
 called a rani's horn wind is] it-resenihlcs (_/ri«j/-/»,)-arani's-horn-spiral-ly (i/iurni-c/io) up-wards ex- 
 lending' — 's ine.inini; (i-szfi ;) its i-s:u is the i-szii ijualitled by all the words trmii fa)ii/-J'u to ch'ing 
 inclusive, collected into one attributive by ti ; we raay render it as in the translation, or by, The 
 nii'aninir of which is, &c. 3. horn, chi-cliiuo. 6 spirally, ckuan-cho. 7. extends, c/iaiig, to be 
 distinjjnished both by tone and breathing from c/t'ung, long. 
 
 SH. The (lust was swept rouiiil by a whirlvviiid to a great height. 
 
 Obs. 1. hi, to come simply auxiliary of action, not indicating direction. 2 swept round ; cAuan, as in 
 867, obs. 3. 3. great height, '/o hao. 
 
 315. The gale that lias been blowing these last few days, roared in a manner that was really 
 fearful. This wind makes no such noise ; it is a gentle breeze. 
 
 Obs. 1. These some days {che-mo dii t'ien) — ' (ti) great wind blowing attained, or effected, (hia-te,) sound 
 [on hearing which one] much could fear. 2. This makes, &c. ; lit., this bout (f/it chin-tzu) has, 
 not that sound, [na-mo hsiang,) = the sound of the other ; pu = mci, or me yu. 3. gentle breeze ; 
 lit., its appearance, or character (/iuanff-c/tinij,)h [that of a] wind even and peaceful, {pHng-'ho ;) tiie 
 last expression is also applicable to a man's temper. 
 
 316. The sky was dark with dust while the wind was blowing, and as there is nothing of the kind 
 now, it may fairly be assumed that the wind has gone down, so we shall not have our eyes 
 blinded. 
 
 Obs. The sky was dark, &c. ; /j7.,JHst at the time the wind v»'as blowing, there was (s/;iA,) a dust ob- 
 scuring-the-sUy — 's [Kuanij-chiny, appearance, or circumstance, understood.] 2. nothing --- now 
 &c. ; at this time, or moment, [rjii 'hui-tzii,) entirely is there not, there is no [such ap|>earance] at all. 
 
 3. fairly assumed ; tt, truly there maybe — [the following kuaiiy-ching, viz.] the wind being 
 fixed or settled, the dust (shat'u,) cannot blind eyes. 
 
 317. The wind has gone down for a certainty; the windows are not stirring at all. Come now, 
 sweep up all the dust that has been blown in, wherever it may be. lying. 
 
 Obs. I. The i-linp in the second clause of the Chinese certainly marks an inference from the first; instead 
 of transposing them as in the translation, their own order might be preserved, and so, or, so I presume, 
 introduced to connect them. 2. windows, /it., window-paper ; (see 33, obs. '2.) 3. come now, 
 sweep, &c. ; lit., taking {pa before the object) the dust, {'hui-t'u, ashes' dust,) that has been blown into 
 each place, or, in each place the dust that has been blown in, sweep, sweep {ta-sao, ta-sao; lit., stril'e, 
 or do, a sweep :) — observe that sao, a broom, falls under the s/tan/j, or .8d tone of the I'eking dialect; 
 sao, to sweep, as here, under the ch'ii or 4th tone; the same character is used for both tones. 
 
 4. wherever it may be lying. This translation is stiff, but it is difficult to do idiomatic Justice 
 to ko ch'u, every place, and lai, to come, here = sweep the dust that has been blown in out of each 
 place where it may be. 
 
 318. As I was walking yesterday before the wind, I came to a place in the bosom of the hills, 
 with a number of turns and bends in it, and there I met a counter-current of wnnd which was 
 thrown back off the hills with such violence that it impeded respiration; there was no 
 making a toot of way against it 
 
 Obs. I ..before the wind ; lit., I yesterday (tso-'th-ko) obeying the wind, (s/um-cho fi'nrj.'r/i,) was walking 
 2. place in the bosom, dvc. ; 1 reached {too liao,) a place, (^ti-fmig-urli,) to be described as shaii' 
 'huai-li, hill, bosom within, lieii-kiiai, successively tortuous, clii-ko wan-urh, fpron. toa-rh,') some 
 turns, or bends; all which description is grouped \yy ti into an attributive of ti-fang-urh, 3. there 
 I met; lit., [In this ti-fatin-nrh] I encountered a 'hui-fhig, couoter-wind, return-wind, described as 
 blow ing on, or against the hill, (hua too shun sliang,J [and then by the hill] blocked (tnng,) [so that 
 it] re-turned ('litiilai:) — ti, as above, acting on all words from knu-iao to •hui-lai inclusive. 
 4. with such violence. S;c. ; lit., [the 'hui fcng 's] strength, lit., nerve, {c/iing-urh.) was extremely 
 great (tsui ta;) it, the '/lui-finy, blowing attained — the followiug results, viz.; a man was unable to 
 breathe and unable to advance. 3. impeded respiration ; lit., too, invertingly, or contrariwise, ch'ou, 
 drew out or back, ych-ch'i, the gnlped-down or in-drawn breath, that which should have gone down 
 the throat : — i/eh, which also signifies a stoppage in the throat or tdiest, is specially applied to breath 
 inhaled ; a mau ascending a hill will say that be ch'u ch'i, breathes out breath, meyii yeh ch'i, but takes 
 in none. The four h ords are collected by /;, iuto one attributive of jen, man, understood after ti ; the 
 'huifiiig blew till it did this ; the man nas a tuo-ch'ou t/th-ch'i - - ^z man ; stepping, (jnai, see 307, obs. 3.) 
 lie opened not, or separated not, one pace, could not advance a step. 6. There might be introduced 
 after ch'ui-ttjtn, with perfect correctness, shih, was, ko, a ; and after pu-urh, the particle ti. 
 
 319. About the middle of the first moon we were lying at the mouth of the Yang-tzu Chiang, 
 (Yang-tsz' Kiang,) watching the weather. There we lay ten days or a fortnight, and a 
 pretty piece of work we had had looking out; when at last one day the wi^d went down, and the 
 sea became smooth, and then it was all, — " The wind's gone down, bear a hand ! bear a 
 hand ! Stand by to get the ship under way, and across the river." 
 
 Obs. 1. about the middle, 8:c. ; lit., in the first moon's {rhing yiieh,) tenth-odd days, [shih-chi-vrh ;) any 
 time in the second decade of the moon. 2. matching the weather; lit, our ship at the Great 
 River's mouth was keeping watch, or guard, over the wind, [shou fctJg). 3. pretty piece of work, 
 {'hao yung-i, see 139. obs. 2 ; 263, obs. 5 ;) lit., we waited ten d.ays [or] half a moon ; veiy e.asy [was 
 not itV] looking out [until we] got {p'an ti,) that day, = the day that did at last come, — this, viz., 
 the wind fell calm ( p'ing, lit., level, smooth ;) the waves were still. 4. and then it was all ; chiushih, 
 then it was, — what follows. 3. [Men shouted,] the wind is at rest, [hsi-liao ;] bear a hand I 
 (slwu-shili, nee 3b, ofo. 1.) 6. stand by; lit., prepare, be ready, (y«-/y<7'.) to loose the ship, (A'o!- 
 ch'iian, [that she may] cross the river (liuo chiung.) 7. The /jo at the close quickens the action 
 which is to terminate with the kuo chiuug. 
 
 (3G)
 
 T^IEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 320. 
 
 320 There will be a fine harvest this year. It blows once in five days and rains once in ten ; not 
 blowing too hard either, nor raining too heavily. This is v.'hat they had in the time of Yao 
 and Shun; weather described by the ancients as 'not wind enough to stir a bough, nor 
 rain to break a clod '. 
 
 Obs. 1. fine harvest this year; lit., there is at present a plentiful in-fjatherin^'s year-appearance, the 
 appearance of a year in which there will be a full harvest. 'i. not biowin;^, - - - nor raining, &c. ; 
 lit., of live days, on one there blows wind, of ten days, on one tlicre falls rain; the wind also not 
 great, = too great; the rain also not violent, ■= too violent, (mcng); — neither - nor, t/eli-jm, - - - yeA- 
 pu. 3. Yao and Shun, B. C. "2000 and odd ; lit. this, (^cfit'-lw.) in Yao and Shuu's time, [men] 
 had it, ('yu chi/i.) 4. described -- ancients, &c. ; lit., by {rliiao,) ancient njcn it was ^ai(l to be 
 the wind does not cause to sing [niing,) a twig, branch, or trunk, (^I'iao ;) the word miiig, the cry oi 
 winds, is also applied to the striking of gongs, bells, and the like; t'iao is numeral or classifier 
 of things in steins, strips, &c; (see 135, and 237, obs. 3.) 
 
 • • * • « 
 
 [It is scarcely necessary to remind those at all conversant with things Chinese, that the 
 question whether any Chinese word or words will correctly translate the name of (iOD as em- 
 ployed in the Bible, and, in particular, whether .'i/ihi or shang-ti, be the preferable equivalent or 
 approximation, has been within the last few years warmly discussed, and can iiardly as yet be 
 pronounced decided. 
 
 The present does not appear to me a suitable occasion for any formal disquisition on so 
 great a matter, even if I felt myself more equal to the undertakinir ; but, it having been objected 
 to me by a friendly critic, that the words "t^ien in the sense q( ahtn," or, as it would have been 
 more proper to render them, " t'ien in its s/ien sense," with other passages in the first page of 
 the Category, invest the sh'n with properties more exclusively pertaining in the opinion of 
 most English sinologues to Shang Ti, I have tiiought it as well to close the chapter with a (nw 
 remarks made by Chinese teachers on t^ien, shin, and shang ti, in reply to sundry queries of 
 mine respecting these denominations. 
 
 I may add that, according to any experience I have had on the subject, the word most 
 popularly employed to convey the idea of the Deity, as creator, ruler, teaclier, judge, or pro« 
 lector, whether in speech or writing, is f-ien. I am at the same time persuaded that t'ten, by 
 itself, would not adequately translate the word God, in a version of the scriptures, or in Christian 
 writings or discourses. It is very often the Heaven somewhat profanely used by us in certain 
 colloquialisms, but with a less perfect distinction between the visible sky and its belongings, and 
 the immaterial Power to whom we refer in such phrases as the will of Heaven, the laws of 
 Nature, or the finger of Providence. 
 
 Neither the worship of T'ien nor that of Shang Ti claims indispensable preeminence so 
 far as the people at large are concerned. There is a worship, not universal, if indeed general, of 
 certain idols bearing the title shang ti with distinctive prefixes, but as gods of limited faculties 
 or jurisdictions. They are not the Shavg Ti of the ancient classics, to whom the son of heaven 
 was alone worthy to perform the part of priest or votary. The sacrifice to the latter, styled at 
 the same lime Imperial Heaven, stands foremost in the state ritual; it is chief of the few an- 
 nually performed in public by the emperor himself, and it is difficult to resist the impression that 
 this imperial rite, dating as it does from a remote antiquity, is other than a degenerate representa- 
 tive of homage duly rendered in past ages to the one true Supreme. This apart, and it is a 
 consideration naturally attractive to the missionary translator, there is an available fitness in 
 the title shang-ti, an apt indication of sovereign individuality and prerogative, which render 
 it a much more satisfactory equivalent for the word God than Vien. 
 
 The most important difference between either shang-ti or t^ien, and sh'n, seems to me to 
 be this. However vague and confused the Chinese notion of god-hood, the terms shang-ti 
 and, when used in its quasi-personal sense, Vien, do appear to imply a person or power, perfect 
 and omnipotent, singly superior to all beside ; but I cannot find that any such singleness of 
 person, or superiority of power, is assignable to shin as a designation unqualified. The latter, 
 shin, I take to be god or spirit; collectively, of a multitude honoured in China after fashions 
 more or less idolatrous; or, individually, of the personages, more or less divine, composing that 
 multitude. T'ien is a shin ; Shang Ti is a shin ; Kwan-yin is a shin ; these and many more are 
 shin, some of good and some of evil influence ; shin differing in qualities and degrees, the ' 
 highest and most respected among them being, without doubt, Shang Ti, or T'-ien. 
 
 Although the state sacrifice to Shang Ti is free from image worship, one can understand 
 some prejudice against teaching the Chinese to invoke God by a title long sacred to the chief 
 among spirits superstitiously adored. But there is sound precedent for legitimate direction 
 of a worship ignorantly addressed to the Unknown God, the Being to whom it requires no great 
 reach of speculation to assume that allusion was originally intended by a designation signifying 
 Ruler above all, and synonymous with another so identified with perfection and omnipotence as 
 T^ien. This one difficulty removed, I know of no exception that can be taken to the term, 
 if employed without qualification. Should it however continue to be, as by many it is, deemed 
 insufficient, there is surely no hope for shin as a substitute. It might be said of Shang Ti, or 
 any particular s/icn, that he did this or willed that, but were a similar statement made absolutely 
 oi' shin, if it did not immediately call forth from a Chinese hearer, unlearned in the foreign con- 
 troversy, the question, — What shin do you mean ? — it would be because he assumed the speaker 
 10 be referring to the chimg shin, the shin in plurality, — this too by no means a ready assump- 
 tion on the part of Chinese in general, — and the chung shin certainly would not be regarded as 
 competent to rule in many positions, in which the dictation or agency of T'ien would be admitted 
 without a dispute. 
 
 The reader is not to suppose that the following questions and answers formed a dialogue on 
 any one particular occasion. Three or four teachers were examined ; two in particular; and by 
 these last, consulted separately and on different occasions, the whole was perused and reperused 
 
 (37) K
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 321-327. 
 
 before it was allowed to stand on record. Many of my queries were, of course, leading questions, 
 but many of the observations of the teachers were spontaneous, especially tliose wliicli go to 
 establish the priority and supremacy of T'ien.'} 
 
 3'21. A friend of mine, sir, lias ohjeeted to the use of the character sh'nSn the sentence " tHen is 
 chief among thesAc'w," which you composed for me the other day. He thinks a person reading 
 it might perhaps confound the designation shin with that of shaiuj-ti. Will you give me a 
 little plain explanation on the merits of this question, if you please. 
 
 Obs. I. hsien-shing, lit. elder born, the proper address of a teacher by his pupils or others; he addresses 
 his pupil, that is if he be his employer, as tuiiff-c/iia ; (see 3iO.) 2. Hi., That day [ray teacher] for 
 me [/cci too, see 3G, ubs. I.) made — 's {li) that sentence of talk, saying Vien, &C., 3. has objeelcd ; 
 lit., afteiH'ards there was (//(«,) [the fact tlial] a friend coutradictiiig me said, This character, shin, in 
 its use obtains, (= is used in a manner,) not (ittini^, (^pu cfiia-tang.) 3. thinks - - - perhaps, &c. ; 
 he feai'S (/y'a=donbls,) that shouhl it be that any one (yi jin,) looks at it, he will or may, {'hui, 92 
 obs. 4) taUiiijr {j)a before the ohjei:!) shin with (hai,) shany-ti, the two names, upside down (lien-tao,) 
 erroneously employ, = confound tiie two together. 4. will you &<;. ; lit. Please takini^ (pf) this 
 tao-lt, make itj distinctly clear somewhat : lao li, (see 300, ubs. 6,) the right inherent in the question, 
 Jin-hsi„ divide clear, cit'inych'u, distinctly; tieii-urh, a particle, somewhat. Take fen-hsi as the verb 
 and pa aud its regimen as the object. 
 
 322. Well, in fact, very few Chinese would comprehend the title, " Sliang Ti, the most honorable 
 of the s/ieu." The s/un ordinarily alluded to as the most honourable is T'ien and no other. 
 The peo|)le have not any established rite for the adoration of T'ien, notwithstanding this 
 preeminence, nor is any temple raised to T'ien in particular. It is only at the new-year [that 
 there is any special demonstration, and then] there is hardly a householder that does not 
 adore T'ien Ti Yeh, the Lord and Lady of Heaven and Earth. 
 
 Obs, 1. in fact.^Jt'H-fa!, (221, o?)s. 1.) 2. comprehend ; ft<., the China men to comprehend succeed - ing 
 (t'nnij-le - - ti) = who comprehend, f^re] very few. I have put would comprehen<l because the 
 expression as here, would hardly come spontaneously from any Chinese in conversation. 3. or- 
 dinarily, &c. ; [as to the] commonly-spoken-of-spirits-among most-honorable - - 's [one], only is 
 there t'ien. The use of the verb yit inclines me to regard the clause preceding only, as pendent. 
 4. notwithstanding, &c. ; lit. but although he is most honorable; ko before tsui tsiin redundant. 
 3. still is there not auy fixed for adoring I'ien rite, nor is there a with-special-purpose-building- 
 teniple — '• [fact, or usage.] 6. It is only, pu hto ; the translation has here amplified the text in 
 Order to limit pu hto, which is merely intended to mark the sole occasion of homage ; the ch'a-pu-to- 
 urh-ti, all but, and the mc-yu-pu, tlfere is none who docs not, enforce the extensiveness of the usage 
 ou that sole occasion. 7. householder, chu-chia-'hu-urli-vien is used only of the middling and smaller 
 class, the p'ing-tctiff jeii-chia-Krli, even, = middle class, persons. 8. Lord and Lady ; t/eh is not pro- 
 perly applicable to a female. This version is according to the requirements of the Yin and Yang 
 system ; but the teacher whose answer is here recorded maintains that but one spirit or personage is 
 intended. iV. £. — The words in inverted commas, Shang Ti &c., are from a commentary on the 
 Shu King'. 
 
 323. In what form, pray ? 
 
 Lit, [The form employed] is what adoration-form, (pai-fa) ? 
 
 324. Why, they burn joss-stick, and paper-money, light candles, present offerings, knock the 
 head on the ground, and so forth. 
 
 Obs. 1 . Why ; fit. adore, the adoring, in that case (chiu,) is &c. ; there is no particle exactly indicating the 
 idiom by which I have translated the reply, but there is a pause before cliiu, which is here resump- 
 tive. 2. joss-stick, lit., incense ; paper-money, 'hiia chih, they consume paper, viz. the gilt and 
 silvered paper tendered to the gods, and the shades of the dead. 3. oflfeiings; shang indicates the 
 inferior position of the votary to the object of his worship ; hung is properly to place or lay ; here, 
 on the altar. The offerings are generally articles of food. 4. and so forth ; lit., these so many 
 kinds of things. 
 
 325. Oh ! that's all ? Well there is another thing you told me one day ; you said the most honorable 
 of spirits was Shang Ti. Does not this make Shang Ti the same as T'ien ? 
 
 Obs. 1. oh that's all ? ftV., only thus much noticeable or curious.' [dnang-chiu.) 
 
 2. the same as; lit., this is it not Shang Ti with {'hai) T'ien one fashion's tao-li; is not the 
 philosophy, theory, of the one the same as that of the other ? 
 
 326. To be sure ; they both mean the same thing. There is only a certain difference in the 
 designations, but all things considered there is no doubt that the two are one aud the same 
 spirit [skill.) 
 
 Obs. 1. To be sure, lit., can it not be .'' 2. There is only ; lit,, it is not more than that the names are 
 not the same somewhat. 3. all things considered ; saan ch-i hi, a calculation being made, a reckon- 
 ing gone through, in fact (pen,) they are one shin without doubt. Compare the lai with its use in 
 333, obs. 2. 
 
 327. Your statement of the case appears to me perfectly satisfactory ; but then, sir, you have been 
 so many years amongst us that you are quite at home in our views of the matter, and perhaps 
 without being aware of it, your vote is not thoroughly independent. Eh ? Now, suppose a 
 gentleman newly come were to ask, when he saw us all going to church on a Sunday, what 
 we were going there for, how should you reply to him ? 
 
 Obs. 1. you seem, &c.; &, according to (chti, or laying hold of) teacher's (= your) thus speaking: — the 
 construction of chU before the object resembles that of ;)a, = your statement I regard it {ch'iuo-cho. 
 Bee 163, ubs. 3; 246, obs. 6; 279, obs. 2;) as very correct, {'hin shih.) 2. ni-na, (see 124, obs, 1 ;) 
 you these some years, in with-us one spot, [tsai ico-min i k'uai-'rh.) 3. quite at home, pan-'huan- 
 shu-liao, well used to ; p'an-huan, ia K'ang Hsi 's Lexicon, is the appearance of advancing with pains ; 
 
 (38)
 
 T'lEN' HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 328-338. 
 
 shu, mature ; p'an-'huan, may be also used witlioat shu to denote experience acquired by long residence 
 or conversance. 4. pcrliajjs; pao-pu-tin(j, i:(>m\yMe 125, obs. ti; securing^ you cannot assure, — that 
 in your talk not-knovv - - not pcicciv — irig [li,) = without beinff aware of it - - . 5. vote - - 
 indeppi'dcnt; lit. drawn a lit lie {lai tien-nrh,) you come forward and unite or afjree : ijinri (fica 2!jS,oOs. 5.) 
 6. Eh'? chc-mo-cho pn, thus, eh? 7. suppose; pi faiuj, for coiuparisoii's salce suppose that 
 
 there ^' as one (i wei, see -280, ohs. 2,) new come [gentleman or teacher.] 8. Sunday ; li pai nu, i 
 t'ien, tlat, = the, day of ceremonial adoration. 9. were to ask ; Va precedes yao ; were he to 
 
 ask teacher, =you, sayinjf. We, = they, go there to do what? 10. how should you reply; lit., 
 [you] ought (kai,) would have to, how answer.' 
 
 328. I should say, They ^o there to worship; the expression pai-sMn might be used equally well 
 in .speaking of the worship of one shin, or of all the sli£ii. 
 
 Obs, 1. I should say, wo-shuo, I say; the last clause of the preceding sentence authorises our inflection 
 of the verb. 2. Their thither going' is to worship ; lit., to worship or to do honor to .s/d'/i. To 
 translate tliis, to worship (iod, or a god, is to beg the question on one side or the otiier. I believe 
 to worship, without any object expressed, is the fairest equivalent ot the Chinese phrase. If the 
 specilieatiou of the object be insisted on, looking to the delinition given in the remaining clauses, 
 1 should incline to write, worship their god. 4. equally well ; lit., this phrase, ^^ui-iZ/c'/i, worship- 
 ping one shen, worshipping all the shcn, both {tou,) it may say, or mean, {shuo-te.) 
 
 329. And if he were to ask in reply what shcn is it that they worship ? 
 
 Lit. He if again (tsai,') ask, the worshipped [one] is what sMn'i 
 
 330. Then I should say Shang Ti. 
 
 Lit. In that case (na,) then {c/iiu,) or accordingly, [I should] say, the worshipped [one,J = the one they 
 worship, is, &c. 
 
 331. Why do you not worship Shang Ti, sir? 
 
 332. According to our Chinese view of right and wrong, I am not worthy to worsliip Shang Ti. 
 
 Obs. I. view of right, &c. ; knei-chii, rule, normal practice. 2. not worthy, pup'ei, not a mate, of 
 equal grade, of grade sufficient. 
 
 333. How so? 
 
 334. It is written in our classics, "the son of heaven alone sacrifices to Shang Ti," and the 
 emperor accordingly does sacrifice to Shang Ti once a year, at the Round Hill in the Court 
 sacred to Heaven, outside the South Gate; or if any thing prevents his appearance in person, 
 he sends a prince of the blood to perform the sacrifice in his stead. This excepted, there is 
 no rite of worship performed to Shang Ti. 
 
 Obs. 1. in our classics, shu shang, books upon, most commonly signifying, in the classical books. The 
 passage belongs to the Li Chi (Le Ke,) Classic of Rites or Ceremonies. 2. once a year &c. ; lit., 
 therefore the Emperor every year one time goes to (tao,) the Cheng-yang (True South) Gate outside, 
 — the T'ien T'au within, — Round Hill, ('htiim ch'iu,) there himself adores {ch'in pai,) Shan? Ti. 
 
 3. prince of the blood is a strict translation of ch'in-wang, but this is in fact the highest order of the 
 imperial nobility, which, subdivisions iucluded, counts 18 grades. The national nobility, in 5 grades, 
 is an entirely distinct institution. 4. in his stead, tai pai, vicariously to sacrifice. 5, this ex- 
 cepted, ch'u tz'H chih ivai, beyond this which is excluded, there is no worshipping Shang Ti 's rite, 
 (ft;) no formal, or legally recognised ceremony. 
 
 335. Well then who is habitually worshipped by the people in China? 
 
 Obs. what else; lit. [by] China (the middle kingdom'j's people the commonly worship - ped (/;',) also, (^u,) 
 or, otherwise, is what or who (jrAe't -mo ni) 't understand shin or some other noun after ti. 
 
 336. The \_sMn'] worshipped by the common people are not the same in every place ; in this place 
 they hold such a one most in esteem, in that place such another. The northerns, for instance, 
 mostly worship Kuan Ti, the southerns Kuaii-yin. Each has a high day on which oft'erings 
 are presented and joss-stick burned to it. In common conversation, anything that concerns 
 Shang Ti is most frequently predicated of T'ien ; T'ien [wills or does] so and so, or so and so. 
 
 Obs. 1. In the second clause the subject changes ; yu, there are, ti who, in this place esteem this one, &c. 
 2. for instance, 'hao hsiang, well resembling, just as; it may in some cases be used more hypotheti- 
 cally, = supposing that. 3. most frequeutly ; to at the end of these two clauses ; (see 260, obs. 1.) 
 
 4. Kuau Ti, the Mars of China; Kuan-yin, the goddess of mercy; she ' hears prayers.' 5. high- 
 day ; lit., each has a sacrificing and incense-burning day. 6. In common conversation ; lit., if it be 
 that in common talk there be allusion to, or mention made of, [ti ch'i.) Shang Ti 's matters; — lai, at 
 the close, auxiliary of ti ch'i, between which and lai intervenes the object of the verb, as in 237, obs. 3. 
 
 7. prevailing form ; to at the close as in o6s. 3 ; lit., then is it {chiu shih,) heaven this way, 
 heaven that way — 's [fashion, understood after ti\ most, to, = more than any other. 
 
 337. You say T'ien is none other than Shang Ti ; are both of them to be regarded as slun? 
 
 Obs. 1, both-regarded ; lit, T'ien with ('/««',) Shang Ti all, = both, {tou,) do you reckon to be sheti ? 
 
 338. Whether sMn or not, we always hold them to be such. The word shcn, however, comprises 
 s/ii'M of various degrees of rank and differences of jurisdiction. ShCn are spoken of as great 
 or insignificant, good or evil, or as of different descriptions. Kuan Ti, for instance, and 
 Kuaii-yin have each a sphere with which the other has no concern ; that is to say they are not 
 shcn of the same description. In respect of degree, T'ien, of course, is greater than any. 
 As to goodness or badness, Kuan-yin is a good shea, the Wu T'ung, to whom the people of 
 Chiang Nan (Keang Nan) sacrifice, are bail shin. The word shin in fact is very coiripreiien- 
 sive. It includes every shin, Shang Ti and every one somewhat less than Shang Ti ; but he 
 
 (39)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 339-341. 
 
 is only one ; tiie others, if reckoned up one by one, amount to thousands and tens of thou- 
 sands and more. 
 
 Obs. 1 . whether, wu lun, without discussing. 2. always hold ; tsunn, in all cases, i-wei, regard as : — 
 wei is to make, i maiks the object expressed or understood; i t'a wei shen. 3. however; taii-chi, 
 but, this shtn character within, then (^chhi,') there are, = the character comprises — : cliiu confirms 
 the force of tan ch'i. 4. various degrees, &c. ; lit., high low not assorted, ( pu-tinrj,) = all sorts; 
 duties of position (««(^<'n,) = jurisdiction, or vocation — 's difference, {fin-pkh.) b. The shiti 
 
 are spoken of, &c. ; lit., in fact, (yiian,) it is that there are great, there are small, there are good, 
 there are evil ; also (yeh,) these are not of (ti) the same description' — s [chili,) ways of speaking 
 {shuo .) understand shv.n after ta, hsiao, chcnr/, and hsieh, and after ti, which, as the above are all 
 adjectives, may be considered as affecting ;v(i t'ung Ui only ; the cltili (see 257, vbs. 5,) then makes all 
 the foregoing clauses dependent on shvo ; yu ta shin ckih shuo, t/u lisiao shin chih shuo, &c. (J. for 
 instance, shih-'hu for szu 'huj ; shih, to resemble, 'hu, an interjection ; compare our, Fancy ! or the 
 French fiyiirez-vous, or, more nearly, vous eoncevez. 7. department ; ko pu hsiany shii, each has 
 that which belongs to it (shit.) without mutual relation (pu hsiang : see 310, obs. 3.) 8. that is say; 
 chill, accordingly, shih, are, not of the same lei, class or description. 9. In respect of; lit., if it be 
 asked {;/ao win,) wliidi great .nnd which small. 10. of course; {tzujan, see 1 lo, obs. 5 ;) nf course, 
 
 or absolutely, it is a fact that (shih,) T'ien, by the side of (pi,) any, is altogether (tvu,) great, = greater 
 than all. II. as to goodness, &c. ; lit. if distinction be made between (j/aojen,) the /laic/*, those who 
 
 have deflected or diverged from what is ching, and the ching, u|)right or straight. 12. The Wu 
 
 T'ung are the representatives of a legion of spirits who appeared in a dream to the founder of the 
 MinK Dynasty, declaring themselves to be the souls of those who had died in battle for him, and 
 praying to be canonised. Their number was so large, and the uncertainty about their names such, 
 that he limited the quota to be adored to Five (wu,) and to these he sanctioned the erection of small 
 altars, at which the people were authorised to burn joss-stick to the Wu T'ung, the Five T'ung, or 
 spirits adored in common, or in a general way, (t'ung); that is without any forms special to any one 
 of the whole set. In what manner they lell oti' is not stated. They are now worshipped only by 
 women and children, or by bad characters. The change of dynasty is one reason assigned for the dis- 
 credit attaching to these spiritual allies of the Ming. 13. comprehensive, k'uan, wide, extensive, 
 hence liberal ; lit.. This character (shin), in fact (yiian,) is very wide, joining [lien) Shang Ti with 
 ('hai) other small, = small - er, somewhat, all it collects (pao,) inside : — lien - - '/lai - - , both, and; so 
 too, lien - - tai: — pao, to wrap up, make a bundle of. 14. only one; but it is the fact that, as to 
 Shang Ti, there is only one place, i wei = one person (see 280, obs. 2 ;) that is to say the t<>rm is not 
 a collective. 15. one by one ; other shin, each-person-each-person-wise, one by one, even are not 
 only making thousands making myriads, = exceed even a myriad in number. 
 
 339. Well, now, tell me farther when you describe shin as chcng, (good,) or hsiek, (bad,) what 
 distinction do you make between them ? 
 
 Obs. 1 . tell me farther is meant to do justice to the ^/7^, also, additionally, in the last clause, 2. describes, 
 lit., [when you] say shin lei, a class or description of spirits is, <S:c. ; = when you use the expression ; 
 good description or bad description, also what difference ? 
 
 340. The shi'n that liave been raised to that dignity by a retrospective patent of the emperor are 
 of course cheng shm ; had they not advantaged the state, the patent would never have been 
 conferred on them. Most of these have been in the first instance sacrificed to by the people 
 of particular localities on their own account, and have in course of time been honored with 
 canonisation in due form. Those denominated hsieh shi'n are much the same as yao, imps 
 or devils. Tliey may do one a direct injury, or they may serve one in order to injure another 
 person, but I do not think they ever serve a man out and out. They do not get the people 
 of the whole empire to honor them, but merely in particular localities, the inhabitants of which 
 sacrifice to them in fear of the evil they may bring on them if they do not. 
 
 Obs. 1. retrospective patent; lit., the shin whom the Emperor ('huang shang,') has feng-tseng ; fing, is to 
 confer title or office on ; tsing means the same, but only in the case of the dead; for their own merits 
 when living, or for those of their descendants. 2. would never, die.; ht , were it not [that he 
 had been a] to the state of advantage — 's [person,] why (na-urh,) wish, would, (tin, = why should 
 [the Emperor] have) conferred it.' 3. Most of these; lit., these some all, or in general, (tou,) are 
 (shih,) many = most (to. as before ;) are most of them — circumstanced as stated from yin-wei to ti, 
 which particle collects all the intervening statement into an attiibutive of shin understood ; — these 
 some all are [as follows, viz,] - - because at first individual place's people privately (szu-hsia-li,) had 
 begun to lift them up, (hsing-ch'i-lai,) had commenced to worship, and) sacrificed to them, subse- 
 quently they received, = were honored with, statute conferring title — 's [shen,'\ mostly. 4. shou- 
 liao fing-t'ien; shou is often the inde.\ of the passive; (see 298, 3;) t'ien is a canon, a statute 
 law, &c. 5. Those denominated, &c. ; lit., hsieh shin, this denomination (ming mu,) in all certainty 
 is near to [those] of the yao class. 6. out and out, lit., I fear there are not any who are thoroughly 
 (chin shih,) helping man — 's [shin\\ I fear = I do not think, (see 29 obs. 3.): thoroughly help with 
 helping intention alone. 7. do not get; they are not able that the empire should universally adore 
 them ; they are only able each to usurp (pa,) a place. 8. That place's people, if they sacrifice 
 not to them, then fear they will seod down calamity, (chiang wo,) upon them, 
 
 341. And cilia shin (false or spurious shen) ? 
 
 Obs. 1. This expression which, as the answer 342 shews, is not Chinese, was purposely brought 
 foruaid, because hsieh shin has been at times rendered 'false gods'; a term by which we understand 
 any god hut the true (Sod. Without a more definite idea of the true, the Chinese can hardly have 
 a term which will correctly describe the false; still after much cross-examination I incline to think, 
 that, although hsieh is without doubt used principally in indication of the short-coming, omission or 
 commission, of the sliin, it does in some cases signify that a /isieh shin is not bond fide a shin. There 
 is a distinction between the ching shin-ti ta tao„ the major or important system of rightly doing and 
 duly entitled shin, and hsieh shin-li hsiao tao, the miugr or unimportant system of their opposites. 
 
 (40)
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c,, 342-351, 
 
 S42. Tliere is no such expression in Cliinese. If it were emi)loyed, it could only refer to some 
 one personating a shin, or sometiiing of tliat sort: but you would hardly hear it used. 
 
 Obs. 1. no siioh expression; lit., in China tliere is not tliis speecli-fuini, if [any one were] indeed to say 
 chia sht'n, fictitious s/un, — 2. it ciniUl only leler; lit., extlniled it conld not be {i:k-ufti,see. 7b;) 
 = it could lie nolhing- else than, that tliei-e is (.slii/i,) a man simulating.', disguised as {t-liuaiirj-li, — a 
 shell, understood;)— S. or something'; tsc"''-MO ho i-szu, such a nieaninjj (sec !)7, obs. 4.;) it 
 here depends on the ch'v fii ; cxidudc [cti'u) s<inie such meaning and there is none (/<■>;) there is none 
 but, &c. 4. but — hardly, — &e, ; lit., still (y«/i) not is it uiucli said. 
 
 343. Well then are the hsieh-shhi kuei ? 
 
 Obs. 1. We usually render hiti devil, a version not borne out bv 344. In certain cases it does mean 
 spectre ; and mo-kuci is a conunou term for ghost or goblin ; but fiend or devil is rather yrto ; (see S.'JG.) 
 
 344. No, not huei. They are called hs'ieh, sim])ly because their conduct has not been ch'ng (cor- 
 rect.) Kuei is the human being when he has ceased to breathe. 
 
 Obs. I. simply because; fsee 290, oi«. 2;) lit., only because their conduct, ways and doings (Jisiri'j-wei.) 
 are not chenrj, (3;W, obs. 1 I,) therefore [does one] style them, name them as being, hsieli s/iat. 
 The words s/iih and k'o might both be omitted after c/i'e.ii;i I'a. 2. the human being; lit., tiuci is 
 
 jtn (man ;) when his (Jin\,) breath has been cut, his breathing terminated, [luan-liuu cli'i,) then one 
 styles liim huei. It never means a corpse; it is the spirit absent from the body, and not deitied, 
 as it may or may not eventually be, 
 
 345. And is kuei, in the Category of kuei and shi'n of which we read, to be taken in this way? 
 
 Obs 1. of which we read; lit., [of the] in-books (s/j«-5?/a«i7,) mentioned, or spoken of, l-iiei-n/icn — 's (i/ii/i.) 
 Category, also is this the doctrine, or principle, eli ? — 'i'he sentence may be translated in various ways 
 without any alteration of the meaning. 1 have purposidy omitted construing tao-li; (see 308 and 
 321.) It might be fairly rendered 'proper sense,' but it signifies ralher the set or system of riglit- 
 ful notions, in accordance with which the one huei might mean the other huei. 3. the Category; 
 in Chinese lexicons, encyclopsedias, &c, where the ariangenieut of tlie character is not according to 
 its radical or tone, words and ideas are often classed iu categories, or grand divisions devoted 
 g;enerally to particular subjects. See the I.ntroduction, 
 
 846, No, [That is a classification having reference to the Yin and Yang system.] T\ie sh'nnrct/anff, 
 (of light,) the kuei are yi7i, (of dariiness,) It does not refer to their qualities good or evil. 
 
 Obs, J. no; pu jun, not so. 2, \u\i\evstanA htci-s/iOi-c/iih ki before i/aiir/ ; in the category, &c, 
 
 3. not refer; their position iu the category or cl.issificatiou has no counection with (pu huan,) 
 their virtue or vice. 
 
 347. I asked a teacher to-day if it was proper to say, J'n tuei '■hao tai, (there are good men ami 
 bad men,) and he said it was, I tlieti asked him if I could say, sJt'n wei '■/lao tai, (there are 
 good shin and bad sHm,) and he said it would be quite right if I were to substitute ch'ng for 
 ^hao and hsieli for tai. Lastly, I asked him how it would do to say, tHen wei ^hao tai, and lie 
 said that such an expression was not admissible at all ; how could t-ien in any respect be 
 otherwise than good? 
 
 Obs. 1. proper to say ; fl/., wei Jen '■hao tcil — 's this sentence us-able (s/;?/;-;c) use-not-able, (^iVn'A-;)?/-/!;).'' 
 2. said it was ; lit., he said, k'o-i, can. 3. I then asked ; i/u, in the second place. 4. substi- 
 
 tute ; he said hcci ch'enrj, with a cb.mge say ivei shin hsieh i-henrj; the kai = the Greek fiiri. 
 5. would be all right; then (ts'ai,) it may be said; (see 301, o6s. 3.) C, lasllv, 7iio-'hou-urh, 
 the end-after, the very last; 1 construe it lastly, because of the interveuing- ?/i<. 7. iiot admissible; 
 he said never {tsuvg pu, see 27, obs. 3,) can one such a fashion speak. b. in any respsct ; lit., [as 
 toj t'ien, where is there a not good place ? 
 
 348. That was perfectly correct. 
 
 349. Then there was another teacher, I forget his name, who wrote down the expression shai t'ien 
 for me, but this has since been pronounced incorrect by a third whom I have known these 
 many years. Which opinion am I to follow ? 
 
 Obs. 1, Then there was, &c.; W., still, also {'han,) was there (y?/,) not-remcmber-can [I] it was what one 
 (nai wei,) taking (/'«,) shcn t'ien two characters for me wrote [them] — 's after (chi/t 'hou.) there was 
 [an] I-many-ycars-have-known — 's [one] objected to (po,) or contradicted him, [the first teacher, as] 
 Dot right. The Chinese punctuation embairasses us, as onr idiom certainly demands a pause before, 
 and not after, the 'hou marking the change of time. 2. wrote down; hsieh ch'u lui, is not wrote 
 out; the ch'u ltd are only auxiliaries of the verb hsich, 3, which -- follow V /i^, cause, or com- 
 mand, me to believe, or trust, w hich end or Lead ? 
 
 350. In the phrase skin t'ien pao yu, the words shhi t'ien signify both the sk'n and tHev : all 
 the shin are included. Tlie word shm is not meant to be the adjective of i'/e/i. I think 
 you did not exactly catch what was said to you on the day you refer to. 
 
 Obs. 1. adjective; lit., that character shin is in no wise (tsting jiu shih,) of an attendiug-on-the-character 
 fieu'-'s meaning. 2. The Chinese, if pressed on the subject, call a substantive shih-tzu, a solid or 
 true character, and all beside, verbs ('hno-tzS, living woids,j not excepted, hsii tzu, empty <ir un- 
 real characters; hut p'ei-c' hen meaning attendant on, playing second to, may 1 think be here rendered 
 adjective. 3. I think, &c.; lit . my pupil that day ! think heard confusedly or inaccurately; my 
 puii'l, tung-chia, the east of the house, opposed to hsi jiin, tlie guest from the west, a classical 
 synonym of hsien-sheng, the teacher; te«;/-c^Jfl!, though the employer, can hardlv be styled master, 
 of the teacher; he c//'i«^, solicits, the teacher's services. A. \a&cc\iva.ie\y, 'huany-'hu, ahofang-fu, 
 of seeing or hearing inexactly. 
 
 351. Is Buddha (Fo,) a shen, or what is he? 
 (41) L
 
 T'lEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 352-8C0. 
 
 352. Tliat is a question beloneiiig to a spparafe pliilosopliy. Fo is a slim vvorslii]ipcd by foreign 
 nations, but, aitlnnioii a .«//a/, ho is not includid in the ninnber of our (Cliincse) shin. Fo, 
 the shiln and the A.s/cn, (fiiiries,) are eacii indepinuient of the otlier; Fo and tiie hsien are of 
 equal ranlc with the shm, Fo was a man who left his home to enter the priest-hood, 
 and subsequently became a sMn, (or was deified.) 
 
 Obs. 1, separate pliilosopliy; ?!<., that is a soparatc iloctiinc, or teaching — 's [matter]. 2. worshipped, 
 see 340, ohs.S; we rai^llt render it, is a {,'0(1 of another nation: mark lino lai, auxiliaries oi luing 
 to raise, bnt /ni significant of the fact that the worship has been hnnighl here. 3. not indiideil; 
 Hi., also (yeh after sui, see '/luaii, 100.) does he not come into {livei, see 'J64, oOs. 4) our plurality of 
 i/«'n within ; the last word, within, translates /.««! and /i <'o;<. Compare \ 90, obs. 11. 4. Fo, the 
 s/itn, &c. ; it is not necessary to translate i/u, there is, or are, — each not niutnally belon<;iii<(, 
 [hxianij-shu,) = independent. 5. equal rank ; lit., Fo [and the] lisicn with the shtn are one fashion 
 
 great. 6. enter the priest-hood ; c/Zu chui,\o^o forth from home, is technically used of those 
 Avho, tso, act the Budhist priest, in China styled 'ho sharig. 7. subsequently or finally {mo-'Iwu-itrh,) 
 
 then was made (ch'tng-te,) or became, a sken. 
 
 S5S. Oh ! that was it, was it? But have all the sh<'n and the hsien been human in the first instance ? 
 
 Obs, 1. oil -- was it.' chc-mo-cho mo, one of those expletive phrases which will vary in translation 
 according to the usage of the speaker. 2. first instance ; lit., all whatever ij'an yu,) sJdn and 
 hsien — 's [beings] at the beginnning {ch'i tou-urh,) all were men, eh .'' 
 
 S54. The hsien I suspect have all been human ; the shhi are not all of one stock ; some have been 
 men, some the spirits of dead men, and of some the history cannot be ascertained. 
 
 Obs. 1. I suspect {chihp'a, see 29, obs. .'3; 107.) 2. not of one stock, {pu ttnff, sec 338 obs. 4.) ; the 
 words im ihicj are here translated by 'not of one', not by 'stock', which is merely supplied as the 
 most apt word in relation to the sense. Sec obsA . 3. history; I't., there are (ji!/,) that cannot 
 
 he (wii li'o,) ascertained; c/i'a, to enquire into; k'ao to collate evidence. 4. In construction it is 
 best to understand s/i('u niter pu tniij, and to regard this as an adjective, say dissimilar, or, hetero- 
 geneous; the ti aftects the three preceding clauses beginning with ;/)/, which, repeated as here, has the 
 partitive sense conveyed by our repetition of some; the three clauses quality the /?;( Ztn^ adverb- 
 ially. Construe thus: — These, ^ the, «A«b are, some as-man, some as-gbost, some as-uudiscover- 
 able, dissimilar [s/ioi.] 
 
 355. Well, after all this talking, who created the world ? 
 
 Obs. 1. after all, &c; lit., [having] discussed to and discussed fro, to come to the bottom, this, = the 
 creating all things [personage] is who ? 2. lai — ch'ii, = to and fro, on and off, back and forward 
 S. too ti, (see 306, obs. 4.) there is a certain objectiveness in the phrase; q.d. Well, but— 
 or, well, now. 4. created, tsao 'hua (see 242, obs. 1 ;) the world, wan wu, the myriad things. 
 
 356. T'ien and none but T'ien. ^ 
 
 Lit. There is no passing [the fact that it] is T'ien. 
 
 357. Why not say sMn created the world ? 
 
 358. There is no such expression. T'ien is a unit; of a greatness beyond compare; sh'n is the 
 _geiieric denomination of an untold numbe^rjjhe, j;rades within which it does not distinguish. 
 "TTie ChineseuTca Is, tliat that the itieJi have all separate business to attend to; no one ever 
 
 heard of their having power to create. 
 
 Obs. 1. no such ; the yuan-pen merely intensifies the affirmation ; so does pen in the sueceeding clause, 
 (see "221 ; 3ii6.) 2. unit; (see 280, obs. 2 ; 3'J7, obs. 7.) 3. beyond compare; understand shen. 
 after ii; I'icn is a {i wei,) of gieatness without parallel — 's [shen.] The ch'i converts ia, great, iuto 
 great-ness which qualifies the ivu-pi; in respect of great-ness in-comparable. The four words make 
 an attributive as complete as the word peerless; but I do not think the eh'i atTects more than ta. 
 4. Chinese idea; lit., according to the Middle Kingdom's language, or, the Chinese say, — the 
 chunr/ shen, the shen in plurality, individually have those-which-they-attend to — 's affairs. 5. no 
 one ever; lit., [one] has not heard it said that they have the able-to-create-any-thiug — 's faculty; 
 pen-shih, generally, ability; also particular talent or faculty. 
 
 359. How so ? T'ien is a shm is it not ? How do you make out that shfn cannot create ? 
 
 Obs. 1. How so, cht-tno-shiio, this do you say ? or, what do you say ? 2. How do you make out; ya- 
 shuo, lit., and do you still say ; (j/u, see 272, obs, 5.) 
 
 360. My saying that the word sMn is properly a generic term by no means impugns the omnipo- 
 tence of T 'ien. As I stated before (in .338,) every shm has a sjihere of official duty ; but T'ien 
 is chief of the sh<n and there are several matters of importance to the administration of which 
 T'ien is alone competent. In adverting to the agent in one or other of these, j'ou would 
 certainly say T'ien; you would never say sldn. If you did, you would leave it in doubt 
 whether the act were the act of the s/^'k collectively, or of an individual shin., and in that 
 case of, which. It is T'ien that gives life, T'ien that gives growth; there you have a proposi- 
 tion of absolute truth, which no one can dispute if he would. 
 
 Obs. 1. My saying ; after tsung-ming-urh understand na i chit 'hua, that, or the, sentence, sc. on the generali- 
 ty of shen, uttered by me. 2. impugn; lit., utterly not interferes with, ("Oai-cho,') T'icn's omnipo- 
 tence-theory. 3. omnipotence, the theory, doctrine, argument thereof; lit., of T'ien that, {na-ho = 
 the,) nothing-thal-it-caniiot — 's theory; (tao-b, see 300, obs. 6.) 4. stated before; in 33S ; 
 
 i .•ihiaii/, compare i cli'icn. 247, obs. C; before that which [1] said — 's [sentence was] each shiji is each 
 possessing a-tliat-whicli-it-has-<harge-of {szii,)—'s ofiicial position (icei-fen.) 5. alone competent, 
 &c. ; lit., there are a good number of great things, only is it T'ien, then is there this capacity {neng- 
 l.a. ;) =s which T'ieu alone is capable of managing. 6. never say ; ^(^, in that case («fl /to,) in pcrfeet 
 
 ( 42 )
 
 TIEN, HEAVEN, THE HEAVENS, &c., 360-3G2. 
 
 certainty (/ ihirj^ it is to-say-<'(Vw, — ten thousand timos-not-fo-say shai, — 's li, right, or principle to be 
 conCornicd to. 7. leave it in donbt, pao-jm-clw, securiii>,r you leave it insecure; see vlitt lO'i; 
 also 141. ?. absolute, see tzii Jan, (1 1 j, o//.s. 5,) and undeisland tao It, in the sense of proposition, 
 
 or '/lua, lanfjuaf^e, as the substuniive on wliiih the two elauses endin;; in ti depend. 9. if ho 
 
 would; these words are introduced to do justice to too, a powerful disjunctive; r/.rl. That is an 
 absolute or incontrovertible piece of tao-li ; did a man wish to gainsay it, still (I'lo,) it is lao-li without 
 any ciintro»ertible part, or, which there is not a {Icn, man who) cau controvert. The latter versiuu 
 is not to be preferred ; it is best to regard ho as rcduudaut. 
 
 361. In tlic sliops liere tliey liave ii liiibit of making sacrificial offerings before tlie cliaracter shcn 
 written large. What sli'ii docs that represent ? 
 
 Obs. 1. shops here; chi-urh, this place here. 2. habit of oflfcrinj;; lit, constantly is there oflVrinj 
 before a lari;e sMn character — 's [fact, or circumstance.] 3. represent; lit., that is a what shcn; a, 
 wei, for j wci; (see 358, obs. 2, 3.) 
 
 362. That is a southern custom ; the idea is, [;is the classics say,] to sacrifice to the shtn, as if the 
 shhi were jiresent. The cliaracter stands for whatever shhi the worshipi)er fancies. I rather 
 think, however, that the character so displayed does not represent 'j''ien, or Fo, or any 
 of tiie great shcn of that sort. In most cases a fo'ai sh'n., spirit of wealth, is the only one 
 meant. There are as many as five or six denominations of these. 
 
 Obs. 1. sacrifice to the shcn, &c., a quotation from the Lun Vii ; c/;z is specilically applied fo certain 
 acts of sacrifice, but is also used generally, as here. 2. the idea ; lit , it is a chi nhinjii slun tsar — 's 
 idea, or intention. 3. worshipper fancies ; lit., [the worshipper] heart within thinks of (hsiang- 
 
 clto,) what, [it, the character,] accordingly (chin,) represents what .«//<;« ; the shih-mo, shi/i-mo is much 
 as ijuale - - tale; quod credit - • id /tabet. 4. rather think ; lit., but [as regards] this sort, in all liUe- 
 lihood (ta liiii.) there is not indeed {yeh me yu^ a representing T'ieu, representing Fo, — these great 
 shhi, — 's [custom] :- or, of this sort there are probably no representing T'ien, or Fo, &c — 's shin. 
 The words la iai, may be rendered, geniTally speaking, or, on the whole, probably ; the i/e/i, also, indeed, 
 followed by tne, = not either, supports the objection of tan ch'i, (see 338, obs. 3.) which is at the 
 same time modified by ta kai; q.d. but it is never, - - at least I think not, &c. 5. in most cases; 
 lit., [the «//<i« intended are] no other than (pu kuo,) all shcn playing the part of ts'ai shin-yeli mostly. 
 This use of tow, all, and /o, the majority, which apparently contradict one another, is very common 
 to express, almost all; the pu kuo is translated by the only one meant. G. understand shi'n 
 after die. yamj-urh, and after ilieii-yeh-ti; in many cases where tso is prefixed to a noun followed by ti, 
 as here, it is not necessary to translate the combination otherwise than by the noun; tso huan ti, 
 the acting-as-officer — s [persons,] = officers; here the acting-as-spirit-of-wealth — 's [spirit,] the spirit 
 of wealth. 7. as many as; lit., [ot] these wealth spirits there actually (yiian,) are live or six names 
 The 1/iian does not strengthen the affirmation so much as our word actually would. 
 
 END OF THE CATEGORY OF T'lEN, 
 
 (43)
 
 END OF PART I. 
 
 HSIN CHING LU.
 
 PART II. 
 
 HSIN CHING LU. 
 
 FIRST CHAPTER 
 
 SHENG YU KUANG HStlN; 
 
 AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACRED EDICT 
 
 k'ang hsl
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE SUEXG YU KUANG T/SUjV ; OR, AMPLIFICATION 
 
 OF THE SACRED EDICT. 
 
 [Thu Translation of the S/u'iig Yii, or Sacrod Edict, by Dr Milne, has made almost all students of Chinese 
 acqii;uiited witli the work. 1 road the Chinese text with it some years ago, and, to the best of ray recollection, the 
 version is one of sufficient fidelity. Not liavinj; a copy at hand, I have been unable to compare my own trans- 
 lation of the (list section with that of Dr Mihio ; or I miijlit have corrected errors on my side, and, it niav be' 
 detected errors on his. For this reason, no less than for another, viz., that where two languaijcs differ in genius 
 so widely as tlie Chinese and English, two versions of a v ery d ifferent phyaioj^uoniy, may, without any great 
 i-liarj^rt; ()[', im^iiM.wtiii-^< ti» |ip i'<t;|,liliv|iiwl !,cr:-,\y^jayhi.r^ bc drawii from 0116 passflg'e, tile reader who takes tlie 
 trou de to cnmpare Dr Milne's Englisli with mine, will perhaps meet with disci-epancies, not at iirst to be satisfac- 
 torily accounti'd for. Tliere is another reason, namely, that I have caused the colloquial of the Paraphrase to be 
 jeahiiisly exauiined by competent natives of Peking, and in a few places the nieaning has been more or lc>s all'ected 
 by their modific.itions of (he idiom. 
 
 The chapter, it must be allowed, is one more likely to be of use to the Missionary, whenever circ-unistances 
 shall admit of his preaching to a Peking congregation, than to the official Student-Interpreters, for whose use, 
 as m iller simplest and readiest to hand, it was, some months ago, roughly prepared. Still it is believed that even 
 to thp latler tlie perusal of it will not be without advantage, and the rough translation and notes have accordinglv 
 been revised with care. 
 
 The history of tlie Sacred Edict is, in brief, this .- — In the year 1670, the second Emperor of the Ta Ch'ing 
 (Ta Ts'ing) Dynasty, the style of whose reign w.is K'ang Ilsi, " observing that morality bad been for some time 
 past declining daily, and that men's hearts were not as of old," published a hortatory Edict, or Decree, in IG sections 
 .if seven words. Ea(di section is a text, enjiiiiiing on the subjects of the empire, in classic f(n m of phrase, observ- 
 
 nee of some particular obligation. The subjects to which these texts point may he generally stated to lie, 
 
 1st, Tlie duty of the child to its pareuts, and of brother to brother ; especially of the younger to the elder j 
 2d, The bond of clan-ship ; 
 8d. Concord in conininnities ; 
 
 4tli, Attention to the labours of the field and the loom > 
 61 h. Economy ; 
 (ith, Literature ; 
 
 7th, Avoidance of heterodox doctrines ; 
 8lli, Observance of the laws ; 
 
 9tli, The inlluence of concession or forbearance, as prescribed by Confucian philosophy j 
 lOih, Dc'votion to one's calling; 
 
 1 Ith, Instruction and regulation of children and juniors; 
 1-Jtli, The evil of false accusaiions ; 
 lyth. The crime of concealing deserters or runawavs } 
 Htli, Regular payment of taxes; 
 
 loih, Advantages of the tithing system, as a protection against brigandage} 
 lOtb, The adjustment of fends and differences. 
 To this, in 1 72+, the fourth sou and successor of the Imperial author, whose reign was Yiin"- ClK^n", added air 
 Amplitic.ition of the Instrmtions therein coulaincd, being in fact Sixteen Lectures on the Sixteen Texts contaiueif 
 in the Edict of K'ang Hsi, slyled Sacred, as the perforuiancc of an Ancestor duly canonised. It had alreadv been 
 ordained by K'ang Ilsi himself, that his own edict, with another on the paraiiinunt importance of filial and fraternal 
 obligations, also by hiai, should be read aloud on the first and fifVeenth of each moon, bv the chief authoritv in 
 every province, prefecture, district, and half-savage jurisdiction of his dominions. The attendance at this Lecture 
 was subsequently required of the military as well, and the form is still observed; one of the sixleen homilies being 
 delivered on the appointed days to an audience of officials, gentry, literati, scholars in statu pupHlari, and the 
 corainon peo[)le. It does not appear, hoivever. that, nowadays at all events, ra luy attend who are not obliged. 
 
 The .\mplificati'in was parajilirascd in the (colloquial language of Peking, by an ex-Sall-Commissioner, named 
 Wang Yii-po, and it is the first chapter of his Paraphrase, modified as 1 have explained above, that is translated- 
 below for the benefit of students of Mandarin Chinese. The English of the first Precept, and of the cbipter of the' 
 Amplification, wliicdi is the corresponding Lecture upon it, it has been thou:;ht as well to prefix to that of the 
 Paraphrase; both are very free versions, but a more literal one of the Paraphrase is ^iven at the end of llie exphi' 
 Jiattiry notes which follow it. The Chinese text of the Paraphrase, which chiefly concerns the student of collo- 
 quial, will be found iu its place to th« left of the Chiiwse of the Cat€(jo:y oj T'ien^ 
 
 ^47>
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE SIIENG YU KUANO HSUN t 
 
 Pinx'KPT. — Cultivate filial ])iety and l)i-otlici-ly love, and all the duties of man 
 to man will he had in due esteem. 
 
 Lectuue — I'or the sixty-one years that His Majesty, our Progenitor, canonised as the Humane, sat on 
 the tlinine, their Majesties, tlie I'roj^enitors ofthe line, were his model, his august Ancestors the object ot'his 
 reverence ; never did the sentiment ol' filial piety tail in him. Willi his own hand he wrote his Kxposi- 
 tion in exteiiso of the sense of the Treatise on Dntifulness ; wherein he so fnllj' expc unded the 
 text of that classic, as to render its meaning ])lain, and its reasoning connected. In this lie had hut one 
 purpose, namely, to give order to his dominions by the inculcation of dutifulness. Hence is it that the 
 sixteen sections of his Sacred Edict connnence with one upon Filial Piety and Brotherly Obligations. 
 And we. the heritor of the vast estate, [lursuiiig with our thoughts the instructions of the Departed, 
 liave I likewise] [ilaced foremost our exposition of the sense of Uutifulness and Brotherly Obligations, in 
 this ainplification of his views on the formation of public morals, which we promulge, soldiers and people, 
 fiir 3our edification. 
 
 Dutifulness is to mankind in their proceedings, what due subordination is to heaven and earth, (nature,) 
 in the work of creation. If a man have no sense of duty to his parents, is it that the affection of the jiarenl 
 for the child is the only matter that has escaped him ? Ere yet he left the breast, when he could not feed 
 himself if hungry, nor clothe himself if cold, his parents watched his voice, observed his changes of 
 countenance ; were joyful when he smiled, were sad when he cried ; quitted liim not a half pace w hen he 
 moved ; cared not tor food or rest if he were sick ; reared him, educated him ; when he was grown 
 to manhood bestowed on him a home, devised for him a calling or profession. Mind and body were 
 alike exhausted by the multitude of their efforts to aid him. Infinite as the height of lieaven, so indeed 
 is the goodness of parents; would the son repay, were it but a ten-thousandth part of their affectionate 
 kindness, it assuredly behoves him, within, to devote to that end his whole heart, — without, to exert his 
 whole strength ; careful that he come not to harm*; sparing in his expenditure; duteously lightening 
 their labours by his diligence; rendering them all filial service and maintaining them in all comfort. Let 
 liini not gamble nor drink; let him n ;t delight in feats of daring nor in trials of strength ; let him not be 
 over fond of riches, privily to spend them on his own wife and children. Be it that for forms and 
 observances there be insufficient provision, sincerity will make it enough and to spare. 
 
 To enlarge our definition ; in the words of Tseng 'i"zu, unseemly conduct is unfilial ; want of devotion 
 in tile service of the sovereign is unfilial ; want of dignit}' in the holder of office is unfilial ; cowardice in 
 battle is unfilial. To be well-conducted, loyal, ilignhicd, and brave, is the part of a pious son. 
 
 As regards precedence among brethren, the eldest son of the father is entitled the leader of the 
 house; the elder brother is distinguished by the rest as senior of the house; and to him should 
 all questions be referred, whether affecting income or expenditure, small matters or great ; to him 
 should his juniors give place in eating and drinking; his words should they obey ; to him yield precedence 
 when they walk ; the superior place when they sit or stand with him. In all things whatsoever 
 should they show their sense of the obligation of the junior to the senior. 
 
 Where a man is tlie senior of his fellows by ten years, he should be served by them as though lie 
 were their elder brother. The senior by five years, should have precedence by a shoulder; how much 
 more is the principle imperative in the case of your actual kith and kin ! The relation between filial and 
 fraternal duty being intimate as it is, the service due to seniors being ec|ually obligatory witli that 
 due to your [elder] relatives, it follows that, if you make pious sons, you will be dutiful brothers; and 
 if pious sons and dutiful brothers, you will be obedient and virtuous people in tlie fields, loyal and valiant 
 warriors in the ranlis. 
 
 You well know, soldiers and people, that it is the duty of the son to be filial, of the younger brother 
 to be subordinate ; but our fear is that an habitual omission to discliarge these offices, unobserved by 
 yourselves, may bring you to the neglect of all the social duties.f 
 
 If you are in earnest repentant, put forth all your zeal, make every effort that it is right to make; 
 from one thought on filial and fraternal duty, advance progressively until your thoughts be all thereon; 
 make not much of empty forms, make not little of small services; buy not a reputation, traffic not for 
 applause, [by display ;] be not active at the first, to become careless in the end. Thus, in some degree, 
 will you sirengthen the principle of filial piety and brotherly obligation. The state has its penalties for 
 the neglect of either duty, but though the penalty be a provision against the overt act, it is hard for 
 the lavv to reach the offence committed in secret. The thought is altogether intolerable to us, that, 
 through impenitence, you may be lost in the by-wa3's of evil ; for this cause we reiterate our words 
 of instruction and warning, that you may one and all of you, soldiers and people, identifying yourselves 
 with our purpose, and stimulated by us to a good beginning, fulfil to the utmost your obligations as sons 
 and brethren. 
 
 Yes ! The virtues of the sages had their root in the social relations ; the morality of Y'ao and Shun 
 was not other than the practice of filial and fraternal duty. "Let men,'' says Meng Tzu, (Mencius,) 
 " render due affection to their parents, and due respect to their seniors, and the empire will have peace." 
 
 * Come to harm, — eitlier by vicious courses, or unnecessary rislvs ; in either case he impairs the effectiveness of his bodyj 
 whieli is not Iiis own, Ijut, as the Paraphrase insists, tlie trust or bequest of liis parents. Hence, a little fartlier on, the son 
 is forbidden to he aniliitious of exceilini^ in dariug or strengtli ; that is, of course, where tlie feat is performed for its own sake, 
 and not as a matter of duty. 
 
 + Tlie mi tun, five relations, tlie reciprocal obligations of parent and child, husband aud wife, ruler and servant or subject, 
 friend and friend, and brotlier aud brotiier. Literally, should cause you to place yourselves beyond the [pale of] human 
 relations. 
 
 (48)
 
 OR, AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACKED EDICT. 
 
 Pabaphrask. — 1. His Majesty means to say, tliat clurin;;: tlie sixty-one years tli;it our Emperor, 
 the Sat-red Ancestor canonised as tlie lliiinatie, reigned over the ein|iire, liis Ancestors were tije 
 chief ohject of liis veneration. In composinfi^ the work he wrote, the I'araplirasc of the liook on 
 Diitifiilness, lie had but one purpose, namely, to enjoin piihlicly on every one in liie empire an 
 exact fulfilment of liis duty to his |)arents. 2. Duty to parents and seniors was, accord inirlv, 
 tile first of the sixteen texts promuljjfed by his Majesty in his Sacred Edict, and it is on your duty 
 to parents and seniors tiiat his present Majesty now addresses yon, the people, in the first of 
 those sixteen Lectures on the precepts enunciated in the Sacred Edict, which he has composed 
 with reference to the Sacred Ancestor's desire for the instruction of mankind. 
 
 3. What is duty to parents? The i)rinci|de of duteous subordination is one of the 
 greatest imjiortanee. It is a principle which neither heaven above, nor earth beneath, nor man, 
 who is between the two, can dispense with. 4. How so? Why, simjily because it is the per- 
 fection of harmonious intelligence. Observe heaven and earth, [the twin powers of creation ;] 
 how, without such intelligence, could they produce mankind, and other numerous objects of crea- 
 tion, as they do? And man, if without the quality of duteous subordination, in that lie no loiver 
 l)ossesses the intelligence necessary to the operation of these powers, how is he in eftVct tnan ? 
 
 5. Now, a word on the tender affection of ydur parents for you. At the time that any one of 
 you was a baby in arms, while you could neither feed yourself if you were liiin^rv, nor clothe 
 yourself when you were cold, your father and mother were watching your looks, and listeninu- to 
 the sound of your voice; pleased if you smiled, out of spirits if von cried; following you step 
 by step when you moved; if you were ever so little indisposed, so anxious that they could 
 neither eat nor drink; unable, until yon were recovered, to regain their peace of mind. 6. No 
 one can tell all their toil and trouble, all the shocks and alarms they endured, as tin y watched you 
 intently, through your first year of babyhood, and on through your second year of growth. Then 
 there was your nurture and education ; the procuring you a wife to bear you children when you 
 had reached man's estate; the hopes formed respecting your studies and literary reputation ; your 
 establishment in a iiome or a profession, — in which of these particulars were your parents" not 
 interested ? And will it ever be in your power to repay such goodness in full ? 
 
 7. If you do not comprehend the goodness of your parents, a single reflection on what 
 you feel towards your chililren, will enable you to comprehend it. 8. The ancient proverb 
 says well, " It is in bringing up children that one learns the goodness of one's parents." But 
 once you have so learned it, why do you not conduct yourselves duteously towards them? 
 9. For a duteous subordination to parents is nothing impracticable. One of the ancients indeed 
 slept on the ice, another cut his thigh, another [would have] buried a child, [in the service of 
 parents;] exatnples such as these we should have trouble in following; but there is no positive 
 obligation to go this length before you can be pronounced to have done your duty to your iiarents. 
 The one thing needful is to have your parents ever and always in mind. Nothiii"- more. 
 
 10. If you really desire to return their kindness, leave nothing nnattempted within the com- 
 pass of your means to serve the old couple. Stint your own diet and expenses, rather than 
 not let them have all [they can] to eat and to spend. Take any little trouble off their hands. Do 
 not gamble or drink. Have no quarrels with anyone. Keep no private hoard of wealth to be fondly 
 bestowed on your own wife and children, while your parents are neglected. Outward forms of atten- 
 tion it may not be in your power to observe ; but that is of no consequence ; all that is requisite 
 is sincerity within. 11. Your daily fare may be as coarse as you please, but if, through your instru- 
 nientality, your parents manage to swallow it in cheerfulness, you have done your duty by them. 
 12. Extending the application of the principle farther, I may observe that, in every act that 
 is at variance with the rule of right, in that it is in contempt of the person you inherit from your 
 parents, you commit a breach of duty towards them. 13. When you are engao-ed in any busi'ness 
 for the emperor, if you give less than your whole mind and energy to the work, this lack of 
 fidelity to your sovereign is the same thing as if you were wanting to your parents. It is another 
 breach of filial duty. 14. Men in office, if they govern ill, provoke the derision and abuse of the 
 people. This is in contempt of the person they inherit from their parents, and accordimrly i« 
 another breach of the same duty. 15. To act or speak unsatisfactorily before your friends, thereby 
 dishonoring your parents, is another. 16. Soldiers, if you be not eager and forward in action, 
 in that you move the people to ridicule your feebleness, and thus discredit the person you have 
 inherited from your parents, you likewise commit a breach of duty towards them. 
 
 17. Rebellious children are at the present moment very numerous in the world. At a word 
 of reproof from their parents their colour will change with anger; to an expression of abuse they 
 will rejoin ; order them one way and they go another. Some there are who will let their parents 
 starve, while their own wives and children are well fed and well clothed ; some rush headlong 
 into misfortune, and bring displeasure on their parents; others break the laws and put their parents 
 to the annoyance of having to appear before the authorities. 18. We need not say that such 
 persons are intolerable before heaven ; [there is a more immediate consequence of their impiety ;] 
 their own children follow the example they set them". Where does one ever see a good son 
 born to the undutiful man? Will not a thought on this bring you to your senses? 
 
 19. Next in importance to children's obligations to their parents, are tliose of brother to brother. 
 You and your brother are two persons doubtless; but then his flesh and bone is your flesh and 
 bone. Brothers are said for this reason to be hand and foot of the same body; whenever, there- 
 fore, you put a slight upon your brother, you put a sliylit on your parents. 20. So in the case 
 ( 49 ) N
 
 A 
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE SUENO YU KVANQ IJSUA ; 
 
 of brotliers by different mothers ; you are still blood and bone of one father ; do not argue that tiie 
 difference of inotliers makes a differenee between you. 
 
 '21. A man's most intimate relation in the work! is to his wife; but if his wife die, lie cat» 
 marry another; whereas, if his brother die, where is ho to look for another? iiethink you then, 
 ought you or ouj^ht you not to love your biolher (h'arly ? 
 
 22. Do you ask how love him dearly ? On the |)art of the younger l)rother tliere should be a 
 respectfid deference to the elder. It is his duty to give way to him in everything, whet her as 
 rcards food or raiment ; the practice of courtesies to others ; in s|)eaking, moving, sitting down, 
 orstandinu- up. 23. Amongst the ancients, if any inhabitant of the village one resided in were ten 
 years older than oneself, one treated him with the same respect as an elder brother ; if he were five 
 vears senior, one moved by his side, but in rear, never venturing to pass him; and il it behoves one 
 BO to defer to a senior even though not a relation, how much more to one's own brother .'' 
 
 'J-i. On the other hand the elder brother should shew a ti'nder affection to the younger. Be 
 the age of my younger brother what it might, I should behave to him just as if he were my child. 
 '25. If my child, for instance, misconduct liimself, 1 am seriously displeased with him, I scold him, 
 I beat him ; but by the time I am cool again, I am as fond of him as ever. '26. And a brother is 
 to be the exception to this rule; if he does wrong, I am not gently to exhort and reprove him; 
 any little short-coming on cither side must, of necessity, produce dissension or blows ! 27. You 
 and your brother, remember, are born and bred of the same parents. When you strike your 
 younger brother, it is just as if you struck yourself; and then he, with as little discrimination 
 between right and wrong as his elder, when he receives a blow from you, will raise his hand to 
 return it. fcju[)i>ose a man were, by accident, to strike liis foot with his hand, would the foot kick 
 ihe hand in return, pray ? 
 
 '28. The disagreements of brothers, at the present time, all arise eitlier out of disputes about 
 money, or from their giving ear to the talk of their wives. The chat of their wives, such as il is, 
 is imt absolutely without a tiifle of sense in it, and just for the reason that it is in so far sensible, 
 it gains imperceptibly upon the hearer. 
 
 •2i>. The elder lirotiier's wife says to him, for instance, " How lazy your younger brother is ! 
 How wasteful he is! You toil away to make a little money, and support him, while he is con- 
 demning this thing and censuring that Are we his wife and family, pray ? Do we owe him duty 
 and obedience as such ':"' 80. And then the younger brother's wife will say to him, "As to your 
 elder brother making the money, why, so do you make money. Whatever he does in the house, 
 great or small, you do the same. No hired servant is so hard worked; and his children forsooth 
 are children; they may buy this to eat and that to eat, while ours are to die, 1 siip])ose?" 
 
 SI. To talk t)f this sort, a little to day, and a little to-morrow, the elder brother, in spite of 
 himself, will pay some heed; on this follows a total estrangement of one brother from the other; 
 their mutual griefs daily accumulate, and at last they come to blows. 
 
 32. They do not feel, you see, that brothers are one man ; if they did, they would know that 
 where an elder brother is unable, more or less, to shift for himself, it amounts to an obligation on 
 the younger to support him ; that if an angry word be spoken at an odd time, it should be looked 
 o!i as no more than what might be uttered in drunkenness or in a dream; and then there would be 
 an end of ill-feeling on either side; they of all people will treat it seriously. 3:). [Take the 
 parallel case of the members of the body;] the right hand, for example, is much the more 
 capable of the two; it is that with which one writes, or counts, or takes hold of a thing; but 
 because the left is much less handy than its fellow, no one was ever known to beat the left with 
 the right. And how, u ith a relation between them as intimate as that which connects the hand 
 with the foot, should brother and brother have differences and discussions? 34. Money, recollect, 
 is a chance possession ; when what you have is gone you may get more. [Do not let women's 
 chatter about it divide you from your brother;] your wives are not, as your brother is, born of 
 the same parents as you are. What sense have they [that you should attend to their talk] ? 
 35. Your only consideration shotdd be this, that discord between brothers cannot fail to incense 
 their parents. Were you but to see your own children fighting, would you be angry or not? 
 Thus it is that between dutiful sons there is invariably a good understanding as brothers. 
 36. The ancient proverb says well, When you hunt the tiger, your best man will be your own 
 brother; in the battle, you must have father and son for your soldiers./ ."37. And again a proverb 
 v>^r» says with equal truth. It may be well to kill another; it is perdition to kill oneself./ And again, 
 When there is misunderstanding betv/een brothers, they are the sport of the looker-on. While 
 you are full of your feud about nothing, other persons will stimulate it by fetching and carrying 
 your remarks; and whether you come to blows or go to law, the utter ruin of the family is in 
 either case an invariable consequence. 38. If you are dutiful and affectionate, as people you 
 will be good subjects, as troops you will be stout fellows. 39. But now, which of you, soldiers 
 and people, knows not that it is good for sons to be dutiful, and for brothers to be at peace ? 
 Well then, knowing these things to be good, why do you not them, with all your heart and all 
 your might? 40. Let your every thought be in very deed of your parents and your brethren. 
 Do not limit yourselves to those outward unrealities which are fair to see. Neglect not as trivial 
 the minor attentions due to them. Let not the empty praise of others be your oidy object; 
 neither begin well to end badly; and you will then be truly pious sons and truly good brothers. 
 
 41. If you be disobedient as the one, or quarrelsome as the other, you must be punished 
 accordino- to the law; but were your minds left unenlightened, correction itself would be thrown 
 tway upon you. 42. Mis Majesty, unable to bear this thought, reiter.ites his exhortations to 
 you on the subject. If you will hearken to his words, and be, one and all, dutiful and brotherly, 
 
 (50)
 
 OK, AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACRED EDICT. 
 
 not only will you never, in your own career, come in contact with tlip law, hut, in succeeding 
 generations, your f^ood example will be followed by your sons and f^iandsons. 4',i. 'Jlie proverb 
 says well, 'I'iie pious son begets the pious son ; the rcbtdlious son ineeds 'lie rebellious, -li. Could 
 it indeed be that all your sons and grandsons were dutiful and brotherl/, there would be no part 
 of the empire disturbed. Practise tiien these virtues in earue>t, and i ever, never, so ill requite 
 the all-excellent purpose of the Sacred Ancestor, His Majesty the liujuane, as to regard them as 
 everyday formalitieii. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 \.—.Ol>s. I. '5is Majesty, lit., lord often tlionsand years. At levees, ftc, as thf officials prostrate tliemselveg 
 tliey cry, irau mi wan stii Yeh ! Lord of a myriad years, a myriad years ! I miipare, () Kin;,', live for ever ! 
 
 2. our emperor; the wo is used in Imperial decrees, proclaiiialions, t c, as our, = of our nation, 
 whether s|)(Mkinnf of the soverei;;n, the stiite, the arioy, &c. As the emperor, then reiL'ninfr, is immediately 
 below referred to in the third pcrsou, 1 have therefore tuUeii wo to mean of i-i, liis sulijeots, not of me, the 
 emperor. 
 
 3. Sacred Ancestor; tsii, like the Latin avus, includes the nearer as wel! as the more remote degrees 
 of ani^e.stry ; but the term is here technically employed. The present dynasi honors tliree of its members 
 as Tsii, and live as Tsiiiig. Tli,' Manolui chief Nurhochih, uho, in Kilb, cm mencd the war which ended 
 in the overthrow of the Min;,' dynasty, assumed as the style of his reign th ■ words T'ieii Ming, Heaven's 
 Decree. lie died in 16'26, and was subsequently canonised as T'ai Tsti ihe ' re ■!. Ancestor ; his successor, 
 nine years of wliose reifjn were T'ien Tsung, and remaining eight. Tsiuig Te, wis canonised alter his death 
 in IG43, as T'ai Tsiing. The first monarch who sat on the throne of Chii i then reigned as Shun Chih 
 (1644-61,) and was canonised as S'lih Tsii, Ancestor of tlie Generation, or Fan; y, a'ld his successor, after his 
 glorious reign of K'ang Hsi, (Pacification and Virtuous Eminence, I66l-I7-J2,i was canonised as Shciig Tsu, 
 the Sacred Ancestor. His four successors whose reigns were Yung Cheng, < allien Lung, Chia Ch'ing, and 
 Tao Kuang, have all been canonised as Tsuns with distinctive prefixes. (Se. ohs., 7.) 
 
 4. canonised; besides the distinctions explained in obs. 3, every emperor 1 a-signed a postluimous title, 
 chosen (nun a list of words given in the Statutes, and intended to recor 1 the acts or qualilies which 
 distinguished him. The wordjeit we are tempted to render /t««OT«e, from the : iTinity of the character to that 
 used as /r'a, /("'/JO. Our word benevolent, or philanthropic, or the substaii! vi's corresponding, might be 
 employed with perhaps greater exactness to translate it. 
 
 3. lit., our Sacred Ancestor, the ISenevolont Em|)eror, or, the Etnperor '.i nevolence. The Chinese 
 speak of what was done by him or under him as K-riini Hsi so and so. or !C- inrj Hai nien, \i\ the years 
 or time of the reign so styled. See Williams's Middle Kiaiidom, vol. 1, page 810, on the rule of names imperiaL 
 
 6. reigned over the empire; lit., sat sixty-one years [on the throne of all] iridcr heaven, = the empire. 
 
 7. his Ancestors; tsic, see ohs. 3; tsuiiy is properly the temple in which :.:e ancestors of any trib;' are 
 adored, but here used merely to pluralise tsu. This is shewn by the Muchu version of the Lecture 
 which renders Isu-tsitng by mafari, the plural or collective of mrifa, graudfath.r or ancestor. Understand 
 any word meaning object, after ttui ehing-ti ; [his] most venerated [object] was liis ancestors ; ::= that which 
 he most venerated, &c. 
 
 8. In composing, &c; lit., intiraate-self (ch'in-tz'u,) made (tso-ch'i'ng,) the classic on Dutifulness' Para- 
 phrase, this one book: — c/i'in, originally to love, hence used as se'f, near to si If, in various combinations; 
 the Classic, c/iiii/j ; the canonii:al books of the Confucian philosophy are spokiii of as chiny s/iit ; the word 
 ching is also applied to the Buddhist and Rationalist classics, and to some worrs the matter or antii|U-ty of 
 which entitles them to particular respect: the last are comparatively few.— D ill illness, hsiao, specially of 
 duty to parents, altliingk the classical treatise, Hsiao Citing, does speak also oi the duty to seniors ; — Par.i- 
 phrase, i/en-i; that ia the specific meaning (^) or spirit, widely, or ditfusely, [yen.) set forth;— this one book ; 
 pu the numeral, or classifier, of book ; not volume, which \s pen. 
 
 9. sole purpose; uni'trstand t'a-tt i-szn, his purpose, beiore toufei, not not, a strong affirmative; — his 
 purpose {i-s:il.) entirely was (shih,) the i-szu described by all the words from //"O to ti ; viz., a wanting, 
 or enjoining, (i/ao,) nU.{/j'u,) the-empire's-men-all-to-exhaust-the-dutifuluess-principle ■ - 's purpose. On tao 
 see above, page 34, ex. 306, obs G. 
 
 2. Obs. 1. The order of the English is purposely much inverted; /i7., which because of (so-i,) = wherefore 
 
 [of] the Sheng Yii's 16 columns, (t'iao, see page 23. ex. 237, obs :i.) the fon 'uost or heiid article (^f'ou i 
 chien.) accordingly [chiu,) speaks oi lisino, duty to parents, and ti, duty to brethren. The chicn Is the ordinary 
 numeral, or classifier, of things, matters, affairs. The c/«m supports io-i. The /(-> before Asioo Is redundant. 
 
 2. promulged, &.c; the worA^ slieng yii by their place in the (Column, three ali ive all others show that the 
 deceased sovereign of the reigning dynasty Is referred to. The rule for the plaring of characters in official 
 writin"' is given in the K'o Ch'ang T'iao-li, Laws of the Literary Examinations. 
 
 3. At the present the lord of ten thousand years sitting, or having sat on, the ilirone, Qso-liao wei.) = the 
 present emperor, bethinking him of {lisiang-cho,) the Sacred Ancestor's to instruct men — 's intention. 
 Composed {tso cli'u - - - lai,) — all that intervenes between ch'it and lai, viz. sixteen sections (p'ien, lit., 
 leaves,) of the Sacred Edict's Amplification (kuanrj hsiin,lit., wide, or in extenso explanation, or Instruction.) 
 
 4. now addresses, &c., foremost [hsien, sc. before all other matters,) taiiiiig this dnty-to-parents-and- 
 senlor — 's principle {tao-li, see 1, obs. 9,) tells it [cliiang-chiu,] to you all the people [po-hsing,) to listen to 
 The word chiany-dtiu is much more common as curious, worth talkittg about ; (see page 38, ex. 3:i j.) 
 
 3,_«0&s. 1. duteous subordination; hsiao, dutifulness, and shun, obedient. The context presently, (4, obs. a.) 
 shews that this combination may mean not simply subordlnallon of the inferior in grade, but an appreciation 
 of relations such as will enable a superior duly to contribute to the achievement of a lawful purpose. 
 
 2. can dispense with ; lit. [of the thr-ee tilings enumerated,] there is not one that has separated, = can. 
 separate, itself from this principle — 's [thing.] 
 
 4— Oi«. !• H""' so ? lit- what, or, how [do I] say ? 
 
 2. perfection, &c. ; lit., hsiao-sliun is 'ho ch'i, peace-matter, liarniony-essence, qualified by i t'uan-ti, 
 complete, in perfection ; the Vuan Is r'onnd as a full moon ; the i means unity and integrity. 
 
 3. twin powers; fien, heaven, is Yang, the male principle of nature; ir, earth, Yin, the female ; /)>., 
 you see, or look, heaven and earth if not in-harmony ; the yao shih, if it be tha% interposed as elsewhere 
 between the subject and the verb. 
 
 4. how could - - produce; lit., how {yen,) able to effect the production of [shCng-te,) very many men 
 and thini'S (jen-wu, which luav also simply mean man,) forlh-coiuing ? ch'u-lai, auxiliary ut' shcng-te, = briii" 
 
 (51) "
 
 FIRST CIIAPTEU OF THE SIIENG YU KUANG HSUN t 
 
 forth •_«! here ii.teri().rativ<>, as it most commonly is. Tli<- hsii \u/niito is rolloqiiially uspd a« 'ino\n •hnn- 
 to, very many : its proper sijjiiilicaliou is to permit, to promise, and 1 can find no etymological reason lor 
 
 its line as here. ... , i r. i > i 
 
 5 As nature without 'ho, so is man without huao ■ neitlier achieves completeness ; ht man - - liow al.le 
 notwithstanding ('A«a«,) to be perfected as, = to be, ick'nuj,) man ?_/,„ before y«, is best taken .is redundant. 
 5 _ Ob. I A word &c ; M- "ow (ju-chin,) also, or fnrthermore, (rh'ith,) taking' lather and mother-painfully = 
 tei'iderly-lovin.; (l-ina-^a.:^-^'-^ («.-»,t^«)-'»-l"-art and bowels, = teel.nfrs. [I) say a say tor] yon to hear 
 T be c< ni.in.lioi cA-it/i, not nnfremiently, appears to have an imperative action on the verb, in in rodrn;!..;; 
 npr;::.'';;!;.',; ".a. Is elsewhere, 'collects all the words between it and the verb together as the object 
 
 ''"'i2!''i'n^arm" T'^i^^^i- t" «l>"ii*h, also the bosom ; pao, to embrace ; •huai-pao-urh. in the arms, the embrace 
 
 "'"sI'^neitLTf^^d"!"- T/i«. [were yon] hungry, (o or ".<, liao „.) ? by yonrself {Ui-chi,) you could not {pa 
 
 ''""'l Z\Zjao-Uu, and mother, or mammy, niang, (see page 7, ex. 87;) expressions belonging to the lower 
 
 '''""ri.uii'sposed ; lU, yon if it were that slightly you had a particle of sickness : slightly, /jao-Zm^-VA-n' 
 generally, /.s opposed to particularly; understand yanff-un after ti ; in other words treat the phrase a. 
 
 ^'l^'lf iu.re ""^T |:;;::i,!lv'a".'n';.^on for /^ ; if it be not I think the form elliptical ; ,.d Va-ti ,,anr,.,.n 
 shih'ko ch-.u-ti ylw-nu, iheir tasbion was an.^iety's fashion. The partirle^Ms constantly used altera 
 .name where ~.. are spoken of; the word /,,«„., surname, beu.g snpphed or omitted at pleasure; «a- 
 toL^XU J.I.. hsin,. Lain M ,..'^.,no shuo, Lan said so and so. Here,,,,, is clearly understood alter 
 ti On the adverbial constrnrlion of a word or phrase repeated before U, see page 12. ex. 144. 
 
 7 nor was it f.c. ; lit , only waiting till (iCng-chn. sec page ;)0. .x. 279, oi,. 2) your body w.s well ; tl, . 
 r.ttained 1 then (t,,n ) thev put their hearts at rest ; the verb/«ng, here luduales the condition to which 
 dttrlcnol, ... TrouMe of mind is opposed. 5^ee the fourth of the Confucian books, Hsia Meiig. Cap. 6. On 
 ts-ai compare page 31, ex. 283. ohs. 1 ; ex. 281. obs. 3. 
 G - Ohs 1 No one can tell, Jtc. ; lit., with eyes intently (pa-pa-urh-U) beholding. This word /<o in pa-tzii may 
 stand for the pa, that means, a target ; I have no other satisfactory account of the origin ot the phrase here 
 
 "^^''>' babv-hood &c • lit one year small, two years large - - wise (ti;) as above in 5, obs. 3, fl :— [man] doe. 
 not know they received, = suffered, (6//o«, as in page 33, ex. 298, obs. 3; page 34, ex. 300, obs. o;) how 
 nnu-h tribul.ition ; (/,4vn, crude, il"!< bitter.) • ..i, i • „ ■ Ui, 
 
 3 shocks ilirnis chimrp'a; endured, tan hao; the l<m is not given this sense in the Lexicon ; it might 
 be written to«, to bear a burden. (See note in the Chinese text.) 
 
 4 nurlure X.C • ,mn--huo ; J/««g to rear, hm, living, the leeding to the preservation of life. 
 
 o' the pnicnrinT 1 »7le- W . when they had reached, or, when it may have come to, your manhoods 
 time; your having^become (c//'r«!/,) man, and grown to greatness grown up,-'s time, -- the for you ; A«, 
 to .nve but c.usativelv. not in the sense of permittiiio:; (see page 3, ex 3G, ohs. 1,) a wife, the bearing, or 
 to U-ar, children; c I'lii cki. ducere uxorem, chia jai, i.ubere v.rum, (Mornson.) 
 
 6 literirv reputation ; the looking forward (ivang,) to your reading books aud making [ch'ing,) a name. 
 
 1. establishment; the for you working out {cliing, see befow 30,) a house; the founding a busines* 
 
 tvch.) or profession. . , .. , , ,, \ ., . , l . • .i • 
 
 <» interested- /z7 fof all these] what one particular did not concern (huan,) the parents heart ; is this 
 .roodness (n,in ) repayable [pao-te.) in full (cAm.)-'s [goodness] ?_goodness which [the children] to pay 
 m„y attain,;^«o.<c; the nominative of ;^ao is children understood. 
 7.~Obs. simple reflection; /,<., only taking you-towards-[your]-children-'s feelings think a thought. 
 8 —Obs 1 says well; one teacher prefors li to te, = that which is said is good 
 
 2 one learns; /it, bring up children, then (/««<?,) know parent's goodiu-ss; one, and a very commoo 
 equivalent for such a'const?uction as,— You must bring up children before you can know, &c. Compare 
 
 o qI)s 4 
 ' a.'biit once, &c.; lit., past thus (c/u>n,) = since, or. now that, you know. or. have learnt, (chik 
 
 tao-liao,) := when you have learnt. . .tl i •• 
 
 4 why do you not. S.c. ; /it- why do you not go [and he] diiteously - subordinate - to them. The rh'u 
 
 to L'o. is almost redundant ; if it have any other beside its common au.xiliary power it is in the indication 
 
 of the act as towards another. 
 
 «) —Obs 1 For a duteous subordination, kc; the/or is intended to transkte i/eh, also, ajain, indeed; lit. this 
 
 ■ subordination indeed is no impossibility. No coi.junrtion is absolutely necessary ,n the English. 
 
 2 one of the ancients; Wang H.siang lay on the ice all nigbt to catch a lisli for bis mother who was 
 sick ' Another cut out a piece ofbisthi-h for a sick parent to eat; some medicinal virtue is still attributed to 
 the flesh of the thi>'b There are sever.d to whom this pious foat is assigned. Kuo Chu was about to bury 
 his child that his HMfe might suckle his mother, who was starviug ; but, when digging a grave for the pur- 
 
 uose, he found a treasure. ■ < \ r ■ r \ -c • » .u .u 
 
 3 examples- lit for example, or, for comparisons sake, {pi fang,) ^ it we instance, the three cases 
 stated— this kind's things,— the last clause being purely resumptive,- then {chhi), it would be hard to 
 
 """r^blrt'l'ie're ['-'■''lit also not is it a fi.ved necessity (piling,) that you must thus do, then (^-'ai,) shall 
 Tou be Slid to be '= before vou can be said to be, filial. t:oinpare ts'ai SYiXhfong in 8 obs. 2. 
 
 6 ever and always; lit., only must you heart-heart-thonglit-thougbt-wise (see page 12, ex 144, obs. 1.) 
 taking (pa,) your parents, lay them on your mind (=lay your parent.s, &c.,) ; then will it be well. 
 
 1 O._0fe. 1. really desire ; hiwjun, really thus, a strong affirmative, very commonly used to introduce a hypothe- 
 tical proijosiiion ; (fin very deed, A. ,,•,,,• ., f. . ,-7 ■-• J 
 
 ■> nothin.r nnalten.pted; it will be simplest to understand slnh-cli'mg, matters, after tso-te-lai-tt, and 
 rmno't'u manner, alter wti-so-pu-r/nh-ti, that is to treat the lirst /< as a relative, and the second ti, as an 
 idvurbi .1 particle. Construe thus, [In] whatsoever [things] (tnn-fan.) your own capacity (h-l,ang-u,h,) is 
 kble to do --nothin.'-thal-(M-M40.)-it-does-not.reach--wise--go serve, or minister to, {fiig-ch-tnii,) them, 
 the two old persons; "ch'ii, go, redundant as abuve in 8, ohs. 4 ;— to serve, or minister, ftng, to teuder, as 
 .etvice tribute, &c. ; cU-i'ig, to receive, or undertake, as a superior's pleasure, \ c. 
 
 3 'stint- -- rather than, .\ c, lit., it is preferable that, {ntng-ko,) ytuirselt should little, (= less, compare 
 nao-c oj ex -'47 obs 3 ) eat, less use someuhat, [lien-'rh,) [that] coiiiplete-ly, (c/nii-cho ) yours parents should 
 eat" &"c -—the word ncng or ning, peace, tiaiMiuillity, is oltcn used, as here, to mark a course to be preforred 
 
 (52) 
 I
 
 OR, AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACRED EDICT. 
 
 or not to 1)R picff'i'ipil, in comparison «itlj aiiotlior. It is, I think, found moro Crc(\no\\l\y with the clause 
 wliii-h pronounces in favour of the one, than, as here, against the otlior: — Completely; the f7///i is of the 
 same meaning; as c/un, vvilhout ihejcti at the siJc. The construction of lun, all, and tu, most, is in appearance 
 Oontradietory ; if the parent eats all Ic/iin.) the son will not lie ahle merely to eat somewhat less {s/iao- 
 tie'n.'rk,) than usual. The trauslati(Mi tlici-efore interpolates the words t/ii^ij can. 
 
 4. any little trouble; Hi., for tiiern vicariously taUe (tai,) a particle of trouble, {tic^-rli lao.) 
 
 5. secret hoard; ht., do not a bad; place (pci ti,) within, [for your] private self {szu-tzii,) accumulate 
 {chi-tsan,) money, lit., silver, and [copper) cash, {yin-tzu-ch'ien). 
 
 (i. fondly bestowed ; t'l'iiij, pain, also used to express tenderness of the affections ; tenderly [regarding] 
 your own wife and children, not loohin^- to (pu hu,) your parents. 
 
 7. ontH-ard forms; lit., allowing it \.o hv &n {tsionjjan,) that out-side's form and T\i\<i (kiici-cJiu,) you 
 cannot observe, (hi-jiu-lai ;) not at all (tuu jm,) does it matter, or do harm (fing- tti,) hinder and embar- 
 rass, [- that which should be.] 
 
 S. sincerity; lit., only must you be heart-within sincere {ch'eng-sliih ;) then will it be well. 
 
 1 1. — Ohs. 1. your daily fare, &c. ; chiu, then, = the condition of sincerity liilfilled. — sliili, it is [as follows, suppose 
 that the hiiaiir/-chi)ig, state of things, is] coarse tea and insi|)id rice — 's [kuun(j-cliin(j.'\ 
 
 2. your instrumentality ; tit., it is only necessary to cause them rcjoicing-ly to swallow, lit., in eating 
 to accomplish that it shall descending go. 
 
 3. done your duty; this then, accordingly, is duteous subordination. 
 
 i^. — Obs. I. extending the application ; pa, sign of the object preceding tlie verb; t'ni k'oA, pushing and opening, 
 as a number or multitude; pushing them forward and apart, so that they extend over more surface as they 
 advance; — if indeed this principle, or theory, (tao-ti,) extending we speak. 
 
 "2. in every act; c/iin, as in II, oIjs. 1, then is it [ihus;] any raising (i c/iii,) any movement (j timi/,) not 
 [being] a compass-and-square — 's [r/iii-tini/j.] The c/iii in c/iii-tmiff is stated etymologicallv to refer to the 
 action of the hand, as ti/ng to that of the foot. The combination may be rendered generally by our word 
 movement, or proceeding. The word iiwi means a compass, c/y/V, a square; hence kuei-c/iii, rule, regular-ity. 
 
 :J. in that -- contempt, &c. ; 9irt that [c7i«-<(/»ig, so described] c/iin, accordingly, slii/i,h, to have depre- 
 ciated (f/;'i»r/, light, to hold light, 7)iun, slow indolent, careless), ^ is in depreciation of, your father and 
 mother's bequeathed body. 
 
 4. commit a breach ; c/iiu, [and] accordingly is not filial. 
 
 ll». — Oils. 1. business for the emperor; liti, (see page 3, ex. 36, obs. 1 ;) 'huang-shang-chia, the emperor, a familiar 
 expression ; the c/iin may be added or omitted. 
 
 •2. lack of tidelity ; s/iih c/iiin, [this is] to serve the ruler, ;j« cfiu7ig, not with loyalty, or fidelity. The 
 whole phrase is classical. 
 
 3. same thing; c/iiu accordingly, or, in that case, same (jti t'linr/,) with ('/lai) a-to-parcnts-not-good - -'s 
 [action,] it is one and the same fashion. In our idiom, either jii-fnnij or 'hai is redundant. 
 
 4. another breach ; also {yeh,) in that case {chiu,) = by parity of reasoning, it is another un-filial [act.] 
 
 14. — Obs. I. men in office, tso huan ti, acting-as-officer — 's [men.] 
 
 2. pr-ovoke ; jo, bring on themselves, the people's laughter and execrations. 
 
 10. — Ohs. 1. before friends; ken, the heel, = behind; cA'Wi, in front ; the whole may be rendered befor-e, or, 
 as we say, ;imongst, friends. 
 
 2. unsatisfactorily ; pu cho-shili, faultilj', unsoundly ; a teacher illustrates the meaning of the phrase 
 by referring to paper pasted against anything ; where it blisters, not holding evenly, it is said to he pu clio- 
 shih ; (see below 2j, obs. 2.) 
 
 3. dishonouring, chan, or tien, blemish or flaw in a gem iju, disgrace, or to disgrace. 
 
 10. — Ohs. 1 forward in action; better iierhaps, in war-time; sluing chin, to ascend, or take place in the ranks; 
 ch'u ping, to send forth soldiers ; if at such a time you do not clioosc (pu-lt'en,) valiant (i/mig,') and fierce, 
 {ming,') to contend for the foremost place {chcitij-hsien,) = to emulate your comrades in valour. 
 
 2. ridicule feebleness ; you cause {cliiao,') men to ridicule (^lisiao 'iiua,) your softness {juan,) and weak- 
 ness (jao); your imbecility. 
 
 3. discredit; hsia, down, or below, c/(ick, cheap, vile ; /«i«-c/«'e«, de-preciate, or cause depreciation of. 
 
 1/ — Otis. i. word of reproof ; shuo, followed immediately by a person, is to find fault with him, cither before 
 his face, or behind his back ; chii = i ckii, one sentence. 
 
 2. colour change, lit., they change the face (pie7t lic7i.) here, in auger. 
 
 3. abuse ; lit., curse, or revile, them a sound. 
 
 4. rejoin ; lit., they then return lip ; '/man as a verb is not also pronounced 'hai or 'han, as in the clause 
 next but one. 
 
 5. some there are ; lit. also, or, even {'hua7i, 'han, or 'hai, but more commonly the two last,) are there 
 (some in the following predicament, or, who act as follows.) 
 
 6. let their parents, &c. ; construe categorically; their own wives and children [are] all full-and-warm- 
 like (page 12, e.i'. 144 ;) their parents, on the contrary {tao,) endure (jcn,) starvation and suffer ("ifai,) 
 hunger :—j'i'n, oftener to endure mentally, to be pained by reflection ; at, or "f^ai, to suffer generally, be the 
 recipient of; hence like shou, to receive, a common index of the passive voice ; e.g., ai ta, to be beaten. 
 
 7. rush headlong ; lit. impetuously (ch'uavg,) go forth [and so cause,] calamity {'hno,) to come. In 
 explaining this clause and the following, a teacher will supply some simple causative such as chiau. 
 
 8. bring displeasure ; construe, [they] embarrass [tai, to draw as by a string, lei, to entangle as in a net,) 
 their parents; then understand chiao t'a, they cause them to receive, or sufier anger, [shou ch'i.) 
 
 !». break laws,_/a« shih ; that is do things {sliih,) that bring them in collision with (fan,) the law; /an 
 fa (42, obs. 4,)is the common expression for getting foul of, committing offence agitinst, the law. Compare 
 this and obs. (i, with page 32, ex. 292, obs. 4. 
 
 10. annoyance - - authorities ; tai-lei parents, as before, [and cause them] to see officials and enter courts. 
 
 lo — Obs. 1. such persons ; either chung (pron. tsung) or yuTig is redundant; the clause would be quite idiomatic 
 with one or other omitted. 
 
 2 before heaven this sort of men ; do not say heaven's justice does not tolerate. The t'ie7i li might be 
 here t'ien or shang t'ien; the li is here rather the law of right exercised by supreme heaven; not the sense of 
 it imparted to man. 
 
 3. immediate consequence ; chiu following the negative pieh has disjunctive power; not only is heaven 
 impatient of it, but there is {shih,) another consequence, namely, &c. 
 
 4. follow ; tlieir children have beheld (behold) their fashion or model ; then following {icii-cho.) imitate it. 
 
 5. bring you to your senses ; lit., you think a thought; still {'han) do you not discover [your real posi- 
 tion] ; hsiiig is by enquiry to discover ; wii, to perceive, to comprehend. 
 
 It). — Obs. I. next in importance; ch'u liao, having cut out, having excepted parents, then, &c. 
 
 (53)
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE SUENG YU KUANG IISVA ; 
 
 C. doubtless ; you and your brother are by no means (pint; tou,) not {/ei,) two persons, I do not mean 
 to maiiituiii tliiit ; but, &c. 
 
 3. put a slight; jjfio, thin, tai, towards, or to act towards; want of heartiness, of substantial con- 
 sidoratiou, 
 
 z().— Ois. I. So in the case; chiu shih, thus is [it thatj brothers not having a common mother, still {ijeh) are one 
 father's bone and bbiofl. 
 
 2. do not arjfue; do not say they arc not of the same mother; then, or thence (chiu) regard them as 
 being of, as making {ch'cng,) two sorts. 
 
 •^l- — Ol)s. 1. if a brother die; if it be that brothers are not; nm-tiao, de-fuerint. 
 
 2 where is he to look ; where still shall he liiid one ; chao, to seek, chao-ti-lai, to find, seeking to obtain 
 that the object sought shall come. 
 
 3. ckin-'^ai, (see 1, ubs. 8;) intimately, affectionately, love. 
 2.-- — Ohs. 1. how love him, &c ; the ho is redundant; it might be omitted. 
 
 2. the younger brother, lit., [the] doing, ^ being, younger brothers — 's [man,] must ching-chung, 
 reverentially appreciate, give due weight to. 
 
 3. in every thing ; tan-fan has much the power of onr soever ;-soever be there what thin?, whether, &c. 
 
 4. courteous formalities ; lit , followii.g (shi,) every body {jCn-chiays ceremonies, or politenesses; if, fur 
 instance, congratulations, or gifts, are to be offered to any one, or any one sends an invitation to dinner, 
 the younger brother should nut put himself forward : — Jai-chia s= chunr/ jin-chia, = tout le munrle. 
 
 5. tou yao c/iinjiinf/; in all [the foregoing cases, he] must to the utmost (chin,) cede to ihe-being-clder- 
 brofher'-s [man,] = the elder brother. 
 
 Zo. — Obs. 1. the ancients; construe by understanding yao hin, if we speak of, or chih yii, to come to, (see 2-1.) 
 before ku shili-hou-rli-tijt'n, the men of ancient time. 
 
 2. village ; hsiany-ts'ii"'-rh is the common word for a village, or one's country home, here separated as 
 we use " parts or places :" — shayig, lit., on, often as here, at, or in. 
 
 3. construe ; [Looking to] the ancients, then was it [thus; that,] in one village together dwelling [men,] 
 == fellow townsmen [among,] if he, compared with me, [were] senicn-, lit , greater, ten years. 
 
 4. same respect as; I then deferred to (Isiin.) him, as {tani/, representing) an elder brother. 
 3. by side, in rear; "ilai-chie" - rh, by his shoulder, I sut-cho, followed hicn. 
 
 6. pass ; i/iieh-huo ; there is also a sense of trans-gression, :^ trespass, in yiieh. 
 
 7. not a relation; lit., outside men (wai,= chia-ivai, house or family without,) men compared with me 
 [in respect of] .age, [nien-chi. years" record) great or senior; I notwithstanding must this-fashiou-wise respect 
 them, eh'i* How much more, {'ho kuanrj,) [where it] is my brother - - [must I, &c.] 
 
 Z'i.— Obs. 1. other hand; lit., to come to the elder brother. 
 
 2. be --what it m\a\\t; jen-p'ing, a compound of two words signifying according to; making it 
 optional, leaving it open, that he be of how great [to ta,) age. 
 
 3. behave; jon before t'a, the object not translated : — I only him representing a child behave to (tai;) 
 I treat him just as if he were. The verb tang-tai will he found without any word intervening; its con- 
 struction is somewhat similar to that of i-wei; see page 40, ex. 338, ubs. 1. Separated from the latter members 
 of their respective combinations, both tunij and 2 much resemble the Latin pro after esse, habere, ponere, &c., 
 as m pro certo habere, ^?o mortuo esse. 
 
 25.— OAs. 1. misconduct himself; if he be imperfect material, or, such as not to make material. We are tempted 
 to translate it, good-for-nothing, but it is not so strong; there is a less permanent character in the epithet ; 
 as is shewn by what follows. 
 
 2. seriously displeased, cho-shih-ti 'hen, see above 15, obs. 2. 
 
 3. cool again ; compare pien lien, 1 7, obs. 2, where loss of temper is spoken of ; this is the recovery of it ; 
 chiian indicating mutation, kuo transition, and /ai, if more than an ordinary auxiliary of the active verb 
 in-coming, ?e-version to the original condition. Compare huei, page 26, ex. 2.54, obs. 4. 
 
 4. fond as ever; te., coutinuing-as-of-old-wise (jin-chiu-ti,) ura haA of (see Veng above, 5, obs. 1,) 
 tenderly love, him. 
 
 20. — Obs. I. exception to rule ; lit., only (wei-tii.) having come, (tao-liao,) = when we come, to brothers, if it be 
 that they have been wroug, [shall we] then (tsai,) still (i/eh,) not chose gradually, or gently [man-tnan-ti, 
 Ital. piai2%piano) to exhort or reprove (s/iuo,) them. The particle tsai, means, again, in the second ease; 
 the first having been disposed of in the preeedina: clause ; — i/eh supports ivei-tu; although in every other 
 case, still or yet, not in the brother's case. 1 have therefore emphasised Aim. 
 
 2. any little short-coming; lit., once, or, each time, or, on any occasion that one encounters (yii chien,) 
 = there occurs [this; that] brothers have, or, in the case of brothers there is, a trifle not right. 
 
 3. of necessity produce, &c., lit., then, in consequence of the short-coroing there must arise, or begin 
 (ch'i lai,) wrangling and blows : ch'i and lai are both auxiliary of the verbs cheng and tou. 
 
 27 Obs. 1. struck yourself; tzu-chia, self-house, self-person ; the chia as in jenchio. 
 
 2. with a little discrimination; lit., the younger brother (<so as above,) likewise (yu,) does not know 
 good and evil (hao tai.) 
 
 3. receives a blow ; chien, to see, often used, especially in the written style, as pei, short, ''Vai, and other 
 signs of the passive form; seeing his elder brother strike him, = being struck by his elder. 
 
 4. return it; thereupon, (chiu,) in return ('huan) raises his hand; ch'i is here the principal verb, raises 
 and lai its auxiliary. 
 
 5. by accident; if it were to be that [he, the man,] missing his hand (shih shou.) through inadvertence 
 allowinn his hand, to strike the foot. Li various compounds the word shih marks the sin of omission or 
 improvidence. 
 
 28.— 0/«. I. all arise ; tt., all are because of Sfpiabbling for money's motive; c/j';-cA/e« is properly an idea con- 
 ceived (compare ch'i i;) it stands here, according to the teacher, in no other sense than yiian-hu, cause; the 
 meaning, in strictness, being, that, because of the idea, or desire, [to get] money, they disagree. The verb 
 clieng here does not mean to contend emulously, sc. for the greater profit, as in 16, obs. 1, where it is in- 
 fluenced by hsien, — but angrily, in respect of wealth or property. 
 
 2. wives; lao p'o, the old woman, the dame, not used in speaking to an equal or superior. See 
 below 29, obs. 6. 
 
 S. trifle of sense; chehsieh. these little, &c. ; the hsieh affects the wives somewhat contemptuously, not 
 the 'hua ; (see the Literal English version ;) still (ych,) is not utterly (ching,) all not sense : yeh, with pu, is 
 disjunctive ; although their husbands should not heed it as they do, still, &c. 
 
 4. in so far sensible ; the yeh continues and enforces the qualification of its value : — shiio-ti, or shuo te, 
 in the speaking: — the ti in some teachers' colloquial has completely usurped the place oi te. Notice /»' 
 used as synonymous with tao-li in the preceding clause. 
 
 (54)
 
 OR, AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACRED EDICT. 
 
 5. afains imi)orcpptiI)ly ; not-kiiowinfj-not-porcoiving-wisc [yon] lieur, or listen, [and the chat] has 
 entored : ch'ii aiixiliury oi chin, (compare yi, ohs. 3.) 
 29 . — 06s. I. elder brother's wife ; saii-tzu. is the tith' liy wliich yon spi'uU of tlie wife of your elder brother, or 
 your near cousin on the father's side ; speakiii;;' to her husband of yon, she styles you hsiao shu. 
 
 •2. toil away; hiia, crude, k'u, bitter; h.-iiii-tu may be said n.' little m )re than ordinary labour, or it 
 may be of u;reat trouble or affliction. TIk! re<luplic.ition iutensilies the force of the adverb, as in page 12, 
 ex. U4, obs. 1, pa;,'!! -li, ex. 'iiS; \y.is.e 28, ex. 204, &c. 
 
 a. to nialce ,1 little money; cki'ng (see also (J, abi. 7,) an effort implieil; a horse drawing any thin;,' is 
 said chmn-cho icanrj-Asien, to move forward with effort. 
 
 4. condeinnini;- — censurin^if; lit. he, |wlio should be silent as junior and dependent, is] notwithstandinif 
 ('huaii,) one who speaks [of this as too] lonjf, and says [that is too] short. I understand ^Yfj after ti as usual, 
 and construe ti as the relative accordingly. 
 
 5. are we his ? tian tao, it is hard to say, somewhat like our. You don't mean to tell me, &c. ; a com- 
 mon form at the commencement of an interrogation, and responded to by pu eh'ing, lit., not completed, 
 which call hardly be rendered in translation. 
 
 6. wife and children; h4-fa-urh, pron. hsi-fi-'rh. A man speaUin";- of liis own wife calls her his nii- 
 jen, woman; or nii-jhi, the person inside, or chieii nei, the unworthy [one] within ; he will not say wv h.n- 
 fii-tirh, of his own wife, but he will say wo-mca hsi-fii-urh, referring to his own and his son's wife, or of sons' 
 
 wives together. 
 
 7. owe duty ; are we in duty bound {kai-tang) to duteously obey him — 's [persons.] 
 
 30. — Obs. 1. na-ko, that, = the ; it might be equally well cM-ko, this : That younger brother's wife, also to ('Aa* 
 more commonly with ; the con, in conversation^ the younger brother says. 
 
 2. as to ; chin manifestly refers to an antecedent proposition not expressed: — It is maintained t!iat 
 your elder makes [lil., is competent to make ; see 'hxd. page 8. ex. 92, obs. 4, ) the money ; well then, (chin) 
 I maintain if it be that he does, you also (j/eh,) have made (chemj-kiio,) money. 
 
 3. great or small ; compare cA'an^ <«a« with the same words above in 29, o6s. 4, where it is used in 
 quite a different sense. 
 
 4. hired servant; ch'anr/ kung, long labour; a servant or labourer hired by the year; one hired by the 
 season, = the quarter, moon, or day, is titan hung, short labour. 
 
 5 his children are children; p'ien, special, particular; if we particularise his children, in that case 
 (chiti,) they are children ; (see 32, obs. 4.) 
 
 6. ours are to die I suppose ; nan tao, see 29, obs. 5, do you mean to say that our children, in that case 
 (chill, in that they are not his,) all are worthy of death — 's [childreLi,] those that ought to die. 
 31. — Obs. 1. of this sort; according to (rjiao-cho.) this fashion — 's ; talk, 'hm ; talk described by the words pre- 
 ceding ti, which makes them the attributive of'hiii. 
 
 2. in spite of himself; pu 7/u te, it is not permitted to — the elder brothers not to hear it in; it cannot 
 but make some impression on them. 
 
 3. on this; ts'unri tz'ii, from this, or, hence forward, 
 
 4. total estrangement; the meaninir of this sentence is perfectly plain, but its analysis is troublesome. 
 The verb pa we find, constantly, as will have been seen in the foregoing pages, almost invariably, before the 
 object of an active verb following that object, and the result of the act is often ;;iven, as here, in the succeed- 
 ing clause and without any causative verb or particle indicative of process. Were ^w omitted, hsin-chanij, 
 the feelings, lit., heart and bowls, would he the nominative of ling-tan hsia-lai, be-come cold and thin, 
 uncordial ; but it is perfectly idiomatic to retain pa. Compare page 14, ex. 160, and pa;e 28, ex. 2G4. We 
 may construe thus; From this, consequently, [the circumstances enumerated, wife's chat, &c.,] taking brothers 
 feelings [make them,] or, — merging pa as index of the object — [make] brother's feelings all to become cold, 
 &o. ; hsia-lai, downwards to come, verbalises laig-tan, but as it is manifestly a neuter formation, I have 
 supplied the causative verb. The hsia, down, or to descend, combines with lai to mark process, or progress, 
 but does not necessarily imply deterioration. 
 
 32. — Obs. I. they do not feel, -- if they did, &c. I have translated the passage thus to give the full iorce oicJviieh, 
 and chiii-shih. Premare Art. 2, para. 10, says k'io, {ch'ueh or ch'io,) serves to emphasise an assertion, which it 
 certainly does; but I think that it is genenilly employed as the contra, when the argument pro is concluded 
 it is much as our very colloquial. Well, but - - , which, apparently introducing a proposition, must, in most 
 cases, refer to an antecedent one, more or less remote. They act as above described ; well but [they so act] 
 not knowing - - &c. 
 
 2. that where an elder brother is unable; they know not that brothers are one man, that consequently 
 it is (chiu shih,) a duty to support him, that consequently it is {chin shih,) not to mind any stray ren'irk 
 (Jisien-yii,) he may make. 
 
 3. there would be an end ; understand chih-tao Uao before cMu ; if they felt the above, then (cbiu,) 
 both sides [ta-chia, the whole party, see page 9, ex. 105, obs. 5,) would let go, loosen hold of [their anger] ; 
 sa, to let go of what is held in the hand closed, k'ai to open. 
 
 4. they of all people ; p'ien, (see page 1 4, ex. 159, ohs. 4,) specially they must recognise [what they ouoiit 
 to make light of,] as serious, or true. This clause must be connected with the first {obs. 1); g.d. [and 
 although brothers are one man,] they must, &c. 
 
 33t — Obs. I. one counts, ta,lit. beats or strikes, = uses, the ««an-/)'a!j, reckoning board, or receptacle ; the Chinese 
 abacus. On the power of to to enforce the action of other verbs, or, as here, to make, in combination with 
 its object, what we are prone to treat as a verb neuter, see Premare, cap. 2, art. I , para. 3. 
 
 2. takes hold of a thing; tung-hsi, east and west, all things between east and west, and so, a thing : 
 nouns so formed are very frequently divided as here by the same verb repeated, or governed by two verbs of 
 kindred significations. 
 
 3. The <i, observe, is omitted at pleasure; the construction is plainly ; the write-character — [s hand] 
 is it ; the use-counting-board I's hand] is it, &c. Theye/i, thus repeated, =: both, - and, - and - ; or marks 
 the clauses as our comma would. 
 
 4. but because; there is no particle strictly to be translated because or although ; the powers of the 
 right hand are stated categorically, and the speaker then proceeds to a conclusion marked by chiu. The 
 left hand is then (chin,) unhandy (^pcn,) exceedingly; [but though this be the case,] no one ever heard. 
 
 5. no one ever was known, the introduction of yuji" -'rh na, docs not ruin the comparison as would at 
 first appear, the two brothers being shou tsu, hand and foot of one body. 
 
 6. with the right ; na taking the right ; na marks the instrumental case ; ch'ii, to go, as above in 8 a;id 
 10, adds to the action, but should not be translated. 
 
 7. relation as intimate; the men may be considered as pluralising an elder and a younger brother; or, 
 younger brothers only ; these being close-related-wise [ch'i chi-ti,) hand and toot. 
 
 (55)
 
 FIRST CHAPTER OF THE SIIENG YU KUANG HSUN ; 
 
 8. (lifforDnccs, &c. ; spc ch'an^ tuan above in 29 and in 30, liow can they be squabbling of the long and 
 
 discussing; of the short — 's [men] ? 
 
 o4. — Obs. I, chance possession ; t'ang written as in the text is properly read cli'iinii; it moans a wave; written 
 as in the note it is jjropurly a panicle indicating sudden interruption or cessation, and commonly used as 
 if ; so here, money is a coniUtionuJhi - cuiniii;; tbiiij;. 
 
 2. you may yet more; [wlicii] it has yoiie, [y<Hi"| are able co have com-innf [money.] 
 
 3. do not iel ivomen's talk, cSrc., as the reader \\ill see, is interpolated to connect llie sense. The loo- 
 p'O-nwn, wives, ivonien, is isolated demonsti-ativcly for emphasis' saUe ; in the written style the particle 
 known as the relative c/ti' ctrects this isohition, especially \vher(^ the sentence is inlerroi,'ative : - the women, 
 they not with me Are of-one-daddy-and-mammie-born [persons ;] they know what sense, what philosophy 
 (tao-li) ? See page 34, ex. 300, ohs. 6; also 38, ex. 321, obs. 4. 
 
 •J«^ — Obs. I. only point; c/iih hit, only look to [this.] 
 
 2. not fail to ir\cense; [if] brothers ibei not concordant ('Ao-m!/,) the-actinj-as-father-and-mother — 's 
 {people] assuredly (_/ii, certain, ^rtn, thus,) irener.ite wrath, (s/i('iif/-ch'i.) The word c/t'i, commonly ren- 
 dered breath is, in this combiuation, the animal life li(don^'iii;j to all beings, human and brute ; the expressions 
 shuKj, to <jenerate, \xw\ Ja, to ])ut forth, cIl^'i, both indicate an abnormal condition of the ch'i. They may be 
 used of animals but, comparatively, seldom. 
 
 3. hence is it ; so-i, wherefore, remounts to <hih-hu, the one point to be attended to. 
 
 36. — Obs. your best man; id. when yon strike the tiger, still ('/ion or '/man,) i.e. though you have plenty of aid 
 
 beside, you |mustj have your owu brother. 
 37. — Obs. I. it maybe well, &c. ; the antithesis is very mechanically managed. It is not meant of course that 
 
 it is positively good to slay any one, but comparatively better another than one self. Lit. to have slain to 
 
 advantajje, is | to have slain] another; to have slain to perdition --&c. : 'huai,to ruin, destroy ; g.d., It is all 
 
 very well killing others, ,Sic. 
 
 2. full of your feud about nothing ; chih-hi (see 35,) to look only to, chenij to contend abut, hsien ch'i, 
 [the issue of | your unreal wrath. A teachcu- supplies the word ch'ianri, the power, the upper hand, as the 
 object of c/u'/(/y, to liijlit for. The word /(5/e'i is nearly as above in 32, ohs. 2; it characterises what is 
 sii|)ervacaneous as opposed to what is essential; clu'mg wu, real business, lisien ihih, occupation of idleness, 
 that may be let alone at will; h.iitn chu, to be living at a place without any special object, or pursuit ; 
 hsicn tso, to sit passing the time, as on a visit, &c. * 
 
 3. stimulate it, &c. ; as you are intent, then, or accordingly (cfiiu,) there is the fact that (y>i.) persons 
 come and fet« h and carry {Viuo so ;) Ciao, is to pick uj), as otf the ground ; so, with the 75th radical, mu, is 
 a weaver's shuttle; it is said to have be^'Otten this so, with the 30th radical h'uu, which means tale-beariag. 
 
 4. remarks, shihfei, riL'ht and wrong ; it means, however, wronjr only ; invidious remarks. 
 
 o. whether it be (^hno sbi'i,) that you come to blows, {ton-"^oit,) or go to law, {tu kuan szit;) the ia 
 verbalises the compound; hian an official, sii/, a department, or jurisdiction ; <j.d., to tribuual-ise it. 
 
 6. in either case; this is to give effect to tsai following the huo-shik ; Either you tight, or you go to 
 law; then (tsrii, = in that case,) not is there a not-ruined-house-property'-s [man.] 
 
 38 — Obs. 1. good subjects; Hcmff viin, virtuous people; min, people, as opposed to /(««». officials, the government. 
 2. stunt fellows, Ul., good sons of 'Han, good Chinese. The department of 'Han-cbung Fu, in modern 
 Slien !si, was the first possession of Liu PaoiT, who as prince of it was 'Han Wang. He ascended the throne 
 of China n.c. 201, and took 'Han as the style of the dynasty he then founded. It is a common ecjuivalent 
 for Chinese in the mouth of a native, especially when speaUini; of his language, or literature. He will also 
 call his countrymen 'Ilan ji'n; if not a Cantonese, in which case he calls them T'ang jcn [T'ong ydn.) liut 
 •■Han-tzu, n'\-\'i\a, or sou of 'Han, is often used apparently as the embodiment of particular qualifications, 
 without reference to the nationality of the person described; ta'Hiii t:li, for instance, lit., a Chinese of 
 great size, would !)e by a Chinese, used for "a big fellow"; one teacher says, of any country. Tbe.-e is 
 some slight analogy between this transference of use, and that which has effected our worijel/ow, orijjinally 
 an equal. 
 
 39 Ohs. I. knowing these things ; chijan (see 8, obs. 3,) since you know to say {shuo,) that the thing is good; 
 
 shuo opposed to tsou in the next clause, 
 
 2. why do you not them ? ch'ii, as above in 8, Szc, auxiliary of action. 
 
 3. with all your heart, &c. ; true-heart-true-strength - - wise. 
 
 40. Ohs. I. Let your every thought; the j»ie/i {^puyao, do not.) at the commencement of the four succeeding 
 
 clauses, shews that the verb in the first is also in the imperative mood. Were it not for the interposition of 
 the adverbial compound hsin-lisiti-nien-nie" -rh-ti, the imperative ^'JO would probably (Mttw pitwg. 
 
 2. practise not only; do not only do the out-side — 's nnreal good seeming. The word Iniung. biiyht- 
 ness, is colloquially used as onli/, and then oftener pronounced chiitg. The dictionaries trive it no such 
 meaninir, nor can the teachers suggest any sutScient reason for its employment as oiily. fit may be taken 
 from anotbi-r of its senses, ' to lay on colour ' ; q.J. superficially and nothing more.] 
 
 3. neglect as trivial; (so-'hir,) 'hu, suddenly, abruptly ; 40, wide apart; g.d. so far that things may slip 
 throu;,'h. 
 
 4. minor attentions; hsiao-ch'u-vrh, small \i\aces, petits soins. 
 
 5. only object; do not only aim at [chih I'u) the name, or repute, to be given yon by outsiders, u-ai 
 jin, = chin i-uai-ti Jen, persons without one's own house, or family. 
 
 6. begin well — end badly ; (on i-chHcu, i-'hou, see page 25, ex. 247, obs. G ;) do not at first [act] well, 
 afterwards on the other hand (i/u, see pa^c 18, ex. 202, obs. 5.) not well. 
 
 7. and you will then, &c., na, resumptive ; in that case then will you be tru-ly filial sons, &c. 
 
 41. — Ohs. 1. you must be punished; understand the authorities, government, hua7i, as the nominative of the 
 verb ch'u-chih, by putiishment to regulate or improve, = our verb, to correct. 
 
 2. accordiri;r to the law; /;7., then must [the authorities,] laying ludd of (?ja,) the punishment laws 
 (hsing-fa.) conect you. On nn as marking the iustrument see above 33, obs. 6 ; also page 20, ex. 2 12, obs. 7 ; 
 hsiiig is generic for all punishment. 
 
 3. tlirown away ; tit., but if it be that your heart within, you be not understanding, (ming-po or 
 ming-pai.) to correct you, =^ the correction of you, also would be {neh shih,) in vain; it would do no good, 
 though, or, evtn if, you were, &c. 
 
 42 Obs. 1. unable to bear; puji'n, see above 17, obs. 6. 
 
 2. reiterates ; fin-fan-fu-fu-ti, backward and forward exhorts {ch'i'an,) you. 
 
 3. one and all, tu-chia ; see above 17, ohs. 6. 
 
 4. in your own career; not only in your whole life (i-shuig) will you not get foul of the laws ;_/a» 
 as above in 17, obs. 9. 
 
 (56)
 
 OR, AMPLIFICATION OK THE SACHEI) EDICT. 
 
 5. but, In succeeding generations; chiu following 7>!<-ta« is disjunctive; at the same timo it properly 
 refers the effect to the cause in the clause precedinj; the one before it. 
 
 6. good example ; then there is [this eonsetjuence ;] your sous and grandsons also imitate (/wiao, see 
 IS, obs. 4 : hsiao, to imitate, hence to learn,) [your] good model. 
 
 43. — Obs. the pious sou begets, &c. ; the 'han or 'kuan is here the re in re-produce. 
 
 44. Obs. 1. could it be ; Icuo-jan, certainly thus, = indeed, constantly stands at the head of the concluding claase 
 
 of an address, or discussion, for i/"indccd. 
 
 2. there would be no part; then (Jsai,) there is not (would not be) a not universal-tranquillity— 's 
 [place.] 
 
 3. practice - - in earnest; nu-U-ti, straining-strength-wise do. 
 
 4. never, never, &c. : the English is purposely inverted; — wan-wnn, myriad myriad times do not, 
 •whatever betide do not regard [the duties here urged on you] as making (r/rinij) an every day outer- 
 ■wrapper; ch'ang, usual, in constant and ordinary use; t'ao, properly a halter, but any outer casing, (eg. 
 such as the wrapper which encloses a few volumes of Chinese booUs,) that may be slipped on or off at pleasure; 
 here rendered, every-day formalities. 
 
 3. ill requite, A^^-/u; the word hi, originally meaning fault or crime ; /«, to carry on the back, or 
 turn the back on. The hn in this compound is explained to mean, "commit the fault of turning the back 
 on." This is doubtful; it may be also written hu, solitary; (see note in the Cliincse Text.) 
 
 6. good purpose ; i-p'ien, as in page 22, ex. 22y ; {not as in page 12, ex. 144;) in all respectt good heart,, 
 all-excelleot purpose. 
 
 LITERAL ENGLISH. 
 
 1. It is the Lord often tliousand years' intention to say [that by] our Emperor, the Sacred Ances- 
 tor, [canonised as] the Philanthropic, [while he] sat sixty-one years [on the throne of the] empire, [the 
 object] most reverenced was [his] Ancestors collectively. [When he] himself composed the copious 
 Exposition of the classic on Filial Piety, [his purpose] was no other than a purpose to insist on the 
 whole empire's people all exhaustively observing the principle of filial piety. 2. Therefore of the sixteen 
 columns of the Sacred Edict, the first one accordingly speaks of hsiao, (filial duty,) and ?(, (brotherly 
 obligations.) The Lord of ten thousand years at present sitting on the throne, bethinking him of the 
 Sacred Ancestor's purpose (or desire) to educate man, has wrought out Sixteen Chapters of Amplification 
 of the Sacred Edict, [wherein] before [anything other subject] on the principles (or doctrine,) of filial 
 piety and brotherly obligation he discourses for you, all people, to hear. 
 
 3. What is /isjrto, (filial duty)? [The importance of] the duteous subordination principle is very 
 great. Above [we may] proceed (or refer) to heaven ; below to earth ; [of these and] man that is between 
 them, there is not one that has dispensed with (dispenses with) this principle. [Do you ask] how can I 
 say so? [I say it] only because duteous subordination is harmony in plenitude. Observe you, if heaven 
 and earth were not agreed, how could they succeed in bringing very many (so great a number of) men and 
 creatures forth? If man be not duteously subordinate, then is [he thus; he] has lost the element of 
 harmony [necessary to the operations of the twin powers of nature, that is] of heaven and earth ; how 
 can he still be-in-effect man ? 
 
 5. Now on the heart and bowels (feelings,) with which your father and motlier tenderly love you, 
 let me say a say for you. You, at the time you were a child carried in the bosom, were [you] hungry ? 
 yourselves were unable to eat rice ; were [you] cold, yourselves were unable to put on clothes. Your 
 daddy and dame beheld your face ; listened to your voice. You smiled ? then [they] rejoiced ; you cried ? 
 then [they were] sad. You walked? then step-by-step they followed )'ou. If it were that slightly you 
 had a particle of illness, then their sorrow was infinite; their tea was not tea; their rice was not rice; 
 they waited [till] your body was well, this [attained] then they set their hearts [at rest.] 6. Their eyes 
 [fixed as on] a target, they looked at you for one (or the first) year small, [in the course of] two years, 
 larger. [One] knows not how much trouble they sutfered, how many alarms they endured. They reared 
 you ; instructed and educated you ; [when they] had reached the time of your becoming a man and grown 
 [to full] she, they took a wife for you to bear you children ; they looked forward to your studying books 
 and making a name; they worked out a home and established a profession for you. What particular [of 
 all these] did not concern your father and mother's heart. This kindness, is it [kindness] that [the child] 
 can repay in full ? 
 
 7. Do you, if it be that [you] know not your father and mother's kindness, only upon your feelings 
 to your children think a thought ; then [you will] have comprehended it. 8. The ancient saying said 
 well, "Rear children, then [you] know your father and mother's kindness"; [but] since [or, once] you 
 know your father and mother's kindness, why go you not and duteously obey them ? This duteous 
 obedience is not indeed a thing not to be done. [It is not like the ancient examples of filial piety :] for 
 instance [of] the ancients, there was [one] who slept on the ice; there was [one] who cut his thigh; 
 there was [one] who [wouiU have] buried his child; this sort of things, [if they be our standard,] then it 
 is hard to imitate; neither (lit., also not) must you positively so do, and then (^ before you can) call 
 [your act] filial piety; simply must you in every thought of your whole heart lay (or place) your parents 
 in (or on) your heart, then will it be well. 
 
 10. If you really desire to repay their kindness, in all [things] whatsoever that are able to be ac- 
 complished by your own capacity, [there being] nothing to whicii [your efforts] do not extend, go 
 minister to them, the two old people. It is preferable that you yourself should less eat and less expend 
 somewhat ; that your father and mother should have all to eat, and all to spend. In their behalf under- 
 take [any] little labour. Go not to stake money, or drink wine; go not ivith men to fight. Do not in a 
 back-j)lace privily on your own account hoard up money ; fond of your own dame and children ; not 
 attending to your father and mother. Suppose that of out-side regularities, attending you come not 
 [to the point it is proper for you to desire, this] does not at all signify. You only require to be sincere 
 in your heart; then it is well. II. [If you are sincere,] then, [though it] be that every day [your fare 
 
 (57) p
 
 FIRST-CHAPTER OF THE SUliNG YU KUANG IISbN; 
 
 is] of coarse tea and insipid rice, only make tliem joyfully (or clieerfully) swallow it down, this tlien 
 will be duteousness. 
 
 12. If indeed taking this principle (or doctrine,) we speak of it pushing it [forward, so that its 
 component parts, at the same time,] spread open, then is [th's the case, namely, if there he] any iiiiigle 
 raising[of the hand,] any single movement [of the foot,] ( ^ any act, or conduct,) that is not normal, that 
 then is to have brought into contempt the person bequeathed by your parents; consequently it is not filiah 
 13. [A man] is doing business for the emperor; he does it not exhausting his heart and straining his 
 strength ; [that is, classically speaking,] he serves his ruler not faithfully ; [his act] then being of one and 
 the same character with that of [a man] who is not good to his father and mother, is consequently ano- 
 ther [instance of what is] not filial. 14. [Men] acting as officials, if they be not grod, provoke the 
 people's execration and derision : that accordingly is to have brought into contempt the person bequeathed 
 [to them] by their |)arents ; it is consequently another [instance of what is] not filial. 15. In the 
 presence of friends, [a man] speaks language or does things not satisfactorily ; he consequently disgraces 
 his father and mother; [he] also (or his act, &c.,) is not filial. Hj. if it be that you, soldiers, at the 
 time [that men] take their places in the ranks, [and the authorities] send forth troops, will not valiantly 
 and impetuously compete for the foremost [place,] you cause men to mock your delicacy and weakness ; 
 that accordingly is to have lowered in esteem the person bequeathed to you by your lather and mother; 
 [this] also is not filial. 
 
 17. At the present time, in the world rebellious children are very many. The father and mother 
 reprove them a sentence, they then change countenance [with anger ;] the father and mother abuse (or 
 curse) them a sound, they then retort; order them east, they go west; even are there [some] whose 
 own wives and children all [are] full-fed and warm, whose parents on the contrary suHer famine and 
 endure hunger ; [some] who themselves rushing forth [and bringing] woe in, involve their father and mother, 
 [making them] to suffer anger ; [some] who themselves getting into trouble, involve their father and 
 mother [making them] to see (sc, appear before) the authorities and enter the courts. 18. This kind of 
 persons, do not say heaven's law of right will not tolerate ; [besides this] there is [a consequence, 
 namely, that,] their own childien having seen the example, also as a matter of course following [in their 
 steps] imitate it. You behold the undutiful man ; where, notwithstanding, is he enabled to produce a 
 good son ? You think a thought ; still do you not discover [your error] ? 
 
 19. Having excluded father and mother, then is it elder and younger brother [that we have to con- 
 sider.] These brothers, it is not at all that they are not two persons ; but [at the same time] it is [the 
 case that] the bone and flesh on his [your brother's] body, is just the bone and flesh on your body ; 
 therefore [men] denominate [brothers] hand and foot. If you have been wanting towards your brother, 
 then it is [that] you have been wanting towards your father and mother. 20. Thus is it that brothers, 
 [though] they have not a common mother, still are one father's bone and blood ; let them not say they 
 have not a common mother, and then regard [themselves as] making two species. , 
 
 21. In the world, the most intimately related [person to a man] is the wife. If it be that the wife 
 die, still can he additionally wed one. If it be that [one of his] brothers be dead, where still can he 
 find one ? You think a thought, is it withal [the case that you] ought affectionately to love, or not 
 affectionately to love ? 
 
 22. what fashion of affectionate love, [do you ask?] He who is the younger brother must rever- 
 ently regard the elder brother. In all things, whatsoever they may be, whether it be the eating rice, 
 whether it be the putting on clothes, whether it be the courtesies [paid to any one] following* (or in 
 company with) others, whether it be the speaking words, whether it be the walking on the road, whether 
 it be the sitting, whether it be the standing, [in] all must [he] utterly give way to him who is the elder 
 brother. 23. [Among men] of the olden time, then it was [thus, that of] the [persons] dwelling together 
 in one village in one hamlet, if (another) compared with me, were older ten years, 1 then deferred (or 
 obeyed) him as standing for (as though he were,) an elder brother ; if he, compared with me, were older five 
 years, I at his shoulder followed him ; I did not venture to outstep him. [If, where] outside men were, 
 compared with me, in age greater, I was still obliged in this fashion to treat them with respect, how much 
 more, [when] it is an own brother, [am I obliged ?J 24. To come to those who are elder brothers ; [they] 
 must tenderly love the younger brothers. [As to one of my| younger brothers, leave it to him to be 
 {= let him be,) of such or such an age, only as if he were a chdd do I behave towards him. 25. If, for 
 example, my child were to fail in any way (lit., not to be material, sc, good material,) I should [though 
 he is my child,] still be seriously angry with him ; abuse him ; beat him ; [but when I] have turned my face 
 back [to its former colour,] as formerly I am fond of him. 26. Only and singly [when I] shall have come 
 to [the case of one ofj my brothers, if he be not good, in that case nevertheless I am not to choose gently 
 (or deliberately) to admonish him, and reprove him I It having happened that [in the case of] brothers 
 (sc, me and my brother,) there is a trifle amiss, there must consequently arise quarrelling and fighting ! 
 27. Think a thought; you with your brother both are of one daddy and dame born and bred ; if you strike 
 your brother, then it is [with] yourself striking yourself one fashion. He who is the younger brother 
 again (or yet more,) does not know right from wrong ; seeing (sc, feeling) his elder brother strike him, 
 he also thereupon in return raises his hand. Compare [this case with that of] a man's hand and foot ; if 
 it were that [he] missing his hand struck his foot, you will hardly say that in return he would take his 
 foot and go to kick his hand ; eh ? 
 
 28. At the present time [where] brothers are not agreed, it is all by reason of squabbles about wealth, 
 or it is that they have listened to their wives' talk. These little wives' chat is also not altogether [talk, 
 that is] all without sense; and accordingly because their talk in the talking also has a trifle of sense, 
 consequently, without knowing, without perceiving, they hear it [with such attention as enables it] to 
 enter in. 
 
 29. For instance, she who is the elder brother's wife to the eider brother says, [My] brother-in-law 
 (your junior,) how lazy [is he !] how he spends money I You with bitter bitter toil make money, [and 
 
 * Courtesies ; visits or messages of congratulation or condolence ; /U., the following - [all] - men' s obsevvances ; li, the 
 
 ceremonies observed, lui following, along viilb, jcn-ckia persons, = chuny jen-cIiia, all persons. 
 
 (58)
 
 oil, AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACKED EDICT. 
 
 while with it you] keep him alive, he nevertheless is talking of the long anil spciikiitp of the slioit : ycni 
 will harilly say that we are liis children and wife? [or, as such] ohiigeil as of rijj;ht to obey him? That 
 younger brother's wife is also [in this case, viz. that] she to the younger brother says, So then it is that 
 your elder brother is able to make money; [well,] you also have made money; you in the hnuse |after| 
 the same fasiiion as [he, are] doing long and doing short ; [the fact] is, consequently, [that when one | hires 
 a servant for long service, [he] even is not so liard-worked [a man. Yet, if we reiVr] specially to his 
 children, then they are children; they buy this to eat, they buy that to eat; you will hardly say [that if 
 we refer to] our children, in that case, [they] all ought to (are to) die? 
 
 31. Of talk after this fashion, to-day there is a little, to-morrow there is a little : it (the talk) cannot 
 allow those who are the elder brothers not to hear [it, with such attention as enables it] to go in ; from 
 this [cause the brothers] take their brotherly affections (and make, or let, them,) l)econic all cold and 
 insipid. Day by day they agglomerate [their imagined wrongs,] so that [at last] they come to fight 
 and quarrel. 
 
 32. [This should not be,] but they do not feel that brothers in fact are one man ; [that] conse- 
 quently, [if it] be that he who is the elder brother is somewhat without power (.vc, means,) the subsisting 
 him by him who is the younger brother, indeed is [a thing] that by right ought [to be, and that,) 
 accordingly, [the case] is [thus; if] on any occasion (Itl., any time within,) there be [a case] of uncon- 
 sidered words or unconsidered expressions [on the part of one's brother, one is] to regard him only as 
 drunk, or as being |one who] speaks dream language, and thereupon the whole party should let go | their 
 respective angers : — all this they do not feel ;) specially, [of all people, thei/\ must recognise [such trifles as] 
 serious, {lit. true.) 33. [Let us] instance the two hands ; the right hand is very capable ; [the hand that] 
 writes characters is it ; [the hand that] manipulates the counting-board also is it ; [that] which takes hole! 
 of things also is it: this left hand, [if we consider it,~\ then it is very clumsy; [yet one] has not heaid 
 that there was a person with (lit. who took,) his right hand going to beat his left. Elder brother and 
 younger are intimate [as] hand and foot; as how [should they be persons] who wrangle over the long and 
 debate the short? 34. You think a thought; money is a chance-coming thing; [a thuig] which, [when] 
 it is gone, still can [you] have [more] to come : the women, (or, our wives,) they are not with me (= our- 
 selves,) of one daddy and dame the born [children ;] they know what sense (or reason ?) 
 
 35. Only regard [this, that when] brothers are not friendly, the father and mother are certain to be 
 enraged. You only see your own children fight; in your heart are you angry or not angrj' ? [Because 
 they do not lose siijht of this idea,] therefore, of men that are dutiful sons, [when such they are] then 
 there are no [men] who are not friendly brothers. 36. The ancient proverb says well, " To strike the 
 tiger, stiil [should you] have your own brother [as a companion ; when you] array the ranks, still do you 
 require father and son as soldiers." Again [a proverb] says well, "Advantageous slaying is [the slaying 
 of] another ; ruinous slaying is [that of] yourself." Again [one] says, " [When] brothers are not agreed 
 bystanding men mock.'* [You are] attending only to your unimportant anger, and then [while you do 
 so.] there are persons who pick up and tattle of your fault-finding [one with another.] Either there is 
 fighting or there is going to law; [whichever it be] in that case there is not a [man] who does not ruin 
 family and property. 38. You, if you be dutiful and affectionate, [those of you | who are people, (sc, sub- 
 jects,) then will be good people, [those] who are soldiers then will be stout sons of 'Han. 39. But [the 
 fact] 's [thus; oh] you soldiers and people, which one does not know that duteous subordination is a good 
 thing; that the concord of brothers is a good thing; since it is so, that you know to say that it is good, 
 why do you not go [and] with true heart and true strength do it, 40. [As a thing] necessary, with your 
 heart ever pondering it, bethink you of your father and mother, and your brethren. Do not only do the 
 outside empty fair seeming; do not hurry by the small matters ; do not only aim at outside men's empt)' 
 praise (lit., name;) do not first be good, and afterwards on the other hand not good; [doing] that, then 
 will you be verily verily dutiful sons, verily verily dutiful brothers. 
 
 4E If you be not duteously obedient, if as brothers not friendly, then must [the authorities] by the 
 penal laws correct you ; but [if it] be that within your heart you are not enlightened, the correcting you will 
 also be in vain. 42. The Lord often thousand years in his heart cannot bear [this;] therefore again and 
 again he exhorts you. [If] you choose to bear the talk of the Lord often thousand years, [and, hearing 
 it,] the whole of you to live as duteous sons and dutiful brothers, not only [throughout your own] entire 
 lifetime will you not offend the law ; [there is another advantage ;] it will consequently be that your sons 
 and grandsons also will imitate the good example. 43. The common saying says well, " 'Jhe duteous 
 again produces the duteous son; the rebellious again brings up the rebellious. 44. [If] in reality [it 
 were to be] thus, [that your] sons and grandsons, all were to be duteous sons and dutiful brothers, 
 [throughout] the empire then there would not be [a place] that was not perfectly tranquil. [Do] ycu 
 all, straining your strength, do [what is here enjoined ;] ten thousand times ten thousand times do not 
 regard [it as] making (sc, being) an every-day outer form, [and, so regarding it] repudiate the all good 
 purpose (lit., heart good in its integrity,) of the Sacred Ancestor, the Philanthropic Emperor. 
 
 END OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 (59)
 
 
 END OF PART IL 
 
 OF THE 
 
 HSIN CHING LU.
 
 PART III. 
 
 HSIN CHING LU. 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 PEKING DIALECT.
 
 Section 1.— -Translation of Exercises in the Tones and Pronunciation of the 
 Peking Dialect. 
 
 ,j 2. — The Tone Exercises niONETicALLY arranged. 
 
 „ 3.— Observations on the Tones and Pronunciation.
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 PEKmG DIALECT. 
 
 The English of the Tone Exercises is given because an acquaintance with tlie 
 sense makes it easier to retain laws and illustrations of sound, hut the student 
 is earnestly requested not to make light of the following sentences on the ground 
 of their apparent triviality. They have been composed to illustrate the laws of the 
 Tones and Breathings of the Peking Dialect, some explanation of which will be 
 found at the end of Part III, and without careful recognition of which no speaker 
 need claim to be ovith certainty intelligible. 
 
 1. What! with a stab an inch in length, to accuse the pieman oi pretending to be hurt ! 
 
 Lit. [When some one] employing- a knife, has stuck the selling oil-fried dumpling's [man], the mouth 
 (= the wound, heing) a span long, [do you or does any one] still say he is fei^-ning pain ? 
 
 Obs. 1. The dumpling called yu cha kuei, the oil broiled devil, is a reminiscence of an unpopular, 
 minister of the Sung dynasty, of whom the people testified their detestation by making effigies of 
 himself and his wife, and frying them in oil. 2. c/i«' , to stab c/in^ , a span ; the same character. 
 
 2. Oh dear ! I fear they are carrying him oif to the court, and when the case has been gone 
 into, they'll just put him to death. 
 
 Lit. Oh dear! or Alas ! [I, or they, &c., fear] [that] him [they] are dragging up to the ya-inin, the 
 official residence and court of the authority, [who when he shall have] examined clearly, = convict- 
 ed will then kill. 
 
 Oh&. ch'a-ming, to search till the thing is clear, to ascertain a fact. 
 
 3. There was a man seen by a member of the Censorate in the tea-shop with his hands on his 
 hips, of so remarkable an appearance, that he was taken into custody. 
 
 Lit. A yii-shih of the i'u ch'a yiian seeing that the tea shop within there was a-clutchiDg-[his]-, 
 waist — 's man strange, or singular, seizing him went. 
 
 Obs. The yii-shih, literally imperial historiographers, are the Censors, or members of the t'u ch'a 
 yiian, all-scrutinising court, which we generally' translate the Censorate. 2. na, strictly to seize; not 
 carry ; which is implied in the ch'ii, went. 
 
 4. Thieves come clambering over the roof, not afraid of being taken either. 
 
 Lit. Thieves on the house above, or top, creepingly, or, on all fours, climb; also do they not fear 
 capture («a.) 
 
 5. [I] had taken off my cap, and was just at the door of my privates apartments, when I ran 
 against a creditor, the man of all others I most wished to avoid. 
 
 Lit. [I had] taken off the cap; was entering the dwelling-house door; enemies' way is narrow; 
 encountered a creditor. 
 
 Obs. 1. DwcUintr-house, chai ; the back part of the ya-men, where the family lives. 
 2. The man of all others, &c. ; very freely rendered; yiian chia urh, feud people, the parties who 
 are at feiul ; for these the world is proverbially narrow ; no road is wide enough. The speaker 
 would have avoided his creditor as he would liis worst enemy ; but against his enemy, as the proverb 
 has it, he is sure to run. 3. creditor, the master, chit, of the debt. 
 
 6. "Who was it that was beating the green-grocer just now, with the man's tail under his foot ? 
 
 Lit. Just now, [with his] foot trampling the selling-vegetables [one] — 's tail, beat [him] — 's [person] 
 = beat-ing [him], that one was who ? 
 
 Obs. I. The second ti makes the whole sentence from kang-ts'ai to ta an attributive of jcn, man, 
 understood ; or, in other words, it is the relative pronoun representing the agent understood. 
 
 2. the na-ho is almost redundant, so far as syntax is concerned, but gives emphasis aud clearness 
 to the question. Qui olus mercantem, calcans capillos, modo verberabat, iste quis est ? 
 
 7. Everything topsy-turvy ; nothing but worry ; rebellion on every side ; is life worth having ? 
 
 Lit. A turning back this way, turning back that way — 's [state of things!] very heart troubling. 
 [With] every place upset (fan), still [do you, or, can one] think of eating rice? 
 
 Obs. 1. fan^ indicates rather re-turning or turning backwards : Jit, over, or downwards, turning ; 
 lai, to come := this way, ch-ii, to go, that way. 2. fan' , the common word for revolt, subversion 
 of authority, 3. to eat rice, the common equivalent for living, taking meals, 
 
 (63)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 S. In my experience, the customs people of Shan Hsi and Shan Hsi have been generally personi 
 of good character. 
 
 Lit. I see [that among the] Shan' Si and Shaa' Si managing custom house — 's people the loving to 
 do virtue — 's [people are] many. 
 
 9. It upset me no little just now to sec something like a man on the top of the house. 
 
 Lit. Just now [1] saw the house upou, like as if there were a man; but, it caused me greatly not Jo 
 set my heart at rest. 
 
 Obs. The disjunctive tao has something of the force of our vulgar, " Well, hut it troubled me, I 
 can tell you." 
 
 10. One would be soon boiled alive, if one were to lie down in the T'ang Shan baths. 
 
 Lit. [In the] T'ang Shan bathing-reservoirs within — 's water, lying down [one would be a] SOOQ 
 stew — ed [person.] 
 
 Ohs. 1. The baths are by a hot spring near Peking. 2. The first clause is of place; as we should 
 say, s/ttii is in the ablative case. 
 
 11. To be accusing me of pride, after all I've gone through, when I have not even a fur jacket 
 to my back ! 
 
 Lit. [When] I, [if you talk of] suffering, have suffered ; [when] even a fur doublet also not have 
 
 1, [do you or does any one] still call rae proud ? 
 
 Obs. 1. shou, lit., to receive, = to suffer. 2. shuo followed by a person, to blame. 
 
 12. I heard the Gazette-copyist state that there has been a grand discussion at Court, He saya 
 they want to coin large cash. 
 
 Lit. [I] hear the copying Gazette — 's [man] say, the Court within [there is a] noise, or squabble 
 [he] says [they] want to coin cfi'ao. 
 
 Obs. 1. The Gazette, /;ao, literally the intelligence; ching-pao, metropolitan announcement, is 
 used specially of the public papers promulgated at Peking, which we call the Peking Gazette. 
 
 2. ch'ao is used of the large cash equal in value to ten, fifty, or hundred of the common cash ; also 
 of government notes. Neither are in great repute. 
 
 13. He stuck in a fan, and as the sun was not out, went off to the common to pick tea leaves. 
 
 Lit, He stuck in a piece fan ; availed himself of the sun not coming out ; then going to the desert wiid- 
 -ground's within, to pick tea-leaves, went. 
 
 Obs. 1. )/eh, special of things thrust into the breast or other part of one's dress. 2. pa, the 
 classifier of fans, knives, locks, and the like. 3. ch'en, following up lao-yeh. lit. the old gentleman, 
 the sun, — 's not being out. 4. chiu, accordingly, such being the case ; almost redundant. 5. wang, 
 preceding the place and the object of the movement ; and ch'ii, which simply reinforces and confirm* 
 wang, following it. 6. man indicates extent; '■huang, sterility; such an epithet would apply to a 
 larger tract oi yeli-ti, wild, uncultivated land, than is here intended. 
 
 14. Nor is that the case with Mr Yeh or his retinue. 
 
 Lit. Yeh, Lao-yeh (Mr Yeh), together with his ya-men people, also not thus. 
 .^ Obs. On j/e/4-?nt'« see Meadows's " Desultory Notes," p. 107. 
 
 15. A hard case indeed, to have fattened a pig and killed him, and then to have his liver taken 
 by thieves. 
 
 Lit. Not easy ; to rear a fat pig to kill ; and then by vagabond-class [persons] is stolen the liver 
 going, = away. 
 
 Ohs. l./ei yung-i, not easy, difRcult, hard case. 2. yu, and then, in the nest place. 3. by, chiao ; 
 see above. Part. 1, page 9, ex. 108. 
 
 16. He spat in the face of the guest who was there to meet him, and said he was not fit company 
 for him. 
 
 Lit. He spat the companion-guest's one, (= whole,) face spittle; said he did not match with him 
 sitting, or to sit. 
 
 Obs. I. p'ei'-k'o, the guest to play second to one. 2. p'ei\ to match or mate with, suit; was not 
 worthy with him to sit. 
 
 17. Don't mix salt with my opium. Well, you are stupid; you won't be tolerated. 
 
 Lit. Opium smoke within, mix not can [you] salt; you truly don't discern the eye. You demand, or 
 exact men's satiety, = disgust. 
 
 Obs. 1. Opium smoke, ya-p^ienyen, here means the drug, to consume which is ordinarily rendered 
 by cU'-ih yen, to eat smoke. 2. discern ; the word yen, eyes, here represents a proverb, viz., mei yen 
 kao ti, eyebrows and eyes high and low, k'an pu cfi'u lai, [he] cannot see ; he has not discernment to 
 see by the look of a man's face, by the circumstances of a case, what to do and what to avoid. 
 
 18. Your face is all begrimed and scorched ; you are really an odious sight. 
 
 Lit. Your face upon that smoke-hegriraed-fire-scorched — 's colour, the eyes beholding it, ( = when 
 seen,) truly demands disgust. 
 
 Obs. Of course ij is the condition of your face that is the odious sight, but it will have been seen 
 elsewhere in these translations, that the Chinese frequently isolate what we should call the subject, 
 or the object, as though some such word as quoad preceded it ; q.cl. — " As to that face of yours, it is 
 disgusting to look at." 
 
 19. That man who was calling to his pigs just now was once a. peile. He was degraded for 
 extortion, but to my mind ho is more comfortable now than he used to be. 
 
 Lit. 3 ast now lt-le-\vhe pigs-call-ing (ti), that man formerly was a /)e!-/t'. Because he constrained, 
 practised extortion on, men, [the emperor] stripped [him) of oflice, I regard him [as having] never- 
 theless (tao), compared with formerly, still more comfort, or, enjoyment. 
 
 (64)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 Ohs. 1. fc-fJ, a soiiiifl ill tin? iioiHi of pi-nplo ciilliiiif f.o pijrs ; c/n', translafoil ?o*se, adverbialises 
 li'-h'. 2. tIie^)«'-/(', or hei-lc, is (1m^ I'otiitli order of tht- liii|K'iiiil iioliility, a Maiiclm tilli'. it. formerly; 
 ts'iiii;/ as ivcll as izu, tli()ii;;li more {jcncnilly si^jiifyin^ from \v\\tn\ conncctod wilii time, i.s 
 sometimes very unmistakeably, at; ts'umj ts'iiiii is, literally, yVoM of old, but is almost always simply, 
 of old. 
 
 20. Do you not iniiul the licat ? It makes one perspire all the worse to drink hot tea when the 
 weather is so hot. 
 
 Lit. [In] summor-heat,— yellow [=g:lan"nnf] sky — 's [time] to drink hot tea, that more produces, 
 throws out (ch'it), perspiration. Do not you fear heat, or, to he hot.'' 
 
 21. Certainly, when business is done all tor ready money and without any credit, there is no fear 
 of insolvency. The only danger is of altercation. 
 
 Xi7. [In the cise of) present (^ ready) money, —no trust — 's bnyirifr and selling, utterly [docs one] 
 not fear to diminish, or lose, capital ; [one] only fears, that tliere will be miuth and tongue, = dis- 
 cussion. Compare our vulgar, cheek, jaw, lip, &c. 
 
 Oils. Utterly, t'ii/nq, one does not at all fear, you never fear, emphasises the assertion. I have 
 therefore rendered it, certainly. 
 
 22. Give a higher salary, and make a point of hiring a competent clerk. 
 
 Lit. The quota beyond add keep, specially invite a (it-for-use — 's man. 
 
 Ohs. I. Quota ; f or tirf', a fixed nninlier or amount. 2. keep; hsiu, is the Latin ornare, to adorn 
 or to equip ; the salary, specially of the lisien-sheucj, clerks or teachers, is hsiu-chin, lit. their equi[)- 
 raent-gold, for which hsin is here used. 3. invite; cli'inr/ is the polite fcn-m of hiring; you ha, hire 
 a servant. 4. fit for use, ti-yung, attaining to this, that his employer can use him ; with tiie aid of 
 ti made attributive oSJen, man. 
 
 2.3. Tlie Ping Ma Szu was removed from his post because some one's clothes were caught in the 
 carriage wheel and torn. 
 
 Lit. Because a carriage pulling-tore clothes, [the emperor,] taking the ping-ma-szu., struck away 
 his ortice, ?= deprived him of it. 
 
 Ubs. The ping-mrt-szii are certain metropolitan magistrates under the Censorate. The allusion is 
 to the consequences of a row in the street arising out of an accident. Some one's clothes were 
 caught in a wheel and torn ; hence a disturbance which cost the ofhcial his place. 
 
 24. I am told that your son, Sir, to your great credit, has been promoted; and I am come with 
 the news. Aa soon as I can find a day, it will be my duty to pay you a visit for the express 
 purpose of offering my formal congratulations. 
 
 Zi/., Your palace within the virtue-walking is good. I hear it said [your] honoured male has high 
 ascended. Therefore specially come [Ij to communicate a piece (=this piece) of news. VVhen 
 the day has changed, I, possessing a vacancy (= leisure,) still must special-mind-special-iateat-wise 
 come to say joy. 
 
 Obs. I. Your palace within; shang, lit., upon. In polite conversation you speak of the house of 
 the person you address asfu-sliang; your own home is chia-li. 2. The elevation of the son, 
 ling-lang, is ascribed to the virtues of the father, and vice versa in the case of his downfafl. 3. Day 
 changed, another day, when the speaker has leisure to appear formally dressed, with the proper 
 cards, &c., still will he have to, must he, special-heart special-raind-wise,<j, come. 
 
 25. The unmerciful ill-conditioned wretch held his wife down, and kept on beating her. 
 
 Lit. The no-mercy-no-right-feeling — 's [one] pressing-down his old woman, only was it beat. He 
 held her down, and blows were all. 
 
 26. He will be sure to find fault with this for being so stale; it will set his teeth on edge. 
 Why don't you go and buy some fresh without loss of time ? 
 
 Lit. He for-certain will scoldingly say [this eatable is] stale ; eating it the teeth are roughened, 
 feel the grit. Do you still not seizing the early time to buy some go? 
 
 Obs. 1. ch'Cii tsiio'-rh, lose no time. 2. some; ti, often appended to adjectives in this way ; 
 best regarded as a relative pronoun ; some that is good. 
 
 27. There was a misunderstanding about an ink-slab of Old Quarry stone that was fished out of 
 a rain-pit, and it has ruined utterly the parties concerned. 
 
 Lit. [From] a water-pit within [some one] fished out apiece Old Quarry ink-slab coming. [From it] 
 there arose an exhausting-house — mining-estate — "s [condition of things.] 
 
 Obs. I. The Old Quarry is an excavation famous for the gen t'ai, smooth slabs, on which the Chi- 
 nese rub their ink. It is in Chao-ch'ing (Shau-king ;) a department of Kuang Tung. 2. The object 
 interposed between the verb lao ch'u and its au.viliary lai. The word lao is special of things in the 
 water. 3. nao, see above Part I, page 18, ex. 291 ; the ti is most likely corrupt for ti ; it has at all 
 events the same force. 
 
 28. How dare you continue so cross-grained, when you are actually moaning with pain? 
 
 28. Lit. Already your sickness -'s [case being such that you] groan, still [do you] dare cross wise- walk- 
 ing-the-tyrants' path-wise to shew churlishness .'' 
 
 Obs. 1. Contrarily, 'hCng, crosswise. 2. In ancient history five tyrants, pa, usurped the authority 
 of the kings (wang), whose ways, tao, were in the right direction; those of the pa were 'Ac'W^ 
 crosswise. 
 
 29. My annoyance at not being able to correct my lapsus lingum, inflamed the place on my neck.. 
 
 Lit. Because [I] made a mistake in talk, and was unable to alter it. [this circumstance] taking my 
 neck upon— 's sore [caused it] more with bad matter to distend. 
 
 Obs. i. Tliis is perfectly idiomatic, and the sense as plain as need be, but it is very difficult to 
 bring it within rules of syntax. There is no apodosis to answer to the first clause; because, &c., 
 
 (65) R
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 must be followed, wo should say, by a nominative of the subject to it, viz., the sore. This, on the 
 contrary, is governed by tlic verb pa, a construction wbiob.as lias repeatedly been shewn, so gen- 
 erally precedes the verb transilivo, as to antliorise us in termini,' pa the index of the object. Here, 
 however, the verb chuiig, to sHell, is intransitive. It would be quite as correct to omit pa, and then 
 all our diiliciilties of synta.\ would vanish. 2. c'M, noxious inllueuce, matter, (not jms,) which ha.s no 
 business to be where it is. 
 
 SO. Tlierc's a swarm of wasps, that will sting any one they come across. If there was a cleft in 
 the ground that would hold me, I would get into it bodily. 
 
 Lit. There is a den, or receptacle, [of] wa.sps j [ if] they meet a man then they sting ; were there a 
 ground seam, I entirely would burrow. 
 
 Oils. I . wo, den. &c., the contaiuiuff for the contained. Lit., a swarm wasps ; so, a puff wind, a fleet 
 ships, a body thieves. 2. A teacher insists that the last clause is eondition;d ; were it e.vpressive of 
 an intention to get into a hole then before the speaker, he says, some .such word as hsianij, I purpose, 
 would precede tsuan, to burrow. In such distinctions a Chinese must be heard with great caution. 
 
 31. A man with a large family of boys and girls, to get on, must really be hard of bearing; [he 
 must think for himself,] and not be taking up this notion and the other notion. 
 
 Lit. [A] sons-and-daunhters-many — 's man, ears altonjether requires hard. Be not, = let him BOt be, 
 a thrce-miuds-two-intentions — 's [man, J then will it be well. 
 
 32. What do you mean ? One day is as good as another, the day before yesterday, yesterday, 
 to-day, to-morrow, or the day after. 
 
 Obs. 1. What do you mean V lU., whence such language; a common negation or objection, in 
 politeness or discussion. 2. Good as another ; lit., all are possible, will do. 
 
 33. If a Shan Hsi man asks you to dinner on a festive occasion, there is sure to be a theatrical 
 performance. 
 
 Lit. [When] an old one of the West requests [one] to go to the mat, if it be because of a joyful 
 matter, surely and positively there will be a play. 
 
 Obs. 1. The west hsi, here for S^hau' Hsi. 2. To go to the mat, on which formerly one sat at 
 meat; to feast. Com^Ate onr banquet, horn banco. 
 
 34. He pulled oft' his clothes and shifted his chair, because it was not placed as be wanted it. 
 
 Obs. fang ti ; the ti for te ; in the placii g it did not attain, or, he had not attained. 
 
 S5. Why, he was put to the torture in that dispute about the family property, and now he pre- 
 tends to be a man of wealth, and gives himself endless airs. 
 
 Lit. He because [they] quarrelled about family property, endured the nipping-staves; nevertheless, 
 falsely dressed as, in the guise of, affecting to be, a wealth master, does he set forth what stall or 
 rack I 
 
 Obs. I. The chia-kiin, are three staves so arranged as to compress the ankles of a prisoner. 
 2. pai-chia-tzu, to make a parade, give one self airs ; chia,3i rack or shop- window; a figure from dealers 
 who hang out all their wares. 
 
 36. I ran against the box the blind man was carrying, and upset it, which gave him a start. 
 
 Lit. I By the collision, p'ing, [causing] to fall, knocked down, the-by-the-bliud-man-carri-ed (<i) box, 
 frightened him a jump. 
 
 <jbs. The bo.x which the blind man, Jisii-izu, was carrying; the ti making the agent and the verb 
 into an attributive of the noun hsia-tzTi, which is the object o( p'cng-tiao. There is some doubt about 
 the right character for the latter word, tiao. 
 
 37. My rice-gruel was just made when a visitor came in, and I could do nothing less than let 
 him have the best of it. 
 
 Lit. Just at the moment my rice-gruel, congee, was done, = cooked, there came a visitor. [Other] 
 speech (or words) could not rise; I yielded to him to drink, the drinking of, the thick. 
 
 Obs. I. chiang pu-ch'i, nothing else could I say than offer to give up, i;c. 2. chiang, the thicker 
 part of fluids, as opposed to hsi, the fine, or thin. 
 
 38. There is a report that all the country people have submitted to the authorities ; which, when 
 I come to think of it, I do not think likely. 
 
 Obs. 1. uen ti, or wen te. 2. The country people, ?z'/. the villages down; people, sJiang, go up to 
 the cities which are the centres of jurisdiction. 3. hs'ong, to submit, having beeu in rebellion. 
 4. when I come to think; lit., carefully, tzu-hsi, think a thought, it is as if, shili-'-hu, not likely. 
 
 39. They were arranging that in the autumn they would put a few taels of silver together, and 
 hire a vehicle and start on a tour. 
 
 Obs. 1. Arranging, shang-liang, consulting, before decision. 2. Hang*, the classifier of carriages drawn 
 by animals. 
 
 40. Those girls were drinking no-mi wine one against the other at such a pace, that they were 
 half-choked. 
 
 Obs. 1. The girls were ch'iang^ -che, snatching-ly. 2. chiu-niang, a fermented liquor made frori 
 the no-mi, old man's rice. 3. cA'iaji^'is properly the eating of g.rain by birds; it is here used ^f 
 swallowing in over haste. \ 
 
 41 . Red pepper is not to be put in the mouth. If you have a pain in your foot, stew some iL\ 
 water, and you will relieve the foot by bathing it when you go to bed. \ 
 
 Lit. The flower pepper do not munch. [If your] foot has paiu, [at] sleeping — 's time, boil, or stew 
 [some in] water, wash the foot, then [will it be] well. 
 
 Obs. ao, or ?igao, supposes that there is something in the water; to boil plain water is tso k-ai 
 shut, 
 
 (66) 
 
 /tt
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 42. I was in great luck, for just as I had raised myself on tiptoe to take a look, a very pretty 
 
 person presented Iicrsclf 
 
 Zil. [I liadj just lifted up my foot to look, then there occurred [what was] apt or well contrived; 
 ,,« there came a delicate sUinned womiiti. 
 
 '• obs 1. The speaker has been lookinj; over a wall. 2. ch'iw-cJi'i.he raised himself on his foot 
 
 comin!j;faj. auxiliary of the foregoing verb, 2. is'ou, fortuitous coucurreiice, c/4'iao skilful; the 
 
 French lumber blen, 
 
 43. So you want to buy a fife instead of going to scliool, my little fellow; are you not afraid of 
 being lauglied at? 
 
 44. I watclicd the floating calabash out of the corner of my eye, and I saw the bleacher fish it 
 
 out of tlie water. 
 
 Lit. The water upon there was fl lat-in^ one calabash; I took [my] eye half-closed, or, as if it were 
 ailinf;; [I saw) the cloth suii-niiig- [man] lisli it up. 
 
 Obs. I. Observe the independence of these three clauses. 2. na,to take, before the instrument. 
 
 45. If you have anything to say keep it to yourself. Don't tell that mumbling fellow. He is a 
 very cross-grained subject. 
 
 Lit. [If you [have talk, bolt it. Do not telling it to that mumbling-lip man speak. His temper is 
 very turned and twisted. 
 
 Obs I. Temper, p'if/i'!, the siiifF or matter of the inner coat of the stomach. See Morrison's 
 Syllabic Dictionary, PE. 8325. 2, cross-grained, twisted, &c.; niu-pieh, warped ; like a board that 
 will not lie flat. 
 
 46. I see your father constantly pulling his moustaches about. 
 
 Obs. 1. Moustache, p'ie/i^ , is a particular stroke of the pencil ; that which makes the left side of the 
 character j»c(, eight. 2. pulling about, 7iie/i, pinching, twiddling. 
 
 47. He has never eaten sliced dough (dvff), or boiled brinjal. He is a regular bumpkin. 
 
 Obs. sliced dough, lit., sliced wheat. 2. ch'ieh t'iao-tzu, lit., a faltering stick ; a booby. 
 
 48. A scorpion has found its way into my shoe, and stung my foot so that it bled. If I could 
 get some crab to eat, it would stop the pain. 
 
 Lit. A scorpion [having! burrowed, ensconced itself, at my shoe's inside, taking my foot punctured (or 
 poisoned) forth blood coming. [Could I] obtain to eat crab, then could I stop the pain. 
 
 Obs. I. The objoct hsieh between the two auxiliaries ch'iih and lai, the former of which indeed is 
 here almost as much a part of the verb che, as in Latin ex is of exigo, expello. Cht, to inject venom, 
 to sting. 
 
 49. Some years ago, when he was out of employ, he was very poor things. The case is evidently 
 very diflerent now. 
 
 Lit. Before some years, [being] at leisure, he was a very small utensil ; now evidently, — well, he is 
 very different. 
 
 Obs. J. Small utensil, hsiao ch'i ; the expression may reflect on his capacity, or his liberality, or 
 both. 2. well; chiu, should in fact not be translated It is of much the same value as a stop would 
 be to emphasise now ; — Now, — oh ! there is great difference. 
 
 50. It is hard to get rid of cotton in the summer. Who makes up cotton garments when the 
 weather is hot ? 
 
 iiV. ( In] summer weather — 's [time] cotton is hard to sell; who still makes cotton [clothes] in hot 
 weather to put on ? 
 
 Obs. 1. Understand s/iih-'hou-'rh, time, after the first ti. 2. hsia-ching, summer condition, summer; 
 t'ien, sky, weather. 3. stil, 'hai, yet, though the weather be changed. 4. understand i-shang, 
 clothes, after mien-ti, cotton — 's, of cotton, 
 
 51. His tears flowed in one continuous stream. He cried so that he could recognise no one. 
 In fact his face was like that i>f a dead man in his coffin. 
 
 Obs. 1. His weeping attained, <t', a flowing of tears drop-drop-wise. 2. i-ecognise no one; lit, add or 
 include, lien, [any] man, did he not know. 3. in fact, &e. ; lit., his face upon, in face, well, he 
 resembled a having entered his coffin — 's dead man. 
 
 52. You idiot, you have been rubbing some indigo on your face. 
 
 Obs. 1. Idiot ; lit., half-mad one. 2. rubbing, lit., working, handling, playing tricks with {neng,') a drop, 
 or small portion {tien-tzu,) of indigo, you have rubbed your face. 3. neng is also read nung and 
 lung. 
 
 53. How can you romance so in broad day ? 
 
 Lit. The great sun's ground within, = or, the ground the sun shines on, you [with your averments 
 that we are] short of a sky, aud that there is no day, or sun, say or mean what ? Compare our 
 moon of green cheese, &c. 
 
 54. Isn't it a sheer waste of time to be trying to strike fire with a flint as damp as that is ? 
 
 Lit. A thoroughly wet fire-stone, you use it to strike fire. Is it not vainly, blankly, to expend 
 trouble .'' 
 
 Obs. 1. Thoroughly wet, ching-shih. 2. vainly, lit, white, hlank. 
 
 55. Though he is a poor plebeian he has no small collection of antiquities, 
 
 Obs. 1. Plebeian, min, as opposed to htan, an official. 2. antiquities; ch'i-min, properly house furni- 
 ture, utensils ; hii tung, literally, to know the antique; it is part of a longer sentence ku tung wan 
 ch'i, articles with which those knowing antiquity, i cunoscenfi, amuse themselves. A curiosity shop 
 is iu. tuugp'ii. 3. k'o pu shao, see Part I, page 4, ex, 43; page 16, ex. 184, obs. 5, 
 
 (67)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 56. I want to find a man to carry a letter, 
 
 Ohs. A letter, fmg hsin, lit., scaled tidings. 
 
 57. Friends are at the door waitinjr to accompany the funeral. 
 
 Ohs. Funeral; ste Part I, page 3, ex, 31). 
 
 58. Haven't you got eyes to see that the water in the well is not clean. 
 
 59. A spark from the burning charcoal fell on my baggage, and the heat woke me up. For- 
 tunately tlie house escaped. 
 
 Obs. I. Spark fell; lit., a spark of the charcoal fire blazed fortli, pao, upon my bag^.ige, hs'ny-li, 
 lit., my travelling plums. 2. fortunately, hsing k'uei ; why the latter word, «'liic:h means loss, 
 slionid be combined vvilh the first, wliich means luck, in tbis very common combination, which 
 simply means happily, &c., is not explained; k'uei is sometimes used alone, as below in 7-2. 
 
 60. The characters hsiao and liao are by some read hsio and lio ; indeed hsiao is sometimes 
 pronounced hsiieh, which shows the difficulty of laying down a rule of pronunciation, even 
 among people from the same place. 
 
 Obs. 1. This sentence is introduced merely to illustrate the peculiarity of the interchangeable 
 use it records, of the terminations iao, io, and iieh. 2. observe the position of c/i'/Ze/i, notwith- 
 staudiog, in defiance of; it is also read, ch'iao, and ch'io. 
 
 61. There you are, just looking out to see that you are not caught; thinking of nothing but the 
 foot-ball, and letting the rice burn till it stiidvs. 
 
 Obs. 1. Looking out, &c.; the meaning assigned to liu-liuch'iu-ch'iu-ii cannot be e.^cplained ety- 
 raologically. The persons addressed are children, who instead of minding the rice entrusted to 
 them to boil, are kicking about the ch'iu-' a small iron ball, ofl'-and-on-wise ; they only regard. 
 cltih ku, this play. 2. let rice burn ; rt/., taking the rice wholly await its c/('«« , burning till it stinks. 
 
 62. They were feasting all night on the best of fare, and even the graduate got so drunk he could 
 not help himself. 
 
 62. Lit. ."earl viand goodly relish — 's [fare they] ate a, = all, night ; taking the graduate, hsiu ts'ai, also 
 [made him] utterly drunk. 
 
 Obs. 1. It does not necessarily mean that the company made him drunk ; the cause was the 
 feast ; .IS in 29, the omission oS pa would simplify the syntax 2. /iwa« with <S!/i is intensive of 
 drunkenness. It is, properly, flowing; in one instance used of streams converging to an estuary. 
 
 63. How is the man who is despising the poor and making much of the wealthy to answer for it 
 that he himself will never be in want? 
 
 Lit, The mocking poverty and esteeming wealth-'s man, it is hard to say [that] undertaking he 
 can secure [that he] will be a no-poverty wealth-'s man, [is it] not ? 
 
 Obs. 1. Hard to say, nan tao, see Part II, page 55 $ 29,5, a common form of putting a question 
 which the speaker himself would answer in the negative. 2. himself, chia as m j'n chia, a person. 
 5i. undertaking, &c. ; pao, engaging, te achieve, chu security. 4. ma, or mo ihe negative inter- 
 rogative response to nan tao. 
 
 64. Both the brothers are fine, broad-chested, strong-backed fellows. 
 
 Obs. I. Both, lia, the two. 2. broad-chested, &c. ; lit., with the backs of tigers and waists of bears. 
 
 65. Well, but a devotee who is fasting and praying to Buddha has no business to be calling 
 the ladies bad names. 
 
 Lit Since it is [a case of] eating maigre and reciting [the ritual of] Fo, Buddha, in such case 
 (chiu), you ought not to revile people [as] prostitutes. 
 
 66. Amidha Buddha! So it was you, was it, that were so hungry you must needs take that 
 goose I missed ? 
 
 XiV. Omito Fo ! [The] to me lost, or missing — "s that piece goose! Oho! in fact, yiian lai, it was 
 the-by-you-in-the-hasfe-of your-hunger-stol-en [goose]. 
 
 Obs. 1. Understand ngo, a goose, after ti at the end of the sentence. 2. haste of hunger; ngo*, 
 hungry, chi-liao, hastened ; so hungry you could not stop, but, t'ou, stole it. 
 
 67. The rustling breeze set me shivering, and I did nothing but cough, 
 
 Obs. Set me shivering ; lit., the breeze of a rustling sound, sou-sou ti, blew till I was a tou-lou- 
 sou-sou [person, with whom then] only was it cough, h'o sou. 
 
 68. He slipped a note over the wall by stealth. 
 
 Lit. Steal-steal-ing, furtively, at the wall's top above, passed a letter. 
 
 69. He bought a pair of slippers with the character/w on the toe; the inner sole of asses' skin, 
 green. 
 
 Lit. He bought one pair asses-skin inner sole — 's fn character sandals. [It, viz., the sole] was 
 green. 
 
 Obs. 1. Inner sole, ///., a continuing strip ; yen. to run along by the side of; ti'ao, the slip or strip 
 so running; a binding of asses skin, dyed green, introduced just above the thick sole of the Chinese 
 shoe. 2. the characters y><, happiness, and shon, longevity, are not uncommon ornaments on the 
 instep of the shoe. 3. green ; of course no one, uninformed of the fact, would guess from the con- 
 struction what it was that was green. 
 
 70. The woman he is married to is half dumb ; she articulates nothing distinctly. 
 
 Obs. I. Half dumb, lit., a half worded one. 2. one sentence talk, speak she does not plain. 
 
 (68)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 71. I see a board with " the emperor's vicar " upon it in gold characters hung over the door, and 
 it occurs to me that it is at the house of the man who was choosing a day, yesterday, to go up 
 to Peking as a candidate for office. 
 
 Obs. 1. A board, &c. ; lit., one piece [with] " on-behalf-of heaven promulginnf reform" — 's poW letters 
 board. Here heaven stands for the emperor, in whose behalf, tai, the person honored with the 
 tablet, pien, is reputed to have set a ffood e.vample, or incuh'ated well doiu* ; lit., hman, promul»ing 
 'hua, that which reforms, reffencrates. '2. occurs to nie; /i.vjVjw, /a?, the thought comes, 'i. chiu, 
 well, it-is-the-yesterday-choosiiijf-a-day-to-enter-the-capital-to-wait-to-be-chosen — 's [man] his chia, 
 house, or family. He has been seen in a temple throwin;,' lots for a lucky day. 
 
 72. Suppose that you are going to purchase rani<, there is no occasion for your going oiT with 
 everything belonging to you. Who is to take charge of your family for you ? 
 
 Obs. I. Purchase rank ; chiian, to subscribe, viz., to the necessities of government, in return for which 
 the party may receive a grade, and become kuan, an official. 2. There is no need to roll up 
 [all in] a bundle, pao'rh, and run, p'ao. 3. take charge ; lit., [you] taking your family you deliver 
 it to whom ? To whom do you hand over your, chia chiian, family, lit., home affections. 
 
 73. They were fairly surrounded by the troops and utterly destroyed ; not a dog left, nor a fowl. 
 Let me beg of you to turn over a new leaf. 
 
 Lit. By, chiao, soldiers [they were] surrounded fairly, lit., fast, chu; entirely killed [to the point that] 
 a fowl [or] dog [the soldiers] did not leave. [1] present my advice [to you] to learn to do well; 
 [and that is] pa, all about it. 
 
 Obs 1. The particle ^0, is not the classifier of fowls and dogs; that is properly c/mA. It is a 
 sort of article insulating the four words which follow adverbially and which intensify the ch'iian 
 sha liao, utterly slew preceding ho; q.d., hemmed in by the troops, they were utterly slain 
 by them a great slaughter. 2. present, c&c. ; ironical politeness, meaning, take my advice you, 
 (probably rebellious people,) and mend your ways, or you will come to the same end. 
 
 74. At the temple of Hsiian T'ien in the Te Hsiian street there is a person, a candidate for 
 office, who sells medicine for the cure of cutaneous disease. 
 
 Obs. The Hsiian T'ien, tit., dark heaven, is the heaven of the north. The south is 'Huang T'ien, the 
 yellow or bright. See the Scheme of Physics in the chapter on the Sciences, in Davis's Chinese. 
 
 75. It was not I who began the feud ; that commenced years ago. Why should you bear 
 me malice ? 
 
 Obs. The feud ; yiian-chia, enmity persons, foe-men; yiian, in the beginning not was I the fasten-ing 
 [one]. Compare our phrase, join issue. 
 
 76. Is it positively the only one for sale ? To ask such a price for a horse that limps ! Well, I 
 am ashamed of you. 
 
 Obs. I. Only one; lit., truly is it a selling gap, or vacancy; i/.c?., the only opening. 2. that limps; 
 ch'iieh? , that has one leg shorter than another ; a limping horse you want to sell for these so many 
 cash! 3. well! ch'Ueh* , a disjunctire; well, but for you I am ashamed. 
 
 77. He was bending down, and in the act of driving in the post to tether him to, when the horse 
 flung out at him, and provoked him to be so rough. 
 
 Ziit. Crooking his body he was just nailing a stake; the horse threw out a kick and provoked forth 
 coarse temper coming. 
 
 Obs. Coarse, chiiek, boorish, ill-mannered ; temper, ch'i, or the manifestation of it. The whole is 
 partly condemnatory, partly apologetic; this is what has made him so forget himself. 
 
 78. He was staring about him ia all directions with a pair of boots under his arm, and all the 
 while it was snowing till his face was frosted all over. 
 
 Obs. I. Under his arm ; chai-che, nipping. 2. .ill directions ; man ch'ti, the full of, all, places. 3 all the 
 while ; lit., in the sky there was moreover falling snow; it, taking his face, froze it so that it came 
 to be, tc, a snow-whiten-ed [face.] 
 
 79. With his quotations from the classics, he won't have finished what he has got to say in a 
 fortnight. 
 
 Obs. Quotations; lit., the-Odes-say,-the Philosopher-says — 's talk. The Book of Odes is the third of 
 the Five Ancient Books called ching, (the King;) the Philosopher is Confucius. 2. fortnight; lit., 
 in half a moon still will his speech not be ended. 
 
 80. He was so drunk, that a correction was administered to him by the Censor of the streets. 
 
 Obs. I. So drunk ; lit., &c., drank till he was (ti for tc.) drunk, hsiiii-hsiin-ti, with the fume of wine 
 escaping, smelling strong of wiue. 2. correction ; chiao-hsiin, both words mean to instruct ; what 
 is meant, however, is a correction stricty paternal; he was flogged. 
 
 81. Too much wine makes the head spin as if one were up in the clouds; worse than sea-sickness. 
 
 Obs. 1. Up in the clouds; lit., like a charioting the clcuds — 's [man] belike. The shih-ti, belike, 
 resembling, is redundant, but constantly used after hsiang as here; also after 'hao-hsiang, fang-fu, 
 • ju-t'ung, and other e-tpressions of comparison. 2. sea-sickness ,■ yiin, lit., vapour curling, c/j'ii'a/J, 
 
 a ship. 
 
 84. He is so badly off, though a chiang-chiin, that every one makes fun of him. 
 
 Obs. 1. chiang-chiin, the general commanding one of the Manchu garrisons in China Proper; or the 
 military governor of portions of territory beyond its borders ; also the title of the lower nobles of 
 imperial blood. 2. badly off; lit., jet the head of his hand is so pressed, cramped. 3. every one; 
 lit., the whole district, i-chiin, — 's people ail make mocking observations about him. 
 
 (69) s
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 83. Wlmt? the women of a man who has droves of mules and horses, with no frocks to put on ! 
 
 Obs. 1. A mule-and-linrsc-makinn;-(lrove — 's man. 2. frock : ch'iiii, is a skirt fastened round the u-aiat 
 and dosceuding nearly to tbe feet. 
 
 84. The first thing I did was to give the cook a blow with my fist. You animal, [I said,] will 
 that do for you. 
 
 Obs. 1. The first thin"; ta, by much ch'u-i, the first ; understand shift, thing, after it. 2. fist; cfi'u- 
 tzfi, is a pestle, here used for a driving blow. 3. animal, ch'u-tht'ng, is any thinjf in the brute 
 creation, not beinir fish or reptile. 4. do for you ; ti for U. The meaning may be. Have you done 
 yet 'i 1 know you have not. 
 
 8.5. I was bitten in my room by a centipede, and the pain lasted five days. Most abominable ! 
 
 Obs. 1 . Lasted ; lit., it straightwise, continuously, chih, pained five days. 2. abominable ; lit., truly, to 
 be hated. 
 
 8G. I have played and lost, and how am I to redeem what I have pawned. Count over those 
 cash and you will see they certainly do not amount to the sum required. 
 
 Obs. 1. Pawned; ten^-to'u, the deposit, how redeem. 2. count over shu-shu. 3. they will certainly 
 not amount to, pu-kou, not enough. 
 
 87. The bald man drew a man shooting a hare from a hillock. 
 
 Lit. The bald one painted a piece, cfianr/, pleasant picture, [namely of a mau] on an earth mound strik- 
 ing a hare. 
 
 Obs. hsing-lo. or hsingU, lit, the picture [of a person] enjoying himself; more especially used where 
 the painter is himself the subject of the piece. 
 
 88. Clutching the claw of a fowl in the hand and gnawing it. 
 
 Lit. In the hand clutch-ing a fowl's claw, gnaw-ing ate it. 
 
 89. My eyes are dim, and the way is slippery ; and I hear people ill-naturedly remarking that I 
 have not a word to say for myself. 
 
 Obs 1. The two yii are et and et ; both are there flowers in my eyes, and is the way slippery. 2. ill- 
 natured ; 'hua-pai speaking white, remarking to my disparaj;cnient, that 1 am not able to speak. 
 
 90. He borrowed a doublet of the widow to pawn, because he was in debt for cucumbers. 
 
 Obs. I. Debt; Aa!, he owed, or owes, gourd money. 2. of the widow, ft/., '/^at, with her. 3. hua is 
 generic of gourds. 
 
 91. With the sound of the dice rattling in one's ears, do you mean to maintain that there is no 
 gambling going on ? 
 
 Obs. I. Rattling, lit., brush-brush-ing of thrown dice [there is] a sound. 2. do you still say there is no 
 playing with money ? 
 
 92. He is thoroughly bad-hearted, 
 
 Lit., He encloses, or embraces, 'huai che, a whole belly injurious mind. 
 
 93. That's a sharp child ; no fear of his being stolen. I don't wonder his mother is so fond of 
 him. 
 
 Ohs. 1. No fear; [one does] not fear a person will kidnap, huai, him away. 2. fond, t'eng; lit, in pain. 
 
 94. He sold his wheat and bought a ticket. 
 
 Obs. A ticket ; p'ai, may be a license, a pass, a playing card ; singular or plural. 
 
 9i5. That man (Juan pron. Zhuan) is a person of good breeding, and, slight and delicate as he is 
 physically, in speech or action, I take it he is not so soft. If you think he is to be pinched 
 as you pinch cucumbers when you are chosing the softest, he will be found possibly to have 
 something hard inside his softness. 
 
 Ob.':. 1. Good breeding, srS-wt-n, the opposite of ts'u-lu*. In the first combination, !<?'«, letters, is the 
 word which gives the expression its meaning; literary culture being held indispensable to Chinese 
 good breeding. 2. physically; lit., bv nature, shing, as he was born. 3. I take it; these words 
 are intended to represent k'o wliich is to a certain extent a qualification of the adjective following ; 
 possibly not to soft. 4. if you think ; lit., if you think, are minded, in the cueumbers-seleet-ing- 
 ihe-sott— 's [way] to pinch, he possibly within the soft has hardness. The words hua-rh chien-che 
 juan, connected by ti, depend on yang-tzu, mode, fashion, understood, and the whole forms what we 
 should call an adverb; q.d., choosing cucumber-wise. 
 
 96. A robI)er made his way in through the partition wall, and besides eating the cakes in the bon- 
 bo7iniere, stole a volume of the Ballads on Wang Mang the Pretender, to boot. 
 
 Obs. 1. Bonbonniere, tsuan-ho> lit. a piling up bo», in which the centre is higher than the sides. These 
 are divided into six or eight compartments surrounding one in the middle. 2 besides ; lit. taking the 
 cakes in the bonbonniere, even, ych, ate them. 3. to boot; and still, 'Aiii, taking a volume [of] 
 Wang-Mang-intriguing-for-the-throue — 's song book, stole it awny. 4. in both the second and 
 third clauses, />o construes satisfactorily as the inde.v of the object; the active verb coming in at the 
 close. 5. There is a relation between ysA and 'hat which I have tried to render by besides, and to 
 boot. U, Wang Mangis a historical character of the T'ang Dynasty. 
 
 (70)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 97. I dreamed last niglit tliat some one came suddenly into my room. I saw it was a woman 
 with her hair turned up. She got tight hold of my tail and was drawing it down, when I woke 
 up in a fright. 
 
 Obs. 1. On Ihig-pu-fanei see Part I, pajje 6, ex 67. 2 a woman ; lit, one who shri-tsuan, combs 
 the back-hair J the tsuan is the coiffure of the n'omait, an pien-lsti, the tM, is of t\ie nidn. 3. [this 
 sight] takinjf me startled to waking ; woke me up. 
 
 98. My idea was, as the work that fell to my single charge as a magistrate was excessive, to get 
 promoted to a good berth and make a little money ; but on my voyage to Peking I was done 
 out of every thing even to the clothes on my back. 
 
 Lit. The by me specially administered place's afTtirs [being] many, = too many, I desired to be ad- 
 vanced and translated to a good vacancy, to make a couple of cash; who would have thought, ( = 
 but however,) going-up-to the capital 1 was so used that, 7ien(j-ti, even the clothes 1 had on all were 
 not. 
 
 99. I shall bide my time, neither more or less, and make my money when my luck changes. 
 
 Lit, With special mind, = attending to nothing else, I shall wait, or am waiting, the turning round, or 
 past, of fortune coming ; then, or again, make money ; and that is all about it. 
 
 Obs. 1. Fortune, \uc\i , ijiin, the revolution, turning of the world's affairs under the decree of heaven. 
 A dynasty succeeds and rules under the i'/e/j //?«, the order of things brought about by heaven. 
 2. lai, auxiliary of chuan kuo, the turning AeMer-ward. 3. all about it; pa, finished, ended. 
 
 100. A female thief had just made her way in when I pinned her by the top knot. 
 
 Obs. 1. Made way in, lai. 2. pinned her; lit. I a grasp grasping, or taking, her teuan, the coj^are, 
 explained in 97. 3. fast, chn. The verb tsuaii, is to grasp or clutch in the hand. 
 
 101. I had dressed and had just got on board, when, before I had time to breathe, a string of court 
 beads was gone. 
 
 Obs. I. Dressed ; 'hao, well, completes the action of chiian, to put on ; so with many verbs. 
 2. breathe; lit. jet not had breathed past,= breath-ed, air coming. 3 was gone ; lit. then, when lo! 
 chiu, taking one string court-beads I lost, = 1 lost my beads, an ornament v/orn by military manda- 
 rins from the 4th, and civilians from the 6th, grade upwards. 
 
 102. The confusion is universal and interminable. 
 
 Obs. 1. Universal ; see above 78, 2. interminable, lit., the thing cannot be tuan, cut off, decided. 
 
 103. I took a good walk about Canton, with my hat off. 
 
 Lit. shining, = bare, as to the brain purse, = head, at Kuang Tung province city inside, 1 walked 
 a sufficiency. 
 
 104. He saw the snow coming down till the whole ground was one expanse of white, so he 
 made haste to put on a uniform with fur lining. 
 
 Obs. I, Expanse of white ; mang is an expanse of water; lit, he saw white flood-like falling, or fallen, 
 the whole ground snow; all snow. 2. made haste; lit, because of this, hastening he desired,= was about 
 to put on a fur mang-p'ao. 3 the mnng is properly a dragon; the p'ao a long dress. The mang-p'ao 
 is the gown embroidered on the breast worn by mandarins of all grades. 
 
 105. On the Shuang Chiang (in the 9th moon of the year), the patient felt herself in great spirits, 
 and then in the evening she was delivered of twins. 
 
 Obs I. Shuang Chiang, Part I, 254,258. 2. patient, p/ni/^'lra, sick person. 3. spirits; shuang-h'uai, 
 lively, in force. 4. then ; yu, and not only this, but also, in the evening she added, [to her former 
 stock,] one couple, or twin, born, ones. 
 
 106 A number of rice-stealers were hid iit the granary. 
 Obs. a number ; lit, a good few. 
 
 107. He is very ill-conducted, a gambler and a cheat ; no one would suppose he belonged to a 
 well-to-do family. 
 
 06s. 1. Ill-conducted; ^il, greatly not has he a [right] habit, rule, custom; he is very abnormal. 2. 
 cheat ; lit., nao kuei, he pl.iys the devil ; see nao above 27. Taken with what precedes it, the expression 
 means that he barrows or loses, and does not pay. 3. well-to-do, tit., rich ; here, respectable. 
 
 108. He has had the luck to pass at the military examination, A proper stick he is for all that. 
 Isn't he ashamed of himself? 
 
 Obs. 1 . The luck ; see above 59, obs. 2. 2. passed, chung, to hit the mark ; be has hit the h'uei, here 
 used in the sense of to* a class. 3. for all that ; chS-jan, indeed yet. 4. stick ; k'uei-lei, are 
 Chinese automata. 5. isn't he, &c.; see nan tao-- ma above in 63. 
 
 109. Behave properly; don't be a scamp; and you will be what the member of a well-to-do 
 family ought to be. 
 
 Obs. 1. Behave, &c.; lit., compass-and-square-wise [act;] do not pl.ay the devil; see above 107. 2. you 
 will then achieve, or become, ch'eng, a wealthy [family's] son and brother. 
 
 110. A great fellow like that, with his helmet and armour on, makes me feel very small. 
 
 Lit. He, t'ing, crowned with a helmet, ax>A,lwan, encased-in-a-cuirass-wise, is very gigantic, h'uei-wei, I 
 in consequence, as 1 seem a stick, greatly feel shame. 
 Obs, see above 108 on tuei-lei. 
 
 f\ ' ^■'''• 
 
 (71)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 111. He: was blind driiiik ; there was no life in him, and he abused every one all round in most 
 incoherent language. 
 
 Obs. 1. blind, '■/urn, olisciirity, mistiness; cfi'en, immersion. 2. the it, after tsui =U: he had become 
 drunk-dark-aiid-drouned-Iike. 3. no life; 'htm, his breath of life all was not: he was lidplefis. 
 4. incoheront abnse ; 'hum, foully, ma, reviled people. 5. all rouud ; 'huen-lun-cht ; foully, or 
 chaotically, in a circle ; lun, is circular, here, all-including. 
 
 112. You have been rolling there till the straw is sticking all over you. 
 
 Ohs I. Rolling, Hi. striking, = doing-, a roll. 2. there; tao, lit, having gone to, or arrived at, 
 [that place ] 3. all over; the consequeuce of the foregoing is that you are the recipient of, chan- 
 liao, (over your] whole pe.-son, i-s/ie7i, grass stems, ts'ao-lun. The i-sliin, whole person, is con- 
 structively, an adverb marking the extent of suffering indicated by the passive verb, chan. 
 
 1 13. The ears are pierced for earrings. 
 
 Obs. This might read, the ears are being pierced, &c. The ear, urh-to, is as here properly the ear- 
 drop, but is commonly used for the ear; sec above in 31. 
 
 114. I came home quite put out, and disgusted with myself for having done what I ought not in 
 meeting him. 
 
 Lit., A ruined-heart-and-mind-unstrung-'s [man, I] came back ; after-angry, [that I had met when 
 I] ought not to have met him ; or, repenting the impropriety of meeting him. 
 
 Obs. I. Put out, 'hui-hsin, with my heart as it were fallen in ruins; i-tan with my mind lazy, its 
 interest gone. 2. disgusted ; 'hou, after, 'hui, indignant and grieving ; = re-penting. 
 
 115. Don't worry him; he will spit at any one who does, without distinction of persons. 
 
 Obs. 1. ts'ni, to press; e.g., for payment of arrears. 2. any'one; lit , at pleasure be it who; ts'ui-pien, 
 much more commonly sui-pien. 3. spit at; lit., he will, or mast, ^ao, taking spittle, <'M-?Ka, spit; 
 he will spit spittle. 
 
 116. Young Master Shen and Jung-shun are squatting there, reading the Dicta of Confucius 
 one against tlie other, 
 
 Obs. I. The Lun-yii, Dialogues, or, Dicta in conversation of Confucius, form the third of the szu-sku. 
 Four Books, which may be termed the bible of China. 2. young master, hsiang-kung, the son of 
 another, a respectful terra ; Jnng-shiin happens to be the son of the speaker. .*>. squatting; lit., 
 emulously, ching-clw, squat-ting, tun-cho, read, nien. 
 
 117. There is a block in the house of my aunt, the wife of my father's second brother, which 
 1 do believe is'as old as the days of Yao and Sheu. 
 
 Obs. 1 . Aunt ; iirh shen tzti. the sh(n tzil of the second son of the family, my father being the eldest ; the 
 son of any of his brothers would then speak of my mother as bis ta ma. 2. block ; mu tun-tzU, 
 section of the trunk of a tree. 3. I do believe ; '■hai ; lit., [which, ancient as that period may be, is,] 
 notwithstanding a Yao and Shuns years within — 's [article.] ;Yao, according to Dr Morrison, 
 began to reign about B.C. 2330. Shun, his minister, succeeded him, 
 
 118. Hands off! you wretch. Who sets you on I should like to know ? Your blood be on your 
 own head if you fight. 
 
 Obs. I. Hands off! lit. loose your hands. 2. wtRich,' sung-nang-ti ; the first syllable indioates the use of 
 abusive language, the second, acts of violence. 3. sets you on, ntng-sung or lung-sung ; the latter 
 character means shaken, agitated, as by horror; the first uives it activity ; who rouses you. 4. if 
 you fight, ta-chia, you court, sung, your death ; chia with the radical mu at the side, means araimg 
 other things a flail, which sense t think must be given it here; ta being prefixed, as in many other 
 dissyllabic compounds, to verbalise it ; compare our thresh, or thrash : — one explanation is ta, to 
 strike, chia, to ward off. 5. blood ; lit. you sung, accompany as a guest, your death. This rendering 
 oi sung is open to question, but there is no doubt as to the sense of the phrase in its integrity. 
 
 119. The cooper who lived in Coppersmith Street at T'ung Chou, has moved into the alley. 
 
 Lit. [The in] T'ung Chou Ta-t'ung street dwell-ing bucket-craftsman, moving in the alley's inside has 
 gone. 
 
 Obs. I . <n <'«n<7, to beat or vfork copper. 2. bucket: lit., hooped tub. N. B. the character ku, 
 a hoop of bamboo or rattan, should be written as in the text here. 
 
 120. He is so in the habit of frequenting bad houses and gaming establishments, that he cannot 
 stay quietly at home. 
 
 Lit. To housing-prostitute assembling-of-gamester — 's places to go [he is] accustomed. [This habit] 
 taking him acts on him. nlng, till he is become, ti, either to-sit, or-to-lie-down-not-peace — 's [man]. 
 Obs. I. If we regard the first sentence as the subject, the construction is simple enough ; the 
 habit of frequenting, &c., makes him restless; kuan being a neuter verb The verb is properly 
 Mhg, causes, harmfully causes, him, ti=le, to become. 2. restless, sitting sleeping not rest; he will 
 not stay at home. 
 
 121. I settled the purchase of a house the other day by which I shall make a little money. 
 
 Obs. I. The other day, hsin-chin, newly, recently. 2. settled ; I, by speaking made fixed as it should be, 
 ting-tang, one place, i-so, house. 3. little money ; lit., there were a couple of cash gained. 
 
 122. He died of love. It is some four or five years ago now. 
 
 Olis. Died of love ; lit., he was a by-deadly-caring-for-another-sickness-kill-ed [man.] The 'hai, to hurt, 
 intensifies the verb hsiang-szu, to think of another, though hsiang, properly and very commonly, 
 implies reciprocity. 
 
 123. The snail dealer told the silk porter that this law suit was somewhat intricate. 
 
 Lit. The selling-snail — 's [one] told the carrying-silk -'s [one] this law-suit is a fraction hard to disen- 
 tangle. 
 Obs. Intricate; szulo, hard to separate and draw ; as a tangled skein, or the like. 
 
 (72)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 124 One would he better offwitlimit a s(in iif all, tliaii witli sticli a gambler and rioter as this. 
 
 [If (inc's Sdii] nuist lie tliis liiml ]il;iuiijj for moiicy inaUin;; (lisUiilwiice-'s ^oii, [no tai fioin tliei'e being 
 advantage in this ! on the reveiM', Can, [one's condition isj not as oneseil one mau-'s [cuuditioii no] 
 good. 
 
 1*25. A man of large property of course is not prone to be disorderly. 
 
 Obs. 1 Larfie properly, /!<., house's property abundant and substantial -'s man. 2. of course, (zi'f^an, 
 naturally ; see Part I, |paj;e :i2, e.r. •J.[H>, ul)s. 2, 
 
 126. There was a fellow with proniine:it tcetli carrying crockery over the hill, and not being 
 surefooted, he fell and scralelied himself all over. 
 
 Obs. This is in fact four short sontcnces. There was a prominent-teethed-one ; carry-ing- 
 earthenuare he crossed the hill; his feet were not sure; falling (he received j a whole bodys 
 scrat(d!es; or more literaly, lie fell a whole body's thorns. This omission of the causative verb has 
 been noticed before. 
 
 127. Take leave here and take leave there ! We shall never have done with this leave-taking. 
 Wait till next time and then take leave. 
 
 Lit. Left take leave, right take leave, leave-taking in-terminable]; wait [till] the time, or turn, below ; 
 then take leave and have done with it. 
 
 12S. Aunt, your children have poked a stick through the picture. 
 
 Obs. 1. ur/i la ma, see above 117; the wife of the second son addressed by the child of a brother 
 younger than he. '2. ni-m'n; the second person plural; not so common as ni without men. It may 
 here be used as including the husband of the person addressed 3. poked — through; lit. seizing, 
 = viith, a stick, or pole, taking the piece picture have piercing-broken it ; have pierced the picture. 
 
 121). Be quick and apply something; he is burned quite black. There, don't cry your eyes out ! 
 
 Obs. 1 The first part of the sentence is addressed to the parent or attendant of Ihe child injured ; the 
 second, to the child itself. •!, rhii-'hei, see P Art I, page II, ex. \'i'l, obs.-i. This clause is pendent; 
 understand after the ti which closes it, either child, or state of things, which being, a fire-burned- 
 japan-black — 's child or state, — remedy, remedy, once for all, 3. hei is simply what, in inflected 
 languages we should call the sign of the dative ;^a is peremptory; qd., there is no more to be said. 
 
 4. your eyes out; lit., do not utterly, to the extreme, iiowiag weep, or weep in floods. 
 
 130. Really I could never have imagined that the clothes would spoil in this way without any 
 cause. It was no use my putting them by after all. 
 
 Obs. I. jSTever imagined ; ftV., truly it is in dreams a not to-be imagin-ed, or un-imagin-able [thing.] 
 2. the clothes without cause are damaged. 8. after all; g.d. [though I did put them away,] yet, 'hai, 
 1 uselessly, lit. blind, put them away. 
 
 131. Small as the point of the spear was, the wound it made let so much blood out, that he is at 
 the point of death. 
 
 Lit. The spear point, though small, by-pricking [caused] forth a good few blood to come ; [the person] 
 uow anyway, tou, must die. 
 
 Obs. 1. lai au.xiliary of cha-ch'u, following its object. 2. tou, enforces the necessity ; all circum- 
 stances considered, in any case, he will, must, or, is about to, die. 
 
 1S2. If I had known it was going to be so fine to-day, I would have gone to read in the college too. 
 
 Lit. If I had early known that to-day there would be a clear day, I also would ascending to the 
 building of education within, to read books liave gone. 
 
 Vbs. 1. I also; yeh, too, as well as another, or others. 2. education, hsiao-fang, learning house, 
 a school or college. 3. have gone, ch'ii is auxiliary oi sliang to ascend and follows its object. 
 
 133. This family was beggared by its love of drinking, and yet they were as abstinent from 
 meat as Buddha; they never touched it. 
 
 Obs. As abstinent ; lit. notwithstanding it, the family, was Lord Fo, Buddha like ; to the end, utterly, 
 did it not eat flesh. 
 
 134. Whatever his ladies are short of, he just commissions the general to bring. 
 
 Obs. I. His ladies, lit. the family witliin — 's female affections, nii-chilan, short of, ch'iieh, vacancy, 
 shao, minus; — minus what [thing, that he] commissions. 3. just, ;^a ; see above 73. 
 
 135. When it was first spoken of he would not believe it, but when he saw the mischief done, I 
 was the person he sent for. 
 
 Obs. I. ch'i ch'u, in the rising and commencement [I or some one] spoke words, or talked. 
 2. mischief done ; lit, after seeing the affair or things, shih-ch'ing, spoil. 3. the person ; then speriallv 
 he prayed me to come. This may mean also; — The only thing he did was to send for me, he 
 thought of nothing else; or, he particularly requested me. 
 
 136. You were in luck to get a night's rest, for there are vermin in that bed. Ah ! I suspect you 
 must have been very tired, for I see you did not put your light out. 
 
 Obs. 1 . Vermin, ch'ou ch'wig, stinking insects, more especially bugs ; the bed upon, = in the bed, or 
 bedstead. J. luck ; see above 59, /ruei. by good luck yon have slept. 3. very tired ; I imagine [the 
 fact to have been that] you were tired to the utmost; therefore you did not blow out the lamp. 
 
 137. If you make a fool of me by telling me anything but the exact truth, I'll pull your ears well. 
 
 Obs. 1. Lit. If it be that not with exact talk you deceive me, vivaciously will I hold doMn your ear to 
 come. 2. chun, in archei-y, is the mark to be hit; g.d. if your talk be right or left of the mark. 
 
 5. 'huo'-huo-'rh-li, lively, in earnest. 4. lai, auxiliary of action. 
 
 (73) T
 
 EXEUCISES TN THE TONES AND TRONUNCIATION 
 
 lo8. \A'lipn one's car does not hear, one lias no trouble of mind. If you hear a thing it angers 
 you, vviu.'tlier you will or no. 
 
 OLs. I. The first is a simple proposition; the ear does not hear, the heart is not vexed. In the 
 seooiul, it is simplest to refjanl ch'i, here aiii^er, as the suliject ; -ihinii, to be generated, as the predicate ; 
 and tlie two clauses preeeding sliaui ch'i as extemlin;; the predicate, the fir»t bein<; participial, the 
 second, adverhial. 2. lit., by man's ear [a Ihin;;] lieiiig heard, involuntarily, an(;er is born. 
 3. chiao, niarli of the passive voice ; see Part 1, page 9, ex ln,S. 4 involuntarily; jiu yu te, not 
 allow can he, without his permission ; pu chin pu-yu-ti, not-prevent-not-allow-ing, means the same, 
 
 139. It seems to me, on reflection, ail the consequence of my being too soft-hearted to keep my 
 
 cliikhen and graiid-cliiidren in proper order. 
 
 Lit. Lett a thousht-right-a-reflection-Hise, on reflection, all is ffrora] my-heart-indulgent-not-control- 
 ling-instructing-sons-and grand-sons —'s cause t)r. The whole reason is that I do not, Sic. 
 
 06.5. Soft-hearted tz'u; properly maternal indulgence; opposed to yen, severity, which is properly 
 paternal. 2. all in consequence, or occasioned by. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 EXERCISES m THE TONES PHONETICALLY ARRANGED. 
 
 The reader having sufficiently acquainted himself with the sense of the Chinese text above 
 translated, to avoid the fatigue inseparable from the truly Chinese method of committing to 
 memory sounds without sense, will do well before he examines this Section to reperuse the observa- 
 tions on the Tones in Section III. of this Part. He should then carefully follow a native teacher 
 in his repetition of the Tone Exercises in the Chinese text, until he shall have caught, to the 
 teacher's satisfaction, the tone and sound of every character as the latter pronounces it. The 
 number placed to indicate the Tone, between each character and its syllabic sound in the Chinese 
 text, will reinforce his recollection of the Tone proper to the individual character as there indi- 
 cated, and his acquirement of the rhythm, or the proper place of emphasis in the utterance of the 
 sounds concatenated, will, it is hoped, be aided by the phonetic arrangement of the sentences 
 attempted below. The proper degree of the emphasis cannot of course be well represented in 
 writing. 
 
 The orthography of this phonetic experiment is hybrid. The ordinary English method of 
 spelling has been generally resorted to, but for such of the Chinese sounds as seem to the writer to 
 defy English u.sage, he has employed, with a few modifications, the orthography explained in Section 
 111. The endeavour here is to distinguish the chief divisions of the sound independently of the 
 sense. Suppose a foreigner to have committed to memory the following examples of English, he 
 is still a long way from his object when he has learned to pronounce every word by itself ; cor- 
 rectness of emphasis in repeating the whole, connectedly, will continue a stumbling block ; but 
 his teacher's instructions on the point would, it is thought, be easier recalled, were he to have 
 his lesson before hira thus : — 
 
 Notonthe feastday, lesttherebe anuproar amongthe people. 
 
 Youwillplease toobserve thatever^dn ducement hasbeenheld outtothem. 
 
 Not oneofthem Iwillventure toassert wouldliavemadeana pology. 
 
 The purpose of this part, as indeed of the whole of the Hsin Ching Lu, which, as its name 
 indicates, is but an experiment, is less to lay before the aspirant to a competent acquaintance 
 with the spoken language of Peking, a set of rules to be implicitly observed, than to suggest 
 to him various means of attaining his end ; these he may regard himself free to modify and 
 improve. This observation especially applies to the remarks upon the effect of tone upon the 
 different vowel sounds and combinations of them, preceding the phonetic versions following, 
 which, though to some they may afford assistance, by many will without doubt be considered a 
 simple embarrassment. The student is recommended nevertheless not to postpone the con- 
 
 (74)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 siJeration of them sine die ; as the very work of examining them with a teacher, and it will be 
 no use without one, will do much towards impressing him with the great importance of the 
 Tones, and enabling hira to retain the distinctions between them. 
 
 The Tone Exercises have been made to illustrate each a particular vowel or diphthongal sound, 
 and will be found to run, from the 1st to tlio 127th, in tlio order of tlie finals placed in alphabetic 
 sequence along the upper line of the Synoptical Table given in pages 7(J-77 of the Peking 
 Syllabary. 
 
 a. Exercises 1 to 4. 
 
 Under the 1st tone, the shavg-p^ng^ the a is sounded somewhat as in ani^ yarn^ maat^ very slowly pronounced. Under the 
 2d, the hsia-p'imi, shorter and sharper, as in artful, arvhilcct. Under the 3d, the shani/, the «", commencing as under the 
 shantj-pHnrj, gradually descends and then suddenly rises; the vowels in the words aiii ! 7)'h;«i, with the italicised consonants 
 dropped, give some idea of the eflect of this tone on the terminal a. Under the 4th tone, the c/i'ii, the vowel sound begins 
 on a higher key than under the shanfl-p-iwi, but descends immediately and is tlien protracted dimiuumdu ; as it were 
 A-A-.\ ; the voice dwelling on the vowel sound as in the last word of the line, " Where is my child? and echo answered 
 ivhere ?" 
 
 1. shih-taodsu cliatyko maiyewchakweity khoudsu, yew eechah ch'ang ; 'hai-shwot'ahshih chah- 
 ping-nee ? 
 
 2. aiya ! pd t'a niihshang ydmiin cli'dming chiu shil. 
 
 3. tooch'ahyiianty yiishih khanchiencli'akua'rlee yewkoch'ache-yaoty jen ch'ii-ee, nahliao ch'lilo. 
 
 4. tseitsai fangshang p'achohp'd, yepoop'And. 
 
 ai. 5-6. 
 
 Under the 1st tone, the two vowels in ai are pronounced in nearly equal time; the latter if anything quicker than the 
 other. Under the 2d, the i prevails, as when a speaker ejaculates a>i ? implying surprise and doubt. In the 3d, it is on a 
 that the voice descends, and on i that it remounts ; the vowel sound produced something resembling that in careen. In the 4th 
 tone, the voice dwells on the o, the latter part of the diphthong being, if I may use the expression, enclitic ; as though it were 
 written aa-y, 
 
 5. chailiaomaodsii cliinchaimen, yiianchialoo'rhcliai, p'engchienko chaichoodsu. 
 
 6. kangts'di chiaots'aicliG maits'dity picndsii tdty, naigosliihshooy. 
 
 an. 7-8. 
 
 The remarks on a are generally applicable to this final, except that, in the 2d tone, the inflection of the vowel is more apparent ; 
 if indeed the vowel itself does not become a diphthong. 
 
 7. fanldifooch'iity 'heahsinfan, kocli'oo'rh-flm, 'hai hsiang ch'ihfan-ma ? 
 
 8. wo Hidnchien Shan Shan kwankwdnty jun, 'haohsingshdnty to. 
 
 ang. 9-10. 
 
 There is nothing to add to the remarks on an. 
 
 9. fangts'ai khdachien fdngdsushdng fangfoo-shih-koh-jen ; tao-chidowo 'hen poo-fang hsin ah ! 
 
 10. T'ang Shan tsaot'angdsuleetee shooey, t'angchohkuait'angty. 
 
 ao. 11-12. 
 
 In this final the a and o are uttered in the Ist tone, as in ai, with a slight degree more prolongation of the a than of the o. 
 Under the 2d tone, ao is almost du, or aoo ; indeed in the words ao or ngao, it is nearly ou in loud. Under the 3d tone, as the 
 voice rises on the o, that vowel becomes nearly au, aw, in caul, brawl. Under the 4th tone, the a claims again the longer 
 utterance, the o figuring but encUtically, as it were aa . . o,p^aa .. o. 
 
 11. WO shou°^aochien shouty, hen p'ee°®do toumeyew, 'haishwowo chiao "''ao nee ? 
 
 12. t'ingchiench'aopaoty shwo, ch'aoleet'ou ch'aonaochS, shwoyaochooch'ao nee. 
 
 eh. 13-14. 
 
 This is the only syllable in which this final is found. In the 1st tone it might be written ich, and, as in the case oiai, ao, 
 the voice be evenly distributed over both parts of the diphthong; but, in the 2d, the ^ is .an undoubted consonant, and the 
 syllable, simply ye in yet. In tlie 3d, there is the double vowel sound noticed before, commencing as though the sound to be 
 uttered were yea, but rising suddenly to the sound of the e in yet. In the 4th tone, the sound is a prolonged declining yea. 
 It might be otherwise expressed by Y-E-e-e. 
 
 13. yeliaopashantzfl, ch'enlaoyer-meich'oonee, chiu wangman 'huangy^teelee chai-ch'aye-ch'ldiao. 
 
 14. Ye Laoye lient'dty yehmen yehpoojan. 
 
 (75)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 ei. 15-16. 
 
 There is nothing to add to the observations on the diphthong ai. 
 15. feiyong-ee yang-ko-feichoo tsai yd ! Yew cliiao fcilei ch'ij,agUao-feich'Lila ! 
 IG. p'ei ts'uyliaci])'cik'oh eelient'oom'bh, sliwot'apoop'oi 'liai t'll ts'iiche. 
 
 en. 17-18. 
 
 See above the observations on yeh, like which it is the only syllable so terminating. 
 
 17. ydp'ienyenleet'ou ch'anpute yen ; nee chen poo-tong-ycrli ; t'aojenyen. 
 
 18. nco liensliang ud yensunhwolidoty yenshairh, yenoh'ouchoh, chen t'ao yen. 
 
 e'oYO. 19-24. 
 
 It is under the 2d tone that the e approaches the o in lot, lop. In the rest it is nearer the vowel sound of Imrn, sir, 
 earth, terse. In the 3d and 4th tones the reduplication of the vowel sound is apparent, as though it were written lee, lee-e. 
 
 19. ts'aikang leleche, chiaochooty ndkojen, ts'ungcli'iea sliiliko-peile ; yinweileso jen, kohliao-ch ihla ; 
 wo khan t'a-tao peets'ungch'ien 'hai kenglo. 
 
 20. shoojo'huangt'ienty 'hoh-johch'a, na kengch'oo'hanla ; neepoop'ah johma ? 
 
 21. hsiench'ien-pushe-ty mdimdi, tsong poop'ah shepe'rh, chihp'ah-yew khoushe. 
 
 22. °^ewai (or "^oivai) chia hsiu, t'ochlng-ko te-yongty jen. 
 
 23. yinwei ch'e ch'ep'oliao eeshang, pa Pingmahszii ch'Gliaojenla. 
 
 24. fooshang tosing'hao ; t'ingchienshwo linglang kaoshengliao, kootz'u t'elai paokohsierh ; kait'ien wo 
 tek'on^'rh, 'hai yao t'ohsint'oeety lai-taoseenee. 
 
 ^n. 25.-26. 
 
 The vowel is reduplicated in the 3d and 4th tones. Try to intone the word npper, in the key of the 3d and 4th tones, 
 and then drop the consonants ; the u-e remaining give a fair idea of the vowel sound required. 
 
 25. woo"^enwooeety, "^enchohlaop'o chihshihtala. 
 
 26. t'a-pi ch'entaoch'enliao, ch'ihcheyach'en ; nee 'hai-poo-ch'entsao'rh maisintych'uny ? 
 
 gng. 27.-28. 
 
 See the observations on ang. 
 
 27. shueyk'englee laoch'oo-k'uai Lao-k'eng yent'ai-lai, naoty k'engchiatangch'anty. 
 
 28. eechingpingty 'heughengla, 'han kan 'hengsingpataoty fa'hengnee ? 
 
 29. wei-'hwa-ts'oliao pooneng-kengkai, pa pokengdzushangty-ch'wang kengch'ee chongliao. 
 
 30. yew wo mafeng, fengjen chiu che ; yewko tee-feng'erh, wo tou tsoanliao. 
 
 &h, urh. 31-32. 
 
 There is properly no skang-pHng tone in this sound, but, as tvill be seen in many instances, and especially in exercise 32, 
 the vowel sound of irh, or urh, when placed in enclitic relation to a word preceding it, is absorbed more or less in the vowel 
 sound of that word. The tone is also modified and is called by the compiler of the Syllabary a shang-p'-ing, in preference to 
 any other tone although he admits that, in strictness, the tr/j, with its new sound does not belong to any one of the four 
 classes. In my opinion the fusion modifies the tone, not only of the irh itself, but also of the word to which it is attached. 
 
 31. ur nu toty jen, urtao tsong-yao-ying ; pleh sansin-ur-eety ts'ai'hao. 
 
 32. na'rhty-hwanee ? ch'ie'rh, tsoerh, chi'rh, mi"^rh, 'houerh,tou k'oee. 
 
 i. 33-34. 
 
 The independent sound i, is frequently also yi, but the y is not so apparent, if it appear at all, in the shattg-pHng, as in the 
 other tones. The student must beware of shortening the i of the hsia-j>'iiig, into ih. Tlic vowel preserves its length, the 
 difference between its sound in the 1st and 2i tones being faintly represented by that in cheer and peep. In the 3d, the j is 
 inflected, rising as if ee-ih ; in the 4th, as if ee. ,e. e. 
 
 33. laohseeerh ch'ingfoohsee, yaoshihyinweiseeshih, peeting yew hsee. 
 
 34. t'at'oliao eeshang, ee-eedzu, yinweifangty poo-hoh-ee. 
 
 (76)
 
 OP THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 ia. 35-36. 
 
 In the Ut, the t is distinct though not so prominent as tho a. In the 2d, the a is rather more prominent ; chiai , sounding 
 cht/a. In the 3d, cfi!a3 sounds c/iecoi ; in the 4th, ciml is almost c/ic'^/na. 
 
 35. t'a wei cheng cMa cli'an, "^aikwocliialikuGn (or kwOn); 'halcliiachwang ts'aichoo, paishemmo 
 
 chiadzii ? 
 
 36. wop'engtiaola hsiahdzu-nahty hsiadzti ; hsialiaot'a ee t'iao. 
 
 ianff. 37-40. 
 
 The remarks on in apply equally to tang; but in the syllables lianff, niang, the i in the 1st, 3d, and 4th tones, is often much 
 nearer ej. In the 2d tone, it is almost y consonantal ; lyung^t nt/aiig-- 
 
 37. chiangchia°^'rty chou sliou, lailiao-kok'o, chiangpuch'ee, jang t'a 'hohchlangtee. 
 
 38. wenty-hsianghsia toulisiangliao ; tzusee ee-lisiang, sliih'hoo pulisiang. 
 
 39. sliangliangche taoch'iuliangty shih'houerli, ts'oucheeliang yindsu, kuliangch'e, kwangkwa''^rh ch'li. 
 
 40. kooniangmen chi'angche'hoh cliiuma°^'rli, 'hohch'iangliao. 
 
 iao. 41-44. 
 
 The remarks on ao, ia, and iattg apply to the effect of tone on this final. In the Ist, 3d, and 4th, tones, especially in the 
 syllables liao, niao, the i becomes almost ey ; in the second it is y, and the ao becomes a sound between aoo and ow. 
 
 41. 'liwacliiao piehchiao; chiao-yew ping, sliueychiaoty sliili'houSrh, "^aoshueyliseechiao, chiu'haoliao. 
 
 42. kangch'iaoch'ee cliiaorh-lai cli'iao, cliiu ts'ouch'iao, lailiao-ko ch'iaop'eeniuerh. 
 
 43. yaomaisiao, poo sliang hsiao, lisiaolisiaoty je'rh, poop'ajenchia hsiaohwama? 
 
 44. sliueyshangp'iaoclie-ko p'iao nahyenp'iaoclie, p'iaopooty laonee. 
 
 ieh. 45-48. 
 
 As in ia, in the 1st tone, the first vowel and the second are articulated distinctly one from the other, and with nearly equal stress. 
 In the 2d tone, the i becomes y, and in the 3d and 4th nearly ep: Thus the changes in citieh might he expressed thus : — 
 ch^iych, eh'^yeh, ch'eyih, c/AW/,. In lieh, 7nich, nich, in all except the 2d tone, usage seems very capricious; the same person 
 sounding i, at one time as ee, and at another as ey. 
 
 45. yew 'hwa pieche ; pi^-kaosoo nago pi^tsuydzii shwo ; t'atyp'eech'ee 'hen niupi^. 
 
 46. nee tiey naliangple'rh 'hoodsu ch'angchien-t'a sliihsliou niech^. 
 
 47. cli'iemiencliooch'iedsu, t'a shangch'ie meicli'ihkwo ; chenshiliko cli'iet'iaodsil. 
 
 48. hsiedsii tsuantsailisiehlee, pacliiao chech'oosiehlaila ; teich'ihp'angsie ts'ainengchihto'ng. 
 
 ien. 49-52. 
 
 There is nothing to add to the remarks on ieh. 
 
 49. hsiencheenien hsienchS 'hensiaocli'ee ; hsiendsai lisienclie cliiu 'lienpoot'ongla. 
 
 50. hsiachingt'ie'rlity mieiiliwa nan mai; shuey 'hai tsou mienty j6-t'ieu ch'iian-nee ? 
 
 51. k'ootelei lienlienty, lienje'rli toupoojentela; lieashang chiuhsiang jookwolienty szujen. 
 
 52. pantiendsu! nengliao-tiendsu lantien niolien. 
 
 ik. 53-54. 
 
 The difference between the ! in the 1st, and that in the 2d tone, is feintly represented by that between the same vowels in 
 children and ddp. In the other two it is inflected as in a, S, &c. ; beginning, like the ee in chee!;, and rising suddenly to 
 the i in ill ; and descending gi-adually in the 4th. Drop the consonants in "the word limit, and prolong the utterance of the 
 latter vowel to form some idea of the sound of the final ilii . 
 
 53. ta jiht'outeelee, nee shaot'ienmeijilito'uty shwosliemmanee ? 
 
 54. cMngshihty 'hwoshih, nee sMlit'a ta'hwo, poosliihpaifei shihma ? 
 
 (77) u
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 in. 55-57. 
 
 As in ih. Take the vowel sound in thin, thick, to approach those under the lit and 2d tones, and unite those in the first two 
 syllables oiiniliul, for the 3d, and of incident for the 4tli, tone. 
 
 85. t'a suysliihko cli'iong min, kootong ch'eemin k'opusliao ! 
 56. wo Lsinleehsiang lisin ko-ju'rh tai-fengsin. 
 67. piuk'oh linniGnty tCngcliS sungpin-nee. 
 
 ing. 58-59. 
 
 As in ih, and in. 
 
 58. neety yenching khanpoocliien, cliingleetyshuey poodiing-ma ? 
 
 59. t'an'hwoLsmgdsu pao-tsai-hsingleeshang, pa wo shaosingliao ; hsingk'liwei meishaochao fangdsu. 
 
 io. 60. 
 
 60. siao, liao, cBe-liangko tsu, yewnien aioh-lioh-ty ; siaotsa ydhyewnien sii/tsu-yinty ; hsienjan jSn 
 
 euisHht'ongcli'oo'rlilaity, na khoujdn ch'iieh-nanting. 
 
 iu. 61-62. 
 
 In the 1st tone the two sounds ee and on, of which iu is compounded, are distinct and even, as in at, ao, ia. In the 2d the iu 
 is nearly yen; but shorter ; as though written j/ewh. In the 3d the Toice descends en the ee, to rise sharply on the ooA, and in 
 the 4th, dwells on the ec, and breaks off on the oo in a lower key. 
 
 61. nee liuliuch'iucli'iuty cliilikoo t'eech'iu, pah fan tou teng ch'iula. 
 
 62. cLensiumeiweity ch'Uiliao ee lisiu, pa hsiuts'ai yeh-kuantsuyliao. 
 
 iung 63-64. 
 
 This syllable is only found in the 1st and 2d tones. The vowel t is not so distinct as in ia, ieh ; in the Ist tore and in the 2d, 
 «' is nearly y; read hsiuH(j-, almost si/uug. The !i, or oo, sound inclines to o ia home, in the 1st, but is oo in the 2d tone, 
 and pronounced short as if the final i/ were a k, or a French nasal. 
 
 63. ch'eecli'iongcliongfooty jen, nantao tsijcHah paotC-cboo sliih-woocli'iongtyfookueiliaoma? 
 
 64. teesiong-liah, tousliili 'lioopei-siongyaoty. 
 
 0. 65-66. 
 
 In the 1st tone the o is nearly as in roU;ia the second it is shorter as in sJo<; a slight reduplication of the vowel sound 
 followlB" somewhat as if it were oo'h. In the 3d tone, a second vowel is also perceptible but rather resembling i. In the 
 4th the chance of vowel is very slightly felt, the domin.-»nt sound being o, whicfi is prolonged diminuendo. In the single o, 
 or uao, the nasal pronunciation of it, much as it modifies the vowel sound, does not affect the tone. 
 
 65. cheesliili ch'ilicliai nien Fo, clnu-pukai majen ch'angfo. 
 
 66. Omitufo ! ■wos]iaoty-nacliili°'o, ! yiianlai-sHlmee "'ocheeliao-t'outy, 
 
 ou. 67-68. 
 
 In the 1st tone, ou is much as in round ; in the 2d, shortened as in lout, but with a certain inSexion as though it were owoo, or 
 owuIl. This is more clear in the 3d and 4th tones, which might be expressed ou-ooS, ou-oo. oo*. 
 
 67. sousouty-feng oh'uyte-wo toutousousouty ; cliihshih k'osou-b. 
 
 68. t'out'ou'rhty tsai-ch'iangt'ou'riishang t'ouko-seeerh. 
 
 «. 69-70. 
 
 In the 1st tone the u as in the French pureie ; in the second, as in the French lut. salul. Tn the 3d and 4th, the reduplica- 
 tion and inflection of the vowel noticed in o, i, o, is perceptible, as though u3 were ii-tiA, and «'. u. u . . u. 
 
 69. mailiao ee-sbuanglup'eeyent'iao'rty/oodsulii; sHhliity. 
 
 70. t'ab ch'iitS-cheko nujen shiliko panyudsu; ee chu 'hwa sliwo pu ch'ing. 
 
 uan. 71-75. 
 
 This is the most difficult of the finals to establish. The a of the 1st tone, pronounced sometimes broad as in the syllables 
 endin" in on, is flattened sometimes to the a in viat, and sometimes modified so as to be nearly the c in men ; uen is the ortho- 
 graphy of Morrison and others. The native whom I follow, whatever may be his pronunciation under the 1st, makes little 
 difference under the 2d, uttering the an as in the English can, mantle. In the 3d. the uncertainty between a and e is greater 
 than in the 4th tone, which prefers the a. In both the vowels are distinguished much as in iajeh, &c. ; asj^t were uan3, uaani. 
 
 71. WO kliancliien ee-k'uai tait'ienlisUan'liwaty cliindsupien, tsaitamenk'ou'rli hsuauche; hsianglai 
 
 chiushih tso'rli slianjidsii-cliin-cliing-'liousiianty t'a cMa liao. 
 
 72. yaochUankuau, poo pee chlianchepaor'p'ao; pahcluachuan chiaokeishuey ? 
 
 (78)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 73. chin,oping-ch'ua)ichoo ch'uanshaliuoko cliee, ch'Lian, puliu ; fL-ngcli'Lian hsiao'haopa I 
 
 74. Tchsuan Chieh Hsiian T'ionmiao ycwkomai suanyaoty sliili'housUankuan. 
 
 75. yUancliiah, yuanpooshih wochiuty, nasliih yiiannientysliili, yLianwo tso shCmmo ? 
 
 iieli. 7G-79. 
 
 In tlie 1st tone, the voice pauses evenly on ti and cTi, wliich last vowel is pronounced as in senirp ; in the 2d. eh is as in set, and 
 is much clearer than the u. In the 3d, the ch of the I st tone is prolonged, the u shortened ; iu the 4th, the « is mote prominent 
 to the ear, and the stress of the voice is laid upon it, but the eh is very prolonged. 
 
 76. chrnsMh-maicli'Ue'r-ma? Ch'uelima yao mai cliesidcli'ien ; woch'Ueht'eenee hsiu. 
 
 77. chiiehchesliendsu kangtingcliiiedsu ; maliao-chiiedsu, johch'oo cliUehch'eelaila. 
 
 78. cliiaclie hsUedsu mancla'oo'r-hsueh ; t'ienshang yew-hsia-lislieh ; pa lien tongtS-hsuehpaity. 
 
 79. sliili-yun-tzuyiielity shwohwa, pangoyiieh 'liai shwopuwan. 
 
 iin. 80-83. 
 
 The «ni is the French iinc ; in 7i»t2 the vowel sound resomhles that in lutte, slightly inflected as if an i very faint, and rapidly 
 pronounced, intervened between u and n. In iiu^t and Hn^i there is the reduplicatioa of the vowel before noticed. 
 
 80. hotytsuysunslinty, cliiao hsUncHety yiishili cliiaohsunliao ee tun. 
 
 81. cliivitoliao t'oii-faltyun ; 'haolisiang cliiayiintyshihty, pee ylinch'uaii keng lee'hai. 
 
 82. suysHliko cHangcliiin, ch'iieh sliout'oti'rh 'hen chiin ; eechiintyjen tow hsiao'hwat'a. 
 
 83. lomacli'engclillnty jencMa'rh niijenmen poo-cli'uan ch'ilndsu-ma ? 
 
 u. 64-87. 
 
 The u' resembles ooin eoon\ the u2, ooiacooh In u3, «4, the vowel is reduplicated like a, i, o, above; u3 as if ii-ih ; 
 ii* as u-iih^ or oo-Qoh. 
 
 84. tacli'ooeety taliliao-cii'oodsu eech'oodsu ; neechech'oosheng ! 'hanliaotyma ? 
 
 85. tsaioodsulee chiaowookong-yaoliao ; cliLht'engliao woot'ien ; chCnk'uWoo ! 
 
 86. toosliooliao, tangt'ou tsemma shoo ? neeshooshoo ch'ien, eeting pookou shoo'rhliao. 
 
 87. t'oodsu 'hwaliaochang hsmglot'oo, tsai t'ootuyshang ta t'oodsu. 
 
 ua. 88-91. 
 
 In the 1st tone, the ««, is certainly nearly oa ; in the 2d, the o almost disappears, becoming oo, «, or to ; in the 3d, it is again 
 apparent, prominence being given the o, ov ah^ which is very short; in the 4th, it seems to depend on the initial consonants 
 which vowel shall be sounded ; shuai sounds to me s/toau, but hua* is '/luaa. 
 
 88. shoulee chwachekocheechwadsu k'finchechi'hnee. 
 
 89. yenyew'hwa, tao'rhyew'hwa, t'ingchienye-wjen 'hwapaiwo poo'huishwo'hwa. 
 
 90. yinweikaikwach'ien, 'haikwafoo chieliaochienmakwadsu tangla. 
 
 91. shwashwatyohihty shaidsuhsiang, 'haishwopushih shwach'ien-nee. 
 
 mi 92-94. 
 
 What applies to ua is more or less true of uoi, so far as the u h concerned ; but, in the 1st tone, the division is between u 
 (or 0,) and the diphthong ai ; in the 2d, u is consonantal and at shortened ; in the 3d, the voice descends on u or o, and rises sharp, 
 on a, to which t is enclitic ; in the 4th, the voice rises on the o or u, and dies away on the ai, dwelling more on the fit»t vowel. 
 
 92. 'hwaiche eetoodsu 'huaihsin. 
 
 93. cheTiaidsukwai ; poop'ah jencliiah kwailiaoch'U ; kwaipute t'ama t'engt'a. 
 
 94. mailiao raaidsu, mailiao p'ailai. 
 
 (79)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 uan. 95-102. 
 
 The division of the vowel sounds is as in ua. In the 3d tone, the final ir- almost uui&n ; in the 4th van, like own, in awning, 
 or o/i«, in the German ohne. _ _ _ 
 
 95. na hsing-Zhwanty shihkossuwen jen ; shCngtS suyzliwanjao, shwo'hwa tsosLih k'opuzhwan-na ; nee- 
 
 yaohsiang kwa'rchienchezhwanty nie, t'a k'ozhwanclmng yew yingah. 
 06. chidpee'rh ts'oancliinkotseilai, pa ts'wan 'ho leety tienhsin ych-cli'ihliao, 'liaipape'rh wang-mang ts'oan-- 
 wei-ty ch'angpe'rh t'ouliaooh'Ulonee. 
 
 97. wansLangmengchien, lengpufang, tsoancliin ooleekojenlai ; khanchien shiliko shutswa'rty, tsuanchoo 
 
 woty piendsu, cliiu wang teehsia-choai ; pa wo hsiasingliao. 
 
 98. wo cliwankwanty teefa°^rh shihch'ing-to, yiian bsiang shengchwanko 'hao cli'Ueli, chwan-lia ch'ie'rh ; 
 
 shueyhsiang chinching tsaich'wanshang nengtS, liench'oanty-eeshang toumeiliao. 
 
 99. chwanhsintSngche choankwoyiinlai tsaichoancli'ienpa. 
 
 100. kang tsoanchinko nlitseilai, wo eepa pat'atytsoan tsoancliooliao. 
 
 101. ch'wan-'haoliao-eeshang kangsliangchw'an, 'haimciyew cli'oankwoch'eelai-nee, chiu pah eech'wa'rh^ 
 
 ch'aochoo tewliao. 
 
 102. nianch'oo'rh-hian, shihcb'iiig puneng toan. 
 
 mng. 103-106. 
 
 The vowels as in ua, nan. 
 
 103. kwangcheko naotai tsai Kwang Tung shengch'eng-leet'ou kwangliaokokou. 
 
 104. t'acMen paimangmangty hsialiao ee tee hsueli ; kootz'umangche yaoch'oan p'eemangp'ao-nee. 
 
 105. Shwangchiang-nat'ien pingjenchiaoche 'henshwangk'wai ; wanshang yewt'ienliao ee-tuy shwang 
 
 she°8rli. 
 
 106. ts'angleet'ou ts'angche 'haosieko t'oumeety-tsei-nee. 
 
 uei. 107-110. 
 
 In the 1st tone, the vowel sounds are nearly oovxi; in tlie 2d tr«_v ; in tlie 3d oo-ere! ; in the 4th, o>w.c.t ; the i leaning 
 enclitically on the e. The u in all four tones in ^uei is nearer w than in 'ftui. 
 
 107. 'henmeyewko-kweichii, shwach'ien-naokweity, poohsiang fookweichiaty tziitee. 
 
 108. khweit'a chongwookhwei, chujan-shihkhweiley ; nantao puts'ankhweima ? 
 
 109. kweikweichiichuty pieuengkwei, ts'aich'enggo fookweitsiitee-nee. 
 
 110. t'a t'ingkhweikwanchiaty, 'henkhweiwei ; wo chiu hsiangge k'weiley, 'hen t'ao khwei. 
 
 uen, un. 111-112. 
 
 The double vowel might he written for all four tones, but is more remarkable in the 3d, and 4th. In the 1st, the u, or oo, 
 sound is dominant, prolonged as in pool, moon: in the 2d, the u is nearly the vowel in put. foot. But, in the 3d tone, the 
 vowel sounds are well divided, as if oo-un or u-tn, and, in the 4th, as if ii-un or u-e/i ; the latter part declining gradually as 
 if V. u-ji. 
 
 111. tsuity 'hiinhunch'ench'enty, 'hweii tou meiliao ; hwenlunche hunmajen-nee. 
 
 112. nee taona'rh taku'rch'Ulai, chanliao ee shen ts'aokQndsu. 
 
 ni. 113-115. 
 
 As observed under uei there is a difference between that final and ui. This is most perceptible in the syllable V/ui, and under 
 the i?d tone ; in the others, ni is nearly if not quite uei. The cliui in the first e.\ample might otherwise be written cKoeijI, 
 choojj^i chooi^'it choo-e-D*. The same native will be found to pronounce this differently at different times. 
 
 113. chuyliao urhto-ye'rh taichuidsu. 
 
 114. 'huih.sm-eelan-ty 'huilai, 'hou'hui pukai'huit'a ; or 'hooysin, &c. 
 
 1 15. piets'ui t'a; ts'uypien shihshuey, yaona t'oomo ts'ui-nee. 
 
 (80)
 
 OF THE PEKING DTALECT. 
 vn. 110-117 
 
 III the let tone there is a perceptililc indection of the vowel, Imt slighter than in /ihAj, hien. In the 2(1, it is nearly the m» 
 in the Italian pimlo, pniTiounced (luickly ; though a certain rediiplicaticiii is still to bo perceived. In the 3d and 4th tunes, lhi.« 
 inlleition is acttd on by the tones as in nn and other finals noticecj before. 
 
 11(1. n.apiVi'h Lunyii SliGnhsiangkung 'hai-Joiigshmi chSngche, tunche, nicn-nee. 
 
 117. iirlisheridsuoliia ycwkoinootuuJsri, 'haisltili YaoShuu-iueucIiiL'nly-nec. 
 
 nnr;. 118-119. 
 
 ^ The remarks on un apply generally to unrj; hut in the 5d tone, the inflection of the mwk] is less apparent. They final h 
 faint in the same tone. Indeed u;i(/2 is something between the final sounds of the french luiuj and hnt/ue. The u sound 
 beats the iJ, in pint/, 
 
 118. songliaoslioupa ! songnangtyah ! sliihshuoy hengsongnee ? ta chiali songssu-a. 
 1 1'J. T'diigchou Taht'Ongcliie chootykoot'ongcliiaug paiitsaihoot'o°^rhlee ch'iiliao. 
 
 vo. 120-121. 
 
 The words taken to exemplify the action of tone on this final have not been happily chosen. The three syllables to which 1 
 have made it belong in the Syllabary, are 'ftiio, /.vm, shio. I must admit that it is only in the last that the u .asserts itself a> 
 a vowel; in the rest it has the power of ?o. In .s/mo, tile tones might be e.-ipressed thus, shuoL'i, s/iwSh-, shiw'i, iliu-H-k*- 
 
 riO. woch'ang-chiitooty teefa°^'i-li cli'li-kwanliao, pat'almengty tso wo-puningty. 
 
 121. wohsiiichin shwn-t'ingtangliao eesc'rhfangclsu, yewlia ch'ie'ritchwan. 
 
 //. 122-127. 
 
 The difficulty here is in representing the vowel soinid ; this determined, the inflections of it by the tone resenible those in tii.- 
 otlier filial vowels. The word sy-riiTJ, with the italicised consonants struck out, might represent szu' ; sue//, szu^ ; the 3d ami 
 4th might be otherwise written szu-uh, s:^u.-a,-/t ; but our alpliabet aids us less in this than in any sound in the syUabarv. 
 
 12'2. t'ali sliih 'liaihsiangssuping ssuty ; joochia ssuwoonienla. 
 
 123. mailossuly kaoliao t'ai'hoo,ssu-ty cliekwanssfi yewtie'rli naiissulo. 
 
 121. yao-clietsung toocli'ientzusliih-ty itrdsil taopoojoo tsilcliec eekojc'rhty 'liao. 
 
 12.'). cliiadsu-ttng'houty jell, tzujau puk'tin tzusliiliya. 
 
 126.- yewko tz'uyadsu t'iaotz'uch'eety kwoshaii, cliiao-meit'zuwiin, tsaila ceslieii tz'u. 
 
 127. tsotz'u, yewtz'il, tz'upuliao ! tengclielisialitz'u, tsaitz'upa. 
 
 12S-139. 
 
 128. urtama nimenchia'liaidsu nakandsii pahcliang'liwa'rli t'ono-p'oliao. 
 
 1 29. 'Iiwoshaote-cli'ti'heity kliwaikeit'ali-chihcliihpa ; — piecliindsii liuleila ! 
 
 1 :;0. clienshihmengsiaiigputaoty, eesliang wookoo tsaoliao ; wo 'hai-hsiasliouche. 
 
 U;i. cli'iangcliic'iii suyjansiao, cliaholi'oo 'liaosiesielai ; siendsai towyao ssfda. 
 
 1"2. yaotsaochichrrh shihch'ing t'ien, wo-yeli-shang hsiaolanglee nienslioocli'iila, 
 
 133. yinwei 'haocliiii, kootz'ilcliialicli'iGng ; cli'ucshihFoYe shih-ty. tsongpucli'ili jou. 
 
 131. chialeety nuchiiaiimen ch'iieshao-shSmma, cliiut'o cliiangchiin tailiaolaipa. 
 
 135. ch'eecli'oo shwo'hwa t'a poolishi ; 'liouchien shihch'ing 'hwailiao, ts'aichwanch'ingwulai. 
 
 13G. ch'wangshangyew ch'ouch'dng ; khweineeshiiey ; hsiangshihk'uenchetliao, kootz'u meich'iiyteng. 
 
 137. yao poo.sliih chun'hwa 'hongliaowo, 'hwohwo'rty chiusia-nee erhtao-lai. 
 
 138. ludrpiit'ing hsinpulau ; chiao jeu-urhto t'ingchieu, pooyewty, shengch'ee-a 
 
 139. tsossilyewsiangty, toushih wo hsiii tz'ii, pukwanchiao tziisunty yiiankoo. 
 
 (SI) • X
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 ON THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION OF THE 
 PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 The terra Pronunciation might almost have stood alone,; for unless it be correctly intoned, 
 no word in Chinese can be passed as accurately pronounced. So far of single words, sounds, or 
 syllables ; these being in colloquial Chinese synonymous terms ; but besides sound, or syllable, 
 and tone, there is an essential condition of accuracy in r.Iie pronunciation of words concatenated, 
 namely rhythm ; which in some instances even subordinates tone, the great tyrant of the lan- 
 guage, to its influence. 
 
 Of those three conditions accuracy of sound, alphabetically or syllabically considered, is the 
 least important. We run less chance of being misunderstood if we say lan^ instead of nan}' 
 than if we used naii? for nan}- We must have a distinct idea, however, of the syllable we are to 
 pronounce, and as the Chinese furnishes no such aid as our own alphabets to this end, we are 
 forced to supply the deficiency by the use of our own alphabetic symbols, sometimes at the rate 
 of their own natural or prescriptive values ; sometimes reinforcing them by diacritic marks, or 
 arbitrarily constraining them to do a duty for which there is little precedent. The best ortho- 
 graphy, doubtless, would be one wliich conformed exactly to the alphabetic prejudices of the 
 person who had to use it ; but the anomalies of English pronunciation make it very difficult indeed 
 to avoid shocking these, and the method adopted in the Hsin Ching Lu, and the Peking Syllabary' 
 intended to accompany it, the notice prefi.xed to which explains its nature and uses, will hardly 
 escape criticism. In the justice of his own appreciation of the sounds of this dialect, the writer, 
 after the attention he has bestowed on the question, and the pains he has taken to assure 
 himself, feels tolerable confidence. The merits of the means he has decided on as best calculated 
 to reproduce those sounds, so that they may be retained by a foreign student, are now submitted 
 to the patience and impartiality of the few as yet interested in such matters. 
 
 1. Sound. The values assigned to the letters of the alphabet employed in the spelling of 
 these syllables are here considered independently of tone, but the syllable has been spelt generally 
 in the form that appeared to approach nearest to an adequate representation of the spoken sound, 
 and at the same time to admit, without change of the letters composing it, of application to it of 
 the inflections proper to a change of tone. 
 
 Voivels and Diplithongal Sounds. 
 
 a ; tbo a in father ; when pronounced singly, in particular after words terminating in vowel sounds, slightly 
 nasalised, as tLough preceded by 'ng. 
 
 ai ; nearly our sound aye, but better represented by the Italian ai, in lidi, amdi. 
 
 no ; the Italian ao in Aosia, Aorno, but not uufrequently inclining to d-oo, the Italian au in cauto, 
 
 c; in eh, en, as in yet, lens. 
 
 ei ; nearly ey in grey, whey, but with greater distinctness of the vowels, as in the Italian lei, contei. 
 
 i ; nearest approached in English by the vowel sound in earth, m perch, or any word where e is followed 
 by r, and a consonant not )• ; or in lurh. Singly, or as an initial, it has the nasal prefix 'ng stronger 
 than tlie syllable a. 
 
 a ; the foregoing e followed enclitically by y. Strike out the n from the word money, and you have the 
 syllable mil. If it exist at all, which some Chinese dispute, the el is most apparent in nel. 
 
 i; as a sin;,'le syllable, or as a final, the vowel sound in ease, tree; in ih, in, ing, shortened asm chick, 
 chin, thing. 
 
 ia ; with the vowels distinct; not ya, but .as in the Italian piazza, Maria. In some syllables terminating in 
 ia, iani/, inn. the ia is almost ea or eyah. This is oftener observable where the initial is I, m, or n ; but 
 even with these usage is capricious. 
 
 iao ; the vowels as in ia and ao, with the terminal peculiarity of the latter. The Tones, however, inflect 
 this sound variously. 
 
 (82)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 ie ; witli the vowels distinct, as in the Italian siesta, niente. As in the case of ia, under similar circumstanccss 
 the ie, inclines to become ct; or ei/e/i ; often making lien, nien, almost leyen, neyen. 
 
 io ; a. questionable abbreviation of the final much oftenor pronounced iao. It is shorter than the Italian io ; 
 more nearly the French io in pioche. 
 
 iu : as a final, nearly eojeu) or eeoo, at all times longer than our evi. Thus cldu is not chew, bat rather 
 c/ii/ew, and the tone may even make the vowel sounds more distinct. In the syllables liu, niu, the i is 
 aftected as in ia, ie. In chiung, hsiung, the only syllables ending in consonants into which I have intro- 
 duced iu, it must bo admitted that in most instances, though not in all, the iung, is rather eeywiy, than 
 eeyoong ; the o, representing the o in roll. 
 
 ; something between the vowel sound in awe, patv, and that in roll, toll. When single, it commences with a 
 
 sligiit consonantal sound, part nasal and part guttural, which the 'vg inadcquatrly expresses, and is 
 inflected at the close as if an a, or ah, were appended to it. The Tones seriously modify this syllable. 
 As a final, the power of the vowel remains the same, with the same terminal inflection, and not 
 altogether divested of the guttural peculiarity which it is not within the compass of our alphabet to 
 reproduce. Let the reader, as an experiment, try to pronounce Io, as, law, prolonging the aw in his throat. 
 
 oil ; in reality fii ; the vowel-sounds in hxirrow, when the consonants are withdrawn ; nearest the oii, in 
 round, loud. 
 
 a ; when uttered alone, as it is at times for yii, and as a final, nearest the vowel sound in the French eiit, 
 une. In ilii it is not so long ; nearer the iin, in the German Milnchen. 
 
 iia ; occurs only in the final iian, which often inclines towards Hen; the « as ab^ve, but the a much flatter 
 than in the final an ; nearer the an in antic. 
 
 He ; the ii as above, the e as in eh ; the vowel sounds of the French tu es, represent this combination perfectly. 
 
 u ; when single, as at times instead of wu, and when a final, the oo, in too ; in un and img, it is shorter, as 
 in the Italian piuUo, lungo. In the latter final it vacillates between uvg, and ong ; being nasalise;! at 
 the close so as to produce a sound between the French lo7ig and longue. The u in urh, is exceptional ; this 
 syllable had better always be written 6rh, as in the Tone Exercises it is. 
 
 ua ; as we pronounce i| in Juan ; nearly ooa, which in many instances contracts to wa ; in the final tuin, 
 uang, it is also 6a, or oa, as the Tone may rule. i 
 
 iiai ; the above sound ua with the i in at appended to it ; the m subject to the same changes as in ua. 
 
 iiei ; the m as in ua, uai, often in value aw/ the ei as iu ei final; the vowel sounds in the French _;o!«;r 
 answer fairly to uei. 
 
 uc ; the u as in ua ; the e as explained before. It is found only in the final uin, which sounds as if written 
 u-im, oo-un, frequently wen, or wun. It is in many cases difficult to distinguish uen from un. 
 
 ui ; the m as above, followed enclitically by i ; as if oo-y ; the vowel sounds in screwy ; more enclitic than in 
 the French Louis, or the Italian lui. 
 
 uo ; the u as above ; the o as in lone ; the Italian uo in fuori ; often im, and at times, nearly 60. 
 
 a ; between the i in hit and the u in shut ; only found with the initials sz, tz, tsz\ which it follows from the 
 throat, almost as if the speaker were guilty of a slight eructation. 
 
 Consonantal Sounds. 
 
 •:h ; before any of the above finals except ih, simply as in chair, chip; before ih, it is softened to dj ; r.hih 
 being in many cases pronounced djih. 
 
 ch' ; a strong breathing intervening between the initial ch and the vowel sound, bat without reduplicating the 
 latter. Drop the first vowel in ehdhd, or the italicised letters in much ha.rm, and the ch-ha remaining 
 will give a fair idea of the syllable c/i'a. This may also be obtained if we contrast the smooth syllable 
 cha with tcha ; the breathing becoming apparent in the greater efl;ort needed to utter the latter syllable. 
 It does not soften like the unaspirated ch before ih. 
 
 f ; as in farm. 
 
 'Ii ; as the ch, in the Scotch locli ; the ch of the Welsh and Gaelic. 
 
 hs ; a slight aspirate preceding and modifying the sibilant, which is, however, the strong' r of the two 
 consonants. To pronounce hsi, let the reader try to say he, and before he has reached the articulation 
 of the vowel, attempt to utter see. The aspiration is eflccted by closing the middle of the tongue upon 
 the back of the palate, before the tip of the tongue is raised for the sibilatiou. It diilers from sh, although 
 this difference is less observable before the diphthongs ia, ie. 
 
 j ; the French j in jaune : our s, in fusion, or 2 in brazier. 
 
 k ; as c in car, k in king ; but when following other sounds often softened to g in go, gate. In the word ko, 
 for instance, the prepositive article or classifier proper to many nouns, when this is preceded by ua, 
 that, or che, this, the k is softened ; the two syllables being pronounced almost nago, chSgo. 
 
 h' ; the aspirate as in ch'. Drop the italicised letters in kick ha.rd. 
 
 1 ; as in English. 
 
 m ; as in English. 
 
 m ; as in English. 
 
 'ng ; a consonantal sound of partly nasal and partly guttural influence upon the vowels it precedes. To 
 produce 'nga, take the italicised consonants in the French mo»i </alant ; for 'ngai, in mo?i gaiWard ; for 
 'ngo, in so« Rosier. It is never so evident in the single syllable as when it follows a vowel, or a final «. 
 
 (83)
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIA.TIO 
 
 'ji ; ;is in Eiiglisli. 
 
 y)' ; the aspirate as in cA', /d'. Observe tlie manner in which an Irishman pronounces party, parliament ; or 
 ilrop the italicised letters in s/«p lian/. 
 
 .5 ; as in English. 
 
 x/( '. as in English. 
 
 .S-. . a .single s, or double .?.s, would play the same part in sjh, the only syllable in which this initial is found. 
 The object of employing »x is to fi.K attention on the peculiar vowel sound which, as stated above, it 
 is so hard to reproduce. 
 
 I ; as in English. 
 
 /' . as in i', 2^', &c. Observe an Irishman's pronunciation of i in terror, torment; or drop the italics iu 
 hli hai-iA 
 
 U : as in jHsam, cafstip ; after another word, often softened to ch in f/ladsome. 
 
 /.<' ,■ the aspirate intervening as in ch\ and other initials. Let the reader drop the italicised letters in bets hard, 
 
 and he will retain <«'«. 
 /r ; like sz, employed to mark the peculiarity of the final li, but of no greater power than Is. 
 <:' ; like <s' above. 
 
 VI : as in English, but very faint before u. 
 y : as in English, but very faint before i, or «. 
 
 Breathings . 
 
 The aspirate which intervenes between the initials cli, k; p, t, tx. t:, and the vowels following them is indicated 
 by an inverted comma iii preference to an h, lest the English reader, following his own laws of spelling, 
 should be led to pronounce ph as in triumph, th as month, and so on ; which \flt)uld be a serious error. 
 The full recognition of the aspirate's value is of the last importance : the tones themselves are not of more. 
 A speaker A\'ho saj's lean when he ought to say khan, miirht as well speak of Loudon for London. The 
 aspirate prefixed to the initial h is a very strong breathing, but the omission of it is not attended with 
 the same serious consequences. 
 
 In the Final ao I have followed the Manchu spelling, against Morrison and Williams, who 
 write nou, dit. Tills, as I have admitted, is the approximate sound in certain Tones. 
 
 The Final eh, used only in yeh, may seem u:ineeessarih' separated from ieh. In my opinion 
 the consonant y is sufficiently plain to authorise it, and the tone-inflection is not less practicable 
 in the syllable i/r-h than in ieh. 
 
 So with the Final en. In the Final C-, some confusion with o is unavoidable. I have en- 
 deavoured to guide myself b)' the Manchu ; but find that, although native teachers consign them 
 to different finals, it is ne.\t to impossible, in many words, to say, whether e (or ngi-,) eke je, ke, Iii, 
 ■h i, ti. or 0, cho,jo, Jco, lo, mo, to, be the correct orthography. The same is true with the aspirated 
 ch. k, t ; but I think, that, after the aspirate in general the o prevails : also, that while none of 
 tlicse syllables sometimes sounded as ending in «> is exempt from the change to o, there are many 
 in whicii never change it to e. 
 
 The Final H is of doubtful existence even in nei, which certainly ends in a sound somewhat 
 different from the terminal of lei, mei. These have taken the place of lui, mui. 
 
 The Finals «« and eng have been substituted for U7i and una in syllables beginning with /. m, 
 2>. on the authority of the latest native works published at Canton to teach the Cantonese 
 to talk Mandarin, corroborated by the speech of Pekinese speaking their own dialect well. Tlie 
 Manchu ortho;:- .',)hy of last century wvls Jung, muiig, but always/fc«, nn'7i, phi. 
 
 The Syllable &rh is best so written by all who accept « as an orthographic element. The 
 Pilanchu dictionaries, though their alphabetic symbols would perfectly express it otherwise, write it 
 il, and invent a Chinese character to represent r, wdieu they have occasion to write the word er. 
 
 The u in iung, ung, and in ua, uai, and other combinations, in which, as the notes on the 
 Tone Examples adm!*j, it figures both as o and w, has been retained nevertheless, as the vowel most 
 certainly to be recognised in the simplest form of the sound, and as the most convenient for 
 exhibiting the variation of the tone, \\'itliout chang&of syllable; to which end, moreover, it was 
 expedient to avoid using the initials '/t»f, kiv. 
 
 2. Tone. There is no subject on which it is more important to write, and none on which is 
 harder to avoid rf^P'^^iting what has been said by others. 
 
 The ideas of a Chinese are capable of expression in writing in some thousands of characters 
 that may be used singly or iu combination with each other. The sound of each of these is such 
 tliac without much violence to fact we call it a monosyllable. The Chinese term tiiis mono- 
 syllable yin ; in no dialect known to us does the number of the i/in exceed a few hundreds ; hence 
 great confusion to the ear, and distress to the memory, when it would distinguish between sounds, 
 characters, or ideas, which it can only recall by an alphabetic denomination common to many. 
 
 (84)
 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 Under the yin, or sound, i, in Morrison's Dictionary there aro 1 1 05 characters differing in form 
 and moaning. Ofthis yi/j tiierc are, however, subordinate divisions, the shing ; keys in which the 
 voice is pitched, and by which a variety of distinction is effected, so delicate as to be retained only 
 after long and anxious watching by the foreign ear. but so essential an acquisition that, until by 
 practice his intonation be accurate, the foreign speaker is in hourly danger of making very laugh- 
 able mistakes. A good deal that he says will no doubt be understood, but, whether ho theorise 
 or not on the matter, until his speech be tomcally correct, no missionary or interpreter need 
 imagine himself secure of being intelligible. 
 
 The term Tone has been so long accepted as the equivalent of the Chinese sliang, that it may 
 be hardly worth while attempting to disturb the usage. It might bo notwithstanding rendered 
 with greater propriety note, in a musical sense, although no musical instrument to my knowledge 
 is capable of exhibiting more than an approximation to the shing. Dr Hagel, in his folio on the 
 Elementary Character of the Chinese Language (1801), has tried to give an idea of them as 
 musical notes. The attempt has been repeated, I believe, more recently, by L)r Dyer, the 
 celebrated American sinologue. 
 
 The number of the shing differs in different dialects. In the Peking dialect there are now 
 four; 1st, the sA«Hg- jj'jn^, or upper even tone ; 2d, the /isia ^'m^f, or lower even tone ; Sd, the 
 shang, or ascending tone ; 4th, the c/t'ti, receding or departing tone. 
 
 In the 1st tone, the upper-even, it may be enough to observe, the vowel sound, whether the 
 word be pronounced quickly or slowly, proceeds witliout elevation or depression. One of our 
 sinologues has not incorrectly styled it the affirmative tone. 
 
 In the 2d tone, the Inwer-even, the voice is jerked, much as when in English we utter words 
 expressive of doubt and astonishment. 
 
 In the 8d tone, the ascending, the sound becomes nearly as abrupt, but more resembling 
 what with us would indicate indignation and denial. 
 
 In the 4th tone, the receding, the vowel sound is prolonged as it were regretfully. 
 
 The ju, or entering, an abrupt tone still recognised in studying the written language, that 
 is to say in committing Chinese books to memory, is now ignored in the practice of the spoken 
 language of Peking ; most of the words or characters ranged under it in the vocabularies having 
 been ti'ansferi-ed to the 2d tone. 
 
 It is simplest, as Mr Meadows suggests, to distinguish the Four Tones by numbers. I write 
 the shing of the syllable pa, accordingly as follows : 
 
 pa', pa*, pa^, pa*. 
 
 The sounds of the syllables repeated in the above order form a sort of chime which can 
 only be learned by the ear, but which it is not diflicult to learn. When he has cauo'ht it, the 
 student should never hear a new phrase without taking it to pieces and satisfying himself and 
 his teacher, word by word, of tflie proper tone, or note, of each. So long as his teacher declines to 
 pass his notation as correct, so long should he carefully repeat the word or w-ords disputed.* When 
 absent from his teacher he will be able to fortify his ear by recurrence to the Syllabarv, 
 which he will first have taken the precaution to correct by the sheet of Errata at the beginning, 
 and the Appendices at the end. 
 
 There is some danger of misleading a student who has 7iot caught the chime, and once he 
 has he will dispense with all illustration. We will hazard but one parallel, for better or for worse- 
 Let A, B, C, D, be four persons engaged in conversation and a question be put by B regarding 
 the fate of some one known to them all. In the four lines below, I have supposed A to assert his 
 death in the 1st tone ; B, to express his apprehension that he has been killed, in the 2d; C, to 
 scout this suspicion, in the 3d ; and D, to confirm it sorrowfully, in the 4th. 
 
 1. slumg-jtHng, A. Dead. 
 
 2. hsi^a-p'iiig, B. Kiltd ? 
 
 3. slunig, C. No ! 
 
 4. ch'u, D. Yes! 
 
 Now, in this short dialogue, or tetralogue, English speakers would ordinarily so pitch the 
 voice as to make the whole a tolerable approximation to the chime the student has to acquire. 
 But the analogy would entirely mislead him were he not to qualify it by remembering that in the 
 four words instanced, the voice rises and falls according to tlie emotion of the speaker; whereas 
 the pitch of /)ff^ pa\ or any other syllables, is independent of any such motive. The tone of the 
 syllable has as little relation to its sense as the note allotted to any word in our son"-s has to its 
 meaning ; the distinction next to be observed being this, that, while there is nothing- to prevent 
 the same word being allotted in different songs to any note in the scale, it is only by exception 
 that, in Chinese speech, the place of a word in the tone-scale is ever exchanged for another. So, 
 p'a, to fear, is always ^'«* ; chioo, to teach, is at times ckiao\ at times chiao^. 
 
 * To give an instance of the scrapes into which inaccuracy in the tones may betray the speaker ; a gentleman, who really 
 speaks the language well, was recently asking where the salt for the supply of Peking' was obtained, and was told first, to his 
 astonishment, tliat it was all imported by foreigners. Objecting to this, and explaining that lie meant fresh salt, or the salt 
 consumed m daily food, he was yet more astonished to haar that it was brought from llo Nan ; nor was it until after some 
 minutes cross-examination that the Chinese addressed, detecting his error and correctly intoning the syllable, replied, " from the 
 sahnes of the province of course." The foreigner had been intoning (/•»'• the sou'kI for, amongst others, the word salt as 
 though It were ijni.^- the sound for, amongst others, the word smolce ; and file Chinese had believed the first question to refer to 
 opium, commonly called smoke, and the second, in which some qualifications had been added, to refer to native tobacco 
 
 (85) Y
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 As the reader will see from my remarks on the Tone Exercises in Section II, I limit the 
 influence of the Tone to the vowel sounds. The pitch of the voice, the note sounded, is identically 
 the same whether the syllable be ma^jati, kai, ch'-u, or anv other, the tone being unchanged. In 
 this I believe those who have written on the Tones are agreed, but 1 can give no authority but 
 my own for the treatment to which I have subjected the vowel sound in the same Exercises. 
 Of the subdivision and modification of the vowel sounds attempted therein, I ask only for a fair 
 trial, ere the experiment be rejected as valueless. If the distinction I have endeavoured to 
 represent by the reduplication of vowels be not imaginary, in the first place, a great portion of tho 
 tone difficulty will be disposed of; for, without perhaps altogether dispensing with diacritic 
 marks, and of course retaining the numerals as tone indices, we shall obtain the aid with which 
 we are most familiar, that of alphabetic symbols, towards the acquisition and retention of the 
 tone-inflections. In the second place, we shall do much towards removing the reproach of homo- 
 phony from the Peking language, which at present we regard as confined within the limit of four 
 hundred syllabic categories. This number is in reality more than trebled to the Chinese ear, by 
 the tonic subdivisions. If we could succeed in expressing these alphabetically, we should more 
 than treble the present number of vocables, as our ear accepts them, in the dialect, and by every 
 vocable we add to the spoken tongue, by so much do we relieve the foreign ear and memory of a 
 labour to which it is unaccustomed. 
 
 3. Rhythm. What Tone is to the individual sound, Rhythm is to the sentence. Like 
 the tone, it can only be acquired from a native. The student must take careful note of the proper 
 place of the emphasis, impressing it upon his recollection either as in Section II, or by some other 
 phonetic appliance. He must not be surprised to find the Rhythm in apparent antagonism to 
 the Tone in some cases ; especially when the adjective or adverb is formed by reduplication of a 
 word with the enclitic particle ti appended ; as in sung-su7ig-ti, hsieh-hsieh-ti ; where his teacher 
 will refuse to recognise any difference between the tones of the two sung, or the two hsieh, 
 although, to our ear, the accent of the second diff'ers widely from that of the first, resting in some 
 of these polysyllabic combinations on the one, and in some, on the other. 
 
 END OF PAKT III. 
 
 OF TH5 
 
 HSIN CHING LU. 
 
 (86)
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Introduction. 
 
 Errata. 
 
 Part I, — Category op T'ien 
 
 Part II, — Sacred Edict, Cap. 1, .... 
 
 Part III, — Section I, Tone Exercises 
 
 „ „ — Section II, Do. phonetically arranged, 
 „ „ —Section III, Sound, Tone, and Rhythm. . , 
 
 . Page, 
 
 1. 
 
 5» 
 
 45. 
 
 • J5 
 
 63. 
 
 J> 
 
 74. 
 
 • » 
 
 82.
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 130-139 
 
 1^' 
 
 139. 
 
 tso - 
 szu - 
 
 w 
 
 hsiang 
 
 w 
 
 -ti, 
 
 w 
 
 tou 
 
 ^' 
 
 shih 
 
 a' 
 
 wo 
 
 s^' 
 
 hsin 
 
 
 tz'u, 
 
 -4^' 
 
 pu 
 
 #' 
 
 kuan - 
 
 ^' 
 
 - chiao 
 
 ■^' 
 
 tzu - 
 
 %' 
 
 - sun 
 
 w 
 
 -ti 
 
 m' 
 
 yiian - 
 
 w 
 
 -ku. 
 
 
 
 f4^ 
 
 Sua 
 
 138. 
 
 lU'll 
 
 pu 
 
 t'ing, 
 
 lisin 
 
 pu 
 
 fan ; 
 
 chiao 
 
 jCn 
 
 urh 
 
 -to 
 
 t'ing - 
 
 - cliien, 
 
 pu- 
 
 yii- 
 
 -tg 
 
 sheng 
 
 cli'i 
 
 a. 
 
 
 137. 
 
 yao 
 
 pu 
 
 sMh 
 
 m' 
 
 chun 
 
 tr 
 
 -'hua 
 
 m' 
 
 'hung 
 
 7' 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^: 
 
 wo, 
 
 Wi' 
 
 'huo - 
 
 Wi' 
 
 'huo - 
 
 %' 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^r 
 
 -ti 
 
 m' 
 
 chiu 
 
 T* 
 
 -hsia 
 
 ^' 
 
 ni 
 
 ^^ 
 
 lu-h - 
 
 ^' 
 
 - tao 
 
 ^: 
 
 lai. 
 
 END OF PART III. 
 
 136. 
 
 ^ " ch'uang 
 
 Jl * - stang 
 
 S. ch'ou 
 
 ^^' ch'ung; 
 
 ^' k'uei 
 
 ®/ shui ; 
 
 ^3 hsiang 
 
 j^ " sliih 
 
 f^* k'un 
 
 ^^ chi 
 
 J »- liao ; 
 
 it' tz'a 
 
 V^ ^ mei 
 
 ^ ' ch'ui 
 
 'M! teng. 
 
 HMCMMMai^paka
 
 126-135 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 m' 
 
 ■iUt * 
 
 
 134. 
 
 
 132. 
 
 
 130. 
 
 chia 
 
 t^' 
 
 yao 
 
 M' 
 
 clicn 
 
 -H 
 
 ¥•' 
 
 tsao 
 
 m' 
 
 sbih 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^1' 
 
 cliih 
 
 w 
 
 Kicng - 
 
 nu - 
 
 - chuan 
 
 - m6.n 
 cli'ueh 
 
 - shao 
 slie° - 
 -ma, 
 cliiu 
 t'o 
 cliiang - 
 
 - cliUn 
 tai 
 
 - liao 
 
 - lai 
 pa. 
 
 135. 
 
 ch'i- 
 ^<^ ' - cli'u 
 1^' sliuo 
 
 'hua, 
 
 /J- 4 
 1^. 
 
 t'a 
 pu 
 lisin 
 'hoii 
 chien 
 ^ ' sLih - 
 m ^ - cli'mg 
 ^ ' 'buai 
 "f I liao, 
 
 ^ 
 
 'k?^ 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 Ba ' clman 
 m ' ch'ing 
 
 •^: 
 
 wo 
 lai. 
 
 ^v' clii"- 
 %' -'A 
 ^^ sLih 
 
 ^/ t'ien, 
 
 ^' wo 
 
 ■^' yell 
 
 [^ shang 
 
 i®> hsiao - 
 
 ■j^ - lang 
 
 ^' nien 
 sliu 
 - ch'ii 
 la. 
 
 ii- 1 
 
 *^ 
 
 ID ' yii^ 
 % 
 
 - wei 
 'hao 
 cliiii, 
 ku- 
 
 - tzTi 
 cilia 
 cL'iimg; 
 
 JP' cli'iieli 
 ■Mr sbih 
 
 Fo 
 
 Yeb 
 ^' sMh 
 
 2S151 tsunsr 
 
 ;^' pi 
 
 Pg * cb'ih 
 
 lit' 
 
 
 i: 
 
 m 
 
 hsiang- 
 pu- 
 
 - tao 
 -ti; 
 i - 
 
 - sLiang 
 wu 
 ku 
 tsao 
 -la; 
 wo 
 'hai 
 bsia 
 sliou 
 
 - che. 
 
 131. 
 
 ^ ' cli'iang 
 
 ^' cMe° 
 
 ®|' Bui- 
 
 Mt' -jan 
 
 /Jn/ lisiao, 
 
 -|L' cha- 
 
 ffJ ' - ch'u 
 
 ilf' 'hao 
 
 itb ' hsieh 
 
 JE 
 
 hsieh 
 - lai ; 
 
 jn hsien ■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 - tsai 
 tou 
 yao 
 ^ szu 
 P^; la. 
 
 ^ 
 
 in' 
 
 
 
 5£; 
 
 128. 
 
 urh 
 ta 
 ma, 
 ni - 
 -mC-n 
 
 cilia 
 
 'hai 
 
 -tzu 
 
 na 
 
 kaa 
 
 -tsii 
 
 pa 
 
 chang 
 
 'hua 
 
 -'rh 
 
 t'ling - 
 
 -p'o 
 liao. 
 
 129. 
 
 !K 
 
 "TCi 
 
 'huo 
 shao 
 
 \^'- ch'u- 
 
 M ' - 'hei 
 
 ij^* k'uai 
 
 !«' i^ei 
 
 fill' t'a 
 
 ^^^' chih- 
 
 y'A= -chih 
 
 
 ^ pieh 
 
 /JS chin 
 
 i* -t- 
 
 '^' liu- 
 
 M^ -lei 
 
 126. 
 
 ^^ y^ 
 
 5ff 
 
 ko 
 
 tz'u- 
 -ya 
 
 - tzu 
 t'iao 
 tz'u - 
 
 - ch'i 
 
 - ti 
 kuo 
 
 lu; 
 
 shan. 
 
 m' 
 
 chiao 
 
 \r 
 
 mei 
 
 w 
 
 tz'u- 
 
 
 - wer 
 
 Sjc' 
 
 tsai 
 
 T' 
 
 liao 
 
 1 
 
 shen 
 
 tz'u. 
 
 127. 
 
 1^' tso 
 
 gfC tzu 
 
 ■J ^ hao ; 
 
 ^ ' tens 
 
 ~K ■* hsia 
 
 ^' tz'u 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 tsai 
 tz'u 
 pa!
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 HO-IlT, 
 
 ;-^ i 
 
 m 
 
 ft 1 
 
 fir 
 
 A' 
 
 124. 
 
 yao 
 
 chC- 
 
 tsung 
 
 tu- 
 
 cli'ien 
 
 tzu - 
 
 sLlk 
 
 -ti 
 
 nrli 
 
 tao 
 pu 
 
 tzu - ■ 
 - clii 
 i 
 ko 
 
 ■a" 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ti 
 
 'liao. 
 
 125. 
 
 
 claia • 
 
 tzu ■ 
 
 j^' 'liou- 
 
 g ■* tzu 
 
 -^' k'cn 
 
 7^' tzu- 
 
 ^* shih 
 
 P^; ya. 
 
 fi. 
 
 «t. 122. 
 
 lio. 120. 
 
 ■ t'.i 
 
 Tal' ^^- 
 
 ' slnli 
 
 jd ' cli'ang 
 
 ' 'liai 
 1 
 
 hsiaug 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 • szu 
 
 ^ szu 
 
 A. ' - cliiu 
 
 [Jtl szu 
 
 ^' Wll 
 
 -fe ^ uien 
 
 1 
 
 inai 
 
 lo- 
 
 kao 
 - liao 
 
 
 
 
 t'ai 
 'IIu- 
 - szu 
 
 -ti, 
 
 clie 
 kuau - 
 
 =1 1 
 
 nj - szu 
 
 Egi' tie" 
 
 5^41 
 
 nan 
 szu - 
 -lo. 
 
 H* chu- 
 
 iill* ti 
 
 ^* ch'ii 
 
 fa" * kuan 
 
 J - liao, 
 
 i,' t'a 
 
 3^ neng 
 
 4^ * tso 
 
 ^* pu 
 
 jS. nmg 
 
 6fr' -ti. 
 
 
 
 
 5E' 
 
 121. 
 
 wo 
 lisiu - 
 
 - chill 
 shuo 
 t'ing - 
 -tang 
 
 - hao 
 i 
 
 so 
 
 - 'rh 
 fang 
 tzu, 
 
 yu 
 
 lia 
 
 ch'ie" 
 - 'rli 
 cliuan. 
 
 — tmg 118. 
 
 T' 
 
 m: 
 
 
 - liao 
 shou 
 pa, 
 sung - 
 
 - nang 
 
 - ti 
 ya! 
 sliUi 
 shui 
 neng - 
 
 - sung 
 ni, 
 
 ta 
 
 chia 
 
 sung 
 
 szii 
 
 a? 
 
 119. 
 
 M' T'ung 
 
 f\\ ' Chou 
 
 n' Ta- 
 
 §jnj' -t'ung 
 
 W t'u- 
 
 ^' -'A 
 
 .^' ch'ii 
 
 "7 -liao. 
 
 — un. 116. 
 
 PJir na 
 
 ■ -Vh 
 Lun 
 
 £ 
 
 SHU 
 
 aS.' Yu 
 on 
 
 ;|ig ' Hsiang 
 ^' 
 
 ^' 
 
 f^' 
 
 
 Kung 
 
 'liai 
 Jung- 
 
 - shun 
 cheng 
 
 - chfi 
 tun 
 
 - che 
 nion 
 ni. 
 
 117. 
 
 -^' 
 
 Chieh 
 
 ¥' 
 
 cliu 
 
 ^' 
 
 -ti 
 
 m' 
 
 ku- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 - t'ung 
 
 ir 
 
 - chiang 
 
 ^/ 
 
 pan 
 
 m' 
 
 tsai 
 
 #-^ 
 
 
 
 tuh 
 shea 
 -tzu 
 chia 
 
 y^i 
 
 ko 
 
 niu 
 
 tun 
 
 -tzu, 
 
 •hai 
 
 shih 
 
 Yao 
 
 Shun 
 
 nien 
 
 - chien 
 
 -ti
 
 105-115. 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 — ui. 113. — 
 
 ill' clnii 
 
 ■y ' -liao 
 
 H. urli 
 
 ^' -to 
 
 iR^ -ye" 
 
 lai 
 
 -?•«' t=^"- 
 
 114. 
 
 i\!>' 
 
 'hili 
 hsin - 
 JS' i - 
 
 m' -ti 
 
 |eJ ' 'iiui 
 
 hoii - 
 -'hiii 
 
 
 ^' kai 
 
 W 'liui 
 ftH; t'a. 
 
 115. 
 
 eh 
 
 5r 
 
 ^ ' ts'iii 
 
 ts'ui- 
 -pien 
 shih 
 sliui, 
 
 yao 
 
 -^ 2 
 
 P±' t'u- 
 T^' -mo 
 
 Pi^ ' ts'ui 
 
 — un. j 
 
 111. 
 
 nr 
 
 fir 
 
 i: 
 
 mi 
 
 A' 
 
 tsui 
 
 - ti 
 'liun - 
 'hun - 
 cli'eii - 
 ch'en - 
 
 -ti, 
 'hun 
 tou 
 mei 
 
 - liao ; 
 'huen 
 
 ■ hui 
 
 - che 
 'huen 
 ma 
 jen 
 ni. 
 
 112. 
 
 m 
 
 tao 
 
 na 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ta 
 
 ku" 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^' ch'li 
 
 ^: 1-. 
 
 Yi^ ' chan 
 
 J - liao 
 
 4 
 
 — ■ 1 
 
 ^ ' shC-n 
 
 ^ ' ts'ao - 
 
 ^* kun 
 
 -f' - tzu. 
 
 
 ■ IV 3 
 CW 4 
 
 PA' 
 
 109. 
 
 kuei - 
 
 kuei - 
 
 chli - 
 
 chU - 
 
 -ti 
 
 pich 
 
 nung 
 
 kuei, 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 ch'eng 
 
 ko 
 
 fa 
 
 kuei 
 
 tzu 
 
 ti 
 
 ni. 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 m 
 
 110. 
 
 t'a 
 
 tlng- 
 
 k'uei - 
 
 kuan - 
 
 chia- 
 
 -ti 
 
 'hen 
 
 k'uei - 
 
 - wei, 
 
 wo 
 
 chiu 
 
 hsiang 
 
 ko 
 
 k'uei - 
 
 -lei 
 
 'hen 
 
 t'ao 
 
 k'uei. 
 
 
 ^: 
 
 r^ 
 
 fir 
 
 uei, 107. 
 
 'hen 
 mei 
 
 yu 
 
 ko 
 kuei - 
 
 - chii ; 
 shua - 
 ch'ien - 
 nao - 
 kuei - 
 -ti, 
 
 pu 
 
 hsiang 
 
 fu- 
 
 - kuei 
 chia 
 -ti 
 tzii 
 ti. 
 
 
 fas. 
 
 Z^ 
 
 108. 
 
 k'uei 
 
 t'a 
 
 chung 
 
 vni 
 
 k'uei, 
 
 chii - 
 
 -jan 
 
 shih 
 
 k'uei - 
 
 -lei, 
 
 nan - 
 
 - tao 
 pu 
 ts'an - 
 
 - k'uei 
 ma? 
 
 
 — uanff. 105 
 
 B Shang 
 ^ Chiang 
 
 na 
 
 t'ien, 
 
 ping 
 
 jen 
 
 chiao 
 
 - che 
 'hen 
 shuang - 
 
 - k'uai, 
 wan 
 - shang 
 yu 
 t'ien 
 
 - liao 
 i 
 tui 
 
 A 
 
 ■SI-' 
 
 
 T 
 
 •^g shuang 
 ^' she°^ 
 
 106. 
 
 ■^ ' ts'ang 
 
 n' ^- 
 
 ^ ' - t'ou 
 
 ^ ts'ang 
 
 f^^ 'hao - 
 
 jty hsieh - 
 
 IS* -ko 
 
 7J^ mi 
 
 pjs; ^-
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 97-104 
 
 
 
 tiang. 103. 
 
 kuang 
 
 - che 
 ko 
 nao - 
 
 - tai, 
 tsai 
 Kuang 
 Tung 
 sheng - 
 
 - ch'eng 
 H- 
 -t'ou 
 kuang 
 -liao 
 ko 
 kou. 
 
 104. 
 
 7' 
 
 lit 
 
 ^ 
 
 pjs; 
 
 t'a 
 
 chien 
 
 pai 
 
 mang - 
 
 mang - 
 
 -ti 
 
 hsia 
 
 - liao 
 i 
 
 ti 
 
 hsUeh ; 
 ku- 
 -tz'u 
 mang 
 
 - chtj 
 
 yao 
 
 ch'uan 
 p'i 
 
 mang 
 
 - p'ao 
 ni. 
 
 — uan. 101. 
 
 ^ ' ch'uan 
 j^ ' 'hao 
 T' liao 
 
 ^ ' - shang 
 
 Hi]' kang 
 
 Jt * ^^^^S 
 
 ^' ch'uan, 
 
 jg 'hai 
 
 J^ mei 
 
 PjjS ch'uan 
 
 ^;^' -kuo 
 
 - lai 
 
 ni, 
 
 chiu 
 
 pa 
 i 
 
 ch'ua" 
 
 -Vh 
 
 
 ^ ■ ch'ao- 
 ^" -chu 
 
 J - liao. 
 
 102. 
 
 ^' ch'u 
 
 J^ ' - urh 
 
 m\. luan : 
 
 ^ ' shih - 
 
 '1^ ' - ch'ing 
 
 ^' pu 
 
 BE tieng 
 
 II?' tuan. 
 
 — uan. 99. 
 
 BS ' chuan 
 
 i(^ ' hsin 
 
 #' teng 
 
 ^ft chuan 
 
 ^' -kuo 
 
 ^! -H 
 
 3. tsai 
 
 1^' chuan 
 
 ^ " ch'ien 
 
 100. 
 
 ' kang 
 ' tsuan 
 
 ^ ■* - chin - 
 
 ^' wo 
 
 :|G' pa 
 
 B' p^ 
 
 6^' *' 
 
 I5i 3 
 
 tsuan - 
 
 tsuan 
 ^ chu 
 
 la. 
 
 t; 
 
 98. 
 
 a 
 
 6^' 
 
 3V 
 
 Ira 
 
 wo 
 
 chuan - 
 
 kuan 
 
 -ti 
 
 ti- 
 
 -fa"^ 
 
 -'rh 
 
 shih - 
 
 - ching 
 
 to, 
 
 ylian 
 
 P^ ' sheng - 
 
 ^ - chuan 
 
 1®' ko 
 
 ^ ' liao 
 
 ^^' ch'ueh, 
 
 IE* <=^"an 
 
 fpg' ha 
 
 ^^ ' ch'ie" 
 
 ^: -rh; 
 
 ife ' shui 
 
 
 w 
 
 hsiang 
 
 chin 
 
 ching 
 
 tsai 
 
 ch'uan 
 
 - shang 
 
 neng 
 
 -tg 
 
 ^ ch'uan 
 fit' -ti 
 
 55c' i- 
 
 ^ ' - shang 
 ^' tou 
 ^^ ■ mei 
 
 TUao. 
 a I 
 
 — uan. 97. 
 
 m 
 ± 
 
 
 
 wan 
 
 - shang 
 meng - 
 
 - chien, 
 16ng 
 pu 
 fang 
 tsuan - 
 chin - 
 wu 
 
 -li 
 
 ir 
 
 ko 
 
 A' 
 
 jen 
 
 ^. 
 
 -lai. 
 
 #' 
 
 k'an 
 
 ^' 
 
 - cliien 
 
 m' 
 
 shih 
 
 w 
 
 ko 
 
 w 
 
 shu 
 
 w 
 
 - tsua° 
 
 li' 
 
 -'rh 
 
 fir 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^/ 
 
 tsuan 
 
 ^' 
 
 - chu 
 
 ^' 
 
 wo 
 
 fir 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pien 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -tzu 
 
 1^' 
 
 chiu 
 
 ^^ 
 
 wang 
 
 it!l^ 
 
 ti- 
 
 T^ 
 
 - hsia 
 
 t^: 
 
 chuai. 
 
 w 
 
 pa 
 
 n' 
 
 wo 
 
 # hsia 
 
 7'. -ii^°-
 
 88-96 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 %' 
 
 
 t; 
 
 m 
 
 Bis; 
 
 uan. 06. 
 
 chicli - 
 -pi 
 
 - \irh 
 ts'uan 
 
 - chin 
 ko 
 tsei 
 lai, 
 pa 
 
 ts'uan - 
 -'ho 
 -li 
 
 -ti 
 tien - 
 
 - hsin 
 yeh 
 ch'ih 
 
 - liao, 
 'hai 
 pa 
 pe - 
 -'rh 
 Wang 
 Mang - 
 ts'uan - 
 wei - 
 -ti 
 
 ch'ang - 
 pe 
 -•rh, 
 t'ou 
 
 - liao 
 ch'U 
 lo 
 
 — uan. 95. 
 
 fit; -ti 
 
 ■j& shih 
 
 n\ ^^ 
 
 ^ ' szu- 
 
 ^ -wen 
 
 c\^ sheng 
 
 m 
 
 
 SUl 
 
 juan - 
 
 -jao, 
 
 shuo 
 
 'hua 
 
 tso 
 
 shOi 
 
 k'o 
 
 pu 
 
 juan 
 
 ^ ' hsiang 
 )A' kua 
 -'rh 
 cMen 
 - che 
 juan 
 -ti 
 nieb, 
 t'a 
 k'o 
 ^ juan 
 pjl ' chung- 
 yu 
 ying 
 
 
 tS£, 
 
 
 — nai. 92. 
 
 •^ " 'huai 
 
 2 
 
 ^' tu 
 -^ tzu 
 
 j\J^^ - hsin. 
 
 93. 
 
 A' 
 
 *; 
 
 w 
 
 che 
 
 'hai 
 
 -tzu 
 
 kuai ; 
 
 pu 
 
 p'a 
 
 jen- 
 
 - chia 
 
 kuai 
 
 -liao 
 
 ch'U; 
 
 kviai 
 
 pu 
 
 te 
 
 t'a 
 
 ma 
 
 t'eng 
 
 t'a. 
 
 94. 
 
 « 
 
 J -liao 
 
 mai 
 -tzii, 
 W mai 
 "T ' liao 
 
 5t5; lai 
 
 90. 
 
 ' yin 
 
 wei 
 
 kai 
 
 ;il' kua 
 
 ^' ch'ien, 
 
 5Bl 
 
 t; 
 
 liai 
 
 kua - 
 
 -fu 
 
 chieh 
 
 -liao 
 
 chien 
 
 ma- 
 
 -kua 
 
 -tzu 
 
 tang 
 
 -la. 
 
 91. 
 
 w 
 
 
 % 
 
 W. 
 
 shua 
 
 shua 
 
 -ti 
 
 chill 
 
 -ti 
 
 shai 
 
 -tzu 
 
 hsiang, 
 
 'hai 
 
 shuo 
 
 pu 
 
 shih 
 
 shua 
 
 ch'ien 
 
 ni? 
 
 -- %M. 88. 
 
 ■^* .shou 
 
 m.' -li 
 
 ^f -che 
 
 1®; ko 
 
 rj^ chua 
 
 ■^ ' - che 
 
 Pg' ch'ih 
 B/S; ni. 
 
 89. 
 
 HR yen 
 
 :^; 'hua, 
 
 j^ tao 
 
 ^' -rh 
 
 m ' t'ing 
 
 ^^ chien 
 
 A 
 
 yu 
 
 jSn 
 
 'hua- 
 
 -pai 
 
 ■wo 
 
 pu 
 
 1^ - 'hui 
 ^' shuo 
 Wt. ' 'hua.
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 78-87. 
 
 86. 
 
 flu 
 
 ^\ 
 
 f5^ 
 
 %'■ 
 
 m 
 ^ 
 
 T.' 
 
 tu 
 
 shu 
 
 -liao; 
 
 tang- 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 tse°- 
 
 -ma 
 
 shu? 
 
 ni 
 
 shu- 
 
 -shu 
 
 ch'ien, 
 
 i 
 
 ting 
 
 pu 
 
 kou 
 
 shu 
 
 -urh 
 
 -la. 
 
 87. 
 
 T 
 
 17 
 
 ± 
 
 ± 
 
 t'u 
 
 - tzu 
 
 'hua 
 
 -liao 
 
 chang 
 
 Lsing- 
 
 -lo 
 t'u, 
 
 tsai 
 
 t'u 
 
 tui 
 
 - ehang 
 
 ta 
 
 t'u 
 
 -tzii. 
 
 M. 84. 
 
 7^ ta- 
 ^<J\ ' ch'u - 
 
 ta 
 
 J " - liao 
 ch'u 
 -tzu 
 
 
 |«^' ch'u 
 ^^ -tzii; 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 T 
 
 3 
 
 m 
 chg 
 ch'u - 
 - sheng 
 'han 
 liao 
 -ti 
 ma? 
 
 85. 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 wu (or u) 
 
 fi' -li 
 
 tt4- chiao 
 
 ^' wu- 
 
 ^ ' -kuiig 
 
 yao 
 - liao, 
 chOi 
 3^' t'eng 
 J - liao 
 
 
 wu 
 
 t'ien; 
 chen 
 k'o 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 — 82. 
 
 sui 
 
 shih 
 
 ko 
 
 chiang - 
 
 - chiin 
 
 ch'lieh 
 
 shou- 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 -'rh 
 
 'hen 
 
 chlin; 
 
 i 
 
 chiin 
 
 -ti 
 
 jen 
 
 tou 
 
 hsiao - 
 
 -'hua 
 
 t'a. 
 
 83. 
 
 lo- 
 
 :'eng- 
 
 ^ ma- 
 
 ^a ch'iin - 
 
 ^^' ''' 
 
 ^^ - chia 
 
 :^' nti- 
 
 -jP^ - men 
 
 — «y 4 
 
 yf% pu 
 
 ^ ch'uan 
 
 1^' ch'un 
 
 ■+• - tzij 
 
 &^ 
 
 R4 
 
 — iln. 80. 
 
 'ho 
 
 -ti 
 
 tsui 
 
 hsiin- 
 
 hsiin - 
 
 -ti, 
 
 chiao 
 
 hsijn - 
 
 - chieh 
 
 -ti 
 
 Yti- 
 
 ^ ' - shih 
 ^J" chiao - 
 hsiin 
 
 fir 
 
 liao 
 
 i 
 
 tun. 
 
 ^' 
 
 ,m^ 1 
 
 
 81. 
 
 chiu 
 to 
 
 - liao 
 t'ou 
 fa- 
 -yun; 
 'hao - 
 
 - hsiang 
 cMa- 
 -yiin 
 -ti 
 shih 
 -ti, 
 
 pi 
 yiin- 
 
 - ch'uan 
 keng 
 U- 
 -'hai, 
 
 78. 
 
 w 
 m 
 
 e 
 
 chia 
 
 - clie 
 
 hsueh 
 
 -tzu 
 
 man 
 
 ch'u 
 
 -'rh 
 
 hsiieh ; 
 
 t'ien 
 - shang 
 yu 
 
 hsia - 
 -hsiieh, 
 pa 
 lien 
 tung 
 -tg 
 
 hsiieh - 
 -pal 
 -ti. 
 
 79. 
 
 
 ^ji 4 
 
 1i^ 
 
 7C. 
 
 shih - 
 
 ylin - 
 
 tzu- 
 
 -yiieh 
 
 -ti 
 
 shuo - 
 
 -hua, 
 
 pan 
 
 ko 
 
 yiieh 
 
 •hai 
 
 shuo 
 
 pu 
 
 ■wan.
 
 69-77. 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 — iieh. 76. 
 
 m 
 
 %' 
 
 <W3 
 
 jHi • 
 
 4P^ 
 
 clien 
 
 shih 
 
 mai 
 
 cli'iieh- 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ma? 
 
 ch'ueh 
 
 ma 
 
 yao 
 
 mai 
 
 che 
 
 hsieh 
 
 ch'ien? •• 
 
 wo 
 
 cli'lieli 
 
 t'i 
 
 ni 
 
 hsiu. 
 
 77. 
 
 cliiieli 
 
 ^ ' shen 
 
 74. 
 
 Q Hsuan 
 
 ^; Chieh, 
 
 "t^. Hsiian 
 
 ^ ' T'ien 
 
 1®' ko 
 ^ mai 
 
 jj^ hsuan - 
 
 j^shih 
 -^ ■* liou 
 Jg hsiian 
 T^ ' kuan. 
 
 75. 
 
 tzu 
 
 w 
 
 ^* ting 
 ^ ' chueh 
 ^' - tzu, 
 ,^ ' ma 
 liao 
 chiieh 
 ^/ - tzu, 
 
 tU' -°^'" 
 
 /^ * chiieh 
 ^' -lai 
 
 T.' -1- 
 
 
 is 
 
 Ml 
 
 yiian- 
 
 -chia 
 
 yiian 
 
 pu 
 
 shih " 
 
 wo 
 
 chieh 
 
 -ti; 
 
 na 
 
 shih 
 
 yuan 
 
 nien 
 
 -ti 
 
 shih; 
 
 yiian 
 
 wo 
 
 tso 
 
 she"- 
 
 -ma? 
 
 
 %' 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 •A. 3 
 
 ■2 
 
 72. 
 
 yao 
 chlian 
 kuan, 
 pu 
 
 pi 
 chiian 
 
 -che 
 
 pao 
 
 -'rh 
 
 p'ao; 
 
 pa 
 
 chia- 
 
 -chiian 
 
 chiao 
 
 kei 
 
 shui? 
 
 73. 
 
 t4' 
 
 
 ^ 
 T- 
 
 
 chiao 
 
 ping 
 
 ch'iian- 
 
 -chu 
 
 ch'iian 
 
 sha 
 
 -liao 
 
 ko 
 
 chi 
 
 ch'iian 
 
 pu 
 
 liu ; 
 
 feng 
 
 ch'iian 
 
 hsiao 
 
 'hao 
 
 
 — uan. 71. 
 
 1^' wo 
 
 ^" k'an - 
 
 ^^ - chien 
 
 ^ " k'uai 
 
 >f^^ iai 
 
 ^ i'j'en 
 g^ ' hsuan 
 
 {^' 'htia 
 
 ^ ' chin 
 
 ^ * - tza 
 
 ^/ Pien, 
 
 i ^ tsai 
 
 :^^ ta 
 
 
 
 
 0^ 
 t: 
 
 k'ou 
 
 -'rh 
 
 hsiian 
 
 - che, 
 
 hsiang 
 
 -lai 
 
 chiu 
 
 shih 
 
 tso 
 
 -'rh 
 
 hsiian 
 
 jih 
 
 -tzu 
 
 chin 
 
 ching 
 
 'hou 
 
 hsiian 
 
 -ti 
 
 t'a 
 
 chia 
 
 liao. 
 
 — M. 69. 
 
 mai 
 
 ■^ shuang 
 
 &' -p'i 
 
 ^= -fiao 
 
 %' -'rh 
 
 ^' -ti 
 
 flIS' /« 
 
 ^ "* tzu 
 
 jg* shih 
 
 &^; -ti- 
 
 70. 
 
 m' *'' 
 
 ^g ch'ii 
 
 #^ -ta 
 
 it' chg- 
 
 w -^° 
 
 ^\ '''" 
 
 ^& shih 
 
 W ^'^ 
 
 ^ * pan - 
 
 -y*/ -tzu; 
 
 _ 2 
 
 chii 
 
 W '^'^^ 
 
 i^ ' shuo 
 
 ;^ ' pu 
 
 "^ ' ch'ing. 
 
 n
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 60-68 
 
 
 — ou. 67. 
 
 sou- 
 sou- 
 -ti 
 
 fOng, 
 
 cb'ui 
 
 -t£- 
 
 wo 
 
 tou - 
 
 tou- 
 
 sou- 
 
 sou- 
 
 -ti. 
 
 6^/ 
 
 51 * cHh 
 
 -Mr shih 
 
 ^' 
 
 k'o- 
 
 - sou 
 
 ^: 1- 
 
 68. 
 
 ;'ou- 
 
 &^; -^^ 
 
 ^* tsai 
 
 jg' ch'iang 
 
 flS ' t'ou 
 
 I* * - shang 
 j^ * t'ou 
 
 1^ hsi 
 
 Pg 
 
 ji; 
 
 
 A 
 
 0, ngo. 65. 
 
 chi 
 
 sliih 
 
 cli'ih - 
 
 - cliai 
 
 nicn 
 
 Fo, 
 
 chiu 
 
 pu 
 
 kai 
 
 ma 
 
 jtn 
 
 cb'ang- 
 
 fo. 
 
 6Q. 
 
 m[ 0- 
 
 M' '^- 
 
 #' Fo! 
 
 Hg' wo 
 
 >J/» sliao 
 
 ^ chih 
 
 
 o! 
 
 ylian 
 
 -lai 
 
 sliili 
 
 ni 
 
 J liao 
 
 fl 
 
 '^ > 
 
 fill 
 
 t'ou 
 -til 
 
 — iunff. 63. 
 
 ^ ch'uing- 
 
 F& cliung - 
 
 ^^; "'' 
 
 A.' j^°' 
 
 11^ '^ nau - 
 
 JB -tao 
 
 4- l 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 tzu- 
 
 - cilia 
 pao - 
 -tO- 
 -cliu 
 sLih 
 wu- 
 
 - cli'iung 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 "3" - kuei 
 J -liao 
 |W ma? 
 
 
 64. 
 
 ^ ' - hsiung 
 
 -^^ lia 
 
 ^* shih 
 
 )k' '^- 
 
 HE hsiung- 
 
 1^6' -ti. 
 
 — iu. 61. 
 
 f^V ni 
 
 ^ ' cli'iu - 
 ^' ch'lu- 
 
 flv -ti 
 
 p^ ' Cllih 
 
 H 1 
 
 ku 
 
 t'i 
 
 Kj^/ ch'iu, 
 
 m* pa 
 
 ^' tou 
 
 ^' tSng 
 
 3||' ch'iu 
 
 1^; la. 
 
 62. 
 
 #' 
 
 fir 
 
 a 
 
 @$^ 
 t; 
 
 cheii - 
 
 hsiu- 
 
 mei- 
 
 wei- 
 
 -ti 
 
 ch'ih 
 
 - liao 
 i 
 
 hsiu, 
 pa 
 
 hsiu - 
 -ts'ai 
 yell 
 kuaii - 
 
 - tsui 
 
 - liao. 
 
 PR' 
 
 
 A' 
 
 1^ 
 
 it:. > 
 
 >^4 
 
 ■ w. 60. 
 
 lisiuo, 
 
 liao, 
 
 cliC- 
 
 liang 
 
 ko 
 
 tzQ, 
 
 yu 
 
 nien 
 
 hsio 
 
 lio 
 
 ti; 
 
 Jisiao 
 
 tzu 
 
 yeh 
 
 yu 
 
 nien 
 
 kdiish 
 
 tzu 
 
 yin 
 
 ti; 
 
 hsieii - 
 
 -jan, 
 
 jen 
 
 sui 
 
 sliih 
 
 t'ung 
 
 cli'u 
 
 -'rh 
 
 -lai 
 
 ti, 
 
 na 
 
 k'ou 
 
 }in 
 
 cli'ueli 
 
 uan 
 
 ting.
 
 49-59 
 
 KXEUCISES IN TUE TONES. 
 
 i^r 
 
 
 Tie' 
 
 /iScii 
 
 «H^. 58, 
 111 
 
 -ti 
 
 yen 
 
 -cliiiig 
 
 k'an- 
 
 pu 
 
 - cliien 
 
 chiiig 
 
 -U 
 
 -ti 
 
 slmi 
 
 pu 
 
 chiiig 
 
 ma? 
 
 
 
 i: 
 
 
 ^: 
 
 "■ 59. 
 
 fan 
 
 'huo 
 
 hsing 
 
 -tzii 
 
 pao 
 
 tsai 
 
 hsing- 
 
 -li 
 
 - shang, 
 pa 
 
 wo 
 
 sliao 
 
 hsing 
 
 - liao ; 
 hsing - 
 
 - k'liei 
 niei 
 sliao 
 -che 
 fang 
 -tzii. 
 
 #,' t'a 
 
 sui 
 
 ^' shih 
 H ■ ch'iung 
 
 tUUn 
 
 IP 4 
 
 ch'i- 
 
 ■pf' k'o 
 ^' pu 
 
 /j^ ■* sliao. 
 
 50. 
 
 A' 
 
 wo 
 
 hsiu 
 
 -H 
 
 hsiaug 
 
 hsin 
 
 ko 
 
 52.' -'A 
 
 i?^ 
 
 tai 
 
 if' fOng- 
 
 57. 
 
 ^^ pi"" 
 
 P^ ^ men 
 
 ^^ - che 
 
 5£ smig 
 
 ^;^ " pin 
 
 pi; ni. 
 
 — ih. 53. 
 
 H 
 
 n: 
 
 jiii- 
 
 - t'ou 
 ti- 
 
 li, 
 ni 
 
 shao 
 t'ieu 
 mei 
 jih- 
 
 fl^ t'ou 
 
 Ir^ -ti 
 
 g^ ' shuo 
 
 @ * she°- 
 
 f^ ' ma- 
 
 B;^; ni? 
 
 54. 
 
 ching 
 
 shih 
 
 -ti 
 
 'huo - 
 
 -shih, 
 
 ni 
 
 -j^ ' shih 
 
 fi' t'a 
 
 
 3/C 
 
 e 
 
 yi2i». 
 
 ta 
 'hue, 
 pu 
 sliih 
 pai 
 fei- 
 - sliih 
 nia ? 
 
 51. 
 
 %' 
 %' 
 
 m 
 
 V3 
 
 1 
 
 m, 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 k'u- 
 
 -te- 
 -lei 
 lien- 
 - lien 
 
 -ti, 
 lien 
 
 A j^ 
 
 tou 
 pu 
 jen 
 -te 
 
 
 (A. 3 
 
 y 
 
 
 lien 
 - shang 
 chiu 
 
 ^i ' hsiang 
 
 A' j- 
 
 j^* - kuo 
 ^P szii 
 
 A/ j^°- 
 
 52. 
 
 4i 
 
 pan - 
 J{^ ' - tien 
 ■y-,' -tzii, 
 
 
 t/>. 4 
 
 - liao 
 tien 
 
 - tzii 
 Ian 
 tien 
 mo 
 lien. 
 
 — im. 49. 
 
 y[^ hsien 
 
 ^g chi 
 
 :^ nien 
 
 raa lisicn 
 
 ^ ' 'hen 
 
 yj> lisiao 
 
 JEB ■* hsien - 
 
 ^' 
 
 P^; la. 
 
 - tsai 
 
 hsien 
 
 -ohe 
 
 chiu 
 
 'hen 
 
 pu 
 
 t'ung '' 
 
 50. 
 
 ^M" hsia - 
 ^' t'ie- 
 
 12.' -Vh 
 
 2 
 
 
 mien - 
 
 'hua 
 
 nan 
 
 li' shui 
 
 >^' tsou 
 
 mien 
 
 ffe' jo 
 ^ ' t'ici 
 
 cli'uan 
 
 m.:
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 39-48. 
 
 
 fi ' 
 
 
 47. 
 
 cli 'it'll - 
 
 - niion 
 chu - 
 
 - cli'ich 
 
 - tzu 
 t'a 
 sliang - 
 
 - ch'ieli 
 mei 
 ch'ili 
 
 - kuo ; 
 clien 
 shili 
 ko 
 cli'ieh - 
 
 - t'iao 
 
 - tzu. 
 
 48. 
 
 it' 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 hsieh 
 
 -tzu 
 
 tsuan 
 
 tsai 
 
 lisieh 
 
 -H, 
 
 pa 
 
 cbiao 
 
 die 
 
 -ch'u 
 
 lisicli 
 
 -lai 
 
 la; 
 
 tfi 
 
 cli'ih 
 
 p'ang- 
 
 - Ijsieli, 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 neiig 
 
 chill 
 
 t'untr. 
 
 — ieli. 45. 
 
 
 
 
 
 'Ima 
 pick 
 
 - cliL', 
 pieli 
 kao - 
 -su 
 na- 
 -ko 
 pieli - 
 
 - tsiii 
 
 - tztt 
 sliuo ; 
 t'a 
 -ti 
 p'i 
 
 - cli'i 
 'Iicn 
 iiiu - 
 
 - pich. 
 
 4G. 
 
 ^ ' tieh 
 
 m 
 Pi 
 
 na 
 liana; 
 
 «ji> cli'ang 
 
 Pt cliicn 
 
 #,' t'a 
 
 j^ ' shih 
 
 -^ sliou 
 
 ij:^' nich 
 
 43. 
 
 ^' yao 
 
 ir ii.ino 
 
 .Jl ' shang^ 
 
 (4^ hsiao ! 
 
 A-% lisiao - 
 yj"* lisiao 
 
 j« 
 
 £.' '^-i^. 
 
 pu 
 
 p'a 
 
 m 
 
 a; i-- 
 
 ^ - cilia 
 •s^ lisiao - 
 
 f^ ma ? 
 
 7K' 
 
 
 44. 
 
 sliui 
 - sliang 
 p'iao 
 -clio 
 ko 
 
 Bfi] 
 71 
 
 
 p UIO, 
 
 na 
 yen 
 p'iao 
 - die, 
 l|M P'iao - 
 ^ ' -pu 
 
 ^= lao 
 
 
 
 
 m: 
 
 iao. 41. 
 
 'liiia - 
 
 - chiao 
 piuh 
 cliiao ; 
 cliiao 
 
 yu 
 
 Pi"g. 
 shiii - 
 
 - cliiao 
 -ti 
 sliih - 
 
 - 'hull 
 -'ill, 
 ao 
 sliiii 
 lisi 
 
 cliiao, 
 cliiu 
 'liao 
 
 - liao. 
 
 42. 
 
 w 
 
 J^Tf 1 
 
 AJM 
 
 kang 
 
 cli'iao 
 
 -di'i 
 
 chiao 
 
 -'rh 
 
 -lai 
 
 cli'iao, 
 
 chiu 
 
 ts'ou 
 
 cli'iao, 
 
 lai 
 
 -liao 
 
 ko 
 
 cli'iao - 
 
 -p'i 
 
 niu 
 - urh. 
 
 39. 
 
 liang 
 di6, 
 jj tao 
 
 F3. 1 
 
 m 
 
 ch'iu 
 
 ^' -liang 
 
 Q^V'shih- 
 /ffe* -'hou 
 
 ts'ou 
 cbi 
 
 
 ^; -tzu, 
 
 i' ku 
 
 f 1^ * liang 
 
 ^; ch'c\ 
 
 5g ^ kuang 
 
 jg' kua"^ 
 
 ^; -Vh 
 
 ■^' ch'u. 
 
 40. 
 
 jP^ ' - men 
 
 ||- ' ch'iang 
 
 P#' '1^0 
 
 V^ - chiu - 
 
 Pi' 'lio 
 
 fe- ch'ian? 
 
 t; 
 
 liao.
 
 29-88. 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONI':S. 
 
 ■ — iang 37. 
 
 j^ ' Chiang - 
 #' chia-- 
 
 ^' chou 
 shou, 
 
 T 
 
 3 
 
 -liao 
 ko 
 
 ^K Chiang 
 
 ^ * Pu 
 
 ^i chi, 
 
 ^' Jang 
 
 11' t'a 
 
 P#' 'to 
 
 Jj^ chiang 
 
 38. 
 
 ^' 
 
 wen 
 
 fi^' 
 
 -ti 
 
 m' 
 
 hsiang - 
 
 T* 
 
 -hsia 
 
 15' 
 
 tou 
 
 ^^ 
 
 hsiang 
 
 t; 
 
 -liao; 
 
 ff' 
 
 tzu- 
 
 ^ifl* 
 
 -hsi 
 
 M." 
 
 hsiang, 
 
 ^* 
 
 shih- 
 
 ^" 
 
 -'hu 
 
 ^' 
 
 pii 
 
 %: 
 
 hsiang. 
 
 
 ii 
 
 — «fl;. 35. 
 
 t'a 
 wui 
 cheng 
 chia - 
 
 - chan, 
 
 - l:uo 
 chia- 
 
 - ku6n, 
 ■hai 
 chia- 
 
 - chuang 
 ts'ai- 
 -chu 
 
 "t: 
 
 pai 
 she - 
 -ma 
 chia 
 -tzul 
 
 3G. 
 
 Ife' wo 
 
 Ml* P'e°g- 
 
 B^ - tiao 
 
 J -liao 
 
 Q^ hsia 
 
 ■^ - tzu 
 
 !^ na 
 
 [S ' hsia 
 
 ■^. - tzu, 
 
 (^ ' hsia 
 
 J - liao 
 
 Bt * t'iao. 
 
 — i. 33. 
 
 ^' lao 
 
 p£j ' hsi 
 
 %' -xuh 
 
 If' ch'ing 
 
 ^^ fu- 
 
 Jg^' yao 
 
 ^' shih 
 
 ^' -wei 
 
 "^ hsi - 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ij^^" pi- 
 
 ^ -ting 
 
 W yu 
 
 ^6 * hsi. 
 
 34. 
 
 #,' t'a 
 
 ^' t'° 
 
 T* ' - liao 
 
 ^! '" 
 
 ^ ' - shang 
 
 It; ' 
 
 -^, - tzu, 
 
 ' yin- 
 
 |j^* fang 
 
 W^ -ti- 
 
 ^* pu 
 
 ^^ '1.0- 
 
 ^rh, urh. 31. 
 
 urh 
 nU 
 
 $1 
 
 ^' to 
 
 ^r -ti 
 
 j^' uih- 
 
 ^' -tao 
 
 II' tsung 
 
 ^* yao 
 
 5^,^ yi"gi 
 
 ^Ij' Piet 
 
 ^^ san- 
 
 ;yj^^ hsin - 
 
 . urh- 
 
 1^ i- 
 
 W, -ti. 
 
 ]^' ts'ai 
 
 iif.' 'liao. 
 
 32. 
 
 iJR' na 
 
 ^' -'^^ 
 
 6r -ti 
 
 it' '^"^ 
 
 ■||y ch'ie°- 
 
 R^' tso 
 
 J^.' -urh, 
 
 4.' chi°- 
 
 HjJ' mi"* 
 
 %: -'^\ 
 
 %' 'hou 
 
 ^.' -urh, 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 pf' k'o 
 
 i^; -i 
 
 Hi' 
 
 ± 
 
 fit 
 
 29. 
 
 wei 
 
 "hua 
 
 ts'o 
 
 -liao 
 
 pu 
 
 neug 
 
 keng- 
 
 -kai, 
 
 pa 
 
 po- 
 
 - keng 
 
 -tsQ 
 
 - shang 
 
 -ti 
 
 ch'uang 
 
 keng 
 
 ch'i 
 
 chung 
 
 j; -liao. 
 
 30. 
 
 ^' yu 
 
 A 
 
 
 wo 
 
 ma- 
 
 -feng, 
 
 feng 
 
 jen 
 
 chiu 
 
 che, 
 
 yu 
 
 ko 
 
 ti 
 
 feng 
 
 - erh 
 wo 
 tou 
 tsuan 
 
 - liao.
 
 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 
 20-28 
 
 eng. 27. 
 
 - 
 
 — en. 25. 
 
 
 24. 
 
 22. 
 
 
 20. 
 
 j^ ' shui 
 ^%, ' k'tng 
 
 W lao 
 
 till . c 
 
 M' 
 
 wu- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 / / 1 
 
 \vu- 
 i- 
 
 
 fu 
 
 -shang 
 
 te 
 
 -lisiiig 
 
 ^K -wai 
 
 
 shu- 
 
 jo- 
 
 'huang- 
 
 t'ien- 
 
 [ij -ch'u 
 ^^ k'uai 
 :t' lao- 
 
 flnl 
 
 -ti, 
 en 
 -che 
 
 1^: 
 
 11' 
 
 'hao, 
 t'ing 
 -chien 
 
 #' t'e 
 
 W ko 
 ir te- 
 
 )r\ * -)^i"g 
 
 p^' 
 
 -ti 
 'ho 
 
 jo 
 
 ^1' yen- 
 i^' -tai 
 ^; -lai. 
 ^ ' nao 
 
 W^ -ti 
 
 J^ 3 
 
 lao- 
 
 p'o- 
 
 cliih 
 
 shili 
 
 ta 
 
 la. 
 
 ^ Li 
 
 ^' 
 1^' 
 
 FS' 
 
 y 
 
 shuo 
 
 ling- 
 
 -lang 
 
 kao- 
 
 -sheng 
 
 -la/ 
 
 01' 
 
 ch'a, 
 
 na 
 
 keng 
 
 ch'u 
 
 'han 
 
 la-, 
 
 fj ' k'Sng- 
 ^ chia- 
 
 
 
 ku- 
 
 -tz'Q 
 
 
 
 ni 
 pu 
 
 ^^ tang- 
 
 
 
 #^ 
 
 t'e 
 
 
 lA^ 
 
 p'a 
 
 ^ ch'aii- 
 
 
 26. 
 
 
 lai 
 
 pao 
 
 ko 
 
 
 ft' 
 
 jo 
 ma? 
 
 
 ffi" 
 
 t'a 
 
 in' 
 
 hsi° 
 
 
 
 
 
 >ii^' 
 
 pi 
 
 £; 
 
 erh; 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 ch'en- 
 
 gc^ 
 
 kai 
 
 
 
 21. 
 
 28. 
 
 M.^ 
 
 -tao 
 
 ^■ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 
 ir 
 
 hsien 
 
 a' i 
 
 w 
 
 ch'en 
 
 ^' 
 
 wo 
 
 23. 
 
 H' 
 
 ch'ien 
 
 If* -ching 
 5^' ping 
 
 
 -liao, 
 ch'ih 
 
 
 te 
 k'u-°* 
 
 % ' yin- 
 %' -wei 
 
 1^' 
 
 pu 
 
 she 
 
 fi^ ■ -ti 
 
 If' 
 
 -chS 
 
 3t: 
 
 -'rh, 
 
 ^ ' ch'e 
 
 ^r 
 
 -ti 
 
 P^' 'heng 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ya 
 
 
 'liai 
 
 ^k ' ch'e- 
 
 n' 
 
 mai 
 
 Bf <hSng 
 
 ^;- 
 
 ch'en ; 
 
 yao 
 
 5^' -p'o 
 
 M' 
 
 mai. 
 
 Pg-^ -la, 
 
 f^>' 
 
 ni 
 
 #' 
 
 t'e- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 m' 
 
 tsung 
 
 
 is 
 
 'hai 
 
 'O' 
 
 II. 4 
 
 hsin- 
 
 ^' i- 
 
 r^' 
 
 pu 
 
 t^' kan 
 
 T>' 
 
 pu 
 
 
 t'e- 
 
 ^.' -sliang, 
 
 -n' 
 
 p'a 
 
 iM ' ''''^"g- 
 
 l;* 
 
 ch'en 
 
 » 
 <li,> 
 
 i- 
 
 ffi' pa 
 
 w 
 
 she 
 
 ^' hsing- 
 
 f-' 
 
 tsao 
 
 &v 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^ ' Ping- 
 
 *' 
 
 pe° 
 
 11] P^- 
 
 %' 
 
 -'rh 
 
 *1 
 
 lai 
 
 ,l| ' -'^a 
 
 %: 
 
 -'rh, 
 
 ^^ tao- 
 
 M' 
 
 mai 
 
 — f— 3 
 
 tao 
 
 Wj ' Szu 
 
 F/ 
 
 chih 
 
 6V -ti 
 
 fr' 
 
 hsin 
 
 1- 
 
 hsi 
 
 It^ Ch'g 
 
 'W 
 
 p'a 
 
 II' fa 
 
 [IV 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^JS. 
 
 ni. 
 
 ~r -hao 
 
 ^' 
 
 yu 
 
 t^' «heng 
 
 *^ 
 
 ch'ii 
 
 
 
 fi* jen 
 
 P' 
 
 k'.u- 
 
 P;&' ni? 
 
 B/s; 
 
 ni. 
 
 
 
 "T -hao. 
 
 ^; 
 
 -she.
 
 lU!). 
 
 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 
 
 
 — e 
 
 ' or 0. 19. 
 
 
 en. 17. 
 
 
 <?^. 15. 
 
 
 eh. 13. 
 
 
 ao. 11. 
 
 iir 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 %r 
 
 ya- 
 
 ir 
 
 fei 
 
 A,J1- 1 
 
 m 
 
 yeh 
 
 ^k' 
 
 wo 
 
 ill' 
 
 kang 
 
 }V 
 
 -p'ien 
 
 m"- 
 
 yung- 
 
 1' 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^' 
 
 shou 
 
 ifj'' 
 
 16- 
 
 w 
 
 -yen 
 
 #/ 
 
 -i 
 
 ?! 
 
 pa 
 
 f;x' 
 
 ""ao- 
 
 [fj' 
 
 le- 
 
 fa' 
 
 li- 
 
 ^' 
 
 yang 
 
 jir 
 
 shan 
 
 w: 
 
 -chien 
 
 
 -che 
 
 ir 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 w 
 
 ko 
 
 ^: 
 
 -tzu, 
 
 ^^' 
 
 shou 
 
 b4^ 
 
 cliiao 
 
 W 
 
 cli'an 
 
 r' 
 
 fei 
 
 f&' 
 
 cli'en 
 
 n: 
 
 te, 
 
 ^* 
 
 dm 
 
 ^^■ 
 
 pu 
 
 m' 
 
 elm 
 
 ^' 
 
 lao- 
 
 3i^ 
 
 lien 
 
 &r 
 
 -ti 
 
 w 
 
 te 
 
 ^3 
 
 tsai 
 
 M' 
 
 -yeli 
 
 }k' 
 
 p'i- 
 
 ^r 
 
 na 
 
 %: 
 
 yen, 
 
 m: 
 
 ya. 
 
 % 
 
 -'rh 
 
 m' 
 
 -"'ao 
 
 1®^ 
 
 ko 
 
 %' 
 
 ni 
 
 X' 
 
 yu 
 
 ir 
 
 niei 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 tou 
 
 a; 
 
 jf-n, 
 
 m 
 
 cben 
 
 n4^ 
 
 cliiao 
 
 tti' 
 
 ch'u 
 
 tr 
 
 mei 
 
 
 ts'ung- 
 
 -x^' 
 
 pu 
 
 II' 
 
 iei- 
 
 p/d." 
 
 ni, 
 
 ^: 
 
 yu> 
 
 llllj 
 
 -cli'ien 
 
 m 
 
 tiing 
 
 m' 
 
 -lei 
 
 tr 
 
 chiu 
 
 tun 2 
 
 m 
 
 'hai 
 
 ^' 
 
 shih 
 
 W^ 
 
 ye° 
 
 ^' 
 
 cli'iang 
 
 ir 
 
 wang 
 
 pJt 
 
 shuo 
 
 1ta^ 
 
 ko 
 
 %: 
 
 -'rh, 
 
 1' 
 
 -la 
 
 m' 
 
 inan- 
 
 n' 
 
 wo 
 
 ^' 
 
 pel- 
 
 W 
 
 t'ao 
 
 m' 
 
 fei 
 
 %' 
 
 -'huang 
 
 m' 
 
 chiao- 
 
 w 
 
 -le, 
 
 K 
 
 jeu 
 
 ^' 
 
 -cli'u 
 
 if' 
 
 yeh- 
 
 ijiV 
 
 -^°"ao 
 
 15; 
 
 yin- 
 
 p; 
 
 yen. 
 
 1^' 
 
 -la. 
 
 ir 
 
 ti 
 
 ^m: 
 
 ni. 
 
 !^' 
 
 -wei 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 -li 
 
 
 
 fj^ 
 
 le- 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 chai 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 -30 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 ch'a- 
 
 
 / 
 
 A^ 
 
 jen 
 
 
 18. 
 
 
 
 M* 
 
 yeh 
 
 
 
 f ; 
 
 'z. 2 
 
 ko 
 
 -liao 
 
 cliih 
 
 %' 
 
 m' 
 
 ni 
 
 lien 
 
 w 
 
 16. 
 
 p*ei- 
 
 1: 
 
 -ch'u 
 -la. 
 
 ^. 
 
 12. 
 
 t'ing- 
 
 la, 
 
 \' 
 
 -sbang 
 
 B$^ 
 
 -ts'ui 
 
 
 
 rl^ 
 
 chien 
 
 WO 
 
 M' 
 
 na 
 
 T^ 
 
 -liao 
 
 
 
 #' 
 
 ch'ao 
 
 k'an 
 
 t'a 
 
 tao 
 
 pi 
 
 ts'ung- 
 
 -ch'ien 
 'hai 
 
 
 yen- 
 hsiin- 
 'Imo- 
 liao- 
 
 1^ = 
 4 
 
 p'ei- 
 -k'o 
 i 
 lien 
 
 M' 
 
 14. 
 
 yeh 
 
 pJLi 
 
 pao- 
 -ti 
 
 shuo, 
 ch'ao 
 
 
 -ti 
 
 yen- 
 
 sliai 
 
 
 t'u- 
 
 -ino, 
 
 shuo 
 
 ^' 
 
 lao- 
 -yeh 
 lien 
 
 p>^' 
 
 li- 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 ch'ao- 
 
 ^ 
 
 keng 
 le, or lo. 
 
 
 -•ill, 
 
 w 
 
 t'a 
 
 ill' 
 
 t'a 
 
 m' 
 
 -nao 
 
 
 w 
 
 yen 
 ch'ou 
 
 IE' 
 
 pu 
 p'ei 
 
 
 -ti 
 
 yeh 
 
 
 -ch^, 
 shuo 
 
 
 
 *' 
 
 -clip 
 
 "^r 
 
 'hai 
 
 fV 
 
 -men 
 
 ^' 
 
 yao 
 
 
 
 m. 
 
 chi'n 
 
 m' 
 
 t'a 
 
 ik' 
 
 yeh 
 
 h' 
 
 chu 
 
 
 
 tr 
 
 t'ao 
 
 ^^ 
 
 tso- 
 
 ^: 
 
 pu 
 
 w 
 
 ch'ao 
 
 
 
 0C 
 
 yen. 
 
 t^ 
 
 ch^- 
 
 pji' 
 
 Jan. 
 
 bm„ 
 
 ui.
 
 il 
 
 
 EXERCISES IN THE TONES. 
 
 
 
 1-10. 
 
 — ang. 9. 
 
 — an. 7. 
 
 
 - 61 i 5. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 - a. 1. 
 
 ■^j ' faug- 
 
 ii' '^'"- 
 
 ii' 
 
 cliai 
 
 u\ 
 
 Tu- 
 
 13!' 
 
 shih 
 
 |r^' -ts'ai 
 
 ^^ lai- 
 
 T' 
 
 -liao 
 
 >T> 
 
 -ch'a 
 
 77' 
 
 tao 
 
 ff' k'au- 
 
 a^ fu- 
 
 •H^ 
 
 mao 
 
 
 Yuan 
 
 =f: 
 
 -tzii, 
 
 Jjl^ * -cliiea 
 
 *^ oVU- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -tzfi 
 
 (ir 
 
 -ti 
 
 +L' 
 
 cha 
 
 -51^ fang 
 
 &V -^^ 
 
 jH* 
 
 chin 
 
 f.ir 
 
 Yu- 
 
 W 
 
 -ti 
 
 jy.' -tzii 
 
 3f^' 'ben 
 
 ^^ 
 
 cliai 
 
 i&: 
 
 -shih, 
 
 W 
 
 ko 
 
 l'^' shang, 
 
 ^^,' hsin- 
 
 P^^ 
 
 men, 
 
 #' 
 
 Ic'an- 
 
 %' 
 
 mai 
 
 ^Jj' fang- 
 
 !!M/ -<■-' 
 
 %' 
 
 ylian- 
 
 ^' 
 
 -chien 
 
 yt^' 
 
 yu- 
 
 f^li] -fu 
 
 #^ ko 
 
 m' 
 
 -chia 
 
 w' 
 
 cli'a 
 
 !/i' 
 
 cha- 
 
 ^ shili 
 
 |&^ cb'u 
 
 m' 
 
 lu 
 
 A,'. 3 
 
 kua 
 
 .^^' 
 
 -kuei 
 
 i@] ko 
 
 ^v -'^-^^ 
 
 FT 2 
 
 -'ih 
 
 ^jV 
 
 -'rh 
 
 6^' 
 
 -ti 
 
 A.' i^'n. 
 
 ix; f-' 
 
 
 chai, 
 
 n' 
 
 -U 
 
 P' 
 
 k'ou 
 
 fflj' tao 
 
 ii^ 'hai 
 
 M' 
 
 p'eng- 
 
 1^' 
 
 yi 
 
 T-/ 
 
 -tzu, 
 
 fjij- " chiao 
 
 ^H' J^^i''^"S 
 
 ^' 
 
 -chien 
 
 w 
 
 ko 
 
 ^' 
 
 yu 
 
 |J^' wo 
 
 Pg' ch'ih 
 
 m' 
 
 ko 
 
 i-r 
 
 ch'a 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ^' 'lifin 
 
 Wl* ^^"1 
 
 itV 
 
 chai- 
 
 M'' 
 
 -tfe) -cIj 
 
 tL^ 
 
 cha 
 
 ^^ pu 
 
 j*^ ma? 
 
 ±' 
 
 -chu 
 
 m' 
 
 yao 
 
 
 ch'ang. 
 
 i^* fa«g 
 
 f 
 
 ^; 
 
 -tzii 
 
 rV 
 
 -ti 
 
 
 'hai 
 
 ,\;;i> ' hsin 
 
 
 
 
 A^ 
 
 jen 
 
 ^ 
 
 shuo 
 
 h: - 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 iil: 
 
 ch'a- 
 na 
 
 ftH" 
 
 =z_ 4 
 
 t'a 
 
 shih 
 cha 
 
 
 
 
 
 1' 
 
 -liao 
 
 5*^ 
 
 ping 
 
 
 
 
 6. 
 
 *^ 
 
 ch'ii 
 
 pjs; 
 
 ni? 
 
 
 
 ii ' 
 
 kang- 
 
 t; 
 
 la. 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 8. 
 
 
 -ts'ai, 
 
 
 
 
 
 10. 
 
 %r - 
 
 IP' 
 
 chiao 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^' T'a„g_ 
 
 ^' k'an- 
 
 gi' 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 iJj ' Shan 
 
 J^ -chien 
 
 M' 
 
 -che 
 
 
 4. 
 
 
 ai- 
 
 V^ tsao- 
 
 iJj ' Shan 
 
 W 
 
 mai- 
 
 m"- 
 
 tsei 
 
 m: 
 
 -ya! 
 
 ^' -fang 
 
 [JjJi' Shan 
 
 W 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 ^' 
 
 tsai 
 
 '>r 
 
 p'a 
 
 ^' -Ua 
 
 'g' kuan 
 
 i^^\ 
 
 -ti 
 
 m' 
 
 fang 
 
 ft!i' 
 
 t'a 
 
 n' -li 
 
 iS ■ kuaj 
 
 m^ 
 
 pien 
 
 .V 
 
 -shang 
 
 ^^ 
 
 na 
 
 fir -ti 
 
 ^r -ti 
 
 T' 
 
 -tzii 
 
 lA' 
 
 p'a 
 
 J:^ 
 
 shang 
 
 ;]C/^ shui, 
 
 A.' J-"'"' 
 
 tr' 
 
 ta 
 
 7^ ' 
 
 -chg 
 
 W 
 
 ya- 
 
 H^' fang 
 
 ij^ ' 'hao 
 
 n9. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 •~ 2 
 
 p'a. 
 
 n: 
 
 -men, 
 
 ^ ' -che 
 
 ff ° 'is'"S 
 
 ?i[r 
 
 nai 
 
 ^V 
 
 yeh 
 
 ^"■ 
 
 ch'a- 
 
 .^^' kuai 
 
 sfe sban 
 
 tsi' 
 
 -ko 
 
 %' 
 
 pu 
 
 w 
 
 -miug 
 
 
 ^V -i 
 
 ;1' 
 
 shih 
 
 \^' 
 
 p'a 
 
 jbI' 
 
 chiu 
 
 r^^f.' ti. 
 
 ^; to 
 
 ii; 
 
 shiii? 
 
 ^' 
 
 na. 
 
 a' 
 
 sha. 
 
 1
 
 III. 
 
 CHINESE TEXT 
 
 07 
 
 (gxcrqlscs lit l!i4 Soniis, 
 
 OF THE 
 
 PEKING DIALECT.
 
 END OF PART II. 
 
 (CHINESE TEXT) 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, 
 
 CAP. I.
 
 40.44. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 
 
 
 H Wan 
 
 H Wan 42 
 
 
 
 
 
 M Sui 
 
 ^ Sui 
 
 
 
 X t'ai- 
 
 IJt shuo 
 
 fr Yeh 
 
 fR Yeh 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 M "^ 
 
 ^ -p'iug 
 
 # -t^ 
 
 &^ -t' 
 
 ii^ hsin 
 
 Ti iiao; 
 
 /^ ts'ai 
 
 6^. -ti, 
 
 M> '''^°' 
 
 m5, '!'"=»' 
 
 M -'i 
 
 'fB tan 
 
 B sbih 
 
 f^ ni- 
 
 ■2^ hsiao- 
 
 :/c *=^- 
 
 yf» pu 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 •fg" cbeu- 
 
 jW -men 
 
 jli -sl>un 
 
 ^ -cilia 
 
 ^n i«n, 
 
 f^. ni 
 
 la -cben 
 
 ffi tou 
 
 JS 'liuan 
 
 # tso 
 
 ^fr so- 
 
 j\^\ bsin 
 
 rj^ -t' 
 
 ^ nu 
 
 if slieng 
 
 •fi ko 
 
 t^ -i 
 
 M -li 
 
 -^ -bsiao 
 
 ;^ " 
 
 .^ Lsiao- 
 
 .^ bsiao 
 
 K fan- 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 ^. tzu, 
 
 ^f, -ti 
 
 j|{^ -shun 
 
 ^ tzii 
 
 R -fan- 
 
 ^ ming- 
 
 ■j^ cben- 
 
 fX tsou, t 
 
 -^, tzu, 
 
 '1^ ti 
 
 ^ f"- 
 
 S, -Pai. * 
 
 IH -cben 
 
 H ""an 
 
 '[^ wu- 
 
 ^. ti. 
 
 ^ -fu 
 
 ^^ ch'u- 
 
 d^ -t' 
 
 M -svan 
 
 ^ -ni 
 
 x)f> PU 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 '/pf -cbih 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ^Ij P'el> 
 
 is 'liuan 
 
 'g tan 
 
 ^ ch'uan 
 
 ft ni 
 
 ^ *'- . 
 
 ^ k'an 
 ^ ch'eng 
 
 W yang 
 'It wu- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ^ sbeng 
 
 ft ni 
 ff^, -men. 
 
 i^ yeh 
 :;^ sbih 
 
 _)j»^^ -bsiung. 
 ft "' " 
 
 •^ cb'ang 
 
 ^ -ni 
 
 ^^ P" 
 
 ft ni 
 
 ^T" Wang- 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ t'ao 
 
 5io urb. 
 
 ^H fan 
 
 fPj -men 
 
 .^. -Jan. 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 ^, -tzu, 
 
 :^ kuo-4A 
 
 fef^. 
 
 t k'en 
 
 
 x^ pi 
 
 
 ^ -Jan 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ t'iug 
 
 
 ;^ bsiao- 
 
 ^ -fu 
 
 •J- tzii 
 
 -^ sbih 
 
 
 
 jlg -shun, 
 
 7 -liao t 
 
 ^ tzti 
 
 ft. ni 
 
 
 
 ^ 'huo 
 
 
 "3?H sun 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 
 
 :;^ sbih 
 
 
 ■^, sun 
 
 ^ urh 
 
 
 
 ^ ti- 
 
 
 i5 tou 
 
 -^ -tzii 
 
 
 
 ^ -bsiung 
 
 Bj Slieng 
 
 5^ sbih 
 
 •^ sun 
 
 
 
 -|p -men 
 
 ft Tsu 
 
 ^^ bsiao 
 
 ^, -tzu, 
 
 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 >f:: JEN 
 
 ^ tzu 
 
 "t^ yeh 
 
 
 
 ^ '^^■ 
 
 Q 'Huang 
 
 '1^ ti 
 
 ^ bsiao 
 
 
 
 0^. -™'J' 
 
 •^ Ti 
 
 ^'. ti' 
 
 1® 1^0 
 
 
 
 JK'C chiu 
 
 — i 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 jj? 'hao 
 
 
 
 •^ yao 
 
 ^ p'ien 
 
 ~p -bsia 
 
 '^ yang 
 
 
 
 "y na 
 
 j{| 'I'ao 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 •^. -tzu. 
 
 
 
 ^J lising- 
 
 j^^% bsin 
 
 il me 
 
 -^ su 43 
 
 
 
 ^ -f^ 
 
 psr. ^- 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 _ 
 
 
 ^^ cli'u- 
 
 
 ^> P" 
 
 E -urh 
 
 
 
 j^ -chib 
 
 
 V 
 
 K/i or^io. + <soM or ?so 
 
 
 
 J The three spa 
 
 ces in the column giv 
 
 e the character following the same rank n 
 
 s if it were elevated t 
 
 hree spaces as in the 
 
 first page of the pa 
 
 raphrase. No Chines 
 
 e worU, however, would have the two difl'e 
 
 rent forms in the sam 
 
 e text.
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 35-40. 
 
 ^h wai 
 
 gj inio"- 
 
 ^ -rh 
 
 (Iff -ti 
 
 ^ Lsii 
 
 tt^ 'Iiao 
 
 ^ k'a° 
 
 ^Ij pieh 
 
 j^ su- 
 
 J -Iiao 
 
 A-^ lisiao 
 
 3^ fa- 
 
 ^Ij pieh 
 
 ij- chill 
 
 ^l> wai 
 
 A iei 
 
 i: •'«" 
 
 ig uiin«- 
 
 j^. -■'•'•' 
 
 ^Ij pieh 
 
 0, i- 
 
 "jny* -ch'ien 
 
 Jit '■ 
 
 li^ 'hou 
 
 if 'l.ao 
 
 7. -''=^°: 
 
 ^ chi- 
 
 ;?f? -.ian 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 ^l=L -tao 
 
 w€ shuo 
 
 ilT. 'hao, 
 
 >fej wei 
 
 ^ she". 
 
 jg -luo 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 •i- ch'ii 
 
 ^^ shib 
 
 Jlj) hsin - 
 
 ^f sbih 
 
 it^ -ti 
 
 fi^ tsou 
 
 R5f^ a? 
 
 ^v pi ^<j 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 ;\j> hsin 
 
 ;\j> hsin 
 
 £ -'rh 
 
 I^^. ti,- 
 
 SE hsiang 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 ■^ nm 
 
 ylj hsiung 
 
 >^. ti, 
 
 j^lj pieh 
 
 /[/^ tso 
 
 -nien 
 
 1^. "^■"' 
 
 f^ tso 
 
 .E pins: 
 
 ^^ -ti- 
 
 il ts'ai 
 
 -& shih 
 
 i{J^ 'hao 
 
 >/^ 'Han 
 
 ■^. -t^fi- 
 
 '^ tan- 3!) 
 
 ^^ -shih 
 
 -E ping 
 
 ^ min 
 
 tl ^^ 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 ^j^ hsiao- 
 
 JE- shih 
 
 4ial 'hao 
 
 ^^ shih,- 
 
 ti- 
 
 ii, 
 
 -hsiung 
 jptj -men 
 
 Hi -mu 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 ^ -sliih? 
 
 ^ -fOi 
 y, -Iiao,; 
 ^ 'huo 
 
 ;^ shiii 
 
 %Z -""^^ 
 
 SC 'iiuo 
 
 ;;& shill 
 
 ^r ta- 
 
 g kuan- 
 
 o), -szu, 
 
 JS. tsai 
 
 i^ me 
 
 ^ yn 
 
 '(i ko 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 |S^ pai 
 
 :^ chia- 
 
 ^ -ch'an 
 
 &xf. -ti- 
 
 f/J» ni- 3S 
 
 in -men 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ;^^ shill 
 
 -^ hsiao. 
 
 ilH -shtm 
 
 ^1, ch'in- 
 
 ^ --^ai 
 
 Pji. ni, 
 
 fiji: tso 
 
 .K "lin 
 
 -ti, 
 gfi ts'ai 
 
 m 
 
 A. .i^"' 
 
 ^E 'huai 
 
 ^ sha 
 
 ~r -Iiao 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 g tzu- 
 Q, -chi; 
 
 X y« 
 
 Hit sliuo- 
 
 fl -t« 
 
 if, hsiung- 
 
 ;]^ -ti 
 
 ^^ -mm 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ p'ang- 
 
 A Je" 
 
 i|^. ch-i ; 
 
 tU chih 
 
 H ku 
 
 f^ ni- 
 
 jm -men 
 
 •:|r chcng 
 
 pS^ hsien 
 
 :^. ch'i, 
 
 jjj^ chiu 
 
 '■n y" 
 
 A Jen 
 
 ^ lai 
 
 ^j^ t'iao- 
 
 p^ -so 
 
 f;5t ni- 
 
 
 ti- 
 
 C? -Lsiiing 
 jm -me a 
 
 f^ su a« 
 
 SK. yii 
 
 fl *" 
 
 n ta 
 
 an 
 
 ,'ia ti 
 iw h 
 
 ;^ shih 
 ^ liang 
 
 -men 
 
 -^ shih- 
 
 1W te 
 
 i?j h.iiu.ig- 
 
 J- shang 
 
 j)j|[ cheu 
 
 ^|J h.sii 
 
 ^ f^ 
 
 -?^ tzu 
 
 ^ r-i^'g; 
 
 # -t^ 
 
 i»? 'h;io 
 
 ^ sha 
 
 Y^H t'a
 
 32-35. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 "fflr "'" 
 
 Z{r sheng 
 
 ^, •''■''' 
 
 rt chill 
 
 ■^ k'au 
 
 JZ. -tzu 
 
 ■^ -chia, 
 
 't ""' 
 
 ;\^\ hsin 
 
 •^ hsiao 
 "f*. -tzu 
 
 A. J^°' 
 
 1^ tsai 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ lai 
 
 :^ lao- 
 II -P'o 
 -|{'^ -men 
 
 ;^ pu 
 
 ^ 'liai 
 1^ wo 
 ^ shih 
 
 |g ko 
 
 ^ lao 
 
 -f' -tzu 
 
 ^g niang 
 
 ip sbeug 
 
 &§, -ti. 
 ftii ^'^ 
 ^ chih- 
 
 5^ -tao 
 
 W «^^°- 
 ^ -nio 
 
 iW tao- 
 
 m. -1' 
 
 PJS. ni? 
 
 ^ chih 35 
 
 )l -hsiung 
 jffl -men 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ ko- 
 
 JfJ, hsiung- 
 
 1^ -ti 
 1n, -men, 
 ^ cli'in- 
 iS ch'in- 
 
 &^ -ti 
 ■^ shou 
 
 ^, tsu, 
 
 ^R ju 
 
 "Pi 'bo 
 
 ^? cllCDg 
 
 ^^ ch'ang - 
 
 ^1 tuan 
 ^ff -ti 
 B^„ ni? 
 i^\ ni 34 
 
 ^ bsiang 
 
 bsiang, 
 
 ?|r ym 
 
 •^ -tzu 
 
 ^g cb'ien 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ?|ni*t'ang 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ;^ -cbih 
 
 .^ cb'ii 
 
 T -liao 
 
 M^ suan- 
 
 lit ye^ 
 
 -& sbih 
 
 ;^ tung 
 
 •^ na 
 
 ^ bsi 
 
 ■^ yeb 
 
 ;g sbih 
 
 li. t'a; 
 
 i^ cbe 
 
 ■^ cbih 
 
 ^ tso 
 
 •^* sbou 
 
 j^ cbiu 
 
 ^ pin 
 
 ^. -'ben, 
 
 ]^ me 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ t'ing 
 
 ^^ -cbien 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 A -je"- 
 
 ^ na 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 .^ sbou 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 :^ tso 
 
 ^^ sbou 
 
 §^ teui 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 ^ 'buo 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 §{>■ shuo 
 
 p: m6ng 
 fj 'bua 
 
 A ^'^ 
 
 ^? chia 
 
 m -^'^^ 
 
 -7 -liao; 
 
 ^- yao 
 
 IS J«°- 
 
 # -t- 
 
 ja -chen ! 
 
 ^ pi- 33 
 
 PP3 liang 
 
 ^^ cbih 
 
 ^' shou, 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^. sbou 
 
 ^ 'ben 
 
 g^ neng- 
 
 #, -kan, 
 
 ^ hsieh 
 
 -J- tzu 
 
 "tfei yeh 
 
 ;^ sbih 
 
 #,. t'a; 
 
 tr ta 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 fl neng 
 
 igy hsieb 
 
 # tso 
 
 Jjj, hsiung- 
 
 -^ yang- 
 
 y^ -'buo 
 
 ^^ -*''"' 
 
 fi. t'a. 
 
 j^ yeb 
 
 ;;& sbih 
 
 ^ kai- 
 
 H* -tang 
 
 :)^ sbih 
 
 HtSf sbih 
 
 ^ -cbien 
 
 m tie»- 
 
 |£ -rh 
 
 Pl| bsien 
 
 # yen- 
 
 p^ bsien 
 
 no J^ 
 
 C| chih- 
 
 ^ -tang 
 
 ^ t'a 
 
 
 or irai
 
 29-32. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. 1. 
 
 T. 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 
 hsia 
 
 -lai 
 
 -liao, 
 
 i 
 
 jil. - 
 
 i 
 
 -ti 
 
 tsan- 
 
 -ts'ou 
 
 -cb'i 
 
 -lai, 
 
 cliili 
 
 y" 
 
 ta- 
 -cbia 
 tou- 
 -■^ou: 
 
 n 
 
 it 
 
 :ja 
 
 A. 
 
 m 
 ^ 
 
 ch'iieh 
 
 pu 
 
 cliib- 
 
 -tao 
 
 ti- 
 
 -hsiuug 
 
 -men 
 
 ylian 
 
 shih 
 
 i 
 
 -ko 
 
 Jl'I'i 
 
 cliiu 
 
 shih 
 
 tso- 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ chi"- 
 
 ^l -'■■'' 
 
 W ^" 
 
 5i. -''' 
 
 B|5 mi"''- 
 
 31 -■■•1' 
 
 fi tio°- 
 
 i i i t 
 
 r;i -'rh, 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 f# -'^ 
 
 # tso- 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 5a -^ 
 
 ^ffl men 
 
 ff^ t'iiig- 
 
 ^M -chin 
 
 +■ -cb'ii; 
 
 f4; 
 
 ts'ung 
 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 ffl pa 
 
 ^ ^■- 
 
 ^ -hsiung' 
 
 ^f^ -men 
 
 ^i} -ti 
 
 j\^\ hsin- 
 
 I® ch'ang, 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 '^ leng- 
 
 'J'/6 -tan 
 
 ^t "''"' 
 
 0^ sliih 
 
 ^ 'l-i 
 
 ^. -tzu; 
 
 1^ mai 
 
 iE chg- 
 
 i0 -^-^ 
 
 ftg. ch'ib, 
 
 ^ mai 
 
 m "^"- 
 
 ■i -'=»" 
 
 ^ wo- 
 
 ^W men 
 
 1^^ -'' 
 
 ■^ -tzvi, 
 
 D* chill 
 
 i 
 
 tou 
 
 shih 
 
 ft '"" 
 
 fSt mo? 
 
 \\'i chao 31 
 
 ^ -cfio 
 
 '^ che- 
 ss. 
 
 f^ cheng 
 
 j^ -kuo 
 
 ^. ch'icn; 
 
 ^^ tsai 
 
 ^^ chia 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 il ya-- 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 ■^g ch'ang 
 
 tJ; tso 
 
 &^. -ti, 
 
 '^ chiu 
 
 -& shih 
 
 ff ku 
 
 \n ko 
 
 -^ ch'ang 
 
 X, kung, 
 i^ yell 
 
 ? ^" 
 JO, che- 
 
 ■ - 
 
 r|£: hsin- 
 
 ^ -k'u 
 
 il, t'a 
 
 W, 'hai 
 
 5a 
 
 urh 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tzil 
 
 *i 
 
 hsi- 
 
 m 
 
 -fu 
 
 5a 
 
 -•rh 
 
 /i. 
 
 ma ? 
 
 i^ 
 
 kai 
 
 's* 
 
 tang 
 
 # 
 
 hsiao- 
 
 ii 
 
 -shun 
 
 m 
 
 t'a 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ii. 
 
 ma ? 
 
 M 
 
 na- ;jO 
 
 ^ 
 
 -ko 
 
 it 
 
 hsiung- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -ti 
 
 iti 
 
 hsi- 
 
 m 
 
 -fu 
 
 5a. 
 
 -■■■h. 
 
 ■tii 
 
 yeh 
 
 :i 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 'hai 
 
 it 
 
 hsiung 
 
 m 
 
 -ti 
 
 '^ 1 
 
 shuo, 
 
 ^ 
 
 chiu 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 
 ko- 
 
 
 -ko 
 
 ^ 
 
 'hui 
 
 # 
 
 chcug 
 
 ^. 
 
 ch'icn, 
 
 f^l 
 
 ni 
 
 m 
 
 yeh 
 
 -k'u 
 -k'u 
 
 5a -'^^ 
 
 1i. 'a" ' 
 4? tse""- 
 
 5a -'''' 
 
 ■^ 'hua 
 ch'ien 
 
 -y^. hsin- 
 
 ife. hsin- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^p cheng' 
 
 ^1 ch'ien, 
 
 ^ yang- 
 
 f^ -'tuo 
 
 fta. t'a, 
 
 ii ''=- 
 
 3ft- shuo 
 
 -^ ch'ang - 
 
 rg tao 
 
 AH tuan 
 
 &§. -■'' 
 
 H^ nan- 
 
 -men 
 
 M^ shih 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 6ft -ti
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 2S-29. 
 
 6'J -ti 
 S^r 'liua, 
 
 gjf shuo 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 iijl; tie°- 
 
 i -''-^ 
 
 ITl •''^'" 
 
 ;^ pu- 
 
 i^'l- -chiao 
 
 J'Ci 
 
 ffff -ti 
 
 fill? 
 
 ifk -cliin 
 
 -cli'ii 
 -liao ; 
 
 T. 
 
 ];(: pi- 30 
 
 tso 
 
 Sao 
 
 -tzu 
 
 -ti 
 
 'Lai 
 
 
 ifl 
 
 "gy ko- 
 
 S{V sliuo, 
 
 yK hsiao 
 
 ^ -sliu 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 /p tse"^- 
 
 fM 
 
 ya°' 
 
 ^ij) ton ' 
 -& sLih 
 
 'iv wei 
 
 ^ cheng 
 
 •qj^ 'liiio 
 
 JiL sliili 
 
 -?■ -liao 
 
 -^ lao- 
 
 ^ -P'o 
 
 m -'' 
 
 in. *^''^ 
 
 itb hsieb 
 
 ^ lao- 
 
 it^ -p'o 
 
 ^BH -men 
 
 6^ -'• 
 
 ft. '•'"=*' 
 
 -til y'^ 
 
 a siiiii 
 
 ^^ ching 
 
 iJS ^""^ 
 
 ^^ mei 
 tao- 
 
 u 
 
 -li; 
 
 
 ftl ^' 
 
 wei 
 a 
 
 X2 'nuan 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 -^« sliou 
 
 i:(l Pi- 
 
 — ' i 
 
 A j^" 
 
 .^. shou 
 
 ^P^ chiao, 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 H, shih 
 
 ^ skill 
 
 =^^. shou 
 
 J -liao 
 
 jlP^ chiao, 
 
 II& nau- 
 
 T^ -tao 
 
 :fE P^' 
 
 jjip cliiao 
 
 .^ ch'u 
 
 ii t'i 
 
 ^.. shou 
 
 ;f: pu- 
 
 $n J"- »* 
 
 .A. -chin 
 
 Jt -lisiuDg 
 
 JPI -men 
 
 :h[^ p" 
 
 tr ta 
 
 f^t "i 
 
 Jt hsiung- 
 
 .& sliih 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 ^? -cilia 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 
 tzu- 
 -cliia 
 i 
 ko 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 y, -liao; 
 
 # tso 
 
 it hsiung- 
 
 X y" 
 
 ^ PU 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 IpT -tao 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ^, tai, 
 
 ^ chien 
 
 SI ko- 
 
 
 -ko 
 ta 
 
 -t^ y«^ 
 
 ofr chiu 
 
 ^ yii- 
 
 ^ -ciiion 
 
 ^ hsiung- 
 
 iW -men 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 J liao 
 
 m tie"- 
 
 5£ -'ih 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 -& -shih, 
 
 Wt chiu 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^}" cheng- 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 ^. -lai! 
 
 i^\ ni ay 
 
 ^, hsiang, 
 
 ^ 'hai 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 ^ hsiung 
 
 -^ shih 
 . i 
 
 •^ lao- 
 
 JZ. tzu 
 
 ^g niang 
 
 til sheng- 
 
 ^ -yaiig 
 
 f^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ chuan 
 
 ,^ '-"- 
 
 31 -■■•'' 
 
 ^^ -lai, 
 
 i;^ -chiu 
 
 &^ -^' 
 
 11 t'a; 
 
 >j;^ wei- 20 
 
 ^ -tu 
 
 ^l] tao- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 Jf, hsiung- 
 
 i^ -ti 
 
 i^ 
 
 yao- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -shih 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pu 
 
 M 
 
 'hao 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao. 
 
 H 
 
 tsai 
 
 ^fe. 
 
 yeh 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 IH, 
 
 k'en 
 
 ^ 
 
 man- 
 
 -•rh 
 
 Wfj ch'iian 
 shuo 
 
 B>1 
 
 V
 
 •21-25. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 Ik 
 
 Bl 
 
 to- 
 
 -ta 
 
 nien- 
 
 -clii 
 
 -urb, 
 
 wo 
 
 cliih 
 
 pa 
 
 t'a 
 
 tang 
 
 'hai- 
 
 
 -tzu 
 tai ; 
 
 pi- 25 
 
 wo- 
 
 -ti 
 
 urh 
 
 -tzii, 
 
 yao- 
 
 -shih 
 
 
 pu 
 
 cli'feiig 
 ts'ai, 
 wo 
 
 yell 
 cliao- 
 
 -shik 
 
 -tl 
 
 'hen 
 
 t'a, 
 
 nia 
 
 t'a, 
 
 ta 
 
 t'a. 
 
 31 -'■•'■ 
 
 ^{j -ti 
 
 ^ ching 
 
 ft t'a 
 
 PJS. •"' 
 
 'fnif 'ho 
 
 ^ k'uang 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 Ife wo 
 
 il ch'in 
 
 If ko- 
 -ko 
 
 
 
 ni! 
 chih 24: 
 
 tso 
 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ yao 
 ^ t'eng- 
 ^ --ai 
 •^ -cho 
 
 hsiung- 
 
 -ti; 
 
 hsiung- 
 
 -ti 
 
 
 -|C^ -UlCQ 
 
 fi jt-n- 
 
 i^ -p'-ing 
 
 H t'=^ 
 
 -S. shih 
 
 Fl, 
 
 ko- 
 
 ftll t'a 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 J:fl !•■' 
 
 :^ wo 
 
 -X ta 
 
 31 wu 
 
 m, 
 
 SUl, 
 
 It "'"" 
 
 % -■'•'' 
 
 [T^ sui- 
 
 .^ -cho 
 
 fi. t'a, 
 
 g| '='''" 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ kan 
 
 ^ yiieh- 
 
 jj^ -kuo 
 
 J -liao 
 
 #,, t'a; 
 
 ^k wai- 
 
 A -'i^" 
 
 -4jP. nieu- 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 A. ta, 
 
 ii '•"»" 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 # tso 
 
 xg. ko- 
 
 tl. 
 
 6^ 
 
 -^ ku 2;, 
 
 [ji shi fa- 
 il^ -'hou 
 
 urh 
 
 ti 
 
 A. 
 
 cliiu 
 shih 
 i 
 
 hsiant; 
 
 14 ts'u"- 
 
 h" -shang 
 
 jgj t'ung- 
 
 f± chu 
 
 {tH t'a 
 
 ^ y-'o 
 
 i^d pi 
 
 A *=^ 
 
 _L ;<hih 
 
 life sui. 
 
 •im wo 
 
 ^3- tsuu 
 fi t'a 
 ^ tang 
 
 B3c ''""^ 
 
 .1 shih 
 
 [Tg ch'ih 
 
 M ^"' 
 
 ^ 'hno 
 
 Wl. shih 
 
 ^ ch'uan 
 
 ^ i- 
 
 ^ 'huo 
 
 -M; shih 
 
 A j*^"- 
 
 ^^ -chia 
 
 -tl 
 -li, 
 nU 'huo 
 
 m 
 
 ift shuo 
 
 tit 'huo 
 
 ^S. ^i'ii' 
 
 ^ tsou- 
 
 {^ 1" 
 
 %. -»ll^, 
 
 ^ 'huo 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 a[5 tso 
 
 ^^ -cho, 
 
 W 'huo 
 
 ;;^ shih 
 
 yijj chau 
 
 ^^ -cho, 
 
 ^fi tou 
 
 ra* yao 
 
 'ffl h 
 
 siang, 
 
 P^ sliih 
 
 W. ''=*i 
 i!E ch'ln- 
 ^^, ai, 
 
 II eh'iu- 
 ^ -°«ai 
 li? 
 
 p;s. 
 
 ^ tse"«- 22 
 
 ^ ya-- 
 
 31 -''■■' 
 
 ji ko 
 
 Wl ^'»'in 
 
 ^ --^ai 
 
 B/g ni? 
 
 fX tso 
 
 ^ hsiung- 
 
 Pi -ti 
 
 1^^. -ti' 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ chiug- 
 
 iff' -chung 
 
 ko- 
 
 -ko. 
 
 
 
 tan- 
 
 -fan 
 
 yu 
 
 she°- 
 
 -mo 
 
 shih,
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 17-21. 
 
 -4-4- 
 
 _& sliili 
 
 ^ cli'i 
 
 -Z. -tzu 
 
 ^ .s/.u 
 
 nf k'o- 
 
 ]|5 ch'ii 
 
 ;i shih 
 
 >5 *'- 
 
 J^ -lisiiing 
 
 OT -iiitn 
 
 T. -liao, 
 
 M "^ 
 
 ^ -•■■'• 
 
 4^ chao- 
 
 f# -^'^ 
 
 "7 -liao 
 
 j® ko 
 
 % "i- 
 
 '[P^ -men 
 
 ;ffl lisiang 
 
 ^ s!,il, 
 
 C7 -hsiiinj 
 
 ^I'l -iiitn 
 
 ^ I>u 
 
 1^ t'ung 
 
 -Ik y"'' 
 
 _a siiih 
 
 1^ 
 
 -ko 
 
 fll- 
 
 -cli'iii 
 
 ^1 
 
 -ti 
 ku 
 
 iUL. ^''''^'' = 
 
 #- shih 
 
 1^ t'ung 
 
 ft cl'"' 
 
 ^"^ k'an 
 
 ^ ch'Ong 
 
 ppj liang 
 
 j liao. 
 
 [ih sliih 21 
 
 f- -sbang 
 
 ^ tsui 
 
 -EL shih 
 
 ^ shen 
 Y -sliang 
 
 '/.^ 
 
 U ni 
 
 --j^ 
 
 slien 
 aiiff 
 
 f 
 
 ± -sh. 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 'H ^" 
 
 ^ so- 
 
 PiL chiao- 
 
 j^jf -tso 
 
 .^ shou 
 
 % pao- 
 
 # -tai 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ -hsiung, 
 chiu 
 shih 
 
 ■»jyi 
 
 
 
 fu 
 mu 
 liao. 
 chin 2© 
 
 ^ -tzil 
 ^ -lai 
 
 PjS. "■• ? 
 
 f[«] -iii6n 
 ifil '"^iang 
 
 idl. lisiang, 
 
 is 'liau 
 
 !^ pu 
 
 -^^ lising- 
 
 fS -wn 
 
 IE "-^ 
 
 1^ ch-u 1© 
 
 J -liao 
 
 "t^, iiiu, 
 
 1^ chiu 
 
 -^^ shih 
 
 ^ hsiung- 
 
 ^. -ti ; 
 
 che 
 
 X2, 
 
 tl- 
 
 yii -I'siung 
 
 3£ ping 
 
 1^ fei 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 
 shih 
 liansr- 
 
 -^ tan 
 M. shih 
 #. t'a 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 g tzu^ 
 
 e, -Chi 
 
 6^ -^- 
 
 ^1 urh 
 
 -jp -tzfi 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ■tk yeh 
 
 gl chiu 
 
 i^ ken- 
 
 ^' -'-^° 
 
 1^ hsiao 
 
 "T -liao ; 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 -^ hsiao- 
 
 jlJH -shun 
 
 A, Jen, 
 
 ^5 na 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 3ig 'hai 
 
 ^^ sheng- 
 
 {jJ -ch'u 
 
 ^ 'bao 
 
 5i ^'•'^- 
 
 ju^ ch'uang 
 {ij -ch'u 
 
 'huo 
 
 ^ tai- 
 lei 
 
 
 3C fu 
 
 # 
 
 ^. shou 
 
 M, 
 
 ch'i ; 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 B -chi 
 
 ^(L fan 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^M- shih, 
 
 'rff tai- 
 
 ^ -lei 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 -fflr nm 
 
 Jl^ chion 
 
 '^ kuan - 
 
 A j" 
 
 Jn f« 
 
 ^^. -t'- 
 
 i~ che 18 
 
 ^Sf- tsung 
 
 A. J^°' 
 
 ^Ij Pieli 
 
 :^ t'ien- 
 Tia li
 
 12-17. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 gl ^■''"' 
 
 M '''"='" 
 
 1^, *^"''' 
 
 HiL cliiao 
 
 :^^ wang 
 
 i ''-^^'- 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 ^ lao- 
 
 ^ 'liai- 
 
 ^. -tzu, 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 -11 -pao 
 
 ^J nan-t 
 
 la -rh 
 
 &^. ti, 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 -fir nm 
 
 '^j tao 
 
 fl 
 
 chi 
 
 & tzii- 
 
 fi t'i 
 
 \\ hsia- 
 
 H^ -cliiea 
 
 'Y -liao, 
 
 i^ yeh 
 
 m ^'"'' 
 
 ^ P" 
 
 ^ hsiao. 
 
 $0 ju- Iff- 
 
 -^ -chin 
 
 jtl; shih 
 
 K" -sliang 
 
 jj^ wu- 
 
 ^ -ni 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 la urli 
 
 -^ -tzu 
 
 M 'lien 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 IS: *'>"'' 
 
 ftH t'a 
 
 '^, ciiu. 
 
 fi t'a 
 
 g| cliiu 
 
 Jo^ piea 
 
 HsD lien ; 
 'Mai ' 
 
 3t fu 
 
 -^ mu 
 
 E ma 
 
 fi, t'a 
 
 St. 
 
 :^^ lisuio ; 
 
 ^ yao lO 
 
 -H. aliili 
 
 f^ "'- 
 
 'fFll -men 
 
 ^ ping- 
 
 ~p -ting 
 
 fPI. -men, 
 
 j' sliang 
 
 fSp; cben 
 
 [Ij ch'u 
 
 -E ping 
 
 l^xf -t' 
 
 gi shih- 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 "a" k'ea 
 
 ^ yung- 
 
 1^ cheng 
 
 ^. -''^'''°' 
 
 t|lL chiao 
 
 A J«" 
 
 ^g lisiao- 
 
 f^ -'liua 
 
 f;5^ ni 
 
 ^ juan- 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 -Hr niu 
 
 -{^ nm 
 
 3m 
 
 a 
 
 fS cli'ing- 
 
 Ha ti 
 
 "7 liao ; 
 
 4 y°i' 
 
 •^ shih 
 
 ^ pi 
 
 -^ lisiao ; 
 
 ^ tsai 15 
 
 ^^ p'cng- 
 
 ^W -men 
 
 ^^ k6n- 
 
 it ^•'"^ 
 
 f^ 'tua 
 
 fj^ tso 
 
 ^. shih 
 
 ;f^ p" 
 
 ^J chao- 
 
 ^^ -shih, 
 
 ]^ chiu 
 
 jJt tien- 
 
 >p -ji 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 #. -•>^^'' 
 
 i^ yell 
 
 Ji shih 
 
 # tai 
 
 -^ mu 
 
 :y» p" 
 
 ji^ 'hao 
 
 ^0 ko 
 
 1^. yang 5 
 
 i^ yeh 
 
 1^ chiu 
 
 -[|L shih 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^1 hsiao ; 
 
 fit tso li 
 
 ^ -kuau 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 -©^ shih 
 
 ;^ pu 
 
 ^ jo* 
 
 ^ hsing 
 
 -men 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ hsiao 
 
 l§. ma, 
 
 ^[5 na 
 
 chiu 
 ^E. sl"ii 
 
 5c f" 
 
 ^5 "a 
 
 j^ chiu 
 
 11 shiii 
 At 
 
 jfiS? ch'ing- 
 
 J>S -"'an 
 
 ~r -liao 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 -^ mu 
 
 A6 -ti 
 
 m t'i, 
 
 Ha. 
 
 g. shih 
 
 ::^^ p" 
 
 ^ lisiao ; 
 
 lo ^'^' 13 
 
 ^ 'liuant'- 
 
 h -shang 
 
 4=JC 
 
 -chia 
 
 f^ tso 
 ^. shih, 
 ;^ pu 
 
 chinji 
 
 j\^\ hsin 
 i^ chieh 
 
 -ti 
 
 tso. 
 
 '^ shih 
 ^fj- chiin 
 
 :^ pu 
 
 
 chiu 
 
 fcr -t'ung 
 
 *^o or ^e. 
 
 f >ia7t ov nuan.
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 9-12. 
 
 H^ 'buan 
 
 dij -ti 
 
 Pg cb'ih 
 
 ff ■*« 
 
 "T^ -Lsia 
 
 it ^^^ 
 
 B. sliih 
 
 :^ hsiao- 
 
 jii -^'""^ 
 7. -^=^°- 
 
 $H Ju- 12 
 
 ^ -kuo 
 
 m *'"'- 
 
 §^ -k'ai 
 
 ja sbih 
 
 . i 
 
 JfflL chii 
 i 
 
 tun.?. 
 
 ^{T chu- 
 4H chii 
 
 5a -"' 
 
 5a -'^i'; 
 
 n^ -ti 
 
 ^ kuci- 
 
 xf> -pu- 
 
 ^. -k-'i, 
 
 ^ fou 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 il^ fang 
 ^_+--ai, 
 
 P chill 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ;\^N hein 
 
 gw cb'eng- 
 ^J -shib, 
 
 iff o '^^°- 
 
 ;^ sbih, 
 ^ mei 
 
 ^ t'ieii 
 
 ffi tsu 
 
 ^ cb'a- 
 
 ^I tan 
 
 Us fan 
 
 |3 cbib 
 ^ yao 
 f f Jl. cbiao 
 
 ig *'=» 
 
 iz, bsi- 
 
 ]^ bsi- 
 
 W'{« 'liuau- 
 
 P^ 'bo 
 
 V® chill, 
 
 ^Ij Piel' 
 
 * ^k'ii 
 
 ^ 'bai 
 
 A ■''^■" 
 
 ^Ij Piok 
 
 ^ Pei- 
 
 idl ti 
 
 5^ fu 
 
 #, nui; 
 
 11^ tsnns- 
 
 ^l> wai- 
 
 f^ 6ZU- 
 
 ^ y"Dg 
 
 g -t- 
 
 f A ti<^"- 
 
 ^ Chi- . 
 
 5a. -'^' 
 
 Tg -tsan 
 
 ^g cbin- 
 
 il yin 
 
 # -cko 
 
 JZL -tzu 
 
 3c ^" 
 
 ^§ -ch'ien, 
 
 -^ ,nu 
 
 ^ t'eng 
 
 P^. *^'>'i'', 
 
 if ^- 
 
 'f^ chin- 
 
 a -cbi 
 
 ^. -cho 
 
 it^ -ti 
 
 ^ f" 
 
 :^ lao- 
 
 -^ niu 
 
 ^ -P'o 
 
 ii. y""S' 
 
 ^ 'bai- 
 
 # ti 
 
 ^, -tza, 
 
 fi t'a 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 il tai 
 
 la ko 
 
 :^ lao 
 
 A Jen- 
 
 ^ -chia ; 
 
 Ml neng- 
 
 Pf -k'o 
 
 EJ tzil- 
 
 Q -cbi 
 
 /L> shao 
 
 Pg cb'ih 
 
 /J^> shao 
 
 5a -i^ 
 
 ^. i-> 
 
 ^Ij Pieh 
 
 .±. cb'ii 
 
 Ht t" 
 
 ^§ ch'ien 
 
 j\Y|^ hsin 
 
 _t., -shang, 
 
 j^ 'hao 
 
 T liao. 
 
 f/jl ni- lO 
 
 Aff^ -men 
 
 ^ -Jan 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 fg pao 
 
 '(S tan- 
 
 /L -fan 
 
 -& sbih 
 
 g tzii- 
 
 a -cbi 
 
 ^e, -ti 
 
 ■g -lia°«- 
 
 5a -^ 
 
 t^ tso- 
 
 # -'^ 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 It^. -ti> 
 
 M wu- 
 
 ^ so- 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 Jg chih 
 
 -j^ cb'ii 
 
 :Sr -cb'eng 
 ;'a- 
 
 m *'^ 
 
 -men 
 
 5a -'^1' 
 i^ff -ti 
 
 '^, sbili- 
 
 tw. -ci''ing> 
 j^ «'"" 
 It °='n 
 
 .@i bsiao 
 
 y. -liao, 
 
 ■t^ yci^ 
 
 !^ pu 
 
 ^v pi- 
 
 ^ -ti"g 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 i^ che- 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 ilik, tso, 
 
 H ts'^i 
 
 fjij. cbiao- 
 
 #■ -tso 
 
 ;& sbih 
 
 K cbib 
 
 ^- yao 
 
 ^Vj) bsin- 
 
 ^\!^ 
 
 -hsin 
 
 flji» nien- 
 
 iEt -J^ie"- 
 
 5a -'rh 
 
 0^. -ti, 
 
 M pa 
 
 ■fgr niu 
 
 ^fe tsai 
 
 *m 
 
 f abbreviated form of .
 
 5-9. 
 
 PARAPHllASK OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 lip -slum 
 fg t'a 
 
 it cbe- 
 10 -ko 
 •^T hsiao- 
 
 ji. -«'^'"'' 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 fir tso- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 ^ -lai 
 
 l§xf -ti 
 '^ sliih ; 
 
 J;(l pi- 
 
 -^ -fang 
 -f]^ ku 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 A, je"' 
 ^ y" 
 
 flj ko 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 :^ Dial 
 £ urh 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 O 
 
 ^f-fl Iisiaiiff 
 
 . i 
 
 ^ hsiaiig, 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ clnli- 
 
 3^; -tao 
 
 7. -'''^°- 
 
 -^ ku * 
 
 m y^ 
 
 sbuo 
 
 PA. 
 
 % -ts 
 
 g^ chi- 
 
 ^ cbih- 
 
 ig| -tao 
 
 3C fu 
 
 -^ mu 
 
 1. -en 
 
 7. -liao, 
 
 g she°- 
 
 ii -"^ 
 
 -y. cli'ii 
 
 ^ I"' 
 
 N'hJ k II nil 
 
 ^ fu 
 
 -gjr mil 
 
 Hi^ -'' 
 
 jti chc- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 EI "B^n 
 
 -& shih 
 
 # pao- 
 
 ^fe cliiiig 
 
 6>f -ti 
 
 '/,* 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 -& sliili 
 
 ^ P" 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 ^■Q" -tao 
 
 -^ niu 
 
 5^ chih 
 
 tE p^ 
 
 # tai 
 
 M urh 
 
 JZ. -tzii 
 
 ^Ci* 
 
 FJ^ 
 
 -ch'ano" 
 
 l^lj tao 
 
 -f^ -te 
 
 ^ cli'eng 
 
 A Ji-'' 
 
 -S -cliaiis: 
 
 A ta 
 
 fj^ -ti 
 
 n^ shih- 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 Itp kei 
 
 fiji ni 
 
 ^^ ch'li 
 
 ^^ ch'i 
 
 O^ slieng 
 
 36. wang 
 
 >Ui« 
 
 men 
 
 sliu 
 
 MI ck'eng 
 
 ^. niing, 
 
 lu kei 
 
 4-'*"* 1 * 
 
 Ja. Chens 
 
 ^ chia 
 
 ± li 
 
 ^5 na 
 
 'Pfc cbie"- 
 
 31 -•' 
 
 J -liao 
 
 y(]^"> b«in. 
 
 IIR yen « 
 
 Q pa- 
 
 B Pa- 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 ify -ti 
 
 ;^f k'an 
 
 — ' i 
 
 ^flp nion 
 
 /y\ hsiao, - 
 
 pfl liang 
 
 4^ nioti 
 
 A t^ 
 
 ^H ciiib- 
 
 g; -tao 
 
 ^^ sbou 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 .^"* -sbao 
 
 •i£: hs\n- 
 
 ^. -k'u, 
 
 %%" tan 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 ^> 
 
 -sbao 
 
 ^ cbing- 
 
 •t^. -P'a; 
 
 ^ yang- 
 
 y^ -'buo 
 
 cbiao- 
 
 % liuo- 
 
 4!^ liao 
 
 5i -'"' 
 
 m tic»- 
 
 53 -'Hi 
 
 ^it p="- 
 
 31 ■■'■''' 
 
 VC^k cli'ou 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 "f" liao- 
 
 ;f: -pu- 
 ff, -te; 
 
 W cb'a 
 
 ;^ P» 
 
 S^ sbib 
 
 :^ cb'a, 
 
 :^ p" 
 
 ^ sbib 
 
 1^. ^"' 
 
 53 cbib 
 
 ^ teng 
 
 ^^ -cbo 
 
 .S* sben 
 
 -^ -tzii 
 
 ^2 'bao 
 
 7. 
 
 10, 
 
 ^ 
 
 cbe 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 fan? 
 
 %t 
 
 t y«'» or nlch.
 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 2-5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 is Sl'eng - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H ^'" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j^ Kiinng 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 ff^ -men 
 
 ^ tiu 
 
 jl|^ -shun 
 
 M *="'- 
 
 gjf| Haiin 
 
 ^^J -'' 
 
 :(£ tsai 
 
 ^ -liao 
 
 -& shih 
 
 m -li 
 
 -J- shih- 
 
 ^ I'l"- 
 
 I'T^ 'luiai- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 — • i 
 
 A '=» 
 
 J^ -liu 
 
 i^. -■'■'•' 
 
 |g -I.ao 
 
 illl ti 
 
 $1 t'uan 
 
 # t- 
 
 ^a P'icn 
 
 Hi •■'"'§ 
 
 52. -■'■'' 
 
 ri^ -'■' 
 
 t1xf -ti 
 
 3fH. -'hen; 
 
 5^. -i-' 
 
 # -<^1'0 
 
 ^i} -f. 
 
 ^ '1.0- 
 
 ^;n 'bo- 
 
 h shang 
 
 ■^ hsien 
 
 f:^ ni 
 
 (l^- sl''''- 
 
 .^ -'•'' 
 
 M. "^'''i- 
 
 ^ chih 
 
 B 1'^^ 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 |p^ -''"'" 
 
 7, -liao, 
 
 f^^ "i 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 it '=^^- 
 
 ^^ slic"«- 
 
 ^)t -"•''' 
 
 ."1 y<=" 
 
 ^- k'an 
 
 "T> hpia 
 
 m -'^" 
 
 £. -•'•'■' 
 
 i^c "^^ 
 
 ^1 Dcng 
 
 ^ t'icn 
 
 ^ chih 
 
 •^ /i.vwo 
 
 n "' 
 
 Y -liao 
 
 1 ''-> 
 
 itll ti 
 
 illl. ti. 
 
 ^ '' 
 
 ■^^ lisiao 
 
 pjS. "■? 
 
 ^ ch'eng 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 Fp chung- 
 
 6^ -'i 
 
 Pyl. "i? 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 M '^° 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 1^ -chie°- 
 
 g; tao- 
 
 ^J£ chiu 
 
 B •'^''' 
 
 A J^" 
 
 4^ p" 
 
 ^ -'' 
 
 ^J, -li, 
 
 ^ lisi- 
 
 :^ p" 
 
 PJS„ ni? 
 
 ^. 'l>o. 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ii ch,ang- 
 
 il'. -'i'"=in ; 
 
 ^ 'Imi 
 
 ^'0 ju- 5 
 
 ,"1 y<^" 
 
 A. J^"' 
 
 ^ -chiu 
 
 f$ "i 
 
 ffg ^•'^''•' 
 
 ,4i- -chin 
 
 t^ "^"S 
 
 i^ "- 
 
 I'P ^^' 
 
 ^ k'u 
 
 M. ^=^"' 
 
 ^ ch'ieh 
 
 /j-r sheng- 
 
 W y" 
 
 f^> "•- 
 
 p^, ni? 
 
 »^ leng 
 
 IS pa 
 
 # -t^ 
 
 — . i 
 
 jP^ men 
 
 M.- '^'"" 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ^^ f" 
 
 g^ hsii 
 
 1® 1^° 
 
 60 chung 
 
 M y"- 
 
 m. "■'• 
 
 f^. niu 
 
 ^ to 
 
 Kll'E li- 
 
 -g- po- 
 
 ^, -cli'ou ; 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 1$ t'eng- 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 7 -liao 
 
 jl^ -hsing 
 
 f^ "i 
 
 Q -ci>i 
 
 ^ -ai 
 
 A j^»- 
 
 is che- 
 
 "IP -n.eu 
 
 ;^ tsou 
 
 ^^ I'" 
 
 f^. ni- 
 
 4^ -wu 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 If^ t'iug 
 
 PJS. ni? 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 if\ -men 
 
 {Ij -<='''" 
 
 ^M" tao- 
 
 2^ t'ing. 
 
 "^^ clnu 
 
 ^ cli'uan 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 ^^ -ku 
 
 m -1' 
 
 ^ tse-e- * 
 
 ^ I'U- 
 
 ^ '- 
 
 jV^'* Lsin- 
 
 PJS. »i? 
 
 6^. -"• 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 ^ pn- 
 
 ^; -shat,g; 
 
 fM, -cli'ang, 
 
 A j^" 
 
 ^, tse"."- 4 
 
 f$^ shih 
 
 5£ -urh 
 
 f/f. "i 
 
 ||£ shuu 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 |g -mo 
 
 ^ /iSi'ao 
 
 SS ken 
 
 ri<j ■'■ 
 
 — • i 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 it; ^'''"° 
 
 Pjg ni? 
 
 ^ -cl.0 
 
 ^ lao 
 
 pit shuo 
 
 yf» pu 
 
 r^. "i? 
 
 ^ che- 
 
 i^\ "i; 
 
 ^ -tzil 
 
 i^jt ni- 
 
 ^1 hsiao- 
 
 tzi chih 
 
 is -J^" 
 
 f^ "' 
 
 ^•g ni=i"S 
 
 •fPJ -men 
 
 ji. -^'■»"' 
 
 yin- 
 
 ■^ hsiao - 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ k-aa 
 
 ^. t'ing; 
 
 ^t ^■'''" 
 
 -f^ -wei 
 
 jii -si'"i 
 
 -S; shih 
 
 ^- -cho 
 
 -f^ "'- 
 
 J3. shih 
 
 -^ hsiao- 
 
 6^ -^' 

 
 1-2. 
 
 PARAPHRASE OF THE SACRED EDICT, CAP. I. 
 
 ^g Slieng 
 
 ^4- chiao 
 
 A j^"" 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 /S, -szu, 
 itJC tso 
 {i| -ch'u 
 
 ^ Wan 
 
 ^S. Siii 
 
 fr. Ych, 
 
 ^ tso 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^, we', 
 
 ^ lisiang 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 sip Slid'iig 
 
 -I- shih- 
 
 -^ t'iao, 
 
 55 t'ou 
 
 ■vf- chicn 
 
 ^ chiu. 
 
 -10 ko 
 
 $n J"- 
 
 >A -cbin 
 
 5K. 
 
 g 
 
 T.-JU 
 
 Tsuiig,' 
 
 ch'in- 
 
 -tzii 
 
 # t«o- 
 
 ^ -ch'eng 
 
 ;^ Jlsiao 
 
 *^ Chiitcj 
 
 'in ^"* 
 
 k "''^ 
 
 ^£ shu, 
 H. sliih 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ p'u 
 
 •^ t'ien- 
 
 ~T^ -hsia 
 
 A J^"- 
 
 //pa -men 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 ;^ bsia« 
 
 ;^ tao 
 
 
 0. 
 
 so- 
 -i 
 
 33 Sliciig 
 
 m. '^^^ 
 
 H Je.v 
 |ji 'lluanj 
 
 ^ tso 
 J -li:io 
 'iu- 
 
 Sllili 
 
 
 ^E iiien 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 "T» -hsia, 
 
 VJ. '■^"' 
 
 ^ chiiig 
 
 H. shih 
 
 i^ Wan 
 ff Yeh 
 ^ i- 
 
 fil -szu. 
 
 1^ 
 
 v/o
 
 CHINESE TEXT 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SHENG YtJ KWANG HSUN; 
 
 OB, 
 
 %(!}■ AMPLIFICATION OF THE SACRED EDICT. 
 
 CHAPTER I, (T^ 
 
 fK£«^
 
 END OF PART I. 
 
 (CHINESE TEXT) 
 
 09 
 
 THE CATEGOEY OF T'lEN.
 
 5c ^ T'l EN-LEI, CATEGOUY OF VIEN. 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 Wl kai 
 
 jl^ -mo 
 
 # -t^ 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 
 
 ifei yoii 
 
 jjilp^ ehcu? 
 
 T. -1-^ 
 
 # tso 
 
 
 
 S^ n>G 
 
 3C2. 
 
 ^ " T'ieii 
 
 «f ch£- 
 
 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 PJ5 na 
 
 /t^ shrny 
 
 10. ■''''' 
 
 
 
 a tang 
 
 ^ cl"" 
 
 ^ y'v'ew 
 
 fjjt tso 
 
 
 
 ^ T'icn 
 
 ^ fihih 
 
 ^ chang" 
 
 05 na- 
 
 
 
 g tang 
 
 ^ nan 
 
 M "^ 
 
 10. -^"^ 
 
 
 
 1^ Fo 
 
 ^ pien 
 
 ^ ehih 
 
 — . i 
 
 
 
 jH che- 
 
 A J^-' 
 
 10 ^° 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 
 
 ^ mo 
 
 6»f -ti 
 
 S tzu- 
 
 :;^ ehih 
 
 
 
 ;A: ta 
 
 ^^ kuei- 
 
 B -J'^'^ 
 
 i^ ahuo 
 
 
 
 P sh6n 
 
 j^. -cbU, 
 
 e^. -ti' 
 
 ^, T'ien, 
 
 
 
 fixf. -t>; 
 
 ^ ehih 
 
 'P tao 
 
 ^ wan 
 
 
 
 ^% pu 
 
 ^ "c/a 
 
 jjf^ raei 
 
 i^ mei 
 
 
 
 ^;^ kuo 
 
 P sMn 
 
 10 ko 
 
 gft. sliuo 
 
 
 
 us tou 
 
 ittJ ^« 
 
 pj k'o 
 
 1$ shen 
 
 
 
 -^ tso 
 
 jjif sA?« 
 
 ^ pien 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 
 
 it Ts'ai 
 
 :^ ^.ai" 
 
 6^. -*'• 
 
 ^. li> 
 
 
 
 jjjiji Shen 
 
 6^ -t' 
 
 361. 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 
 
 ^ Yeh 
 
 E '- 
 
 it *i^^- 
 
 ;^ Bhih 
 
 
 
 Wi -'' 
 
 m -szu ; 
 
 la -1^ 
 
 alfc ^''"° 
 
 
 
 ^. *''' 
 
 i(^ hsin 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 jp$, shen, 
 
 1 
 
 
 m <^^^ 
 
 ^1 -•» * 
 
 M p'" 
 
 Wl *=^i" 
 
 
 
 Ht <«'«» 
 
 M ^^'^"S 
 
 ^ -tzu 
 
 ^0^ P^o- 
 
 
 
 )ji$ ihen 
 
 ^3 -cbo 
 
 ?I H- 
 
 y^'v -pu- 
 
 
 
 j^ yuan 
 
 f|- shih- 
 
 fij -t'ou 
 
 >^ -chu 
 
 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 "^ ch'ang 
 
 -j^ shih 
 
 
 
 H wu 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ Chung 
 
 
 
 y> liu 
 
 m tang 
 
 -gt kung 
 
 1$ sl'«n 
 
 
 
 -fa ko 
 ig mi-* 
 
 ff shih- 
 
 10 ko 
 
 ^ tsou 
 
 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 -^ ta 
 
 6xf. -*'' 
 
 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 )fl!|l, shen; 
 
 jjjljj sUn 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 
 
 PJS, ni. 
 
 ^ tan- 
 
 •^ tzii 
 
 ^ chung 
 
 
 
 
 It -'^'''i 
 
 ritf. -^'^ 
 
 1$ shgn 
 
 
 
 
 it «''^ 
 
 05 "•'' 
 
 l+J -cbung 
 
 
 
 
 H ya"«- 
 
 _^ sbih 
 
 05 '"'^ . 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ->' 
 
 ^ ^ci 
 
 li "■'^i 
 
 
 
 
 -/^ ta 
 
 y+ shih- 
 
 it tsou- 

 
 353-360. 
 
 ^ tS TIEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'IEN. 
 
 
 
 
 %^ shen 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 ^' yii 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 pjs. 
 
 ui. 
 
 fM 
 
 -mo 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 PA "i? 
 
 §r «« 
 
 i2 chc- 
 
 
 355. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -clio 
 
 # 1- 
 
 SCO. 
 
 i^ kuan 
 
 jig -ko 
 
 ^ 
 
 lun- 
 
 )i. 
 
 ma? 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 rixf -t- 
 
 it «''"«- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -hii 
 
 )i 
 
 fan 
 
 ^;f '° 
 
 Ht slmo 
 
 ^, sliib- 
 
 ^. -^^' 
 
 pfiB 
 
 lun- 
 
 w 
 
 yu 
 
 U szti 
 
 6^. ti' 
 
 ''* -ch'ing; 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 *. 
 
 -cli'li, 
 
 %^ 
 
 shen 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 it ''•^e- 
 
 V^ mei 
 
 ;?|j pen 
 
 ^IJ 
 
 tao- 
 
 fiij 
 
 hsien 
 
 #: ^ei- 
 
 'fi -ko 
 
 gi t'ing- 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 |g 
 
 -ti 
 
 rj^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ^^ -fen; 
 
 jpl| s/ie?i 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 — • i 
 
 iE 
 
 cbe- 
 
 *2 
 
 ch'i- 
 
 -g tan- 
 
 ^ tzu 
 
 la. «tuo, 
 
 ^. wei, 
 
 ^la 
 
 -ko 
 
 m 
 
 • t'ou 
 
 It -ch'i 
 
 i^ yiian 
 
 "k y« 
 
 H ch'i 
 
 it 
 
 tsao- 
 
 31 
 
 -urh 
 
 i«^ die- 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 -^ 'hai 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 -ffc 
 
 -'hua 
 
 U 
 
 tou 
 
 1@ -ko 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 ^ tsao 
 
 ^ wn 
 
 n 
 
 wan- 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 M *'°"° 
 
 •ff shih- 
 
 J;|l pi 
 
 ^ 
 
 -wu 
 
 A 
 
 j6n 
 
 ■^ shili 
 
 ^ ml-- 
 
 F^ -mo 
 
 It^. -''■' 
 
 it^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 )i. 
 
 raa? 
 
 ^ Chung 
 
 la. -^' 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 W^ shen 
 
 :! 
 
 shih 
 
 
 354. 
 
 W? s'^^i 
 
 ^j^ tsung 
 
 2(i Pei- 
 
 _g shih 
 
 i^. 
 
 shui ? 
 
 K 
 
 ehih 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 >f\ pu 
 
 ^ -shih. 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ fen '^^ 
 
 
 356. 
 
 fH 
 
 p'a 
 
 ^ t'ou 
 
 ^ °*ai 
 
 "T^ o 
 
 ,^ 359. 
 
 M <=i^^- 
 
 m 
 
 wu 
 
 m 
 
 hsicn 
 
 5a. -"^h, 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 -k '^ 
 
 M 
 
 liUO 
 
 % 
 
 tou 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 yj>^ hsiao, 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 it, sbuo? 
 
 i^ me 
 
 ^. 
 
 T'ien, 
 
 K 
 
 jen ; 
 
 4t^ hsieh 
 
 ^5 na. 
 
 5^ T'iea 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 
 357. 
 
 is. 
 
 che- 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 'fi -ko 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ shu 
 
 p 
 
 shen 
 
 m 
 
 -ko 
 
 iK ta 
 
 M ^-i- 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ --^ 
 
 it 
 
 tsao- 
 
 10 
 
 shen 
 
 ^, sliih, 
 
 dx -«<' 
 
 ji ko 
 
 ^^ -^' 
 
 -ft 
 
 -'hua 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 P, cLih 
 
 xf» -p«- 
 
 flp «ii^" 
 
 ^^ tsung 
 
 ^ 
 
 wan- 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 B^ -neng 
 
 Jg^mo? 
 
 >g ini"g. 
 
 4^. 
 
 -wu, 
 
 A. 
 
 jen, 
 
 ^. T'ien, 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 :^ ^^' 
 
 la. -''^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 Tvei 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 ^ ts'ai 
 
 ^ tao- 
 
 © she". 
 
 EI3 chao 
 
 ft 
 
 shih- 
 
 ^. 
 
 kuei. 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 Ji -li 
 
 1^ -mo 
 
 FJl Chung 
 
 )S 
 
 -mo 
 
 W 
 
 yu 
 
 m <=!'- 
 
 N. ^'• 
 
 X y^ 
 
 |g Kuo 
 
 :^ 
 
 pu 
 
 fiff 
 
 wu 
 
 JS -ko 
 
 ii:l i- 
 
 ifc shuo 
 
 &§ -*• 
 
 pji. 
 
 shuo 
 
 pj 
 
 k'o 
 
 |b neng- 
 
 K" -shang 
 
 1^1 shen 
 
 IJ 'hua- 
 
 pjs. 
 
 ni? 
 
 # 
 
 ch'a- 
 
 #. -k-an ; 
 
 Jj/j"- so 
 
 ^■» pa 
 
 3ft. -shuo, 
 
 
 358. 
 
 # 
 
 -k'ao 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 p% sbuo 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 ^ chuug 
 
 JM 
 
 yiidn- 
 
 Hf^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 -@j shih 
 
 &^. -^>' 
 
 ^ tsao 
 
 |I}| shen 
 
 * 
 
 -pen 
 
 ^- 
 
 pu- 
 
 ^ ^''- 
 
 # '- 
 
 :g she°- 
 
 # ko 
 
 i^ 
 
 me 
 
 # 
 
 teng 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 ^ ^jl T'lEN'LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 347-353. 
 
 JIil|l. sh«n, 
 
 ii ko 
 
 rixj -ti 
 
 1^ wo 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 [15. wen, 
 
 4i yu 
 
 ff Sllill- 
 
 IK Chung 
 
 H hsich 
 
 il ya"'- 
 
 :^ «'«» 
 
 fllj, lision, 
 
 t|R -mo ? 
 
 |I Jl sh£n 
 
 {J[J -ch'u 
 
 ^ -'^l' 
 
 jjj$ «'"'»» 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 352. 
 
 ^f) tou 
 
 ^ -kli 
 
 pji, shuo; 
 
 ^^ 'Aao 
 
 4^ pu 
 
 M na 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^ -chih 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 ^^ lai. 
 
 iQ hsiang- 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 ?M li- 
 
 ^ 'hou, 
 
 M "^ 
 
 M\ k'o- 
 
 H -sLu ; 
 
 -^ ling- 
 
 Sjj, -t'ou; 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 5i -'^^ 
 
 lii -i 
 
 n F° 
 
 ii\ -wai 
 
 5JP na- 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 :^ pu 
 
 -j"!!! lisicn 
 
 — . i 
 
 m -k" 
 
 ^ to 
 
 mi ko 
 
 pj k'o- 
 
 ^ 'hai 
 
 ^ chiao 
 
 lip 5/jrt8 
 
 ^ nien 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ii^. -•? 
 
 fijj shen 
 
 ri^. -ti; 
 
 'j* tza 
 
 IS J^"- 
 
 jj^ 'hao 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 ilJ Fo 
 
 II tsung 
 
 PlHc "s'"k 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ii. shuo, 
 
 ' i 
 
 4^ pen 
 
 ^^ P" 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 i-lll ti- 
 
 ^ kai- 
 
 m P'a"- 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 il^ po 
 
 ij -fa-- 
 
 ^ -ch'eng 
 
 31 -'A 
 
 ^K wai 
 
 Pg P'ei- 
 
 fill t'a 
 
 B .'rh 
 
 •^ wei 
 
 A. ta; 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 iS -ch'ea 
 
 yf« pu 
 
 E-'S, °'? 
 
 |!p «''^« 
 
 is die- 
 
 fS hsing 
 
 ^ <'?ew 
 
 ^, shih; 
 
 348. 
 
 :^|i A«eA 
 
 in -ko 
 
 ^;§ -kuo 
 
 •^ tzii 
 
 t|iL chiao 
 
 jH che? 
 
 "if ^ chcng, 
 
 f IJ Fo 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 ^ ^0 
 
 bS' 'kua 
 
 III ts'ai 
 
 2j\ pcu- 
 
 I^^ -ti 
 
 E •- 
 
 1^ hsia 
 
 3fR 'ken 
 
 pi shuo- 
 
 i^R -lai 
 
 ■0^ shSn; 
 
 .@., -szii; 
 
 M ""^ 
 
 ^. shih. 
 
 #. -»^^ 
 
 ;^ sl.ili 
 
 g| sui- 
 
 -^ Tung- 
 ^ -chia 
 
 i 
 
 ^ t'ou 
 
 349. 
 XS 'han 
 
 7k °'°- 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 A J^° 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 m "=» 
 
 % -urh 
 
 -W yu 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 |i| cb'u- 
 
 lip, sk^n, 
 
 — ' i 
 
 PJS. ni? 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 P«l wen, 
 
 ^ -obia 
 
 ili yeh 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 350. 
 
 =3 chi- 
 
 % «-" 
 
 j^ tso 
 
 ^^ P"^ 
 
 ^ hsiang 
 
 )11^ s/iM2 
 
 
 ^ r'ien 
 
 ^ 'lio- 
 
 ^ kuei 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 ^ <'ie?i 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 j}^ 'hao 
 
 fp], -sbang, 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 1^ t'ing 
 
 -^ ^«o- 
 
 M °a 
 
 A/ tai, 
 
 tIc mo- 
 
 fj^ ^°- 
 
 1 1)^ 'huang- 
 
 'fe yw- 
 
 ~ i 
 
 /^ tse°8- 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 JPJ -mgn 
 
 'J;^ -'ku 
 
 if ch^ 
 
 ■i>L, wei, 
 
 1^ -mo 
 
 |£ -urh 
 
 ^ Chung 
 
 T. -I'-- 
 
 'rJ chu 
 
 ffi pa 
 
 1^, y^°s? 
 
 ^ cb'cng 
 
 fl| shea 
 fM li- 
 
 351. 
 # Fo 
 
 tS 'kua 
 -^ shih 
 
 jjilp «AeM 
 
 IJ^^ shuo, 
 
 # -te 
 
 &X -t'°"' 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 jg lien 
 
 |7,|j) liang 
 
 11 tsung 
 
 |!jl. '^^"• 
 
 ^ y« 
 
 na ko 
 
 |fp shen 
 
 fi ko 
 
 yf% pu 
 
 353. 
 
 #. Fo, 
 
 ftp shSn 
 
 ^ tai 
 
 ^. tzu. 
 
 bE ""^"S 
 
 m. '^''■ 
 
 ^ y^ 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 1^ kei 
 
 /0 tse°6 - 

 
 3.10-347. 
 
 ^ 
 
 III T'JEN-LEI, 
 
 CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 
 M ctiu 
 
 10 ko 
 
 ^ Bbib 
 
 M na 
 
 ^ y« 
 
 |;J -eli'u 
 
 ^ shili 
 
 ^[^ hsieh 
 
 A i*^" 
 
 i^ k'uai 
 
 ^ cbien- 
 
 # ko 
 
 9i. kuei; 
 
 i|l, sl^en; 
 
 fflB clinang 
 
 J/i -"■•'' 
 
 i/| -cbih 
 
 it ^•'''" 
 
 >f» pu 
 
 5^ kuci 
 
 I^'J -f. 
 
 il^ -ti 
 
 Itxf -ti 
 
 jJi -■'' 
 
 ^ kuaa 
 
 -^ sluh 
 
 ^> tse"«. 
 
 ?;|S na- 
 
 W 'i^- 
 
 ff^ -ti 
 
 fta t'a- 
 
 A j^'1 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 -M -^0 
 
 1^ ^« 
 
 ^ Po- 
 
 JPI -men 
 
 ^ tuan 
 
 m -ko 
 
 ^ PO- 
 
 ri^j. -f. 
 
 ^4 -hsing 
 
 ^{J -ti 
 
 "j' -liao 
 
 ^ i- 
 
 j^4 -losing 
 
 ■{^ yeh 
 
 ^p1 men 
 
 ^ sban 
 
 ^§ cli'i 
 
 .@>, -s^a; 
 
 JPJ. -men, 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 % ''^' 
 
 
 ^. -urh, 
 
 •{fet ych 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ i* 
 
 L -bsia 
 
 347. 
 
 ii t«'=^i 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 IS -'■' 
 
 ^ chi°- 
 
 ^ cL'gng 
 
 A t^ 
 
 -gh kung 
 
 ^ 'bai 
 
 (ft hsing 
 
 M -rh 
 
 9i '^"^^ 
 
 gji sluio. 
 
 ftH t'a 
 
 f[!i t'a 
 
 /^ -cb'i 
 
 '(i -ko 
 
 N. ^• 
 
 343. 
 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 tixf. -ti; 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^ wen 
 
 345. 
 
 ^|> bsiob 
 
 i-|^ p'a 
 
 "U P'a 
 
 -gt kung 
 
 ~T -liao 
 
 ^^ shu 
 
 Jlilp sben 
 
 [^ cbiang 
 
 i^ n^e 
 
 m, ^'-' 
 
 i 
 
 [* -sbang 
 
 M/t; cbiu 
 
 fi^ 'buo 
 
 '#■ y" 
 
 ^ 'kou- 
 
 'fe wei 
 
 Hi sbuo 
 
 -^ suan 
 
 W. a. 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 .4t- hsien- 
 
 ft^ -*' 
 
 ;^ sbih 
 
 341. 
 
 ^ sbib 
 
 ^ shou 
 
 ^, -sheng, 
 
 ^ ^«ei 
 
 M ko 
 
 1r cbia 
 
 ^ Pao- 
 
 "7 -liao 
 
 "^ wet 
 
 ftp «/'«» 
 
 ^ kuei 
 
 jp$ sben 
 
 ^ -'bu 
 
 ij feng 
 
 A -^"^''^ 
 
 ;^ -cbih] 
 
 ^\ mo? 
 
 B^. ni? 
 
 A J^" 
 
 FW -t'ien 
 
 it? 'hao 
 
 Ii. i<^'' 
 
 344. 
 
 342. 
 
 It^ -ti 
 
 |t§ -ti 
 
 a/ tai 
 
 jI 'ban 
 
 >fN pu 
 
 ' Pfl Chung 
 
 H. 1-^ 
 
 ^. to; 
 
 6^f. -^'■. 
 
 -^ sbib 
 
 :^ sbih 
 
 § Kuo 
 
 i^ t'a- 
 
 if^ hsieh 
 
 m. '^' 
 
 it '=1^^- 
 
 %, kuei; 
 
 i^ nie 
 
 ip -men 
 
 1$ shea 
 
 ^ chu 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ cbih 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^% pu 
 
 M ''^^■ 
 
 ^ 'hua 
 
 Jg' tao- 
 
 Eg yin 
 
 it '^i^- 
 
 11 neng 
 
 '1 -ko 
 
 •^ shih. 
 
 ^ -li 
 
 m t'-^ 
 
 ^'H -ko 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^ ming- 
 
 # -^^ 
 
 is. '"°- + 
 
 tr ''^'"g- 
 
 ii si^^o- 
 
 y\ -bsia 
 
 g -mu 
 
 •^ shih- 
 
 346. 
 
 :^ -^ei 
 
 ^. -fa; 
 
 jM. t'ung- 
 
 — . i- 
 
 ^> -pu- 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 y)f> pu 
 
 1m j^ 
 
 ^, -bsing, 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 m -''' 
 
 M J-'inJ 
 
 IE, cbeng 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 ifJ cbih 
 
 -^ sbih 
 
 #. t'a 
 
 ^ yang 
 
 ^ so- 
 
 |fi shuo 
 
 1^ 'bui 
 
 ^ cbin 
 
 1^ shuo, 
 
 j^ cbiu 
 
 l>3l -i 
 
 1^ cbia 
 
 # ko 
 
 M y" 
 
 Pj k'o- 
 
 ;^j sliib 
 
 ;|^ cb'fing 
 
 Ifp, sten, 
 
 P pa 
 
 i(^ yao 
 
 a-'j 
 
 ffl, ^/'i'w, 
 
 fi t'a 
 
 ^ cb'u- 
 
 — • i 
 
 IS lei 
 
 X y^ 
 
 J^ yin 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 # -fei 
 
 Jj fang, 
 
 6>f -ti; 
 
 
 
 * i or yi. 
 
 f mo or Hid. 
 

 
 
 
 ^ IK T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF Vll^JS. 
 
 
 
 337-340. 
 
 ^ ftn- 
 
 s^ 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ Kuan 
 
 JiiilJ 
 
 shin 
 
 m 
 
 chiu 
 
 M -r'c'^ 
 
 T. 
 
 -li;io ; 
 
 IE 
 
 cheng 
 
 ^ Ti 
 
 ^. 
 
 tzQ, 
 
 ^1 
 
 'iiai 
 
 B^„ ni. 
 
 ^ 
 
 tan- 
 
 flip. 
 
 ehun, 
 
 ^ 'I'ai 
 
 ft 
 
 nt'i- 
 
 h 
 
 Sljang 
 
 310. 
 
 ;! 
 
 -sliili 
 
 yx 
 
 Chiang 
 
 M ^"^"- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chung 
 
 ^ 
 
 Ti 
 
 j^ 'Inuiiig- 
 
 h 
 
 Shang 
 
 m 
 
 Nau 
 
 ^ -yin 
 
 f£ 
 
 chiu 
 
 M 
 
 wu 
 
 [^ -sliang 
 
 '?i^ 
 
 Ti 
 
 m 
 
 kung 
 
 # >"> 
 
 ^ 
 
 y" 
 
 m 
 
 so 
 
 J J f'^i'K- 
 
 K 
 
 chili 
 
 i\^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 >f» pu 
 
 1^ 
 
 kao 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 P§ -tsong 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 m 
 
 na- 
 
 ^ hsiang 
 
 m 
 
 "^ai 
 
 n 
 
 t'ung 
 
 M -i^"o 
 
 — • 
 
 i 
 
 in 
 
 -ko 
 
 II. «'■"' 
 
 r^ 
 
 pu- 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao. 
 
 6^. -''' 
 
 fe. 
 
 wei, 
 
 TT 
 
 Wa- 
 
 ^L <=•»'" 
 
 #. 
 
 -teug - 
 
 ^ 
 
 T'ien 
 
 — • -i 
 
 ^iJ 
 
 pieh- 
 
 m. 
 
 T'ung, 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 wei- 
 
 5^ 
 
 'hai 
 
 ^ -ti>>g 
 
 fi^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 Wt 
 
 chiu 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 ^ 
 
 -fen 
 
 ± 
 
 Shang 
 
 _g shih 
 
 ;1i}i 
 
 shen 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 1^1 t'ung 
 
 r^ 
 
 pu 
 
 't 
 
 Ti 
 
 is ko 
 
 # 
 
 ko- 
 
 m 
 
 ko 
 
 M. lei ; 
 
 n 
 
 t'ung - 
 
 u 
 
 tou 
 
 IF cheng 
 
 ^ 
 
 wei- 
 
 % 
 
 hsich 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 &^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 II 
 
 suan 
 
 %\X shcn; 
 
 # 
 
 ko- 
 
 itp, 
 
 shen ; 
 
 55 wen 
 
 ^ 
 
 f6n- 
 
 :i 
 
 shih 
 
 ^■. pu 
 
 #: 
 
 wci- 
 
 iE 
 
 che- 
 
 ^[5 na- 
 
 ^ij 
 
 -pieh 
 
 p 
 
 shen 
 
 ^& shih 
 
 &^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 m 
 
 -ko 
 
 m -ko 
 
 7. 
 
 liao ; 
 
 iS. 
 
 mo ? 
 
 M yii 
 
 is 
 
 'han 
 
 m 
 
 shcn 
 
 ;^ ta 
 
 M 
 
 yiian 
 
 
 33S. 
 
 @ kuo- 
 
 ^ 
 
 pu 
 
 ^ 
 
 tzu 
 
 ^R na 
 
 ;i 
 
 shih 
 
 
 wu 
 
 ^^ -cilia 
 
 If- 
 
 chill 
 
 M 
 
 yijan 
 
 m ^'> 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 
 Jun 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'eiig 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 yj'v hsiao, 
 
 A 
 
 ta 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ i 
 
 f- 
 
 ch'ien 
 
 m. 
 
 'hen 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 w^ 
 
 shen 
 
 13^. -*■' 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'eng 
 
 M, 
 
 k'uan, 
 
 ^ -Jan 
 
 -J\ 
 
 hsiao. 
 
 z^ 
 
 pu 
 
 ^5 "=^ 
 
 n 
 
 wan 
 
 5^ 
 
 lien 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 y" 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 31 -'^ 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ± 
 
 Shang 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 TF 
 
 cheng 
 
 10. 
 
 shen. 
 
 # 1^'- 
 
 pjs„ 
 
 ni. 
 
 f- 
 
 Ti 
 
 i:[l F 
 
 ^ 
 
 yi 
 
 ^ 
 
 wo- 
 
 ^ f^ng 
 
 
 339. 
 
 ^ 
 
 'hai 
 
 ff- shih- 
 
 ^i. 
 
 hsieh, 
 
 in 
 
 -men 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 i^^ 
 
 shuo 
 
 ^1] 
 
 pieh- 
 
 j§ -mo 
 
 -t^ 
 
 yeh 
 
 11 
 
 tsung 
 
 PJS, "i? 
 
 jp$ 
 
 shea 
 
 m 
 
 -ti 
 
 t5 ton 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 \>x 
 
 i- 
 
 ji '^■^^ 
 
 II 
 
 lei 
 
 4^ 
 
 hsiao 
 
 A. ta; 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 % 
 
 -wei 
 
 itb hsieb 
 
 m 
 
 hsieh 
 
 m 
 
 tie°- 
 
 ^^ yao 
 
 1^ 
 
 t'ung 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 j® -!<«> 
 
 ti^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^ fen 
 
 M 
 
 lei 
 
 ^ 
 
 ko 
 
 tr> '°" 
 
 iF 
 
 cheng 
 
 ^^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ^|> hsieh 
 
 i 
 
 -ti 
 
 m. 
 
 shen ; 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 f1^ 
 
 tou 
 
 .ih, cheng, 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chih 
 
 ^ 
 
 tan- 
 
 yin- 
 
 X 
 
 y" 
 
 ^ 
 
 pao 
 
 ^ Kuau- 
 
 ifc. 
 
 shuo ; 
 
 
 -ch4 
 
 ';i -^^" 
 
 As 
 
 tSL""e- 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 ■g" -yn 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih- 
 
 is. 
 
 che- 
 
 'o' tauir- 
 
 M 
 
 -mo 
 
 n 
 
 li- 
 
 ^ ^1^'" 
 
 ¥ 
 
 -'hu 
 
 10 
 
 -ko 

 
 32!)-337. 
 
 VIEN-Lr.l, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 ^, -tzu; 
 
 ^ y='o 
 
 ^Mr sliili 
 
 -^ su 
 
 fg- 'hua 
 
 5i -^ 
 
 ^I li- 
 
 fl^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 [^ Shang 
 
 -^ Ti 
 
 ^^ -t' 
 
 ^^ sbih- 
 
 ij* -ch'ing 
 
 M '''''" 
 
 _BL sliih 
 At 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 JH che- 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 ^ T'iea 
 
 ^J^ na- 
 
 BS -mo 
 
 ^ yang 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 ^ to. 
 
 337. 
 HS cbao 
 
 ;= che- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 
 At 
 A 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 A 
 
 3fc 
 s 
 
 ± 
 
 
 cbung 
 clie- 
 -ko 
 -ti, 
 
 yu 
 
 tsai 
 
 na 
 
 -'rh 
 
 cluing 
 
 na- 
 
 -ko 
 
 -ti; 
 
 'liao- 
 
 -hsiang 
 
 pei- 
 
 pien 
 
 jeii 
 
 pai 
 
 Kuan 
 
 Ti 
 
 -ti 
 
 to, 
 
 nan 
 
 pien 
 
 jea 
 
 pai 
 
 Kuau- 
 
 -yiu 
 
 -ti 
 
 -to ; 
 ko 
 
 yu 
 
 ko 
 
 sliang- 
 
 kung 
 
 sbao 
 
 hsiang 
 
 -ti 
 
 r Shang 
 
 m " 
 
 "j' liao. 
 
 , 335. 
 
 Pfl Cliuiig 
 
 1^ Kuo 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 -gf po- 
 
 ^^ -hsing 
 
 ^W -men, 
 
 ^ bsin- 
 
 *^ -ch'ang 
 
 ^^ pai 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 X y" 
 
 -&. shih 
 
 @ slie°- 
 
 |g -mo 
 
 B^o "'• 
 
 336. 
 
 "g" po- 
 
 ^ -losing 
 
 '[W -men 
 
 1^ pai 
 
 # '^ 
 
 ifi" cli'u 
 
 :^ p" 
 
 1^. t'ung, 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ill clie- 
 
 TF. Cheng 
 
 l# Yang 
 
 pEj Men 
 
 ^{.^ -wai, 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 ig T'an 
 
 # li- 
 
 ^ -t'ou 
 
 [g 'Huan 
 
 Jll Ch'iu 
 
 M "=^ 
 
 iE ch'iu- 
 
 p Sliang 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ;;& shih 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 'fe shih 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 1^ neng 
 
 is ch'in- 
 
 ^, pai, 
 
 11 ch'in. 
 
 ^ -wang 
 
 f^ tai- 
 
 ^, pai; 
 
 X&i ch'u 
 
 itb tzTi 
 
 ■^ -chih 
 
 ^[», -wai, 
 
 II tsung 
 
 jfc^ me 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^^ pai 
 
 nil 
 
 n 
 
 
 ^ 
 m. 
 
 n 
 
 
 kuei- 
 
 -chii, 
 
 wo 
 
 pu 
 
 p'ei 
 
 pai 
 
 Shang 
 
 Ti 
 
 333. 
 
 shc"- 
 
 -uio 
 yiian- 
 -ku 
 ni. 
 
 334. 
 wo- 
 
 -men 
 
 shu 
 
 -shang 
 
 yu 
 
 "pf/, chu. 
 
 it 
 
 we I 
 
 T-ieii- 
 T-M 
 szu 
 yii 
 Shang \ 
 
 Ti; 
 ku- 
 
 -tz'ii, 
 
 'huang- 
 
 -shiing 
 
 mei 
 
 nien 
 
 i 
 
 tz'u, 
 
 tao 
 
 -jlj- tsai 
 Hi] "e-l 
 
 n '■ 
 
 a- 
 
 
 -ti 
 
 shih 
 
 she°- 
 
 -nio 
 
 shen 
 
 ni? 
 
 330. 
 
 ^5 "a 
 
 ^ ehiu 
 shuo 
 
 PA 
 
 ^ pai 
 
 |5[{J -ti 
 
 ;;^ shili 
 
 h Shang 
 
 •$* Ti 
 
 331. 
 
 7C Hsien- 
 
 4-. -sheng 
 
 ^f she?'. 
 
 /§ -mo 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^# pai 
 
 h Shang 
 
 •^ Ti 
 
 PJS, ni? 
 
 332. 
 
 H^, chao 
 
 f^ wo- 
 
 JH -men 
 
 FJI Chung 
 
 ^S Kuo- 
 
 A J^" 
 
 6^ -ti
 
 
 ^% 
 
 ^ TIFMLEI, CATEGORY OF T'lKN. 
 
 ay2-32S. 
 
 ^. tso"". 
 
 -jj fang 
 
 ^ 
 
 tan- 
 
 ^ -shih 
 
 ^. '"''• 
 
 (J\J. -ti- 
 
 j^ -mo 
 
 ^ -V" 
 
 -M- 
 
 -cL'i 
 
 jg mo? 
 
 -^Q Hwien- 
 
 323. 
 
 [Ej 'l'"i- 
 
 .. i 
 
 S 
 
 ni 
 
 M '- 
 
 4^ -sheng 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ -ta 
 
 C5 
 
 -fi ^vci 
 
 Jl^ 
 
 -na* 
 
 
 M "'1 
 
 ^, tsc"i!- 
 
 PjS. -^ 
 
 i!r ''^'"- 
 
 ia. 
 
 die 
 
 -j- shih 
 
 ^ lien 
 
 j^ -ino 
 
 328. 
 
 5lJ KiO 
 
 ^ 
 
 fill 
 
 ^ icn 
 
 X y 
 
 M -''" 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 fJxf. -^'' 
 
 4|^ 
 
 nien 
 
 |SJ, t'ung. 
 
 ^ kao- 
 
 ^^ I-i- 
 
 it sliuo 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 yf^ pu- 
 
 lin - 
 
 Ji- -f^ 
 
 flli t'a- 
 
 ^ -cliien 
 
 ^^ 
 
 wo- 
 
 M -kuo 
 
 1^ -0 
 
 £ -•■••' 
 
 '(P^ -men 
 
 m. H- 
 
 f\ 
 
 -inen 
 
 ^ ""•"=- 
 
 5{> shuo, 
 
 p;&. "^' 
 
 ^^ waiig 
 
 ^f- -pai 
 
 — • 
 
 i 
 
 ^i ■'^'' 
 
 jflljl slien 
 
 324. 
 
 ^[5 na- 
 
 ^[S >« 
 
 m 
 
 ku'ai 
 
 :^ p" 
 
 # li 
 
 1"^ pal, 
 
 J^ -••' 
 
 — i 
 
 31 
 
 urli 
 
 (j^ t'ung 
 
 ;^- tsui 
 
 il '='"'' 
 
 ^ ch'u 
 
 ^, t^ien, 
 
 m 
 
 p'an- 
 
 jtt; hsieh 
 
 "^ tsun 
 
 .|i shih 
 
 J|. Sllill 
 
 ?^ wo- 
 
 m 
 
 -'huan 
 
 l£. -1'^ 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 il^ shao 
 
 ^ r^i 
 
 'IP' -men 
 
 m 
 
 shu 
 
 'pf suan- 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 §, hsiang, 
 
 jplj}, slien; 
 
 ^-5 tou 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 ^ -ch'i- 
 
 h Shang 
 
 Y^ 'hua 
 
 it '=''- 
 
 fi waug 
 
 U 
 
 pao- 
 
 ^ -lal 
 
 '^. '^'' 
 
 a. '■'">>. 
 
 M -^'' 
 
 ill H- 
 
 4^ 
 
 -pu- 
 
 ;^ pen 
 
 jg che 
 
 fA tien 
 
 ^ I«i- 
 
 ^^ -pai 
 
 ^ 
 
 -ting 
 
 '^k ®^''' 
 
 ^ P« 
 
 €. '«' 
 
 ijiip -«''^" 
 
 m3; t'ang 
 
 m 
 
 'liua 
 
 — 1- 
 
 PfT, sfiih 
 
 I' shang 
 
 ^^ -t' 
 
 i, ch'u, 
 
 m 
 
 li- 
 
 m -k" 
 
 [- Sbang 
 
 i!J^. l^'>ng, 
 
 it -^'' 
 
 fife t'a 
 
 m 
 
 -t'on 
 
 ifll^ shea 
 
 '% Tf 
 
 -Fj k'o 
 
 ^ elm 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu- 
 
 ^ wu 
 
 ^ 'hai 
 
 P, t'ou, 
 
 m '''""' 
 
 fLI wen 
 
 ^ 
 
 cliih- 
 
 ^t ' 
 
 ^ THen 
 
 jm^ che 
 
 ^ i-i 
 
 -^ Hsien- 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu- 
 
 "T liao. 
 
 B, shih 
 At 
 
 ^g chi 
 
 i 
 
 4^. -slieng 
 
 t 
 
 chiao- 
 
 327. 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ^ yr."^- 
 
 la ka 
 
 lit. sl'uo' 
 
 69 
 
 -ti 
 
 vM '^'" 
 
 #1 ko 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 jji!|i. ^•'^"' 
 
 5^1 wo- 
 
 ^ 
 
 tat- 
 
 -^ H-oien- 
 
 # y«"^- 
 
 :^ shih- 
 
 ^ pii 
 
 JH -men 
 
 f/i 
 
 tle"- ■ 
 
 /Cp -sheng 
 
 5i -'^^ 
 
 Mo -^'''i°S- 
 
 ^ cluing 
 
 # wang 
 
 ^i 
 
 -'rli 
 
 ii: tse'«- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 325. 
 
 lljj s-.en 
 
 i5 na 
 
 ifti 
 
 ying- 
 
 jg -ino 
 
 ^ tao- 
 
 K cli'li 
 
 t!^ tou 
 
 J^ -'^h 
 
 f 
 
 -'ho ; 
 
 it. ■^■'^""' 
 
 ^ -11 
 
 i". fse"e- 
 
 3ft- slino 
 
 ^ cli'u 
 
 iil 
 
 1 e"5- 
 
 ^^ wo 
 
 ~r liae 
 
 j§ -mo 
 
 i9. -te. 
 
 # tso 
 
 m 
 
 -nio- 
 
 utk ch'iao- 
 
 Hsf; TOO ? 
 
 fi -ko 
 
 32.0. 
 
 @ sli«'- 
 
 M 
 
 -clio 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 325. 
 
 gf^ chrang- 
 
 fUl t'a 
 
 ;^. -mo, 
 
 ^. 
 
 pi? 
 
 m '^'^'^ 
 
 pj k'o 
 
 1^ -chin 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 M ^- 
 
 i:(; 
 
 pi- 
 
 ;i. ^'--^^ 
 
 ^. -pu- 
 
 fi3 -urh 
 yLi 
 
 
 
 
 •or 
 
 ?;e. 
 

 
 3I9-3-23. 
 
 ^ *K T'lEN-LEI, 
 
 CATEGORY OF T'JjEK. 
 
 
 W P^*' 
 
 ^4 'I.en 
 
 iia ko 
 
 ^ sliih 
 
 is -ko 
 
 t^. -«!"''> 
 
 ^ T'ien 
 
 ^'* sliao ; 
 
 ig mi"«- 
 
 fil 1 sliL'n 
 
 Is Yao 
 
 i\j^ shou- 
 
 \\'] ■*' 
 
 ^ hsin- 
 
 5a -l^ 
 
 IM 'i- 
 
 ^ Sbun 
 
 M> -shih! 
 
 il. ". 
 
 ',V; -oI''^"'g 
 
 M '■"'- 
 
 BS -t'ou 
 
 ^(J -ti 
 
 M yi- 
 
 -tfi, y'^i' 
 
 li; «'"'« 
 
 illj -tao 
 
 ll t-i 
 
 [}fe shih- 
 
 fil -p<=' 
 
 il -- 
 
 r/^J -'' 
 
 #^ *«'» 
 
 lllf tsun 
 
 '^ -'bou 
 
 f^ kai- 
 
 f] y^ 
 
 ftp ^i^^" 
 
 M y""s 
 
 (I'J, -'' ■' 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 j||^ -cb'uan 
 
 j|# t'e- 
 
 m ^''- 
 
 7. ''•'^"' 
 
 ^ 'hou- 
 
 ;S. chib, 
 
 3^ kuo 
 
 
 flj -t'ou 
 
 i^ ch'ing 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 B^ cbiao 
 
 yX '■'''i''i"s 
 
 fif bsiu 
 
 j^gf tsui 
 
 :fa pa 
 
 W y" 
 
 * kn 
 
 SS pa! 
 
 j^ijj iniao 
 
 "fir tsua 
 
 i^ Che 
 
 is ko 
 
 A j«" 
 
 320. 
 
 I^X/. -''; 
 
 It^ -^'' 
 
 iSI -ko 
 
 jljj p'eug- 
 
 H^ sbuo 
 
 i^^ lisicn- 
 
 ^•» pu 
 
 jrj chill 
 
 ^ tao- 
 
 ^ -y" 
 
 J^ ^^'''^ 
 
 :^ -tsai 
 
 ;|^ kuo 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 Jl -li 
 
 m p° 
 
 JE "^^"s 
 
 U feng 
 
 1^ sliili 
 
 ^. Tien; 
 
 ■^ fen- 
 
 a -° 
 
 yf^ pu 
 
 ;]^ sbou 
 
 i^ kno- 
 
 ^ tan- 
 
 ^{^ -M 
 
 U, '''""' 
 
 |1& niing 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 4p -nien 
 
 
 (H cb'ing 
 
 ili cbe 
 
 l!^, t'iao, 
 
 'ft^ nien 
 
 ^^ -*' 
 
 Sli sui- 
 
 ^ -ch'u 
 
 is ^-^ 
 
 M yu 
 
 ^: -^i^i"'- 
 
 [lijF s^"''- 
 
 M -jan 
 
 ^A tie»- 
 
 jjjij} f/R7l 
 
 ^■» pu 
 
 5i-'' = 
 
 '[^ -'Iiou- 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 ^^ -rh. 
 
 ^ tzu 
 
 ?1 p'o 
 
 i wu 
 
 31, -'^■■1^' 
 
 i@ ko 
 
 322. 
 
 M y""s- 
 
 i|^ k'uai." 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ ch'a- 
 
 1^ tsui 
 
 ;^ pen- 
 
 f# -^^ 
 
 * » * 
 
 — - i 
 
 ^ Pu- 
 
 ^ tsun 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^> p^i 
 
 821. 
 
 Mi kua 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 I^^. -''' 
 
 [" Sbang 
 
 , .A cb'ia- 
 
 M na 
 
 M.. f^'"ff' 
 
 5a -1- 
 
 i^r^ na- 
 
 ^ Ti 
 
 'g', -*^'"=' 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 -p sbih 
 
 6t -ti 
 
 na -^° 
 
 ^ tsui 
 
 "S^ p'a 
 
 ^ t'ion 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 # "'■"" 
 
 -g- po- 
 
 ^ tsun 
 
 ^ y« 
 
 -^ Hsien- 
 
 — . i 
 
 ^^ -chia 
 
 ^ -hsing 
 
 6^ -^' 
 
 A .i^" 
 
 Jttl -sbeng 
 
 !■» bsia 
 
 ^ -l,u- 
 
 -jP^ -men 
 
 ;^ cbe- 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 la kei 
 
 M. yii; 
 
 |£ -u.h 
 
 fM li- 
 
 |g -ko 
 
 ^ -cbien 
 
 ^ ^« 
 
 JE fi^'ng 
 
 in. '™^"' 
 
 TiS f-ou 
 
 -^ m:°«- 
 
 •fl^ 'hui 
 tf 
 
 ifjr t- 
 
 -tli yei^ 
 
 il m^ 
 
 4 y«i' 
 
 £. -•■' 
 
 m p- 
 
 ^ -'^'-^^ 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 W >•" 
 
 i^ '"'■ 
 
 FJl Cbung 
 
 fiijj «'"'« 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 A. <='' 
 
 ^ P» 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 [gH Kiio- 
 
 -^ tzii 
 
 ^5 "^ 
 
 M y" 
 
 ^^ pa' 
 
 :g she'- 
 
 A J^" 
 
 ^ 'hai 
 
 ^ cbd 
 
 ■t^ yei' 
 
 ^ T'iea 
 
 ^. -mo 
 
 'j^ tung- 
 
 Y Shang 
 
 IJ 'hua 
 
 ^^ pu 
 
 ilil Ti 
 
 i- 
 
 n -'^ 
 
 f. Ti 
 
 3iV s'auo, 
 
 ^. °'^'"g; 
 
 n Y«'' 
 
 /^ -ting 
 
 6«5 -'' 
 
 \^ J'^ng 
 
 ^ Tien 
 
 ii Che- 

 
 
 
 ^ ||| T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'IEN. 
 
 
 
 313-319. 
 
 ^i yiicli 
 
 na 
 
 -ko 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 -feng 
 
 m 
 
 cliiian 
 
 ± 
 
 -sliaiig 
 
 -1-' sliih 
 
 M 
 
 wa"- 
 
 /£ t'ng 
 
 fi^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 *a 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 m 
 
 t'uan- 
 
 ^E ''''' 
 
 51 
 
 -'ih 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 B^ 
 
 sliili- 
 
 '^^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 w 
 
 -t'uan 
 
 51. -"^''' 
 
 r^j 
 
 -ti 
 
 JE ^^"s 
 
 # 
 
 -'liou 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 ff^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^JC ^0 
 
 iiii 
 
 ti- 
 
 I Y chill 
 
 51. 
 
 -urh, 
 
 M. 
 
 kao. 
 
 E 
 
 lau*- 
 
 fjf, -ti 
 
 :^ 
 
 -fa"«- 
 
 7. -iia«; 
 
 m 
 
 sliih 
 
 
 315. 
 
 #. 
 
 cliuan, 
 
 /:f/} ch'uan 
 
 5? 
 
 -•rh, 
 
 :ffi pa 
 
 M 
 
 ch'eu- 
 
 ibi 
 
 ch6- 
 
 i^ 
 
 me 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^M 
 
 p'eng 
 
 # ko 
 
 + 
 
 -t'u 
 
 ;i 
 
 -1110 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 :A Ta 
 
 # 
 
 -cho 
 
 f£f ch'u 
 
 i^ 
 
 che 
 
 m 
 
 chi 
 
 /^ 
 
 tiug 
 
 ;^ Chiang- 
 
 H^ 
 
 kua 
 
 M ^"^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 m 
 
 chun 
 
 P k'ou 
 
 m 
 
 tao 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ??• 
 
 -ti; 
 
 iX'i 
 
 -ti 
 
 (A 
 
 -ti. 
 
 ^ sliou 
 
 Li] 
 
 shan 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ill 
 
 che 
 
 -k 
 
 ta 
 
 wt 
 
 chiu 
 
 M,, feigj 
 
 ± 
 
 -sliang 
 
 i\^ -'' 
 
 # 
 
 'hui- 
 
 M.. 
 
 feng, 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 # teng 
 
 :|5^+ 
 
 tang 
 
 ^ 'hui- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tzu 
 
 m 
 
 kua- 
 
 iM 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ -liao 
 
 fE] 
 
 'hui- 
 
 ±. -t'u, 
 
 u 
 
 tou 
 
 % 
 
 ■ te 
 
 ¥ 
 
 yaiig- 
 
 -|- sliih 
 
 .^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 ^ ta- 
 
 il 
 
 me 
 
 n 
 
 she-*- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chiao 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ;jf -sao 
 
 w 
 
 yu 
 
 5£ 
 
 -'rh 
 
 JH. 
 
 feng; 
 
 ^ pan 
 
 im 
 
 'bui- 
 
 ii ta- 
 
 I' 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 m 
 
 'hen 
 
 ^ 
 
 fang- 
 
 ^ yiieh ; 
 
 a. 
 
 feng; 
 
 If -sao 
 
 iH" 
 
 chen 
 
 pj 
 
 k'o 
 
 m 
 
 -fu 
 
 ^y 'hao 
 
 ^^ 
 
 chi-^- 
 
 £S pa. 
 
 P] 
 
 k'o 
 
 'S' 
 
 p'a; 
 
 ¥ 
 
 yang 
 
 ^ yung- 
 
 51 
 
 -'rh 
 
 318. 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 is. 
 
 che 
 
 m 
 
 chi- 
 
 ^^ -^ 
 
 m 
 
 tsui 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 H 
 
 feng 
 
 5j|l 
 
 chen 
 
 ^, 
 
 -chiao. 
 
 ^^ p'an- 
 
 ± 
 
 ta, 
 
 P^ tso 
 
 ^:. 
 
 ting, 
 
 f- 
 
 -tzu 
 
 f^ 
 
 chuan 
 
 # -'^ 
 
 pX 
 
 cli'ui 
 
 51 -"'"^ 
 
 •ii> 
 
 sha- 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu 
 
 * 
 
 -cho 
 
 ^j5 na 
 
 # 
 
 -t6 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 + 
 
 -t'u 
 
 M 
 
 na- 
 
 # 
 
 wang- 
 
 — . i 
 
 A 
 
 jen 
 
 ill «1>»1 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu 
 
 Jg 
 
 -mo 
 
 ± 
 
 -shang 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 m 
 
 tao- 
 
 M ■''■" 
 
 m 
 
 n^ng 
 
 m 
 
 hsiang 
 
 ^ 
 
 chang 
 
 M ^^"= 
 
 ^ 
 
 cli'ou 
 
 m f^"^- 
 
 i^t 
 
 mi 
 
 7. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 ti^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 2p p'iiig 
 
 pf 
 
 ych 
 
 51 -'^^ 
 
 aa. 
 
 yen. 
 
 ± 
 
 kuang- 
 
 M 
 
 i- 
 
 iPc '-''"S 
 
 M 
 
 cli'i 
 
 ^, tsou, 
 
 
 317. 
 
 M 
 
 -ching 
 
 .s. 
 
 -szu. 
 
 IP. c'"nS, 
 
 ti^ 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 
 ch'uang- 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 
 314. 
 
 gl <='»" 
 
 ^ 
 
 mai- 
 
 y -liao 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'hu 
 
 M. 
 
 feng 
 
 — ■ 
 
 i 
 
 it '•'"'' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -pu- 
 
 [ j [ shan- 
 
 li^ 
 
 chih 
 
 ^ 
 
 p'ing- 
 
 W 
 
 chen 
 
 J=L sliih 
 
 r^i 
 
 -k'ai 
 
 ■^ 'huai 
 
 51 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'ho 
 
 Ik 
 
 hsiian 
 
 M. ^^"s 
 
 # 
 
 pu 
 
 a -l'> 
 
 15 
 
 tou 
 
 7. 
 
 -liao. 
 
 M. 
 
 feng. 
 
 .a '^■'' 
 
 51. 
 
 -urh. 
 
 5^ lien- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pu 
 
 
 316. 
 
 ^ 
 
 pa 
 
 y^ -liao! 
 
 
 319. 
 
 :|^ kuai 
 
 fi 
 
 tung 
 
 IE 
 
 cheug 
 
 m 
 
 ch'en- 
 
 iJA- sliou- 
 
 IE 
 
 clieng 
 
 ^^ chi 
 
 7. 
 
 -liao. 
 
 m 
 
 kua- 
 
 ± 
 
 -t'u 
 
 
 
 
 * Ian or /«nn. f 
 
 abbreviated form of 
 
 i>-^. 
 f&' 
 
 

 
 307-313. 
 
 ^ ^Jl T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 ji^ clie- 
 
 Ry^ -mo 
 
 []4p slirh 
 
 B^ neng 
 
 313. 
 
 -^ yaiig- 
 'ra -chiai 
 
 ofr cliiu 
 
 ia, shih 
 
 ^5 »»- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ ts'ung 
 
 "T^ -lisJa 
 
 ^ -cli'i 
 
 fj^ wang- 
 
 le. -'■■'"' 
 |j}^ lisich 
 
 ^ li»ioh 
 
 ^. -"^^ 
 ^ teiig 
 
 M. '■'"« 
 
 "T -liao 
 ST tsai 
 
 .=fc tSOQ 
 
 312. 
 f^ ni 
 
 ^^ k'an 
 
 if cl,e 
 
 m -^'' 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 ^ h&iian 
 
 
 1 
 
 M.. ^«"g'- 
 
 i4i. 
 
 cheu, 
 
 -^ »l*ui 
 
 tl 
 
 man 
 
 ?I li- 
 
 
 i 
 
 a| -t'oa 
 
 i^.. 
 
 cben, 
 
 X y" 
 
 # 
 
 t'ing 
 
 ffJ cliiao 
 
 # 
 
 'hui 
 
 +^ hsiian 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tzu 
 
 ^. ""' 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 kua 
 
 clieii ; 
 
 [i^ clien 
 
 i)c pi 
 
 [5^ clien 
 
 5E. -"■■'' 
 
 t^ tou 
 
 ^ slab 
 
 j^ hsiang- 
 
 5JI -sung 
 
 I'lA -ti. 
 
 311. 
 
 J£i 
 
 clie- 
 
 :f(i pel 
 
 5lJ tao 
 
 M "^ 
 
 ^a nan 
 
 ^ 'liou- 
 
 ~aS -t'ou, 
 
 1 1 [ shan 
 
 ]|^ ch'ien- 
 
 ^ -t'ou, 
 
 M '"* 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^& sliib 
 
 is 1^° 
 
 If- Pei 
 
 ±llj ti- 
 
 3^ -L-- 
 
 l^ff -ti 
 
 j|/l'^ ch'uan, 
 
 ^1i tou 
 
 -^ '!iui 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 5^ p'eug 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^ p-ao 
 ill slmn- 
 
 310. 
 ^' ch'un 
 
 ^p^ bsia 
 
 JZ^ -t'ien, 
 
 ^^ nan 
 
 •^ tang 
 ^ li"S 
 
 It^ -*' 
 
 g4p sliilr- 
 
 ■i& -'Iiou 
 
 52.. ■"■''' 
 
 ^ Kuang 
 
 ^ Tung 
 
 ^ tso 
 
 '/^ 'l.ai- 
 
 ^f|j -cb'uan 
 
 jiffi cliin 
 
 ^& sliili 
 
 X y" 
 
 ^ t^ 
 
 ^ -p"- 
 
 # -cliao 
 
 jljl shun 
 
 ^» hsiang 
 
 it chg 
 
 3^ tsung 
 
 -^ p'ang- 
 
 JE. ^^"S' 
 
 ■(;J/t ch'uan 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 i;^ -ch'iang 
 
 ;^. tsou; 
 
 •^ tse''8- 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 R^ ne.>g- 
 
 f^ -kou 
 2p: p'ing 
 
 wen 
 
 Big. "i- 
 
 309. 
 1^ kna 
 
 ptj hsi- 
 
 :ft: -p« 
 
 J2L -tzu, 
 
 E^ y" 
 
 ^- Sheng 
 ^^ wang 
 v^ Uhiartor 
 
 wang- 
 ang 
 
 ^p wai- 
 2JI -t'ou 
 
 fl'J -ti 
 
 "Sir .1 
 
 •^^ sba 
 
 M "■■» 
 jfl! y'"g 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 -^ ta 
 
 M,. f^"g' 
 
 ^ tsou 
 ll; tao 
 
 5a -'' 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 fjij. chiao 
 
 JE feng 
 
 Ti ting. 
 
 ft. -cliu, 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 11 neng 
 
 # pu 
 
 BlS„ "'• 
 
 308. 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 'f^ kuii 
 
 if clie- 
 
 fg -ko 
 
 f^ ch'uan 
 
 ^E wai 
 
 ^3 -cho 
 
 j§ nio? 
 
 Si s"i 
 
 :Hf^ pu
 
 ^ ^^ T'lENLEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 301-307. 
 
 5a -'-^ 
 
 ^Ij tao- 
 
 ^ fcni- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 
 -& sliih 
 
 >m 
 
 pie 
 
 ?22 
 
 6^ -'' 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 ^ -urb, 
 
 :fa pa 
 
 -jfe -chill 
 
 j|g t'ing 
 
 JZ- -tzil 
 
 ^£ nuiig 
 
 # -te 
 
 [Ml t'uan- 
 
 jiBJ t'uan- 
 
 jH^ -cliuan 
 
 I . sliili- 
 
 ^k sLou 
 
 OT tsui. 
 
 307. 
 -^ Ch'ang 
 
 ^X ch'iang- 
 
 ;^, tsou, 
 
 !^ p» 
 
 ^ cliih- 
 
 ^ ..tao 
 
 M chi 
 
 H ts'ai 
 
 ^ij tao- 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 ni. 
 
 30G. 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 -^ sbih 
 
 ^ ts'ung- 
 
 ^ tung 
 
 ^ °«an 
 
 I' -sbaiig 
 
 ^, ch'i, 
 
 SI 1^"^ 
 
 ^ij tao 
 
 pEj Lsi 
 
 ULI 
 
 r -sliang 
 
 X y" 
 
 ^ wang- 
 
 ;^ tung 
 
 jjn szii 
 
 y" 
 
 BS -t'ou 
 
 jH clie 
 
 -& sliili 
 
 '(■^ tso 
 
 ^1 sliih 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 -l.su 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 -0 - 
 
 -yu. 
 
 
 305. 
 
 g tza- 
 
 ^ -ts'ung 
 
 m ^'-- 
 
 j^n* cli'uan 
 &^ -^' 
 
 5£ -'^^' 
 
 A clii". 
 "7 
 
 la -b 
 
 -ko, 
 mei 
 
 yu 
 ;^ -clio 
 
 |o -kuo 
 itj- 'bao 
 JH, feng; 
 li tsung 
 -@L sliib 
 
 fl4- cbiao- 
 
 -f^ -tso 
 
 )^ ying- 
 
 P -mien 
 
 f|iL cbiao 
 
 TM ting- 
 
 B^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ 'liuo- 
 
 l^ft cb'uan 
 
 Si s"' 
 
 .@- shib 
 
 ^^ "cl.0 
 
 ii 'bai* 
 pf k'o- 
 
 [^ cbih 
 ^ tsou 
 
 p^, =^- 
 
 304. 
 ^g u + 
 
 H kt-ng 
 
 ^ tsao 
 
 ^ lien 
 
 ^ yell 
 
 fX bsing 
 AJ^ cb'uan 
 
 ft jo 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 ^ yao- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 
 -^ .sbib 
 
 -W y" 
 
 cbe- 
 
 7S. 
 
 -mo 
 
 [iL^ cbea 
 
 ?)^ sbuang- 
 
 '[^ -k'uai 
 
 [J^ -ti 
 
 ^ fe"^- 
 
 hT san 
 
 ■^- sbu- 
 
 A j^° 
 
 Pf k'o 
 
 ^, tse--^- 
 
 -mo 
 ^ sbou 
 
 PJS 
 
 ni. 
 
 303. 
 
 M. feng 
 
 ^ ts'uug 
 
 '^ nan 
 
 A •i^'^ 
 
 ;^ vrang 
 
 cfa| nan 
 
 ^R na- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 5a -■'■•'. 
 
 [■» hsia 
 i^ -kuo 
 
 J^ cb'ang 
 /!■» bsiao 
 
 fifo y" 
 5£. -"'•''> 
 
 r^ sui- 
 
 ^ -cho 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 |A tie"- 
 
 5a -'^'^ 
 5a -^ 
 
 [^ sou- 
 |ffl sou- 
 
 ^ yao 
 ^B ch'uaa 
 
 ^ cbia 
 
 ^^ -sbang, 
 4^ ts'ai 
 /^ chin- 
 
 fl -*^- 
 
 PjS. °=- 
 
 302. 
 
 na -ko 
 
 ^ ya"'- 
 
 5a -i^ 
 
 * 'hai may be read 'han or 'Ituan. f or ir!i.
 
 29S-301. 
 
 TIEN -LEI, CATEGORY OF TIE^. 
 
 '1^ -k'uai 
 ^ ching 
 
 PJS. ni; 
 
 P4 '1.0 
 
 ^fi wan 
 
 ^J< Ping- 
 
 ^T clian 
 
 ^j^ chieh- 
 
 ^ -cliieli 
 
 ^^ slm- 
 
 P cliih 
 
 fg p'a 
 
 j^ shou 
 
 ii chc- 
 
 yin- 
 -'lian 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^t 
 
 5t! 
 
 1^ i 
 
 P'ng> 
 cliiu 
 sLili 
 wa- 
 
 ou- 
 
 fRJ P" 
 
 ^P ch'uang 
 
 ^ tao- 
 
 ^. -'■• 
 
 301. 
 
 ^ cli'iu- 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 PH liaiig 
 
 ^ t'ieu 
 
 ^{J -ti 
 
 m kuiig- 
 
 ^jj k'ai- 
 
 ^ slui 
 
 iS t'ung 
 
 -ti. 
 
 300. 
 
 liu 
 
 ^ ylieh 
 
 EU 
 
 1 
 
 shu- 
 
 nan- 
 tang 
 
 ua 
 ao 
 
 Hr^ shili- 
 
 ^ -'Lou 
 
 fij? -iirli, 
 
 7 -li 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^ji toil 
 
 ;^ sliih 
 
 fl jo 
 
 ^>1l bsiano- 
 
 ^ chao 
 
 'fia ko 
 
 u 
 
 lianjr- 
 
 ^, -t'ion, 
 
 ^ sliou 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 •:)i5 "- 
 
 Ifs ts'ai 
 
 IS nian- 
 
 J'S man- 
 
 1 k'ai 
 
 "7 -liao 
 
 Jj| tung 
 
 PA ni. 
 
 299. 
 . ui-li 
 
 — san 
 
 ^ yiioli 
 
 ;jt)^ t'ao- 
 
 :;^ lisiug- 
 
 ^^ niia 
 
 [^!j kang 
 
 p^ ku- 
 
 % -tu 
 
 ^1 -"rli, 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 # -cbo 
 
 Iw nan 
 
 M, feng 
 
 — ' i 
 
 p^ cli'iii, 
 
 ;|i^ chill 
 
 j(^ p" 
 
 )M kno 
 
 % liao 
 
 ||;^ tung 
 
 J -liao 
 
 %. -'■■>'' 
 
 ^J sbih- 
 
 ^ -tsai 
 
 5K shuang- 
 
 '1^ -k'uai 
 
 ;^ -chih 
 
 298. 
 
 At 
 
 -<5* tung- 
 
 ]^ -t'ien 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 '^ tan 
 
 M 'ho- 
 
 7]C slmi 
 
 ^ tung 
 
 i?K, ping; 
 
 51 lien 
 
 illl ti 
 
 % tou 
 
 plL cliiao 
 
 ^g sliuang" 
 
 ^g. hsiiek 
 
 % tung- 
 
 /t -clui 
 
 y, -liao; 
 
 ^ij tao 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^Si ch'un- 
 
 % 
 
 A 
 
 m 
 1 
 
 T 
 
 6h 
 
 U 
 
 Ml 
 
 ^ 
 
 M. 
 
 
 o 
 
 t'iu"- 
 
 -■■■!■, 
 
 jen 
 
 tao 
 
 -liao 
 
 Tvau- 
 
 -pan- 
 
 -slia"*- 
 
 -•rh, 
 
 t'o 
 
 -liao 
 
 i- 
 
 -sliang, 
 
 tsai 
 
 yiian- 
 
 -tzii 
 
 -li 
 
 tso 
 
 -clio 
 
 liang- 
 
 -k'uai, 
 
 'bu- 
 
 -jan 
 
 cbiao 
 
 -cbo 
 
 yi 
 
 i 
 
 cben 
 
 wei 
 
 feng, 
 
 cb'ui 
 
 tao 
 
 slien 
 
 -sbang ; 
 
 k'an 
 
 na- 
 
 -ko 
 
 iij clui 
 
 ifi5' 'k"a 
 
 J^lo. 
 
 29G. 
 5c cliiao- 
 
 5|S -ch'un 
 
 ^ -chih 
 
 i(^ 'hou. 
 
 11 fa- 
 
 X y" 
 
 t# y""- 
 
 i5 
 
 -tung 
 
 cb'ino 
 
 ^^ cbib 
 
 It '' 
 ^, yeb; 
 ^ k'an 
 
 *K tou 
 
 fBj 
 
 sbib 
 kao- 
 -hsiug 
 -ti. 
 
 207. 
 
 JO
 
 
 
 ^ M '^'JE^I'^^' CATEGORY OF T'1E^'. 
 
 290-295. 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 *^ 
 
 cluio- 
 
 m 
 
 kua 
 
 la 
 
 pa 
 
 fl^ fei 
 
 1^ -yii 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 :i^ 
 
 -l>u- 
 
 m 
 
 tao 
 
 s 
 
 hsuch 
 
 ^ k'ung 
 
 ^i} -ti 
 
 Tf^. -'•' 
 
 * 
 
 -cliao 
 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 kua- 
 
 6^. -*'' 
 
 ^ t'ie»- 
 
 ^ ku. 
 
 m 
 
 t'a 
 
 m 
 
 ko 
 
 1^ 
 
 -k'ai 
 
 A j^" 
 
 5i. -•«' 
 
 it!: -t^'a 
 
 ^</ 
 
 -ti 
 
 m 
 
 wo- 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 Wt '^'''" 
 
 ^g ch'a^ 
 
 IH^ kiia 
 
 M 
 
 sliih- 
 
 a 
 
 -feiig 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 i^ shuo 
 
 ^^ pu- 
 
 fi^ -^■ 
 
 m 
 
 -shott 
 
 ti<j 
 
 -ti 
 
 m 
 
 chiao- 
 
 ife sha» 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 JE. '■^'"S' 
 
 31 
 
 -urli; 
 
 iih 
 
 ti- 
 
 m 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 A *- 
 
 5£ urh- 
 
 ^iS tou 
 
 m 
 
 sliui 
 
 ij 
 
 -fa"^- 
 
 ii> 
 
 sha- 
 
 M -'-^"s 
 
 It^ -ti 
 
 It ^''"'> 
 
 ^ 
 
 cliih- 
 
 %. 
 
 -•rh, 
 
 ± 
 
 -t'u 
 
 ;(§ yang 
 
 A. .'«"' 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tao 
 
 M 
 
 chii- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -lai, 
 
 ^S dren ; 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 3fj3 so 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 ;tB 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 m 
 
 pien- 
 
 $n ju- 
 
 ^ I'U 
 
 M, ^^"° 
 
 iH) 
 
 na- 
 
 US 
 
 ko 
 
 ^> 
 
 -pu- 
 
 ^ -kuo 
 
 -f k'on 
 
 •^ ling- 
 
 tl 
 
 -ko 
 
 ^J^ 
 
 h siao 
 
 iW 
 
 -chiiig 
 
 -I- shih- 
 
 K" sliang 
 
 ?!. -li"g' 
 
 H 
 
 feng 
 
 '& 
 
 sha- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^ -fen 
 
 fij, chieh, 
 
 "t^ yeh 
 
 i*^ 
 
 yii.. 
 
 + 
 
 -t'u 
 
 11 
 
 Ian 
 
 ^IJ !■- 
 
 ^ niai- 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ 
 
 -cLu 
 
 i# 
 
 tui 
 
 ^. 
 
 fei, 
 
 ^ -'bai, 
 
 W -'nai 
 
 ^ sl,ih 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 % 
 
 -urh 
 
 ^ 
 
 mi 
 
 M '=^'''' 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 >^ leng 
 
 •(!> 
 
 slia- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -lai. 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 ={> shuo 
 
 ^^ -j^° 
 
 yf* r"- 
 
 ± 
 
 -t'u 
 
 A 
 
 jeu 
 
 BR 
 
 yen- 
 
 ^ ^'^^ 
 
 1^ ehiu 
 
 pf k'o 
 
 i# 
 
 tui 
 
 ^ 
 
 chiu 
 
 m 
 
 -ehiiig 
 
 ;gj; sha- 
 
 /j^'» shao 
 
 "l" -tang 
 
 ^ 
 
 -11 rh 
 
 pJl 
 
 shuo 
 
 m 
 
 li- 
 
 ;^ tsou- 
 
 "7 -liao. 
 
 &^ -'■ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 "liv^ 
 
 aha 
 
 sM 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 ;g shih- 
 
 291. 
 
 E '- 
 
 IS 
 
 ti- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tzu 
 
 m 
 
 'hen 
 
 &tf. ■^•- 
 
 ± fu 
 
 ra. -fi^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 -haia, 
 
 R4 
 
 cliiao 
 
 'M-. 
 
 t'eng. 
 
 29 ?. 
 
 ^ hsuan 
 
 ^ 'liuo- 
 
 ii 
 
 niai- 
 
 H 
 
 feng 
 
 
 293. 
 
 •j^' sha- 
 
 ijf, -ti 
 
 ;^ -sllih 
 
 # 
 
 -cho 
 
 m 
 
 }'"- 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 db "*'" 
 
 Jtii ti- 
 
 H^. ■'=''"°. 
 
 PJS. 
 
 ni. 
 
 it 
 
 -chu 
 
 
 i 
 
 Mk ti 
 
 ■^ -fa"^- .-, 
 
 p^ cli'iii- 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 295. 
 tuug- 
 
 T, 
 
 -liao. 
 294. 
 
 JE> 
 
 chen 
 feag. 
 
 r -sliang 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 fi 
 
 t'a 
 
 «a 
 
 pa 
 
 Y^ t&'un- 
 
 M ^^"g 
 
 jM 'Imn 
 
 ^v 
 
 4ian 
 
 »4 
 
 chiao 
 
 # 
 
 ko 
 
 ~n -hsia 
 
 &^ -^^ 
 
 ^ slien 
 
 ^. 
 
 eh'i, 
 
 m 
 
 tsei 
 
 ki 
 
 ch'u 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 .iii' 
 
 j^ lan- 
 
 ir> 
 
 tou 
 
 w 
 
 'hai- 
 
 IE 
 
 -urh 
 
 ^j hsiiehr 
 
 •f-. -'-' 
 
 ^1, -chan, 
 
 1^ 
 
 shih 
 
 ^b 
 
 -szu 
 
 6<J 
 
 -ti 
 
 W4 chiao 
 
 [li 1^- 
 
 Jrl: Pij 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 if 
 
 fu. 
 
 M na- 
 
 f# -te 
 
 555 "=* 
 
 :|(i 
 
 pei 
 
 ^ 
 
 chi 
 
 ■i>. 
 
 sha, 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 J@ ch'en- 
 
 — i 
 
 m 
 
 ]iie°- 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 15 
 
 tou 
 
 M. f^"s 
 
 dh '^'" 
 
 
 
 
 
 «0l 
 
 elio. 
 
 

 
 232-290. 
 
 ^ ^^ T-IEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEX. 
 
 
 
 |3 * chih 
 
 tr lising- 
 
 ^, shih 
 
 '\^ P'a 
 
 i^ ti 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 fi wang. 
 
 f^W^ -di'uan, 
 
 fl* ch'ing 
 
 fjl -ti- 
 
 p -shang 
 
 m 
 
 t'ao- 
 
 ~J\ -lieia 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 ^ t'icu 
 
 28G. 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 
 'hiia 
 
 ^, tiao; 
 
 yf% -pu- 
 
 A ^'-^ 
 
 [^ lisi- 
 
 J^ ch'eii- 
 
 7t<. 
 
 ahui. 
 
 S^ -t'ou 
 
 ff -to 
 ^ sluh 
 
 ji'- 
 n^ -t'ou 
 
 p -sliang 
 
 -«i^:| t'uan- 
 
 M. 
 
 283. 
 Feng 
 
 — • i- 
 
 2E p'ing 
 
 I^xf. -''' 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 ifil t'uan 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ -ting 
 
 JE f^ug 
 
 fJ-^ chiao 
 
 7 -liao 
 
 n^ -ti 
 
 m 
 
 yang 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 ^ chiug 
 
 ^ che 
 
 — i 
 
 (flh chuan 
 
 M 
 
 ch'i 
 
 m^ kua- 
 
 M. i«"s; 
 
 il^ ku 
 
 5^ chen 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 11 
 
 fa 
 
 M. -^^"s 
 
 1^ chih 
 
 M. f^"g- 
 
 ± ta 
 
 4i pan 
 
 ai 
 
 ch'u 
 
 B^. ni. 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^5 -ch'i 
 
 M. ^^"="' 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 290. 
 
 . . i 
 
 ^ che- 
 
 i^ kua- 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 &^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ®| kua- 
 
 ^ k'ual 
 
 % ■'' 
 
 # -^^ 
 
 ik '^"^ 
 
 e^ 
 
 ch'ui 
 
 M. -f^"s 
 
 Ig' yua 
 
 ^ t'ieii 
 
 ^ ch'en- 
 
 d^. -ti> 
 
 If 
 
 -tung 
 
 i^ chien 
 
 ^^, -ts'ai, 
 
 •^ -'hun 
 
 ± -t'u 
 
 Pij. chiao 
 
 ^ 
 
 wan 
 
 4^ rau, 
 
 R^ chan- 
 
 illl ti 
 
 ?t§ fei 
 
 S ''"•' 
 
 #/, 
 
 wu, 
 
 "p lisia- 
 
 UPv -yen 
 
 Bg- -"^an 
 
 ^ k'ung, 
 
 J^ hsuan 
 
 ^ 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 Pi -y" 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 &^. -'■' 
 
 ;jfj|* hsieii 
 
 M.. f«^"g- 
 
 f^ 
 
 neiifj 
 
 ■&■ ch'iian 
 
 -f" kung- 
 
 HR yen- 
 
 ff ■'' 
 
 285. 
 
 fl 
 
 fa- 
 
 ^, ^^'^' 
 
 ^ -fu 
 
 ffii'lt -ch'ou 
 
 j^ fang 
 
 S 'hei- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -sheng ; 
 
 it ^''^ 
 
 ^_ -urh, 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 I' -shang 
 
 L -lisia 
 
 ^ 
 
 yeh 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ ^l""* 
 
 g| chiu 
 
 t\^ -'' 
 
 M "^^ 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 _^ cblDg 
 
 -^ yao 
 
 -^ yao 
 
 % -=» 
 
 [1^ clien 
 
 ii: 
 
 sliih 
 
 m -" 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 ^ ch'i- 
 
 ill shan- 
 
 ::A: ta 
 
 h 
 
 -shang 
 
 ^ mai- 
 
 It -feng 
 
 M, -feng 
 
 ^tB -hsiang, 
 
 E3l 
 
 M.. ^^"g' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pu 
 
 W -niai 
 
 "T liao. 
 
 7.10 = 
 
 :jfi pa 
 
 1^ kua- 
 
 pj 
 
 k'o 
 
 A i^° 
 
 289. 
 
 ^ 'huo 
 
 m '*'" 
 
 n -^' 
 
 ii 
 
 ch'Lieh 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 f^ Di 
 
 -^ -shih 
 
 ;^ yao- 
 
 M fang 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 P k'ou- 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 pjl shuo 
 
 k -'' 
 
 1* -sliang 
 
 i^. 
 
 a. 
 
 ^ -t'ou 
 
 if -y" 
 
 ^'^ shao 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 
 6^ -ti 
 ^ wa 
 
 .^. 
 
 284. 
 'hu 
 
 ^, -urh; 
 
 5£ -^ 
 
 M ^^°s 
 
 15 ton 
 
 [ 1 [ shan- 
 
 
 -jan 
 
 yin- 
 
 IL ^«" 
 
 T.^o- 
 
 +;r *^^^ 
 
 #. I'siang; 
 
 4 i t \ 
 
 i 
 
 n -• 
 
 ■fiii I""'' 
 
 288. 
 
 T. -'"^" 
 
 ^ t'ing 
 
 ii 
 
 chen 
 
 ^ kua- 
 
 m ^''-^ 
 
 yr chiaug 
 
 287. 
 
 4d -<=t° 
 
 M. 
 
 feng, 
 
 M. -^^Dg 
 
 ^P yeh 
 
 '/^ 'hai 
 
 Si ^"i- 
 
 i^ k'uai 
 
 m 
 
 kua 
 
 -T^ heia- 
 
 :7L -tzu 
 
 n -li 
 
 B -J^" 
 
 ^* 'liai- 
 
 n 
 
 -fe 
 
 
 
 • one teacher n 
 
 rites [g^ c/iii. 
 
 

 
 ^ m VIEX-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 Ill-Wi. 
 
 T. -''-lo- 
 
 2S2. 
 
 ^^ cli'uu 
 
 ^ t'icn 
 
 ""*■ urh 
 
 — san 
 
 ?M. -li, 
 
 ^ CLing- 
 
 ^ -Che 
 
 #. 'hou, 
 
 Mi «^^''^ 
 
 {" sliang- 
 
 % -urh 
 
 ^) 
 
 tou 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 TF Cheng 
 
 ^^ shih 
 
 B£ sl)eDg- 
 
 g± shih 
 •^ -'hou 
 
 [JiL chiao 
 
 PM. a; 
 
 '^ chii 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 gf^ shuo 
 
 g^ hsiich , 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 *yi mei 
 
 "T liao. 
 
 2S1. 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 M -mo 
 
 ix ^^ 
 
 {fy -ti 
 
 ^^ hsiieh, 
 
 ^ lao 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 Pj^ sliai 
 
 J -liao 
 
 p}f liang 
 
 ^. -t'ien, 
 
 Mi "^'"^ 
 
 ^i tou 
 
 ^ hsiao 
 
 ^ kan- 
 
 ^ -kan 
 
 J^ ehing- 
 
 ]^ -chi"«- 
 
 ^ -rh 
 
 iC t'ai- 
 
 ^, -yang, 
 
 X y 
 
 v5 iiiei 
 
 @ she°- 
 
 j^ -mo 
 
 # ko 
 
 ;^ ch'u 
 
 'f^ ts'un 
 
 &>f -ti 
 
 ^^ bsUeh, 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 1^ 'hui 
 
 Hi's sliai- 
 
 ^ -'hua 
 
 T, -^'''°-- 
 
 JPJ nien- 
 
 ^ wei 
 
 ^v pi- 
 
 ^ -hsu 
 
 ^ li- 
 
 •^ -'hui 
 
 jG che 
 
 ^il^ hsiieh 
 
 ^. 'tua, 
 
 ^ 'l-ai 
 
 in °=^- 
 
 m -^° 
 
 ^? hsiieh 
 
 ii t'ie°- 
 
 ^^ shuan- 
 
 ^. -«='■"' 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 Y -shang 
 
 7^ -cho 
 
 ^, t'^ou, 
 
 ^ y=^° 
 
 ^3 -clio 
 
 PH liang 
 
 -^ chih 
 
 |{f p'ang 
 
 ^, -tzu, 
 
 # -t« 
 
 jvt. 'hao 
 
 '^ k'uai 
 
 I^^. -''^ 
 
 /|W -inea 
 
 M "^- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ p'ao 
 
 ^JC -P'°g 
 
 ;^ -chih 
 
 fjij. chiao 
 
 ^C Ping- 
 
 J^ hsieh. 
 
 280. 
 
 -^ chi"- 
 
 |£ --rh 
 
 jg ko 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 279. 
 
 ^ ching 
 
 n -^' 
 
 ^ij tao 
 
 ^ tung 
 
 ^. -t'ien, 
 
 ;^ Chi- 
 
 "T^ -hsia 
 
 A j^" 
 
 ^ -t'ou, 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 t'J<. ping 
 
 ^fe ch'ai- 
 
 ^ -shih 
 
 H. shih 
 
 ^ ynng 
 
 nr» -hsia 
 
 ^^ hsiang 
 
 ^p -cho 
 
 SM] kaug. 
 
 %, t'iao, 
 
 ^S ch'uan 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 Jj^ chiao 
 
 h shang- 
 
 ^ -t'ou, 
 
 j^ yung 
 
 h 
 
 -shang 
 
 n- 
 
 fu» 
 
 m 
 
 tung 
 
 n^. 
 
 lo. 
 
 
 278. 
 
 ^± 
 
 wang- 
 
 # 
 
 -wang 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'un- 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 T 
 
 heia- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -hsiieh 
 
 ]>X 
 
 -i 
 
 #. 
 
 -'hou, 
 
 pT 
 
 k'o 
 
 _& shih 
 ilb hsieh- 
 
 |i t'ie°- 
 
 so- 
 
 ± 
 
 -1 
 hsiieh 
 inie°- 
 -'rh 
 
 )k P'' 
 
 sheng- 
 
 |£^ -shang, 
 
 ^ pao- 
 
 fi| Pao- 
 
 &0 -^■ 
 
 T 
 
 tung 
 
 -liao 
 
 I 
 
 ^ ts'eng 
 
 ^|C ping 
 DB ui. 
 
 •/a also/oa
 
 272-277. 
 
 ^ M T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF TIEN. 
 
 % -h 
 
 277. 
 
 # ko 
 
 ^ ch'u 
 
 5?^ -urh 
 
 ffy -ti 
 
 ^ Chi 
 
 !gi, Iisiieli, 
 
 W^* chiao 
 
 :;^ t'ai- 
 
 BS shai- 
 
 /fli 'luia 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ mie"- 
 
 Jh -sbang 
 
 ^ -ti 
 
 ^ ts'e"»- 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 . i 
 
 )^, leng 
 
 ■fi* ch'ung- 
 
 /!^ tung- 
 
 ^h -chu 
 
 i^ sbuo 
 
 -& shih 
 
 ^^ hsiieh 
 
 /^ tung- 
 
 ii. -t''u 
 
 ^^ Iisiich 
 
 J, -liao; 
 
 ^S Lsuch- 
 
 "T^ -lisia 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^ ts'ao- 
 
 Jl^ -shang, 
 
 fJjL cliiao 
 
 ^ t'icn 
 
 '^ leng 
 
 /^ tung- 
 
 ^ -elm 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ pi 
 
 ^^ hua, 
 
 11 kua- 
 
 7f> -pu- 
 
 Hl, -tung; 
 
 j^ yuan- 
 
 Jl yiia°- 
 
 |£ -'rh 
 
 nfl ch'iao 
 
 i^ -cho, 
 
 ^ pieu 
 
 rC' cb'u 
 
 -& shih 
 
 p| ch'ing 
 
 ;^ P'ie°- 
 
 ^ -■'••^- 
 
 ^ pai 
 
 ^a 
 
 Bfl t'ou 
 uih 
 h" -shang 
 
 15^ -ti 
 7J<, shui, 
 
 
 liu- 
 
 ^, -chi ; 
 
 4^ k'o- 
 
 ^h -wai 
 
 ;^ t'iea 
 
 X y" 
 
 ;^, leng, 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 ^ -ch'eug 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 }r P'ie"- 
 
 52. -'rt - 
 
 — ' i 
 
 >r P''e°- 
 
 5E -'rli 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 y\\ piag> 
 
 # wang 
 
 p -hsia 
 
 ^ ch'ui 
 
 :^, -cho; 
 
 ^0 ju- 
 
 (hI t'ung- 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 it ching 
 
 -?- -tzu 
 
 'fiil shih- 
 
 276. 
 
 ^. ts'ao 
 
 h -shang 
 
 t5 *°" 
 
 ;1 shih 
 
 '<^ leng 
 
 T. -'°^ 
 
 # ko 
 
 ^ ch'u 
 
 •iiS ti 
 
 [■» -hsia 
 
 3fj -lai 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 TIC, shui, 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 tung- 
 
 
 -te 
 
 J^ -ch'eng 
 
 "iT -liao 
 
 ^K ping- : 
 
 Sft chui 
 
 275, 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 B$ shih- 
 
 '^ -'hou 
 
 PIf y" 
 
 ^^ hsueh 
 
 ^, ta, 
 
 IM ^"' 
 
 "TC hsia 
 
 ^^, t"°g' 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 Y -sliang, 
 
 j^ ch'iang 
 
 ^g., hsiieh, 
 
 B4- cliiao 
 
 ^.C t'ai- 
 
 [# -yang 
 
 I]jl§ shai 
 
 llxf. -ti' 
 
 ^^ hua- 
 
 j^ -ch'Sng 
 
 7J<, «l'ui, 
 
 J?fe lii 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 ^^ fang- 
 
 ^ yea 
 
 P k'ou 
 
 ^k wai- 
 
 H, -t'ou, 
 
 M 'hei- 
 
 "^ -hsia 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 X y" 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 ^ -cli'eng 
 
 yy. ping- 
 
 /^ li"^- 
 
 7 
 
 
 f^ 
 
 wang 
 hsia 
 ch'ui 
 -cho. 
 
 274. 
 ni 
 
 k'an. 
 
 ^ chi°- 
 
 la -'rh 
 
 ji k'o 
 
 ^ chcn 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 4i pan 
 
 -?• -tzii 
 
 Vc '^"=^- 
 
 M; ■'^'■'^°° 
 
 M yii 
 
 ^ liao ; 
 
 M "^ 
 
 >^ shih 
 
 ^^- hsiieh 
 
 ^^ chiao- 
 
 ^n -cWa 
 
 - Yg tan 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 J^ mei 
 
 ± t'ai- 
 
 ^. -ya"g, 
 
 -t^ yeh 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 jl= che 
 
 — ' i 
 
 3^ tsung 
 
 ^^ shih. 
 
 273. 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 M fang 
 
 Jl -shang 
 
 -]? ts'un 
 
 M °^- 
 
 la -ko
 
 ^ 1^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF flEN. 
 
 161-112. 
 
 5lj tao 
 
 4l pan- 
 
 ^ -k'ung 
 
 [JlL cliiao 
 
 nS cliao, 
 
 fS I'"- 
 
 ^ -j'^" 
 
 yg -liu 
 
 # y>i>>- 
 
 6^J -^' 
 
 ^^ -ts'ai 
 
 m ^^""- 
 
 fll k'ai 
 
 5ii. -1'' 
 
 "X -liao 
 
 :E P'^ 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 # yun- 
 
 ^ k'uai 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^, -urh, 
 
 p^ cli'ui 
 
 '^ lou 
 
 PI -k'ai 
 
 m <^'>'" 
 
 J -liao, 
 
 :;fc: t'ai- 
 
 n '°^ 
 
 |# -yang 
 
 tij -ch'u 
 
 ^. -lai, 
 
 i: t'al- 
 
 ^ hsueb 
 
 1^ -ya"s 
 
 
 i^. -l-> 
 
 ^ mei 
 
 ^ jcn- 
 
 It. cl"l'. 
 
 § -cliiu 
 
 ^fj na 
 
 "fC bsia- 
 
 Wi '^'"" 
 
 ^ -hsueh, 
 
 ;^ sbih 
 
 i5 "^- 
 
 ifr t=^' 
 
 ji -ko 
 
 ^- -clio 
 
 'Q^ Lsiieh 
 
 jil» 
 
 '^^ 'liua 
 
 Bp -t'ou 
 
 [^ hsia 
 ^J hsiieli 
 PJS. ni. 
 
 * 
 
 pen- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 ^ 
 
 sliih 
 
 h 
 
 lisia- 
 
 s. 
 
 -hsiieh 
 
 fl^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 % 
 
 t'ie°- 
 
 31. 
 
 -■rh, 
 
 X 
 
 yi 
 
 W 
 
 yi 
 
 5J5 
 
 270. 
 na 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 ~T\ hsia 
 ^^ -lislieh 
 
 )I@ kua 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ ch'ang 
 pEj hsi 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^ -ck'i 
 
 ^ 'beu 
 
 :ffi pa 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 I- -sbang 
 
 "7^ -lisia 
 
 >fe ts'un 
 
 '^ hsueb, 
 
 4^ tou 
 
 tung- 
 
 ^ -ck'eng 
 j;^ k'uai 
 
 271. 
 
 Pt y-- 
 
 N bsia- 
 ^^ -bsiieb, 
 
 M 'bei 
 
 "p* -hsia 
 
 HJ^ kua 
 
 )E feng 
 
 X y" 
 
 '^. l™g, 
 
 X y» 
 «a pa 
 
 ^^ 'bua 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 7|C sbui 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 tp- tsao- 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 ^k k'an, 
 ^ chieu 
 ^^ bsiieb 
 
 [Si niie°- 
 
 h -shangl 
 iK tung- 
 |± -chieb 
 
 Sj hsueb 
 
 shib 
 
 y, -liao, 
 ^g ch'a 
 — • i 
 
 ^ cb'eng 
 ^K P'"S 
 
 7. -''='°- 
 
 is ''='' 
 
 j^ -ch'ing 
 
 jr p'i«"- 
 
 5£. -•rh, 
 
 li: ehib 
 
 Vj fang- 
 #. -fu 
 >)•» hsiao 
 
 it -i- 
 
 Ijl li 
 
 ^ sbib- 
 
 &xf. -ti. 
 JI5 na 
 
 RiL tbiao- 
 >^>^ -tso 
 
 TJt ™i- 
 i\^^ hsin 
 ^^ hsiieh. 
 
 • o 
 
 269. 
 ^§1 hsiieh 
 
 ^ -'bou 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 B^, cli'ing, 
 
 ffi pa 
 
 Pj mie". 
 
 % -'^ 
 
 p -sbang 
 
 'H^ bsiieb 
 
 /|^ 'bua 
 
 ~r -liao 
 
 ^ ts'e-e- 
 
 P^ 'bu- 
 
 P^ 'bu- 
 
 6«f -ti 
 
 ^^ hsiang- 
 
 ^, -sheng, 
 
 i5^ cbiian- 
 
 ^ll^ bsiieb 
 
 ^^ 
 
 'bua 
 
 V^ man 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 SI ^"ai 
 
 fil;. fei, 
 
 A J^" 
 
 1^ sbuo 
 
 J3. sbih 
 
 m ^'"^'- 
 
 :?J« cbiao 
 
 J^ -bsiieb 
 
 fjff -ti 
 
 % t'ie°- 
 
 52,. -^'' 
 
 P^ me°- 
 
 5£ --^ 
 
 S tsui 
 
 268. 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ cha 
 
 }^ leng 
 
 t^ -ti 
 gi sbib 
 
 ^ -'tou 
 
 5a. ■"^^'
 
 262-267. 
 
 
 ^ ^H T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'IEN. 
 
 
 
 4^ chi"- 
 
 ri^j 
 
 -ti 
 
 J ^ liao. 
 
 ii:. -si'ii', 
 
 MU 
 
 ti- 
 
 Vpj chiu 
 
 31 -•■••' 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 264. 
 
 fi jfi"- 
 
 :^ 
 
 -fang 
 
 ^. -urh. 
 
 jE *^''^" 
 
 ^. 
 
 P'iliS, 
 
 ['» lisia- 
 
 "g -chiu 
 
 h 
 
 -shang 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 ji -ko 
 
 # 
 
 yung- 
 
 ^ -hsueh 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 m 
 
 nao 
 
 14 cho 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -i 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 1^ '1'"° 
 
 i£!. 
 
 'huang 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 H ch'eng 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsou 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 ,^., -'liuan; 
 
 lU. 
 
 ch'ung. 
 
 1^. yiu, 
 
 # -t^- 
 
 jt 
 
 iiii 
 
 §^ kua 
 
 P chih 
 
 m- 
 
 shang- 
 
 :fa V- 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 f^ -ch'i 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 m 
 
 -'hai 
 
 ^ yang- 
 
 ^ shib 
 
 m 
 
 tao 
 
 M. f-^-ng 
 
 i^ tung 
 
 -4-1. 
 
 chuang- 
 
 1^ -j"u 
 
 II "^- 
 
 '}t. 
 
 -urh. 
 
 ^. lai, 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 ^. 
 
 -chia, 
 
 -^ ch'ieh- 
 
 ^ niao 
 
 
 265. 
 
 m pa 
 
 lllf chin 
 
 iJ? 
 
 'hao 
 
 # -te 
 
 Pg-. lo; 
 
 ^ 
 
 cli'i 
 
 M na 
 
 ~r^ hsia- 
 
 # 
 
 yung- 
 
 @ pao- 
 
 ^] tao 
 
 M 
 
 -cli'u 
 
 ^. bsiieh 
 
 ^ -hsiieh ; 
 
 ^ 
 
 -i 
 
 ^ pao 
 
 •^ lisiang 
 
 K 
 
 chih 
 
 VS 'liui 
 
 ii an- 
 
 ^ 
 
 kan- 
 
 fi^ -^i 
 
 V^j5 nian 
 
 ^ 
 
 chien 
 
 ^ -Ih 
 
 •^ -tzu 
 
 ffi 
 
 -pu 
 
 }X P'ie°- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 Pit 
 
 yiian- 
 
 fW- chiao 
 
 J^ shih 
 
 ^2 
 
 kan- 
 
 l£. -'r'^' 
 
 h -shang 
 
 T 
 
 -tzu 
 
 M, feng 
 
 — i 
 
 Jt 
 
 -ching 
 
 ^ tzu- 
 
 ■^ wang 
 
 IM 
 
 -li 
 
 P^ ch'ui 
 
 -^4- ts'un 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao; 
 
 m k'ao 
 
 ~J^ -bsia 
 
 ^ 
 
 fei 
 
 # -te 
 
 ^i^. hsiieh, 
 
 m 
 
 t'a 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 ?l^ *■''' 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 -^ tsai 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 pj 
 
 ko 
 
 P^, ch'ih. 
 
 #P Hu 
 
 % 
 
 ko 
 
 4^ pan 
 
 ht <='"" 
 
 5^ 
 
 chiu 
 
 % k'an 
 
 ^« hsu 
 
 m 
 
 hsiieli 
 
 /^j k'uug 
 
 A J" 
 
 X 
 
 yi 
 
 J' -cho 
 
 PJS. ni. 
 
 m 
 
 'bua 
 
 Fp -chung 
 
 -|^ t'u 
 
 ^ 
 
 liu- 
 
 m> ''^- 
 
 2C7. 
 
 la. 
 
 -urh, 
 
 fH P'iao- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 N 
 
 -hsia 
 
 M -k» 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 ^ 
 
 Lsieh 
 
 II P'iao 
 
 \^ ■ ts'un. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 "^an- 
 
 €^, hsiieh 
 
 ^^ hsiieli 
 
 1 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^^ tang- 
 
 5lJ tao 
 
 T- 
 
 -tzii 
 
 .M- chi°8- 
 
 j^ f-- 
 
 ^ 
 
 pan 
 
 ^Wl ^^^o 
 
 "T liao 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 5' '''' 
 
 # -feu 
 
 ^. 
 
 t'ien, 
 
 tit -ti, 
 
 zzT san 
 
 ill! 
 
 ti 
 
 ^J shih- 
 
 Ijf, -ti 
 
 N 
 
 hsia 
 
 HL ^^^ 
 
 JQ szd 
 
 IM 
 
 li- 
 
 :^ -tsai 
 
 B J''> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'i 
 
 yjj^ aha 
 
 A ts'un 
 
 SA. 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 tJJ k'o- 
 
 ^. ■'''^^' 
 
 :;^ 
 
 ta 
 
 y!^ kao 
 
 '^. shcn. 
 
 T, 
 
 -liao; 
 
 J^ -^ 
 
 X yu 
 
 Jr 
 
 p'ie°- 
 
 ■{h tsai 
 
 fi t'a 
 
 n 
 
 ti 
 
 f^ hsiao* 
 
 HM '^"^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'rh 
 
 iti! ti- 
 
 Pj k'o 
 
 urh 
 
 js| -chien 
 
 ^ -cli'i 
 
 ^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 1^ -Lsia, 
 
 ^ '^1"'' 
 
 ^ 
 
 nicn 
 
 PJS. "'• 
 
 M ^^"° 
 
 1^. 
 
 lo. 
 
 ^^ 'hua 
 
 4^ p^ 
 
 m 
 
 ch'un 
 
 . 263. 
 
 i^. -'-' 
 
 
 266. 
 
 # -"- 
 
 m "^"s 
 
 X 
 
 -t'ien, 
 
 |gij ch'ien 
 
 M f-^'ng 
 
 u 
 
 ni 
 
 1^ '1^-a- 
 
 Uj ch'u 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ pan 
 
 If. shih 
 
 1 
 
 k'an 
 
 t|: -ta 
 
 ^ -la. 
 
 n\ 
 
 ch'u- 
 
 .4p nien 
 
 
 
 * more com 
 
 monly fyf ?^ ^ cA 
 
 ;«A ma, or ^ ;\^> 
 
 
 siti. 

 
 ^ ^^ T'lENLEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 257-262. 
 
 -1 
 
 eliiii 
 sau 
 
 i^ yell 
 ■^ cliiu 
 
 % ti'o 
 
 ^'» sli: 
 
 2C2. 
 
 K bsia- 
 
 §^ -hsiieh 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^ t'ie°- 
 
 g tzu- 
 
 -&■ shih 
 
 '^ leng 
 
 ^ ta- 
 
 ^ -cLia 
 
 li -urh 
 
 ^^ -clio 
 
 ^ 1- 
 
 */^ 'huo 
 
 ■^' -tzu, 
 
 :^ nan 
 
 ^ 'hu 
 
 i-tb. ti, 
 
 ■^p sliih 
 ^ mai 
 
 pEj iiiiao- 
 
 ^l -'ih 
 
 ± t'u- 
 
 B^ shih- 
 
 j^ -'bou 
 
 ^ -ting 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 f|£ wang 
 
 61 -ti- 
 
 ^ 
 
 261. 
 tung- 
 
 -t'ien 
 
 jm. ^''■n 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 If, chung, 
 
 A J^"" 
 
 ^. to; 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 i^ lien- 
 
 ~K -lisia 
 
 Pl^ I'ang 
 
 :^ ch'ang 
 
 ^ 'hsiieh, 
 
 Ml! ti 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 — ' i 
 
 \& t'ung. 
 
 Jlbi weu- 
 Jua. 
 
 ITi to*! 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 fl I-ai 
 
 2C0. 
 
 :([^ pei 
 
 ^^ sheng 
 
 3to chung 
 
 M ch'iu- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^. to; 
 
 -^ ch'iian 
 
 'f^ cLang 
 
 ^^ ■cho 
 
 :^ tung- 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^^ hsiieh, 
 
 if tui- 
 
 ^te tsai 
 
 Mk ti 
 
 )k p'i- 
 
 J^ -shang, 
 
 f !j tao 
 
 T' -liao 
 
 ^g ch'un 
 
 g^ nan 
 
 tg, hsiieh 
 
 ^ hsiao, 
 
 wji^ shui 
 
 ^A chin- 
 
 A -J" 
 
 ^^ 'han 
 
 M ch'i 
 
 1,1 »i"g- 
 
 j^ -cl.ieh 
 
 ^ ch'eng 
 
 )iX P'ie° - 
 
 t^ fang- 
 
 ffe -fu 
 
 yj-t hsiao- 
 
 /y\ hsiao- 
 
 % -urli 
 
 ify -ti 
 
 ^ to 
 
 :^ 'hua 
 
 ^. -'^^ 
 
 Ira I'si 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ liu 
 
 li p^°- 
 
 5!. -'''^ 
 
 ^5 "a 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 -&■ shih 
 
 ^^ Hsiieh ; 
 
 :^^ tunjc- 
 
 3'c -t'ien 
 
 I'* hsia 
 
 # -te 
 
 ^ fang- 
 
 ^s -wu 
 
 m ^''"- 
 
 ti 
 
 # 
 
 
 Hit 
 
 ftp 
 
 la 
 
 BR 
 
 «4 
 
 kuan 
 tou 
 kung- 
 fu 
 pai 
 tui, 
 wang 
 chiao- 
 -ch'ang 
 
 yiig 
 
 cliiang ; 
 
 t'ing- 
 
 -chion- 
 
 -shuo 
 
 chiang- 
 
 -shen 
 
 shih 
 
 ko 
 
 ch'ih- 
 
 shen 
 
 -ti 
 
 nil 
 
 -tzu ; 
 
 che- 
 
 -ko 
 
 'hua 
 
 pu 
 
 chih- 
 
 -tao 
 
 ch'u 
 
 tsai 
 
 she°- 
 
 mo 
 
 ch'ao- 
 
 -tai. 
 
 259. 
 
 y" 
 
 chiao 
 
 1^ 'han 
 
 6>f. ti, 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 m y« 
 
 ^^ 'hua- 
 
 E|_ -ts'ao 
 
 m '^''"- 
 
 ^ -mu, 
 
 gE ch'a- 
 
 '^ pu- 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 7^ urh 
 
 61 -ti, 
 
 — • i 
 
 y^ cbien 
 
 ^S shuang 
 
 M chiu 
 
 P, tiao- 
 
 T lo. 
 
 258. 
 
 ^g Shuang 
 
 1^ Chiang 
 
 ;& shih 
 
 ^ chiu- 
 
 ^ yiieh- 
 
 Fp chung 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 IP, chieh, 
 
 ^ chiao 
 
 ^g Shuang 
 
 I^ Chiang 
 
 6>r -ti 
 
 m 
 
 t'ou 
 
 ^ t'ien,
 
 251-257. 
 
 T'JEA'-LEJ, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 6, pui, 
 
 ^ cliicn 
 
 "Pf k'o 
 
 1^ chiu 
 
 'fli 'liua- 
 
 # -tS 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^^ chien 
 
 257. 
 
 ^g shuang 
 
 •W yu 
 
 ^; 'lian 
 
 m., 
 
 wei, 
 
 m. 
 
 neng 
 
 n 
 
 sha 
 
 M 
 
 ts'ao 
 
 ^. 
 
 mu, 
 
 m^ 
 
 ch'u 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^ sung, 
 
 +1 pai, 
 
 f§: mei, 
 
 ^ chu,- 
 
 ;^ -ciiih 
 
 6>f. -ti, 
 
 cbe 
 
 tBL 
 
 chi 
 
 pf k'o- 
 
 jy -i 
 
 m 
 
 ning- 
 
 ipo 
 
 -cliieh 
 
 ;^ 
 
 cli'eng 
 
 ^ 
 
 shuang 
 
 T. 
 
 liao, 
 
 PJr 
 
 so- 
 
 B 
 
 -i 
 
 f4 
 
 cliiao 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -tso 
 
 55? 
 
 'Han- 
 
 256. 
 
 ^^ Shuang 
 
 M. shih 
 
 y'° 
 
 ^a^ 'ban- 
 
 5 chung 
 
 ^ chieh- 
 
 ^ -ch'eng 
 
 .^ ch'iu 
 
 _ 'boa 
 
 &1 -t- 
 
 M 'hei- 
 
 ~J», -lisia, 
 
 "7^ bsia 
 
 ^2 tsai 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 _h -shang 
 
 itb ti 
 
 [■», -hsia, 
 
 t5 tou 
 
 -&- shih 
 
 :^ -nien 
 
 •^ chiao 
 
 'Mj chieh 
 
 #. -'hou, 
 
 # ko 
 
 ^ ch'u 
 
 l5^ -ti 
 
 7JC, shui, 
 
 Wt ^•"'^ 
 
 'j'g, man, 
 
 ij'^ -ma"- 
 
 1^ -'rh 
 
 &xf -ti 
 
 ^ kuei 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 y$ 'hai 
 
 II -li 
 
 255. 
 
 ^ 'Han- 
 
 -S; shih 
 
 JL chiu 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 -gS chieh- 
 
 yi°- 
 
 'Si -wei 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 m 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 ii. k'uai 
 
 W) t'""S 
 
 A. j^'"' 
 
 •^j-* shou 
 
 .^> chin 
 
 in, P'an, 
 
 ^ wang- 
 
 ^J[ -hsiaug 
 
 ^& chieh 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 h -sliang 
 
 &>f -ti 
 
 -y" Kan 
 
 ^e Lu, 
 
 P# 'lio 
 
 J -liao 
 
 Pf k'o- 
 
 ]^ -i 
 
 -M ch'ang 
 
 ^, sheng; 
 
 ig ming- 
 
 ::^ -tzii 
 
 PiL chiao 
 
 ^5c ch'eng 
 
 254. 
 
 e Pai 
 
 ft Lu 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 A ?=" 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 %J ch'u 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 -1^ chieh- 
 
 M. -"i^'i; 
 
 4P. nien- 
 
 j^ -i 
 
 * ku- 
 
 A -J^" 
 
 it shuo 
 
 JS- shih 
 
 -|J* Kan 
 
 M L" 
 
 ~TC hsia- 
 
 [^ -Chiang 
 
 ^ 'huang- 
 
 _t -shang 
 
 ^ y^i 
 
 ^, tao, 
 
 ^ -ting 
 
 •^ 'Imi 
 
 -y^ Kan 
 
 M Lu 
 
 [^ hsia 
 
 Mr -chiaujr. 
 
 253. 
 an 
 
 m 'H 
 
 ^ ch'ao 
 
 ^ Wu 
 
 ^ Ti 
 
 ;;^ tsai 
 
 Jg. Ch'ang- 
 
 ^ tsao 
 , i 
 
 -da ko 
 
 — •_ urh- 
 
 -]- -ihih 
 
 ■^ chang 
 
 .►=» ■' kao 
 
 &^ -'' 
 
 S shih 
 
 ;^ tsou- 
 
 I^xf -ti 
 
 J^ chen- 
 
 ^ -elm 
 
 i^„ pan. 
 
 252. 
 
 ^S t'ing- 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 i!fc -skuo 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 h shang 
 
 ri 1- 
 
 7[<:, -«i»"' 
 
 P# '"^^ 
 
 ^fe -cho 
 
 i^E pi 
 
 ^ ti- 
 
 r^ -hsia 
 
 &vf -ti 
 
 jl fan 
 
 TIC, shui, 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ tan 
 
 ^ we'- 
 
 5a -'■»' 
 
 #, t'ien, 
 
 ^ piug- 
 
 H_ -chieh 
 
 pf k'o 
 
 iP ch'iieh 
 
 '^ pi"S 
 ^ yen 
 ^P nien;
 
 T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF VIEN. 
 
 245-261. 
 
 H jil' 
 
 ^ -foil 
 
 B2 cliao, 
 
 fp; ch'iao 
 
 ■^ -cho 
 
 -& sbili 
 
 ^s. chin- 
 
 }^ 'liu.ing- 
 
 Ajz. kuang- 
 
 7^ -ts'ai 
 
 M *° 
 
 g niu 
 
 Bis. ni. 
 
 251. 
 
 J5 na- 
 
 % yeh 
 
 p -shang 
 
 ^te ts'un 
 
 ■^tc -sliui 
 
 f^ chu 
 
 pjj cbiao 
 
 R3 fent' 
 
 :i| 'huang, 
 luan- 
 
 -kuen 
 
 
 \\ -lisia 
 
 f/ff -ti 
 
 m '- 
 
 prj^^ -sliui 
 
 ^^ tsui 
 
 M", chuiig; 
 
 :^j: wang- 
 
 ^^ -waiig 
 
 .;§: lao 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ;fe; ts'un- 
 
 ^ -chu 
 
 l^f, -ti 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 gg -Ijsi 
 
 Jl, -sliang, 
 
 ^1 ning 
 
 ^ -ch'CDg 
 
 ^ cLu- 
 
 4i pan 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ P" 
 
 250. 
 
 M 'I'ei- 
 
 "T> -Iisia 
 
 \\ lisia 
 
 Hxf -ti 
 
 11 1- 
 
 •^[^ -sbui 
 
 ^ chu- 
 
 %, -urb, 
 
 ip, tsao- 
 
 ^ -cb'i 
 
 fJiL cbiao 
 
 -jl t'a 
 
 ^^ cbiu 
 
 /|^ ning- 
 
 ^ -cbicb 
 
 ^ sbuang 
 
 J -liao. 
 
 248. 
 
 4^ cbi°- 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 a 'bei- 
 
 |\ -bsia, 
 
 ~rr bsia 
 
 te 
 
 % 
 
 U 
 
 lu 
 
 cbung 
 
 ni 
 
 k'an 
 
 cb& 
 
 chi 
 
 ^ P'en 
 ^^ 'bua 
 
 ■'rb 
 
 Jl, -sbang, 
 
 ,<tH 11,.,; 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 J^ mei 
 
 ?^ kan 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ 1-- 
 
 7JC -sbui 
 
 E^ cbu- 
 
 249. 
 
 ^ cb'iu 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 M 'bei- 
 
 247, 
 
 W- Lu 
 
 ;& sbih 
 
 M 'bci- 
 
 ~[T -Iisia 
 
 (i^ -ti 
 
 j!Ji)j cb'ao 
 
 M. -<='''•' 
 
 /I/ 'bua 
 
 yj -cb'u 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 7^. sliui, 
 
 pf k'o- 
 
 M ^'■^• 
 
 ^ wan 
 
 ^ cli'iu 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 "m" cbung 
 
 ^5 na- 
 
 j® -ko 
 
 ^J\; sbui 
 
 J^ ^'"" 
 
 ^ cb'eng 
 
 T' -liao 
 
 ^ ebu 
 
 ^, -'Tb, 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 "7 -liao 
 
 :^ cbiao- 
 
 i^ -tung 
 
 ■^i«" -cb'ien, 
 
 IE. 
 jE 
 
 ± 
 
 A 
 
 PI 
 
 IS 
 
 i: 
 
 
 -urh, 
 wo 
 
 clieng 
 
 tsai 
 
 cbicb 
 
 -sbang 
 
 ni, 
 
 cb'iao 
 
 -cbo 
 
 t'ien 
 
 pu 
 
 'bao, 
 
 kan- 
 
 -chin 
 
 p'ao 
 
 tao 
 
 jen- 
 
 -cbia 
 
 ko 
 
 nien- 
 
 -tu°s- 
 
 -•rb 
 
 li- 
 
 -t'ou 
 -cb'u 
 
 to 
 
 -cbo, 
 
 mei 
 
 cbiao 
 
 pao 
 
 -tzii 
 
 ta 
 
 -cbo, 
 
 tou 
 
 suan 
 
 wan 
 
 bsing 
 
 /f^ -liang 
 
 ^g tao 
 
 ^, 'ty.u, 
 
 JLE cbeng 
 
 ■^^ sbib 
 
 Jji: chuang 
 
 %^ tzu- 
 
 'J^iL -li 
 
 y^ -urh 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 D^ sbib- 
 
 j^ -'bou 
 
 52.. -urb, 
 
 ^■f) tou 
 
 ttU- cbiao 
 
 /tji, pao- 
 
 -f- -tzii 
 
 tr ta 
 
 T, -liao, 
 
 -J" sbib- 
 
 -^ -fen- 
 
 6>f -ti 
 
 ij;^ sbou- 
 
 ^, -cb'eng, 
 
 P, cb'ih 
 
 3^!| sbeng- 
 -te 
 
 y> liu 
 
 ^ fen 
 
 j -liao. 
 
 246. 
 
 [■> bsia 
 
 ^ pao- 
 
 ~jp -tzu 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 g^ sbib- 
 
 ^ -'bou 
 
 #
 
 240-245. 
 
 ^ ^% T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 \ uih 
 ::j!^ ch'ien 
 
 i^ 
 
 -sliu, 
 
 -A. cLin 
 
 Af, nien 
 
 ^a chieh 
 
 ^£ kuo- 
 
 -^ -tzu 
 
 /^ fen- 
 
 ^k -wai 
 
 ^. to, 
 
 piL chiao 
 
 »^ che- 
 V2. 
 
 -ko 
 
 H* pao 
 
 ^ -tzu 
 
 tr *« 
 
 ~T^ -lisia 
 
 ^ pa°- 
 
 % -'''' 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 ■^ -cho 
 
 !^ shih- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tsai 
 
 >I^: t'ung 
 
 245. 
 kao- 
 
 -tao 
 
 :A:. ta; 
 
 ifi yell 
 
 :^^ p" 
 
 'ft' euan 
 
 A\ Lsiao 
 
 244. 
 
 it <=!'« 
 
 i|^ ch'ang 
 
 ^ P^o 
 
 -^ -tzii, 
 
 ii pa 
 
 M fang 
 
 h -shang 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 "T\ -hsia 
 
 ^-^, chuan, 
 
 ^ ta- 
 
 i^i -Ian 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 j(:f 'hao- 
 
 ilb -bsieh, 
 
 ^ ^0 
 
 #5 tou 
 
 ^- P" 
 
 ^- yao- 
 
 ^- -chin ; 
 
 -& shih 
 
 yiian- 
 -^ -tzu 
 
 Ml fe"g- 
 
 l^'J -ti 
 
 a .'■'^ 
 
 .y. -tzii, 
 
 Ik «"' 
 
 (;[| yQ 
 
 if lao 
 
 ~K -hsia 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 61 -ti- 
 
 243. 
 
 /^ ts'ai 
 
 ^15 na 
 
 (iij| chen 
 
 Pit. y"' 
 
 'P^ kuai 
 
 ^ -Pu- 
 
 # -te 
 
 hsiang ; 
 
 ifl yuan 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 \\ hsia 
 
 1 
 
 ^ Pao 
 
 tzu 
 
 IfJ hsien 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 jg 'han 
 
 W y" 
 
 J^ mei 
 
 ^ 'hua 
 
 61 -ti' 
 
 Ifi tou 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 k'o- 
 i 
 
 k'o 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 ^JV, pins. 
 
 -^ ch'ang 
 
 ^ hai-e- 
 
 |£ -'rh 
 
 4t? tai 
 
 |M| yiian, 
 
 iK ta 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 IM fan- 
 
 ^a wan 
 
 :/c. ta, 
 
 /]'» hsiao 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ;EI kua- 
 
 -^ -tzti 
 
 :^. ta, 
 
 i% ko- 
 
 ^ ko- 
 
 31 -^ 
 
 15 tou 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 liangr 
 
 /.7. 
 
 ni 
 
 ko 
 
 ku- 
 
 -lung 
 
 iiS yu 
 
 ^3 -cho 
 ^fl ts'u 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 5^ nien 
 
 tat ^""'^ 
 
 i^ yeh 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 >E: nien 
 
 13 yu 
 
 61 -ti; 
 
 M na 
 
 i ya"" 
 
 i 
 
 51. -'rh 
 
 ^ shuo 
 
 ^. to, 
 
 P[ k'o 
 
 xf» pu 
 
 /£. ting. 
 
 242. 
 ^t3* pao 
 
 ^ - 
 
 tzu 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 ^ she"- 
 
 -mo 
 
 is 
 
 ^^ pion 
 
 6>J -ti 
 
 p;s. ni? 
 
 J^ chiu 
 
 ;& shih 
 
 Mo yu- 
 
 M -<=h'i 
 
 ^ uing 
 
 IS. -<=''ieb, 
 
 iK ta 
 
 6>J -ti 
 
 X kung- 
 
 ^ -fu 
 
 jj?vl <=^iu 
 
 Wa hsiao 
 
 T. -'iao, 
 
 ^^9 hsiang 
 
 ljl\ pi 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 ■X t'ai- 
 
 (^ -yang 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^ yang 
 
 ^ kuang 
 
 n^ aliens:, 
 
 ^ pa 
 
 05 na 
 
 ^!^ tie"- 
 
 31 -''•'' 
 
 It 
 
 yin 
 
 M Pi- 
 
 ak -'^an 
 
 7, -liao; 
 
 "t^ yell 
 
 ^ wei 
 
 gf k'o 
 
 ^„ ting. 
 
 ,-^ 241. 
 
 xS che- 
 
 na -ko 
 
 fen, kang, 
 
 2{v P""- 
 
 ?R -la. 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 liang 
 
 1^. ^''""^
 
 VIEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 234-2-(0. 
 
 m 
 u 
 
 
 
 'Imng 
 
 liu 
 
 lij 
 
 -ti, 
 
 tsai- 
 
 t'ai- 
 
 -yang 
 
 tui- 
 
 -niien 
 
 ch'u 
 
 -lai, 
 
 wo 
 
 ta- 
 
 -suan 
 
 -cbo 
 
 P' 
 
 yao 
 
 ch'ing 
 
 t'ien, 
 
 na- 
 
 -■rh 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 r^ -tao 
 
 X y^ 
 
 n4- cliiao 
 
 # yua- 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^ clie- 
 
 '^ -chu 
 
 T. -''^°- 
 
 .^ 240. 
 
 is che 
 
 fl^ t'iao 
 
 toe, kang, 
 
 pq ch'u- 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 ^ P» 
 
 fl^ -t'ou 
 Jl shang- 
 gj -t'ou 
 
 ^ chiu- 
 
 239. 
 
 tuns 
 
 ^ cliu 
 
 ;;j=g chih 
 
 it «i^«- 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 ^ yun 
 
 H chien 
 
 ^ sban- 
 
 ^ -shan 
 
 ^ cliiDg- 
 
 ^ -cl'ing 
 
 Itff -ti 
 
 [I* cli'ing- 
 
 i|a -ct'i 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 !i1 
 
 237. 
 t'ion 
 
 -shang 
 ch'u 
 
 toe, kang, 
 -& sliih 
 
 H y" 
 
 ::^ -'liou 
 
 Jl^ chien 
 
 . jib, 
 
 ^ yang 
 
 -i^ kuang 
 
 ijfe -cho 
 
 P^ 
 
 •A. yin 
 ch'i. 
 
 y(U 'hua 
 
 i wu- 
 
 -f^ -shai 
 
 ^. -shang, 
 
 j^ kan 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 
 ■^ na- 
 
 {jJ -ch'u 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 H,^ liang- 
 
 1^ -liang 
 
 S^ pa. 
 
 236. 
 
 suan- 
 
 i 
 
 gf -ch 
 
 ^3 -cho 
 
 M -'^^ 
 
 ^ t'ie"- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 :A: ta 
 
 M, f^ng 
 
 -a shih 
 
 ll/f tuan 
 
 |g kua- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 
 li -k'ai 
 
 It shui 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 ^ -tao 
 
 Mh tien 
 
 U -'^^ 
 
 f^ -urh 
 
 ^K ton 
 
 rjff -ti 
 
 5^ t'ie-- 
 
 fjt -•'' 
 
 fi-fl ch'iao 
 
 ^^ shih- 
 
 .^ -tsai 
 
 ^M sliuang- 
 
 ;|>^ -k'uai 
 
 235. 
 
 J£ mei 
 
 /^ hsiang 
 
 JlJ tao 
 
 i^ che 
 
 itb hsieh 
 
 B jil>- 
 
 -^ -tzu 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 lien 
 
 i 
 
 len, 
 
 [ji shih 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 •^ 'hui 
 
 iia -ko 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^g. chi 
 
 •^2fc chien 
 
 •^lei also ^e, or po.
 
 220-234. 
 
 ^ M T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 j^ -uih 
 
 J^^ -shang, 
 
 f^ ^° 
 
 gg hsiug 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 — • i 
 
 •^ 'Imi 
 
 ^ t'ing- 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 Pit y"-''"- 
 
 -?• -tzii 
 
 J^lJ shua- 
 
 ~\\ hsia 
 
 yj^^ hsiao 
 
 ;^ kail 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ iiang- 
 
 ^ -cli'i 
 
 ^. -lai, 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^" k'an- 
 
 ^^ -chien 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 ::^ t'ien 
 
 E^ cL'JDg; 
 
 P?5 Da 
 
 ^ Ian 
 
 •/J wang- 
 
 5i -■■•'> 
 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 
 it 
 
 II 
 
 It 
 
 IS 
 
 liu- 
 liu- 
 -ti 
 
 fc"K- 
 
 -•rb, 
 
 pa 
 
 die 
 
 i 
 
 t'ien 
 
 mi- 
 
 -mi 
 
 tsa- 
 
 -taa 
 
 -ti 
 
 neng* 
 
 yua 
 
 cbia 
 
 ch'ui- 
 
 -k'ai 
 
 -liao, 
 
 lou 
 
 -ch'u 
 
 hsiang- 
 
 -cb'ing 
 
 -ti 
 
 t'ien 
 
 -lai, 
 
 ni 
 
 shuo 
 
 nan 
 
 te 
 
 pu 
 
 nan 
 
 te? 
 
 234. 
 wu 
 
 oiling 
 
 t'ou- 
 
 «j£ cliuang- 
 
 ^ -cilia 
 
 t\^ -ti 
 
 ^ -liou 
 
 J -liao 
 
 H liang- 
 
 ^ -shih, 
 
 is ton 
 
 ^jfc tsai 
 
 M °^- 
 
 |£ -'rh 
 
 ^^ teng- 
 
 ;^ -cho 
 
 :;fe t'ai- 
 
 ^ -yang 
 
 [|jffi} sliai 
 
 233. 
 /^ ts'ai 
 
 Jg^ chien 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 [t yin- 
 
 # -te 
 
 ^ 'ben 
 
 j^ cb'6n 
 
 &^. -ti' 
 
 ^ lai 
 "T -liao 
 
 n 
 
 chen 
 
 r. -shang 
 jjj^ hsiang 
 
 .^ 231. 
 to che 
 
 ^g tsung 
 
 ^ to- 
 -■j^ -tsan 
 shili 
 
 ;f> pu 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 ■4^ sbao 
 
 -(iS t'ing 
 
 # 
 
 'hui- 
 
 £. 
 
 -urb, 
 
 HR 
 
 chao 
 
 # 
 
 chiu 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ~r hsia 
 
 232. 
 
 i^ che- 
 
 M -^° 
 
 /t cbu- 
 
 ^ 'h£n 
 
 ijf . 'liao, 
 
 IE cbeng 
 
 J^ sbib 
 
 d^ sbou 
 
 m 
 •if 
 
 .1.1 1. 
 
 
 if 
 
 ill! 
 
 ch'iug 
 
 kuan 
 
 tao 
 
 jen, 
 
 pan 
 
 shih 
 
 pan 
 
 -te 
 
 'bao, 
 
 pai- 
 
 -hsing 
 
 -men 
 
 ch'eng- 
 
 -taan 
 
 t'.T, 
 
 shuo 
 
 tzii- 
 
 -ts'ung 
 
 niou 
 
 ta- 
 
 lao- 
 
 -yeh 
 
 tao 
 
 jen 
 
 -chih 
 
 'hou, 
 
 'ho 
 
 feng, 
 
 kan 
 
 yii' 
 ching 
 
 hsing, 
 
 ch'ing 
 
 yiin 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ti- 
 
 -fa°s- 
 
 -rb 
 
 ^K. 'I'en 
 
 H£. wang, 
 
 1^ chiu 
 
 -& sliib 
 
 ^ kan 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 m ^-"- 
 
 ^ ch'ang 
 
 PIf, y". 
 
 i|^ che- 
 
 '^^ san 
 
 ^ wu 
 
 ^ t'i^"- 
 
 i^ -'rb 
 
 chano 
 
 ^ -kao 
 
 -j' -liao 
 
 '. urb 
 
 yJ-, ts'un, 
 
 J^ p'ien 
 
 y^ cbii 
 
 ^ ch'ing 
 
 ^^ -t' 
 
 ^¥ shih- 
 
 ^ -tsai 
 i(i^ 'bao 
 ^^ k'an. 
 
 230. 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 • nenj also nuny.
 
 
 ^ *g T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 223-229. 
 
 ^ teng- 
 
 jl -y""^' 
 
 ^ wo- 
 
 ® 
 
 tung- 
 
 iM tsung 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 
 M -cho 
 
 It^ -ti 
 
 'IP -men 
 
 m 
 
 -hsi 
 
 i^ ma 
 
 flj -tao 
 
 ^ t'iea 
 
 y, -liao ; 
 
 ^^ chu 
 
 $ 
 
 na 
 
 -^ yu 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 mt^ ch'ing, 
 
 m ti 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 m 
 
 -ch'u 
 
 ^ chu- 
 
 m, '^'^- 
 
 iK ^^- 
 
 11 -H 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 -lai, 
 
 5jra -kuo 
 
 fM -mo 
 
 ^ ta- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 1 r cheng 
 
 Sf^ 
 
 tou 
 
 4i pan- 
 
 /A cli'iu 
 
 tl^ -ti 
 
 »jj- cliuang- 
 
 ^, f^ng, 
 
 ;i 
 
 shih 
 
 ^ -t'i6°- 
 
 di^ -ti 
 
 :;fc t'ai- 
 
 ^, -cbia, 
 
 ijj hsien- 
 
 S 
 
 shih- 
 
 ^. -'^''^ 
 
 fHq, yii> 
 
 1^ -y=i°s 
 
 ;|5 tou 
 
 -lii -tsai 
 
 [^^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 jH die 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 i 
 
 jl^ 'huan 
 
 fSlJ kua- 
 
 ^ 
 
 i- 
 
 pJ k'o 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 0®. shai, 
 
 Jjra -kuo 
 
 It^ -ti 
 
 f^ 
 
 -shang 
 
 ^ suan- 
 
 ^. -tao, 
 
 ^jf so 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 -tn 
 
 yeh 
 
 # -te 
 
 -^ tsao- 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 "7 -liao, 
 
 ^a nan 
 
 0.^ 
 
 liang- 
 
 -©; shih 
 
 lA -ti@°- 
 
 fixf -ti 
 
 l^pj 'ho 
 
 M. f^"s 
 
 -^> 
 
 -pu- 
 
 j^ lien 
 
 51 -'•••^ 
 
 i|]^ cliuang- 
 
 n -li 
 
 ^ kan 
 
 ^^. 
 
 -kan. 
 
 It yin- 
 
 ^ niai 
 
 ^. -cli'a, 
 
 ^ ching 
 
 >W^ k'uai 
 
 
 22C. 
 
 Pl! -yii 
 
 ~J\ -hsia, 
 
 f[S tou 
 
 ?M -li 
 
 :ja p^ 
 
 iM. 
 
 ch6 
 
 H. P'*' 
 
 yf» pu 
 
 ;;^ cbang- 
 
 tr> tou 
 
 "jnjl" ch'ien- 
 
 [51 
 
 chen 
 
 X y- 
 
 J^- shgng 
 
 ^ -tsu 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 plj mien 
 
 M. 
 
 feng 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 J -liao 
 
 "J" -liao 
 
 ^ ch'uang- 
 
 ^ 
 
 lai 
 
 la ch'icn 
 
 itt; Lsieh 
 
 I'M lia'ig- 
 
 ■^ shui 
 
 p -'hu 
 
 # 
 
 -te 
 
 1i ko 
 
 ^§ ch'ien 
 
 '^, -sliih; 
 
 T. lo; 
 
 1^ tang 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pn 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 ■^ mo ? 
 
 ^'Q p'a 
 
 A i^" 
 
 ^ -cl>'i 
 
 -J\ 
 
 hsiao, 
 
 m y'° 
 
 224. 
 
 4^ p" 
 
 ;\^^ hsia 
 
 ;^. -lai; 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'icn 
 
 Pi y*i 
 
 Mf yu 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 ■t^ ye'' 
 
 'HT"' pu 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 4^ pu 
 
 :;^ shih 
 
 -|- sliih- 
 
 It <='■■'" 
 
 ,^-f^ ja° 
 
 m 
 
 yin 
 
 ^ tuan 
 
 y* hsia 
 
 ^> -fen 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 Pj k'o 
 
 m 
 
 -te 
 
 jS che 
 
 1^ k'ai- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 Mi ''^"'' 
 
 iii 
 
 che- 
 
 'pJ chii 
 
 fl^ -t'ou 
 
 ^S 11 ion- 
 
 I'M, ='• 
 
 fliL chiao 
 
 IS 
 
 -nio 
 
 IS. 'J^"^- 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 :^- -cU.ng 
 
 228. 
 
 Ml feng 
 
 i^e. 
 
 ch'en, 
 
 225. 
 
 T. lo, 
 
 jg mo? 
 
 M yii 
 
 ISf sou- 
 
 m 
 
 teng 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 •g,!^ hsieh- 
 
 229. 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 *1 -Ian 
 
 # 
 
 'hui- 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 i5C -l^sieh 
 
 -^ chin 
 
 a i- 
 
 -y -liao. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -urh 
 
 ^a f=^° 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 ^ nien 
 
 |g -cl>ing 
 
 227. 
 
 ii^v 
 
 pi 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 X y" 
 
 m -ti 
 
 K hsia 
 
 M yii 
 
 ^ 
 
 yi 
 
 Vi||] chao 
 
 X^ shih 
 
 3i raai 
 
 il t'ou 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 M 
 
 sou- 
 
 y -liao ; 
 
 — ' i 
 
 ]mf iiiiao 
 
 J, liao; 
 
 ^ tsu- 
 
 B. 
 
 -fing 
 
 Y" ■■ shih- 
 
 |ij|L chg"- 
 
 5£ -"^'' 
 
 ^ '^'"^ 
 
 p^ -kou- 
 
 M. 
 
 -yu; 
 
 m -'"° 
 
 ^l -■■''' 

 
 217-2:3. 
 
 
 ^ ^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ pi- 
 
 ^- 
 
 y" 
 
 ^. ch'ai, 
 
 iii. 
 
 chc 
 
 'A, 
 
 -■rh. 
 
 m. 
 
 y", 
 
 /£ -ti"g 
 
 il 
 
 clii 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 1i 
 
 -ko 
 
 # 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsu 
 
 Ik ^''''l' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 fon 
 
 fM -li 
 
 # 
 
 ya"«- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'u 
 
 ^\ 
 
 k'o- 
 
 y|^ lao 
 
 =ft 
 
 cbih- 
 
 v'^ mei 
 
 ^l 
 
 -■rh 
 
 ti^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 jy 
 
 -i 
 
 T. -i'^">' 
 
 M. 
 
 -waug, 
 
 ^. ""' 
 
 f^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 
 kou- 
 
 ^ 
 
 chi 11- 
 
 il^ k'uai 
 
 ^ 
 
 yao 
 
 •^- shou 
 
 5S 
 
 lien 
 
 BR. 
 
 yen, 
 
 % 
 
 -te 
 
 ><'» pu 
 
 # 
 
 tsai 
 
 IM -" 
 
 Pt 
 
 yin 
 
 m 
 
 tou 
 
 M. 
 
 -kuo 
 
 n '^- 
 
 iii 
 
 clie- 
 
 X y^ 
 
 li. 
 
 yi'> 
 
 pji 
 
 bsieh- 
 
 ?' 
 
 -lai, 
 
 jjg liang- 
 
 ji 
 
 -nio 
 
 1^ mei 
 
 ^ 
 
 she"- 
 
 4- 
 
 -pu- 
 
 ia. 
 
 che 
 
 ;^ -shili 
 
 li 
 
 yvi 
 
 ^ ch'ien, 
 
 JS 
 
 -nio 
 
 
 -chi, 
 
 m 
 
 yiian 
 
 iW che- 
 
 ^ 
 
 lun- 
 
 PJ5 na 
 
 ^ 
 
 yeh 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu 
 
 B 
 
 shih 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 ^ 
 
 liia 
 
 1^ t^'*^' 
 
 ^- 
 
 pu 
 
 -k 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 'huang- 
 
 ^' kuei. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^^ nan 
 
 il 
 
 Deng 
 
 ^i 
 
 -ti 
 
 t- 
 
 -shang 
 
 .^ 223. 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 i§ kuo 
 
 fi®. 
 
 shai, 
 
 T 
 
 kung- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ia. die 
 
 If-. 
 
 chih, 
 
 B^. ni- 
 
 H 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 ^ 
 
 -fu 
 
 m 
 
 'hung- 
 
 ^7] Hang 
 
 ^5 
 
 ca 
 
 ._^ 221. 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 ^. 
 
 -•rh. 
 
 m. 
 
 -fu, 
 
 ^ fien 
 
 pT 
 
 k'o 
 
 iH. "^^ 
 
 m 
 
 tsao- 
 
 Wt 
 
 chiu 
 
 W 
 
 pai- 
 
 yin- 
 
 iKl 
 
 chiu 
 
 ^K chi 
 
 £^ 
 
 -t'a 
 
 ^ 
 
 p'ing 
 
 i^ 
 
 -hsiiig 
 
 ■^ -^^ei 
 
 m 
 
 mei 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 m 
 
 tung- 
 
 m 
 
 ti 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 M y"- 
 
 1 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 ® 
 
 -hsi 
 
 7K 
 
 shui 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsao- 
 
 7JC -sliui 
 
 ^ 
 
 chiu 
 
 1^. y"' 
 
 B^. 
 
 ni. 
 
 '^ 
 
 shen 
 
 ^. 
 
 -'hua. 
 
 A. ta. 
 
 % 
 
 -urh 
 
 4^ pen- 
 
 
 220. 
 
 — 
 
 san 
 
 
 21 S. 
 
 il tao 
 
 T, 
 
 liao. 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^ 
 
 'hau- 
 
 R. 
 
 ch'ih. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ts'uiig- 
 
 ^ -Th 
 
 
 222. 
 
 ■j^ t'ai 
 
 ^ 
 
 -k'u 
 
 
 210. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 PU 
 
 yu- 
 
 ^ to 
 
 A 
 
 jen- 
 
 4i 
 
 pan 
 
 '^ 
 
 mei 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ■^ 
 
 shui 
 
 T, -^'^O' 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chia 
 
 HI 
 
 ko 
 
 ^ 
 
 chien 
 
 ;%, tsou, 
 
 % 
 
 t'ai 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 %. 
 
 -urh, 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 >^ 
 
 -kuo 
 
 ^ cb'ai 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 kan- 
 
 .g. 
 
 yiieh. 
 
 is. 
 
 che- 
 
 TJt n>i 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^ kan- 
 
 ± 
 
 -shang 
 
 u 
 
 mei 
 
 m 
 
 -mo 
 
 $1^ ts'ai- 
 
 &^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^ -chin 
 
 3i 
 
 lien 
 
 — ■ 
 
 i 
 
 ± 
 
 ta 
 
 i^. -sliu, 
 
 ^ 
 
 nien- 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 '^ 
 
 yin 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 Wu 
 
 yi', 
 
 #5 tou 
 
 sJi 
 
 -t'ou- 
 
 0^ ch'ing- 
 
 M. 
 
 yii, 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 ^B 
 
 ju 
 
 -^ Chang 
 
 la. 
 
 -urh, 
 
 ^ -cli'i 
 
 W 
 
 tsai 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 1^ 
 
 t'ung 
 
 J -liao 
 
 — ~* 
 
 san 
 
 ^, -lai. 
 
 *n 
 
 chia- 
 
 7K 
 
 shui 
 
 M 
 
 k'eng 
 
 If cilia 
 
 u 
 
 chiang 
 
 :^ nieu- 
 
 h 
 
 -sliang 
 
 fe 
 
 la- 
 
 # 
 
 p'en 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 m 
 
 ti- 
 
 ^ -ch'e"«- 
 
 ikt 
 
 tsao 
 
 :fe 
 
 -la 
 
 — 
 
 i 
 
 T. ^'^°' 
 
 if 
 
 -fa"K- 
 
 % -••• 
 
 n 
 
 -li 
 
 1?^. 
 
 -ti. 
 
 i® 
 
 ko 
 
 M ''"'^"^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ii '1^- 
 
 i^ 
 
 mei 
 
 #< 
 
 hsiaiig 
 
 #c 
 
 ya°5- 

 
 
 
 ^ *^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 2r2-217. 
 
 A ^^ 
 
 I> 
 
 hsia 
 
 m 
 
 ko- 
 
 m 
 
 ch'i- 
 
 [» hsia 
 
 Jl -kbang 
 
 M. y"- 
 
 f^. 
 
 pa; 
 
 m 
 
 -ko 
 
 ^M 
 
 -liang 
 
 yJ^ hsiao 
 
 j/.M '''^"S 
 
 217. 
 
 f^ 
 
 ni 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 n 
 
 te- 
 
 (^ y" 
 
 ■^^ san 
 
 ^ tso 
 
 ^ 
 
 k'an 
 
 ^ 
 
 cli'i- 
 
 m. 
 
 -'ben. 
 
 O -urb, 
 
 f!^ t'iao 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 ^h 
 
 wai- 
 
 T 
 
 liao 
 
 
 214. 
 
 gg sbui- 
 
 fg- '''"° 
 
 m -^^ 
 
 13 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 'M 
 
 p'ao- 
 
 #- 
 
 tsao 
 
 ^^ -p»- 
 
 
 !i^ ts'ai 
 
 A 
 
 ta 
 
 %. 
 
 -■rh, 
 
 m 
 
 sliao 
 
 #, -'-bao, 
 
 J^. cbiu 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 M 
 
 y" 
 
 m 
 
 na 
 
 m. 
 
 yin, 
 
 ^ yiian- 
 
 [E] 'bui 
 
 ^ ch'iu- 
 
 m 
 
 p'aug- 
 
 i}i. 
 
 pi 
 
 m. 
 
 wan 
 
 jM y""""" 
 
 ^, ^^l^ia, 
 
 ii -y" 
 
 vS 
 
 -t'o 
 
 % 
 
 yao 
 
 m 
 
 shao 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 ^ na 
 
 ^^ '\ 
 
 6^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 m 
 
 liea- 
 
 Br. 
 
 ch'ing. 
 
 &^ -'• 
 
 i\JL t'a 
 
 ^J sLeng- 
 
 ^ij 
 
 pick 
 
 It 
 
 yin- 
 
 
 215. 
 
 IJEi t'ing- 
 
 Sli P'ci 
 
 M -ch'i 
 
 it 
 
 sbuo 
 
 ^. 
 
 -t'ien, 
 
 T 
 
 hsia- 
 
 H -chien 
 
 >^ chiu ; 
 
 k -"'^' 
 
 A 
 
 jen 
 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 -yU 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 ^ cLi"- 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 tjf 
 
 skih 
 
 w 
 
 mao 
 
 IS *' 
 
 M -'^'' 
 
 i£ -•* 
 
 t^ 
 
 ueng 
 
 lir 
 
 tuan 
 
 rU 
 
 p'ao- 
 
 -y- -tzu 
 
 M "^ 
 
 gt chiu 
 
 n. 
 
 hsing, 
 
 A^ 
 
 pu 
 
 31 
 
 -rh 
 
 It^ -^•' 
 
 jl yu 
 
 Jg chii- 
 
 ^ 
 
 cbiu 
 
 m 
 
 neng 
 
 m 
 
 skih 
 
 ^ she"e- 
 
 -p. chi°«- 
 
 PJ^. -jai 
 
 m 
 
 skih 
 
 Bm 
 
 ch'ing 
 
 m 
 
 y>i 
 
 l£. -•^' 
 
 5a. -''' 
 
 &tf -*' 
 
 ^ 
 
 tso 
 
 6^. 
 
 -ti. 
 
 r^ 
 
 hsia- 
 
 tj- tui 
 
 ^ wu 
 
 1^ Lsia- 
 
 m 
 
 ch'c 
 
 
 216. 
 
 A 
 
 ta 
 
 ^ -cbo 
 
 ^ y»- 
 
 ^ -el^'i- 
 
 ^5 
 
 ra- 
 
 4 
 
 chi°- 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 05 "3 
 
 ^{E wu 
 
 PM -^'" 
 
 ia 
 
 -ko 
 
 l£ 
 
 -■jh 
 
 7K 
 
 shui 
 
 yU hsiao 
 
 ^. '*i 
 
 ^., -^"' 
 
 # 
 
 sbeng- 
 
 M 
 
 -ko 
 
 'Mt 
 
 liu 
 
 yL -hsiao 
 
 &vf. -'=' 
 
 |ilr cbuang- 
 
 p 
 
 -k'ou 
 
 rjj 
 
 ya- 
 
 4^ 
 
 pu 
 
 % '-^^ 
 
 M '■'"" 
 
 ^^ "'^'"^ 
 
 ^# 
 
 liin- 
 
 PI 
 
 -men 
 
 i;. 
 
 chi, 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 pj k'o 
 
 ^ 
 
 -cbo 
 
 tm 
 
 -li 
 
 # 
 
 kb 
 
 Plf y" 
 
 |j|p shSn- 
 
 ,^ cbiao- 
 
 -tk 
 
 yeb 
 
 ^ 
 
 mei 
 
 m 
 
 ck'u 
 
 ^ she-- 
 
 l^j -hsien 
 
 ^ -cbo 
 
 m 
 
 skih 
 
 ^ 
 
 she°- 
 
 % 
 
 -'rh 
 
 5a. -i^' 
 
 ■t^ yeb 
 
 ^t* kan 
 
 it 
 
 nan 
 
 iS 
 
 -mo 
 
 ^ 
 
 ts'un- 
 
 p^ cb'ui- 
 
 y{^ pu 
 
 T. "^°' 
 
 -^ 
 
 tsou 
 
 ^ 
 
 yao- 
 
 a 
 
 -chu 
 
 ff -*^ 
 
 3^ kuo 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^f^. 
 
 -ti; 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chin 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 /^ y- 
 
 ^B J" 
 
 it ^''^- 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 7iC 
 
 sbui- 
 
 M y" 
 
 it. t^'^- 
 
 1i -^° 
 
 Sni 
 
 skuo 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ch'ai- 
 
 \si 
 
 niit°- 
 
 tl y-''"^- 
 
 21.3. 
 
 j^ ya-s- 
 
 ^F 
 
 wai- 
 
 *. 
 
 ■shih, 
 
 % 
 
 -•ih 
 
 i§ -y^°s 
 
 P^ tso 
 
 ^ -"^ 
 
 IS 
 
 t'ou 
 
 K 
 
 diih 
 
 ±. 
 
 -sliang, 
 
 6^. -*■' 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 11 
 
 p'iao- 
 
 i?? 
 
 'bao 
 
 fr> 
 
 tou 
 
 lii t'i°S- 
 
 fE ^"=^«- 
 
 ■fjf 'bao 
 
 il 
 
 -p'o 
 
 Ii 
 
 ko 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ -cbo 
 
 f- -shaug 

 
 207-212. 
 
 ^ 1;^ T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'JEN. 
 
 
 
 ^, ch'uan, 
 
 ^ y- 
 
 g^ 
 
 kGi)- 
 
 t^J. y". 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 iif yao 
 
 M y^ 
 
 ^ -elio 
 
 ^ 
 
 -dio 
 
 :|S i« 
 
 ^ 
 
 shu- 
 
 Wi 'ia 
 
 M -''^" 
 
 ii Che 
 
 Ml 
 
 chiu 
 
 lie ^^« 
 
 m 
 
 -fu 
 
 %\ tui- 
 
 ii <=l'e- 
 
 # f6n- 
 
 flra 
 
 cli'iiig 
 
 ^^^ lun 
 
 ^ 
 
 bsiang 
 
 g^ chi-- 
 
 m -1- 
 
 # -f- 
 
 T 
 
 -liao, 
 
 J -liao 
 
 Is 
 
 fu 
 
 % ■''' 
 
 m f^"- 
 
 6>f -'i 
 
 |a 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 'la ko 
 
 pjs. 
 
 ni. 
 
 r^j -^' 
 
 m f- 
 
 ^iHI '^^' 
 
 ffrf 
 
 yu 
 
 •j'^ sbui- 
 
 
 208. 
 
 /J]J P'^ug- 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 If yii 
 
 ,1£ 
 
 chuang- 
 
 ^g -cbi 
 
 M 
 
 yi 
 
 ^. y"' 
 
 llH l'«i 
 
 ^. -nrl., 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chia 
 
 5i -"'■•» 
 
 '± 
 
 t'ai 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 Ml y^ 
 
 — • 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 /]■» hsiao 
 
 31. -"ri'> 
 
 # lun, 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 6xf, -ti- 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 /■^ lou 
 
 M p'«' 
 
 H keng 
 
 p;s. 
 
 ni: 
 
 210. 
 
 {£ 
 
 chu- 
 
 5lL -"'^'' 
 
 h -shang 
 
 •^ hsien- 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 ' ^ bsiang 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 h, -skang, 
 
 ^ ' chien 
 
 # -te 
 
 »c» 
 
 sliuo, 
 
 ji5 cbe 
 
 Bul, 
 
 pa; 
 
 ji hsia 
 
 ^ so- 
 
 M y^"" 
 
 "T 
 
 niu- 
 
 — • i- 
 
 ■ 
 
 i 
 
 <@ ko 
 
 ^. -i> 
 
 @, -se* 
 
 % 
 
 -mao 
 
 ^§ tsung 
 
 (^ 
 
 chen- 
 
 ;j^ ch'i 
 
 ^t tai 
 
 As chiao- 
 
 M 
 
 yii, 
 
 lin i-i 
 
 5^ 
 
 -chen- 
 
 r^l^ -uih, 
 
 [* -sliaug 
 
 Wi -"^-^ 
 
 4- 
 
 niu- 
 
 Ij y*i- 
 
 T 
 
 hsia 
 
 ift skuo 
 
 TM ting 
 
 T. -^'^«- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -niao 
 
 $n j« 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 tl ko 
 
 ^ ts'ao- 
 
 212. 
 
 llH 
 
 hsi 
 
 =P mao 
 
 ^ 
 
 'hao 
 
 f J 'hua 
 
 ippi mao 
 
 ■^ ts'ang 
 
 PH. 
 
 yu- 
 
 &xf. -t'' 
 
 
 chiao- 
 
 11, -urb, 
 
 £, -uih, 
 
 fl -li 
 
 
 211. 
 
 g| ^'^'^ 
 
 ^"^ 
 
 -hsin 
 
 [I^ siii- 
 
 ^ na 
 
 "k y" 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'uu- 
 
 k bsia 
 
 ^i 
 
 -ti 
 
 f^ -pien 
 
 — . i 
 
 ^t. .ni, 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 -|- shih 
 
 m. 
 
 a. 
 
 fTg ch'ib 
 
 ;j>g ken 
 
 J^ k'u 
 
 i\^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^. t'ien, 
 
 
 209. 
 
 §k tie°- 
 
 
 fi li- 
 
 m 
 
 chi"«- 
 
 -til y^^ 
 
 jE 
 
 cbeng- 
 
 i -'^ 
 
 ^ -ka».. 
 
 «^ -t'ou 
 
 % 
 
 -■rh 
 
 :^ pu 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tsai 
 
 ^i tung- 
 
 52. --1^' 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 * 
 
 pen 
 
 pjij chung- 
 
 fif 
 
 cbieb 
 
 ^ -hsi. 
 
 ;^^ wang 
 
 iB yi°- 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 )!!. -y""S' 
 
 h 
 
 -shang 
 
 Pi| 'I'o 
 
 Ifn]- 'ho- 
 
 -?^ -tzu 
 
 ^'^ 
 
 t'oaO 
 
 1^1 tao 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsou- 
 
 B^ tien 
 
 # -Pie°- 
 
 ^{J -ti 
 
 .^.i 
 
 'bung - 
 
 ^> P" 
 
 i^. 
 
 -cho. 
 
 »Tg chiu 
 
 5i -■^'^ 
 
 M «i^''- 
 
 # 
 
 liu 
 
 ^0 J" 
 
 ;@. 
 
 'hu- 
 
 ^3 -urb, 
 
 t*,, -shang, 
 
 A. -j^°' 
 
 ^ 
 
 lii 
 
 A *'^- 
 
 m 
 
 jan 
 
 ^ wu 
 
 i^ tiao 
 
 yf\ pu 
 
 m 
 
 • ti 
 
 -k '^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^ yu-- 
 
 -fH ko 
 
 1^ cli'Ueh 
 
 B* 
 
 shih- 
 
 rif, -ti 
 
 % 
 
 chea 
 
 ^Ff ■^^u 
 
 #. y^^ 
 
 rrg. ch'ih, 
 
 1^ 
 
 -'hou- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 n. 
 
 ts'u- 
 
 i 1^ 
 
 5£. -'^' 
 
 y<v pu 
 
 5i. 
 
 -urh, 
 
 [Tljl chcn 
 
 M. 
 
 -feng- 
 
 6^. -'■■' 
 
 # t- 
 
 yL* .sUao 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 JZ. -tzu 
 
 # 
 
 -pao- 
 
 ia ts'ai 
 
 %T1 
 
 
 
 
 * also slit, .' 
 
 nd sha'i. 
 
 

 
 
 ^ IHEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF TlEy. 
 
 200-207. 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ P'^ii 
 
 5iL, -'"■!'' 
 
 @ slie"- 
 
 202. 
 
 M "a 
 
 ^i tung- 
 
 :^ Inia- 
 
 ^ 'liao 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 Q'(fe ch'iao 
 7^ -clio 
 
 !fi tien 
 
 [Hj -lisi 
 
 5i -■^^' 
 
 ;j£ tsai 
 
 A t=i 
 
 ^ •^''''' 
 
 ^-5 tou 
 
 # I'^^" 
 
 m ^•'■'•^ 
 
 il. y", 
 
 )I «^'^'- 
 
 ^ -'' 
 
 W ''^^' 
 
 yj -<:h'u 
 
 ^i tien- 
 
 ^ t'iug- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 . i 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 -1 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^i -tien 
 
 Jl^ -ciiien 
 
 ^ t'ien, 
 
 m. ''«■-' 
 
 ;^. -la.; 
 
 ^ 1-' 
 
 vi ti- 
 
 M "^ 
 
 ii '^- 
 
 j^ chiu 
 
 ^ sheng 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ill -'' 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 ^ y^ 
 
 'S, ™^' 
 
 # -« 
 
 i^. •''»' 
 
 &^. -*■' 
 
 # ye"- 
 
 Ml y" 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 M '^'''"'^ 
 
 piL cliiao 
 
 . i 
 
 51 -'' 
 
 m,-' 
 
 T. 1'-- 
 
 — • i 
 
 iHl ''^ 
 
 ^ yeh 
 
 j- -sliang 
 
 m ^'"'' 
 
 201. 
 
 -^ bui 
 
 -^ chang- 
 
 i) tou 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ chih- 
 
 ^ ^^-0 
 
 5£ -'^ 
 
 ^ -cliang 
 
 i^ ">ei 
 
 7|C. '''"'' 
 
 •g" -tao 
 
 'J^ kuai 
 
 "T^ hsia 
 
 ^ chmg- 
 
 /ft chu 
 
 pf k'o 
 
 [^ hsia- 
 
 5IJ tao 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 jjilp -shei 
 
 ^ she°e- 
 
 m ti- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ chia- 
 
 T. -''^°' 
 
 ^) tou 
 
 %. -^- 
 
 +1^ -ta 
 
 i 
 
 3^ nien- 
 
 X y" 
 
 it? 'hao 
 
 205. 
 
 -7 -liao 
 
 3 [ chen 
 
 P -k'ou 
 
 ^j ch'u- 
 
 Pfl]"^ a- 
 
 m nan 
 
 — • i 
 
 A ta 
 
 5£. -"-''' 
 
 ^> -p"- 
 
 206. 
 
 n t. 
 
 ^ yeh 
 
 iA tien 
 
 "T^ hsia- 
 
 ^ -cL'u 
 
 7^ cti'eu 
 
 k '^^^ 
 
 i£ mei 
 
 ^. -t.a, 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 T. -''^°- 
 
 ^ -clio 
 
 1® -ko 
 
 {i. cl'".- 
 
 is 'hai 
 
 M y" 
 
 20:. 
 »^ yin- 
 
 ill *=''^" 
 
 -a -ei- 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 i^ niei 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 K* cbeii 
 
 t^ --- 
 
 -5^ kuang- 
 
 y^ shih 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 It -yin 
 
 '/^ nieng- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 -S. .ching 
 
 ^ -kiio 
 
 ^ lun* 
 
 ^i} -ti 
 
 il -»'^"S 
 
 PH y^' 
 
 ^. yao 
 
 Mk ti- 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ^ t'ie"- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^. -'•' 
 
 f^^ nao 
 
 .& p'i 
 
 m ^'-^ 
 
 ^ -Tl^, 
 
 .1^.ra bsi- 
 
 X y" 
 
 5§ lien- 
 
 % -urh 
 
 ^ p" 
 
 '/^ meng- 
 
 M y*i 
 
 y^ p" 
 
 |J^ -yin. 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 51. -^' 
 
 '^^ -°>^»s 
 
 5E. --i"' 
 
 A. ^=^' 
 
 % -t'ien 
 
 PJS. "i' 
 
 glc <^i"" 
 
 U^ -'' 
 
 j$ ni 
 
 :^ "''' 
 
 H. i'^- 
 
 X y" 
 
 j|l nao 
 
 M yu 
 
 sliang 
 
 :^ ^^^°- 
 
 204. 
 
 3^ kuo- 
 
 'Y -liao 
 
 K.. --1^ 
 
 — i 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 1^ sui 
 
 jr. -ch'ii 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ^ yu- 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 yf> P» 
 
 ift slmo 
 
 "T -liao. 
 
 M' shen 
 
 ^ -cli'ieti 
 
 t^. chieh, 
 
 ^ pa 
 
 H. sliih 
 -0= 
 
 203. 
 
 &^ *'- 
 
 1^^ -^i 
 
 ffi P=i 
 
 /f^t tsa- 
 
 lia ko 
 
 M 'hei- 
 
 Tic shui- 
 
 A i^'^- 
 
 IE '■■''°- 
 
 /^P^ -ni en 
 
 li nieng- 
 
 "C -hsia 
 
 gJA tien 
 • 111 
 
 ^ -cilia 
 
 h -sliang 
 
 ^5 "=^ 
 
 ^'ttS ^""?- 
 
 gl sui 
 
 y -tzu. 
 
 ^ -'^'^ 
 
 j^J yung 
 
 m '=^' 
 
 ii -y" 
 
 >y<^ mei 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 •?u» 
 
 or Vin. 
 

 
 195-200. 
 
 
 ^ ^^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGOKY OF T'lEN. 
 
 
 
 M -<='"'' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -niang 
 
 I^ chcu 
 
 X y- 
 
 ffi|- 
 
 chiao- 
 
 195. 
 M yii 
 ^ffi sui 
 
 y{x pu 
 
 h 
 
 -shang 
 
 la^ -chcn 
 
 M. ®''"o 
 
 # 
 
 -tso 
 
 itT. '•'=-' 
 
 — ■ 
 
 i 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ion 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 M. 
 
 tao- 
 
 ^h ticn 
 
 )j^ kuo- 
 
 >i^ 
 
 lo* 
 
 xf» pu 
 
 ~J\ hsia 
 
 -fll chih 
 
 — • 
 
 i 
 
 I'i -ticu 
 
 •^ t'ou 
 
 ?' 
 
 shui : 
 
 ff -te 
 
 U 
 
 tao- 
 
 A J" 
 
 T. -^■^•'' 
 
 
 tzu- 
 
 T, -liao, 
 
 l^fj -ti 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 itij ti 
 
 "6 P'a 
 
 m 
 
 -jun 
 
 U ^^«''- 
 
 ^1 sLili 
 
 ifiT 
 
 hsieh- 
 
 HE ^'-^ 
 
 \^ ye"- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ti- 
 
 u --- 
 
 i* cli'ing, 
 
 ^ 
 
 kaug 
 
 109. 
 
 :^ -'huai 
 
 + 
 
 -t'u 
 
 (lij ti 
 
 ^ c'"'" 
 
 ^. 
 
 -tzu, 
 
 pq WLU- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ 
 
 sheng- 
 
 Xg 'han 
 
 t|S pao- 
 
 m 
 
 t'a 
 
 g kuan 
 
 5|±; chuang- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chang 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 M| -tsao 
 
 # 
 
 'hui 
 
 ^ shell 
 
 ^. -cilia; 
 
 u 
 
 wan 
 
 55 na 
 
 tu J" 
 
 :i^ 
 
 pu 
 
 M. tsei, 
 
 -f^ ni 
 
 #/. 
 
 wu; 
 
 ^ --^^ 
 
 1-. >-' 
 
 t 
 
 k'ea 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 H-ij- ohiao 
 
 ;i 
 
 shih 
 
 tr ta- 
 
 f|j nao 
 
 M 
 
 shih 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ tien 
 
 ti: 
 
 shih- 
 
 f^g, -Shan, 
 
 n -te 
 
 bJl, 
 
 shuo, 
 
 Wi tung- 
 
 "t^ yeh 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chieh 
 
 ^ t'ioa 
 
 i^ ma- 
 
 « 
 
 chen 
 
 ?f!j -hsing 
 
 ^^ 'hao 
 
 ± 
 
 -shang 
 
 i>Q p'a 
 
 fp -yang 
 
 :i 
 
 shih 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 0j wei- 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 Hg ch'ing- 
 
 A Jen- 
 
 M 
 
 tsei- 
 
 B# shih- 
 
 J^ -nan. 
 
 pj 
 
 k'o 
 
 >)> -PU- 
 
 &xf -ti> 
 
 
 p'i- 
 
 tsei- 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 5£, -url^, 
 
 198. 
 IE cheug 
 
 61 
 
 shao 
 
 ti. 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 il* 
 
 ku 
 
 ^5 na 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 
 197. 
 
 1. P- 
 
 ^ chih 
 
 61 
 
 -ti. 
 
 \n ko 
 
 ^ chuang- 
 
 i^ 
 
 mei 
 
 19G. 
 
 ^^ tso 
 
 
 200. 
 
 fi t'e"S 
 
 ^ -chia 
 
 m 
 
 yii 
 
 % ti 
 
 ^ tse"- 
 
 ^ 
 
 lei- 
 
 "(l^ t'iao 
 
 ^t{ ch'u 
 
 X 
 
 y» 
 
 M ch'i 
 
 1^ -mo 
 
 M 
 
 sheng 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ± t'u 
 
 m 
 
 p'an 
 
 h shang- 
 
 1^ ts'ai 
 
 A 
 
 ta- 
 
 M yu 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 M. 
 
 yii; 
 
 ^ - -shcug 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 yil- 
 
 m tie"- 
 
 Q^ shih- 
 
 M 
 
 >1 »> 
 
 hei- 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 ^ -kou^ 
 
 ^>^ 
 
 tie°- 
 
 5i -'>i^ 
 
 -^ -'hou 
 
 ^e 
 
 -chia 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ;fcb chieh- 
 
 £ 
 
 -rh 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^i. -urh, 
 
 e 
 
 pai- 
 
 ^, yiin; 
 
 ]^ -chu; 
 
 4\ 
 
 hsiao, 
 
 6§ -*' 
 
 i^ che 
 
 
 
 -jih 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 3& shui 
 
 X 
 
 yu 
 
 :^^ wang 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 u^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^ ch'i 
 
 i@, hsiang 
 
 pj 
 
 k'o- 
 
 "Tt -hsia 
 
 Plf y*i 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 N hsia 
 
 fi "^^ 
 
 J^ii 
 
 -i 
 
 tr. ta, 
 
 ^ ts'ai 
 
 # 
 
 chu 
 
 [^ -Chiang 
 
 V -liao 
 
 SJt 
 
 shuo 
 
 0R yen- 
 
 ;^ ahih 
 
 
 tie"- 
 
 tl^ -'■ 
 
 — • i 
 
 A 
 
 jen 
 
 glj -ch'ou- 
 
 jt? 'hao 
 
 ^ 
 
 .'rh 
 
 j^ shih 
 
 1^ 'hui 
 
 1?^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 # -cho 
 
 fi y" 
 
 &^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 li. y": 
 
 -31 -tzu, 
 
 il$ 
 
 p'i- 
 
 % Chi- 
 
 PjS. ''■; 
 
 T. 
 
 hsia, 
 
 X y"" 
 
 
 
 
 • ?o, or lao. 
 
 + )/o, or j/a. 
 
 

 
 
 ^ ^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF VIEN. 
 
 189-154. 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 Q i- 
 
 !f^ sliao 
 
 n -li 
 
 ix. ta 
 
 n -te 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 If -ching 
 
 ^. -lai; 
 
 *. -ch'U; 
 
 pjf yii 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 It y'^^ 
 
 ~f\ hsia- 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 i 
 
 ^^ -lai; 
 
 T' liao- 
 
 ^ t'icD 
 
 Pif -yii 
 
 fg. shih 
 
 is ko 
 
 P^ chih 
 
 4^ -pu- 
 
 PJS. "i. 
 
 B/d. ni. 
 
 jlpf P'Dg 
 
 JR. I'-^^g' 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 #. ■'- 
 
 194. 
 
 193. 
 
 n '' 
 
 j^ chiu 
 
 ^ -0 
 
 190. 
 
 1^ - 
 
 ^ pan 
 
 ^ chung 
 
 i^ mei 
 
 # -«1^° 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 1^ yeh 
 
 T' -liao, 
 
 J -liao 
 
 M 'hei 
 
 ?iP "^a 
 
 5i lien 
 
 ^^ san 
 
 it '=^^' 
 
 fi yi"^- 
 
 31 -"^'^ 
 
 ^ uien 
 
 ^ -lien 
 
 1^. ching, 
 
 ,^ ts'ai 
 
 5i -1^ 
 
 ^. tsou; 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 :4l^ -I'"- 
 
 V^ man 
 
 piL chiao 
 
 T* liao. 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ 'Hang- 
 
 ^ -tuan- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 1^ cbieh 
 
 191. 
 
 1^ fang 
 
 >J'|' -chou 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^ bsing- 
 
 (g yin- 
 
 P^ tso. 
 
 ^ isou 
 
 ^ chin 
 
 ^, Shan, 
 
 -^ -ton 
 
 Etr -yi 
 
 5£ -urh 
 
 5lJ tao 
 
 ^., Chmg, 
 
 ^ 'liou- 
 
 5^. -ti. 
 
 ^ -urh 
 
 ^ wan. 
 
 ]^ t'i 
 
 ^ tso 
 
 S^ -t'ou 
 
 i^, 'hu- 
 
 p;s. "'• 
 
 p -shang 
 
 ^ pie°- 
 
 ^f -cho 
 
 Wt *='"" 
 
 M Jaa 
 
 192. 
 
 "TJ hsia- 
 
 la -Til 
 
 ~~'. urh 
 
 gg kOn 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 il, -y". 
 
 _h, shang, 
 
 S t'ao 
 
 M ■'^^o 
 
 ^ rie°- 
 
 ■pf k'o 
 
 1^ >aeng- 
 
 Aj yao 
 
 :^. ch'e, 
 
 
 31 --^^ 
 
 It y'" 
 
 M -Jan 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 ^ tsou 
 
 K ciiih 
 
 Jt, s''a"S' 
 
 fl *« 
 
 M -chien 
 
 ^ k'uei 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 "^ P'a 
 
 U -^i- 
 
 y^ P« 
 
 3fl shan- 
 
 — • i 
 
 ^ 'Huang 
 
 ^ Sllill 
 
 ^wi: ^^ei- 
 
 ^, ch'en,^ 
 
 ^ -tien 
 
 ji -ko 
 
 J'^ 'Ho 
 
 ^t^ cliao 
 
 1^^ -ti 
 
 j£ yuan- 
 
 — • i 
 
 ^ hang 
 
 m t'i 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 tr ta 
 
 it yua°- 
 
 fA, -^^^''' 
 
 f^ shan 
 
 f* -shang. 
 
 
 J -liao 
 
 5a -•'•'' 
 
 :ta P=i 
 
 Hg chao- 
 
 llir cu'ien 
 
 ff- shih- 
 
 '^^ san 
 
 &^ -'■ 
 
 -fia ko 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 j^ -mo 
 
 ta li-s^ 
 
 -|^-^ tsai 
 
 ^ 'hai 
 
 Ij^ hsien 
 
 ^^ chao 
 
 ^ tung. 
 
 #1 -ko 
 
 M ^^- 
 
 :^ -tzii 
 
 itt: -hsieh 
 
 /f J ts'u° - 
 
 ^ hsi 
 
 y^, sban, 
 
 31 -"^ 
 
 D;^ hsia- 
 
 IE. -urh, 
 
 ^. -'^li, 
 
 PJS. ^''' 
 
 iP na 
 
 ^r ta- 
 
 ^^ -k'u 
 
 ^ lien 
 
 ^ 'hou 
 
 or 
 
 Wt "^'"^ 
 
 [3^, shan, 
 
 T> -''^°; 
 
 ^ ch'e 
 
 >f\ pu 
 
 ^ sLan 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 K chih 
 
 4^ pan- 
 
 ^ tai 
 
 ^^ chao 
 
 5i lien- 
 
 S lu- 
 
 It p'- 
 
 A yell 
 
 A Jen 
 
 i£ tie°- 
 
 3§ -lien 
 
 ;;?IC sLui 
 
 :^ shih 
 
 ?I -11 
 
 f*fi tiao 
 
 ^ -Vh 
 
 >/f> -pu- 
 
 {y^i shan, 
 
 Jllj Pieb 
 
 gl ^1"" 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^^ -ti, 
 
 1^ -tuan, &c. 
 
 # ping 
 
 ^ ch'u 
 
 ^ f- 
 
 ^ 'Huang 
 
 "TT hsia- 
 
 
 ^> P" 
 
 la -urh 
 
 ^ -cb'i 
 
 ?Rr 'Ho 
 
 ^ -ch'i 

 
 180-189. 
 
 T'IEN-LE1> CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 f3^ sLan ; 
 
 pjf k'o- 
 
 \>^ - 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 ftfi t'a 
 
 ^E tsai 
 
 ^P "a- 
 
 li -rh 
 
 p^^ -Shan. 
 
 189. 
 
 I^l) kang- 
 
 If -ts«ai 
 
 ^ shan- 
 
 ^ -tien 
 
 i>^, shan, 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ife <=^"" 
 
 D^ bsia- 
 
 T -liao 
 
 ^ to. 
 
 5^ ken 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 
 -B- shih 
 
 -fin '^o 
 
 Jl keng 
 |j5 p'a- 
 
 l^l) kang 
 
 ^ chien 
 
 ^ -'' 
 
 ^ mei 
 
 J -liao 
 
 M^ 
 
 rh 
 
 7L» 
 
 18! 
 :^ nu 
 
 1^ shih 
 
 ^% ching 
 
 ■^ -tzS 
 
 ^ shu 
 
 H, t'ou, 
 
 4pi na 
 
 ' i 
 
 |Hl mieu 
 
 yj'» bsiao 
 
 la cbing 
 
 J ' -tzii 
 
 ^ tui- 
 
 l\ M chao 
 
 i|5 na 
 
 ^ 'hou- 
 
 H -t'ou 
 
 ^ yen- 
 
 Ji -i- 
 
 -^ -tzu, 
 
 ■t^ yeh 
 
 fjjL chiao 
 
 ig^ liich* 
 
 yj> Lsiao 
 
 T' -liao, 
 
 — ' i 
 
 iA tio»- 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 ^ t'icn 
 
 ^ 'huaa 
 
 tr ta. 
 
 f3^ -shan 
 
 ~~" i 
 
 B^ sbih 
 
 F^ chih 
 
 tS P'a 
 
 ;;:f^ pu- 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 186. 
 
 Q pai 
 
 ^ shan 
 
 QS chao 
 
 A j^°- 
 
 ^ shan 
 
 H2 chao 
 
 i9^ yao- 
 
 187. 
 
 P^ shan- 
 
 ^T -tien 
 
 fl shih 
 
 |5Cj -ti 
 
 j||3 p'Ong- 
 
 ill! ti 
 
 ^ ton 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 184. 
 
 ^^ tien 
 
 ;;^ shih 
 
 It Yin. 
 
 H l«ih 
 
 M ch'i 
 
 ^ pi- 
 
 ith -tz'fi 
 
 it Chi- 
 
 lij -eh'u 
 
 3^ -lai 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^/^ huo 
 
 3^ kua°s- 
 
 ^ y^ 
 
 ^ -'rh 
 
 ;& shih 
 
 5a 
 
 she°8- 
 -'rh 
 
 ^ k'o 
 
 ^ chiu 
 ;^ shih 
 "^t tien. 
 
 185. 
 
 PM yii 
 
 Pj* k'o 
 -^ shih 
 
 # -t6 
 
 A J'^n 
 
 i{^ shuo, 
 
 -& shih 
 
 ^ chi 
 
 ■jjr shih. 
 
 182, 
 
 ^ fu- 
 
 -^ -mu 
 
 S^ ken- 
 
 "lilf -ch'ien, 
 
 15 ton 
 
 j^i5 chu- 
 
 j^ -mo 
 
 H^. -ni ! 
 
 i\ ni 
 
 ^[£ nan- 
 
 ^ -tao 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 tr ta 
 
 f^ 
 
 E9 lei- 
 
 f$ -P'l 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 )&, -ch'eng? 
 
 183. 
 
 /> pa 
 
 yg yiieh 
 
 ?M -li 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 j{^ shou 
 
 B4 cl 
 
 m lei 
 
 liao 
 
 clion- 
 
 181. 
 
 U^ tso 
 
 _^l|, -"ill 
 
 H4 chiao 
 
 M lei 
 
 H P'i 
 
 M "^- 
 
 'fi -ko 
 
 A, j«i. 
 
 li t'iug- 
 
 Jl^ -chien 
 
 ^ shuo 
 
 ■^ shih 
 
 ilfi P'ng 
 
 ^(X. mei 
 
 # tso 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 ^^ 'huai 
 
 S-i shih ; 
 
 Jg. tsu 
 
 ^ chien- 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 .<4» chin 
 
 ^ sheng 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 f^ k'ua 
 
 * /iit'7i also liao, and Zio.
 
 ^ Wi '^'1EN-LJ^^> CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 173-18*. 
 
 ^ ko 
 -ife chiao 
 ^ lei, 
 
 BS t'ing- 
 
 Jl^ -cliien 
 
 ^[^ na 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ Bhc"e - 
 
 ^ -^ 
 ^ -yu- 
 
 ;\j) Lsiu 
 ^ cLiu 
 i^ 'huang 
 
 7. '''■^°- 
 
 180.- 
 m lei 
 
 ^g clii 
 'f'p tso- 
 
 A. Jen, 
 ^ 'liuo 
 ^ ch'eng- 
 
 nit- 
 
 4fJ -ching 
 'j^ k'uai- 
 
 -Mr sliih 
 
 ^ -Pie°- 
 
 A. •'^^°' 
 
 -^ 'liui 
 
 -tsan 
 
 na -ko 
 
 A j^'> 
 
 2|? slicng- 
 
 i^ -iiiing 
 
 if?? vuan- 
 
 A -t^ 
 
 tjf, -ti 
 
 
 m 
 
 178. 
 II i 
 
 t'ing, 
 
 cLc- 
 
 -ko 
 
 lei- 
 
 !^ pu- 
 
 |S|f -tuan 
 
 ^p hsiang ; 
 
 |J chib 
 
 ;fe sliih 
 
 ii^ chao 
 
 /if "^"0 
 
 Yf sbih. 
 
 11 
 
 p'i 
 
 B^„ 
 
 ni. 
 
 imi 
 
 179 
 
 lEcn!'- 
 
 M -ku- 
 
 ^ -ting 
 
 ijff -ti 
 
 :^J" ta 
 
 "7 -liao 
 
 ^ pu- 
 ss -hsiao 
 
 _^ 11 an- 
 
 A. -Jen, 
 
 ^tl 'hai 
 
 M "a 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 -^ -hsiao 
 
 <^ kUDg- 
 
 ^^ -P'o 
 
 Hf^ -ti 
 
 -k °"- 
 
 A, -j'-'n, 
 
 Bi t'iDg- 
 
 Jl, -chicn 
 :JT ta- 
 rn -lei, 
 ft^ t'a 
 Pf k'o- 
 ^ -chiu 
 '[^ 'liuang 
 J ^ -liao. 
 
 177. 
 
 y^ ch'iu 
 
 ^ wen 
 
 A ta 
 
 ^» ming, 
 
 ft 'liung 
 
 ^ lei 
 
 "b" kuan 
 
 I^, urh; 
 
 W. ^''^ 
 
 -& sliih 
 
 M cb'ens;- 
 
 ^ yuob 
 
 ^ wan 
 
 >)^ wu 
 
 d^ .sbou- 
 
 ;;!; -cli'eng 
 
 Iji sbih- 
 
 ^ -'bou 
 
 -tli yeb 
 
 3<- yao 
 
 l{^ sbou 
 
 Irf-. sbting 
 
 7o i'=^°- 
 
 175. 
 
 m 
 
 lei 
 
 sbib 
 
 It Yin 
 
 ^ Ya'^- 
 Zl/*-b 
 
 H. <='^''' 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^ pan- 
 
 ^ -bsu- 
 
 ^ -k'ung 
 
 ^ -li 
 
 Z^ chiao- 
 
 ^ -kuag 
 
 :|g cbuang 
 
 ^i bsiang. 
 17G. 
 
 '1^' -cb'ang 
 
 1" l'^' 
 
 174. 
 
 i 
 
 sbih 
 
 ^ tung- 
 ^ -t'ion 
 
 It ^- 
 
 It Yang 
 
 ;J| ning. 
 
 ^1 -cbu 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^p cb'un- 
 
 j^ -t'ien 
 
 '. urb 
 
 ^ yueh 
 
 1$ fa- 
 {f{ cb'u 
 
 lE -'rh 
 
 ^g cben- 
 ^ -tung 
 ^ ti 
 
 ^ .so- 
 
 j ^ wan 
 if^ wu 
 
 II ^- 
 
 ^, -sbeng; 
 
 ^!j tao 
 
 ^ cb'ju- 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 /\ pa 
 
 ^i -'rh 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 gi bbili- 
 
 ^ -'bou 
 
 1:3 -urh, 
 
 ^ yUn- 
 
 ^ -t«'ai 
 
 fMj- chiao 
 
 ± t'ai- 
 
 It -yang 
 
 nS cbao- 
 
 
 -te 
 
 cliin- 
 
 J@. 'buang- 
 Mj -'kuang 
 
 ff-4- chiao 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^. ekien, 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 Pf k'o- 
 
 ^^ yao 
 
 H^ cb'ing 
 
 7. 'iao, 
 
 =5. 
 
 -yu 
 
 e -urb 
 
 it sbuD 
 
 ;;& sbih 
 
 J^% wan 
 
 !t^ sbao 
 
 Bra. <=k'iDg.
 
 16S-173. 
 
 T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 jp^ ch'ao- 
 
 1^ -ch'ao 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 -^ t'iao 
 
 ^ fang- 
 
 ^^ chih- 
 
 ^ -chu 
 
 > i 
 
 feb chuan 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^^ cliien 
 
 T, -liao, 
 
 M °^ 
 
 -&. sbih 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 H -sliang 
 
 ,^ laoj 
 
 "TC -lisia 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 &§ -ti 
 
 M y"- 
 3^<? 
 
 /lyp. 
 
 szu. 
 
 173. 
 :% lao- 
 
 ^ -yeh 
 
 tjr -slia°- 
 
 ^„ tsou. 
 
 171. 
 
 cli'un- 
 
 -tien 
 
 S. tsao- 
 ^1^ cliiu 
 
 
 yon- 
 •S- chans 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 -& shih 
 
 ~T\ hsia- 
 
 ji. -yti, 
 
 iiii ti- 
 
 ^ -cb'i 
 
 M fan 
 
 K" sLang 
 
 ^ -lai 
 liao. 
 
 T 
 
 ^ 
 
 172. 
 
 cli'iu- 
 
 mo 
 
 Q^ shih 
 
 j^ -'hou 
 
 5£, -urh, 
 
 ft wang- 
 
 ' f¥ -wang 
 
 Jl, cbien 
 
 >9> k ung 
 
 ^ -cbung 
 
 ^ -cbu 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ~T^ hsia- 
 
 ^ -luie"- 
 
 ^. -•:> 
 
 -^1 tao 
 
 j^ mei 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 Pi y" 
 
 "T liao. 
 
 170. 
 
 '(^ man 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 -^ ta 
 
 ^ pien- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 ff} -cL'u 
 
 tfa' iian- 
 
 gg Lsi- 
 
 ^. ''^''- 
 
 1*5 -mo 
 
 ^I cbih- 
 
 jg| -tao 
 
 iW che 
 
 -fEI -ko 
 
 {fg cb'uan 
 
 ft wang 
 
 ^a -'r^ 
 
 > 
 
 ■^ -cb'u 
 
 ~T^ -bsia 
 ^n cb'io* 
 
 ^ P" 
 
 :S cbih 
 
 ;{^ yii 
 
 Wk '^^° 
 
 M. 'bei, 
 ::?i wang- 
 le -sbang 
 H^ t cb'iao 
 ^J tao 
 -^ sbih 
 
 1^ mi- 
 J^ -i 
 
 •/^ -i^eng 
 
 S '^'^ 
 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 '1^ k'uai 
 
 ~J\ bsia- 
 
 "jT liao. 
 
 169. 
 ^7C t'ien- 
 
 K -sbang 
 "^ cb'ing- 
 
 ^ liang- 
 ;^ lia°s- 
 
 ^ -'A 
 
 f> 
 
 tou 
 
 ^H sbih 
 
 5£ -urb 
 
 ^ cb'u 
 
 Kj" cb'iang 
 
 fill t'=» 
 
 ilvf -til 
 
 m yng- 
 
 f^ 
 
 r67. 
 
 % k'an 
 ^ -tieu 
 
 i© 
 
 -ti 
 
 wu- 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 ■ A; -tsai 
 
 ;|| uing- 
 
 II -cbii 
 
 ^- -cbo ! 
 
 J^ cb'a- 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 ^ to- 
 
 ^;| '^'"'^ 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ~K hsia 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ■»* -liao. 
 
 IGS. 
 
 g -ch'i 
 ^ kao 
 tIH? cli'i 
 
 .106. 
 ^ cb'ca 
 
 y^ -cbo 
 
 j^ cbu 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 "f^ bsia- 
 
 ^ t'ic°- 
 
 ^ 'hun- 
 
 .^ -'hun 
 
 1^ cb'en- 
 
 M "*'^''"' 
 
 1^^ -ti, 
 
 tsei 
 
 ^15 
 
 ^ pie°- 
 
 la -"^ 
 
 ^- k'an- 
 
 ;^ -pu- 
 
 -fe, yeh 
 
 ^ ^ei 
 
 Jj/^\ pi 
 
 H^ fang- 
 
 #, Pei, 
 
 ^ ^«- 
 
 JP^ -men 
 
 "pf 'bo 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 "g" Pai 
 
 ^ ping- 
 
 R?r cbiu 
 
 * c/i'io also read ch'iich. f c/t'jao also written Bffi ± ?ao also read lo.
 
 ^ |g T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 ^IJ tui 
 mien 
 
 >?» I"' 
 
 ^^ cliien 
 
 R^ ch'iao 
 
 ;^ -pu- 
 
 ^ -clicn 
 ^ tao 
 
 IE, -"'•^ 
 
 ;^ ch'e 
 Pf k'o 
 
 ^ tsou 
 
 PJS. ni? 
 
 # i 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 1^ shuo 
 
 j^ tsa- 
 
 'jf^ -men 
 
 ^ lisieh 
 
 4i pan 
 
 ^ t'ie°- 
 
 IE. -•^' 
 
 ^X ta 
 
 y^ tSO 
 
 ^. chien, 
 
 ^ teng 
 
 ^jp] shang- 
 
 ^6p -wu 
 
 B^ ch'ing 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 ^^ tsai 
 
 ^ ch'i- 
 
 ^ -shen 
 
 II sLong 
 
 T -liao ; 
 
 %, «="> 
 
 [jj r-cli'u 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 ;i sLib 
 
 •^ -cli'i ; 
 
 1 
 
 t'eng- 
 
 -t'fing 
 
 -ti 
 
 clie 
 
 -*^ 
 
 ;^ t'len- 
 •^ 'bun 
 
 
 ti- 
 
 "San 
 -ti. 
 
 165. 
 
 ch'e 
 
 Pf k'o 
 
 ^ t'ao 
 
 sbang 
 
 -liao, 
 wai- 
 
 ± 
 
 T. 
 
 II -t'ou 
 
 I"* bsia- 
 
 m -^" 
 
 ■^ sben 
 
 ■^" sbou 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^^ cbien 
 
 ^ chang,- 
 
 ^ cli'u- 
 
 ^^ -cb'u 
 
 iH li"- 
 
 lE -1^ 
 
 '(y sbih 
 
 § yiin- 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^J sbih- 
 
 !ii^ -tsai 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ^^ k'an 
 
 PX -• 
 
 163. 
 
 ra szu- 
 
 M mie° - 
 
 IE -'A 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 ^ cb'i 
 
 J -liao 
 
 P# yin- 
 
 P# -yia 
 
 ta cb'en- 
 
 i^ -cb'en 
 
 # yun- 
 
 ^, -ts'ai, 
 
 tl^ P'a 
 
 nC -bsia 
 
 5 
 
 164. 
 
 yiu- 
 
 -cb'i 
 cbii- 
 
 % -kan 
 )^ cbing- 
 J§? -cbing 
 
 r/j. -ti- 
 
 161. 
 f^ ni 
 
 Si t'ing 
 
 ^ yUn- 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 fl -11 
 
 1^ -t'ou 
 
 P^ 'liu- 
 
 Ug -lu 
 
 Pf 'bu- 
 
 ^ -lu 
 
 0^ -ti 
 
 ^ yun- 
 
 ^3 -mo- 
 
 ^^ -lisiang, 
 ^ chih 
 
 t& P'a 
 
 '^ yi 
 
 :^ ta 
 
 M yii 
 
 ^ lai 
 
 J -liao. 
 
 IGO. 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 1. -sbaug 
 
 ' i 
 
 >r P''e°- 
 31 -'A 
 — ' i 
 
 )r P'ie°- 
 
 lE -'ri> 
 
 •^ cb'ing- 
 '^ -cb'ius: 
 
 il 
 
 -1110 
 
 X'5 cb'iao 
 
 rKj -ti 
 
 X yu 
 
 :fa pa 
 
 ^ yUn- 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 Ifi tou 
 
 p^ cb'ui 
 
 «5r -sau 
 
 J -liao. 
 
 160. 
 
 ^4* pen- 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 :^ sbih 
 
 m ko 
 
 Pt yin- 
 
 ^ -t'ie° - 
 
 B4- cbiao 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 |it|| cben 
 
 V@ liu- 
 
 ^g -liu 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 lE -'rh 
 
 :fa pa 
 
 — ' i 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^§ -ti 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 iTi tou 
 
 Ig kua- 
 
 # -te 
 
 
 1S8-1C5. 
 
 ir 
 
 -tuan 
 
 7. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 '=11' 
 
 yiin 
 
 ^ 
 
 sbih 
 
 IE- 
 
 yun. 
 
 '^* 
 
 bsia 
 
 ^ 
 
 sbih 
 
 w. 
 
 hsia 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao. 
 
 iE 
 
 159. 
 die 
 
 ^ 
 
 bsich 
 
 
 
 jik 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tzti 
 
 ^> 
 
 pu 
 
 J^ cb'uan 
 
 % kan 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 ^ 'bao 
 
 ^ ynng- 
 
 ^ -• 
 
 f^ P'an 
 
 •^ -cho 
 
 na ko 
 
 |)^ yin- 
 
 ^ -fie"- 
 
 3L -^^^ 
 
 if P'iei- 
 
 li P'io°- 
 
 lE -^ 
 
 i~ cbe-
 
 147-158. 
 
 ^ ^^ T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 
 '^, yun, 
 |J|; chtn 
 
 ^^ --rh 
 ^ cLiu 
 p^ ch'ui 
 
 "T -liao. 
 
 157. 
 5^P na 
 
 ^ yiia- 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 0\^ tao, 
 
 p^ ch'ui 
 jf pu 
 
 Eff tuan. 
 
 158. 
 ^ cli'i- 
 
 %/ -cli'u 
 
 Mi sLih 
 
 <^ 
 
 yun 
 
 ^ 'liai 
 / (^ tsai 
 
 k'uai 
 
 tXi ju- 
 
 -^ -cliiu 
 Bij* cbiao 
 
 pji» ch'ui 
 
 yj -cb'u 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ^^ cli'ing 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 j±J pai 
 
 155. 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 r. -shaug 
 
 ia -ko 
 
 jj.^ y"'o 
 
 1^ ch'ao 
 
 1^ -ch'ao 
 
 IJ^J. -*'' 
 
 'ilj tao 
 
 -^^ hsiang 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ t'iao 
 
 11 lung 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^jj na 
 
 31 -'* 
 
 -;|^ shui 
 
 156. 
 
 P'il szu 
 
 ^ cliou- 
 
 @ -wei 
 
 ;{i^ k6»- 
 
 5a. -!=> 
 
 ^I> 
 
 tou 
 .Mj sbih 
 lib hsieh 
 
 ^] tsou 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 .±. ch'u 
 
 153. 
 7^ ts'ai 
 
 yun 
 
 -^ i 
 
 ^ fang 
 
 A J^° 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ft^ nan 
 
 # te 
 
 ^ ch'iu- 
 
 -^ -ch'ang 
 
 t^^ -ti 
 
 EH szu. 
 
 m 
 
 154. 
 
 yiia 
 
 ij^ shou 
 ^ wu 
 
 B. shih 
 
 It ^''- 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 chcn 
 
 ,ns_ 
 
 Jil f^' 
 
 5£ -'rh 
 
 |^,S kua 
 ^J" -cho 
 ]?§ p'ao 
 liao. 
 
 T. 
 
 151. 
 
 m 
 
 lou 
 
 fSi ni 
 
 m -ko 
 
 A j^" 
 
 i: t'ai 
 
 fi^ lan- 
 
 £? -san ; 
 
 ® shc°- 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 ^^ shih 
 
 ^1) tou 
 
 •^i shih 
 
 tf ^sing- 
 
 ^ yun- 
 
 j^^ shui; 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 jgW kuo 
 
 1^ ts'ao 
 
 %. -urh 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 TX: ^an 
 
 152. 
 
 1^ yii 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 Bra ch'ing 
 
 y, -liao; 
 
 ^i* yiin- 
 
 ^. -ts'ai 
 
 man 
 
 ion 
 
 J^ chicn 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 %\ 
 
 % t'i 
 
 ^{J -ti 
 
 ^ wu- 
 
 M. -^'''•' 
 
 ^p ch'iich 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 itb hsieh 
 
 X^ -urh 
 
 y|t tan- 
 
 i^i^^ tan- 
 
 -a shih 
 
 JH ko 
 
 ^ t'ien ; 
 
 It y'° 
 
 >^ pu 
 
 1^ 'hui 
 
 [^ hsia- 
 
 Mo -y"- 
 
 150. 
 
 <i4^ man 
 
 'j\, t'ien 
 
 JL -shaug 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 _^. yun, 
 
 H -' 
 
 ^ -cho 
 
 m -ti 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 gg^ -lisi, 
 
 -^ tsao 
 
 ^ hsieh 
 
 !;|J -urii 
 
 l}^ shou 
 
 j^ -chin 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 Sa pa. 
 
 148. 
 
 4i pan 
 
 ji ko 
 
 % to 
 
 ^ yueh 
 
 chien 
 
 
 li 
 
 -'rh 
 
 5^ lien 
 
 ^g yin 
 
 -^ t'ien, 
 
 ^ ts'ai 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 pS tsao- 
 
 m -^'^ 
 
 ^ -hsi 
 
 !/S, "'• 
 
 K 
 
 149. 
 chih
 
 
 ^ *|| T'lEN-LET, CATEGORY OF T'IEN. 
 
 139-147. 
 
 n -li 
 
 145. 
 
 :f^ 'Ima- 
 
 jJi -k 
 
 ^? -Jan 
 
 ^ -lia'«- 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 ^ kuu- 
 
 ^t?„ -'-• 
 
 /^ 'bou 
 
 — • i 
 
 51 -'rk 
 
 ^ cbuang- 
 
 i^ -'liau 
 
 144. 
 
 — • i 
 
 i)t k'uai 
 
 nj£. °i, 
 
 ^ -chia 
 
 fff, -ti 
 
 ^ clii"- 
 
 ^ Pio"- 
 
 W y"-^- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 U ^°" 
 
 y^ 
 
 ^a -Th 
 
 5t -^ 
 
 # -ts'ai 
 
 m ^'- 
 
 ^t ''^" 
 
 -jp -tza 
 
 'i -1^0 
 
 j\^ pao 
 
 :ta p=^ 
 
 it^ -ti 
 
 5^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ to 
 
 15^ -*• 
 
 "l' -liao. 
 
 ^ yiieb- 
 
 -p kung- 
 
 T. ■^'"°' 
 
 7. liao, 
 
 ^ ytin- 
 
 143. 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 ^ -fa 
 
 '^ hsiang 
 
 ^ eliih 
 
 ^. -ts'ai, 
 
 Big cb'ing 
 
 ti tang- 
 
 ■ 51. -"•'' 
 
 M clie 
 
 -^ yao 
 
 ^1 y" 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 'jj -cliu 
 
 ^g» yiiu- 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 ^ t'icu 
 
 i 
 
 ^^ -ti • 
 
 T« -''^<'- 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^ wan- 
 
 p. -sUang 
 
 jr P''*^"- 
 
 B Jil- 
 
 .^ 142. 
 
 Wt ^^"" 
 
 ^ li- 
 
 u -- 
 
 £ -'rb- 
 
 ^. -t-, 
 
 j^ che 
 
 ^ P'" 
 
 Ttff. WU- 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 — • i 
 
 i©. '!>»- 
 
 ^ Pic°- 
 
 V^' nian 
 
 ^ yuu- 
 
 1 
 
 jr p'''^"- 
 
 ^ -j^'i 
 
 ^ -'rk 
 
 T. "=^«- 
 
 IJxf. -ti, 
 
 §h ti°"- 
 
 JE --^ 
 
 ;^ tang. 
 
 ^M y'"- 
 
 140. 
 
 3> to- 
 
 ^ -'' 
 
 l^f/. -ti. 
 
 — . i 
 
 # -te 
 
 A p=^ 
 
 ff -tsaa 
 
 W y^- 
 
 '(^ hsiang 
 
 ^ k'uai- 
 
 ^ C sbui 
 
 ^ yuck 
 
 |j| ts'ai 
 
 #. t^''-^!. 
 
 ■7 ^ sbui 
 
 ^ ksi 
 
 1^ ling- 
 
 -|- skih- 
 
 J^ Sliih 
 
 ::A: ta- 
 
 W PO- 
 
 . 1 
 
 ^i ta- 
 
 7r,. -^'^' 
 
 li ko 
 
 ^? -cilia 
 
 'iR -ka-- 
 
 ^ k'uai 
 
 5^ -'rk 
 
 ® yiin 
 
 
 111 '1^0- 
 
 5£ -^ 
 
 &^. -^'' 
 
 ^ sbik- 
 
 ^ cbe 
 
 yZ t'ien 
 
 ^l -^ 
 
 4pl sbib- 
 
 [Jtj szti 
 
 &xf -'■' 
 
 ^. ykek, 
 
 P;"S. ni. 
 
 ;^ cbiu 
 
 6^f. -t'' 
 
 |\ bsia 
 
 ^5 na 
 
 it *^''^^s 
 
 U7. 
 
 JZ t'ica 
 
 ^'^ p'an 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 M -1' 
 
 ^ pie". 
 
 P yiick 
 
 •^ -cho 
 
 g£ pan- 
 
 /^ ch'i 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 -J- skik- 
 
 Pt yia 
 
 ~T» lisia- 
 
 gs -pan 
 
 ^_ yun, 
 
 5^ 'bnan 
 
 ^. -^"' 
 
 j -liao, 
 
 pff -yii 
 
 m tien- 
 
 Pj k'o 
 
 ^ sbih 
 
 ^^. ksiiok 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 Py^. ni- 
 
 li -tien 
 
 U *- 
 
 1® ko 
 
 tr t^' 
 
 K tsia- 
 
 14G. 
 
 flf^. -*'' 
 
 iu '■''' 
 
 0^ cb'ing 
 
 il^„ teng. 
 
 M -y^ 
 
 — ' i 
 
 •^ bsiang 
 
 i^ ^ei 
 
 ^ t'ie"- 
 
 141. 
 
 i^-. ^' 
 
 M -'=° 
 
 ^ yell 
 
 #[i P'" 
 
 12.. -1^' 
 
 A *=^ 
 
 ^j^ wai 
 
 ^ to 
 
 11 '^'^ 
 
 vi> '"^"' 
 
 f& yiin- 
 
 ^ yliok- 
 
 □ « -t'ou 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 ^ mao 
 
 A j^° 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^ -hang 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^^ pu 
 
 52. -'' 
 
 Wt "'"" 
 
 Wi ''°- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 W ^^- 
 
 -j; lisia 
 
 il^ skill- 
 
 sO shuo 
 
 # -te 
 
 ^ t'ie"- 
 
 M -"^° 
 
 Pff. -y^' 
 
 &^. -t'- 
 
 ^' yUn- 
 
 — ' I 
 
 51. '^»^' 
 
 '>Q p'a 
 
 i^ ti 
 
 
 5p -ts'ai 
 
 ^ pie°- 
 
 ;^. '1^"- 

 
 132-139. 
 
 ^ ^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'1£K. 
 
 ^ k'uai 
 
 t^ fang- 
 
 ■^p shih 
 
 ^^ yun 
 
 ■jfr t'un 
 
 ^S wu 
 
 H5J chii. 
 
 138. 
 
 ~*. urh 
 
 A p'' 
 
 ^, yueh, 
 ^" k'an 
 I^ ch'iao 
 
 ^ ch'ung- 
 
 'Wj -chhiDg 
 
 & tieh- 
 
 & -tieh, 
 
 ^-j- slih- 
 
 fM -"'" 
 
 iTi tou 
 
 ^. y"- 
 
 139. 
 Hlj kang 
 
 j^ ts'ai 
 6ff -ti 
 
 iC t'ai- 
 
 [^ -yang 
 
 ^S lou 
 
 •^ -cho 
 
 ^ -ts'ai 
 
 /ft shong- 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 136 a. 
 
 PleJ bsiang- 
 
 ^ -cli'ing 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 la ko 
 
 ^, t'ien 
 
 ;©. 'bu. 
 
 H3 
 
 -jan- 
 -cbien 
 
 lip. cliea 
 
 %. -'rh, 
 
 ]^ chiu 
 
 pn szu- 
 
 f^ -bsia- 
 
 ^. sheng- 
 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 ^f yiin 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 T -liao. 
 
 137- 
 
 m ch'u 
 
 :^ -ping 
 
 ^i} -ti 
 
 H$ shih 
 
 1^, 'hou, 
 
 ^^ ch'ien 
 
 t^ chiia 
 
 ^ waa 
 
 1^ ma 
 
 1^ chi 
 
 ^Ij -tao 
 
 |3€, slmo, 
 
 W yu 
 
 ^ -yun- 
 
 Pf k'o 
 
 j[^ mei 
 
 ^^ chien 
 
 Al^. -kno. 
 
 135. 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 g§ Lsi 
 
 ^a nan 
 
 r -shang 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ""■ i 
 
 i^ t'iao 
 
 >(H 'hSn 
 
 -^ ch'ang 
 
 fi^ -ti 
 
 ^^ yvin- 
 
 5^, -ts'ai, 
 
 ^ fang- 
 
 # -fa 
 
 ^ t'i 
 
 Hi lung 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 136. 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 ^" k'an 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 M na- 
 
 ^ -rb 
 
 ^J yijn- 
 
 ^ ff* tsai 
 
 ij^ tsui- 
 
 i^ kao 
 
 I [ [ shan- 
 
 II *'"- 
 
 |- -shang 
 
 ^ wang. 
 
 :^ -wang 
 
 ^ mao 
 
 UJ -ch'u 
 
 ^ chien 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 4i pan- 
 
 ^ -k'uug 
 
 EI yiieb 
 
 ^^ kiiaug, 
 
 ^5 °=^ 
 
 H. shib 
 
 f& yiin- 
 
 7^. -ts'ai; 
 
 X yu 
 
 im t'lnt?- 
 
 133. 
 
 d^ tso- 
 
 31 -'^^ 
 j0 ko 
 
 ^ 
 
 chien 
 
 \\ -hsia 
 
 l^ff -ti 
 
 ^ hsing 
 
 /fi -hsing 
 
 — ' i 
 
 ^ k'o 
 
 ^ °^ai 
 
 ;^ -cho 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 ff -t« 
 
 Vi man 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 §5 tou 
 
 Vi^ mei 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ k'ung- 
 
 ^ -y" 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 ^ ti- 
 
 :^ -fa-- 
 
 31. -'^■ 
 
 134. 
 
 ^a yiin 
 
 M y'i^ii- 
 
 ^ -p<in 
 
 ;;& shih 
 
 ^^ wu- 
 
 M. ''^''' 
 
 -@- shih 
 
 ~n -heia 
 
 ^ -k'o 
 13. hsins- 
 
 B -hsing 
 
 ^. -lai, 
 
 .•jj tiao 
 
 / fp, tsai 
 
 fi Te 
 
 )^ SbGng 
 
 P^ M^n 
 
 H^ -t'ou, 
 
 5lJ tao 
 
 ^H ju- 
 
 -^ -chin 
 
 5S 'huan 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 M ko 
 
 ji|i)j niiao 
 
 n -11 
 
 ;fe!^ fang 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 
 PJS. ni; 
 
 ^^ ch'ang 
 
 ^ hsi°8- 
 
 Wr 
 
 ch'ii 
 
 m 'l^ei 
 
 fitf. -ti, 
 
 3|^ chou 
 
 ;^ sh6n 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 ■W^ shih 
 
 ^ k'u- 
 
 ni. -lung.
 
 ^ M T'lEN'LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 12fi-)32. 
 
 jij'l cliicli- 
 
 131. 
 
 # wang- 
 
 ■^^ -WMlg 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 ^^ cliion 
 
 /p -lising 
 
 3J4^ tsai 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 I* -sliang 
 
 |M cL'ui 
 
 ~K -Iisia 
 W 'Imo- 
 
 -hsiai 
 
 ^Ij slum 
 
 ^ shc-ng, 
 
 T 
 
 lien 
 liao. 
 
 132. 
 
 fM -li 
 
 :^ nicn 
 [" -shang 
 
 w 
 
 pal 
 
 + .sliili 
 
 l< tu 
 
 _h, -shang, 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 >J^ IvUO 
 
 BR yen 
 
 &§ -ti 
 
 in kung- 
 
 ^ -i-u 
 
 52.. -■'••'• 
 
 130. 
 
 A. jen 
 
 56* yao 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 Sj -cliien 
 
 M *^«'- 
 
 ^ -hsing 
 
 ^^ -clio 
 
 ^ ^^ 
 
 ^ -tai 
 
 tr ta- 
 
 fjiJ- -ch'eng 
 
 1i 
 
 clii- 
 -ko 
 
 
 Pf 
 
 k'o- 
 
 ■tfe yell 
 ^ pu 
 
 i cliu 
 ^ ta 
 '^ sliili ; 
 
 M. hsing 
 
 ftl fei- 
 
 jS hsing 
 
 ^ sliih 
 
 TJg I'ing- 
 
 M -yung 
 6lf ti- 
 ^ ming- 
 
 @„ -™"- 
 
 129. 
 jl^ fei- 
 
 j;^ kuo 
 
 ^ tu 
 
 •^ fen 
 
 ;^[» wai 
 
 j^ tsou- 
 
 # -^^ 
 
 '1^. k'uai, 
 # pi- 
 
 ^B -ju 
 ;^ shih 
 
 "^ til tsai 
 
 W Pai 
 
 {- -shang 
 
 ?]§ f^' 
 5ll tao 
 
 ^ chu 
 
 H Pi 
 
 ^S Hsing 
 ^ chu 
 
 Pi. y"- 
 
 128. 
 J^ t'ien 
 
 h -shang 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 P. k'o 
 
 M hsing- 
 
 y© hsing 
 
 fH fei 
 
 5;!^ -kuo 
 
 -^ -ch'ii 
 P^. lo, 
 
 Wt •=^'" 
 
 ffij. chiao 
 
 M -hsing, 
 H-^ chiao 
 
 M, losing,' 
 
 JE. suan 
 
 ;& shih 
 
 ^'^' shao 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 Itxf -ti 
 
 ^(^ chao- 
 flS -t'ou 
 
 hsi"8- 
 
 -'rh 
 
 kuang- 
 
 -mang 
 
 she 
 
 -ch'u 
 
 clii 
 
 ch'ih 
 
 ch'ii, 
 
 fang- 
 -fu 
 
 p'en- 
 
 -'huo- 
 
 -t'ung 
 
 % 
 
 "^ 
 
 m 
 
 fl shih- 
 — ' i 
 
 -da ko^ 
 
 # ya"^- 
 
 S hsing 
 
 {jJ ch'u 
 
 ^. l»i> 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ~T» -hsia 
 
 ^v pi 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 @ yao- 
 
 Wi -luan 
 
 ^ shih- 
 
 tra„ -cli'ing- 
 
 127. 
 
 ^ Ch'i 
 
 yS Hsing 
 
 ^ -hsing 
 
 0^ chiang- 
 
 ^, -cl.iu, 
 
 ^y 'liao 
 
 :^ tsai 
 
 •^ Ti 
 
 ^ Hsing 
 
 ^]\ ming- 
 
 IDJ. -i^"g' 
 
 ± ta- 
 
 ^i -shih 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 £K wu- 
 
 ^ -fang 
 
 126. 
 W sao- 
 
 ^& -chou 
 
 ^B hsing 
 
 W yu 
 
 H t'ou 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ wei ; 
 
 ^B wei 
 
 ^ ch'ao 
 
 JL, shang, 
 
 M. t'ou 
 
 ^ ch'ao 
 
 J^, hsia ; 
 
 m 
 
 -pa 
 
 ]K^ chiu 
 
 ^h s'^i'i 
 
 ^ 'hao 
 
 ^ hsieh 
 
 j® ko 
 
 yk hsiao
 
 11G-I2.i. 
 
 % 
 
 T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF Z'7£X 
 
 ^ -cli'ing 
 
 A j^°- 
 
 31 -'-^'^ 
 
 M '''^' 
 
 5|5 y'Dg- 
 
 Jj^ chiang- 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 J^ cbun 
 
 ^ 'huo- 
 
 # -^^ 
 
 5!j -tao 
 
 ■ i 
 
 ^S Bui; 
 
 -^ haiang 
 
 ^ -lao 
 
 ^ Shou 
 
 M Using 
 
 /^ sliih- 
 
 125. 
 
 10 hsien- 
 
 ;te -tsai 
 
 # ko- 
 
 1^ -ch'u 
 
 E3 -urh 
 
 SL, ^"^"' 
 
 gi t'ing- 
 
 ^ -chien 
 
 #, t'a- 
 
 ^W -men 
 
 !® kuaa 
 
 ^ Hsing 
 
 ^ kan 
 
 123. 
 
 ^ Liang 
 
 S. H-sing 
 
 X ^^ 
 
 \^ chiao 
 
 ^ Jling 
 
 M, Hsing, 
 
 X y^ 
 
 plL chiao 
 
 ■a Ch'fin 
 
 ^, Hsing, 
 
 -^ niei 
 
 ^ ffing 
 
 ]7C t'ien- 
 
 ^ liang 
 
 H^ shih 
 
 ^ -'hou 
 
 IE -"'^' 
 
 li ts'ai 
 
 iy^ hsien 
 
 f^ 
 
 124. 
 ni- 
 
 j^ cbe- 
 
 feR -mo 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 ^ nien- 
 
 IE •='" 
 
 "T -liao. 
 
 # 
 
 wo 
 
 -men 
 nien 
 
 # 
 
 J;(: pi 
 (lij -ti 
 
 M hsing- 
 
 ^ -hsu 
 
 ^^ fell 
 
 ^k -wai 
 
 ^ liang. 
 
 122. 
 5^ t'ien- 
 
 yC -t'ien 
 ^ wan 
 Jt, -shang, 
 H yiiob- 
 ^ liang 
 p'ang- 
 
 7^ rie°- 
 
 5i. -'■•^ 
 
 ^ chien 
 
 ^ y>^ 
 
 ^ k'o 
 
 yU hsiao 
 
 B^ ming 
 
 S^ hsi"^- 
 
 5£. -^' 
 r::^ ming 
 
 -J- -tzu 
 
 U^ chiao 
 
 ;5fE ^'" 
 
 M, Using; 
 ^ su.. 
 
 !&• shuo 
 
 _a shih- 
 
 :^ Sht". 
 
 5a 
 
 Ch' 
 
 Liu 
 
 52. -'ih 
 
 "j' -liao. 
 
 120. 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 J^ i- 
 
 It ch'ien 
 
 II ts'ai 
 
 5}5 -lai 
 
 (^^ -ti 
 
 [t*j- chiao 
 
 '(^ tso 
 
 tM Ch'en 
 
 ;;;^ shih 
 
 PI t'uug 
 
 ^ na- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ Shea 
 
 M Hsing 
 
 m -^"^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 1@ 
 
 ko 
 
 hsing- 
 
 -hsing 
 
 
 lt\f -ti 
 
 B$ shih 
 
 ^ -'hou- 
 
 5i ■"■■'' 
 
 HI «>^'" 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^ liang 
 
 ^i^ lao 
 
 T, -liao, 
 
 ^\ 'hai 
 
 ]^ Shang 
 
 y^ Hsing 
 
 Sv'ii^ tsung 
 
 !^ pu 
 
 Jg, cliien 
 
 luf mie°- 
 
 5a -'A 
 
 6§, 
 
 119. 
 
 121. 
 
 Chin 
 
 Hsinff 
 
 f^ ni- 
 
 jfi men 
 
 M lia 
 
 ' i 
 
 ^ cLiea 
 
 |Mj mie" - 
 
 31 -A 
 
 JiyC chiu 
 
 Sc yao 
 
 ^^ pan 
 
 [1^. tsui, 
 
 [^ chien- 
 
 j^ -chih- 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 ^ ch'eng 
 
 T* -liao 
 
 ^\\ tou 
 
 •^ shih 
 
 >}< '■'■''" 
 
 ^ shou 
 
 117. 
 
 -t: Ch'i 
 
 H Hsi""^- 
 
 5a -'' 
 
 -SL shih 
 
 ch'ien- 
 -t'ou 
 
 S7.U 
 
 H. k'o, 
 
 ^ 'hou- 
 
 d5 -t'ou 
 
 Z^ san 
 
 ^ k'o, 
 
 ■^ hsiang 
 
 i^ ko 
 
 ^ y"- 
 
 5a -k 
 
 6xf -ti 
 
 ;jr-h shou- 
 
 -f-, -tzu; 
 
 ^ na 
 
 1^ chiu 
 
 -a shih 
 
 ^ Tou. 
 
 lis. 
 
 0. ^ken 
 
 S Hsing 
 
 ± t'ai- 
 
 ^ -yang 
 
 i^ lao
 
 
 
 
 ^ ^^ T'lEN-LKI, CATEGOUY OF T'IEN. 
 
 
 
 lOiMlfi. 
 
 m 
 
 iia 
 
 ^ 
 
 yao, 
 
 m 
 
 cliin 
 
 M 
 
 bsing 
 
 m 
 
 iiii""- 
 
 d?: 
 
 -liang 
 
 — ■ 
 
 i 
 
 H 
 
 cli'iiaig, 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -lai 
 
 % 
 
 kuang 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 m 
 
 hsiang- 
 
 PH 
 
 t'Qan 
 
 M. 
 
 t'liiig, 
 
 i\^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 /ll 
 
 tan 
 
 ti 
 
 -ko 
 
 m. 
 
 -tui, 
 
 ^ 
 
 'ho- 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 tou 
 
 ^ 
 
 sLih 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 A 
 
 ta- 
 
 n 
 
 yiieh- 
 
 M 
 
 -ch'i 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 m 
 
 cbi- 
 
 ^- 
 
 pu 
 
 m 
 
 -yo* 
 
 m 
 
 -liang 
 
 m 
 
 t'ung 
 
 /+ 
 
 sheng 
 
 "4 
 
 -cliiao* 
 
 A 
 
 ta 
 
 m 
 
 sbih 
 
 (i^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 X 
 
 t'ien, 
 
 i.^ 
 
 cli'en 
 
 J^ 
 
 i- 
 
 # 
 
 'hui 
 
 fl^ 
 
 ch'ing 
 
 ± 
 
 kua°8- 
 
 s 
 
 tzii- 
 
 /V 
 
 pa 
 
 ^. 
 
 -'lioa, 
 
 %. 
 
 -urb, 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 31 
 
 -'rb 
 
 m 
 
 -jaii 
 
 ^ 
 
 tzu 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 Wi 
 
 chiu 
 
 7. 
 
 liao. 
 
 Bif 
 
 ebiao 
 
 tjt 
 
 cliiu 
 
 % 
 
 urli 
 
 ^ 
 
 k'uai 
 
 ^ 
 
 yao 
 
 
 110. 
 
 m 
 
 ti 
 
 ^ 
 
 ya 
 
 ± 
 
 sliang- 
 
 'jt 
 
 liang 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 ^ 
 
 bsiug- 
 
 B 
 
 yi°*- 
 
 ^ 
 
 cliing 
 
 SI. 
 
 -t'ou ; 
 
 i\^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 % 
 
 liang 
 
 ± 
 
 -kuang 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 M 
 
 hsing 
 
 
 i 
 
 n# 
 
 sliili- 
 
 T. 
 
 lo. 
 
 m 
 
 sban- 
 
 m 
 
 che- 
 
 m 
 
 cliing 
 
 til 
 
 cb'u 
 
 # 
 
 -'Lou 
 
 
 112. 
 
 m 
 
 -shan 
 
 ii.. 
 
 -chu, 
 
 m 
 
 yiin 
 
 ^ 
 
 niang 
 
 ^. 
 
 -urb. 
 
 4 
 
 ebi"- 
 
 4- 
 
 pu- 
 
 M 
 
 na 
 
 ^ 
 
 cU'u 
 
 JJ& 
 
 t'ai- 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien 
 
 31 
 
 -■rh 
 
 # 
 
 cbu 
 
 tk 
 
 chiu 
 
 m.. 
 
 hsien 
 
 E 
 
 -pao. 
 
 ± 
 
 -sbang 
 
 m 
 
 wan 
 
 d^, 
 
 -ti, 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 
 116. 
 
 5a. 
 
 -■rh, 
 
 U 
 
 bai- 
 
 t- 
 
 -sbang 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 M 
 
 yneh- 
 
 m 
 
 Naa 
 
 m 
 
 chiu 
 
 m 
 
 -hsi 
 
 % 
 
 oh en 
 
 M 
 
 na- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -shib. 
 
 4 
 
 Tou 
 
 /^ 
 
 ting 
 
 Alt 
 
 la- 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 
 109. 
 
 i± 
 
 cliu 
 
 ?t 
 
 clmn 
 
 \iL 
 
 -la 
 
 n 
 
 'bao 
 
 ii 
 
 luan 
 
 ji 
 
 lien 
 
 ^. 
 
 slieug, 
 
 T. 
 
 Mao. 
 
 % 
 
 -'rh 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien- 
 
 m 
 
 tung 
 
 nrs 
 
 yin 
 
 :fB 
 
 Pei- 
 
 
 115. 
 
 1?^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ^. 
 
 -cb'i ; 
 
 p;s. 
 
 ni; 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 4 
 
 -Tou 
 
 i 
 
 kuo- 
 
 m 
 
 sliSng 
 
 ^ 
 
 nii- 
 
 ^ 
 
 'bao 
 
 m 
 
 cbi 
 
 i± 
 
 cliu 
 
 ^ 
 
 • cliia 
 
 T 
 
 liao 
 
 ^ 
 
 -nii 
 
 # 
 
 k'aa 
 
 A, 
 
 t'ien. 
 
 ^b. 
 
 szu; 
 
 ^ 
 
 cbSn-g 
 
 ^ 
 
 cbi 
 
 m 
 
 tsa- 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 chi° - 
 
 ^Jf 
 
 60- 
 
 ¥ 
 
 p'iug 
 
 ® 
 
 k'o 
 
 m 
 
 -taa 
 
 #„ 
 
 cbi. 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^ 
 
 -• 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 % 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ti^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 
 111. 
 
 m 
 
 wan- 
 
 ^ 
 
 pai 
 
 El# 
 
 shih- 
 
 ^ 
 
 bsing- 
 
 m 
 
 man 
 
 ^ 
 
 yeh 
 
 h 
 
 -sbang 
 
 :1b 
 
 Pel- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -'hou, 
 
 >? 
 
 -bsing 
 
 % 
 
 t'ien 
 
 *^ 
 
 sben 
 
 
 i 
 
 4- 
 
 -Tou 
 
 # 
 
 chiin 
 
 T. 
 
 liao. 
 
 u 
 
 tou 
 
 T. 
 
 liao, 
 
 A 
 
 t'ien 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ih 
 
 cteng 
 
 
 114. 
 
 ^ 
 
 sbiL 
 
 M 
 
 yiieh- 
 
 &^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 A. 
 
 jSn, 
 
 E 
 
 ch'en 
 
 A 
 
 jen 
 
 )^ 
 
 bsing- 
 
 % 
 
 -liang 
 
 ^ 
 
 hsing- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'a- 
 
 ^. 
 
 Hang, 
 
 ^ 
 
 sheng 
 
 ^. 
 
 -hsing. 
 
 % 
 
 to a 
 
 ^ 
 
 - bsing 
 
 ^- 
 
 -pu- 
 
 ^ 
 
 wan 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 
 113. 
 
 m 
 
 hio 
 
 If) 
 
 tou 
 
 % 
 
 -to- 
 
 K 
 
 niin 
 
 iM: 
 
 shih 
 
 m 
 
 t'a 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 n\ 
 
 ch'u 
 
 % 
 
 -urh- 
 
 m 
 
 lo 
 
 IJ^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 \n 
 
 -men 
 
 f* 
 
 ni 
 
 % 
 
 -lai 
 
 |]^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 m. 
 
 yeh, 
 
 
 shou, 
 
 tr 
 
 ta 
 
 f- 
 
 k'an 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * yo also 
 
 read yao. 
 
 
 

 
 101-108. 
 
 T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 -^ -'Imn 
 
 ^^ ts'au- 
 
 J^ -ts'an 
 
 107. 
 
 ^ ^« 
 
 1^ ts'ai 
 
 ^ cliion 
 
 ^ yiieh- 
 
 ^ -Hang 
 
 j|^ cliou- 
 
 H -wei 
 
 J -liao 
 
 ^ feng- 
 
 l^l cliiian 
 
 T. ■>'''^°' 
 
 ^ cliih 
 
 sail 
 ien 
 
 ^ t' 
 
 ?I li- 
 
 li. -t'ou, 
 
 JK^ chiu 
 
 ^ ta 
 
 -" lo. 
 
 I) o 
 
 108. 
 
 m 
 
 i^ -ch'iu 
 
 iJ!t|. chuan- 
 
 iKl. -tung, 
 
 l^lj kang- 
 
 Wi -ka"^- 
 
 ^ -■rh 
 
 ^ 'liai 
 
 ^ yiieb, 
 
 106. 
 
 fill l^aiig- 
 
 1^ -ts'ai 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 is 'hai 
 
 ^E, *''"' 
 
 <f|| 'h6n 
 
 it? 'hao 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 'jt -liang; 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ to 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 31 kung- 
 
 ^ -fu 
 
 52, -urh 
 
 '^^ man 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 15 tou 
 
 -M cbang 
 
 J -liao 
 
 yun- 
 
 /;;4 
 
 ^, -ts'ai, 
 
 IB pa 
 
 j® ko 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 
 lian<; 
 ^ clie- 
 W -te 
 jS^ clic- 
 jg -mo 
 •S 'hun- 
 
 3£., -wu, 
 
 PJI cliung- 
 
 jj^ ch'iu 
 
 >^ ch'ia- 
 
 '^ -cliieU 
 
 Pff. lo, 
 
 1^^ nan 
 
 # te 
 
 iti clio 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 j)^ 'hao 
 
 Z^ t'ien- 
 
 M -ch'i 
 
 Pf. a; 
 
 "4 ch 
 
 fta t'a- 
 
 lao 
 
 -men 
 
 mai 
 
 -hsiii 
 
 T 
 
 ffR tie"- 
 
 5iL 
 
 /,it 
 
 ± 
 
 'rli 
 
 kno 
 
 chiu 
 
 yii- 
 
 -pei 
 
 -cho, 
 
 teng 
 
 wan- 
 
 -shansr 
 
 ^ yueh 
 
 |M| yi'an 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 n^ siiih- 
 
 -^ 'hou- 
 
 52. -rh 
 
 ^ ta- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -chia 
 
 yuan 
 
 ;^ shili 
 
 # t'c- 
 
 ;f§ ..cliih 
 
 A P^ 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 -j^ shih- 
 
 He, -shuo; 
 
 M "^ 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 }^ -kuo 
 
 /H shih 
 
 ^ 
 
 cliii 
 
 -^ 
 
 su- 
 
 IS 
 
 -'hua 
 
 ^. 
 
 -'rli ; 
 
 it 
 
 ch'i 
 
 ff. 
 
 shih, 
 
 # 
 
 mei 
 
 ^ 
 
 yiieh 
 
 t5 
 
 tou 
 
 m 
 
 shih 
 
 ^iJ 
 
 tao 
 
 T 
 
 liao 
 
 + 
 
 shih 
 
 ^. 
 
 wu, 
 
 n 
 
 yiieli 
 
 '^ 
 
 liang 
 
 fffl yiian 
 ~T liao. 
 
 105. 
 
 ^ chi". 
 
 ^2. --rh 
 shih 
 
 'J 
 
 A p* 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 -!-• shih- 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 yiioh 
 ch'u 
 san, 
 
 jil> 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 chien 
 
 yiich- 
 
 -liang 
 
 to 
 
 pa"- 
 
 -'rh 
 
 'hei, 
 
 shao 
 
 4i 
 
 pa°- 
 
 5£ 
 
 -'rh 
 
 ^ 
 
 liang 
 
 'jt 
 
 lia"e- 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 t\^. 
 
 -ti, 
 
 "4 
 
 chiao 
 
 ^ 
 
 yiioh- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ya- 
 
 5a. 
 
 -•rh, 
 
 t* 
 
 fang- 
 
 ;?■* 
 
 -fu 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 (A 
 
 ts'ao- 
 
 -mu 
 
 kang- 
 
 -ts'ai 
 
 fa- 
 
 -ya- 
 
 -•ih 
 
 shih- 
 
 -ti 
 
 104. 
 yueh- 
 
 -•rh. 
 yiian 
 
 ^ hsing 
 
 ^ -hsing 
 
 |i|j hsi 
 
 T, lo; 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 fl^J -tl 
 
 IC kung- 
 
 ^ -iu 
 
 52. -urh 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 'jj -fang 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ liang 
 
 7. i'«°- 
 
 102. 
 
 •Tt. wu 
 
 -)j fang 
 
 ^ nii'B- 
 
 52. -'rh 
 
 1^^ -t' 
 
 H^ shih- 
 
 ^ -'hou- 
 
 m yang- 
 
 3^ -kuang 
 
 SjC ch'i 
 
 fl^ -cliu 
 
 /ij Yiioll- 
 
 ^, -she, 
 
 ^ yueh- 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 |a t'sai 
 
 -^ 'hui 
 
 nt "'■''^ 
 
 103. 
 
 jfyH mei
 
 
 ^ 5^^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 92-101. 
 
 lil -ch'u 
 
 M y- 
 
 ^, yiieli, 
 
 Pf." pei 
 
 >^. '■'*"g' 
 
 fl^ -ti 
 
 •g tao- 
 
 DE,L -wan 
 
 Ifl sliui 
 
 -|4' tsai 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 t^j wei- 
 
 ^t -"'•' 
 
 ii y- 
 
 ^ cliih 
 
 ■^, sliou ! 
 
 |» -hsia 
 
 //-£ -chu, 
 
 ^ii -lai 
 
 ^, -wan, 
 
 m ming 
 
 A jen 
 
 J^ me 
 
 P3f5 na 
 
 ^M. "'• 
 
 ^ slnh 
 
 ^ yiich 
 
 -4- -sheng 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 tk '^'''" 
 
 100. 
 
 ^ cliien 
 
 H^^ cliao 
 
 ^g chi 
 
 yf-* pu 
 
 0-U- chiao- 
 
 ^ yiioli- 
 
 Ml tsui 
 
 Wv kou- 
 
 ^ chien 
 
 W yang- 
 
 f^ -tso 
 
 "m -she 
 
 '^ y 
 
 HS -cliii? 
 
 H yiieh 
 
 3G -wang 
 
 jih- 
 
 Si sui- 
 
 M ch'U 
 
 iii clie 
 
 h" tang 
 
 151 -ti- 
 
 #:. yiin; 
 
 ,^^ -jnn 
 
 5£ -'-•'' 
 
 ;^ Shih 
 
 ^k. t'ou? 
 
 94. 
 
 ^■» pu 
 
 ;^ shiU 
 
 l^ff -ti 
 
 f^ WO 
 
 96. 
 
 1^ wo 
 
 ^ ch'iu 
 
 ^ mgng- 
 
 ^^ sliili- 
 
 ^ y« 
 
 f^ ni 
 
 g tzil- 
 
 — san 
 
 Bi -^"^- 
 
 tra. <'ii''°g- 
 
 ii^ hsin 
 
 •^ k'an, 
 
 Ml -chi- 
 
 |x|^ liang 
 
 ^ -•^•>- 
 
 99 
 
 [h] lisiang 
 
 ^ wan 
 
 # -ko- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 6^. -ti, 
 
 ^ ch'fin 
 
 #. t'a, 
 
 ^ 'li 
 
 ^ -•> 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 jM 'buan 
 
 ^^ -clio 
 
 fta t'a 
 
 ftff wu 
 
 [ej 'hui 
 
 T kung- 
 
 M chao- 
 
 it chs- 
 
 <Iff wu 
 
 #. yan; 
 
 ■^ -ch'ii 
 
 ^. -f"> 
 
 # -te- 
 
 ii -ko 
 
 I'i^ hsin 
 
 ^ 'hao- 
 
 fl. P'^^ 
 
 g| «'^'" 
 
 ^ -ehien 
 
 6^ 'hao- 
 
 fS] lisiang 
 
 l|fj ming 
 
 ^■. pu 
 
 -fl^ 'hui 
 
 Jb[ tao- 
 
 ^ yiieh- 
 
 ^t -°' 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ffl yung 
 
 ~T^ hsia- 
 
 X» -rh. 
 
 S tang- 
 
 ji5 che- 
 
 ^ yiicli- 
 
 A jen 
 
 P[f -y" 
 
 Pj k'o- 
 
 S k'ung 
 
 1*? -mo 
 
 !7l:. -li'-iug' 
 
 j^ sung- 
 
 -^ -liao. 
 
 l>i -i 
 
 r|ff -ti 
 
 m -ko 
 
 ^ wei 
 
 T. ■1'^''= 
 
 93. 
 
 >/^^ pu 
 
 IJE wan- 
 
 ^ i- 
 
 -& she"- 
 
 it che- 
 
 EI yueh 
 
 M y«ng 
 
 h^ -sliang, 
 
 EH -szti. 
 
 iS -mo 
 
 ^ -mo 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 i^ teng- 
 
 X y» 
 
 98. 
 
 ^^ pu 
 
 A *=^ 
 
 
 M -'""S 
 
 VH ch'ing- 
 
 M, ^^"s- 
 
 m cii'u- 
 
 ii^ -'■ 
 
 M -i^'' 
 
 "T lino. 
 
 /§f -filing, 
 
 •^ -ch'ing 
 
 ■^ cli'ii 
 
 ^ yiieh- 
 
 ^^ -'■ 
 
 101. 
 
 X y" 
 
 ^ -yiieli- 
 
 ;;> - tsou- 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 1* ching. 
 
 Ht ^" 
 
 J^ liang- 
 
 Vo\ -lanS 
 
 ^ -tsou 
 
 
 ^, 'hua; 
 
 J5 cliing 
 
 / ^ -k'liai, 
 
 It^ -t' 
 
 PJS. "'• 
 
 t6 P'a 
 
 ^ 'hei- 
 
 ^ k'uai 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 % t'io°- 
 
 97. 
 
 M 'hei 
 
 \\ -hsia 
 
 ^ wan 
 
 ^ tsoii- 
 
 l£. -••' 
 
 ^ -0 
 
 M. "^°- 
 
 ^^ -'■ 
 
 J^Io, 
 
 ^ -^" 
 
 -;^ ta- 
 
 2J5: pen 
 
 95. 
 
 -»^ kuang 
 
 ^ yiioh- 
 
 £. -■■''' 
 
 ^ -cliia- 
 
 ►J^. cbiang 
 
 1 wan 
 
 ^^ -ming; 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 IP ts'ai 
 
 fl -'I'O- 
 
 (^ hsin 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 3tfe n'u 
 
 Ht "■■'^ 
 
 ^ kan- 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 ^ t'o 
 
 ;;^ pu 
 
 Bg chao 
 
 4H\ 
 
 T.'«' 
 
 # -*- 
 
 ^ cb'u 
 
 ^ ming 
 
 ^R J" 
 
 W. wan 
 
 
 
 * or 
 
 rm. 
 

 
 84-D2. 
 
 ^ m TJEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 
 -^ yao 
 
 ^^ -dm 
 
 m f"- 
 
 jH lien 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 ^- -wu 
 
 P.ir ™'"S 
 
 jih 
 
 ^ chia- 
 
 i: t'ai- 
 
 T, -'''ao. 
 
 ^^ ta 
 
 m i« 
 
 M, -t'ou, 
 
 ^-. -«^'0' 
 
 ID -ya"g 
 
 Si 'bai 
 
 l[f„ '^^- 
 
 f|li hsiang 
 
 M chiu 
 
 ^^ PU 
 
 fl>J -ti 
 
 i^ niei 
 
 85. 
 
 tti'. 1^"' 
 
 s «''"' 
 
 ^. cUliu, ' 
 
 ;1^ yen- 
 
 i& ^a'» 
 
 J"'- 
 
 ^ kan- 
 
 H jil- 
 
 ^ chu 
 
 ^, -she,* 
 
 -(«/ ya- 
 
 ojj -t'ou 
 
 r^i -k'ai 
 E| yiieh 
 
 •^ -sliih. 
 fll. 
 
 ^ kuo- 
 ^ -cilia 
 
 ^ ton 
 jH che- 
 
 ^ -intu 
 
 il: lao 
 
 f^. y'"S' 
 
 M yiie'i 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 87. 
 
 ^ij pick 
 
 5^ cUiu- 
 
 tr ^'"^'"s 
 
 ^•1). '!• 
 
 t yin- 
 
 jil'- 
 
 1i <^l'i" 
 
 M -'•"' 
 
 
 90. 
 
 |If yi„- 
 
 £^ t'ou 
 
 -^ -^tzii 
 
 ia. ''''^" 
 
 j"' 
 
 ,0 jil^ 
 
 T^ ts'an- 
 
 p sluing 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 10 -ko 
 
 ^ sliih 
 
 E yiieh 
 
 {^ ts'an- 
 
 )jg cb'iang 
 
 ^B& cli'eng 
 
 H jii- 
 
 ig yin- 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 61 -ti. 
 
 ^ 'bai- 
 
 -^[v wai- 
 
 H„ "'^'°"- 
 
 :^ -wei 
 
 Z/^ t'ien 
 
 89. 
 
 14 -"■■li 
 
 1^ -t'ou 
 
 92. 
 
 It yi" 
 
 3ila. chou 
 
 jil- 
 
 f\ -mcu 
 
 ^M *»"- 
 
 -4*- clii"- 
 
 ^ shC-ng 
 
 -fT, hslng, 
 
 i^ sheng 
 
 ^ cbao 
 
 ■ t -kO' 
 
 5!. -1' 
 
 ^^ ya"g 
 
 jiK 
 
 ■^ shuang 
 
 ^S, niang; 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 :§:, «l'"ai; 
 
 PlJ cli'u 
 
 :^. urb, 
 
 ill cbe 
 
 ^ kan- 
 
 A t'ai- 
 ^ -yang 
 ^ tang- 
 S^ -k'ung 
 
 ilt -^^'^ 
 
 ^ mci 
 
 /^ yiieh 
 
 A. .iu, 
 
 ^ shih 
 ^ pai- 
 
 X yu 
 
 i!fc, shuo, 
 
 jil' 
 #> kua 
 
 ^ slab 
 
 M «i''ug 
 ^S -li 
 
 xf» -pu- 
 JlE -cbin 
 ^^ cb'eng 
 *, -ch'ii. 
 
 B$ shiii- 
 
 ^ _'hou- 
 
 5a. -Tb, 
 
 ^ -skill 
 gi shib- 
 
 0. -Jil'; 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 m ch'u 
 
 Jil^ 
 
 "^ shuang 
 :^^ urb; 
 
 1^ ya"g 
 
 ^l^f -men 
 P k'ou- 
 
 86. 
 4^ cbl"- 
 
 ^ -ko 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^ 'hou- 
 
 5£. -''•''' 
 
 A. .i"> 
 
 Ptt^) J'a"S 
 ,'A pie°- 
 
 fl^ -t'ou- 
 
 •^ kung- 
 ^ -sbib 
 
 ^S yiin- 
 
 1- sliang 
 
 M 'hei- 
 
 % -■'' 
 
 liL. -"■'■• 
 
 :^ ta- 
 
 ^ ch'i- 
 
 g tzu 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 ^, -cWa; 
 J>1' 
 
 ^ y« 
 
 ^^ liang 
 
 88. 
 
 ll? -kai 
 ^ -hen 
 
 ftl pa 
 
 ^ hsia 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 ^ pnn- 
 tl -ko 
 
 4^1 > k'an, 
 V^ man- 
 
 ^. to; 
 
 iC t'ai- 
 
 1^ -yang 
 
 |M| t'uan- 
 
 ^ cliili 
 -^ po-t 
 j^ -ijsing, 
 % ton 
 
 E[ yiieh 
 ^ l.ang 
 ^ yen 
 
 Q pai- 
 3"^ -kua-. 
 
 ^;^ fang- 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 1^ -yang 
 ^i tou 
 
 
 * sAt, als 
 
 sicii. + /)('-/(. 
 
 !i«y, also^oi-Zisiiy, o 
 
 •• ]}t-Jisin<;. 

 
 
 ^ IK 'PIEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'/JSxV. 
 
 73-84. 
 
 --- -jian- 
 
 ^ kan 
 
 TF «lii-'»g 
 
 ^;|l chih- 
 
 iW chuan- 
 
 ;|^. kua 
 
 (Jlp] -sliaiig 
 
 XS '''"an 
 
 qfp] shang- 
 
 ^ -tao 
 
 ^Ij tao- 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 JKE '^^an- 
 
 '^ tsai 
 
 •^ -wu 
 
 Ij/S, "ii? 
 
 gg hsi- 
 
 # -poi 
 
 ^. -pan- 
 
 fi' pei- 
 
 Jil'- 
 
 77. 
 
 ^, picn,- 
 
 Jf -yi-- 
 
 ^Ip], shang; 
 
 it? -^^0- 
 
 g^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ na 
 
 Jg 'hai- 
 
 5a ->' 
 
 ifpj shaiig- 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 m tang 
 
 J'''- 
 
 i^ n,ei- 
 
 1^1 -ti 
 
 -^ -wu 
 
 # -li 
 
 ^. t'ien, 
 
 :^ -kuci 
 
 f^ -lao 
 
 i^ ti- 
 
 gfe chiu 
 
 fj^ sbui- 
 
 li ^«'^' 
 
 i.j- tui- 
 
 ['jf; -ti 
 
 ^ -fa-- 
 
 f3. skill 
 
 fM- -chiao ! 
 
 ^ y° 
 
 — -i- 
 
 B$ shih- 
 
 52.. -'"' 
 
 ^^ lao 
 
 ^ wei 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ih -t-' 
 
 #. -'hou, 
 
 IP ts'ai 
 
 ^ yeh- 
 
 -S niicu 
 
 11, hsien 
 
 :^ k'an 
 
 H-U- cliiao- 
 
 jij 'hao 
 
 % -1' 
 
 :;fe t'ai 
 
 llxf -'' 
 
 ;^ shih 
 
 ^"p. -tso 
 
 vji. ""'■ 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^- shu- 
 
 ^ kua-- 
 
 ff sbih- 
 
 Jil' 
 
 74. 
 
 TF cli^no' 
 
 m -fu 
 
 i^i. -'rh. 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 ^ p'ing- 
 
 f^]^ "i 
 
 I^„ -an. 
 
 T.i^' 
 
 79. 
 
 Ht^ shih- 
 
 g§ -hsi. 
 
 J£ '■'i" 
 
 S3. 
 
 81. 
 
 i/t>, ni- 
 
 ^ -'liou- 
 
 7C. 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 Ijlp] shang- 
 
 j9P so- 
 
 ji '^1''^- 
 
 52. -'rh 
 
 1^ Nau- 
 
 Mil ti- 
 
 iC- "WU 
 
 ^ yu- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 T.I- 
 
 M •'^'""s 
 
 Jj\ -fang, 
 
 ^ wai 
 
 ify -ti 
 
 iill ti- 
 
 78. 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 g chih 
 
 T, -liao, 
 
 Ig cbung- 
 
 ^ fa"^- 
 
 ^ ^0 
 
 JX Shea 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 iC t'ai- 
 
 ^ -piao 
 
 31. -b' 
 
 ^fj -ti 
 
 H ^'a»- 
 
 [Jf yin- 
 
 1^ -yang 
 
 Ifi tou 
 
 It chih 
 
 -B fang 
 
 ^IT -san. 
 
 ill -shan 
 
 f^ yi°="- 
 
 ^> pu 
 
 J| shih 
 
 •^ -tzii 
 
 :\t Pei- 
 
 # r- 
 
 ^ -.-rh 
 
 J^ chun 
 
 ^i ko 
 
 ^ 'hou 
 
 M -chiug 
 
 ^. -'bou, 
 
 i> t°" 
 
 7. lo; 
 
 i-tll ti- 
 
 5||. -t'ou, 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 ^ lao 
 
 iii: bsieh- 
 
 ^ teug 
 
 !f. -y^= 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^■i k'u 
 
 ^ chien- 
 
 a -- 
 
 qjp) shang- 
 
 ^ yung- 
 
 ^ lao- 
 
 # liu 
 
 ^> -pu- 
 
 ^^ -*' 
 
 ^ -wu 
 
 j^ -yuan 
 
 ^ yeh- 
 
 ^, shu; 
 
 ■^ -chao 
 
 if l^^iet 
 
 ^. tsai 
 
 :^ lao- 
 
 1^ -'rh 
 
 A Jeu 
 
 ^ t'ai- 
 
 ~X -liao. 
 
 ij- tui 
 
 ^ -yeii- 
 
 H8 chao- 
 
 41 tk 
 
 ^ij -ti 
 
 [^ -yaug 
 
 S4. 
 
 H. P^- 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 yf^ -pu- 
 
 ^ mi-. 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 ;^^ t'ai- 
 
 82. 
 
 0g chao- 
 
 ^Ij -tao 
 
 5£. -'■' 
 
 B y=- 
 
 % -yang 
 
 — . i 
 
 yf» -pu- 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 tit ^'1'" 
 
 52.. -'^'^- 
 
 li P'ien 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^- chao. 
 
 i^ ti- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 75. 
 
 ^ Lsi, 
 
 ^I li- 
 
 SO. 
 
 :^ fa-"- 
 
 -B >••"^ 
 
 ~r» hsia- 
 
 ]^ <='"" 
 
 §|j -t'ou 
 
 Jill 
 
 £. -^>' 
 
 5e. -•■'>' 
 
 -V -wu 
 
 -^ sliih 
 
 ^ fen 
 
 ^j ch'u 
 
 it ch'u- 
 
 tti ^^'"' 
 
 i t'ai- 
 
 ^jn] shang- 
 
 B tsao- 
 
 Zir san 
 
 # -'^' 
 
 x^ r" 
 
 1^ -yang 

 
 66-73. 
 
 5^ M T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEX. 
 
 ^ -tzu 
 
 4r^ tang 
 
 ^^ -clio, 
 tr| cbien- 
 
 4^ -cliao 
 
 -^ t'ai- 
 
 6^. -^■' 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 73. 
 
 ^ tso- 
 
 J^ -'^ 
 
 A j^-^- 
 
 ^ -chia 
 
 jJI sung 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 1^ 'buo 
 
 m '^ 
 
 ii tou 
 
 _S- shili 
 
 ,|>g p'a- 
 
 i -*' 
 
 gg -bsi 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ft 
 
 # 
 ,1*!: 
 
 
 it?. 
 
 IE 
 
 i\^ 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 JiHj 
 
 .10 
 
 tfi- 
 
 'buang, 
 
 P' 
 tei 
 
 cb-ao 
 
 ko 
 
 sbu- 
 
 yin- 
 
 -lia°8- 
 
 -•rb 
 
 liang- 
 
 -k'uai 
 
 liang- 
 
 -k'uai, 
 
 ts'ai 
 
 'bao. 
 
 72. 
 cbeng- 
 
 -fang 
 
 -ti 
 
 'bou- 
 
 yen- 
 
 cb'iang 
 
 'bai 
 
 ch'ien 
 
 -t'ou 
 
 yu- 
 
 sban 
 
 -ti 
 
 ti- 
 
 fa"8. 
 
 -•rb, 
 
 'buo 
 
 shih 
 
 yu- 
 
 kao- 
 
 cb'ianff 
 
 ify -ti 
 
 i: t'ai- 
 
 id! -ti 
 
 fl -li 
 
 ^, tsou, 
 
 ^" k'an 
 
 ^^ -chao* 
 
 Tif k'o- 
 
 ^ -I'u- 
 
 -& sbib 
 
 ^ wa°- 
 
 P^. 
 
 ya? 
 
 ^J^ 
 
 bsi.ao 
 
 >^ 
 
 -bsin 
 
 m 
 
 shai 
 
 71. 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 -k ^'^'- 
 
 lir -yang 
 
 itb -ti 
 
 ^t tsou 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 >'^ cbe 
 
 ^[> pan 
 
 PJJ§ sbai- 
 
 j{5 'bao 
 
 'X^ p" 
 
 -^ 
 ^ 
 
 65. 
 
 lao- 
 
 fr 
 
 -yub 
 
 31 
 
 -'rb 
 
 '% 
 
 k'uai- 
 
 m 
 
 -lao 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 D# 
 
 sbih- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'bou- 
 
 31, 
 
 urb, 
 
 # 
 
 wang- 
 
 # 
 
 -wang 
 
 lit} 
 
 bsi- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -pien 
 
 if 
 
 cb'iang 
 
 h, 
 
 -sbang, 
 
 ^ij 
 
 tao 
 
 ^ 
 
 cbien 
 
 ^ 
 
 y" 
 
 i: 
 
 t'ai- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -yaug 
 
 f^ 
 
 yi°^- 
 
 la. 
 
 -'ib 
 
 M 
 
 na 
 
 m 
 
 cbiu 
 
 ^ 
 
 sbib 
 
 m 
 
 'bui 
 
 ± 
 
 kuang 
 
 & 
 
 fan 
 
 H? 
 
 cbao. 
 
 70. 
 M P'eli 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ^5 na- 
 
 \% -ko 
 
 'm^ 
 
 -pao 
 
 31. 
 
 ti 
 
 m 
 
 Li] 
 
 31 
 
 ±. 
 
 /la 
 
 tao 
 
 Sban 
 
 Tung 
 
 T'ai. 
 
 -°«an 
 
 -Fu 
 
 T'ai 
 
 Sban 
 
 -ti 
 
 ti°B- 
 
 -■rb 
 
 sbang, 
 
 cb'iao 
 
 t'ai- 
 
 -yaug 
 
 bsiang 
 
 ts'ung 
 
 'bai 
 
 -li 
 
 cb'u 
 
 -lai, 
 
 cbeng- 
 
 -te 
 
 'bai 
 
 shui 
 
 luan- 
 
 -kun, 
 
 cbien 
 -cb'i 
 
 to- 
 
 -sbao 
 
 sbui 
 
 tie°- 
 -rh 
 sbih 
 
 -ti. 
 
 Oil tli'iao- 
 
 ^0 -clio 
 
 ± t'ai- 
 
 lir -yang 
 
 MJ cb'u- 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ~T -liao. 
 
 67. 
 
 wo 
 
 ^ chi°- 
 
 1^ 
 
 m cb'u 
 
 BH men, 
 
 it i^'^"s- 
 
 ^^ -cbien 
 
 fE '''^°- 
 
 7]^ -sbui 
 
 l5^ -ti 
 
 ^^ cbieh ; 
 
 '^ leng- 
 
 ;^ -pu- 
 
 @ fang P;^ 
 
 cbien 
 
 T - 
 
 lao 
 wo 
 
 1 
 
 ;^ sben 
 ■Tf^ sbui 
 lA tie-- 
 
 31. ''••^- 
 
 6S. 
 -¥- t'ien- 
 
 yu 
 
 liang 
 
 gi sbib- 
 /fi£ -'hou- 
 
 • cho.
 
 
 ^ ^^ T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 56-06. 
 
 ^ tou 
 
 X yu 
 
 Hi', cliao 
 
 ^ cbu- 
 
 31 ••■rl' 
 
 P^ ia6a- 
 
 ^^ slich- 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 >£. chin. 
 
 .^. -'' 
 
 ^ lao • 
 
 •R£ pi- 
 
 jlll -chiu 
 
 ^[5 na 
 
 62. 
 
 ^1] pieh 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 ll "an 
 
 B y'"'- 
 
 U 1'"- 
 
 •^ clii°- 
 
 'fp tsia 
 
 ^ bsi 
 
 6^ -^' 
 
 ^ -'.h 
 
 .^g -liu- 
 
 5£ -'l^ 
 
 ftii t'a 
 
 ^. P'''"' 
 
 A. j^'°' 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 ri^ -ti 
 
 ^1 bsiang- 
 
 l^f, -ti 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 % 'bai-» 
 
 J -liao. 
 
 M, ^^"s 
 
 Bra -^^''"s 
 
 t^. '''"^i 
 
 ^ chiu 
 
 ^ cbio- 
 
 65. 
 
 p^ ch'ui 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 fi t'a 
 
 — — i 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 |J^ yliati 
 
 M, -cK 
 
 %, t'ien, 
 
 ^ ebih 
 
 ^ -'bui- 
 
 yji -yai 
 
 -^ -tzil 
 
 gl <'^'" 
 
 ^ tao- 
 
 "h y"- 
 
 ^ -l^- 
 
 &^. -''' 
 
 fl -li 
 
 ^ sLih 
 
 % '^-^ 
 
 ^ tien- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 U -«i 
 
 0.^ ^'^°s 
 
 4* chi-- 
 
 ff$ tou 
 
 filE wu- 
 
 1^ -'hui- 
 
 W y" 
 
 &>/ -ti 
 
 5E -t' 
 
 ^£ kan- 
 
 J"- 
 
 % ''^ 
 
 la ko 
 
 i^ P'i- 
 
 ^ pu- 
 
 1^, -shuang; 
 
 S^ t'ou- 
 
 6^ -^' 
 
 — • i- 
 
 ^ i 
 
 ^ leng- 
 
 :^- lao- 
 
 6^ -^' 
 
 S 'bei 
 
 >1 t> 
 
 ^ ting 
 
 ^. -sbaDg, 
 
 ^> pu- 
 
 M -y^^ 
 
 ;;j3 'bun 
 
 T. -li=^°- 
 
 ti^ -^' 
 
 51] Pieh 
 
 ^ J" 
 
 % -'.h 
 
 rk. «^"°- 
 
 58. 
 
 ^ ti- 
 
 B^ chjao 
 
 Itxf. -*■' 
 
 Hi^. cbao- 
 
 60. 
 
 jih- 
 
 ij '--- 
 
 Jil^- 
 
 ja chen 
 
 ■f-t -te 
 
 ^ t'u- 
 
 g^ -t'ou- 
 
 ^. ■'^^- 
 
 ^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ Sbill 
 
 ^ wu 
 
 ^ -tzu 
 
 Wa cbao 
 
 57. 
 
 t)l?§ shai 
 
 1© ko 
 
 fi -11 
 
 ^ ken 
 
 ^^ -cho 
 
 Jih- 
 
 M -''^°' 
 
 jit- 
 
 7^ ta- 
 
 # -'^l''' 
 
 ^1 sang- 
 
 B^ -t'ou 
 
 ^ k'an 
 
 [^ nuan- 
 
 ^ -liang 
 
 ^ yueb 
 
 JJ*. -tzu 
 
 It ctiu 
 
 |]j?Ij shai- 
 
 M, ^^°°" 
 
 6^. -ti. 
 
 51: J'ang 
 
 IP. -y«°- 
 
 ^ shih 
 
 ^|fe -cbiao 
 
 ^ 'to 
 
 63. 
 
 ^. tsou. 
 
 la. -'^'•' 
 
 :t t'ai- 
 
 J -liao 
 
 it^J -'• 
 
 ^ cb'un- 
 
 /<tt cbieh 
 
 pi sbui 
 
 ^^ -yang; 
 
 ^ P'i 
 
 ^ t'ie"- 
 
 j,> -cbing- 
 
 -M ^° 
 
 m. '^'"^" 
 
 ^ t'ieu 
 
 ^5 -pa»- 
 
 5a. -1^- 
 
 ^, -t'ien, 
 
 3fe ^"=^"" 
 
 tit kan 
 
 ;^ t'ien 
 
 ^. '^l^- 
 
 64. 
 
 ■jsi ta 
 
 ^. -''''■ 
 
 # - 
 
 tsao- 
 
 66. 
 
 M t'ai- 
 
 iv t'ai- 
 
 61. 
 
 11 -'^"=^°S 
 
 ^ -ct'i 
 
 K tuiig- 
 
 If -yang 
 
 |# -yang 
 
 -J^ cbang- 
 
 jg^mo? 
 
 :^ ts'ung 
 
 <§_ -pie°- 
 
 fi P'i^" 
 
 \\^ shai 
 
 A p^ 
 
 59. 
 
 ^ tUDg 
 
 la -'^ 
 
 fit} lisi 
 
 :^, -fto, 
 
 1^^ -t^ 
 
 f5t - 
 
 ^ Pien 
 
 11 f- 
 
 7. -liao, 
 
 ■' i 
 
 ;^ teng- 
 
 i tzu- 
 
 ffi cb'u 
 
 ~r -liao 
 
 PB niea 
 
 ^k tie»- 
 
 ^ -t'ai, 
 
 Q -cbi 
 
 ;Jfi. -lai, 
 
 |I 'tung 
 
 li f^"^- 
 
 |£ -'rb 
 
 H3 cbao 
 
 m ta 
 
 ^Ij tao 
 
 J, lo; 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 it, y"'"'' 
 
 f^ "i 
 
 ~P bsia. 
 
 m y^"- 
 
 fl -1' 
 
 ^. leng. 
 
 ;f^ p» 
 
 6^ -ti 
 
 |J^ -wa° 
 
 
 * Thia 
 
 sentence is pronounc 
 
 ed by some 'hai ko (' 
 
 «n ya. 

 
 4i;-5G. 
 
 ■^ fS T'IKN-LEI, CATEGORY OF TIEN. 
 
 
 
 
 \U cb'u 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 31 -•'•' 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 
 48. 
 
 T. 
 
 -liao, 
 
 5fj -lai 
 
 i. -cli'ii, 
 
 'H m6ng. 
 
 ^ ,.a"- 
 
 # 
 
 fb'un- 
 
 % 
 
 cb'u- 
 
 qjfij shai- 
 
 fdi t'a 
 
 il -n.Cng- 
 
 31 -H. 
 
 ^. 
 
 -t'ieu, 
 
 4^ 
 
 -pu 
 
 \\^ -sliai 
 
 M "=* 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 ^ -lai 
 
 € 
 
 fau- 
 
 % 
 
 -to 
 
 M. P"- 
 
 — . i 
 
 ^ «■''' 
 
 T„'o- 
 
 }-;•)] 
 
 -cb'ao- 
 
 m 
 
 cb'cng 
 
 54. 
 
 m '^^''- 
 
 ^. -h, 
 
 49. 
 
 ff'j 
 
 -ti 
 
 7. 
 
 -liao ; 
 
 f^ cb'ing- 
 
 31 -'''' 
 
 t// f'lng- 
 
 PT nwu 
 
 e;^ 
 
 sliib- 
 
 m 
 
 cliiu 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 j^ ching- 
 
 f)^ '■«- 
 
 -j^ 'bou- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -'bou 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsai 
 
 -^ ta- 
 
 ^ -'bua 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 D^ -t'ou 
 
 5i. 
 
 -'rh, 
 
 ^ 
 
 wo 
 
 jil- 
 
 ElS chao- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 i^ fang 
 
 ^a 
 
 tao- 
 
 ^ 
 
 chia 
 
 ^ t'ou 
 
 ^H. -yao' 
 
 m. ku 
 
 m 'i- 
 
 31 
 
 -'rh 
 
 M. 
 
 -li 
 
 &^, -ti. 
 
 :^ tsai 
 
 # j« 
 
 i?ii -ti 
 
 H 
 
 sbib- 
 
 # 
 
 cbiang- 
 
 f^ - 
 
 Mil ti 
 
 M *^'''' 
 
 ^ -cbi" 
 
 
 -tsai 
 
 m 
 
 -cbiu 
 
 ^. tse"^- 
 
 ~n -bsia 
 
 'fy -sbih* 
 
 31. -^^, 
 
 ?^. 
 
 neng ; 
 
 # 
 
 -cho 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 al ch'iao 
 
 &^. -^■- 
 
 ^ teng- 
 
 il 
 
 ts'ung 
 
 ft 
 
 chu 
 
 ^ na 
 
 ^, -cl>o> 
 
 51. 
 
 xf. pu 
 
 111 
 
 eh'ing- 
 
 
 i 
 
 ;^ -cho 
 
 ^ ''li'" 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^Ij -tao 
 
 -?- 
 
 -tsao 
 
 ^ 
 
 yeb 
 
 ;fi pa 
 
 -j^ hsiaug 
 
 M ''- 
 
 M 'bei 
 
 51. 
 
 -•rb, 
 
 i^c 
 
 pa. 
 
 ^^ san? 
 
 i 
 
 rfi ^'''<' 
 
 J o ^'^*'' 
 
 /^ 
 
 cb'i- 
 
 
 47. 
 
 ii '•'"'i" 
 
 ^ tao 
 
 ^ chiao- 
 
 50. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -sben 
 
 % 
 
 ni 
 
 m P'- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 31 -'^•'' 
 
 -^ tsao 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsou 
 
 B3 
 
 tang- 
 
 ~rC bsia- 
 
 I^RT. 'ho- 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 .5^ wau 
 
 /IB. 
 
 cb'i, 
 
 ^<7J 
 
 -cb'u 
 
 H -yii 
 
 5.3. 
 y^ t'ien 
 
 ^ ch'uan 
 
 i^ n,ei 
 
 ^ij 
 
 tao 
 
 ft 
 
 tso 
 
 1^ mo? 
 
 ;|^ mien- 
 
 jil- 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ien- 
 
 ^ 
 
 sbih 
 
 55. 
 
 Bra <=i'''"s 
 
 |:^ -°'ao 
 
 B^ -t'ou 
 
 — » 
 
 -'hun 
 
 ^^ 
 
 pu 
 
 iC ta 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 31. -''^- 
 
 i\^ -ti 
 
 T 
 
 -liao 
 
 /J> 
 
 bsiao- 
 
 jil^- 
 
 ± t'ai- 
 
 52. 
 
 11$ -sbih 
 
 1^^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 'Cl\ 
 
 -bsin, 
 
 S^ t'ou 
 
 F# -y'-^'-s 
 
 ^ t'ieu 
 
 ^ 'hou 
 
 ii# 
 
 shib- 
 
 
 cbe 
 
 ^ ti 
 
 [ij ch'u 
 
 m ''"^ 
 
 14. -'■• 
 
 -^ 
 
 -'bou 
 
 1® 
 
 -ko 
 
 ?M -li 
 
 >^ -lai 
 
 ^ shib 
 
 Fji ch'iao 
 
 i^a. 
 
 -■rb, 
 
 H# 
 
 sbib- 
 
 ^Ij pieh 
 
 7. -I'^O' 
 
 . i 
 
 ;^ t'ien 
 
 -t 
 
 cb'i 
 
 f^ 
 
 -'bou 
 
 qjS sbai- 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 JJ^ ku 
 
 1* shaiig 
 
 A 
 
 pa 
 
 % 
 
 -'rb 
 
 l'. ^'^°' 
 
 ^ kai 
 
 ^^ '^''" 
 
 ilb hsieh 
 
 + 
 
 -sbih 
 
 # 
 
 'bou- 
 
 '|>g P'a 
 
 gg sbai 
 
 M ''^'^'^' 
 
 l^i -ei 
 
 a 
 
 li 
 
 'If. 
 
 -'bui, 
 
 51^ p>°s 
 
 ^ff -ti 
 
 g tzu 
 
 &^ -^' 
 
 ill!. 
 
 ti, 
 
 P] 
 
 k'o 
 
 T.'°- 
 
 ^ tung- 
 
 itll ti 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 K 
 
 cbih 
 
 m 
 
 -cbiu 
 
 56. 
 
 ^, -l^si, 
 
 ^ sbeng 
 
 ^— i 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsou 
 
 m 
 
 wan 
 
 Ut ch'u- 
 
 i^ na 
 
 [- sliang 
 
 m ^'^°- 
 
 ai 
 
 cb'u 
 
 7 
 
 -liao. 
 
 
 
 •jAi/. als 
 
 3 read ssu. 
 
 
 

 
 ^ ^^ T'JEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 39-4C, 
 
 ^te- cliich 
 
 r -sliaiig 
 
 ^ t.TOU 
 
 •g tao- 
 
 -ti 
 cliiu 
 
 /L> shao 
 
 ] 
 
 liao. 
 
 45. 
 
 ^ t'iea 
 
 |§ -fa- 
 
 "T -liao, 
 
 3iS •'''' 
 
 ^ pi 
 
 Pg ch'ih 
 
 J5^ wan- 
 
 ^1 nao 
 
 ^ij tao 
 
 Ij- sliih- 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 U^ sliih- 
 
 ^ -'bou 
 
 Hj& sliui- 
 
 ;Ki cliiao 
 
 46. 
 
 T t'ion 
 
 1^ wan 
 
 
 IS 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 A 
 
 liang 
 
 -liao, 
 
 i- 
 
 -cliing 
 
 iirh 
 
 j>'ao 
 
 -liao, 
 
 tsai 
 
 nio- 
 
 ts'eiig 
 
 'hui- 
 
 t7.il, 
 
 k'o- 
 
 -chiu 
 
 tsai 
 
 cL'i- 
 
 -kan 
 -ti 
 
 -bsia 
 wu 
 
 -liao 
 ts'ao 
 lo. 
 
 44. 
 
 lao 
 
 'huang- 
 
 'hun- 
 
 -ti 
 
 sbih- 
 
 -'bou, 
 
 ko 
 
 jea 
 
 tou 
 
 'liui 
 
 chia 
 
 hsieb- 
 
 -cbo 
 
 lit tz'fi 
 
 i^ sbuo 
 
 -t: cb'i 
 
 Jj yiieh 
 
 2^ Niu 
 
 ■^ 'bui 
 
 m ^■'''•' 
 
 42. 
 
 A j«»- 
 
 ^ -cbia 
 
 §=§ cli'ing 
 
 ~^k ^'"'^ 
 
 H. tsao- 
 
 M, -'■'in. 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 H ts'ai 
 
 ;^ fang 
 
 Ejq 11)1"'= 
 
 'iP^ -men 
 
 f(iL cbiao 
 
 1^ wo 
 
 ^. -lai, 
 
 f^ tso 
 
 f|- shili- 
 
 t^ -mo ? 
 
 4.3. 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 A ^^ 
 
 ^ fa 
 
 ^, "•=''' 
 ^ 'hou- 
 
 ^ -lai 
 1^ cbieh 
 ^' -cbo 
 
 •^ tao 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 ^E nien 
 
 g§ tn 
 
 -t «h'i 
 
 ^ yiieh 
 
 ^<J) ch'u 
 
 -t cb'i 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 M 'hei- 
 
 T\ -hsia, 
 
 W. bsi-- 
 
 #^ cb'iao 
 
 ^ shen 
 
 -^ -tzu 
 
 t^ ta 
 
 ^ -cb'i 
 
 — ■ i 
 
 M tso 
 
 ^[^ ch'iao 
 
 iS t" 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 Pi '■" 
 
 -fo hsiang- 
 
 ^ -'bui, 
 El I 
 
 Win 
 
 
 tr 
 w 
 
 m 
 
 PH 
 
 
 it 
 
 A 
 
 
 -'rii 
 
 'buan 
 
 yu 
 
 cb'ai- 
 
 -.sliili, 
 
 ni, 
 
 k'aa 
 
 ta- 
 
 -pu- 
 
 -cb'i 
 
 cbing- 
 
 -slien 
 
 -lai. 
 
 41. 
 
 Niu 
 
 Lang 
 
 Chih 
 
 Nil, 
 
 cbe 
 
 liang- 
 
 -ko 
 
 bsing, 
 
 pen- 
 
 -lai 
 
 sliih 
 
 kong 
 
 cbih 
 
 -ti 
 
 tsu ; 
 
 ku- 
 
 -jen 
 
 sbuo, 
 
 t'a- 
 
 -men 
 
 ts'nng- 
 
 cli'ien- 
 
 sbib 
 
 % -'rh 
 
 •jjj cb6 
 
 yp cban 
 
 ^ Isni 
 
 A. *=*' 
 
 ^Ij Pieh 
 
 f^ nnng 
 
 -^ -ting. 
 
 fl§ -bsia- 
 
 tj^ -'liuo 
 
 ^^. -ti, 
 
 is 'bai 
 
 ^ pn 
 
 5lJ tao 
 
 40. 
 
 U ni 
 
 3iS 'buan 
 
 ^" k'an 
 
 ^^ sbu 
 
 PJS ni 
 
 M mo? 
 
 y^ t'ien 
 
 ^^ nieng-'i 
 
 J^ -nieng- 
 
 ^ -lia°^- 
 
 5E -'rt 
 
 ~f, -liao; 
 
 "^ 'bui 
 ^ -urh 
 
 3b. 
 
 pa:
 
 30-39. 
 
 ^ ^^ T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF TIEN. 
 
 7, Iko! 
 -^ tsao 
 ^h tio"- 
 
 i -•'^ 
 
 5{5. -lai ! 
 
 jjA- sliou- 
 
 iA -sliili, 
 la 
 
 il4 slioii- 
 
 I* shatig 
 
 1^ hsiao 
 
 -il. -cli'ii 
 
 fE pa! 
 
 ^1 wan- 
 
 "T -liao 
 
 ^ k'au 
 
 yJQ bsicn- 
 
 ^ -shung 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 30. 
 ^ t'icu 
 
 ^ li- 
 
 ^ -ming 
 
 J -liao ; 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 S. tsao 
 
 T, liy.o; 
 
 ^^ cli'a 
 !^ -pu- 
 
 Y^ -to- 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 ^ liaug 
 
 J > liao ; 
 
 ^ clii"- 
 
 
 JsyL 
 
 ^k ^°- 
 
 'Ipn -men 
 # tei 
 
 /■^^ -cb'ii- 
 itlft -ch'u- 
 -■rh- 
 -ti 
 chiu 
 ^ cli'i 
 
 ^. -^^'' 
 .S!^ ts'ai 
 
 |B kan- 
 
 iS -te- 
 
 Y -sbang 
 
 37. 
 fjl t'a 
 H tsao- 
 ^ -ch'i 
 
 ^ ^" 
 "Ms sbih- 
 
 |j| -cb'iug 
 
 l|^^ kan ; 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 I^iJ' kang 
 S^ chien 
 
 ;#; lia-s. 
 
 j^ cbiu 
 
 {i{ cb'u- 
 
 -^ -cb'ii 
 "T -liao. 
 
 38. 
 ^ tung- 
 
 ■^ -fang 
 
 ^ toil 
 
 J -liao 
 
 Q pai 
 
 ^ yao 
 
 p sbang 
 
 P^ -men 
 
 :^ chieli- 
 
 j^ cbiu 
 
 S. tsao 
 
 m tie"- 
 
 rb 
 
 7^ " 
 
 ^ cb'i- 
 5{5 -lai 
 
 so. 
 
 mi"^- 
 
 vu 
 
 liano 
 
 S. tsao- 
 
 A j«°- 
 
 ^^ -cbia 
 
 5^1 sung- 
 
 Bs t'ina: 
 
 ^^ -cbicn- 
 
 ilfc -sIhio 
 
 -jiL sbib 
 
 ^ yni- 
 Iji -sbili 
 Sk cb'icn- 
 
 M -ku- 
 i^^ -tuiig.^ 
 
 34. 
 
 ^ tni">L 
 
 -flSI. -ko, 
 tSj ya- 
 P^ -mCu 
 
 fl -li 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 ^ yao- 
 
 ^ -cbiu 
 
 &§ -ti 
 •^ kung- 
 
 ^, -sbib, 
 
 ^^ pi 
 
 # tei 
 
 tHj liang 
 
 J^ cbiu 
 
 ^Ij, tao; 
 
 ^ wo- 
 
 II 
 
 -men 
 'bei- 
 
 i^ -tung 
 ifS ts'ai 
 
 /H 
 
 kan- 
 
 h -sbang 
 
 35. 
 
 W cb'uang- 
 
 ^ -'bu 
 
 m ton 
 
 :# -ling 
 
 y -liao, 
 
 I 
 
 ffjL cbiao 
 
 A J^" 
 
 r!# cb'iao- 
 
 :^ ■*''''' 
 
 ^f 'bao 
 
 :^^ P» 
 
 i* cb'i- 
 
 1^ -ts'an 
 
 33. 
 
 H cbi- 
 
 pij. -cliiao 
 
 -j^ 'bou, 
 
 ■^ t'ien 
 
 ^ 'bai 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 A 
 
 ta 
 
 VLii 
 
 A j«n 
 
 ^ fen- 
 
 [±| -cb'u 
 
 is ™*^i 
 
 5a -'A 
 
 ^ -bai 
 
 l^ff -ti 
 
 H^ sbib- 
 
 /^ 'bou- 
 
 ^ cbiu 
 
 -& sbib 
 
 M 'bei 
 
 ^ ch'uan- 
 
 f^ p'ao- 
 
 fj^J -ti 
 
 ^- k'an- 
 
 m -cben. 
 
 
 31 
 
 ^ 
 
 wcl 
 
 A 
 
 jeu 
 
 fit 
 
 sliib 
 
 :^ 
 
 pu 
 
 m 
 
 tso 
 
 ={i 
 
 sun- 
 
 A 
 
 jen- 
 
 ^ij 
 
 li- 
 
 a 
 
 cbi 
 
 6^ 
 
 -ti 
 
 ¥, 
 
 sbib, 
 
 ■J/ 
 
 lao 
 
 % 
 
 t'icn- 
 
 f? 
 
 -yeb 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 Z^ pu 
 
 -0^ pao- 
 
 32. 
 
 %^ cb'iu 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ■gl- cbi°«- 
 
 van 
 wu
 
 ^ ^t^ T'lEN-LEl, CATEGORY OF 'TIEN. 
 
 15-30. 
 
 28. 
 i^ ta- 
 ^ ch'ing- 
 
 -^ cli'i 
 
 ith *^'^^' 
 
 29. 
 
 ^ t'icn 
 
 "J' -liao 
 
 7 lo. 
 
 ^ chill 
 
 i'j^ P'a 
 
 -^ shih 
 
 -^ yao 
 
 30. 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ kuan 
 
 {[(i t'a 
 
 aj* ch'i- 
 
 Jl -fu 
 
 wo, 
 l^ wo 
 
 n 
 
 ^> tou 
 >^ shou 
 
 g tzu 
 
 ± 
 
 
 wo 
 
 -ti 
 
 shaug 
 
 -t'ieu 
 
 t'i. 
 
 26. 
 
 m 
 
 U 
 
 
 }\3> 
 
 El 
 
 n 
 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 P3' 
 
 pu 
 
 cLiL- 
 
 -tao 
 
 iii 
 
 -ti 
 
 fu- 
 
 -UlU 
 
 -ti 
 
 -ch'ing 
 
 shili 
 
 " 'liao 
 
 t'ien 
 
 Wang 
 
 chi" ; 
 
 tsung 
 
 pao- 
 
 -pu- 
 
 -chin 
 
 -ti? 
 
 27. 
 ylin 
 
 bsiao 
 
 wu 
 
 san, 
 
 lang- 
 
 -lang 
 
 ch'ing 
 
 t'ien. 
 
 A J^i 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 H tan- 
 
 a; -iisi- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 IS 'buo- 
 
 \ 
 
 24. 
 
 A j^° 
 
 '[? ts'un 
 
 ;\^^ lisin 
 
 f^f 'Lao 
 
 ^, tai, 
 
 ^ tsai 
 
 []j^ man- 
 
 !^ -pu- 
 
 ^;;!^ -kuo 
 
 B^ t'ou- 
 
 h" -sbang 
 
 % t'ien; 
 
 j1 cli'ih- 
 
 Jp. -tsao 
 
 If tsung 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 # pao- 
 
 iS -yinS 
 25. 
 
 It t'eng- 
 
 ^g -yiin- 
 
 7l< -eliui- 
 
 T. -'"' 
 
 IRX chcnjr- 
 
 ^ -t'ien - 
 
 J^t -cL8ng- 
 
 ^ -yeh 
 
 (-jef -ti 
 
 >{^^ shao- 
 
 ;^ -P"- 
 ;j'rt -lisi. 
 
 or 
 
 J -liao 
 [eJ *liui- 
 fl -lu 
 
 7^10. 
 
 22. 
 ^ pi 
 
 ith tz'ii 
 
 ^^ t'ien- 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 tr ta- 
 
 Y^h -cliang: 
 
 or 
 
 •. 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 -jr^ -t'ien 
 
 tr ta- 
 
 ^1 
 
 -cbia. 
 
 2. J. ^ 
 
 leu 
 
 ^ t' 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ;?: p"- 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^ -yiin. 
 
 
 T 
 
 ill 
 
 7. 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 
 "F 
 
 
 7 
 
 t'ien 
 
 yu 
 
 sliih- 
 
 -cb'ing 
 
 cb'U 
 
 tso. 
 
 1.9. 
 wo 
 
 tcng- 
 
 -liao 
 
 ni 
 
 'bao- 
 
 -pan- 
 
 -t'ien 
 
 -liao, 
 
 ni 
 
 tou 
 
 pu 
 
 lai. 
 
 20. 
 i 
 
 t'ien 
 
 tao- 
 
 wau 
 
 -ti 
 
 tou 
 
 sbib 
 
 bsia 
 
 -yii; 
 
 0?' 
 
 cbeng- 
 
 -t'ica 
 
 -ti 
 
 bsia- 
 
 yii 
 
 21. 
 
 tsou- 
 
 -liao 
 
 ^ to 
 
 3> 
 
 ■^ -sbao 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 (1(J -ti 
 
 16. 
 
 ^ pu 
 
 ^ kuo 
 
 — • i 
 
 PU liang 
 
 ^ t'ien, 
 
 Wt '^i'i" 
 
 ^ij tao. 
 
 17. 
 
 ^ mei 
 
 ^, yiieh, 
 
 A ta 
 
 1^ cbin 
 
 ZIT san- 
 
 -l" -sbih 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 A\ bsiao 
 
 ^E cbin, 
 
 '. urb- 
 
 -1— -sbih 
 
 -It chiu 
 
 ^ t'ien. 
 
 18. 
 
 #, t'a 
 
 fl5 t'ou 
 
 ^. t'ie"> 
 
 M *''''" 
 
 ^ chib- 
 
 r^ -tao 
 
 — urb
 
 l-l; 
 
 ^ M T'lEN-LEI, CATEGORY OF T'lEN. 
 
 ^ t'-ien 
 
 M, t'ung. 
 
 12. 
 #, t'a 
 
 &>f -ti 
 •^, hsien- 
 
 ■^^ -slieng 
 
 j^ che 
 
 ^ clii 
 
 ^ t'ieu 
 
 Pf k'o- 
 
 ^ -i 
 
 ^Ij^ tao. 
 
 13. 
 
 is cli^ 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 p> hsia 
 is: ta 
 
 14. 
 J^ kuo 
 
 4^ chi 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^rhiu 
 ^ ai: 
 
 or 
 
 M ^'"° 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 Wi "'''"^ 
 V- 
 
 5!j . tao 
 ^5 na- , 
 
 # tei • 
 
 Jl shang- 
 
 ?# -fu- 
 
 &^ -ti 
 
 gl cliiu 
 
 ^ shiL 
 
 % t'ien: 
 
 ^ yiieli, 
 /p Lsing- 
 
 W> -lis"/'' 
 ^■5 tou 
 ^ tsai 
 ^5 na- 
 if, li.; 
 gg neng- 
 
 ■fy -lising 
 Pg szu 
 
 B$. siiib, 
 
 vj^ 'hua- 
 ^p -slieng 
 llg wan 
 
 #. ^u; 
 S^ sUiL- 
 ^& -tsai 
 -^ sliili 
 iJ^ tsao- 
 -'hua 
 ■-•ti 
 clm- 
 -tsai. 
 
 
 11. 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 JfJi 'sung 
 
 ^ I'U 
 
 ^ k'ea 
 
 15 k'uei- 
 
 8. 
 tao- 
 
 m 
 
 ^ -kao 
 
 ^ 'liuang 
 
 ^ -t'ien 
 
 '^fe pao- 
 
 -^ -yi 
 
 9. 
 
 A J*^" 
 
 1^ k'ao- 
 
 # -cUo 
 
 ^ lao 
 
 ^ t'ien- 
 
 Pg ch'ih 
 
 10. 
 
 SI P'an- 
 
 ■^ -ku 
 
 p§ k'ai- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 Mil ti 
 
 l^xf -ti 
 
 B$ sbih- 
 
 j^ -'bou- 
 
 5E, -urb, 
 
 ij]«? ch'ing 
 
 ^ eban 
 
 {" sbang 
 
 y^ t'ien 
 ^ k'an- 
 
 -chen. 
 
 5. 
 ts'ang 
 
 m. 
 
 ^ t'ien ! 
 
 ^" ts'ang 
 
 ^. t'ien! 
 
 ^ tse""!- 
 jih.\ 
 
 jg -mo 
 
 {|iL chiao 
 
 ^ wo 
 
 ^^ sbou 
 
 jH cbe 
 
 # ya°^- 
 
 5£ -A 
 
 ^^ -ti 
 
 ^^ wei- 
 
 ffl„ -cb'ii? 
 
 6. 
 
 ^1] pieh 
 
 # tso 
 
 ^ k'uei- 
 
 ;\]^S -bsin 
 
 ^1 sbib ; 
 
 flp t'ou- 
 
 h -sbang 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 ^ cb'ing 
 
 ^ t'ien. 
 
 ^ 1- 
 
 ^ -t'ien- 
 
 ^ -yell 
 
 'f'fe tso 
 
 jjiljl sh6n 
 
 (lij -ti 
 
 ^ ko 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ^, tza, 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 ^ yi 
 
 h sbang 
 
 W y" 
 
 ^^ ts'ang 
 
 ^. t'ien, 
 
 ^ yu 
 
 pj 
 
 cb'iuu 
 
 ^, t'ien, 
 
 W y» 
 
 ^^ 'buaug 
 
 ^. t'ien, 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 :^ lao 
 
 ^V t'ien, 
 
 ^ y» 
 
 ^^ t'ien- 
 
 3. 
 
 [||lj| man- 
 
 ^ -pu- 
 
 3;^ -kuo 
 
 ■^ t'ien 
 
 .±. cb'ii. 
 
 4. 
 
 A j^"- 
 
 ^ t'ien 
 
 ji ko 
 -^, tzu, 
 
 is 
 
 ko 
 
 cbieb« 
 -fa ; 
 
 -M. sbih 
 
 i^ 
 
 tso 
 
 sbun 
 3 
 
 on 
 
 IS 1 
 
 H -t' 
 
 ^ tsiu 
 
 Jtp. tsuu 
 
 ^^. -'1' 
 
 M ko 
 
 -^ sbib 
 
 yp tso 
 
 ^ y" 
 
 Jill, *" 
 
 M y^ei^'^ 
 
 — san- 
 
 &^. -ti, 
 
 na ko 
 
 -fe sbib 
 
 g taug 
 
 fill- 
 -+• -tzii 
 
 I 
 
 * hsinr^-hsinff,— the upper character repeated,— is more commou than lisina-hsU. The Asii is 
 and s«, iu diffcrcut contexts. . 
 
 pronounced also hsiu
 
 1 I 
 
 i V 
 
 CHINESE TEXT 
 
 OF 
 
 31114 (l{it%ori| 0| i'kit, 
 
 HEAVENS, THE HEAVENS, &c.
 
 PEKTNn SVLLABAKY, 
 
 BEING A COLLECTION OF THE CHARACTERS REPRESENTING 
 
 4 
 
 IIIK 
 
 DIALECT OF PEKING; 
 
 ARRANGED AFTER A NEW ORTHOGRA.PHY IN SYLLABIC 
 
 CLASSES, ACCORDING TO THE FOUR TONES; 
 
 DESIGNED TO ACCOMPANY 
 
 •fi S I K- € H i N G 1 17, 
 
 Oli 
 
 BOOK OF EXPEIHMEKIS, 
 
 BY 
 
 THOMAS FRANCIS WADE/ 
 
 Chinese Secretary. 
 
 HONGKONG 
 
 MDCCCLIX.
 
 ADJJiTIONS AND CUUKECTIONS. 
 
 A complete list of the charnctem which should have been marked with Asterinks, as having more forms of pronuvcialwn 
 than one, will he fniind in the Appendix, which it will be advisable to compare carefully with the Syllabary before 
 proceeding to make ttse of the latter. 
 
 
 
 
 
 L^MISPRINTS. 
 
 
 
 
 
 — Page 
 
 iVo. 
 
 
 SiiUuhlc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 24 
 
 
 ch'i 
 
 for 
 
 & 
 
 
 read 
 
 m 
 
 29 
 
 152 
 
 
 k'li 
 
 for 
 
 Wa 
 
 
 lead 
 
 ^. 
 
 :37 
 
 187 
 
 
 Ion 
 
 for 
 
 lo.u 
 
 
 rea(i 
 
 loll. 
 
 37 
 
 188 
 
 
 hi 
 
 for 
 
 lu 
 
 
 read 
 
 lu. 
 
 49 
 
 254 
 
 
 p'iao 
 
 for 
 
 ^M 
 
 
 read 
 
 Bi 
 
 56 
 
 290 
 
 
 shou 
 
 for 
 
 299 
 
 
 read 
 
 290 
 
 57 
 
 299 
 
 
 txd 
 
 for 
 
 szii 
 
 
 read 
 
 szii 
 
 61 
 
 Page 
 
 327 
 
 No. 
 
 io 
 
 foi- 
 
 n.~ OMiseiONs 
 
 Syllable 
 
 \>t ''"' 
 
 Column 
 
 read 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 chU'n 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 24 
 
 
 rli'i 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 10 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 rhii 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 11 
 
 
 6S 
 
 
 chu 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 m 
 
 14 
 
 
 81 
 
 
 .f<> 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 m 
 
 W 
 
 
 87 
 
 
 hnr}ij 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 19 
 
 
 99 
 
 
 '^ni 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 m 
 
 10 
 
 
 102 
 
 
 'hvu 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 M 
 
 23 
 
 
 115 
 
 
 httiiun 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 m 
 
 28 
 
 
 147 
 
 
 Iw 
 
 
 f) 
 
 
 m 
 
 29 
 
 
 151 
 
 
 ha 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 * 
 
 37 
 
 
 186 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 m 
 
 39 
 
 
 195 
 
 
 ma 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 M 
 
 42 
 
 
 210 
 
 
 1110 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 j^ 
 
 47 
 
 
 242 
 
 
 p'au'j 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 t 
 
 50 
 
 
 263 
 
 
 po 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 50 
 
 
 264 
 
 
 fo 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 m 
 
 52 
 
 
 274 
 
 
 so 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 53 
 
 
 280 
 
 
 xitriff 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 m 
 
 55 
 
 
 287 
 
 
 .thhi 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 Wi 
 
 62 
 
 
 329 
 
 
 t'ou 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 m 
 
 64 
 
 
 350 
 
 
 he 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ()4 
 
 
 350 
 
 
 /.vr' 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 n 
 
 (i4 
 
 
 350 
 
 
 /.sy 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 JK 
 
 m 
 
 
 370 
 
 
 t:u 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 !■.!) 
 
 
 386 
 
 
 i/ph 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 w. 
 
 73 
 
 
 396 
 
 
 1/K 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 m 
 
 After 'huo 102 supply, — ktva, hrvai, &c., see 'hua, 'hnai, &c. 
 
 In the Sjnoptipnl Table, line 1, under an// read ^ ; line 2, under ua, read ^: line 7, 
 
 mdpv <>, read ^fe ; lino 21, nndor ni//, read i^.
 
 The Peking Syllabary is an Alphabetic Index assumed to contain all the sounds in use in Chinese 
 as spohen by natives of Peking-, arranged under 397 syllabic classes, subdivided according- the law of 
 the four tones of the Peking- Dialect. Appended to the Index is a SjTioptic Table of the syllables of the 
 Index and a Synoptic Table of characters representing' these sounds, or syllables, together with two other 
 Appendices, which speak for themselves. 
 
 The history of the Peking Syllabary is as follows. — In the absence of alphabetic instruments for 
 the expression of sound the Chinese lexicons are in the habit of presenting two characters to the reader, 
 who is supposed to be able, by dovetailing the initial part of the sound of the first with the final part of 
 that of the second, to produce for himself the sound of the character before him. Thus, out of tou and 
 mai he is expected to extract tui. In a well known Vocabulary called the Wu Farig Yiian Yin, 
 or Sounds that rhyme throughout the Empire, some 10,000 characters are arranged under 20 initials 
 and 12 finals as exhibited in the table given in Appendix II. Each final is subdivided into s 
 number of classes not exceeding four, and each class, in obedience to the law of the tones, into 
 subordinate sets of characters representing sounds never exceeding five ; five being the number of 
 the tones formerly recognised in the spoken language which now acknowledges but four tones, and 
 still retained in the study of letters. For convenience of the printer, and for the better understanding 
 of the matter by those not familiar with the written character, the place of the latter has been sup- 
 plied in the table by a syllable, written so as to be pronounced in the manner which the foreign and 
 native orthographies of last century shew to have been the pronunciation in vogue at the close of it. 
 This exhibits however no more than the syllabic difference between the 5th tone and other four, under 
 which the syllable continues al])habetically the same, though, tonically, it undergoes four modulations. 
 The f)th tone modulation modifies the syllable, which in the first column, for instance, fi'om pien 
 becomes pifi/i. The 1st and the 12th final have been chosen as stilScient to illustrate the use of the 
 table, which is in fact but an index of the Vocabulary itself. 
 
 A native, from causes affecting the phonetic property of the Chinese character, on which we have 
 not now leisure to expatiate, is oftener able to guess the terminal sound belonging to a character new 
 to him than its initiul. Suppose him in want of the sound, tone, and meaning, of the character p'ien 
 a slice, he will assume that it will be found opposite the 1st final, t'iefi, and under the 2nd initial, 
 p'ao. He will there find five characters representing this sound with its varieties of tone ; to wit p'ien i, 
 p'ien 2, p'ien 3, p'ien 4, p'ieh 5 ; and under p'ien 4, the p'ien- he seeks. 
 
 It will hence be gathered that this substitute for western spelling is not very artistic, and the pro- 
 posed end of syllabic nicety has been farther removed by the circumstance that each succeeding edition 
 of the Vocabulary, (and there have been at least four in the last half century,) in order to meet the 
 changes of tone -and pronunciation to which the spoken lang^uage in its innocence of alphabetic safe- 
 guards is exposed, has transferred characters from one order of precedence to another, in a manner 
 calcuhited to unsettle both sound and tone. And yet, such is the bondage of the traditions of the arrange- 
 ment, no edition has introduced anything like changes enough ; no edition has recognised the disappear- 
 ance of the ju sheng or re-entering tone, the sounds in which are alienated from the syllables under 
 which they were formerly classed, and although, generally, to be found under the hsia p'ing, may 
 belong to any one of the four tones of the new syllabic category ; nor has the latest edition remarked 
 the fusion of the initials ch, h, and ts, aspirated and unaspirated, before the vowel sound we write 
 ioTe. To give an instance, the character signify-ing a joint of bamboo, hence a section, a period of 
 time, (fee, originally written tsich, and classed as bearing the ju, or oth, tone of the sound tsien, is now 
 pronounced chieh, and bears in conversation either the 2nd or the 3rd of the Tones. 
 
 In ISi? the writer employed his first teacher of the Peking Dialect, by name Ying Lung-t'iex, to 
 select from the alphabetic index at the end of Gongalves's Diccionario China-Portuguez all the characters 
 representing words available for conversation. These after a somewhat vacillating orthography were 
 arranged in alphabetic order following the sounds of the Peking Dialect. The teacher however objected 
 to the majority of the tones assigned them by Gongalves, as not being the tones of the spoken language, 
 and a year or two later volunteered himself a re-arrangement of the Wu Fang Yiian Yin, which in due 
 time he accomplished ; not venturing indeed to abandon the old initial and terminal indices, but redistributing 
 many of the characters so as to bring all of like sound together, repeating all which differed in sound or 
 tone, and appending to each a short sentence illustrative of its use. This embryo of a Vocabulary the 
 writer had hoped long- since to expand into a larger work. His orthography was, however, only fixed 
 and the classification of the Syllabary commenced, when the Hsin Ching Lu, whose tale is told in its 
 own introduction was undertaken. 
 
 The Sj'llabary, it is still hoped, is but the index of a future Vocabulary upon a becoming scale. In 
 its present bare condition it is not without its use to students of the dialect most necessary to the ofiScial 
 inteipreter. About the pi-npripty and convenience of the orthography there will not fail to be some
 
 discussion; its battle lius been fought m tlit; llsiii Cluii;^ Lii ; Imt ii uinlouljii-dlj cunlain.-) ahoM,- niue- 
 tenths of the characters required to represent tlie Peking- Dialect, ranf^-ed under syllabic clast^es not very 
 wide of the mark in pronunciation, and subdivided according- to the tones from the mouth of a native 
 who speaks Ids own dialect well. Ilis decisions regarding tone and pronunciation have been g-euerally 
 confirmed by the practice of five or six other Pekinese, lettered and unlettered, between whose sjieecli 
 and his own careful comparison has been made. This is the claim of the Index to attention phonetically; 
 graphically, it has this ; that most characters of a common primitive, that is possessing- in common that 
 part of the character which is not the radical, have been arrayed in the tone-column according- to the 
 place of their radical in the series of the radical characters, 214: in number. These the student will find 
 in any foreign dictionary. The characters in the Index are at the same time so dressed horizontally that 
 like will be found grouped with like, as it were in strata running through the four tone columns of each 
 syllable, and extending on the same principle into the columns of the aspirated syllable, whenever a sound 
 is so modified; the aspirated syllable invariably standing by the side of the unaspirated. Let any one 
 turn to the syllable Pan, P'aw, or Pao, P'ao, and he will see at a glance what it takes so many words 
 to explain ; and the ])resumed advantage to the learner secured by this arrangement is, that he has not 
 only the means of refi-eshing his memoiy when endeavouring to recal the tones of words or phrases 
 he may have learned, together with the liability of syllables to aspiration or the reverse, a distinction of 
 equally vital importance with that of the tones ; — but that, as his vocabulary advances, while thus 
 confirming himself in tones and breathings, an exercise he must lone/ pei-sist in, he will find, it is Ijelieved, 
 such improvement in his recollection of the dilFerent meanings of characters resembling each other in 
 their primitive part but differing in their other accidents, as will greatly avail him in reading and trans- 
 lation ; for, although the Syllabary more particularly addrc'sses itself to the student of the spoken tongue, 
 the mass of the characters in it are in full use in the written language. The Syllabary will also be found 
 a useful index of reference for many natives well qualified to teach the spoken language, but possessing 
 but an imperfect accjuaintance with the written character. Such are too fi-equently oiir only insti-uments 
 at the ports open to trade, and the conversation lesson often hangs fire, or is continued in doul)t. in 
 consequence.
 
 ALPHABETIC INDEX 
 
 OF SYLLABLES 
 
 IN THE 
 
 
 PEKING DIALECT. 
 
 'V 
 
 ! ■J 
 
 A. 
 1. 
 
 AI. 
 
 2. 
 
 AN6. 
 
 4, 
 
 ¥1 
 
 A TO AO 
 
 W 
 M. 
 
 K 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 * 
 
 4 ^v^ 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rWT • •• 
 
 fel 
 
 St* 
 
 iSfcli^v 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 AO. 
 
 5. 
 
 
 [ J M>U-*nu-UL/ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?l9fl. ea-v/r^i^vl 
 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be fouad under other syllables. 
 
 K^gc^^f. 
 
 yM ^^f' '^^'-**^ '" **> .ft. fewJc
 
 0,^- v-^Y 
 
 * 
 
 CHA TO CHANG Peking Svllabary. 
 
 CHA. ^L il ^L 
 
 ^ B^t 
 
 tiii^^^ 
 
 ^ m^;^i. 
 
 
 m 
 
 #^gCH'A. ^3e»'g 
 
 7. Av/ r* 
 
 nit 
 
 
 :iai:?||^ 
 
 1i 
 
 
 1^ ■ ^ 
 
 it m 
 
 *!*• 
 ^ 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 ^<^ 
 O^ 
 
 CHAI. 
 
 8. 
 
 m. 
 
 
 If* 
 
 
 :_^. U t;tv MTV* I 
 
 ma 
 
 
 .a 
 
 9 
 
 ,CHAI. •.. ^w' AH-* 
 
 
 o 
 
 CHAN. 
 
 10. 
 
 i^ 
 
 CHANG. 
 
 o M f^fjJH'AN. miiiMt^m^m 
 
 j.H-^lfffe^.^}: 
 
 34^ a^ 
 
 0^ 11 
 
 
 
 
 
 IM 
 
 {NJt^«^^ 
 
 k- 
 
 O :l'^-^iiY1)H'ANG= §^^ . ^^' ^t^ 
 
 
 .^. (flU'^' 
 
 
 
 •*t/l(K Kali's 
 
 
 
 IS .:a^^^ 
 
 i,4 it K^'^'f-S ;)otW^<^'^t"y '^''''^• 
 
 
 M^S^ifet:^-'- 
 
 ^^UU)^'j|^/I^U-«i-U'% ... 
 
 
 '^/|rf,V-(>-'. ... 
 
 B^ 
 
 :-^^!^^* 
 
 * Charactei's §dr mnjj^d 'Will ;Jso be found uudcr otlier syUubles. 
 
 H-S • • • • • •
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 GHAO TO CHEN 
 
 
 T-± 
 
 spTt ± 
 
 * 
 
 ^± ¥"P Jt 
 
 * 
 
 CHAO. 
 
 ^ 
 
 « • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 R^ 
 
 CH'AO. ^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 ij. 
 
 ts 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 m 
 
 ^^' /)nj/ ... iij; 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 :4vVr # ... 
 
 # 
 
 S-f* 
 
 
 ^ ... ... 
 
 m 
 
 MH 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 • •• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 CHE. 
 
 itj. 
 
 M 
 
 ... * 
 
 i<%''cHt 
 
 
 ir. 
 
 •(•ilfrAp' 
 
 ;g| 
 
 *!: 
 
 It 
 
 CHEI. 
 
 IS. 
 
 
 o 
 
 ± 
 
 o 
 
 5e, 
 
 CHEN. 
 
 19. 
 
 
 I) 
 
 m 
 
 n. 
 
 * 
 
 ¥± 
 
 CH'EN m 
 
 /I'.B. 
 
 II* 
 
 J^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables
 
 CHENG TO CHI 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 ¥± ¥V 
 
 CHENG. IE 
 
 
 o 
 
 IE IE 
 
 ••• jlS 
 ••• pjE 
 
 ... f^:' 
 
 f^4 
 
 22. 
 
 CH'ENG.f^ M 
 
 
 > 
 
 CHI. 
 
 23. 
 
 tt 
 
 ¥ 
 
 ^% 
 
 m 
 
 m\ 
 
 C^® 
 
 113 
 
 ^ 
 
 4-1 
 
 If 
 
 >n. 
 
 # 
 
 % 
 
 •• • 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 fL 
 
 ••• 
 
 m M 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 a 
 
 .|ja 
 
 o'. 
 
 IE 
 ■■IE 
 
 1^ ti) 
 ... -S 
 
 ... I^wi 
 
 CH'I. 
 
 2i. 
 
 Ii ^ 
 
 M W^ 
 
 • . • <ft .. • ••• 
 
 k 
 
 4*: 
 
 m m 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 ... t^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 '^ Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabauy. 
 
 CHIA TO CHIANG 
 
 3p± y^T 
 
 T 
 
 CHIA. M 
 
 M 
 
 ••• 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 .1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ••• 
 
 ••• 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ••• 
 
 ^ 
 
 "} 
 
 m 
 ^ 
 
 :*2 
 
 ^gi^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CHIA. 
 
 20. 
 
 3p_t :FT 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o -^ -\^ 
 
 [a 
 
 CHUNG. .^ 
 
 27. M^ 
 
 irg 
 
 ># 
 
 
 5lf 
 
 fcc 
 
 E 
 
 28, 
 
 D^ 
 
 •" d' 
 
 Hi: 
 
 ••• ••« 
 
 ^ 
 
 ♦ Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 6 
 
 CHIAO TO CH'IEH 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 CfflAO.'^^ nj^ m 
 
 29. 
 
 5£ 
 
 ^M (j)pi 
 
 4i& 
 
 
 III 
 
 /-TO 
 
 
 ^4: 
 
 
 vl* 
 
 m. 
 
 b4 
 
 
 ^KJ 
 
 CH'IAO. m - ^1 
 
 ao. 
 
 
 »E?tt 
 
 Pi at 
 
 5rsii 
 ^5 
 
 1?^ 
 
 IfJ 
 
 f^^ 
 
 Pfel 
 
 31. 
 
 
 m 
 
 it 
 
 $1 
 
 *§ ^ 
 
 n 
 m 
 
 • • • 
 
 fi 
 
 Pi 
 
 CHIEH. M 
 
 32. 
 
 ^ 
 
 # 
 
 I .a 
 
 ^'te 
 
 • • • ••• 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 CHIEN TO CHIH 
 
 CHIEN. m o 
 
 33. <^ 
 
 n 
 
 rm 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 -rf^ 
 
 A-«<- 
 
 m 
 
 Wi 
 
 ^M 
 
 i m 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 m, 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ' m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 # 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 M 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 m^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 u 
 
 m 
 
 •• • 
 
 ••• 
 
 •:•]# 
 
 1 !■■ 
 
 V 1 1 
 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 :, M. 
 
 CH'IEN. 1^MA<^# (1 
 
 31, 
 
 m (pt% 
 
 if 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 §^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 CHE y^ ^ 
 
 ''■ m m 
 
 Piil# ^ 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 'it 
 
 K 
 
 
 Igll 
 
 
 3G. 
 
 M* 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ^* 'It 
 
 ... ^' 
 
 Bit 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 llale 
 
 ^^ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 8 
 
 CHIN. 
 
 37. 
 
 3F± 5p-p 
 
 ^ o 
 
 JCHIN^To CH'IO 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 if 
 
 m 
 % 
 
 rti 
 
 
 :>■■ 
 
 • • • 
 
 ft* 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ¥± ¥-T 
 
 CH'LN. ^ 
 
 38. 
 
 • •• 
 
 V/ / X • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 j^ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 D>ir» 
 
 ;355# 
 
 CHING. 
 
 HI 
 Hi 
 
 r# 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 j^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^jf 
 
 ••• (^i/^*^' 
 
 ,. tl/U 
 
 # -■' 
 
 IPI^ it 
 
 ^ 
 
 CH'ING. W f li 
 
 r 
 
 5£ 
 
 Bra 
 
 *»»• 
 ^ 
 
 OHIO. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 m* 
 
 o 
 
 CH'IO. 
 
 41. 
 
 • •• 
 
 • ■• 
 
 :^* 
 
 • •• 
 
 42. 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 %* 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 W% 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 p^* 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ip* O ^* *P 
 
 1* 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 CHIU TO CH'OU. 
 
 3p± ^p-Jt 
 
 CHIU. 
 
 43. 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ^0t 
 
 m 
 
 
 f 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 • « • 
 
 3£ 
 
 1^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 % 
 
 • • • 
 
 ^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 ^S5te 
 
 yg 
 
 m 
 
 CH'IU. 
 
 44. 
 
 
 It 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 9 
 
 o 
 
 CH'IUNG. 3PJ: 
 
 45. O 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ,^-'' 
 
 /■ 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CHO. 
 
 46. 
 
 ¥± 3pTt J. 
 
 
 o 
 
 CflU 
 
 47. 
 
 3p± 3p-F 
 
 fl o 
 
 o 
 
 CHOAN see Chuan (63.) 
 
 CH'OAN see Ch'uan (64.) 
 
 GHOD. 
 
 48. 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Itfl 
 
 
 SI 
 
 • • « 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • t • 
 
 M 
 
 • •• 
 
 B 
 
 
 % 
 
 CH'OD. 
 
 49. 
 
 ■p* 
 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 10 
 
 CHii TO CH'ilN. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 3r-± ¥"r 
 
 CHU. ^ 
 
 m M 
 
 ^ 
 
 U ^ 9: 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 +B 
 
 /-c 
 
 CH'li. 
 
 51. 
 
 
 3p± 
 
 ¥T 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 M M 
 
 CHtiAN. m O 
 
 52. 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 CH'iJAN. 
 
 53. 
 
 ^± 
 
 •A. 
 
 m 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 CHUEH. 
 
 5A. 
 
 i 
 
 M 
 
 SI 
 it 
 
 Wi 
 
 CH'UEfl. ... 
 
 55. 
 
 it 
 
 o 
 
 
 CMN. 
 
 56. 
 
 f^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 rl*f 
 
 CHUN. 
 
 57. 
 
 o 
 
 V 
 
 o o 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 CHU TO CH'UAN. 
 
 GHU. 
 
 58. 
 
 5P± 3pTT 
 
 ^ 
 
 0m 
 
 it 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 4^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^mn 
 
 =a 
 
 • • • 
 
 ilife 
 
 • •• 
 
 !l^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 i± 
 
 ii^*- 
 
 JH^ 
 
 m 
 
 ir 
 
 
 jjii 
 
 • at 
 
 i^T 
 
 • •• 
 
 ^T J 
 
 CH'D. ^lil 
 
 59, 
 
 ¥± ¥T 
 
 • « • 
 
 m 
 
 ha. 
 
 13^ 
 
 11 
 
 ^ 
 s 
 
 CHUA. 
 
 60. 
 
 3p± 
 
 ©I* 
 
 3p-F 
 
 o 
 
 JW 
 K 
 
 o 
 
 3P± 
 
 3pT 
 
 CHUAI. 
 
 61. 
 
 n o 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 ^±. 3p-i> ± 
 
 CH'UAI. 
 
 -f^ O 1^ 
 
 62, 
 
 ii — ^ 
 
 
 < /rtt * * * * * * 
 
 Jli* 
 
 ai^ 
 
 CHUAN. 
 
 63. 
 
 II 
 
 •^ 
 
 o 
 
 s^ 
 
 
 CH'UAN. 
 
 64. 
 
 ;ii 
 
 ill 
 
 i 
 
 1^ 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 12 
 
 GHUANG TO GH'UNG. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 mum. m o 
 
 65. 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 CH'UANG. ^ m m 
 
 '"• ^ ^ m 
 ^ij 
 
 
 GHUI. 
 
 67. 
 
 o o m 
 
 ■ • • • • • 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 
 CH'E Pk m O O 
 
 68. ,tv 431 
 
 CHUN, o o m o 
 
 69. 
 
 CH'DN. 
 
 70. 
 
 m 
 
 d>' 
 
 o 
 
 CHUNG. ^ O 
 
 71- rt» 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 CH'UNG. ^ 
 
 ill 
 
 4: ^ 
 
 A 
 
 7FC 
 
 ^ 
 
 5n: 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Svllabauy. 
 
 E TO FANG. 
 
 13 
 
 CHIVA see Chuan (60.) 
 
 CHWAI see Chdai (61.) 
 CHWAN see Chuan (63.) 
 CHWAN see Chuang (65.) 
 
 E. 
 
 73. 
 
 T± 
 
 f^. 
 
 ¥T 
 
 BTL* 
 
 CJPJVAI see Ci 
 
 I'UAI 
 
 (62.) 
 
 CirWANseeC 
 
 h'uan (64.) 
 
 CIPfVANG see 
 
 Ch'uano (66.) 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 (f i^*tj^^^/^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ^^i^'lCJ^,- ;. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 M* 
 
 EN. m 
 
 74. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 FA. 2 ^ "^ ^ '■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 FAN. l!R 
 
 /L 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 m 
 
 '4^<J&t^ 
 
 FANG. ^::^ 
 5f 
 
 
 m 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 14 
 
 ¥± 
 
 FEI. (f # 
 
 78. 
 
 M 
 
 FEI TO ro. 
 
 3pT> 
 
 4> 
 
 « 
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 ± * 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 fc-^ 
 
 FEN. ^ 
 
 
 i5f 
 
 FENG. ^ 
 
 80. !^ 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 f 
 
 i 
 
 ^M. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 FI see Fei (7S.; 
 
 FO. 
 
 81. 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 FOU TO 
 
 'HAN. 
 
 ± 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ¥T 
 
 * 
 
 rou. o 
 
 ?f* 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 m 
 
 b2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ru. v^^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 d^M 
 
 83. ^ ^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 
 )ft 
 
 # 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 f'pft 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 vfi- 
 
 • • • 
 
 M 
 
 
 m 
 
 it 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?f* 
 
 
 # 
 
 (^1^ 
 
 15 
 
 Hi 
 
 84. 
 
 ^ 
 
 HAI. 
 
 85. 
 
 — ^^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 HAN. 
 
 86. 
 
 
 
 ^m ••* pill 
 
 m % "m 
 
 GA see a (1.) 
 GAI see ai (2.) 
 GAN see an (3.) 
 GJiVG see ang (4.) 
 GviO see ao (.5.) 
 Gi; see E (73.) 
 GEN see en (74.) 
 GO see e 73, one? o (233.) 
 GOU see ou (234.) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 m 
 
 d)^^ 
 
 I'D 
 
 lb 
 
 ' M* 
 
 t 
 
 0A. P^ 
 
 
 
 23 M 
 
 ^ ." Vf 
 
 \tMZ» 
 
 is* 
 
 4^1 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 IG 
 
 3F± 
 
 'HANG, m 
 
 87. 
 
 'HANG TO 'HENG. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 ¥T 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 mo. 
 
 88. 
 
 rR^ 
 
 B^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 p j^a^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 9- 
 
 (voX 
 
 .HEi 
 HEIJ 
 
 6«. 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 'HEN. O 
 
 so. 
 
 
 u 
 
 m 
 
 'HENG. ^ 
 
 91. 
 
 B? 
 
 te 
 
 O 
 
 It 
 
 * Gharacters so marked will also be found under other syllable*.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 'HO. 
 
 92, 
 
 ¥± 
 
 'HO TO HU. 
 
 
 Rpf 
 
 17 
 
 §1 
 
 ^^* 
 
 
 d> ^*i«i^ 
 
 'HOU 
 
 93. 
 
 1^1 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 'HO. 
 
 94. 
 
 1^ 
 
 To'* 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 iS3 
 
 #a 
 
 ^ 
 
 i//b 
 
 f$ 
 
 
 4 iS 
 
 ■SL? 
 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 18 
 
 'HUA. 
 
 95, 
 
 3p± 
 
 
 Hi 
 
 1.1 
 
 ?\' 
 
 'HUA TO 'HUANG. 
 
 ¥T 
 
 m 
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 it 
 
 j^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■35. 
 
 'HUAI. O 
 
 96. 
 
 97. a/ft"' IS 
 
 ^m^j^> 
 
 ea 
 
 ;^ 
 
 'HUANG. 
 
 iM 
 
 98. 
 
 
 m 
 
 TIC 
 
 151 
 
 II 
 
 P 
 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 llUl TO 'HUO. 
 
 19 
 
 3F± 
 
 3p-p 
 
 *HUI. 
 
 K 
 
 4M, 
 
 S9. 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 
 Mn 
 
 m 
 
 
 W 
 
 «-•■• 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 4 
 
 
 ;HUENi 
 'HUN. 1 
 
 100. 
 
 m 
 
 d?^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 'HUNG, m 
 
 101. 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 d m 
 
 m 
 
 7K 
 
 n 
 
 'HUO. 
 
 102. 
 
 m 
 
 
 S2 
 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 20 
 
 HSI. 
 
 103. 
 
 3p± 
 
 
 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 i: * 
 
 - I 
 
 (^ ^ 
 
 
 t 
 
 ddb. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ii 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 tm. m 
 
 
 sg 
 
 
 o 
 
 4T 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 HSIANG ^o HSIEH. 
 
 21 
 
 ¥± 
 
 HSIANG. m 
 
 ]05. 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 -tX'-J-'i--'^^.- 
 
 '■f 
 
 3PTJ 
 
 (jfenliM^ 
 
 •(sW*^ 
 
 J 
 
 :(0 
 
 # 
 
 HSIAO. tH 
 
 106. ^ 
 
 m 
 
 4 
 
 ;|>/h^l'WxAii> ^ 
 
 (^^ 
 
 
 * 
 <|>^ 
 
 HSEH. }i 
 
 m 
 
 ^°'- iX 
 
 n 
 
 *l 
 
 m 
 
 P 
 
 i& 
 
 .;^ 
 
 m 
 
 (fTit^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 H/''\.t/ Ut^' 
 
 ^ 
 
 (p 
 
 m 
 
 • Characters to marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 22 
 
 m 
 
 HSIEN ^o HSIU. 
 
 Peking Syllabakv. 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 HSIEN. 
 
 ^ 
 
 108. 
 
 fill 
 
 3p-p 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 "i 
 
 * 
 m 
 '-Tig* 
 
 ^ ^ u ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 pg* 
 
 ^ 
 
 HSIN. 
 
 itL^ 
 
 K^^-i 
 
 109. 
 
 ^ 
 
 4'f? 
 
 
 u- 
 
 CPi 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 HSING, M 
 
 ^J 
 
 fi 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 op' 
 
 w 
 
 11 
 
 
 tf 
 
 ^ 
 
 tf 
 
 HSIO. 
 
 111. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Hsin. 
 
 112. 
 
 o 
 
 • •• 
 
 ft 
 
 # 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under oriier syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 HSMG io HSUEH. 
 
 3F± 
 
 ¥T 
 
 HSIUNG. % 
 
 m 
 
 »i-i- |><j 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ••• 
 
 s 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 1^1 -Uvi.V^'-- 
 
 ••• 
 
 o 
 
 2:3 
 
 ■i 
 
 o 
 
 HSU. 
 
 114. 
 
 m 
 
 
 1 ' 
 
 
 hsVan. 
 
 B^ 
 
 115. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 Pt 
 
 ff 
 
 
 * 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 nM. 
 
 HSUEH. m 
 
 116. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 A^ 
 
 ?/; 
 
 'Tl^CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 24 
 
 HSUN TO I OR Yi. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 HSUEN see Hsuan (115.) 
 
 HSUN. 
 
 117. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ¥1^ 
 
 m 
 
 • • s 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 fll 
 
 Yl] 
 
 118. 
 
 4i^ 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 4^m 
 
 ^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 -^1 
 
 t-ii 
 
 l: 
 
 /•B2 
 
 
 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllable*.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 JAN. TO JO. 
 
 25 
 
 ¥± 
 
 JAN. O 
 
 119. 
 
 JANG. 
 
 120. 
 
 ¥"F 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 JAO. 
 
 121. 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 JE see JO (125.) 
 
 im 
 
 JEN. 
 
 122. 
 
 o 
 
 A OTVA; ... 
 
 ... 
 
 ... 'i/-^ ' ... 
 
 -C"fr 
 
 JENG. 
 
 123. 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 JIH. O 
 
 124. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 JO. 
 
 125. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 <^m 
 
 f6 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be foiind under other syllables.
 
 26 
 
 3F± 
 
 JOD. 
 
 126. 
 
 JOU. TO JDNG. 
 
 Peking Svllaary. 
 
 JOAN see juan (128.) 
 
 1^ 
 
 JU. b^ 
 
 127. 
 
 ^0 
 ^0 
 
 6 
 
 
 A 
 
 • •• 
 
 A 
 
 JUAN. O 
 
 128. 
 
 o 
 
 ' if. 
 
 O 
 
 JUL 
 
 129. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 3E 
 
 Jfelt 
 
 Ji^ 
 
 JUN. 
 
 lao. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ;^ 
 
 JUNG. 
 
 131. 
 
 o 
 
 <^ ^ 
 
 n 
 
 
 o 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 KA. 
 
 132. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 KA. TO K'AO. 
 
 •27 
 
 JIVAN see juan (128.) 
 
 m 
 
 di 
 
 Df 
 
 KAI. ¥± ¥T^ 
 
 ^^^- ^:^ O 
 
 m 
 
 KAI. 
 
 134. 
 
 W± 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 o m o 
 
 KAN. f^^^^ O 
 
 ^f ... 
 
 - I * • • • 
 
 B ... 
 
 if ... 
 
 it 
 
 ff 
 
 1^^ 
 
 
 
 
 O ir 
 
 Pi: 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 RANG. [^ O 
 
 137. 
 
 fe 
 fe 
 
 JI^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 •• • 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 io: 
 
 
 «lTr 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 K'AKG. 
 
 138. 
 
 /JK 
 
 u 
 
 ^ 
 fe 
 
 i^Jl 
 
 KAO. 
 
 139. 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 M-/ 
 
 K'AO. m O 'Ei 1i 
 
 ito. 
 
 •k 
 
 ■J£ 
 
 'f^ ... 
 
 * Characters so marked svill also be found under other syllables.
 
 28 
 
 KEI. 
 
 lii. 
 
 KEI. TO K'Q^ Peking Syllabary. 
 
 KE see k'o (147.) 
 O O ain O 
 
 KEI. 
 
 ^*« «ee ic«o (148.) 
 
 ^iJ o o 
 
 o 
 
 KEN. ^m 
 
 m o ^ 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 ••• ••• ••• 
 
 •• • • • • 
 
 KEN. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 IB 
 
 fH 
 
 144. 
 
 • « • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 n 
 
 • « • 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 4- 
 
 # 
 
 is 
 
 mm. ,S 
 
 145. 
 
 wf* 
 
 o m 
 
 {^^ ... 
 
 m 
 
 110. 
 
 o o o 
 
 so. 
 
 Fr 
 
 Ira 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 na 
 
 K'O. 
 
 Pj 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 •• • 
 
 [gsl 
 
 14S. 
 
 isf 
 
 Pg- 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 
 
 # 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 <p TiS. 
 
 4§ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 m 
 
 fl2 
 
 g^ 
 
 
 •• • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 l?fe 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 ti 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 Hf 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 
 p;e 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■Jim 
 
 ■fm 
 
 m 
 
 pT pT 
 
 
 -^^9 
 
 M 
 
 * Clmiiicteis so marked will also be found under other syllable*.
 
 Peking Svllabauy, 
 
 KOD TO K'DA. 
 
 149. 
 
 3p± jp-p J 
 
 ^ ... ^ 
 
 m 
 
 K'O 
 
 150. 
 
 3F± 3pp ± 
 
 liJ O -^ P 
 
 29 
 
 In 
 
 161. 
 
 'Z' 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 If 
 
 ft 
 
 M 
 
 '^ 
 
 n 
 
 eJ 1(5 '' 
 
 
 152. 
 
 ^.^X^^i^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^% 
 
 KUA. 
 
 jUX 
 
 153. 
 
 BDl 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 % 
 
 gl 
 
 O Bfll 
 
 
 K'DA. 
 
 154. 
 
 o 
 
 p"^ 
 
 m 
 
 • • • 
 
 ^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 'II 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found uader other syllables.
 
 30 
 
 KUAI TO K'UEI Peking Syllabary. 
 
 
 w± 
 
 ¥r ± 4 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 WT 
 
 ± i 
 
 KUAI. 
 
 3^ 
 
 • • • ^*/J • • • 
 
 KUAI. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 :i '^t 
 
 155. 
 
 Di 
 
 156. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • ft 
 
 ••• r H!^ 
 
 
 «•• 
 
 • •• ••• ••• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ii] ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 •«• »•• ••• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 — Q ^ 
 
 *«—*■..- 
 
 KUAN. W 
 
 157. |g 
 
 • • • 
 
 ■ n 
 
 c: 
 
 IT 
 
 O Jb, 
 
 ..• m m 
 
 SB 
 
 11 
 
 
 K'UAN. 
 
 158. 
 
 i(>t(rft'«v 
 
 i5C 
 
 o 
 
 KUANG. - 
 
 159. 
 
 • • • 
 
 iE^ii K'UANG. 
 
 160. - 
 
 m 
 
 ^ O 
 
 w^ 
 
 KUEI. 
 
 161. 
 
 o m 
 
 .y 
 
 ^ MMlk^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 K'UEI. 
 
 ' 162. 
 
 
 tl tl 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllablei.
 
 < 
 
 Peking 
 
 Sylla 
 
 BAUY. 
 
 { 
 
 KUEN TO LA 
 KUN. *'*■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ¥T 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ¥F 
 
 ± 
 
 jKUEN 
 kUN. 
 
 163. 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 f'J 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ^K'DEN 
 
 \tm. 
 
 lot. 
 
 U 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 •• • 
 
 
 
 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 BM 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 « • • 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 i(^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 31 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 KUNG. 
 
 ^Ztu' 
 
 -U3 
 
 ii 
 
 
 165. 
 
 ■^(r 
 
 
 * * *• 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 42- 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 #t 
 
 
 
 ■. # 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 %^ 
 
 
 « • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 »f!s» 
 
 
 A# 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 si 
 
 • • • 
 
 M K'DNG. S O '^^^ ^ 
 
 IG6. 
 
 %. 
 
 • • a ■ ■ 
 
 • • • a ■ • 
 
 TL 
 
 > • • • • 
 
 ••■ ••« 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 > • • • • 
 
 • • • • ■ 
 
 » • • « • ■ 
 
 
 VJC 
 
 ¥± 
 
 KUO. 
 
 167. 
 
 LA. 
 
 168. 
 
 41 
 IP 
 
 ?5 
 
 KWA see Kua (153.) 
 
 /(T/'F^/ see KuAi (155.) 
 
 KWAN see Kuan (157.) 
 
 KWANG see Kuang (159.) 
 
 A'n^£/ 5ee KuEi (161.) 
 
 KWEN see/^"^N 
 
 
 <^^ 
 
 (;p^;fe^^ 
 
 AT'^r^ see K'UA (154.) 
 
 K'WAI see K'uai (156.) 
 
 K'WAN see K'uan (158.) 
 K'TVANG see K'uang (160.) 
 
 K-WEI see K'uEi (162.) 
 
 KuN (163.) A''/F£Ar *ee{j^:^^>'(i64.) 
 
 A:W'0 see Kuo (166.) 
 
 Ci.; 
 
 E 
 ^ 
 
 li 
 
 hloiJ 
 
 M 
 
 • •• 
 
 * Charactera so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 32 
 
 2F± 
 
 LAI. O 
 
 1G9. 
 
 1 11 TO LAO. Peking Syllabary. 
 
 
 ^T 
 
 o 
 
 a'i 
 
 LAN. 
 
 170. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 «ES 
 
 M 
 
 fA 
 
 m 
 
 rl-J 
 
 iSL 
 
 LANG, m 
 
 IE 
 
 O 
 
 LAO. 
 
 172. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 fvT\* 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 LE. m 
 
 173. 
 
 LE TO LI. 
 
 4 ^^ 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 33 
 
 
 LEA see Lia (177.) 
 
 LEANG see Liang (178.) 
 
 LEAO see Liao (179.) 
 
 LEEH see Lieh (190.) 
 
 LEEN see Lien (181.) 
 
 [LEI 
 ILEL 
 
 174. 
 
 TS 
 
 @ 
 
 
 iBBJ 
 
 LENG. 
 
 175. 
 
 f^J 
 
 
 )^ 
 
 u 
 
 176. 
 
 • f ■ - 
 
 
 m 
 
 fill 
 
 m 
 
 *^ 
 
 ^M 
 
 M 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 aPJ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 34 
 
 ¥± 
 
 LIA. O 
 
 J 77. 
 
 LIA TO LIEH. 
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 o 
 
 ¥T 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 LIANG. 
 
 m 
 
 M 
 
 178. 
 
 • • •- 
 
 ^• 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 f^M 
 
 
 •• • 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Bi. 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 "u 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 c»«*-* 
 
 M 
 
 4>- w 
 
 
 ja 
 
 
 LIAO. 
 
 J, 79. 
 
 o 
 
 ii 
 
 Ms*- 
 
 LIEH. 
 
 180. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 O] 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 m 
 
 
 *■ Characters so marked \v;ll also be found under other syllables.
 
 FtKiNG Syllabary. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 LIEN, rm 
 
 HEN TO LIN. 
 
 3PTT 
 
 
 35 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 iir;* 
 
 LIN. 
 
 18-'. 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 "^ Characters so marked will also be fatad under other syllables.
 
 36 
 
 LING 
 
 TO 
 
 LIU. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 LING. 
 
 o 
 
 3F± 
 
 ¥"F 
 
 m 
 
 O^M 
 
 (D>^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 (!|):^ 
 
 a 
 
 •i^ 
 
 tniiB 
 
 LIO. 
 
 184. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 LIU. 
 
 185. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 t^ 
 
 fpti 
 
 ^1^^ 
 
 +4: 
 
 
 •//c-n 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 10. 
 
 18G. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 LO ^'> LilN. 
 
 ¥r 
 
 
 37 
 
 • • • 
 j,na 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 LO.D 
 
 187. 
 
 m 
 
 ... I 
 
 1^ 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 LU. 
 
 188, 
 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 
 LDEH. O 
 
 189. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 LUN, 
 
 190. 
 see also 
 LUN. 
 
 'W 
 
 m 
 
 
 pRB 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other sj'llables.
 
 38 
 
 LD TO LUNG. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 LU. 
 
 191. 
 
 m 
 
 w± 
 
 ¥r 
 
 « 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 # 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 y 
 
 LDAN. O 
 
 192. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 (|'E* 
 
 LUN, o 
 
 193. 
 
 see also 
 
 LUN. 
 
 •W* 
 
 t- iSr hiu^^^ 
 
 LUNG. 
 
 134. 
 
 
 ft 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 W 
 
 m 
 
 iM 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 MA TO MANG. 
 
 39 
 
 ^±. 
 
 ^V 
 
 MA. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 0^ 
 
 195. 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^Ri 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ••• 
 
 fii 
 
 
 w* 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 •• • 
 
 M 
 
 lii 
 
 
 M* 
 
 # 
 
 ~^-l^ei 
 
 i 
 
 ^i-A^ 
 
 HUI. 
 
 196. 
 
 o 
 
 ii 
 
 
 F/^i^ 
 
 
 ^: 
 
 *3 
 
 S. 
 
 PS 
 
 ^* 
 
 MAN, 
 
 197. 
 
 ii* 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 <|'vi* 
 
 Ji 
 
 OM 
 
 MANG 
 
 198. 
 
 ;£ 
 
 fS 
 
 
 o 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 40 
 
 ¥± 
 
 fflAO. 
 
 109. 
 
 MEL 
 
 200, 
 
 o 
 
 MAO TO MI. 
 
 ^T 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ ^*^^^ 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 ^ 
 
 k 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 MEN. n 
 
 201. j^^ 
 
 h p^ *5 
 
 Ai"/,-r 
 
 m 
 
 MENG. U 
 
 202. .J@ 
 
 hi^ 
 
 4i 
 
 JflOL 
 
 203. 
 
 Pit 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 
 • t • 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 MIAO. 
 
 204. 
 
 H|5 
 
 TO msG. 
 
 WT 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 41 
 
 m 
 
 MIEH. U¥ 
 
 205. 
 
 o 
 
 MIEN. 
 
 206. 
 
 o 
 
 ■m 
 
 
 C^^®! 
 
 MIN. 
 
 207. 
 
 o 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 WING. 
 
 208. 
 
 o 
 
 0/=^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^^ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 42 
 
 MID TO M. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 MiU. O 
 
 209. 
 
 jpjt 
 
 o 
 
 ■210. 
 
 . () 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 m 
 
 (^W* 
 
 ^ 
 
 m. 
 
 iOD. O 
 
 211. 
 
 OM. 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 •212. 
 
 o 
 
 '* 
 
 m 
 
 s 
 
 *fc 
 
 
 Ml/yi.V see Man (197.) 
 
 ^ 
 
 ri3. 
 
 i m 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 * 
 
 J/T: 
 
 4^-^j^ 
 'm 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 NAI. 
 
 21-4. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 o 
 
 NAI TO 
 
 NEN. 
 
 
 TT 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 75r 
 
 
 
 *:« 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 $1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H'J* 
 
 43 
 
 * 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 NAN. 
 
 215. 
 
 7t^ 
 
 m 
 
 li 
 ^ 
 
 
 NAN6. 
 
 216, 
 
 'm 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 NAO. m 
 
 217. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 NEI. O 
 
 218. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 NEANG see Niang (222.) 
 NEAO see Niao (223.;, 
 
 \NEEH see Nieh (224.) 
 ■ A^'^i^ see NiEN (225.) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 219. 
 
 m. 
 
 M, 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 44 
 
 NENG TO mm. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 NENG. 
 
 220. 
 
 3p± 
 
 c* 
 '* 
 
 i5n, 
 
 II 
 
 
 w* 
 
 M* 
 
 NI. 
 
 221. 
 
 o 
 
 
 -f-. 
 
 St.'^O 
 
 t>^-^ 
 
 fi 
 
 NIARG. O 
 
 222. 
 
 5tC 
 
 o 
 
 NIAO. 
 
 223. 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 MEH. 
 
 224. 
 
 "1^ 
 
 n 
 
 
 i© 
 
 Cf 
 
 a * 
 
 ^B 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables. 
 
 n 
 
 WEN. 
 
 225. 
 
 i^ 
 
 %* 
 
 ^ 
 
 41'' ^ 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 • •• 
 
 M 
 
 M* 
 
 • •• 
 
 4> ^ ■''^' 
 
 C33c 
 
 • •• 
 
 f it
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 NING TO KUAN. 
 
 
 3p± 
 
 
 NING. 
 
 o 
 
 [ftt^ 
 
 226. 
 
 • •• 
 
 v^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 W- 
 
 jpTt 
 
 ^ 
 
 45 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 NiD. m 
 
 -i-n. 
 
 m 
 
 An. 
 wn:. 
 
 
 f 
 
 NO. 
 
 228. 
 
 m 
 
 NO AN see Nuan (231.) 
 
 ND. 
 
 •229. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 -^ , :>^-A^ 
 
 9/^- 
 
 o 
 
 NU. 
 
 230. 
 
 o 
 
 pM 
 
 m 
 
 ^^ 
 
 NDAN. O 
 
 231. 
 
 o 
 
 I* 
 
 o 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 46 
 
 KONG TO p'A. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 3P± 
 
 RUNG. 10 
 
 233. m 
 
 ¥T 
 
 O O 
 
 • •• •• • 
 
 NIVAN see Nuan (231.) 
 
 dp 
 
 ""A see k (1.) 
 ""JI see Ai (2.) 
 ""AN see An (3.) 
 ""ANG see Ang (4.) 
 ""AO see Ao (5.) 
 
 ""E see E (73,)'_SLud O (233.) 
 '"'E^f see En (74.) 
 ""0 see E (73,) and O (233.) 
 ""OU see Ou (234.) 
 
 0. 
 
 233. 
 
 m^ 
 
 w* 
 
 il^. 
 
 I* 
 i* 
 
 m. 
 
 Km* 
 
 on. 
 
 234. 
 
 g^ 
 
 t# 
 
 o 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 PA. 
 
 235. 
 
 A A 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ± * 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 236. 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 m 
 
 (^m 
 
 e 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 PAL 
 
 237. 
 
 TO P'AO. 
 
 3F± 3p-F ± i 
 
 f m ^6 li^ 
 
 ... '.'I'-" 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 47 
 
 p'Ai. *f^ m a m 
 
 23B. ^^ );!|i ... 
 
 ^s 
 
 m o 
 
 23y. 
 
 :pit 
 
 3gte 
 
 
 i4*-^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 — (— 
 
 PAN. 
 
 m 
 
 • • • 
 
 # 
 
 240. 
 
 
 • •■ 
 
 : # 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 im 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 rm 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 •t* 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 fij 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 PANG. ^5 
 
 241. p^ 
 
 O ill tl 
 
 
 
 242. 
 
 1'^ 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 tt^ 
 
 ii ^^ 
 
 • •• « « c 
 
 ••• •■• 
 
 PAO. 
 
 243. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 m m m 
 te ... ^mt 
 
 •Uf 
 
 ... g^ 
 1^ m 
 
 m 
 
 244. Jjg 
 
 f^^^-f4j ... 
 
 m 
 
 a • • 
 
 =SS> 
 
 m 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other sj-llables. 
 
 m 
 
 ^v
 
 48 
 
 PEI TO PENG. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 VE ste Pa I (237,) and Po (2C3.) 
 
 ^± ^V 
 
 PEI. 
 
 ^- 
 
 '245. 
 
 # 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 •• • •• • 
 
 At m 
 
 • •• ^B 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 PEL 
 
 24C. 
 
 ^§ 
 
 raJ* 
 
 3p± ¥T ± 
 
 ... o 
 
 • • • • •• 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 IS 
 
 1^ 
 
 ... dpiE 
 
 >• • • • • 
 
 
 PEN. 
 
 247. 
 
 ^ 
 
 #? 
 
 O t* 
 
 • *• •• • 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 w 
 
 P'EN. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 248. 
 
 Wi 
 
 m 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 
 ••» 
 
 ^ o 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 249. 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 o m 
 
 »■• ••• 
 
 •• ••• 
 
 ■ • • • • 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 ,;.> 
 
 PENG. 
 
 M 
 
 :S^Ji 
 
 # 
 
 250. 
 
 4ih\ 
 
 ti 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 if 
 
 IM 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ^f 
 
 m 
 
 # 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 •^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 PI TO p'lEK. 
 
 PI. 
 
 251. 
 
 ^ m 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 m 
 m 
 m 
 
 PI. 
 
 252. 
 
 m Ik 7B 
 ^f '•- 41^ 
 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 m 
 
 M ^ M 
 
 49 
 
 m 
 
 PIAO. 
 
 253. 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 B 
 
 iiiiTP 
 
 PIAO. 
 
 \ ttt] 
 
 
 
 
 254. 
 
 11 
 
 Ui 
 
 l5iv 
 
 
 
 il 
 
 • • • 
 
 • . « 
 
 if 
 
 91 ^ 
 
 PIEH. 
 
 255. 
 
 5^ 
 
 su 
 
 ^ 
 
 ffis: 
 
 P'lEH. 
 
 256. 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 PIEN. 
 
 257. 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ iMhyv^J 
 
 m^' 
 
 ... (' 
 
 
 PlEN.f li 
 
 ■J06. 
 
 - *>,i''\S- 
 
 pW 
 
 1.. 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables. 
 
 }t
 
 50 
 
 PIN. 
 
 259, 
 
 PIN TO p'u. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 3r± y^T ± 
 
 r o o 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 PIN. 
 
 260. 
 
 spjb jp-p 
 
 U 
 
 4fc 
 
 o 
 
 PING, 
 
 261. 
 
 ^K 
 
 O P5 #5 
 
 tEp 
 
 pP^ 
 
 • •• • • • 
 
 in 
 
 • t • • •• 
 ••• • •• 
 
 P'ING. 
 
 262. 
 
 w 
 
 
 ¥i 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 PO. 
 
 863. 
 
 U % 
 
 m 
 
 • a • 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 P'O. 
 
 264. 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 PU. 
 
 265. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 P'D. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 266. 
 
 Oi 
 
 fH? 
 
 
 =1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^4 
 
 n 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 # 
 
 
 at • 
 
 ii5 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 Hi 
 
 3i& 
 
 Jig 
 /a 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking, Syllabary. 
 
 SA ^'« SE. 
 
 'RH see Ubh (372.) 
 
 51 
 
 8A. 
 
 i267. 
 
 3p± 
 
 m 
 
 3pT 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 8AI. 
 
 268. 
 
 IS 
 
 RIB 
 
 J/u: 
 
 o 
 
 SAN. v''H|*/^M^^-. O 
 
 269. ^f 
 
 ^ 
 
 SANG. 
 
 270. 
 
 O 
 
 ¥ 
 
 271. 
 
 o 
 
 1^ 
 
 SE. 
 
 272. 
 
 Fji 
 
 o 
 
 TIhI 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under oflie syllables. 
 
 hr
 
 52 
 
 3F± 
 
 SENG. 
 
 273. 
 
 SENG TO 8UAN. 
 
 Peking Syllabaey. 
 
 ^T 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 so. 
 
 274. 
 
 m 
 
 il<l< 
 
 Bt* 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 son. 
 
 273. 
 
 m 
 
 su. 
 
 276. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^1'^ 
 % 
 
 o 
 
 ■d; 
 
 
 SUAN. ^ 
 
 277. 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be/ound under other syllables. 

 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 SUI ^o SHAI. 
 
 53 
 
 3p± 
 
 SUI. m 
 
 278. ^ 
 
 ^ V^A. O.C 
 
 ¥1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 * 
 
 *t 
 
 
 vf^ 
 
 sun. « 
 
 279. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 SUNG. 
 
 280, 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 SHA. 'i> 
 
 281. :^ 
 
 SWAN see Suan (277.) 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 K*-- 
 ^ 
 
 ^n 
 
 m 
 
 SHAI. 
 
 282. 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 54 
 
 SHAN. 
 
 283. 
 
 ¥-t 
 
 SHAN TO SHE. 
 
 O 
 
 ¥T 
 
 Peking Syllabary, 
 
 4) m 
 
 /. , } f 
 
 SHANG. if 
 
 284. 4, ^ 
 
 m^ 
 
 
 SHAO. gi 
 
 285. +£!J 
 
 
 
 /!> 
 
 
 SHE. 
 
 286. 
 
 If 
 
 TO 
 
 It* 
 Ml 
 
 ISS: 
 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other sjllablei.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 SliEN TO SHIH. 
 
 55 
 
 3p± 
 
 SHEN. ^ 
 
 as?. Mt 
 
 
 WT 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^■ 
 
 m 
 
 SHENG. ^ 
 
 288. M 
 
 4-# ' 
 
 
 
 •M vf; 
 
 SHIH. 1% 
 
 289. ^ 
 
 
 4:vtH: ^ 
 
 Hi 
 
 if 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 5i 
 
 <)■.■. 
 
 M 
 
 4'^* 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 56 
 
 ¥± 
 
 SHOO. ^ 
 
 i!99. 
 
 SHOU TO SHUANG. Peking Syllabary. 
 
 SHO see Shuo (292.) 
 3FT 
 
 4^t 
 
 ••• 
 
 ^ 
 
 SHU. •- 
 
 
 pE ti??*v'^.J 
 
 ^ 
 
 li^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 SHUA. 
 
 292. 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 8MAI. 
 
 ■**» 
 
 293. 
 
 m 
 
 o 
 
 giti 
 
 SHDAN. t^ 
 
 294. IJN 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 SHUANG. 
 
 •295. 
 
 ii 
 
 o 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other Byllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. gHDJ to g^U, 
 
 SHE m* 
 
 296. 
 
 I i^fh)^ 
 
 Tic 
 
 57 
 
 1% 
 
 SHUN. O 
 
 297. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 SHUO. 
 
 298. 
 
 -r- 
 
 ,.Q M 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 ^# 
 
 o 
 
 SHIVA 
 
 see 
 
 Shoa 
 
 (292.) 
 
 SHJVAI 
 
 see 
 
 Shuai 
 
 (293.) 
 
 SHIVAN 
 
 see 
 
 Shuan 
 
 (294.) 
 
 SHWANG 
 
 see 
 
 Shuang 
 
 (295.) 
 
 SHWUI 
 
 see 
 
 Shui 
 
 (296.) 
 
 szu. rs 
 
 299. ^m 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 A- 
 
 n'k^JT n^ 
 
 Q 
 
 # 
 
 m. 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 58 
 
 TA TO T'AI. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 TA. 
 
 300. 
 
 3F± ^T 
 
 * 
 
 m m itr 
 
 k 
 
 # 
 
 ••• 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 m 
 
 ^^m 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 M 
 
 ••• 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 H 
 
 ± 
 
 ¥± ¥T 
 
 TA. 
 
 301. 
 
 m 
 
 ;E3 
 
 m 
 
 ^ #. 
 
 V-' 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 y 
 
 302. 
 
 tt O ^ f^ 
 
 .-^- 
 
 fff 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 T'AI. 
 
 303. 
 
 5i5< 
 
 Di 
 
 
 ■9 
 
 O ^:^*^.^^ 
 
 w^^ 
 
 «^' V 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabauy. f^K to "['JI^ 
 
 59 
 
 TAN. m O 
 
 :304. 
 
 9^ 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 
 T'AN. ... 
 
 305. ^^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 3p± 3Pt; 
 
 
 m 
 
 a ig| 
 
 • •• • • • 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 TANG. 
 
 306. 
 
 TAO. 
 
 308. 
 
 m 
 
 7i 
 
 •■• ••• 
 
 > 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 , ftl'ft^ 
 
 o m 
 
 m 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ••• •• • 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ... ^^ ^u 
 
 M 
 
 T'ANG. ^ 
 
 307. im 
 
 II 
 
 ^ 
 
 fAO. 
 
 5^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 309. 
 
 f^ 
 
 m^ 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 i't 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 •■• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ^ 
 
 TE. 
 
 310. 
 
 m <vm o o 
 
 r* 
 
 TE. O O O 
 
 311. 
 
 ••» ... •(. ... 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other s^'llables. 
 
 xP
 
 60 
 
 TEi. m 
 
 312. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 TEI. TO T'lEH. 
 
 O 
 
 JPTT 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 
 o 
 
 TENG. ^± 
 
 313. ^ 
 
 3pT ± * 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 3g 
 
 TENG. 
 
 314. 
 
 3PJ: 3P1T 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 TI. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 313. 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 -IS 
 
 «£ 
 
 fi^ 
 
 
 ^^cSL 
 
 n 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 
 Wa 
 
 m 
 
 316. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 # 
 
 m 
 
 
 B] 
 
 ^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 
 % 
 
 ti 
 
 • • • 
 
 •• • 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 ••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 v 
 
 .aA- 
 
 U 
 
 TIAO. 7/ O 
 
 ^^^- m ... 
 
 ^f 
 
 t^9 
 
 is 
 
 iti. 
 
 T'lAO. 
 
 318. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m m - 
 
 TIEH. 
 
 ^1^- ^^1^, 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 '& 
 
 
 o 
 
 TIEH. 
 
 320. 
 
 
 O 4s 
 
 W 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 TIEN. 
 
 321. 
 
 TIEN ^o T'O. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 fi^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 P^ 
 
 T'lEN. p^b.'. ffl ■ ^ 
 fill ^s 
 
 322. y/< 
 
 .|^ 
 
 im 
 
 61 
 
 TING. 
 
 J 
 
 323. 
 
 iT 
 
 
 RT 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ti' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 iT 
 
 o 
 
 Tl 
 
 *^ 
 
 tIFt 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^% 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 IT 
 
 
 #r 
 
 T'ING. 
 
 824. 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 Mil 
 
 Tin. ^iftf^Jt^ 
 
 825. \ 
 
 W-T 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 320. 
 
 
 cp*i 
 
 i^? [1 
 
 i 
 
 Z5 
 
 M 
 
 
 T'O. 
 
 327. 
 
 3F± ^T ± „ •* 
 
 .fe. 
 
 •i^ 
 ^ 
 
 11 It 
 
 
 
 7'OAN see Tdan (332.) 
 T'O.iiV see T'uan (333.) 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other sj'Ilables.
 
 62 
 
 TOU. 
 
 3-2B. 
 
 5p± 3pT ± 
 
 m o 4 r^s 
 n PI 
 
 TOD_^" TUN. 
 
 
 <^-i 
 
 '1^^* 
 
 lil 
 
 [^ 
 
 3. 
 
 
 T'OD. 
 
 329. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 4 ^ O m 
 
 TD. 
 
 330. 
 
 ^* 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 ^± 
 
 T'D. 
 
 ^ 
 
 331. 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 m* m 
 
 
 ib p± p± 
 
 TDAN. 
 
 33l'. 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 ' T'UAN. O 
 
 333. 
 
 
 :\ 
 
 fl 
 
 i^ 
 
 o o 
 
 • « • • • • 
 
 TUI. i# O O ^ i| T'DI. ^ O JiiE ^ i^ 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 
 
 t • • • • • 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 TUN. 
 
 336. 
 
 %k O 
 
 » 
 
 >•• ••• 
 
 ?)?;< 
 
 • • • • • ■ 
 
 k • ■ • • • 
 
 T'UN. ^ 
 
 337. 
 
 IS 
 
 O 11 
 
 ... j jlt^ 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 • • • • •• 
 
 • •• ••• 
 
 %•% • • • 
 
 Characters 60 marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. JUNG ^^ TS'ANG. 
 
 63 
 
 3p± ^T 
 
 TUNG. . m o 
 
 338. dlS 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 «•• ••• 
 
 TUNG. 
 
 339. 
 
 
 jic 
 
 ase 
 
 flnli 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 r/F^AT «ee Tuan (332.) 
 T'WJN see T'uan (333.) 
 
 TSA. c^ni 
 
 340. ^ I^ 
 
 IB* 
 
 m* o 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 TS'A. 
 
 34L 
 
 m 
 
 ««.< 
 
 O O O 
 
 ••• •• • 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 ••• ••• ••• ••• 
 
 TSAI. 
 
 342. 
 
 m o 
 
 <{< 
 
 "k 
 ^%^ 
 
 
 # 
 ^ 
 
 TS'AI. 
 
 343. 
 
 •^ 
 
 o 
 
 . f 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 TSAN. # ; fi* m ^'t li TS'AN. 5 
 
 344. 
 
 
 tl? 
 
 345. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ liji 
 
 TSANG. II Dg* ... 
 
 • • • •• • 
 
 ••• ••• 
 
 TS'ANG. 
 
 347. 
 
 m 
 
 o o 
 
 • •• • •• 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 64 
 
 
 
 TSAO TO 
 
 TS'O. 
 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 
 3F± 
 
 ^T ± * 
 
 
 
 ¥± T^ ± 
 
 ^ 
 
 T8A0. 
 
 m 
 
 s 
 
 .:>%uw4^ 
 
 TS'AO. 
 
 • •• 
 
 w 
 
 m 
 ^m 
 
 ^ 
 
 348. 
 
 4 it 
 
 
 ^ ^^ 
 
 349. 
 
 • • • 
 
 If 
 
 
 
 ' £1 
 
 
 ^ M 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 vi 
 
 m 
 
 '^* 
 
 
 «•• 
 
 
 - It 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 CP 
 
 • • • 
 
 • • • 
 
 1 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 t^ ^J 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 jkt 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 •fl • 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 . ••• 
 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 ••• 
 
 • • • 
 
 TSE. 
 
 350. 
 
 O M'J* O ia* 
 
 Tsi m o o ii>] 
 
 351. vHll 
 
 • •• ••• ••• 2>^y 
 
 ••• ••• ••• 
 
 •f« ••• 
 
 M 
 
 TSEL O 
 
 352. 
 
 3p± 
 
 3FT 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 o 
 
 TSEN. O 
 
 353. 
 
 o 
 
 '^^.^ 
 
 3p± 3121? J: 
 
 TSENG. ^ O M.* 
 
 354. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 TS'ENG. 
 
 355. 
 
 ... 6^ o 
 
 ••• •«• 
 
 TSO. 
 
 35*3. 
 
 
 
 
 TS'O. 
 
 357. 
 
 o 
 
 w ^ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabaiiy. 
 
 TSOU 
 
 TO 
 
 TS'DNG. 
 
 65 
 
 TSI see Chi (23.) 
 
 TSIANG see Chiang (27.) 
 
 TSIAO see Chiao (29.) 
 
 TSIEH see Chieh (21.) 
 
 TSIEN see Chien (8.?.) 
 
 TSIH see Tsii (350) Tsei( 3.52.) 
 
 ISING see Ching (39.) 
 
 TSIO see Chio (41.) 
 
 TSIU see Chiu. (43.) 
 
 TSOAN see Tsuan (361.) 
 
 TS'I 
 
 TS'IANG 
 
 TS'IAO 
 
 TS'IEH 
 
 TS'IEN 
 
 TS'IH 
 
 TS'ING 
 
 TSIO 
 
 TS'IU 
 
 TS'OAN 
 
 sec 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 see 
 
 Cu'i 
 
 Ch'iang 
 
 Ch'iao 
 
 Ch'ihh 
 
 Ch'ien 
 
 Ts'E 
 
 Ch'ing 
 
 Ch'io 
 
 Cn'iu 
 
 Ts'UAN 
 
 (24.) 
 
 (28.) 
 
 (30.) 
 
 (32.) 
 
 (34.) 
 
 (351.) 
 
 (40.) 
 
 (42.) 
 
 (45) 
 
 (362.) 
 
 TSOU. 
 
 358. 
 
 
 3p± ^T^ J 
 
 O 4'^ 
 
 m 
 
 TS'OU. 
 
 359. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ¥T^ 
 
 o o o 
 
 TSU. M. c JS „.Jia O 
 
 360. ... ^ t 
 
 TSUAN. ^ O 
 
 362. «|« 
 
 / :T^^^^t^'^ 
 
 TS'U. 
 
 361. 
 
 TS'UAN. 
 
 363. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 O O 
 
 o m 
 
 m 
 
 TSUL 
 
 364. 
 
 *i 
 
 O 
 
 • • • • • • 
 
 
 
 1^1 
 
 Tsm. 
 
 n 
 
 365. 
 
 M 
 
 / 
 
 1 m 
 
 TSUN. 
 
 366. 
 
 o # ^ 
 
 ^J 
 
 TS'UN. 
 
 367. 
 
 
 # li- i- 
 
 TsuNG.-^ o m n 
 
 368. i^ 
 
 !^ 
 
 
 t?* 
 
 u/ ^(i!t 
 
 ^ 
 
 mm. "' 
 
 369. 
 
 ' -*V 
 
 • • • 
 
 o o 
 
 TSJVAN see Tsuan (362.) TS'WAN see Tsuan (363.) 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other .syllables.
 
 6 
 
 
 
 TZU 
 
 TO 
 
 WAN. 
 
 
 Peking 
 
 Syllab 
 
 ARY. 
 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ^v 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 
 3p± 
 
 ¥"F 
 
 ± 
 
 * 
 
 TZU. 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 II 
 
 g 
 
 TZU. 
 
 m 
 
 
 iHi 
 
 -r 
 
 itb 
 
 itb 
 
 370. 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 371. 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 aai 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 i^3^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 !^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 m* 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 u 
 
 see 
 
 Yii 
 
 (391.) 
 
 UAN 
 
 see 
 
 Yuan 
 
 (392.) 
 
 UEH 
 
 see 
 
 YiJEH 
 
 (393.) 
 
 UEN 
 
 see 
 
 Yuan 
 
 (392.) 
 
 UN 
 
 see 
 
 YiJN 
 
 (394) 
 
 u 
 
 see Wv 
 
 (381.; 
 
 UBH. 
 
 372. 
 
 WA. 
 
 373. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ¥-F 
 
 31 
 
 a 
 
 • • • 
 
 WAL 
 
 374. 
 
 WAN. 
 
 875. 
 
 a 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 it 
 
 &^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ki*-^ 
 
 m 
 
 * Characters to marked will also be found under other syllables. 
 
 ^l' 
 
 n/t. 
 
 7iS
 
 
 
 ^t^ 
 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 WANG ^0 
 
 WENG. 
 
 67 
 
 3F± 
 
 3FF 
 
 ± 
 
 ^ 
 
 WANG. ... 
 
 ••• 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 376. .^^ 
 
 T 
 
 BE 
 
 t: 
 
 «» 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 «•• 
 
 m 
 
 1^ 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 m 
 
 P:s 
 
 • •• 
 
 • «• 
 
 ?0 
 
 0M 
 
 WEI. 
 
 377, 
 
 t^-^ 
 
 i 
 
 
 ^^% 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 IPC 
 
 f # 
 
 i 
 
 'It 
 
 ^ 
 
 f fl 
 
 ft , 
 
 WEN. 
 
 378. 
 
 its 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 (i ^ 
 
 
 WENG. 
 
 379. 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under otlier syllables.
 
 68 
 
 WO TO YA. 
 
 Peking Syllabauy. 
 
 3p± 
 
 WO. M 
 
 380. ^ 
 
 m 
 
 ¥"F 
 
 O 
 
 ** f 
 
 4^ 
 
 P5f 
 
 wu. f 
 
 381. ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 j!^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 P.I 
 
 m 
 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 ff 
 
 inu* 
 
 
 
 'H^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 ... \ 
 
 S3i' 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 l'^ 
 
 M 
 
 }^ 
 
 <!«^ 
 
 t 
 
 YA. 
 
 882. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Y 
 
 
 tS>iS 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 IL 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 YAI. 
 
 383. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 o 
 
 YAI 
 
 TO 
 
 YEH. 
 
 3pT 
 
 o 
 
 69 
 
 O 
 
 YANG. 
 
 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 384. 
 
 ^ 
 
 # 
 
 
 m 
 
 ,# 
 
 ^i 
 
 iw 
 
 
 YAO. 
 
 385. 
 
 
 9k 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ki 
 
 c-l 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 ^1^* 
 
 
 ■*■ 
 
 y^^. 
 
 YEH. 
 
 386. 
 
 H0* 
 
 (/> ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 • Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 TO 
 
 EN ro YE 
 
 Peking Syllabartt. 
 
 YEN. 
 
 387. 
 
 3F± 
 
 ¥T 
 
 m't^ktec^ m 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 IP 
 
 
 7C 
 
 4. 
 
 us 
 
 ^1 
 
 33{*. 
 
 3pJ: 
 
 V -,: 
 
 3p-p 
 
 :# 
 
 
 
 
 n- ;■ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -1^' — 
 
 JS9. 
 
 m 
 
 ^^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 EH 
 
 
 Characters so marked uill also be found under other syllables-
 
 Peking Syllabary. YING '^^ YD. 
 
 71 
 
 YING. m 
 
 *& 
 ^ 
 
 Vvj 
 
 <P 
 
 «s 
 
 ® 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 YO. 
 
 391. 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^r 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 *W* 
 
 YU. 
 
 392. 
 
 ^# 
 
 ^1 
 
 r Z^ 
 
 4> 
 
 4BI 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 Jul* 
 
 it 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 IS' 
 3S 
 
 1^. 
 
 • Characters so marked n ill also be found under other syllables. 
 
 ^
 
 72 
 
 YliAN TO YCEH. 
 
 Peking Syllabary. 
 
 3F± 
 
 YUAN. % 
 
 393. 
 
 ¥T 
 
 7t 
 
 ? 
 
 ii 
 
 7^ 
 
 O 
 
 • • • 
 
 fV 
 
 YDEH. 
 
 894, 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 YUEN see Yuan (393.) 
 
 Characters so marked will also be found under other syllables.
 
 Peking Syllabary. YON to YDNG. 
 
 73 
 
 ybn. 
 
 395. 
 
 ¥± 
 
 ^V 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 • •• 
 
 4* 
 
 YD. 
 
 39G. 
 
 m 
 
 4>* 
 
 
 
 7^ ^ 
 
 ^U 
 
 ''H^ Iff 
 
 ffe 
 
 
 YUHG. ^ 
 
 O 
 
 4^ffl 
 
 ^ 
 
 * Characters so marked will also be found under other tjllables.
 
 74 
 
 SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF 
 
 THE SYLLABARY 
 
 
 1 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1C8 La 
 
 
 2 ai 
 
 52 chiian 
 
 
 87 'hang 
 
 
 127 ju 
 
 
 16'J lai 
 
 
 3 an 
 
 53 ch'uaT) 
 
 I 
 
 88 'hao 
 
 
 128 juan 
 
 
 170 laa 
 
 
 4 ang 
 
 54 chlieh 
 
 
 89 "hg, "h. 
 
 si 
 
 129 jui 
 
 
 171 lang 
 
 
 5 ao 
 
 55 ch'ueh 
 
 L 
 
 90 'hgn 
 
 
 130 jun 
 
 
 172 lao 
 
 
 
 56 chlin 
 
 57 ch'un 
 
 
 91 'h6ng 
 
 
 131 jung 
 
 [juan] 
 
 173 1« 
 
 
 
 
 
 92 'ho 
 
 
 jwan 
 
 
 
 6CHa 
 
 7 ch'a 
 
 58 chu 
 
 59 ch'u 
 
 
 93 'hou 
 
 
 
 
 lea 
 le'ang 
 
 [lia] 
 [hang] 
 
 Scbai 
 
 60 chua 
 
 
 94 'hu 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 k'ao 
 
 Qiao] 
 
 9 ch'ai 
 
 61 chuai 
 
 
 95 'hua 
 
 
 132 Ka 
 
 
 leek 
 
 [lieh] 
 
 10 chan 
 
 62 ch'uai 
 
 
 96 'huai 
 
 
 133 kai 
 
 
 leen 
 
 [hen] 
 
 11 ch'an 
 
 12 chang 
 
 13 ch'ang 
 
 14 chao 
 
 63 chuan 
 
 64 ch'uan 
 
 65 chuang 
 
 66 ch'uang 
 
 97 'huan 
 
 98 huang 
 
 99 'hui 
 100 'huen, 
 
 'hun 
 
 134 k'ai 
 
 135 kan 
 
 136 k'an 
 
 137 kang 
 
 
 174 lei, lei 
 
 175 leng 
 
 176 li 
 
 
 15 ch'ao 
 
 67 chui 
 
 68 ch'ui 
 
 
 101 'hung 
 
 102 'huo 
 
 
 138 k'ang 
 
 139 kao 
 
 
 177 lia 
 
 
 16 che 
 
 fjQ prmn 
 
 
 
 
 140 k'ao 
 
 
 178 hang 
 
 
 17 ch'd 
 
 18 chei 
 
 19 chen 
 
 20 ch'en 
 
 70 ch'un 
 
 71 chung 
 
 72 ch'ung 
 
 
 hwa [hua] 
 'hwai ['huai] "-"^ 
 'hwan ['huan] ^ " 
 'hwang ['huang] 141 kei 
 
 [ko] 
 [k'o] 
 
 179 Hao 
 
 180 lieh 
 
 181 hen 
 
 182 lin 
 
 
 21 cheng 
 
 chwa 
 
 [chua] 
 
 hwen 
 
 [hun] 
 
 142 k'ei 
 
 
 183 ling 
 
 
 22 ch'eng 
 
 chwai 
 
 [chuai] 
 
 hwo 
 
 [huo] 
 
 143 ken 
 
 
 184 lio 
 
 
 chwan 
 
 [chuan] 
 
 hwui 
 
 ['hui] ' 
 
 144 k'gn 
 
 
 185 Hu 
 
 
 23 chi 
 
 24 ch'i 
 
 chwang 
 
 [chuang] 
 
 1 
 
 
 145 keng 
 
 
 186 10 
 
 
 25 cilia 
 
 
 
 103 HSi 
 
 
 146 k'eng 
 
 
 187 lou 
 
 
 26 ch'ia 
 
 73 E 
 
 
 104 hsia 
 
 
 147 ko 
 
 
 loan 
 
 [luan] 
 
 27 chiang 
 
 74 gn 
 
 
 105 hsiang 
 
 
 148 k'o 
 
 
 188 lii 
 
 
 28 ch'iang 
 
 erh 
 
 [urh] 
 
 106 hsiao 
 
 
 149 kou 
 
 
 189 lueh 
 
 
 29 chiao 
 
 
 
 107 hsieh 
 
 
 150 k'ou 
 
 
 
 
 30 ch'iao 
 
 75 Fa 
 
 
 108 hsien 
 
 
 151 k-u 
 
 
 190 lun 
 
 
 31 chieh 
 
 76 fan 
 
 
 109 hsin 
 
 
 152 k'u 
 
 
 191 lu 
 
 
 32 ch'ieh 
 
 77 fang 
 
 
 110 hsing 
 
 
 153 kua 
 
 
 192 hian 
 
 
 33 chien 
 
 78fei 
 
 
 111 hsio 
 
 
 154 k'ua 
 
 
 193 lun 
 
 
 34 ch'ien 
 
 79 fen 
 
 
 112 hsiu 
 
 
 155 kuai 
 
 
 194 lung 
 
 
 35 chih 
 
 80 feug 
 
 
 113 hsiung 
 
 
 156 k'uai 
 
 
 
 
 36 ch'ih 
 
 fi 
 
 [fei] 
 
 114 hsu 
 
 
 157 kuan 
 
 
 Iwan 
 
 [luan] 
 
 37 chin 
 
 81 fo 
 
 
 115 hslian 
 
 
 158 k'uan 
 
 
 
 
 38 ch'in 
 
 82fou 
 
 
 116 hsueh 
 
 
 159 kuang 
 
 
 
 
 39 ching 
 
 83 fii 
 
 
 hsiien 
 
 [hsUan] 
 
 160 k'uang 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 40 ch'ing 
 
 
 
 117 hsun 
 
 
 161 kuei 
 
 
 195 Ma 
 
 
 41 chio 
 
 J/a 
 
 [a] 
 
 
 
 162 k'uei 
 
 
 196 mai 
 
 
 42 ch'ia 
 
 gai 
 
 [ai] 
 
 118 1, Yl 
 
 
 163 kuen, 
 
 ktm 
 
 197 man 
 
 
 43 cbiu 
 
 gan 
 
 [an] 
 
 • 
 
 
 164 k'uen, 
 
 k'un 
 
 198 mang 
 
 199 mao 
 
 
 44 ch'iu 
 
 gang 
 
 [•ing] 
 
 
 
 165 kung 
 
 
 
 45 ch'iung 
 
 gao 
 
 [ao] 
 
 119 Jan 
 
 
 166 k'ung 
 
 
 
 
 46 cho 
 
 ge 
 
 gen 
 
 [en] 
 
 120 jang 
 
 121 jao 
 
 
 167 kuo 
 
 
 me 
 200 mei 
 
 [mo] 
 
 47 ch'o 
 
 go 
 
 [o] 
 
 je 
 
 Do] 
 
 hwa 
 
 [kua] 
 
 
 
 choan [chuan] 
 
 gou 
 
 [ou] 
 
 122 jgn 
 
 
 hwai 
 
 [kuai] 
 
 me'ao 
 
 [miao] 
 
 48 chou 
 
 
 
 123 jeng 
 
 
 h»an 
 
 [kuan] 
 
 me'eh 
 
 fmieh] 
 
 49 ch'ou 
 
 
 
 124 jih 
 
 
 hwang [kuang] 
 
 me'en 
 
 [mien] 
 
 
 84 'Ha 
 
 
 125 jo 
 
 
 hwei 
 
 [kuei] 
 
 
 
 50 chu 
 
 85 'hai 
 
 
 joan 
 
 [juan] 
 
 Icwen 
 
 [kun] 
 
 201 men 
 
 
 51 ch'u 
 
 86 'ban 
 
 
 126 jou 
 
 
 kwo 
 
 [kuo] 
 
 202 meng 

 
 OF THE PEKING DIALECT (ENGLISH.) 
 
 75 
 
 203 mi 
 
 204 miao 
 
 205 mieh 
 
 206 mien 
 
 207 min 
 
 208 ming 
 
 209 miu 
 
 210 mo 
 
 211 mou 
 
 212 mu 
 
 mwan [man] 
 
 213 Na 
 
 214 uai 
 
 215 naa 
 
 216 nang 
 
 217 nao 
 
 218 nM 
 
 neang [uiang] 
 neao [niao] 
 neeh [nieh] 
 neen [nien] 
 
 219 nen 
 
 220 neng 
 
 221 ni 
 
 222 niang 
 
 223 niao 
 
 224 nieh 
 
 225 nien 
 
 226 ning 
 
 227 niu 
 
 228 no 
 
 noan 
 
 229 uli 
 
 230 nu 
 
 231 niian 
 
 232 nung 
 
 nwan 
 
 Bg ■ 
 
 m 
 
 •K 
 
 an 
 ang 
 
 00 
 
 233 O 
 
 234 OU 
 
 [nuau] 
 
 [nuan] 
 
 [a] 
 
 [ai] 
 
 [an] 
 
 [ang] 
 
 [ao] 
 
 [ej 
 [en] 
 [e, o] 
 [ou] 
 
 [pai, po] 
 
 235 Pa 
 
 236 P'a 
 
 237 pai 
 
 238 r'ai 
 
 239 pan 
 
 240 p'an 
 
 241 pang 
 
 242 p'ang 
 
 243 pao 
 
 244 p'ao 
 
 pe 
 
 245 pei 
 
 246 p'ei 
 
 247 pen 
 
 248 p'en 
 
 249 peng 
 
 250 p'eng 
 
 251 pi 
 
 252 p'i 
 
 253 piao 
 
 254 p'iao 
 
 255 pieli 
 
 256 p'ieh 
 
 257 pien 
 
 258 p'ien 
 
 259 pin 
 
 260 p'in 
 
 261 ping 
 
 262 p'ing 
 
 263 po 
 
 264 p'o 
 
 265 pu 
 
 266 p'u 
 
 'RH [m-h] 
 
 267 Sa 
 
 268 sai 
 
 269 san 
 
 270 sang 
 
 271 sao 
 
 272 se 
 
 273 seng 
 
 274 so 
 
 soan [suan] 
 
 275 sou 
 
 276 su 
 
 277 suan 
 
 278 sui 
 
 279 sun 
 
 280 sung 
 
 swan [suan] 
 
 281 SHa 
 
 282 shui 
 
 283 shan 
 
 284 shang 
 
 285 shao 
 
 286 she 
 
 287 shen 
 
 288 sheng 
 
 289 shih 
 
 sho [ shuo ] 
 
 290 shou 
 
 291 shu 
 
 292 shua 
 
 293 shuai 
 
 294 shuan 
 
 295 shuang 
 
 296 shui 
 
 297 shun 
 
 298 shuo 
 
 shwa I shua] 
 shwai [ shuai] 
 shwan [ shuan] 
 shwang [shuang] 
 shwui [sliui] 
 
 323 ting 
 
 324 t'ing 
 
 325 tiu 
 
 326 to 
 
 327 t'o 
 
 loan [tuanj 
 
 328 tou 
 
 329 t'ou 
 
 330 tu 
 
 331 t'u 
 
 332 tuan 
 
 333 t'uan 
 
 334 tui 
 
 335 t'ui 
 
 336 tun 
 
 337 t'un 
 
 338 tung 
 
 339 t'ung 
 
 twan [tuan] 
 
 299 SZu 
 
 300 Ta 
 
 301 t'a 
 
 302 tai 
 
 303 t'ai 
 
 304 tan 
 
 305 fan 
 
 306 tang 
 
 307 fang 
 
 308 tao 
 
 309 t'ao 
 
 310 te 
 
 311 t<e 
 
 312 tei 
 
 313 teng 
 
 314 t<eng 
 
 315 ti 
 
 316 t'i 
 
 317 tiao 
 
 318 t'iao 
 
 319 tieh 
 
 320 t'ieh 
 
 321 tien 
 
 322 t'ien 
 
 340 TSa 
 
 341 ts'a 
 
 342 tsai 
 
 343 ts'ai 
 
 344 tsan 
 
 345 ts'an 
 
 346 tsang 
 
 347 ts'aug 
 
 348 tsao 
 
 349 ts<ao 
 
 350 tse 
 
 351 ts'e 
 
 352 tsei 
 
 353 tsen 
 
 354 tseng 
 
 355 ts'eng 
 
 tsi 
 
 tsiao 
 
 tsiang 
 
 tsieh 
 
 tsien, 
 
 tsing 
 
 tsio 
 
 tsiu 
 
 356 tso 
 
 357 ts'o 
 
 [chi] 
 
 [chiao] 
 
 [chiang] 
 
 [chieh] 
 
 [chien] 
 
 [ching] 
 
 [chio] 
 
 [chiu] 
 
 tsoan [tsuan] 
 
 358 tsou 
 
 359 ts'ou 
 
 3C0 tsu 
 
 361 ts'u 
 
 362 tsuan 
 
 363 ts'uan 
 
 364 tsui 
 
 365 ts'ui 
 
 366 tsun 
 
 367 ts<un 
 
 368 tsung 
 
 369 ts'ung 
 
 tswan [tsuan] 
 
 370 TZu 
 
 371 tz'u 
 
 U [yu] 
 
 iian [yiiau] 
 
 iieh [yiieh] 
 
 ikn [yiiau] 
 
 iin [yiiu] 
 
 U [wu] 
 
 372 URH 
 
 373 Wa 
 
 374 wai 
 
 375 wan 
 
 376 wang 
 
 377 wei 
 
 378 wen 
 
 379 wgng 
 
 380 wo 
 
 381 wu 
 
 382 Ya 
 
 383 yai 
 
 yan [yen] 
 
 384 yang 
 
 385 yao 
 
 386 yeh 
 
 387 yen 
 
 388 yi, i. 
 
 389 yin 
 390ying 
 391 yo 
 892 yu 
 
 393 yuan 
 
 394 yiieh 
 
 yiien [yiian] 
 
 395 yiin 
 
 396 yu 
 
 397 yung
 
 76 
 
 SYNOPTICAL TABLE OF THE SYLLABARY 
 
 Finals 
 
 Initials 
 CIl- 
 
 cri< 
 
 F- 
 
 'H- 
 
 HS- 
 
 J- 
 
 K- 
 
 K'- 
 L- 
 
 M- 
 
 N- 
 
 ng- 
 
 P- 
 
 P'- 
 
 'RH- 
 
 S- 
 
 SH- 
 
 SZ- 
 
 T- 
 
 T'- 
 
 TS- 
 
 TS'- 
 
 TZ- 
 
 TZ'- 
 
 W- 
 
 Y- 
 
 a ai an ang ao <5h ii &n e ei gn eng erh i ia iaiig iao ieh ien ili in ing 
 
 
 wt 
 
 Di ^ # il Wi ■ 
 
 u^mmW' ■ 
 
 B M 0® It "§ • 
 ^^HSBi ■ 
 t^ ••• ^HM 
 
 te M m. ^ m 
 
 see erh, urh 
 
 m +a ?f t{^ t>t 
 
 1/Ti (k 
 
 
 
 313. 
 
 flE 
 
 m 
 
 ft 
 
 1^ - m •• 5a ^ 
 
 ^ »'^ __ 
 
 ■ 5M ^ 
 
 9 
 
 ••■^ •••^il01T^ij5i -^ir^? 
 
 m - m 
 
 ^B • ^ 
 
 Pl ^ - ^ 
 
 ^ ••• 
 
 ^ ft 
 
 IS- - m % 
 
 .^1:^j^ 'fe 
 
 ^^11^ 
 
 "ttti" 
 7T^ 
 
 
 
 # m - 
 
 
 ^^ M ^ ^ 
 
 ^ «I 
 
 The method of connecting the initial with the final in the above table is too simple to require much explanation. Each vertical column 
 gives the sounds having like terjninations, in the alphabetic order of their initials ; thus under - aifi, the 4th final , we read downwards -anq, chang, 
 ch-ang./ang, •hang.jamj.a.ni soon to yaiuj at the foot. The horizontal line ai;ain gives the sounds with a common initial, in alphahe"tlc order 
 of their finals from left to right. Thus from 'H to the right we read -ha, •hat. <te.. on to 'huo. The Chinese characters in the top horizontal 
 line represent independent sounds, all, with the exception of erh or urh, vowel or dipthongal. Pronunciation is discussed at greater length at 
 the end of the English of Part IIL It wUl he sufficient here to give a few hints for the general guidance of the reader of the Table. 
 
 First of the Vowel .Sounds :— the a in a, ai, an, ang, ac, is as in Italian ; our a in calm, father. 
 
 The i in <h, H, Ai, is also the Italian vowel ; in the first two the vowel sound as in our word whey ; in the last as in when. 
 
 The i is the English e in all words in which it is followed by r and another consonant, not r ; as in herb, mercy, pert ; not as in merry. 
 
 The I, by itself, is the Italian vowel, or our ee. In the compound sounds ia, iang,iao, iA,iern,io, ia, iurw it more resembles our a than «; 
 read chia as chya rather than ckeea. In ih, in, ing, the i is as in hit, kit. 
 
 The is a sound between the o in lo, toe, and aw in law, paw ; vet? often leaning to the latter. 
 
 The ou is as in our toted, mount, or ow in cow, powder. 
 
 The a, when alone, and in uan, iieh, is the French u in une, Htcet ; in U/i it is not so prolonged a sound ; lun is not so long ai the French 
 
 The u alone is the German u or our oo ; thus tu is pronounced loo. Before other vowels, viz., as in ua, uai, uan, uang, uei, uen, uo, it is 
 generally our w ; but when followed by a. it is in certain tones more like o ; thus tuan may be limn in one case and Uan in another. In uiuj, 
 the vowel sound inclines in most cases towards ung ; something between the terminations of the French iang and longue. The lame remark 
 applies to the powerofuin iung. 
 
 In urh, or erh, the vowel sound is as in murrain, scurry. See also 'rh below. 
 
 The a must be heard to be pronounced. It is something like the vowel sound in ftrst, murk, tut much more guttural. It ia only OMd 
 after n, tt, u:
 
 OF TIIK PKKING DIALECT (CHINESE). 
 
 77 
 
 io in iuiig o ou ii iian Lich lin u ua u:ii uan uang wA "'^" ul uii ung uo urii u 
 
 mm 3i- 5i ••• 
 
 ii #t ... ^ 'I'lii @ ^- Ii ^ ± =^Ui ¥^ ;iE mm^ 
 
 i\} mmM^i^mn # ••• t^ m h'^< pk # yt 
 
 ••• # *{^ ^ -.. - 
 
 ^^ii mm mm. ■■■ ... - ■• ••• 
 
 ... m f'j ■•• 
 ... ^ p •• 
 
 3|J .. M1#^ 
 
 ■m 
 
 ... ^ ... m ± 
 
 '■ vf'J 
 
 
 l^M 
 
 ••■ A - ••• 1^ 
 
 ■•■ # iJl 31 '1^ ^ iE U U >^ 
 
 ?fO ... 
 
 
 IL 
 
 ^^1 
 
 ... ^ 
 
 ikmn 
 
 ± 
 
 m. 
 
 
 ... m 
 mm 
 
 7K ill ■ i 
 
 :^ ^fE m • 
 
 ^ t£ ii •■■ 
 Pt :§ na 
 
 •■ H! 
 
 5a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Upon the unaspirated initials ch.f, k, I, m, n, p. s, sh, I, w, y, there is little to remark. They run a3 in English c/iair, /an, tin, .vAam, &c. ; 
 f/i is often dj : chill as if diih. In the case of the axpirate'l initials, c/i', k' p\ t', a strong bveatliing intervenes between them and the vowel or 
 diphthong succeediir::. There is no reduplication of the latter, nor is the result of the pause a distinguishable short vowel ; ck'a, k'an, I'o, 
 are not pronounced chaha, kalian, toko, but as if the first vowel in the latter sounds were dropped in the process of uttering the syllable ; cliha, 
 khan, t'ko ; the last not as our though. 
 
 The 'h is so marked to indicate a strong breathing which accompanies it ; the gh in the Scotch lough, or ch in the German sprache. 
 
 The As isa very delicate aspirate prece J ing, not following, the sibilant sound. In ftif/i the sound is nearly .«iii. never sAm. With diphthongs 
 the difference is less distinct, hsien sounding not very unlike ahien. 
 
 The j is the French^' in jaune, Jean ; the Englisli s in brasier, fusion, or the z in glaeicr. 
 
 The )!(/ has partly a nasal and partly a guttural influence on the vowels it precedes. Tlie italicised letters in the following French words, 
 mo/iyalant. mail .jiiillanl. «ivo some idei of tho souodsHM, nqai. Pronounced singly, those retain comparatively little trace of the consonant; 
 when following other syllables, it is much more distinct. Thus ai, to love, t'a '^ai, ho loves. 
 
 The 'rh has been spoken of above as rrh, or urh. These are the sounds of the syllable taken singly. When tacked to other .syllables, 
 especially those ending in a consonant, its own vowel sound in frequently merged in theirs. When the final is a consonant it is elided, the 
 preceding word and urh being pronounced almost as one syllable, thus pien-urh becomes pie-rh, ming-vrh becomes mi'-rh, the termination 
 ng slightly nasalising the vowel preceding it. 
 
 The (.sis as in je^s'am, catsup; the aspirated (.('following the rule of c/t', k', p',t'; ts'o not (soAo, but ts'ho, care being taken not to spell the 
 s with h as in sAame. 
 
 In sz, tz, Iz', tho z is retained more to attract attention lo the peculiarity of the vowel sound n with which alone they are used, than 
 because of any difference between them and s, Is, ts'. The Izu unaspirated, foilowii-g other words, is often nearly rha : as in pi-n-lzti, fa-tzc 
 which read pien-dsn, /a-i/sfi.
 
 APPENDIX L 
 
 TO THE 
 
 PEKING SYLLABARY. 
 
 The following list includes all the characters marked in the foregoing Syllabary 
 with an asterisk, in token of their syllabic varieties of sound, together with some to 
 which it was omitted to affix it ; also, whatever characters under one syllabic sound 
 are pronounced with different tones. It will be therein seen that a number of cha- 
 racters, perhaps one twentieth of those representing the spoken language of Peking, 
 are liable to change of pronunciation, syllabically, without variation of tone ; others to 
 the same change, with variation of tone ; and many to change both of tone and 
 syllable ; further, that very few indeed of the syllables, some four hundred in number, 
 under which the sounds of the Peking Dialect are classed, are exempt from both 
 variation of tone and interchange of sound. 
 
 Some sentences illustrative of these peculiarities will be given in Part IV. Upon 
 the Tones themselves see Sections II. and III. of Part III. 
 
 The characters in the list below are in general placed each one opposite the syllable 
 which comes first in alphabetic order of those assigned to it. The character, for 
 instance, which is sounded hsiao, hsio, hsileh, will be found under hsiao. There are 
 a few exceptions to this rule, as for example the first character marked cAe; where the 
 sound cliai, to which in strict order of alphabetic precedence it ought to be attached, 
 is by comparison so rare as to make the former a preferable index. 
 
 
 $k 
 
 
 m 
 
 IK 
 
 a \ a 2, a ^ ; e ^ ; o ^ ; 
 a ^ ; ang ' ; "^^ang '. 
 a 2 ; "sa -' ; ya K 
 ai S ai ^ ; or "Sai, 
 an ', an * ; or "^an. 
 ang ', ang - ; or "Sang. 
 ao ', ao ^ ; or "Sao. 
 
 cha ', cha ^. 
 eh a ^ ; ta ^. 
 cha ^, cha *. 
 ch'a 1 ; ch'ai \ 
 ch'a 3, ch'a *. 
 chai ^, chai ^ ; ts'e ■*. 
 chai \ chai ^. 
 chai ^ ; tse ^. 
 chai 2 ; tse ^. 
 chai - ; tse -. 
 chai ^ ; tse *. 
 
 wo 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 ch'ai 3 ; ts'e •*. 
 
 ch'ai ^ ; che - ; she ''. 
 
 chan, ^ chare '. 
 
 chan ^ ; nien ^. 
 
 chan * ; ch'an *. 
 
 chang 2 ; ch'ang -. 
 
 chao ^ ; ch'ao -. 
 
 chao ^ ; che ^ ; cho '^. 
 
 chao ^ ; che ^ ; cho ^. 
 
 chao ^ ; che ^ ; cho ^. 
 
 chao ^ ; chua ^. 
 
 chao ^ ; chua ' . 
 
 ch'ao \ ch'ao ^ 
 
 che ^ ; chai ^ ; chei * ; tse ^ ; tsen 
 
 [tseng *. 
 ch'e 1 ; chii ^ 
 
 ch'en * ; shen *. 
 
 ch'en ^ ; ch'eng K 
 
 ch'en ^; nien ^ 
 
 ch'en ' ; a Cantonese character. 
 
 ch'en ', ch'en ^.
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 79 
 
 m 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 m 
 
 tec 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 m 
 
 cheng ^, cheng 3, cheng ^. 
 
 cheng 1, cheng *. 
 
 cheng ■* ; shen *. 
 
 ch'eng ^ ; sh'eng "*. 
 
 chi ^, chi •* ; kei ■*. 
 
 chi '"', chi \ 
 
 ch'i 1 ; ch'ii *. 
 
 ch'i 2, ch'i 3. 
 
 chia ^ ; ch'ia '. 
 
 chia S chia ^ ; hsieh ^. 
 
 chia ', chia *. 
 
 chia ^, chia ^. 
 
 chia ^ ; ku ^. 
 
 chia ^, chia '*. 
 
 ch'ia ^ ch'ia *. 
 
 chiang ^, chiang * ; kang '. 
 
 chiang ^, chiang '^. 
 
 chiang ^ ; hsiang 2. 
 
 chiang ^ ; kang "*. 
 
 ch'iang ^, ch'iang ^. 
 
 chiao \ chiao *. 
 
 chiao ^ ; chio -. 
 
 chiao '^, chiao * ; chio ^. 
 
 chiao ', chiao ^ ; chio ^ 
 
 chiao ^, chiao * ; chio 2. 
 
 chiao ^; chio 2. 
 
 ch'iao ^ ; ch'io ^. 
 
 ch'iao ', ch'iao * ; ch'io ^. 
 
 ch'iao ^ ; k'ao K 
 
 chieh 1, chieh '^ ; ko ^. 
 
 chieh ', chieh *. 
 
 chieh ^, chieh 2. 
 
 chieh ^; kai ^. 
 
 chieh "^, chieh ^. 
 
 chieh ^, chieh *. 
 
 ch'ieh S ch'ieh ^. 
 
 ch'ieh ' ; ch,ieh ■*. 
 
 chien ^, chien *. 
 
 chien ', chien \ 
 
 chien * ; chin *. 
 
 # 
 
 fi 
 K 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ;ii 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch'ien 2, ch'ien ^. 
 
 ch'ien '-^ ; kan ^ 
 
 chih ' ; shih 2. 
 
 chih ', chih 2. 
 
 chih ', chih ^. 
 
 chih 2, chih ^. 
 
 ch'ih 1, ch'ih 1. 
 
 ch'ih 1, ch'ih \ 
 
 ch'ih 1, ch'ih ^. 
 
 chin ' ; ching '. 
 
 ch'in 1 ; ch'ing ■*. 
 
 ching \ ching *. 
 
 ching ' ; keng ^ 
 
 ching ' ; keng ', keng ■*. 
 
 ch'ing ', ch'ing ^ 
 
 ch'io 1, ch'io * ; ch'iieh *. 
 
 chii ', chii *. 
 
 chii 1, chii 2. 
 
 chii ^, chii *. 
 
 ch'ii 3, ch'ii *. 
 
 ch'ii 4 ; k'o 4. 
 
 chiian 3, chiian *. 
 
 ch'iian \ ch'iian *. 
 
 chu ', chu 2. 
 
 chu 1, chu 2, chu 3. 
 
 ch'u ^ ch'u 4, 
 
 chuai \ chuai ^^ ; hsieh *, hsieh *. 
 
 chuai 3 ; chuan ^. 
 
 cla'uai ^ ch'uai 3. 
 
 chuan ''; ch'uan 2. 
 
 ch'uan \ ch'uan ^. 
 
 ch'un ^, ch'un ^. 
 
 chung \ chung ^ ; ch'ung K 
 
 chung ' ; tsung ^. 
 
 chung 3, chung ^ ; tsung '. 
 
 chung * ; ch'ung 2. 
 
 e, see o.
 
 80 
 
 PEKING SYLLABARY. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 vc 
 
 
 fa ', fa \ fa ■', fa \ 
 la ', lii •'. 
 I'an ', fan '^. 
 fan '^, fan ''. 
 fen ', fen 'K 
 feng ''^, feng ''. 
 f(, I, fo 2 ; f.i 2. 
 f(. " ; fu ". 
 fou - ; fu ', fu •'. 
 
 'ha ■, ha ■^ ha ". 
 
 'ha " ; hsia '. 
 
 'hai -' ; 'han ^ ; huan ^. 
 
 'hai ■* ; 'ho '■^ ; 'huo ' ; huo ^. 
 
 'hang 2 ; hsing '■', hsing ''. 
 
 'hang '' ; hsiang ^. 
 
 'hang '' ; hsiang ^. 
 
 'hao \ 'hao ■». 
 
 'hao ■\ 'hao *. 
 
 'hei S 'hei ^; or 'he. 
 
 'hen 2, 'hen ^ 
 
 'ho 2 ; 'hu 2. 
 
 ho '^ ; hsia "•. 
 
 'hou "^ 'hou "i. 
 
 'hu ' ; 'huo - ; 'huo \ 
 
 'hua ', 'hua ■*. 
 
 'hua 3, 'hua ^ 
 
 'huai '-' ; 'huo -. 
 
 'huang ', huang ^. 
 
 'hui ^, 'hui ^. 
 
 'hui ^ ; lei ^. 
 
 'hun '^ 'hun ■'; or 'huen. 
 
 hsia ' ; sha ■*. 
 hsiang ^, hsiang *. 
 hsiao '^ ; hsio ^ ; hsiieh ■'. 
 hsien - ; hsiian 'K 
 hsicn ' ; hsiian ''. 
 hsien ' ; hsiian ''. 
 hsing ', hsing ^ 
 
 
 
 
 f5 
 
 A 
 It 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^6) 
 
 
 hsing '^ ; sheng ^. 
 hsiu ^; hsii '. 
 hsU 2 ; su ', su '-*. 
 hsiian ', lisiian ■'. 
 hsiian •', hsiian ''. 
 hsiieh '■*, hsiieh ■^. 
 hsiieh *, hsiieh ^. 
 
 i ', i -', i •' ; or yi. 
 i •'' ; wci "'. 
 
 Jang ^ jang \ 
 jao ■'', jao ■*. 
 jao ■', jao ^. 
 jao ' ; ni ', niao *. 
 jen 2, j^n •'. 
 
 ; ts'ao ^. 
 yao ■*. 
 
 , jou ■', jou ■■'. 
 ,ju2. 
 
 jou ' 
 
 jun ^ ; yiin •'. 
 jung '", yimg 2. 
 
 ka ', ka \ ka ^ ka ■». 
 k'an ', k'an *. 
 'ao ^, k'ao ^. 
 k'ei ' ; k'o \ k'o ^ 
 o 
 
 k' 
 
 o •', k'ao ^. 
 
 i ' ; k'o \ k'o •\ k'o '^ ; or k'e. 
 ko ', ko -'. 
 ko 2, ko ^ 
 k'o S k'o 2, k'o ^ 
 kou 2, kou "'. 
 k'ou ' ; ou '. 
 k'ou 3, k'ou 1 
 ku ', ku 3. 
 ku S ku •'. 
 
 ', ku 2, ku ^ 
 
 ' ; kna ', kua ■''. 
 
 ku 
 ku 
 k'ua 
 
 k'ua ■'. 
 
 , 1-^
 
 APPENDIX T. 
 
 81 
 
 
 IL 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 
 m 
 
 ^> 
 
 # 
 
 PK 
 
 
 'PC 
 
 Biia 
 
 
 kuiiii ', kuan ''. 
 kuiig ', kung ''. 
 k'ung ', k'uiig ^. 
 
 .a ', la \ 
 la '; lao -* ; In '. 
 Ian ■* ; luan ■*. 
 iang ', lang '. 
 
 ao ', lao '^. 
 lao ■-', lao ^. 
 
 ao ^ ; liao '-. 
 
 ; lo^ 
 le^; lo*. 
 le^; 
 
 lei 2, 
 
 , lei '. 
 
 2, lei •■, lei '. 
 
 li ', li •'. 
 
 liang ', liang '■^, liang *. 
 
 liang ', liang ''. 
 
 liao -', liao '*. 
 
 liao "• ; lio ^ ; liieli '^ 
 
 lieh ', lieli -, lieh '. 
 
 lien ^, lien "'. 
 
 lien •', lien ^. 
 
 iin -, lin '* ; liin -'. 
 
 ill ', liu -'. 
 1 
 
 ', liu •*. 
 ; lii^ lu^ 
 
 [ill 
 ill 
 [ill ' 
 iu ' 
 
 lo ■* ; yao * ; 
 
 ; 111 \ 
 hi 3. 
 
 ; yo '. 
 
 lou ' 
 
 lou 2. 
 lou 3. 
 
 lou ', 1( 
 
 lou ^ ; lu '', 
 
 lu • ; lu \ 
 
 liin ', liin 
 
 liin -, liin 
 
 liin -, liin '■'; lun -', lun l 
 
 lu •-, lu '. 
 
 ung -, lung 2. 
 
 lung*; n^ng*; nimg *. 
 
 '-;lun2. 
 
 *; lun 2, lun*. 
 
 lung * ; nen« 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 i^ 
 
 n 
 
 m 
 
 
 g5 
 
 nffl' 
 
 
 ma ' ; mo ' ; mou '. 
 ma ' ; mo *. 
 ma ', ma ■'; mo '. 
 ma ", ma '■', ma '. 
 mai '^ ; man -. 
 mai ', mai '. 
 mai ' ; mo ' . 
 mang - ; wang '. 
 mao ', mao -'. 
 mei '-; mo -'; mu -'. 
 mei ' ; mo '. 
 men ', m^n ". 
 mi ', mi ". 
 mieh - ; ming -. 
 mo -, mo *. 
 mou ^ ; mu ^. 
 
 na ^, na ^, na ' ; nai ^, nai * ; nei * ; 
 [nen ^, n6n * ; n6ng ^ ncng *. 
 
 nan- IT Q n * 
 
 nan -, nan 
 
 nan ^ ; nang ^ ; nuan ''. 
 nan ^ ; nang ^ ; nuan "\ 
 nao ', nao -. 
 neng ', neng '^. 
 neng ^ ; nung ' . 
 neng '^ ; nung '. 
 
 nen, 
 ni ' 
 ni 1 
 
 \g ; ning ^. 
 ; niao *. 
 , ni -. 
 
 o * ; ngo * ; vvu * 
 
 o -, o ■' ; or c. 
 
 ou 
 
 ou ', ou -. 
 
 ou •'', ou *. 
 oil '-, ou ■'. 
 
 pa ', pa •\ pa ■•. 
 pa '; po ^; pu '. 
 
 pa '. pa
 
 82 
 
 PEKING SYLLABARY. 
 
 
 m 
 
 pai ' ; ])'i ''. 
 
 Wfi 
 
 se ', se ^. 
 
 
 e 
 
 pai '; po '. 
 
 a 
 
 se "* ; shai '^ ; she ^. 
 
 
 m 
 
 pai -, pai '. 
 
 ^ 
 
 se ' ; she '. 
 
 
 & 
 
 pai ■' ; po -. 
 
 ^ 
 
 se •' ; she '. 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 pai •'; ))(! '. 
 
 iTr 
 
 so •' ; shuo ■*. 
 
 
 w 
 
 p'aii '; i)'ing "'. 
 
 #j 
 
 su ' ; shu '. 
 
 
 m 
 
 pao '; p'ao '. 
 
 »1 
 
 su ^ ; shu '. 
 
 
 M 
 
 pao -'; pu '. 
 
 ^ 
 
 sui ' ; shui '. 
 
 
 m 
 
 pao 1 ; p'ao '-. 
 
 ^ 
 
 sui - ; ts'ui '\ 
 
 
 m 
 
 p'ao ', p'ao ^. 
 
 pro 
 
 sung ', sung '. 
 
 
 # 
 
 pci ', pci ^. 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 m 
 
 pei '; p'i '. 
 
 HlpJ 
 
 shang -, shang -^ 
 
 
 'M 
 
 pei *; pi '. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 shao ^, shao ^. 
 
 
 w 
 
 poi •'; po '. 
 
 Ht 
 
 she ^ ; shih -. 
 
 
 m 
 
 p'ei ', p'oi '. 
 
 ^ 
 
 shen ', shen -. 
 
 
 
 pen ', pen '. 
 p'en ', p'en '. 
 
 Jiil 
 
 shen -', shen '. 
 shih S shih •-'. 
 
 
 >i^^ 
 
 pi -, pi \ 
 
 ffi 
 
 shih -, shih \ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 p'i ', p'i 3. 
 
 ^ 
 
 shih ^ ; szu *. 
 
 
 |7C 
 
 p'i -, p'i ^. 
 p'iao ', p'iao ". 
 
 ft 
 
 shih ', shih ^. 
 shou '-^ ; shu '\ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 pieh ', pieh '. 
 
 Wi 
 
 shu ■% shu '. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 p'ieh I, p'ieh ■'; riho itvvVep'ieh ■% |^ 
 
 m 
 
 shuai S shuai ^. 
 
 
 11 
 
 pien *; p'ien '-. 
 pin ^; p'in '. 
 
 m 
 
 shuang ', shuang ^. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 po '^ po *. 
 p'o 1, p'o -. 
 
 w 
 
 szu ' ; tz'ii ^. 
 
 
 ?^ 
 
 p'o % p'o ■*. 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 pu ', pu -, pu \ 
 
 i: 
 ^ 
 
 ta ', ta -l 
 t'ai '; t'ui '. 
 t'ai '; t'ui '. 
 tan \ tan ^. 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 sa ', j^a ''. 
 
 5f 
 
 tan 1 ; fan '. 
 
 
 — 
 
 sa '; sail '. 
 
 ^« 
 
 fan 1, fan 'K 
 
 
 m 
 
 sa ■'; sha ^, sha '. 
 
 It 
 
 tang ', tang ^. 
 
 
 i 
 
 sai \ sai '. 
 
 t: 
 
 fang \ fang '^. 
 
 
 m 
 
 san ^, san ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 fang '\ fang ^. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 sant)' ', s;inn' '• 
 
 ^ 
 
 tao 1 ; to 3. 
 
 
 m 
 
 sao ', sao '. 
 
 #J 
 
 tao -', tao ^, tao K 
 
 
 m 
 
 sao '■', sao '. 
 
 ^ 
 
 tao -, tao •''. 

 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 83 
 
 n 
 
 te 2 ; tei 3. 
 
 n 
 
 tSO S tSO 2, tSO ■'. 
 
 M 
 
 t'6ng S t'6ng 2. 
 
 m 
 
 tso ' ; tsou *. 
 
 m 
 
 ti 2, ti 3. 
 
 li 
 
 ts'o 1, ts'o 2. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ti 1; t'i2. 
 
 M 
 
 tsuan ', tsuan ^. 
 
 # 
 
 t'i 2, t'i •'. 
 
 m 
 
 ts'ui ', ts'ui '. 
 
 m 
 
 tiao ' ; t'iao 2. 
 
 m 
 
 tsung \ tsung '. 
 
 n 
 
 t'iao ', t'iao ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ts'ung ', ts'ung 2. 
 
 iji 
 
 tieh ' ; tsai ^ 
 
 
 
 Et 
 ^ 
 
 tieh "-', tieh ^. 
 t'ieh S t'ieh *. 
 t'ieh 3, t'ieh ". 
 
 11:1: 
 
 tzu 1, tzu 3. 
 tz'u 3, tz'u \ 
 
 & 
 
 tien ^ ; t'ien 2. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ting ', ting *. 
 
 ^ 
 
 urh ', urh 2; or erh. 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'ing \ ting *. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 t'ing 3, ting K 
 
 m 
 
 wa 2, wan '. 
 
 ® 
 
 tin 3, tiu \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 wai ', wai 3. 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 1, to 2. 
 
 # 
 
 wang 3, wang *. 
 
 ig 
 
 to 2 ; tu K 
 
 # 
 
 wei ', wei ^. 
 
 m 
 
 t'o ', t'o 3 ; t'li 1. 
 
 ^ 
 
 wei 2, wei *. 
 
 ^ 
 
 t'o 3 ; t'u \ 
 
 i^ 
 
 wen '; wu '. 
 
 u 
 
 tOU 2 ; tu K 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 toil 3; t'ou K 
 
 W 
 
 ya 1, ya 3. 
 
 2:^. 
 
 t'ou ^ t'ou 2. 
 
 m 
 
 ya-; yai2. 
 
 n± 
 
 tu 3, tu ■'. 
 
 m 
 
 yao 4; yo '. 
 
 '^ 
 
 t'u ', t'u 2. 
 
 M 
 
 yao '' ; yo *. 
 
 rtt 
 
 t'u 3, t'u *. 
 
 wm 
 
 yao ''; yo ^. 
 
 i# 
 
 tui ' ; tsui K 
 
 m 
 
 yeh ^, yeh 2. 
 
 ti 
 
 t'ung ', tung 3. 
 
 m 
 
 yeh '; yen '. 
 
 
 
 "w 
 
 yen 2; nien 2; yiian 2. 
 
 m 
 
 tsa ^ ; tsang K 
 
 B 
 
 ying 1, ying \ 
 
 
 tsa 2 ; tsan 2 ; tsang 2 ; 
 
 ^ 
 
 yu \ yii 2. 
 
 m 
 
 tsa 3 ; tsan 2 ; tsang 2. 
 
 m 
 
 yii 1, yii 2. 
 
 f? 
 
 tsai 3 ; tzu 3. 
 
 i^ 
 
 yii \ yU 3. 
 
 1 
 
 tsai 3 ; tsai 1 
 
 mi. 
 
 yii 4; i*. 
 
 ^ 
 
 tsang ^ ; ts'ang 2. 
 
 pa 
 
 yiieh \ yiich 2. 
 
 m 
 
 tsang \ tsang ^. 
 
 
 
 yiieh ', yiieh ^. 
 
 w\ 
 
 tse2; tzu '. 
 
 ^ 
 
 yiin S yiin '. 
 
 j&i 
 
 tsen 3 ; tseng 3. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 tseng 1 ; ts'eng 2. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 ts'eng ', tseng i. 
 

 
 APJM<^x\J)lX 11. 
 
 Ai\ INDliX 8HEET OK THE'Wr FANG YlJAxN YL\. 
 
 J 
 
 II 
 
 < 
 
 ^K 
 
 a c - o ._ 
 
 - c: ■= t: ~ c <v c: ra 
 
 (N 
 
 ^ 
 
 fl^ 
 
 1-H 
 
 Suijd 
 
 » 
 
 
 ■tit 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •• = ■■■■ .- rS 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 <» 
 
 OUi|(l 
 
 ® 
 
 __S 
 
 .2 « = o 
 
 
 
 •■■•■• -r ^ 
 
 '3 • 
 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 noi 
 
 'k 
 
 
 .Si 3 "o 
 = £ £ 
 
 
 
 i £ 
 
 =: : ': 
 
 ess 
 
 
 fe 
 
 '^ 
 
 "iiiij 
 
 M 
 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 «i: 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 !!- JO 
 
 UOl r^ ^ - n 
 
 H «0 tlq-) ^ 
 
 ^J 4^ 4-> 
 
 t?; j> oBiu ^ 
 
 1-5 CO III] 
 
 J. _ c 
 
 
 O) 
 
 «i-> 
 
 q'"P ^ i -g s -3 
 
 « t> « 
 
 g O2nn,,^o^ I 
 
 o cj c; c s^ 
 
 g ;:; 'ms Kl g 
 
 I ill I I l|| 
 
 :2 
 
 <N 
 
 'UT 32 
 
 ^ cj := 
 
 H S W9IS? ^ J I 
 
 S jS 
 
 
 "!.isj|f I 
 
 N j2 „,.|^ 
 
 
 Jl ^ » 39 
 
 '='? uiiA Jjyl 
 
 "'1 ^ 
 
 -^ _« ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 -i; ^ ^ 
 
 M 2 o^i'ifl 
 
 -M J.! ^ ^ -a 
 
 OS 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 (M 
 
 ^ ^ '^ It 5 
 
 •?s 
 
 ■E^'?#"OF TftE PEKKVG SYLLABARY.
 
 I
 
 /2.? 
 
 <H^ 
 
 /^/ 
 
 / -
 
 -m
 
 D 000 014 022 8
 
 
 :jmj-W^^' 
 
 
 
 v^v:^«v_^^w«} I 
 
 J^fe^ 
 
 ^W 
 
 ''■"f^r^m^^^^ 
 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 ::=%;:':'•-: 
 
 itf 
 
 >. ,f 
 
 wy^^^, 
 
 ■s«'{'iVv,. ,.VV~- 
 
 »e*^S. 
 
 vv.,-.c'5jr^"^'^^^ 
 
 ■ y " " ' ^ !' ~ - ^ i s ; w ■^.*^ 
 
 ;ii^ii,v;«i\i^yX^jS«..: *. 
 
 
 
 ?w*wr*k^^*. 
 
 ^^^^r' 
 
 ^^-■*^-€fflSjg?'s»-,,,, 
 
 
 .iii 
 
 ^M^e 
 
 i:^;fe.. 
 
 »fe6fi&«' 
 
 •!^-!i-' 
 
 rV^^.'Vlfe':'. it;.*'' 
 
 
 f?fc 
 
 ^yy^ 
 
 =^wV^yt^^^